Ford - Escape 2wd - Workshop Manual - 2004 - 2004

Factory Workshop Manual Make Ford Model Escape 2wd Engine and year V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004) Please navigate through the PDF using the options provided by OnlyManuals.com on the sidebar. This manual was submitted by Anonymous Date 1st January 2018 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0010 - P0014, ( P0011 P0012 P0013 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0010 P0010 - P0014: Testing and Inspection P0010 For diagnosis of code P0010 refer to chart Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0010 - P0014, ( P0011 P0012 P0013 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0010 > Page 9 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0010 - P0014, ( P0011 P0012 P0013 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0010 > Page 10 P0010 - P0014: Testing and Inspection P0011 For diagnosis of code P0011 refer to chart Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0010 - P0014, ( P0011 P0012 P0013 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0010 > Page 11 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0010 - P0014, ( P0011 P0012 P0013 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0010 > Page 12 P0010 - P0014: Testing and Inspection P0012 For diagnosis of code P0012 refer to chart Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0010 - P0014, ( P0011 P0012 P0013 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0010 > Page 13 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0010 - P0014, ( P0011 P0012 P0013 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0010 > Page 14 P0010 - P0014: Testing and Inspection P0013 For diagnosis of code P0013 refer to chart Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0010 - P0014, ( P0011 P0012 P0013 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0010 > Page 15 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0020 - P0024, ( P0021 P0022 P0023 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0020 P0020 - P0024: Testing and Inspection P0020 For diagnosis of code P0020 refer to chart Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0020 - P0024, ( P0021 P0022 P0023 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0020 > Page 20 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0020 - P0024, ( P0021 P0022 P0023 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0020 > Page 21 P0020 - P0024: Testing and Inspection P0021 For diagnosis of code P0021 refer to chart Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0020 - P0024, ( P0021 P0022 P0023 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0020 > Page 22 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0020 - P0024, ( P0021 P0022 P0023 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0020 > Page 23 P0020 - P0024: Testing and Inspection P0022 For diagnosis of code P0022 refer to chart Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0020 - P0024, ( P0021 P0022 P0023 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0020 > Page 24 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0040 - P0044, ( P0041 P0042 P0043 0040 0041 0042 0043 0044 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0040 P0040 - P0044: Testing and Inspection P0040 For diagnosis of code P0040 refer to chart Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0040 - P0044, ( P0041 P0042 P0043 0040 0041 0042 0043 0044 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0040 > Page 29 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0040 - P0044, ( P0041 P0042 P0043 0040 0041 0042 0043 0044 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0040 > Page 30 P0040 - P0044: Testing and Inspection P0041 For diagnosis of code P0041 refer to chart Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0040 - P0044, ( P0041 P0042 P0043 0040 0041 0042 0043 0044 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0040 > Page 31 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0050 - P0054, ( P0051 P0052 P0053 0050 0051 0052 0053 0054 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0053 P0050 - P0054: Testing and Inspection P0053 For diagnosis of code P0053 refer to chart Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0050 - P0054, ( P0051 P0052 P0053 0050 0051 0052 0053 0054 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0053 > Page 36 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0050 - P0054, ( P0051 P0052 P0053 0050 0051 0052 0053 0054 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0053 > Page 37 P0050 - P0054: Testing and Inspection P0054 For diagnosis of code P0054 refer to chart Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0050 - P0054, ( P0051 P0052 P0053 0050 0051 0052 0053 0054 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0053 > Page 38 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0055 - P0059, ( P0056 P0057 P0058 0055 0056 0057 0058 0059 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0055 P0055 - P0059: Testing and Inspection P0055 For diagnosis of code P0055 refer to chart Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0055 - P0059, ( P0056 P0057 P0058 0055 0056 0057 0058 0059 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0055 > Page 43 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0055 - P0059, ( P0056 P0057 P0058 0055 0056 0057 0058 0059 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0055 > Page 44 P0055 - P0059: Testing and Inspection P0059 For diagnosis of code P0059 refer to chart Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0055 - P0059, ( P0056 P0057 P0058 0055 0056 0057 0058 0059 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0055 > Page 45 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0060 - P0064, ( P0061 P0062 P0063 0060 0061 0062 0063 0064 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0060 P0060 - P0064: Testing and Inspection P0060 For diagnosis of code P0060 refer to chart Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0060 - P0064, ( P0061 P0062 P0063 0060 0061 0062 0063 0064 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0060 > Page 50 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0060 - P0064, ( P0061 P0062 P0063 0060 0061 0062 0063 0064 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0060 > Page 51 P0060 - P0064: Testing and Inspection P0061 For diagnosis of code P0061 refer to chart Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0060 - P0064, ( P0061 P0062 P0063 0060 0061 0062 0063 0064 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0060 > Page 52 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0065 - P0069, ( P0066 P0067 P0068 0065 0066 0067 0068 0069 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0065 - P0069: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0068 refer to chart Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0065 - P0069, ( P0066 P0067 P0068 0065 0066 0067 0068 0069 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 56 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0100 - P0104, ( P0101 P0102 P0103 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0102 P0100 - P0104: Testing and Inspection P0102 For diagnosis of code P0102 refer to chart Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0100 - P0104, ( P0101 P0102 P0103 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0102 > Page 62 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0100 - P0104, ( P0101 P0102 P0103 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0102 > Page 63 P0100 - P0104: Testing and Inspection P0103 For diagnosis of code P0103 refer to chart Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0100 - P0104, ( P0101 P0102 P0103 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0102 > Page 64 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0100 - P0104, ( P0101 P0102 P0103 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0102 > Page 65 P0100 - P0104: Testing and Inspection P0104 For diagnosis of code P0104 refer to chart Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0100 - P0104, ( P0101 P0102 P0103 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0102 > Page 66 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109, ( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 P0105 - P0109: Testing and Inspection P0106 For diagnosis of code P0106 refer to chart Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109, ( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 71 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109, ( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 72 P0105 - P0109: Testing and Inspection P0107 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P0107 refer to chart Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109 If there is no link in the chart then: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109, ( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 73 - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only For diagnosis of code P0107 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109, ( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 74 P0107-P0193 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109, ( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 75 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109, ( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 76 P0105 - P0109: Testing and Inspection P0108 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P0108 refer to chart Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109 If there is no link in the chart then: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109, ( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 77 - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only For diagnosis of code P0108 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109, ( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 78 P0107-P0193 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109, ( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 79 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109, ( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 80 P0105 - P0109: Testing and Inspection P0109 For diagnosis of code P0109 refer to chart Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109, ( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 81 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0110 - P0114, ( P0111 P0112 P0113 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0112 P0110 - P0114: Testing and Inspection P0112 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P0112 refer to chart P0112-P0147 If there is no link in the chart then: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0110 - P0114, ( P0111 P0112 P0113 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0112 > Page 86 - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only For diagnosis of code P0112 refer to the Base Gasoline Diagnostic Chart: P0112-P0147 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0110 - P0114, ( P0111 P0112 P0113 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0112 > Page 87 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0110 - P0114, ( P0111 P0112 P0113 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0112 > Page 88 P0110 - P0114: Testing and Inspection P0113 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P0113 refer to chart P0112-P0147 If there is no link in the chart then: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0110 - P0114, ( P0111 P0112 P0113 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0112 > Page 89 - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only For diagnosis of code P0113 refer to the Base Gasoline Diagnostic Chart: P0112-P0147 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0110 - P0114, ( P0111 P0112 P0113 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0112 > Page 90 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0110 - P0114, ( P0111 P0112 P0113 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0112 > Page 91 P0110 - P0114: Testing and Inspection P0114 For diagnosis of code P0114 refer to chart P0112-P0147 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0110 - P0114, ( P0111 P0112 P0113 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0112 > Page 92 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119, ( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 P0115 - P0119: Testing and Inspection P0116 For diagnosis of code P0116 refer to chart P0112-P0147 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119, ( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 97 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119, ( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 98 P0115 - P0119: Testing and Inspection P0117 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P0117 refer to chart P0112-P0147 If there is no link in the chart then: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119, ( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 99 - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only For diagnosis of code P0117 refer to the Base Gasoline Diagnostic Chart: P0112-P0147 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119, ( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 100 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119, ( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 101 P0115 - P0119: Testing and Inspection P0118 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P0118 refer to chart P0112-P0147 If there is no link in the chart then: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119, ( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 102 - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only For diagnosis of code P0118 refer to the Base Gasoline Diagnostic Chart: P0112-P0147 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119, ( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 103 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119, ( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 104 P0115 - P0119: Testing and Inspection P0119 For diagnosis of code P0119 refer to chart P0112-P0147 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119, ( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 105 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0120 - P0124, ( P0121 P0122 P0123 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0121 P0120 - P0124: Testing and Inspection P0121 For diagnosis of code P0121 refer to chart P0112-P0147 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0120 - P0124, ( P0121 P0122 P0123 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0121 > Page 110 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0120 - P0124, ( P0121 P0122 P0123 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0121 > Page 111 P0120 - P0124: Testing and Inspection P0122 For diagnosis of code P0122 refer to chart P0112-P0147 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0120 - P0124, ( P0121 P0122 P0123 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0121 > Page 112 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0120 - P0124, ( P0121 P0122 P0123 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0121 > Page 113 P0120 - P0124: Testing and Inspection P0123 For diagnosis of code P0123 refer to chart P0112-P0147 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0120 - P0124, ( P0121 P0122 P0123 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0121 > Page 114 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0125 - P0129, ( P0126 P0127 P0128 0125 0126 0127 0128 0129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0125 P0125 - P0129: Testing and Inspection P0125 For diagnosis of code P0125 refer to chart P0112-P0147 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0125 - P0129, ( P0126 P0127 P0128 0125 0126 0127 0128 0129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0125 > Page 119 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0125 - P0129, ( P0126 P0127 P0128 0125 0126 0127 0128 0129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0125 > Page 120 P0125 - P0129: Testing and Inspection P0127 For diagnosis of code P0127 refer to chart P0112-P0147 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0125 - P0129, ( P0126 P0127 P0128 0125 0126 0127 0128 0129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0125 > Page 121 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0125 - P0129, ( P0126 P0127 P0128 0125 0126 0127 0128 0129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0125 > Page 122 P0125 - P0129: Testing and Inspection P0128 For diagnosis of code P0128 refer to chart P0112-P0147 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0125 - P0129, ( P0126 P0127 P0128 0125 0126 0127 0128 0129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0125 > Page 123 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134, ( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 P0130 - P0134: Testing and Inspection P0131 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P0131 refer to chart P0112-P0147 If there is no link in the chart then: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134, ( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 128 - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only For diagnosis of code P0131 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134, ( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 129 P0107-P0193 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134, ( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 130 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134, ( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 131 P0130 - P0134: Testing and Inspection P0132 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P0132 refer to chart P0112-P0147 If there is no link in the chart then: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134, ( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 132 - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only For diagnosis of code P0132 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134, ( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 133 P0107-P0193 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134, ( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 134 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134, ( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 135 P0130 - P0134: Testing and Inspection P0133 For diagnosis of code P0133 refer to chart P0112-P0147 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134, ( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 136 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134, ( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 137 P0130 - P0134: Testing and Inspection P0134 For diagnosis of code P0134 refer to chart P0107-P0193 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134, ( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 138 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0135 - P0139, ( P0136 P0137 P0138 0135 0136 0137 0138 0139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0135 P0135 - P0139: Testing and Inspection P0135 For diagnosis of code P0135 refer to chart P0112-P0147 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0135 - P0139, ( P0136 P0137 P0138 0135 0136 0137 0138 0139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0135 > Page 143 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0135 - P0139, ( P0136 P0137 P0138 0135 0136 0137 0138 0139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0135 > Page 144 P0135 - P0139: Testing and Inspection P0136 For diagnosis of code P0136 refer to chart P0112-P0147 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0135 - P0139, ( P0136 P0137 P0138 0135 0136 0137 0138 0139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0135 > Page 145 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0135 - P0139, ( P0136 P0137 P0138 0135 0136 0137 0138 0139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0135 > Page 146 P0135 - P0139: Testing and Inspection P0138 For diagnosis of code P0138 refer to chart P0112-P0147 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0135 - P0139, ( P0136 P0137 P0138 0135 0136 0137 0138 0139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0135 > Page 147 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0140 - P0144, ( P0141 P0142 P0143 0140 0141 0142 0143 0144 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0141 P0140 - P0144: Testing and Inspection P0141 For diagnosis of code P0141 refer to chart P0112-P0147 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0140 - P0144, ( P0141 P0142 P0143 0140 0141 0142 0143 0144 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0141 > Page 152 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0140 - P0144, ( P0141 P0142 P0143 0140 0141 0142 0143 0144 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0141 > Page 153 P0140 - P0144: Testing and Inspection P0144 For diagnosis of code P0144 refer to chart P0112-P0147 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0140 - P0144, ( P0141 P0142 P0143 0140 0141 0142 0143 0144 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0141 > Page 154 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0145 - P0149, ( P0146 P0127 P0148 0145 0146 0147 0148 0149 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0147 P0145 - P0149: Testing and Inspection P0147 For diagnosis of code P0147 refer to chart P0112-P0147 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0145 - P0149, ( P0146 P0127 P0148 0145 0146 0147 0148 0149 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0147 > Page 159 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0145 - P0149, ( P0146 P0127 P0148 0145 0146 0147 0148 0149 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0147 > Page 160 P0145 - P0149: Testing and Inspection P0148 For diagnosis of code P0148 refer to chart P0148-P0191 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0145 - P0149, ( P0146 P0127 P0148 0145 0146 0147 0148 0149 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0147 > Page 161 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154, ( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 P0150 - P0154: Testing and Inspection P0151 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P0151 refer to chart P0148-P0191 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154, ( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 166 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only For diagnosis of code P0151 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154, ( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 167 P0107-P0193 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154, ( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 168 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154, ( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 169 P0150 - P0154: Testing and Inspection P0152 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P0152 refer to chart P0148-P0191 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154, ( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 170 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only For diagnosis of code P0152 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154, ( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 171 P0107-P0193 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154, ( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 172 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154, ( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 173 P0150 - P0154: Testing and Inspection P0153 For diagnosis of code P0153 refer to chart P0148-P0191 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154, ( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 174 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154, ( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 175 P0150 - P0154: Testing and Inspection P0154 For diagnosis of code P0154 refer to chart P0107-P0193 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154, ( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 176 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0155 - P0159, ( P0156 P0157 P0158 0155 0156 0157 0158 0159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0155 P0155 - P0159: Testing and Inspection P0155 For diagnosis of code P0155 refer to chart P0148-P0191 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0155 - P0159, ( P0156 P0157 P0158 0155 0156 0157 0158 0159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0155 > Page 181 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0155 - P0159, ( P0156 P0157 P0158 0155 0156 0157 0158 0159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0155 > Page 182 P0155 - P0159: Testing and Inspection P0156 For diagnosis of code P0156 refer to chart P0148-P0191 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0155 - P0159, ( P0156 P0157 P0158 0155 0156 0157 0158 0159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0155 > Page 183 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0155 - P0159, ( P0156 P0157 P0158 0155 0156 0157 0158 0159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0155 > Page 184 P0155 - P0159: Testing and Inspection P0158 For diagnosis of code P0158 refer to chart P0148-P0191 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0155 - P0159, ( P0156 P0157 P0158 0155 0156 0157 0158 0159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0155 > Page 185 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0160 - P0164, ( P0161 P0162 P0163 0160 0161 0162 0163 0164 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0160 - P0164: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0161 refer to chart P0148-P0191 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0165 - P0169, ( P0166 P0167 P0168 0165 0166 0167 0168 0169 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0165 - P0169: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0167 refer to chart P0148-P0191 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174, ( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 P0170 - P0174: Testing and Inspection P0171 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P0171 refer to chart P0148-P0191 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174, ( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 196 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only For diagnosis of code P0171 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174, ( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 197 P0107-P0193 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174, ( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 198 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174, ( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 199 P0170 - P0174: Testing and Inspection P0172 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P0172 refer to chart P0148-P0191 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174, ( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 200 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only For diagnosis of code P0172 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174, ( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 201 P0107-P0193 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174, ( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 202 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174, ( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 203 P0170 - P0174: Testing and Inspection P0174 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P0174 refer to chart P0148-P0191 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174, ( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 204 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only For diagnosis of code P0174 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174, ( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 205 P0107-P0193 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174, ( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 206 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0175 - P0179, ( P0176 P0177 P0178 0175 0176 0177 0178 0179 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > OBD II - Base Gasoline P0175 - P0179: Testing and Inspection OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P0175 refer to chart P0148-P0191 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0175 - P0179, ( P0176 P0177 P0178 0175 0176 0177 0178 0179 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > OBD II - Base Gasoline > Page 211 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0175 - P0179, ( P0176 P0177 P0178 0175 0176 0177 0178 0179 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > OBD II - Base Gasoline > Page 212 P0175 - P0179: Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only For diagnosis of code P0175 refer to chart P0107-P0193 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0175 - P0179, ( P0176 P0177 P0178 0175 0176 0177 0178 0179 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > OBD II - Base Gasoline > Page 213 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184, ( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 P0180 - P0184: Testing and Inspection P0180 For diagnosis of code P0180 refer to chart P0148-P0191 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184, ( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 218 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184, ( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 219 P0180 - P0184: Testing and Inspection P0181 For diagnosis of code P0181 refer to chart P0148-P0191 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184, ( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 220 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184, ( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 221 P0180 - P0184: Testing and Inspection P0182 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P0182 refer to chart P0148-P0191 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184, ( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 222 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only For diagnosis of code P0182 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184, ( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 223 B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only For diagnosis of code P0182 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184, ( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 224 P0107-P0193 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184, ( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 225 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184, ( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 226 P0180 - P0184: Testing and Inspection P0183 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P0183 refer to chart P0148-P0191 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184, ( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 227 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only For diagnosis of code P0183 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184, ( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 228 B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only For diagnosis of code P0183 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184, ( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 229 P0107-P0193 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184, ( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 230 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194, ( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 P0190 - P0194: Testing and Inspection P0190 For diagnosis of code P0190 refer to chart P0148-P0191 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194, ( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 235 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194, ( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 236 P0190 - P0194: Testing and Inspection P0191 For diagnosis of code P0191 refer to chart P0148-P0191 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194, ( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 237 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194, ( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 238 P0190 - P0194: Testing and Inspection P0192 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P0192 refer to chart P0192-P0223 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194, ( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 239 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only For diagnosis of code P0192 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194, ( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 240 B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only For diagnosis of code P0192 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194, ( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 241 P0107-P0193 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194, ( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 242 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194, ( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 243 P0190 - P0194: Testing and Inspection P0193 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P0193 refer to chart P0192-P0223 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194, ( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 244 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only For diagnosis of code P0193 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194, ( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 245 B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only For diagnosis of code P0193 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194, ( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 246 P0107-P0193 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194, ( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 247 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0195 - P0199, ( P0196 P0197 P0198 0195 0196 0197 0198 0199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0196 P0195 - P0199: Testing and Inspection P0196 For diagnosis of code P0196 refer to chart P0192-P0223 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0195 - P0199, ( P0196 P0197 P0198 0195 0196 0197 0198 0199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0196 > Page 252 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0195 - P0199, ( P0196 P0197 P0198 0195 0196 0197 0198 0199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0196 > Page 253 P0195 - P0199: Testing and Inspection P0197 For diagnosis of code P0197 refer to chart P0192-P0223 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0195 - P0199, ( P0196 P0197 P0198 0195 0196 0197 0198 0199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0196 > Page 254 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0195 - P0199, ( P0196 P0197 P0198 0195 0196 0197 0198 0199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0196 > Page 255 P0195 - P0199: Testing and Inspection P0198 For diagnosis of code P0198 refer to chart P0192-P0223 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0195 - P0199, ( P0196 P0197 P0198 0195 0196 0197 0198 0199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0196 > Page 256 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204, ( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 P0200 - P0204: Testing and Inspection P0201 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P0201 refer to chart P0192-P0223 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204, ( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 262 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only For diagnosis of code P0201 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204, ( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 263 P0182-P1273 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204, ( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 264 P0200 - P0204: Testing and Inspection P0202 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P0202 refer to chart P0192-P0223 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204, ( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 265 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only For diagnosis of code P0202 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204, ( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 266 P0182-P1273 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204, ( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 267 P0200 - P0204: Testing and Inspection P0203 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P0203 refer to chart P0192-P0223 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204, ( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 268 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only For diagnosis of code P0203 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204, ( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 269 P0182-P1273 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204, ( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 270 P0200 - P0204: Testing and Inspection P0204 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P0204 refer to chart P0192-P0223 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204, ( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 271 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only For diagnosis of code P0204 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204, ( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 272 P0182-P1273 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209, ( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 P0205 - P0209: Testing and Inspection P0205 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P0205 refer to chart P0192-P0223 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209, ( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 277 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only For diagnosis of code P0205 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209, ( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 278 P0182-P1273 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209, ( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 279 P0205 - P0209: Testing and Inspection P0206 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P0206 refer to chart P0192-P0223 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209, ( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 280 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only For diagnosis of code P0206 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209, ( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 281 P0182-P1273 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209, ( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 282 P0205 - P0209: Testing and Inspection P0207 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P0207 refer to chart P0192-P0223 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209, ( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 283 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only For diagnosis of code P0207 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209, ( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 284 P0182-P1273 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209, ( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 285 P0205 - P0209: Testing and Inspection P0208 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P0208 refer to chart P0192-P0223 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209, ( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 286 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only For diagnosis of code P0208 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209, ( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 287 P0182-P1273 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209, ( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 288 P0205 - P0209: Testing and Inspection P0209 For diagnosis of code P0209 refer to chart P0192-P0223 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209, ( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 289 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0210 - P0214, ( P0211 P0212 P0213 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0210 P0210 - P0214: Testing and Inspection P0210 For diagnosis of code P0210 refer to chart P0192-P0223 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0210 - P0214, ( P0211 P0212 P0213 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0210 > Page 294 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0210 - P0214, ( P0211 P0212 P0213 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0210 > Page 295 P0210 - P0214: Testing and Inspection P0211 For diagnosis of code P0211 refer to chart P0192-P0223 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0210 - P0214, ( P0211 P0212 P0213 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0210 > Page 296 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0210 - P0214, ( P0211 P0212 P0213 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0210 > Page 297 P0210 - P0214: Testing and Inspection P0212 For diagnosis of code P0212 refer to chart P0192-P0223 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0210 - P0214, ( P0211 P0212 P0213 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0210 > Page 298 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0215 - P0219, ( P0216 P0217 P0218 0215 0216 0217 0218 0219 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0217 P0215 - P0219: Testing and Inspection P0217 For diagnosis of code P0217 refer to chart P0192-P0223 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0215 - P0219, ( P0216 P0217 P0218 0215 0216 0217 0218 0219 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0217 > Page 303 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0215 - P0219, ( P0216 P0217 P0218 0215 0216 0217 0218 0219 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0217 > Page 304 P0215 - P0219: Testing and Inspection P0219 For diagnosis of code P0219 refer to chart P0192-P0223 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0215 - P0219, ( P0216 P0217 P0218 0215 0216 0217 0218 0219 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0217 > Page 305 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0220 - P0224, ( P0221 P0222 P0223 0220 0221 0222 0223 0224 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0221 P0220 - P0224: Testing and Inspection P0221 For diagnosis of code P0221 refer to chart P0192-P0223 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0220 - P0224, ( P0221 P0222 P0223 0220 0221 0222 0223 0224 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0221 > Page 310 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0220 - P0224, ( P0221 P0222 P0223 0220 0221 0222 0223 0224 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0221 > Page 311 P0220 - P0224: Testing and Inspection P0222 For diagnosis of code P0222 refer to chart P0192-P0223 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0220 - P0224, ( P0221 P0222 P0223 0220 0221 0222 0223 0224 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0221 > Page 312 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0220 - P0224, ( P0221 P0222 P0223 0220 0221 0222 0223 0224 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0221 > Page 313 P0220 - P0224: Testing and Inspection P0223 For diagnosis of code P0223 refer to chart P0192-P0223 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0220 - P0224, ( P0221 P0222 P0223 0220 0221 0222 0223 0224 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0221 > Page 314 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234, ( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 P0230 - P0234: Testing and Inspection P0230 For diagnosis of code P0230 refer to chart P0230-P0360 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234, ( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 319 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234, ( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 320 P0230 - P0234: Testing and Inspection P0231 For diagnosis of code P0231 refer to chart P0230-P0360 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234, ( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 321 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234, ( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 322 P0230 - P0234: Testing and Inspection P0232 For diagnosis of code P0232 refer to chart P0230-P0360 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234, ( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 323 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234, ( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 324 P0230 - P0234: Testing and Inspection P0234 For diagnosis of code P0234 refer to chart P0230-P0360 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234, ( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 325 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0235 - P0239, ( P0236 P0237 P0238 0235 0236 0237 0238 0239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0235 - P0239: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0237 refer to chart Part 1 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0240 - P0244, ( P0241 P0242 P0243 0240 0241 0242 0243 0244 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0240 - P0244: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0243 refer to chart P0230-P0360 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0240 - P0244, ( P0241 P0242 P0243 0240 0241 0242 0243 0244 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 332 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0260 - P0264, ( P0261 P0262 P0263 0260 0261 0262 0263 0264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0261 P0260 - P0264: Testing and Inspection P0261 For diagnosis of code P0261 refer to chart B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0260 - P0264, ( P0261 P0262 P0263 0260 0261 0262 0263 0264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0261 > Page 337 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0260 - P0264, ( P0261 P0262 P0263 0260 0261 0262 0263 0264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0261 > Page 338 P0260 - P0264: Testing and Inspection P0262 For diagnosis of code P0262 refer to chart B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0260 - P0264, ( P0261 P0262 P0263 0260 0261 0262 0263 0264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0261 > Page 339 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0260 - P0264, ( P0261 P0262 P0263 0260 0261 0262 0263 0264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0261 > Page 340 P0260 - P0264: Testing and Inspection P0264 For diagnosis of code P0264 refer to chart B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0260 - P0264, ( P0261 P0262 P0263 0260 0261 0262 0263 0264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0261 > Page 341 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0265 - P0269, ( P0266 P0267 P0268 0265 0266 0267 0268 0269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0265 P0265 - P0269: Testing and Inspection P0265 For diagnosis of code P0265 refer to chart B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0265 - P0269, ( P0266 P0267 P0268 0265 0266 0267 0268 0269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0265 > Page 346 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0265 - P0269, ( P0266 P0267 P0268 0265 0266 0267 0268 0269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0265 > Page 347 P0265 - P0269: Testing and Inspection P0267 For diagnosis of code P0267 refer to chart B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0265 - P0269, ( P0266 P0267 P0268 0265 0266 0267 0268 0269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0265 > Page 348 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0265 - P0269, ( P0266 P0267 P0268 0265 0266 0267 0268 0269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0265 > Page 349 P0265 - P0269: Testing and Inspection P0268 For diagnosis of code P0268 refer to chart B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0265 - P0269, ( P0266 P0267 P0268 0265 0266 0267 0268 0269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0265 > Page 350 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0270 - P0274, ( P0271 P0272 P0273 0270 0271 0272 0273 0274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0270 P0270 - P0274: Testing and Inspection P0270 For diagnosis of code P0270 refer to chart B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0270 - P0274, ( P0271 P0272 P0273 0270 0271 0272 0273 0274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0270 > Page 355 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0270 - P0274, ( P0271 P0272 P0273 0270 0271 0272 0273 0274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0270 > Page 356 P0270 - P0274: Testing and Inspection P0271 For diagnosis of code P0271 refer to chart B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0270 - P0274, ( P0271 P0272 P0273 0270 0271 0272 0273 0274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0270 > Page 357 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0270 - P0274, ( P0271 P0272 P0273 0270 0271 0272 0273 0274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0270 > Page 358 P0270 - P0274: Testing and Inspection P0273 For diagnosis of code P0273 refer to chart B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0270 - P0274, ( P0271 P0272 P0273 0270 0271 0272 0273 0274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0270 > Page 359 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0270 - P0274, ( P0271 P0272 P0273 0270 0271 0272 0273 0274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0270 > Page 360 P0270 - P0274: Testing and Inspection P0274 For diagnosis of code P0274 refer to chart B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0270 - P0274, ( P0271 P0272 P0273 0270 0271 0272 0273 0274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0270 > Page 361 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0275 - P0279, ( P0276 P0277 P0278 0275 0276 0277 0278 0279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0276 P0275 - P0279: Testing and Inspection P0276 For diagnosis of code P0276 refer to chart B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0275 - P0279, ( P0276 P0277 P0278 0275 0276 0277 0278 0279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0276 > Page 366 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0275 - P0279, ( P0276 P0277 P0278 0275 0276 0277 0278 0279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0276 > Page 367 P0275 - P0279: Testing and Inspection P0277 For diagnosis of code P0277 refer to chart B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0275 - P0279, ( P0276 P0277 P0278 0275 0276 0277 0278 0279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0276 > Page 368 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0275 - P0279, ( P0276 P0277 P0278 0275 0276 0277 0278 0279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0276 > Page 369 P0275 - P0279: Testing and Inspection P0279 For diagnosis of code P0279 refer to chart B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0275 - P0279, ( P0276 P0277 P0278 0275 0276 0277 0278 0279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0276 > Page 370 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0280 - P0284, ( P0281 P0282 P0283 0280 0281 0282 0283 0284 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0280 P0280 - P0284: Testing and Inspection P0280 For diagnosis of code P0280 refer to chart B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0280 - P0284, ( P0281 P0282 P0283 0280 0281 0282 0283 0284 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0280 > Page 375 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0280 - P0284, ( P0281 P0282 P0283 0280 0281 0282 0283 0284 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0280 > Page 376 P0280 - P0284: Testing and Inspection P0282 For diagnosis of code P0282 refer to chart B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0280 - P0284, ( P0281 P0282 P0283 0280 0281 0282 0283 0284 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0280 > Page 377 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0280 - P0284, ( P0281 P0282 P0283 0280 0281 0282 0283 0284 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0280 > Page 378 P0280 - P0284: Testing and Inspection P0283 For diagnosis of code P0283 refer to chart B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0280 - P0284, ( P0281 P0282 P0283 0280 0281 0282 0283 0284 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0280 > Page 379 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0295 - P0299, ( P0296 P0297 P0298 0295 0296 0297 0298 0299 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0297 P0295 - P0299: Testing and Inspection P0297 For diagnosis of code P0297 refer to chart P0230-P0360 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0295 - P0299, ( P0296 P0297 P0298 0295 0296 0297 0298 0299 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0297 > Page 384 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0295 - P0299, ( P0296 P0297 P0298 0295 0296 0297 0298 0299 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0297 > Page 385 P0295 - P0299: Testing and Inspection P0298 For diagnosis of code P0298 refer to chart P0230-P0360 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0295 - P0299, ( P0296 P0297 P0298 0295 0296 0297 0298 0299 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0297 > Page 386 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304, ( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P030x P0300 - P0304: Testing and Inspection P030x For diagnosis of code P030x refer to chart P0230-P0360 NOTE: "x" equals any number 0 through 9 or letter A through F. If there is no link in the chart then: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304, ( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P030x > Page 392 - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304, ( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P030x > Page 393 P0300 - P0304: Testing and Inspection P0300 For diagnosis of code P0300 refer to chart P0230-P0360 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304, ( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P030x > Page 394 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0310 - P0314, ( P0311 P0312 P0313 0310 0311 0312 0313 0314 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0310 - P0314: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0310 refer to chart P0230-P0360 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0310 - P0314, ( P0311 P0312 P0313 0310 0311 0312 0313 0314 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 398 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0315 - P0319, ( P0316 P0317 P0318 0315 0316 0317 0318 0319 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0315 P0315 - P0319: Testing and Inspection P0315 For diagnosis of code P0315 refer to chart P0230-P0360 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0315 - P0319, ( P0316 P0317 P0318 0315 0316 0317 0318 0319 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0315 > Page 403 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0315 - P0319, ( P0316 P0317 P0318 0315 0316 0317 0318 0319 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0315 > Page 404 P0315 - P0319: Testing and Inspection P0316 For diagnosis of code P0316 refer to chart P0230-P0360 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0315 - P0319, ( P0316 P0317 P0318 0315 0316 0317 0318 0319 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0315 > Page 405 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0320 - P0324, ( P0321 P0322 P0323 0320 0321 0322 0323 0324 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0320 - P0324: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0320 refer to chart P0230-P0360 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0320 - P0324, ( P0321 P0322 P0323 0320 0321 0322 0323 0324 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 409 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0325 - P0329, ( P0326 P0327 P0328 0325 0326 0327 0328 0329 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0325 P0325 - P0329: Testing and Inspection P0325 For diagnosis of code P0325 refer to chart P0230-P0360 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0325 - P0329, ( P0326 P0327 P0328 0325 0326 0327 0328 0329 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0325 > Page 414 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0325 - P0329, ( P0326 P0327 P0328 0325 0326 0327 0328 0329 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0325 > Page 415 P0325 - P0329: Testing and Inspection P0326 For diagnosis of code P0326 refer to chart P0230-P0360 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0325 - P0329, ( P0326 P0327 P0328 0325 0326 0327 0328 0329 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0325 > Page 416 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0330 - P0334, ( P0331 P0332 P0333 0330 0331 0332 0333 0334 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0330 P0330 - P0334: Testing and Inspection P0330 For diagnosis of code P0330 refer to chart P0230-P0360 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0330 - P0334, ( P0331 P0332 P0333 0330 0331 0332 0333 0334 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0330 > Page 421 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0330 - P0334, ( P0331 P0332 P0333 0330 0331 0332 0333 0334 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0330 > Page 422 P0330 - P0334: Testing and Inspection P0331 For diagnosis of code P0331 refer to chart P0230-P0360 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0330 - P0334, ( P0331 P0332 P0333 0330 0331 0332 0333 0334 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0330 > Page 423 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0340 - P0344, ( P0341 P0342 P0343 0340 0341 0342 0343 0344 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0340 - P0344: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0340 refer to chart P0230-P0360 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0340 - P0344, ( P0341 P0342 P0343 0340 0341 0342 0343 0344 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 427 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0345 - P0349, ( P0346 P0347 P0348 0345 0346 0347 0348 0349 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0345 - P0349: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0345 refer to chart P0230-P0360 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0345 - P0349, ( P0346 P0347 P0348 0345 0346 0347 0348 0349 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 431 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354, ( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 P0350 - P0354: Testing and Inspection P0350 For diagnosis of code P0350 refer to chart P0230-P0360 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354, ( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 436 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354, ( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 437 P0350 - P0354: Testing and Inspection P0351 For diagnosis of code P0351 refer to chart P0230-P0360 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354, ( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 438 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354, ( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 439 P0350 - P0354: Testing and Inspection P0352 For diagnosis of code P0352 refer to chart P0230-P0360 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354, ( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 440 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354, ( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 441 P0350 - P0354: Testing and Inspection P0353 For diagnosis of code P0353 refer to chart P0230-P0360 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354, ( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 442 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354, ( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 443 P0350 - P0354: Testing and Inspection P0354 For diagnosis of code P0354 refer to chart P0230-P0360 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354, ( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 444 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359, ( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 P0355 - P0359: Testing and Inspection P0355 For diagnosis of code P0355 refer to chart P0230-P0360 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359, ( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 449 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359, ( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 450 P0355 - P0359: Testing and Inspection P0356 For diagnosis of code P0356 refer to chart P0230-P0360 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359, ( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 451 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359, ( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 452 P0355 - P0359: Testing and Inspection P0357 For diagnosis of code P0357 refer to chart P0230-P0360 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359, ( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 453 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359, ( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 454 P0355 - P0359: Testing and Inspection P0358 For diagnosis of code P0358 refer to chart P0230-P0360 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359, ( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 455 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359, ( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 456 P0355 - P0359: Testing and Inspection P0359 For diagnosis of code P0359 refer to chart P0230-P0360 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359, ( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 457 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0360 - P0364, ( P0361 P0362 P0363 0360 0361 0362 0363 0364 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0360 - P0364: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0360 refer to chart P0230-P0360 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0360 - P0364, ( P0361 P0362 P0363 0360 0361 0362 0363 0364 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 461 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404, ( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 P0400 - P0404: Testing and Inspection P0400 For diagnosis of code P0400 refer to chart P0400-P0462 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404, ( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 467 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404, ( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 468 P0400 - P0404: Testing and Inspection P0401 For diagnosis of code P0401 refer to chart P0400-P0462 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404, ( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 469 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404, ( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 470 P0400 - P0404: Testing and Inspection P0402 For diagnosis of code P0402 refer to chart P0400-P0462 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404, ( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 471 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404, ( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 472 P0400 - P0404: Testing and Inspection P0403 For diagnosis of code P0403 refer to chart P0400-P0462 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404, ( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 473 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0405 - P0409, ( P0406 P0407 P0408 0405 0406 0407 0408 0409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0405 P0405 - P0409: Testing and Inspection P0405 For diagnosis of code P0405 refer to chart P0400-P0462 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0405 - P0409, ( P0406 P0407 P0408 0405 0406 0407 0408 0409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0405 > Page 478 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0405 - P0409, ( P0406 P0407 P0408 0405 0406 0407 0408 0409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0405 > Page 479 P0405 - P0409: Testing and Inspection P0406 For diagnosis of code P0406 refer to chart P0400-P0462 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0405 - P0409, ( P0406 P0407 P0408 0405 0406 0407 0408 0409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0405 > Page 480 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0410 - P0414, ( P0411 P0412 P0413 0410 0411 0412 0413 0414 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0411 P0410 - P0414: Testing and Inspection P0411 For diagnosis of code P0411 refer to chart P0400-P0462 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0410 - P0414, ( P0411 P0412 P0413 0410 0411 0412 0413 0414 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0411 > Page 485 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0410 - P0414, ( P0411 P0412 P0413 0410 0411 0412 0413 0414 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0411 > Page 486 P0410 - P0414: Testing and Inspection P0412 For diagnosis of code P0412 refer to chart P0400-P0462 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0410 - P0414, ( P0411 P0412 P0413 0410 0411 0412 0413 0414 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0411 > Page 487 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0420 - P0424, ( P0421 P0422 P0423 0420 0421 0422 0423 0424 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0420 - P0424: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0420 refer to chart P0400-P0462 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0430 - P0434, ( P0431 P0432 P0433 0430 0431 0432 0433 0434 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0430 - P0434: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0430 refer to chart P0400-P0462 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0440 - P0444, ( P0441 P0442 P0443 0440 0441 0442 0443 0444 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0442 P0440 - P0444: Testing and Inspection P0442 For diagnosis of code P0442 refer to the system experiencing the problem. Computers and Control Systems P0400-P0462 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0440 - P0444, ( P0441 P0442 P0443 0440 0441 0442 0443 0444 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0442 > Page 498 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Evaporative Emissions System DTC Index P0442 - P0456 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Evaporative Emissions diagnostic information, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0440 - P0444, ( P0441 P0442 P0443 0440 0441 0442 0443 0444 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0442 > Page 499 P0440 - P0444: Testing and Inspection P0443 For diagnosis of code P0443 refer to chart P0400-P0462 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0440 - P0444, ( P0441 P0442 P0443 0440 0441 0442 0443 0444 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0442 > Page 500 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0445 - P0449, ( P0446 P0447 P0448 0445 0446 0447 0448 0449 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0445 - P0449: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0446 refer to chart P0400-P0462 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454, ( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 P0450 - P0454: Testing and Inspection P0451 For diagnosis of code P0451 refer to chart P0400-P0462 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454, ( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 > Page 508 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454, ( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 > Page 509 P0450 - P0454: Testing and Inspection P0452 For diagnosis of code P0452 refer to chart P0400-P0462 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454, ( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 > Page 510 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454, ( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 > Page 511 P0450 - P0454: Testing and Inspection P0453 For diagnosis of code P0453 refer to chart P0400-P0462 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454, ( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 > Page 512 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454, ( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 > Page 513 P0450 - P0454: Testing and Inspection P0454 For diagnosis of code P0454 refer to chart P0400-P0462 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454, ( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 > Page 514 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0455 - P0459, ( P0456 P0457 P0458 0455 0456 0457 0458 0459 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0455 P0455 - P0459: Testing and Inspection P0455 For diagnosis of code P0455 refer to the system experiencing the problem. Computers and Control Systems P0400-P0462 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0455 - P0459, ( P0456 P0457 P0458 0455 0456 0457 0458 0459 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0455 > Page 519 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Evaporative Emissions System DTC Index P0442-P1450 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Evaporative Emissions diagnostic information, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0455 - P0459, ( P0456 P0457 P0458 0455 0456 0457 0458 0459 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0455 > Page 520 P0455 - P0459: Testing and Inspection P0456 For diagnosis of code P0456 refer to the system experiencing the problem. Computers and Control Systems P0400-P0462 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0455 - P0459, ( P0456 P0457 P0458 0455 0456 0457 0458 0459 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0455 > Page 521 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Evaporative Emissions System DTC Index P0442 - P0457 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Evaporative Emissions diagnostic information, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0455 - P0459, ( P0456 P0457 P0458 0455 0456 0457 0458 0459 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0455 > Page 522 P0455 - P0459: Testing and Inspection P0457 For diagnosis of code P0457 refer to the system experiencing the problem. Computers and Control Systems P0400-P0462 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0455 - P0459, ( P0456 P0457 P0458 0455 0456 0457 0458 0459 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0455 > Page 523 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Evaporative Emissions System DTC Index P0442 - P1450 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Evaporative Emissions diagnostic information, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464, ( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460 P0460 - P0464: Testing and Inspection P0460 For diagnosis of code P0460 refer to chart P0400-P0462 NOTE 7: Refer to Instrument Panels, Gauges and Warning Indicators, fuel level indicator or Rear Electronic Module (REM) diagnosis. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464, ( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460 > Page 528 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464, ( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460 > Page 529 P0460 - P0464: Testing and Inspection P0461 For diagnosis of code P0461 refer to chart P0400-P0462 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464, ( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460 > Page 530 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464, ( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460 > Page 531 P0460 - P0464: Testing and Inspection P0462 For diagnosis of code P0462 refer to chart P0400-P0462 NOTE 7: Refer to Instrument Panels, Gauges and Warning Indicators, fuel level indicator or Rear Electronic Module (REM) diagnosis. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464, ( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460 > Page 532 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464, ( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460 > Page 533 P0460 - P0464: Testing and Inspection P0463 For diagnosis of code P0463 refer to chart P0463-P0503 NOTE 7: Refer to Instrument Panels, Gauges and Warning Indicators, fuel level indicator or Rear Electronic Module (REM) diagnosis. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464, ( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460 > Page 534 - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0480 - P0484, ( P0481 P0482 P0483 0480 0481 0482 0483 0484 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0480 P0480 - P0484: Testing and Inspection P0480 For diagnosis of code P0480 refer to chart P0463-P0503 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0480 - P0484, ( P0481 P0482 P0483 0480 0481 0482 0483 0484 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0480 > Page 539 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0480 - P0484, ( P0481 P0482 P0483 0480 0481 0482 0483 0484 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0480 > Page 540 P0480 - P0484: Testing and Inspection P0481 For diagnosis of code P0481 refer to chart P0463-P0503 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0480 - P0484, ( P0481 P0482 P0483 0480 0481 0482 0483 0484 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0480 > Page 541 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0480 - P0484, ( P0481 P0482 P0483 0480 0481 0482 0483 0484 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0480 > Page 542 P0480 - P0484: Testing and Inspection P0482 For diagnosis of code P0482 refer to chart P0463-P0503 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0480 - P0484, ( P0481 P0482 P0483 0480 0481 0482 0483 0484 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0480 > Page 543 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0500 - P0504, ( P0501 P0502 P0503 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0500 P0500 - P0504: Testing and Inspection P0500 For diagnosis of code P0500 refer to chart P0463-P0503 NOTE 6: Go to Transmission Control Systems. See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection NOTE 8: Vehicle speed information is provided by the anti-lock brake system. Go to Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0500 - P0504, ( P0501 P0502 P0503 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0500 > Page 549 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0500 - P0504, ( P0501 P0502 P0503 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0500 > Page 550 P0500 - P0504: Testing and Inspection P0501 For diagnosis of code P0501 refer to chart P0463-P0503 NOTE 6: Go to Transmission Control Systems. See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection NOTE 8: Vehicle speed information is provided by the anti-lock brake system. Go to Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0500 - P0504, ( P0501 P0502 P0503 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0500 > Page 551 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0500 - P0504, ( P0501 P0502 P0503 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0500 > Page 552 P0500 - P0504: Testing and Inspection P0503 For diagnosis of code P0503 refer to chart P0463-P0503 NOTE 6: Go to Transmission Control Systems. See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0500 - P0504, ( P0501 P0502 P0503 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0500 > Page 553 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0505 - P0509, ( P0506 P0507 P0508 0505 0506 0507 0508 0509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0505 P0505 - P0509: Testing and Inspection P0505 For diagnosis of code P0505 refer to chart P0505-P0722 NOTE 9: Refer to the Description, Possible Causes and Diagnostic Aids for the DTC in question. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0505 - P0509, ( P0506 P0507 P0508 0505 0506 0507 0508 0509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0505 > Page 558 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0505 - P0509, ( P0506 P0507 P0508 0505 0506 0507 0508 0509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0505 > Page 559 P0505 - P0509: Testing and Inspection P0506 For diagnosis of code P0506 refer to chart P0505-P0722 NOTE 9: Refer to the Description, Possible Causes and Diagnostic Aids for the DTC in question. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0505 - P0509, ( P0506 P0507 P0508 0505 0506 0507 0508 0509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0505 > Page 560 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0505 - P0509, ( P0506 P0507 P0508 0505 0506 0507 0508 0509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0505 > Page 561 P0505 - P0509: Testing and Inspection P0507 For diagnosis of code P0507 refer to chart P0505-P0722 NOTE 9: Refer to the Description, Possible Causes and Diagnostic Aids for the DTC in question. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0505 - P0509, ( P0506 P0507 P0508 0505 0506 0507 0508 0509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0505 > Page 562 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0510 - P0514, ( P0511 P0512 P0513 0510 0511 0512 0513 0514 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0510 - P0514: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0511 refer to chart P0505-P0722 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0510 - P0514, ( P0511 P0512 P0513 0510 0511 0512 0513 0514 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 566 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0530 - P0534, ( P0531 P0532 P0533 0530 0531 0532 0533 0534 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0532 P0530 - P0534: Testing and Inspection P0532 For diagnosis of code P0532 refer to chart P0505-P0722 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0530 - P0534, ( P0531 P0532 P0533 0530 0531 0532 0533 0534 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0532 > Page 571 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0530 - P0534, ( P0531 P0532 P0533 0530 0531 0532 0533 0534 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0532 > Page 572 P0530 - P0534: Testing and Inspection P0533 For diagnosis of code P0533 refer to chart P0505-P0722 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0530 - P0534, ( P0531 P0532 P0533 0530 0531 0532 0533 0534 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0532 > Page 573 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0530 - P0534, ( P0531 P0532 P0533 0530 0531 0532 0533 0534 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0532 > Page 574 P0530 - P0534: Testing and Inspection P0534 For diagnosis of code P0534 refer to chart P0505-P0722 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0530 - P0534, ( P0531 P0532 P0533 0530 0531 0532 0533 0534 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0532 > Page 575 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0535 - P0539, ( P0536 P0537 P0538 0535 0536 0537 0538 0539 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0537 P0535 - P0539: Testing and Inspection P0537 For diagnosis of code P0537 refer to chart P0505-P0722 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0535 - P0539, ( P0536 P0537 P0538 0535 0536 0537 0538 0539 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0537 > Page 580 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0535 - P0539, ( P0536 P0537 P0538 0535 0536 0537 0538 0539 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0537 > Page 581 P0535 - P0539: Testing and Inspection P0538 For diagnosis of code P0538 refer to chart P0505-P0722 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0535 - P0539, ( P0536 P0537 P0538 0535 0536 0537 0538 0539 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0537 > Page 582 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0550 - P0554, ( P0551 P0552 P0553 0550 0551 0552 0553 0554 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0552 P0550 - P0554: Testing and Inspection P0552 For diagnosis of code P0552 refer to chart P0505-P0722 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0550 - P0554, ( P0551 P0552 P0553 0550 0551 0552 0553 0554 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0552 > Page 587 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0550 - P0554, ( P0551 P0552 P0553 0550 0551 0552 0553 0554 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0552 > Page 588 P0550 - P0554: Testing and Inspection P0553 For diagnosis of code P0553 refer to chart P0505-P0722 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0550 - P0554, ( P0551 P0552 P0553 0550 0551 0552 0553 0554 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0552 > Page 589 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0580 - P0584, ( P0581 P0582 P0583 0580 0581 0582 0583 0584 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0580 - P0584: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of P0581 refer to chart DTC Index P0500-P1572 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Cruise Control diagnostic information, See: Cruise Control/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0600 - P0604, ( P0601 P0602 P0603 0600 0601 0602 0603 0604 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0602 P0600 - P0604: Testing and Inspection P0602 For diagnosis of code P0602 refer to Note 11: NOTE 11: The Vehicle ID (VID) Block must be reprogrammed. For instructions, refer to the Flash VID Block Procedure. If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0600 - P0604, ( P0601 P0602 P0603 0600 0601 0602 0603 0604 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0602 > Page 598 P0600 - P0604: Testing and Inspection P0603 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P0603 refer to chart P0505-P0722 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0600 - P0604, ( P0601 P0602 P0603 0600 0601 0602 0603 0604 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0602 > Page 599 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only For diagnosis of code P0603 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0600 - P0604, ( P0601 P0602 P0603 0600 0601 0602 0603 0604 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0602 > Page 600 P0603-P2198 / U0309-U2015 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0600 - P0604, ( P0601 P0602 P0603 0600 0601 0602 0603 0604 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0602 > Page 601 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0605 - P0609, ( P0606 P0607 P0608 0605 0606 0607 0608 0609 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0605 P0605 - P0609: Testing and Inspection P0605 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P0605 refer to Note 12: NOTE 12: Be sure to check for aftermarket performance products before replacing the PCM. If replacement is necessary refer to Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only For diagnosis of code P0605 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0605 - P0609, ( P0606 P0607 P0608 0605 0606 0607 0608 0609 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0605 > Page 606 B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272 Note 5: Clear the DTC and retest. If the DTC is retrieved again, check for aftermarket performance products before replacing the AFCM. If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0605 - P0609, ( P0606 P0607 P0608 0605 0606 0607 0608 0609 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0605 > Page 607 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0605 - P0609, ( P0606 P0607 P0608 0605 0606 0607 0608 0609 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0605 > Page 608 P0605 - P0609: Testing and Inspection P0606 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P0606 refer to the following: - Vehicles with Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) refer to NOTE 13. - All other vehicles refer to NOTE 12. NOTE 12: Be sure to check for aftermarket performance products before replacing the PCM. If replacement is necessary refer to Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning NOTE 13: DTC is an indication of a failure mode in the Electronic Throttle Control system, which includes the APPS, ETB, and PCM. It is accompanied by other DTCs which provide repair direction. Proceed to Trouble Code Indexes to repair those DTCs, and the P0606 will not be reset. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only For diagnosis of code P0606 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0605 - P0609, ( P0606 P0607 P0608 0605 0606 0607 0608 0609 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0605 > Page 609 B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272 Note 5: Clear the DTC and retest. If the DTC is retrieved again, check for aftermarket performance products before replacing the AFCM. If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0605 - P0609, ( P0606 P0607 P0608 0605 0606 0607 0608 0609 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0605 > Page 610 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0645 - P0649, ( P0646 P0647 P0648 0645 0646 0647 0648 0649 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0645 - P0649: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0645 refer to chart P0505-P0722 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0645 - P0649, ( P0646 P0647 P0648 0645 0646 0647 0648 0649 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 614 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0655 - P0659, ( P0656 P0657 P0658 0655 0656 0657 0658 0659 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0655 - P0659: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0657 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0655 - P0659, ( P0656 P0657 P0658 0655 0656 0657 0658 0659 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 618 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0660 - P0664, ( P0661 P0662 P0663 0660 0661 0662 0663 0664 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0660 P0660 - P0664: Testing and Inspection P0660 For diagnosis of code P0660 refer to chart P0505-P0722 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0660 - P0664, ( P0661 P0662 P0663 0660 0661 0662 0663 0664 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0660 > Page 623 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0660 - P0664, ( P0661 P0662 P0663 0660 0661 0662 0663 0664 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0660 > Page 624 P0660 - P0664: Testing and Inspection P0663 For diagnosis of code P0663 refer to chart P0505-P0722 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0660 - P0664, ( P0661 P0662 P0663 0660 0661 0662 0663 0664 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0660 > Page 625 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0700 - P0704, ( P0701 P0702 P0703 0700 0701 0702 0703 0704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0703 P0700 - P0704: Testing and Inspection P0703 Engine Related Diagnosis For diagnosis of code P0703 refer to chart P0505-P0722 NOTE 15: REFER to Exterior Lighting component testing in Lighting and Horns for further diagnosis of the lighting control module LCM system. Make sure the brake pedal was applied and released for the KOER self-test and the brake pedal was applied for the KOEO self-test. See: Lighting and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0700 - P0704, ( P0701 P0702 P0703 0700 0701 0702 0703 0704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0703 > Page 631 Horns NOTE 16: REFER to Exterior Lighting component testing in Lighting and Horns for further diagnosis of the Smart Junction Box (SJB). Make sure the brake pedal was applied and released for the KOER self-test and the brake pedal was applied for the KOEO self-test. See: Lighting and Horns NOTE 17: REFER to Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems, for further diagnosis of the cause of the incorrect brake pedal status from the ABS to the PCM. Make sure the brake pedal was applied and released for the KOER self-test and the brake pedal was applied for the KOEO self-test. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Cruise Control Related Diagnosis For diagnosis of code P0703, refer to chart: P0500-P0703 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Cruise Control system, follow this link: See: Cruise Control/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0700 - P0704, ( P0701 P0702 P0703 0700 0701 0702 0703 0704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0703 > Page 632 P0700 - P0704: Testing and Inspection P0704 For diagnosis of code P0704 refer to chart P0505-P0722 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0700 - P0704, ( P0701 P0702 P0703 0700 0701 0702 0703 0704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0703 > Page 633 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709, ( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0705 P0705 - P0709: Testing and Inspection P0705 4R70W For diagnosis of code P0705 refer to chart Part 2 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709, ( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0705 > Page 638 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P0705 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709, ( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0705 > Page 639 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709, ( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0705 > Page 640 P0705 - P0709: Testing and Inspection P0706 For diagnosis of code P0706 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709, ( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0705 > Page 641 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709, ( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0705 > Page 642 P0705 - P0709: Testing and Inspection P0707 For diagnosis of code P0707 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709, ( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0705 > Page 643 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709, ( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0705 > Page 644 P0705 - P0709: Testing and Inspection P0708 Torqshift For diagnosis of code P0708 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709, ( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0705 > Page 645 - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R70W For diagnosis of code P0708 refer to chart Part 2 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709, ( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0705 > Page 646 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P0708 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709, ( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0705 > Page 647 - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0710 - P0714, ( P0711 P0712 P0713 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0710 P0710 - P0714: Testing and Inspection P0710 For diagnosis of code P0710 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0710 - P0714, ( P0711 P0712 P0713 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0710 > Page 652 Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0710 - P0714, ( P0711 P0712 P0713 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0710 > Page 653 P0710 - P0714: Testing and Inspection P0712 Torqshift For diagnosis of code P0712 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0710 - P0714, ( P0711 P0712 P0713 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0710 > Page 654 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R70W For diagnosis of code P0712 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0710 - P0714, ( P0711 P0712 P0713 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0710 > Page 655 Part 8 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0710 - P0714, ( P0711 P0712 P0713 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0710 > Page 656 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P0712 refer to chart Part 3 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0710 - P0714, ( P0711 P0712 P0713 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0710 > Page 657 Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0710 - P0714, ( P0711 P0712 P0713 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0710 > Page 658 P0710 - P0714: Testing and Inspection P0713 Torqshift For diagnosis of code P0713 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0710 - P0714, ( P0711 P0712 P0713 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0710 > Page 659 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R70W For diagnosis of code P0713 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0710 - P0714, ( P0711 P0712 P0713 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0710 > Page 660 Part 7 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0710 - P0714, ( P0711 P0712 P0713 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0710 > Page 661 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P0713 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0710 - P0714, ( P0711 P0712 P0713 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0710 > Page 662 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719, ( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715 P0715 - P0719: Testing and Inspection P0715 Torqshift For diagnosis of code P0715 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719, ( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715 > Page 667 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P0715 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719, ( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715 > Page 668 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719, ( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715 > Page 669 P0715 - P0719: Testing and Inspection P0717 Torqshift For diagnosis of code P0717 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719, ( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715 > Page 670 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P0717 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719, ( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715 > Page 671 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719, ( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715 > Page 672 P0715 - P0719: Testing and Inspection P0718 Torqshift For diagnosis of code P0718 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719, ( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715 > Page 673 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P0718 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719, ( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715 > Page 674 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724, ( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission P0720 - P0724: Testing and Inspection Manual Transmission P0720 For diagnosis of code P0720 refer to pinpoint test TJ1. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Pinpoint Tests/Tests TJ: Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection P0721 For diagnosis of code P0721 refer to pinpoint test TJ1. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Pinpoint Tests/Tests TJ: Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection P0722 For diagnosis of code P0722 refer to pinpoint test TJ1. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Pinpoint Tests/Tests TJ: Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection P0723 For diagnosis of code P0723 refer to pinpoint test TJ1. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Pinpoint Tests/Tests TJ: Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724, ( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission > Page 679 P0720 - P0724: Testing and Inspection Automatic Transmission Torqshift For diagnosis of code P0720 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724, ( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission > Page 680 Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R70W For diagnosis of code P0720 refer to chart Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724, ( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission > Page 681 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P0720 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724, ( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission > Page 682 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Torqshift Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724, ( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission > Page 683 For diagnosis of code P0721 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724, ( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission > Page 684 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R70W For diagnosis of code P0721 refer to chart Part 2 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724, ( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission > Page 685 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P0721 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724, ( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission > Page 686 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Torqshift For diagnosis of code P0722 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724, ( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission > Page 687 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724, ( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission > Page 688 4R70W For diagnosis of code P0722 refer to chart Part 3 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P0722 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724, ( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission > Page 689 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734, ( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0730 P0730 - P0734: Testing and Inspection P0730 For diagnosis of code P0730 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734, ( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0730 > Page 694 - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734, ( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0730 > Page 695 P0730 - P0734: Testing and Inspection P0731 4R70W For diagnosis of code P0731 refer to chart Part 3 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734, ( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0730 > Page 696 Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P0731 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734, ( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0730 > Page 697 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734, ( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0730 > Page 698 P0730 - P0734: Testing and Inspection P0732 4R70W For diagnosis of code P0732 refer to chart Part 4 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734, ( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0730 > Page 699 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P0732 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734, ( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0730 > Page 700 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734, ( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0730 > Page 701 P0730 - P0734: Testing and Inspection P0733 4R70W For diagnosis of code P0733 refer to chart Part 4 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734, ( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0730 > Page 702 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P0733 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734, ( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0730 > Page 703 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734, ( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0730 > Page 704 P0730 - P0734: Testing and Inspection P0734 For diagnosis of code P0734 refer to chart Part 4 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734, ( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0730 > Page 705 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744, ( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 P0740 - P0744: Testing and Inspection P0740 Torqshift For diagnosis of code P0740 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744, ( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 710 Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R70W For diagnosis of code P0740 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744, ( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 711 Part 8 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P0740 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744, ( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 712 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744, ( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 713 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744, ( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 714 P0740 - P0744: Testing and Inspection P0741 Torqshift For diagnosis of code P0741 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744, ( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 715 Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R70W For diagnosis of code P0741 refer to chart Part 3 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744, ( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 716 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P0741 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744, ( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 717 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744, ( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 718 P0740 - P0744: Testing and Inspection P0742 For diagnosis of code P0742 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744, ( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 719 - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744, ( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 720 P0740 - P0744: Testing and Inspection P0743 Torqshift For diagnosis of code P0743 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744, ( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 721 Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R70W For diagnosis of code P0743 refer to chart Part 3 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744, ( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 722 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P0743 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744, ( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 723 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744, ( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 724 P0740 - P0744: Testing and Inspection P0744 For diagnosis of code P0744 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744, ( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 725 Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0745 - P0749, ( P0746 P0747 P0748 0745 0746 0747 0748 0749 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > 4R70W P0745 - P0749: Testing and Inspection 4R70W For diagnosis of code P0748 refer to chart Part 9 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0745 - P0749, ( P0746 P0747 P0748 0745 0746 0747 0748 0749 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > 4R70W > Page 730 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0745 - P0749, ( P0746 P0747 P0748 0745 0746 0747 0748 0749 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > 4R70W > Page 731 P0745 - P0749: Testing and Inspection Torqshift For diagnosis of code P0748 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0745 - P0749, ( P0746 P0747 P0748 0745 0746 0747 0748 0749 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > 4R70W > Page 732 Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754, ( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750 P0750 - P0754: Testing and Inspection P0750 Torqshift For diagnosis of code P0750 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754, ( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750 > Page 737 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R70W For diagnosis of code P0750 refer to chart Part 5 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754, ( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750 > Page 738 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P0750 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754, ( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750 > Page 739 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754, ( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750 > Page 740 P0750 - P0754: Testing and Inspection P0752 For diagnosis of code P0752 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754, ( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750 > Page 741 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754, ( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750 > Page 742 P0750 - P0754: Testing and Inspection P0753 Torqshift For diagnosis of code P0753 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754, ( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750 > Page 743 - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R70W For diagnosis of code P0753 refer to chart Part 5 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754, ( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750 > Page 744 Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P0753 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754, ( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750 > Page 745 - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759, ( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755 P0755 - P0759: Testing and Inspection P0755 Torqshift For diagnosis of code P0755 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759, ( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755 > Page 750 - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R70W For diagnosis of code P0755 refer to chart Part 5 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759, ( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755 > Page 751 Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P0755 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759, ( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755 > Page 752 - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759, ( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755 > Page 753 P0755 - P0759: Testing and Inspection P0757 For diagnosis of code P0757 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759, ( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755 > Page 754 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759, ( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755 > Page 755 P0755 - P0759: Testing and Inspection P0758 Torqshift For diagnosis of code P0758 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759, ( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755 > Page 756 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R70W For diagnosis of code P0758 refer to chart Part 5 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759, ( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755 > Page 757 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P0758 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759, ( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755 > Page 758 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0760 - P0764, ( P0761 P0762 P0763 0760 0761 0762 0763 0764 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0760 - P0764: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0762 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0760 - P0764, ( P0761 P0762 P0763 0760 0761 0762 0763 0764 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 762 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0765 - P0769, ( P0766 P0767 P0768 0765 0766 0767 0768 0769 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0766 P0765 - P0769: Testing and Inspection P0766 For diagnosis of code P0766 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0765 - P0769, ( P0766 P0767 P0768 0765 0766 0767 0768 0769 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0766 > Page 767 Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0765 - P0769, ( P0766 P0767 P0768 0765 0766 0767 0768 0769 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0766 > Page 768 P0765 - P0769: Testing and Inspection P0767 For diagnosis of code P0767 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0765 - P0769, ( P0766 P0767 P0768 0765 0766 0767 0768 0769 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0766 > Page 769 Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0770 - P0774, ( P0771 P0772 P0773 0770 0771 0772 0773 0774 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0771 P0770 - P0774: Testing and Inspection P0771 For diagnosis of code P0771 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0770 - P0774, ( P0771 P0772 P0773 0770 0771 0772 0773 0774 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0771 > Page 774 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0770 - P0774, ( P0771 P0772 P0773 0770 0771 0772 0773 0774 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0771 > Page 775 P0770 - P0774: Testing and Inspection P0772 For diagnosis of code P0772 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0770 - P0774, ( P0771 P0772 P0773 0770 0771 0772 0773 0774 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0771 > Page 776 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0770 - P0774, ( P0771 P0772 P0773 0770 0771 0772 0773 0774 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0771 > Page 777 P0770 - P0774: Testing and Inspection P0773 For diagnosis of code P0773 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0770 - P0774, ( P0771 P0772 P0773 0770 0771 0772 0773 0774 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0771 > Page 778 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0780 - P0784, ( P0781 P0782 P0783 0780 0781 0782 0783 0784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0781 P0780 - P0784: Testing and Inspection P0781 4R70W For diagnosis of code P0781 refer to chart Part 6 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0780 - P0784, ( P0781 P0782 P0783 0780 0781 0782 0783 0784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0781 > Page 783 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P0781 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0780 - P0784, ( P0781 P0782 P0783 0780 0781 0782 0783 0784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0781 > Page 784 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0780 - P0784, ( P0781 P0782 P0783 0780 0781 0782 0783 0784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0781 > Page 785 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0780 - P0784, ( P0781 P0782 P0783 0780 0781 0782 0783 0784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0781 > Page 786 P0780 - P0784: Testing and Inspection P0782 4R70W For diagnosis of code P0782 refer to chart Part 6 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0780 - P0784, ( P0781 P0782 P0783 0780 0781 0782 0783 0784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0781 > Page 787 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P0782 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0780 - P0784, ( P0781 P0782 P0783 0780 0781 0782 0783 0784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0781 > Page 788 - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0780 - P0784, ( P0781 P0782 P0783 0780 0781 0782 0783 0784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0781 > Page 789 P0780 - P0784: Testing and Inspection P0783 4R70W For diagnosis of code P0783 refer to chart Part 6 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0780 - P0784, ( P0781 P0782 P0783 0780 0781 0782 0783 0784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0781 > Page 790 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P0783 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0780 - P0784, ( P0781 P0782 P0783 0780 0781 0782 0783 0784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0781 > Page 791 - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0790 - P0794, ( P0791 P0792 P0793 0790 0791 0792 0793 0794 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0790 - P0794: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0793 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0790 - P0794, ( P0791 P0792 P0793 0790 0791 0792 0793 0794 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 795 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0800-P08ZZ > P0815 - P0819, ( P0816 P0817 P0818 0815 0816 0817 0818 0819 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0815 - P0819: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0815 refer to chart P0815-P1780 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0800-P08ZZ > P0840 - P0844, ( P0841 P0842 P0843 0840 0841 0842 0843 0844 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0840 - P0844: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0841 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0800-P08ZZ > P0840 - P0844, ( P0841 P0842 P0843 0840 0841 0842 0843 0844 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 803 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0800-P08ZZ > P0845 - P0849, ( P0846 P0847 P0848 0845 0846 0847 0848 0849 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0845 - P0849: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0846 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0800-P08ZZ > P0845 - P0849, ( P0846 P0847 P0848 0845 0846 0847 0848 0849 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 807 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0800-P08ZZ > P0870 - P0874, ( P0871 P0872 P0873 0870 0871 0872 0873 0874 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0870 - P0874: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0871 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0800-P08ZZ > P0870 - P0874, ( P0871 P0872 P0873 0870 0871 0872 0873 0874 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 811 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0800-P08ZZ > P0875 - P0879, ( P0876 P0877 P0878 0875 0876 0877 0878 0879 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0875 - P0879: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0876 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0800-P08ZZ > P0875 - P0879, ( P0876 P0877 P0878 0875 0876 0877 0878 0879 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 815 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0960 - P0964, ( P0961 P0962 P0963 0960 0961 0962 0963 0964 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0960 P0960 - P0964: Testing and Inspection P0960 4R70W For diagnosis of code P0960 refer to chart Part 9 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0960 - P0964, ( P0961 P0962 P0963 0960 0961 0962 0963 0964 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0960 > Page 821 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Torqshift For diagnosis of code P0960 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0960 - P0964, ( P0961 P0962 P0963 0960 0961 0962 0963 0964 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0960 > Page 822 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0960 - P0964, ( P0961 P0962 P0963 0960 0961 0962 0963 0964 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0960 > Page 823 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0960 - P0964, ( P0961 P0962 P0963 0960 0961 0962 0963 0964 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0960 > Page 824 P0960 - P0964: Testing and Inspection P0962 4R70W For diagnosis of code P0962 refer to chart Part 9 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0960 - P0964, ( P0961 P0962 P0963 0960 0961 0962 0963 0964 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0960 > Page 825 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Torqshift For diagnosis of code P0962 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0960 - P0964, ( P0961 P0962 P0963 0960 0961 0962 0963 0964 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0960 > Page 826 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0960 - P0964, ( P0961 P0962 P0963 0960 0961 0962 0963 0964 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0960 > Page 827 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0960 - P0964, ( P0961 P0962 P0963 0960 0961 0962 0963 0964 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0960 > Page 828 P0960 - P0964: Testing and Inspection P0963 Torqshift For diagnosis of code P0963 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0960 - P0964, ( P0961 P0962 P0963 0960 0961 0962 0963 0964 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0960 > Page 829 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R70W For diagnosis of code P0963 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0960 - P0964, ( P0961 P0962 P0963 0960 0961 0962 0963 0964 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0960 > Page 830 Part 9 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0960 - P0964, ( P0961 P0962 P0963 0960 0961 0962 0963 0964 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0960 > Page 831 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0970 - P0974, ( P0971 P0972 P0973 0970 0971 0972 0973 0974 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0972 P0970 - P0974: Testing and Inspection P0972 For diagnosis of code P0972 refer to chart Part 5 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0970 - P0974, ( P0971 P0972 P0973 0970 0971 0972 0973 0974 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0972 > Page 836 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0970 - P0974, ( P0971 P0972 P0973 0970 0971 0972 0973 0974 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0972 > Page 837 P0970 - P0974: Testing and Inspection P0973 For diagnosis of code P0973 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0970 - P0974, ( P0971 P0972 P0973 0970 0971 0972 0973 0974 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0972 > Page 838 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0970 - P0974, ( P0971 P0972 P0973 0970 0971 0972 0973 0974 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0972 > Page 839 P0970 - P0974: Testing and Inspection P0974 For diagnosis of code P0974 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0970 - P0974, ( P0971 P0972 P0973 0970 0971 0972 0973 0974 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0972 > Page 840 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0975 - P0979, ( P0976 P0977 P0978 0975 0976 0977 0978 0979 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0975 P0975 - P0979: Testing and Inspection P0975 For diagnosis of code P0975 refer to chart Part 5 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0975 - P0979, ( P0976 P0977 P0978 0975 0976 0977 0978 0979 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0975 > Page 845 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0975 - P0979, ( P0976 P0977 P0978 0975 0976 0977 0978 0979 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0975 > Page 846 P0975 - P0979: Testing and Inspection P0976 For diagnosis of code P0976 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0975 - P0979, ( P0976 P0977 P0978 0975 0976 0977 0978 0979 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0975 > Page 847 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0975 - P0979, ( P0976 P0977 P0978 0975 0976 0977 0978 0979 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0975 > Page 848 P0975 - P0979: Testing and Inspection P0977 For diagnosis of code P0977 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0975 - P0979, ( P0976 P0977 P0978 0975 0976 0977 0978 0979 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0975 > Page 849 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0975 - P0979, ( P0976 P0977 P0978 0975 0976 0977 0978 0979 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0975 > Page 850 P0975 - P0979: Testing and Inspection P0978 For diagnosis of code P0978 refer to chart Part 5 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0975 - P0979, ( P0976 P0977 P0978 0975 0976 0977 0978 0979 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0975 > Page 851 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0975 - P0979, ( P0976 P0977 P0978 0975 0976 0977 0978 0979 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0975 > Page 852 P0975 - P0979: Testing and Inspection P0979 For diagnosis of code P0979 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0975 - P0979, ( P0976 P0977 P0978 0975 0976 0977 0978 0979 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0975 > Page 853 Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0980 - P0984, ( P0981 P0982 P0983 0980 0981 0982 0983 0984 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0980 P0980 - P0984: Testing and Inspection P0980 For diagnosis of code P0980 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0980 - P0984, ( P0981 P0982 P0983 0980 0981 0982 0983 0984 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0980 > Page 858 Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0980 - P0984, ( P0981 P0982 P0983 0980 0981 0982 0983 0984 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0980 > Page 859 P0980 - P0984: Testing and Inspection P0981 For diagnosis of code P0981 refer to chart Part 5 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0980 - P0984, ( P0981 P0982 P0983 0980 0981 0982 0983 0984 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0980 > Page 860 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0980 - P0984, ( P0981 P0982 P0983 0980 0981 0982 0983 0984 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0980 > Page 861 P0980 - P0984: Testing and Inspection P0982 For diagnosis of code P0982 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0980 - P0984, ( P0981 P0982 P0983 0980 0981 0982 0983 0984 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0980 > Page 862 Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0980 - P0984, ( P0981 P0982 P0983 0980 0981 0982 0983 0984 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0980 > Page 863 P0980 - P0984: Testing and Inspection P0983 For diagnosis of code P0983 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0980 - P0984, ( P0981 P0982 P0983 0980 0981 0982 0983 0984 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0980 > Page 864 Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0980 - P0984, ( P0981 P0982 P0983 0980 0981 0982 0983 0984 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0980 > Page 865 P0980 - P0984: Testing and Inspection P0984 For diagnosis of code P0984 refer to chart Part 5 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0980 - P0984, ( P0981 P0982 P0983 0980 0981 0982 0983 0984 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0980 > Page 866 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0985 - P0989, ( P0986 P0987 P0988 0985 0986 0987 0988 0989 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0985 P0985 - P0989: Testing and Inspection P0985 For diagnosis of code P0985 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0985 - P0989, ( P0986 P0987 P0988 0985 0986 0987 0988 0989 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0985 > Page 871 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0985 - P0989, ( P0986 P0987 P0988 0985 0986 0987 0988 0989 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0985 > Page 872 P0985 - P0989: Testing and Inspection P0986 For diagnosis of code P0986 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0985 - P0989, ( P0986 P0987 P0988 0985 0986 0987 0988 0989 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0985 > Page 873 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0985 - P0989, ( P0986 P0987 P0988 0985 0986 0987 0988 0989 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0985 > Page 874 P0985 - P0989: Testing and Inspection P0988 For diagnosis of code P0988 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0985 - P0989, ( P0986 P0987 P0988 0985 0986 0987 0988 0989 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0985 > Page 875 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1000-P10ZZ > P1000 - P1004, ( P1001 P1002 P1003 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1000 P1000 - P1004: Testing and Inspection P1000 For diagnosis of code P1000 refer to chart P0723-P1150 Note 19: DTC P1000 is ignored in the KOEO and KOER self-test. Disregard DTC P1000 and continue as directed. If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1000-P10ZZ > P1000 - P1004, ( P1001 P1002 P1003 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1000 > Page 881 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1000-P10ZZ > P1000 - P1004, ( P1001 P1002 P1003 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1000 > Page 882 P1000 - P1004: Testing and Inspection P1001 For diagnosis of code P1001 refer to chart P0723-P1150 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1000-P10ZZ > P1000 - P1004, ( P1001 P1002 P1003 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1000 > Page 883 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1100 - P1104, ( P1101 P1102 P1103 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1100 P1100 - P1104: Testing and Inspection P1100 For diagnosis of code P1100 refer to chart P0723-P1150 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1100 - P1104, ( P1101 P1102 P1103 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1100 > Page 889 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1100 - P1104, ( P1101 P1102 P1103 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1100 > Page 890 P1100 - P1104: Testing and Inspection P1101 For diagnosis of code P1101 refer to chart P0723-P1150 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1100 - P1104, ( P1101 P1102 P1103 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1100 > Page 891 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1110 - P1114, ( P1111 P1112 P1113 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1112 P1110 - P1114: Testing and Inspection P1112 For diagnosis of code P1112 refer to chart P0723-P1150 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1110 - P1114, ( P1111 P1112 P1113 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1112 > Page 896 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1110 - P1114, ( P1111 P1112 P1113 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1112 > Page 897 P1110 - P1114: Testing and Inspection P1114 For diagnosis of code P1114 refer to chart P0723-P1150 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1110 - P1114, ( P1111 P1112 P1113 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1112 > Page 898 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1115 - P1119, ( P1116 P1117 P1118 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1115 P1115 - P1119: Testing and Inspection P1115 For diagnosis of code P1115 refer to chart P0723-P1150 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1115 - P1119, ( P1116 P1117 P1118 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1115 > Page 903 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1115 - P1119, ( P1116 P1117 P1118 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1115 > Page 904 P1115 - P1119: Testing and Inspection P1116 For diagnosis of code P1116 refer to chart P0723-P1150 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1115 - P1119, ( P1116 P1117 P1118 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1115 > Page 905 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1115 - P1119, ( P1116 P1117 P1118 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1115 > Page 906 P1115 - P1119: Testing and Inspection P1117 For diagnosis of code P1117 refer to chart P0723-P1150 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1115 - P1119, ( P1116 P1117 P1118 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1115 > Page 907 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1120 - P1124, ( P1121 P1122 P1123 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1120 P1120 - P1124: Testing and Inspection P1120 For diagnosis of code P1120 refer to chart P0723-P1150 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1120 - P1124, ( P1121 P1122 P1123 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1120 > Page 912 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1120 - P1124, ( P1121 P1122 P1123 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1120 > Page 913 P1120 - P1124: Testing and Inspection P1121 For diagnosis of code P1121 refer to chart P0723-P1150 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1120 - P1124, ( P1121 P1122 P1123 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1120 > Page 914 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1120 - P1124, ( P1121 P1122 P1123 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1120 > Page 915 P1120 - P1124: Testing and Inspection P1124 For diagnosis of code P1124 refer to chart P0723-P1150 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1120 - P1124, ( P1121 P1122 P1123 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1120 > Page 916 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129, ( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 P1125 - P1129: Testing and Inspection P1125 For diagnosis of code P1125 refer to chart P0723-P1150 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129, ( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 921 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129, ( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 922 P1125 - P1129: Testing and Inspection P1127 For diagnosis of code P1127 refer to chart P0723-P1150 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129, ( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 923 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129, ( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 924 P1125 - P1129: Testing and Inspection P1128 For diagnosis of code P1128 refer to chart P0723-P1150 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129, ( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 925 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129, ( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 926 P1125 - P1129: Testing and Inspection P1129 For diagnosis of code P1129 refer to chart P0723-P1150 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129, ( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 927 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1130 - P1134, ( P1131 P1132 P1133 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1130 P1130 - P1134: Testing and Inspection P1130 For diagnosis of code P1130 refer to chart P0723-P1150 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1130 - P1134, ( P1131 P1132 P1133 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1130 > Page 932 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1130 - P1134, ( P1131 P1132 P1133 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1130 > Page 933 P1130 - P1134: Testing and Inspection P1131 For diagnosis of code P1131 refer to chart P0723-P1150 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1130 - P1134, ( P1131 P1132 P1133 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1130 > Page 934 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1130 - P1134, ( P1131 P1132 P1133 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1130 > Page 935 P1130 - P1134: Testing and Inspection P1132 For diagnosis of code P1132 refer to chart P0723-P1150 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1130 - P1134, ( P1131 P1132 P1133 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1130 > Page 936 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1135 - P1139, ( P1136 P1137 P1138 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1137 P1135 - P1139: Testing and Inspection P1137 For diagnosis of code P1137 refer to chart P0723-P1150 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1135 - P1139, ( P1136 P1137 P1138 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1137 > Page 941 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1135 - P1139, ( P1136 P1137 P1138 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1137 > Page 942 P1135 - P1139: Testing and Inspection P1138 For diagnosis of code P1138 refer to chart P0723-P1150 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1135 - P1139, ( P1136 P1137 P1138 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1137 > Page 943 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1150 - P1154, ( P1151 P1152 P1153 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1150 P1150 - P1154: Testing and Inspection P1150 For diagnosis of code P1150 refer to chart P0723-P1150 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1150 - P1154, ( P1151 P1152 P1153 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1150 > Page 948 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1150 - P1154, ( P1151 P1152 P1153 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1150 > Page 949 P1150 - P1154: Testing and Inspection P1151 For diagnosis of code P1151 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1150 - P1154, ( P1151 P1152 P1153 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1150 > Page 950 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1150 - P1154, ( P1151 P1152 P1153 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1150 > Page 951 P1150 - P1154: Testing and Inspection P1152 For diagnosis of code P1152 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1150 - P1154, ( P1151 P1152 P1153 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1150 > Page 952 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1155 - P1159, ( P1156 P1157 P1158 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1157 P1155 - P1159: Testing and Inspection P1157 For diagnosis of code P1157 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1155 - P1159, ( P1156 P1157 P1158 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1157 > Page 957 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1155 - P1159, ( P1156 P1157 P1158 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1157 > Page 958 P1155 - P1159: Testing and Inspection P1158 For diagnosis of code P1158 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1155 - P1159, ( P1156 P1157 P1158 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1157 > Page 959 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1165 - P1169, ( P1166 P1167 P1168 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1168 P1165 - P1169: Testing and Inspection P1168 For diagnosis of code P1168 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1165 - P1169, ( P1166 P1167 P1168 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1168 > Page 964 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1165 - P1169, ( P1166 P1167 P1168 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1168 > Page 965 P1165 - P1169: Testing and Inspection P1169 For diagnosis of code P1169 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1165 - P1169, ( P1166 P1167 P1168 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1168 > Page 966 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184, ( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180 P1180 - P1184: Testing and Inspection P1180 For diagnosis of code P1180 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184, ( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180 > Page 971 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184, ( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180 > Page 972 P1180 - P1184: Testing and Inspection P1181 For diagnosis of code P1181 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184, ( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180 > Page 973 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184, ( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180 > Page 974 P1180 - P1184: Testing and Inspection P1184 For diagnosis of code P1184 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184, ( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180 > Page 975 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1225 - P1229, ( P1226 P1227 P1228 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1225 - P1229: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1229 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1230 - P1234, ( P1231 P1232 P1233 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1232 P1230 - P1234: Testing and Inspection P1232 For diagnosis of code P1232 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1230 - P1234, ( P1231 P1232 P1233 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1232 > Page 984 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1230 - P1234, ( P1231 P1232 P1233 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1232 > Page 985 P1230 - P1234: Testing and Inspection P1233 For diagnosis of code P1233 refer to chart P1151-P1309 NOTE 20: Go to Information Bus for REM (Rear Electronics Module) self-test diagnostics. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1230 - P1234, ( P1231 P1232 P1233 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1232 > Page 986 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239, ( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235 P1235 - P1239: Testing and Inspection P1235 For diagnosis of code P1235 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239, ( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235 > Page 991 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239, ( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235 > Page 992 P1235 - P1239: Testing and Inspection P1237 For diagnosis of code P1237 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239, ( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235 > Page 993 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1240 - P1244, ( P1241 P1242 P1243 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1240 - P1244: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1244 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1245 - P1249, ( P1246 P1247 P1248 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1245 P1245 - P1249: Testing and Inspection P1245 For diagnosis of code P1245 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1245 - P1249, ( P1246 P1247 P1248 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1245 > Page 1001 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1245 - P1249, ( P1246 P1247 P1248 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1245 > Page 1002 P1245 - P1249: Testing and Inspection P1246 For diagnosis of P1246 refer to the system experiencing the problem. Computers and Control Systems P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1245 - P1249, ( P1246 P1247 P1248 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1245 > Page 1003 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Charging System DTC Index P1246 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Charging System diagnostic information, See: Starting and Charging/Charging System/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264, ( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1260 P1260 - P1264: Testing and Inspection P1260 For diagnosis of code P1260 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264, ( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1260 > Page 1008 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264, ( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1260 > Page 1009 P1260 - P1264: Testing and Inspection P1261 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P1261 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264, ( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1260 > Page 1010 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only For diagnosis of code P1261 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264, ( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1260 > Page 1011 B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264, ( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1260 > Page 1012 P1260 - P1264: Testing and Inspection P1262 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P1262 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264, ( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1260 > Page 1013 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only For diagnosis of code P1262 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264, ( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1260 > Page 1014 B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264, ( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1260 > Page 1015 P1260 - P1264: Testing and Inspection P1263 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P1263 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264, ( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1260 > Page 1016 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only For diagnosis of code P1263 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264, ( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1260 > Page 1017 B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264, ( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1260 > Page 1018 P1260 - P1264: Testing and Inspection P1264 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P1264 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264, ( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1260 > Page 1019 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only For diagnosis of code P1264 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264, ( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1260 > Page 1020 B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1265 - P1269, ( P1266 P1267 P1268 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1265 P1265 - P1269: Testing and Inspection P1265 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P1265 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1265 - P1269, ( P1266 P1267 P1268 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1265 > Page 1025 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only For diagnosis of code P1265 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1265 - P1269, ( P1266 P1267 P1268 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1265 > Page 1026 B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1265 - P1269, ( P1266 P1267 P1268 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1265 > Page 1027 P1265 - P1269: Testing and Inspection P1266 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P1266 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1265 - P1269, ( P1266 P1267 P1268 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1265 > Page 1028 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only For diagnosis of code P1266 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1265 - P1269, ( P1266 P1267 P1268 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1265 > Page 1029 B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1265 - P1269, ( P1266 P1267 P1268 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1265 > Page 1030 P1265 - P1269: Testing and Inspection P1267 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P1267 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1265 - P1269, ( P1266 P1267 P1268 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1265 > Page 1031 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only For diagnosis of code P1267 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1265 - P1269, ( P1266 P1267 P1268 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1265 > Page 1032 B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1265 - P1269, ( P1266 P1267 P1268 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1265 > Page 1033 P1265 - P1269: Testing and Inspection P1268 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P1268 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1265 - P1269, ( P1266 P1267 P1268 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1265 > Page 1034 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only For diagnosis of code P1268 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1265 - P1269, ( P1266 P1267 P1268 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1265 > Page 1035 B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274, ( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1270 P1270 - P1274: Testing and Inspection P1270 For diagnosis of code P1270 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274, ( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1270 > Page 1040 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274, ( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1270 > Page 1041 P1270 - P1274: Testing and Inspection P1271 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P1271 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274, ( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1270 > Page 1042 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only For diagnosis of code P1271 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274, ( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1270 > Page 1043 B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274, ( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1270 > Page 1044 P1270 - P1274: Testing and Inspection P1272 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P1272 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274, ( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1270 > Page 1045 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only For diagnosis of code P1272 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274, ( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1270 > Page 1046 B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274, ( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1270 > Page 1047 P1270 - P1274: Testing and Inspection P1273 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P1273 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274, ( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1270 > Page 1048 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only For diagnosis of code P1273 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274, ( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1270 > Page 1049 P0182-P1273 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274, ( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1270 > Page 1050 P1270 - P1274: Testing and Inspection P1274 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P1274 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274, ( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1270 > Page 1051 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only For diagnosis of code P1274 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274, ( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1270 > Page 1052 P0182-P1273 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1275 - P1279, ( P1276 P1277 P1278 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1275 P1275 - P1279: Testing and Inspection P1275 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P1275 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1275 - P1279, ( P1276 P1277 P1278 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1275 > Page 1057 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only For diagnosis of code P1275 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1275 - P1279, ( P1276 P1277 P1278 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1275 > Page 1058 P0182-P1273 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1275 - P1279, ( P1276 P1277 P1278 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1275 > Page 1059 P1275 - P1279: Testing and Inspection P1276 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P1276 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1275 - P1279, ( P1276 P1277 P1278 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1275 > Page 1060 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only For diagnosis of code P1276 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1275 - P1279, ( P1276 P1277 P1278 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1275 > Page 1061 P0182-P1273 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1275 - P1279, ( P1276 P1277 P1278 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1275 > Page 1062 P1275 - P1279: Testing and Inspection P1277 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P1277 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1275 - P1279, ( P1276 P1277 P1278 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1275 > Page 1063 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only For diagnosis of code P1277 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1275 - P1279, ( P1276 P1277 P1278 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1275 > Page 1064 P0182-P1273 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1275 - P1279, ( P1276 P1277 P1278 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1275 > Page 1065 P1275 - P1279: Testing and Inspection P1278 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P1278 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1275 - P1279, ( P1276 P1277 P1278 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1275 > Page 1066 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only For diagnosis of code P1278 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1275 - P1279, ( P1276 P1277 P1278 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1275 > Page 1067 P0182-P1273 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1285 - P1289, ( P1286 P1287 P1288 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1285 P1285 - P1289: Testing and Inspection P1285 For diagnosis of code P1285 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1285 - P1289, ( P1286 P1287 P1288 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1285 > Page 1072 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1285 - P1289, ( P1286 P1287 P1288 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1285 > Page 1073 P1285 - P1289: Testing and Inspection P1288 For diagnosis of code P1288 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1285 - P1289, ( P1286 P1287 P1288 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1285 > Page 1074 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1285 - P1289, ( P1286 P1287 P1288 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1285 > Page 1075 P1285 - P1289: Testing and Inspection P1289 For diagnosis of code P1289 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1285 - P1289, ( P1286 P1287 P1288 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1285 > Page 1076 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1290 - P1294, ( P1291 P1292 P1293 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1290 - P1294: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1290 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1295 - P1299, ( P1296 P1297 P1298 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1295 - P1299: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1299 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1305 - P1309, ( P1306 P1307 P1308 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1305 - P1309: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1309 refer to chart P1151-P1309 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1335 - P1339, ( P1336 P1337 P1338 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1335 - P1339: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1336 refer to chart P1336-P1477 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1380 - P1384, ( P1381 P1382 P1383 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1380 P1380 - P1384: Testing and Inspection P1380 For diagnosis of code P1380 refer to chart P1336-P1477 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1380 - P1384, ( P1381 P1382 P1383 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1380 > Page 1094 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1380 - P1384, ( P1381 P1382 P1383 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1380 > Page 1095 P1380 - P1384: Testing and Inspection P1381 For diagnosis of code P1381 refer to chart P1336-P1477 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1380 - P1384, ( P1381 P1382 P1383 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1380 > Page 1096 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1380 - P1384, ( P1381 P1382 P1383 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1380 > Page 1097 P1380 - P1384: Testing and Inspection P1383 For diagnosis of code P1383 refer to chart P1336-P1477 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1380 - P1384, ( P1381 P1382 P1383 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1380 > Page 1098 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1385 - P1389, ( P1386 P1387 P1388 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1385 P1385 - P1389: Testing and Inspection P1385 For diagnosis of code P1385 refer to chart P1336-P1477 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1385 - P1389, ( P1386 P1387 P1388 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1385 > Page 1103 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1385 - P1389, ( P1386 P1387 P1388 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1385 > Page 1104 P1385 - P1389: Testing and Inspection P1386 For diagnosis of code P1386 refer to chart P1336-P1477 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1385 - P1389, ( P1386 P1387 P1388 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1385 > Page 1105 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1385 - P1389, ( P1386 P1387 P1388 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1385 > Page 1106 P1385 - P1389: Testing and Inspection P1388 For diagnosis of code P1388 refer to chart P1336-P1477 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1385 - P1389, ( P1386 P1387 P1388 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1385 > Page 1107 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1395 - P1399, ( P1396 P1397 P1398 1395 1396 1397 1398 1399 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1395 - P1399: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1397 refer to NOTE 36: NOTE 36: Refer to the Charging System and diagnose the charging system concern. See: Starting and Charging/Charging System/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1400 - P1404, ( P1401 P1402 P1403 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1400 P1400 - P1404: Testing and Inspection P1400 For diagnosis of code P1400 refer to chart P1336-P1477 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1400 - P1404, ( P1401 P1402 P1403 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1400 > Page 1116 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1400 - P1404, ( P1401 P1402 P1403 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1400 > Page 1117 P1400 - P1404: Testing and Inspection P1401 For diagnosis of code P1401 refer to chart P1336-P1477 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1400 - P1404, ( P1401 P1402 P1403 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1400 > Page 1118 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409, ( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 P1405 - P1409: Testing and Inspection P1405 For diagnosis of code P1405 refer to chart P1336-P1477 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409, ( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 1123 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409, ( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 1124 P1405 - P1409: Testing and Inspection P1406 For diagnosis of code P1406 refer to chart P1336-P1477 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409, ( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 1125 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409, ( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 1126 P1405 - P1409: Testing and Inspection P1408 For diagnosis of code P1408 refer to chart P1336-P1477 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409, ( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 1127 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409, ( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 1128 P1405 - P1409: Testing and Inspection P1409 For diagnosis of code P1409 refer to chart P1336-P1477 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409, ( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 1129 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1435 - P1439, ( P1436 P1437 P1438 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1436 P1435 - P1439: Testing and Inspection P1436 For diagnosis of code P1436 refer to chart P1336-P1477 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1435 - P1439, ( P1436 P1437 P1438 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1436 > Page 1134 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1435 - P1439, ( P1436 P1437 P1438 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1436 > Page 1135 P1435 - P1439: Testing and Inspection P1437 For diagnosis of code P1437 refer to chart P1336-P1477 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1435 - P1439, ( P1436 P1437 P1438 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1436 > Page 1136 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1440 - P1444, ( P1441 P1442 P1443 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1440 - P1444: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1443 refer to the system experiencing the problem. Computers and Control Systems P1336-P1477 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1440 - P1444, ( P1441 P1442 P1443 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 1140 Inspection Evaporative Emissions System DTC Index P0442 - P1450 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Evaporative Emissions diagnostic information, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1450 - P1454, ( P1451 P1452 P1453 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1450 - P1454: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1451 refer to chart P1336-P1477 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464, ( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 P1460 - P1464: Testing and Inspection P1460 For diagnosis of code P1460 refer to chart P1336-P1477 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464, ( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 1148 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464, ( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 1149 P1460 - P1464: Testing and Inspection P1461 For diagnosis of code P1461 refer to chart P1336-P1477 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464, ( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 1150 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464, ( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 1151 P1460 - P1464: Testing and Inspection P1462 For diagnosis of code P1462 refer to chart P1336-P1477 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464, ( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 1152 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464, ( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 1153 P1460 - P1464: Testing and Inspection P1463 For diagnosis of code P1463 refer to chart P1336-P1477 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464, ( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 1154 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1465 - P1469, ( P1466 P1467 P1468 1465 1466 1467 1468 1469 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1465 - P1469: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1469 refer to chart P1336-P1477 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1470 - P1474, ( P1471 P1472 P1473 1470 1471 1472 1473 1474 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1470 - P1474: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1474 refer to chart P1336-P1477 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1475 - P1479, ( P1476 P1477 P1478 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1477 P1475 - P1479: Testing and Inspection P1477 For diagnosis of code P1477 refer to chart P1336-P1477 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1475 - P1479, ( P1476 P1477 P1478 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1477 > Page 1165 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1475 - P1479, ( P1476 P1477 P1478 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1477 > Page 1166 P1475 - P1479: Testing and Inspection P1479 For diagnosis of code P1479 refer to chart P1479-P1640 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1475 - P1479, ( P1476 P1477 P1478 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1477 > Page 1167 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1485 - P1489, ( P1486 P1487 P1488 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1485 - P1489: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1489 refer to chart P1479-P1640 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504, ( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 P1500 - P1504: Testing and Inspection P1500 For diagnosis of code P1500 refer to chart P1479-P1640 NOTE 6: Go to Transmission Control Systems. See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504, ( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 1176 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504, ( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 1177 P1500 - P1504: Testing and Inspection P1502 For diagnosis of code P1502 refer to chart P1479-P1640 NOTE 8: Vehicle speed information is provided by the anti-lock brake system. Go to Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection NOTE 18: All Automatic Transmissions go to Transmission Control Systems. See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504, ( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 1178 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504, ( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 1179 P1500 - P1504: Testing and Inspection P1504 For diagnosis of code P1504 refer to chart P1479-P1640 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504, ( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 1180 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1505 - P1509, ( P1506 P1507 P1508 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1506 P1505 - P1509: Testing and Inspection P1506 For diagnosis of code P1506 refer to chart P1479-P1640 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1505 - P1509, ( P1506 P1507 P1508 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1506 > Page 1185 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1505 - P1509, ( P1506 P1507 P1508 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1506 > Page 1186 P1505 - P1509: Testing and Inspection P1507 For diagnosis of code P1507 refer to chart P1479-P1640 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1505 - P1509, ( P1506 P1507 P1508 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1506 > Page 1187 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1510 - P1514, ( P1511 P1512 P1513 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1512 P1510 - P1514: Testing and Inspection P1512 For diagnosis of code P1512 refer to chart P1479-P1640 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1510 - P1514, ( P1511 P1512 P1513 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1512 > Page 1192 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1510 - P1514, ( P1511 P1512 P1513 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1512 > Page 1193 P1510 - P1514: Testing and Inspection P1513 For diagnosis of code P1513 refer to chart P1479-P1640 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1510 - P1514, ( P1511 P1512 P1513 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1512 > Page 1194 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519, ( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 P1515 - P1519: Testing and Inspection P1516 For diagnosis of code P1516 refer to chart P1479-P1640 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519, ( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 1199 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519, ( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 1200 P1515 - P1519: Testing and Inspection P1517 For diagnosis of code P1517 refer to chart P1479-P1640 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519, ( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 1201 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519, ( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 1202 P1515 - P1519: Testing and Inspection P1518 For diagnosis of code P1518 refer to chart P1479-P1640 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519, ( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 1203 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519, ( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 1204 P1515 - P1519: Testing and Inspection P1519 For diagnosis of code P1519 refer to chart P1479-P1640 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519, ( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 1205 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1520 - P1524, ( P1521 P1522 P1523 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1520 - P1524: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1520 refer to chart P1479-P1640 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1535 - P1539, ( P1536 P1537 P1538 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1537 P1535 - P1539: Testing and Inspection P1537 For diagnosis of code P1537 refer to chart P1479-P1640 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1535 - P1539, ( P1536 P1537 P1538 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1537 > Page 1213 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1535 - P1539, ( P1536 P1537 P1538 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1537 > Page 1214 P1535 - P1539: Testing and Inspection P1538 For diagnosis of code P1538 refer to chart P1479-P1640 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1535 - P1539, ( P1536 P1537 P1538 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1537 > Page 1215 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1545 - P1549, ( P1546 P1547 P1548 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1545 - P1549: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1549 refer to chart P1479-P1640 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1550 - P1554, ( P1551 P1552 P1553 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1550 - P1554: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1550 refer to chart P1479-P1640 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1565 - P1569, ( P1566 P1567 P1568 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1565 P1565 - P1569: Testing and Inspection P1565 For diagnosis of P1565 refer to chart DTC Index P0500 - P0703 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Cruise Control diagnostic information, See: Cruise Control/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1565 - P1569, ( P1566 P1567 P1568 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1565 > Page 1226 P1565 - P1569: Testing and Inspection P1566 For diagnosis of P1566 refer to chart DTC Index P0500 - P0703 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Cruise Control diagnostic information, See: Cruise Control/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection> Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1565 - P1569, ( P1566 P1567 P1568 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1565 > Page 1227 P1565 - P1569: Testing and Inspection P1567 For diagnosis of P1567 refer to chart DTC Index P0500 - P0703 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Cruise Control diagnostic information, See: Cruise Control/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1565 - P1569, ( P1566 P1567 P1568 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1565 > Page 1228 P1565 - P1569: Testing and Inspection P1568 For diagnosis of P1568 refer to chart DTC Index P0500 - P0703 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Cruise Control diagnostic information, See: Cruise Control/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1570 - P1574, ( P1571 P1572 P1573 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Engine Related Diagnosis P1570 - P1574: Testing and Inspection Engine Related Diagnosis For diagnosis of code P1572 refer to chart P1479-P1640 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1570 - P1574, ( P1571 P1572 P1573 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Engine Related Diagnosis > Page 1233 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1570 - P1574, ( P1571 P1572 P1573 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Engine Related Diagnosis > Page 1234 P1570 - P1574: Testing and Inspection Cruise Control Related Diagnosis For diagnosis of code P1572, refer to chart: P0500-P0703 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Cruise Control system, follow this link: See: Cruise Control/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1580 - P1584, ( P1581 P1582 P1583 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1580 - P1584: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1582 refer to NOTE 21: NOTE 21: See DTC description and causes. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1630 - P1634, ( P1631 P1632 P1633 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1630 - P1634: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1633 refer to chart P1479-P1640 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1635 - P1639, ( P1636 P1637 P1638 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1635 P1635 - P1639: Testing and Inspection P1635 For diagnosis of code P1635 refer to NOTE 21: NOTE 21: See DTC description and causes. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1635 - P1639, ( P1636 P1637 P1638 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1635 > Page 1246 P1635 - P1639: Testing and Inspection P1636 For diagnosis of code P1636 refer to NOTE 22: NOTE 22: DTC P1636 indicates the PCM has lost communication with the inductive signature chip. Replace the PCM. If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1635 - P1639, ( P1636 P1637 P1638 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1635 > Page 1247 P1635 - P1639: Testing and Inspection P1639 For diagnosis of code P1639 refer to Note 11: NOTE 11: The Vehicle ID (VID) Block must be reprogrammed. For instructions, refer to the Flash VID Block Procedure. If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1640 - P1644, ( P1641 P1642 P1643 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1640 P1640 - P1644: Testing and Inspection P1640 For diagnosis of code P1640 refer to NOTE 23: NOTE 23: See Bi-Fuel CNG Models or Bi-Fuel LPG Models Testing for instructions on how to retrieve DTCs from the secondary module. See P1640 in Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions for additional information. - Bi-Fuel CNG Models. - Bi-Fuel LPG Models. - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1640 - P1644, ( P1641 P1642 P1643 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1640 > Page 1252 P1640 - P1644: Testing and Inspection P1641 For diagnosis of code P1641 refer to chart P1641-P2106 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1640 - P1644, ( P1641 P1642 P1643 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1640 > Page 1253 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1650 - P1654, ( P1651 P1652 P1653 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1650 P1650 - P1654: Testing and Inspection P1650 For diagnosis of code P1650 refer to chart P1641-P2106 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1650 - P1654, ( P1651 P1652 P1653 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1650 > Page 1258 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1650 - P1654, ( P1651 P1652 P1653 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1650 > Page 1259 P1650 - P1654: Testing and Inspection P1651 For diagnosis of code P1651 refer to chart P1641-P2106 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1650 - P1654, ( P1651 P1652 P1653 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1650 > Page 1260 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1700 - P1704, ( P1701 P1702 P1703 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1700 P1700 - P1704: Testing and Inspection P1700 For diagnosis of code P1700 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1700 - P1704, ( P1701 P1702 P1703 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1700 > Page 1266 P1700 - P1704: Testing and Inspection P1702 Torqshift For diagnosis of code P1702 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1700 - P1704, ( P1701 P1702 P1703 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1700 > Page 1267 - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R70W For diagnosis of code P1702 refer to chart Part 2 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1700 - P1704, ( P1701 P1702 P1703 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1700 > Page 1268 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P1702 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1700 - P1704, ( P1701 P1702 P1703 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1700 > Page 1269 - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1700 - P1704, ( P1701 P1702 P1703 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1700 > Page 1270 P1700 - P1704: Testing and Inspection P1703 For diagnosis of code P1703 refer to chart P1641-P2106 NOTE 15: REFER to Exterior Lighting component testing in Lighting and Horns for further diagnosis of the lighting control module LCM system. Make sure the brake pedal was applied and released for the KOER self-test and the brake pedal was applied for the KOEO self-test. See: Lighting and Horns Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1700 - P1704, ( P1701 P1702 P1703 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1700 > Page 1271 NOTE 16: REFER to Exterior Lighting component testing in Lighting and Horns for further diagnosis of the Smart Junction Box (SJB). Make sure the brake pedal was applied and released for the KOER self-test and the brake pedal was applied for the KOEO self-test. See: Lighting and Horns NOTE 17: REFER to Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems, for further diagnosis of the cause of the incorrect brake pedal status from the ABS to the PCM. Make sure the brake pedal was applied and released for the KOER self-test and the brake pedal was applied for the KOEO self-test. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1700 - P1704, ( P1701 P1702 P1703 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1700 > Page 1272 P1700 - P1704: Testing and Inspection P1704 For diagnosis of code P1704 refer to chart Part 2 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1700 - P1704, ( P1701 P1702 P1703 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1700 > Page 1273 Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1705 - P1709, ( P1706 P1707 P1708 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > 4R70W P1705 - P1709: Testing and Inspection 4R70W For diagnosis of code P1705 refer to chart Part 2 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1705 - P1709, ( P1706 P1707 P1708 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > 4R70W > Page 1278 Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1705 - P1709, ( P1706 P1707 P1708 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > 4R70W > Page 1279 P1705 - P1709: Testing and Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P1705 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1705 - P1709, ( P1706 P1707 P1708 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > 4R70W > Page 1280 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1705 - P1709, ( P1706 P1707 P1708 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > 4R70W > Page 1281 P1705 - P1709: Testing and Inspection Torqshift For diagnosis of code P1705 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1705 - P1709, ( P1706 P1707 P1708 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > 4R70W > Page 1282 Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714, ( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1710 P1710 - P1714: Testing and Inspection P1710 For diagnosis of code P1710 refer to chart Part 6 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714, ( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1710 > Page 1287 P1710 - P1714: Testing and Inspection P1711 Torqshift For diagnosis of code P1711 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714, ( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1710 > Page 1288 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R70W For diagnosis of code P1711 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714, ( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1710 > Page 1289 Part 7 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714, ( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1710 > Page 1290 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P1711 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714, ( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1710 > Page 1291 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714, ( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1710 > Page 1292 P1710 - P1714: Testing and Inspection P1713 4R70W For diagnosis of code P1713 refer to chart Part 8 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714, ( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1710 > Page 1293 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P1713 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714, ( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1710 > Page 1294 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714, ( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1710 > Page 1295 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714, ( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1710 > Page 1296 P1710 - P1714: Testing and Inspection P1714 4R70W For diagnosis of code P1714 refer to chart Part 5 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714, ( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1710 > Page 1297 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P1714 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714, ( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1710 > Page 1298 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1715 - P1719, ( P1716 P1717 P1718 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1715 P1715 - P1719: Testing and Inspection P1715 4R70W For diagnosis of code P1715 refer to chart Part 5 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1715 - P1719, ( P1716 P1717 P1718 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1715 > Page 1303 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P1715 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1715 - P1719, ( P1716 P1717 P1718 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1715 > Page 1304 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1715 - P1719, ( P1716 P1717 P1718 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1715 > Page 1305 P1715 - P1719: Testing and Inspection P1718 4R70W For diagnosis of code P1718 refer to chart Part 8 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1715 - P1719, ( P1716 P1717 P1718 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1715 > Page 1306 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P1718 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1715 - P1719, ( P1716 P1717 P1718 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1715 > Page 1307 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1715 - P1719, ( P1716 P1717 P1718 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1715 > Page 1308 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1725 - P1729, ( P1726 P1727 P1728 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1725 - P1729: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1729 refer to chart P1641-P2106 NOTE 24: Refer to Transfer Case. If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1725 - P1729, ( P1726 P1727 P1728 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 1312 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1730 - P1734, ( P1731 P1732 P1733 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1730 - P1734: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1731 refer to chart P0731-P1760 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1730 - P1734, ( P1731 P1732 P1733 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 1316 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1740 - P1744, ( P1741 P1742 P1743 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1740 P1740 - P1744: Testing and Inspection P1740 4R70W For diagnosis of code P1740 refer to chart Part 8 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1740 - P1744, ( P1741 P1742 P1743 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1740 > Page 1321 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P1740 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1740 - P1744, ( P1741 P1742 P1743 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1740 > Page 1322 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1740 - P1744, ( P1741 P1742 P1743 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1740 > Page 1323 P1740 - P1744: Testing and Inspection P1744 Torqshift For diagnosis of code P1744 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1740 - P1744, ( P1741 P1742 P1743 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1740 > Page 1324 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R70W For diagnosis of code P1744 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1740 - P1744, ( P1741 P1742 P1743 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1740 > Page 1325 Part 9 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1740 - P1744, ( P1741 P1742 P1743 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1740 > Page 1326 - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P1744 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1740 - P1744, ( P1741 P1742 P1743 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1740 > Page 1327 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1745 - P1749, ( P1746 P1747 P1748 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1746 P1745 - P1749: Testing and Inspection P1746 For diagnosis of code P1746 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1745 - P1749, ( P1746 P1747 P1748 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1746 > Page 1332 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1745 - P1749, ( P1746 P1747 P1748 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1746 > Page 1333 P1745 - P1749: Testing and Inspection P1747 For diagnosis of code P1747 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1745 - P1749, ( P1746 P1747 P1748 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1746 > Page 1334 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1750 - P1754, ( P1751 P1752 P1753 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1751 P1750 - P1754: Testing and Inspection P1751 For diagnosis of code P1751 refer to chart P0740-P1789 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1750 - P1754, ( P1751 P1752 P1753 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1751 > Page 1339 Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1750 - P1754, ( P1751 P1752 P1753 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1751 > Page 1340 P1750 - P1754: Testing and Inspection P1754 For diagnosis of code P1754 refer to chart Part 7 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1750 - P1754, ( P1751 P1752 P1753 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1751 > Page 1341 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1755 - P1759, ( P1756 P1757 P1758 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1755 - P1759: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1756 refer to chart Part 4 Of 9 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1755 - P1759, ( P1756 P1757 P1758 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 1345 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1760 - P1764, ( P1761 P1762 P1763 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1760 P1760 - P1764: Testing and Inspection P1760 4R70W For diagnosis of code P1760 refer to chart Part 9 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1760 - P1764, ( P1761 P1762 P1763 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1760 > Page 1350 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P1760 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1760 - P1764, ( P1761 P1762 P1763 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1760 > Page 1351 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1760 - P1764, ( P1761 P1762 P1763 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1760 > Page 1352 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1760 - P1764, ( P1761 P1762 P1763 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1760 > Page 1353 P1760 - P1764: Testing and Inspection P1761 For diagnosis of code P1761 refer to chart Part 5 Of 9 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1760 - P1764, ( P1761 P1762 P1763 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1760 > Page 1354 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784, ( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 P1780 - P1784: Testing and Inspection P1780 4R100 For diagnosis of code P1780 refer to system being tested: Transmission Control If there is no link in the chart then: This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784, ( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 1359 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Engine Control P1641-P2106 If there is no link in the chart then: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784, ( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 1360 - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Torqshift For diagnosis of code P1780 refer to system being tested: Transmission Control If there is no link in the chart then: This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784, ( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 1361 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Engine Control If there is no link in the chart then: This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784, ( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 1362 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784, ( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 1363 P1780 - P1784: Testing and Inspection P1781 For diagnosis of code P1781 refer to system being tested: Transmission Control If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Engine Control Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784, ( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 1364 If there is no link in the chart then: This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784, ( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 1365 P1780 - P1784: Testing and Inspection P1783 4R70W For diagnosis of code P1783 refer to chart Part 8 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784, ( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 1366 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection 4R100 For diagnosis of code P1783 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784, ( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 1367 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784, ( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 1368 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Torqshift For diagnosis of code P1783 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784, ( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 1369 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1785 - P1789, ( P1786 P1787 P1788 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1788 P1785 - P1789: Testing and Inspection P1788 For diagnosis of code P1788 refer to chart P0740-P1789 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1785 - P1789, ( P1786 P1787 P1788 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1788 > Page 1374 Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1785 - P1789, ( P1786 P1787 P1788 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1788 > Page 1375 P1785 - P1789: Testing and Inspection P1789 For diagnosis of code P1789 refer to chart P0740-P1789 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1785 - P1789, ( P1786 P1787 P1788 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1788 > Page 1376 Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1900-P19ZZ > P1900 - P1904, ( P1901 P1902 P1903 1900 1901 1902 1903 1904 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1900 - P1904: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1900 refer to chart P1641-P2106 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1900-P19ZZ > P1900 - P1904, ( P1901 P1902 P1903 1900 1901 1902 1903 1904 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 1381 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2000 - P2004, ( P2001 P2002 P2003 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P2000 - P2004: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P2004 refer to chart P1641-P2106 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2000 - P2004, ( P2001 P2002 P2003 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 1386 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2005 - P2009, ( P2006 P2007 P2008 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2005 P2005 - P2009: Testing and Inspection P2005 For diagnosis of code P2005 refer to chart P1641-P2106 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2005 - P2009, ( P2006 P2007 P2008 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2005 > Page 1391 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2005 - P2009, ( P2006 P2007 P2008 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2005 > Page 1392 P2005 - P2009: Testing and Inspection P2006 For diagnosis of code P2006 refer to chart P1641-P2106 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2005 - P2009, ( P2006 P2007 P2008 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2005 > Page 1393 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2005 - P2009, ( P2006 P2007 P2008 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2005 > Page 1394 P2005 - P2009: Testing and Inspection P2007 For diagnosis of code P2007 refer to chart P1641-P2106 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2005 - P2009, ( P2006 P2007 P2008 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2005 > Page 1395 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2005 - P2009, ( P2006 P2007 P2008 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2005 > Page 1396 P2005 - P2009: Testing and Inspection P2008 For diagnosis of code P2008 refer to chart P1641-P2106 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2005 - P2009, ( P2006 P2007 P2008 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2005 > Page 1397 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2010 - P2014, ( P2011 P2012 P2013 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P2010 - P2014: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P2014 refer to chart P1641-P2106 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2010 - P2014, ( P2011 P2012 P2013 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 1401 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2015 - P2019, ( P2016 P2017 P2018 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P2015 - P2019: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P2019 refer to chart P1641-P2106 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2015 - P2019, ( P2016 P2017 P2018 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 1405 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2065 - P2069, ( P2066 P2067 P2068 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2065 P2065 - P2069: Testing and Inspection P2065 For diagnosis of code P2065 refer to NOTE 7: NOTE 7: Refer to Instrument Panels, Gauges and Warning Indicators, fuel level indicator or Rear Electronic Module (REM) diagnosis. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2065 - P2069, ( P2066 P2067 P2068 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2065 > Page 1410 P2065 - P2069: Testing and Inspection P2066 For diagnosis of code P2066 refer to NOTE 7: NOTE 7: Refer to Instrument Panels, Gauges and Warning Indicators, fuel level indicator or Rear Electronic Module (REM) diagnosis. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2065 - P2069, ( P2066 P2067 P2068 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2065 > Page 1411 P2065 - P2069: Testing and Inspection P2067 For diagnosis of code P2067 refer to NOTE 7: NOTE 7: Refer to Instrument Panels, Gauges and Warning Indicators, fuel level indicator or Rear Electronic Module (REM) diagnosis. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2065 - P2069, ( P2066 P2067 P2068 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2065 > Page 1412 P2065 - P2069: Testing and Inspection P2068 For diagnosis of code P2068 refer to NOTE 7: NOTE 7: Refer to Instrument Panels, Gauges and Warning Indicators, fuel level indicator or Rear Electronic Module (REM) diagnosis. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2070 - P2074, ( P2071 P2072 P2073 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2070 P2070 - P2074: Testing and Inspection P2070 For diagnosis of code P2070 refer to chart P1641-P2106 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2070 - P2074, ( P2071 P2072 P2073 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2070 > Page 1417 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2070 - P2074, ( P2071 P2072 P2073 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2070 > Page 1418 P2070 - P2074: Testing and Inspection P2071 For diagnosis of code P2071 refer to chart P1641-P2106 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2070 - P2074, ( P2071 P2072 P2073 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2070 > Page 1419 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2070 - P2074, ( P2071 P2072 P2073 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2070 > Page 1420 P2070 - P2074: Testing and Inspection P2072 For diagnosis of code P2072 refer to NOTE 26: NOTE 26: Refer to Trouble Code Descriptions - Diagnostic Aids for DTC P2072 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2100 - P2104, ( P2101 P2102 P2103 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2100 P2100 - P2104: Testing and Inspection P2100 For diagnosis of code P2100 refer to chart P1641-P2106 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2100 - P2104, ( P2101 P2102 P2103 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2100 > Page 1426 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2100 - P2104, ( P2101 P2102 P2103 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2100 > Page 1427 P2100 - P2104: Testing and Inspection P2101 For diagnosis of code P2101 refer to chart P1641-P2106 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2100 - P2104, ( P2101 P2102 P2103 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2100 > Page 1428 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2100 - P2104, ( P2101 P2102 P2103 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2100 > Page 1429 P2100 - P2104: Testing and Inspection P2104 For diagnosis of code P2104 refer to chart P1641-P2106 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2100 - P2104, ( P2101 P2102 P2103 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2100 > Page 1430 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2105 - P2109, ( P2106 P2107 P2108 2105 2106 2107 2108 2109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2105 P2105 - P2109: Testing and Inspection P2105 For diagnosis of code P2105 refer to chart P1641-P2106 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2105 - P2109, ( P2106 P2107 P2108 2105 2106 2107 2108 2109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2105 > Page 1435 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2105 - P2109, ( P2106 P2107 P2108 2105 2106 2107 2108 2109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2105 > Page 1436 P2105 - P2109: Testing and Inspection P2106 For diagnosis of code P2106 refer to chart P1641-P2106 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2105 - P2109, ( P2106 P2107 P2108 2105 2106 2107 2108 2109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2105 > Page 1437 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2105 - P2109, ( P2106 P2107 P2108 2105 2106 2107 2108 2109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2105 > Page 1438 P2105 - P2109: Testing and Inspection P2107 For diagnosis of code P2107 refer to chart P2107-Pxxxx If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2110 - P2114, ( P2111 P2112 P2113 2110 2111 2112 2113 2114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2110 P2110 - P2114: Testing and Inspection P2110 For diagnosis of code P2110 refer to chart P2107-Pxxxx If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2110 - P2114, ( P2111 P2112 P2113 2110 2111 2112 2113 2114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2110 > Page 1443 P2110 - P2114: Testing and Inspection P2111 For diagnosis of code P2111 refer to chart P2107-Pxxxx If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2110 - P2114, ( P2111 P2112 P2113 2110 2111 2112 2113 2114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2110 > Page 1444 P2110 - P2114: Testing and Inspection P2112 For diagnosis of code P2112 refer to chart P2107-Pxxxx If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2120 - P2124, ( P2121 P2122 P2123 2120 2121 2122 2123 2124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2121 P2120 - P2124: Testing and Inspection P2121 For diagnosis of code P2121 refer to chart P2107-Pxxxx If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2120 - P2124, ( P2121 P2122 P2123 2120 2121 2122 2123 2124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2121 > Page 1449 P2120 - P2124: Testing and Inspection P2122 For diagnosis of code P2122 refer to chart P2107-Pxxxx If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2120 - P2124, ( P2121 P2122 P2123 2120 2121 2122 2123 2124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2121 > Page 1450 P2120 - P2124: Testing and Inspection P2123 For diagnosis of code P2123 refer to chart P2107-Pxxxx If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2125 - P2129, ( P2126 P2127 P2128 2125 2126 2127 2128 2129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2126 P2125 - P2129: Testing and Inspection P2126 For diagnosis of code P2126 refer to chart P2107-Pxxxx If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2125 - P2129, ( P2126 P2127 P2128 2125 2126 2127 2128 2129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2126 > Page 1455 P2125 - P2129: Testing and Inspection P2127 For diagnosis of code P2127 refer to chart P2107-Pxxxx If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2125 - P2129, ( P2126 P2127 P2128 2125 2126 2127 2128 2129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2126 > Page 1456 P2125 - P2129: Testing and Inspection P2128 For diagnosis of code P2128 refer to chart P2107-Pxxxx If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2130 - P2134, ( P2131 P2132 P2133 2130 2131 2132 2133 2134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2131 P2130 - P2134: Testing and Inspection P2131 For diagnosis of code P2131 refer to chart P2107-Pxxxx If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2130 - P2134, ( P2131 P2132 P2133 2130 2131 2132 2133 2134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2131 > Page 1461 P2130 - P2134: Testing and Inspection P2132 For diagnosis of code P2132 refer to chart P2107-Pxxxx If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2130 - P2134, ( P2131 P2132 P2133 2130 2131 2132 2133 2134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2131 > Page 1462 P2130 - P2134: Testing and Inspection P2133 For diagnosis of code P2133 refer to chart P2107-Pxxxx If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2135 - P2139, ( P2136 P2137 P2138 2135 2136 2137 2138 2139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P2135 - P2139: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P2135 refer to chart P2107-Pxxxx If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199, ( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195 P2195 - P2199: Testing and Inspection P2195 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P2195 refer to chart P2107-Pxxxx If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only For diagnosis of code P2195 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199, ( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195 > Page 1470 P0603-P2198 / U0309-U2015 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199, ( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195 > Page 1471 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199, ( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195 > Page 1472 P2195 - P2199: Testing and Inspection P2196 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P2196 refer to chart P2107-Pxxxx If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only For diagnosis of code P2196 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199, ( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195 > Page 1473 P0603-P2198 / U0309-U2015 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199, ( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195 > Page 1474 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199, ( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195 > Page 1475 P2195 - P2199: Testing and Inspection P2197 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P2197 refer to chart P2107-Pxxxx If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only For diagnosis of code P2197 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199, ( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195 > Page 1476 P0603-P2198 / U0309-U2015 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199, ( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195 > Page 1477 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199, ( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195 > Page 1478 P2195 - P2199: Testing and Inspection P2198 OBD II - Base Gasoline For diagnosis of code P2198 refer to chart P2107-Pxxxx If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only For diagnosis of code P2198 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199, ( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195 > Page 1479 P0603-P2198 / U0309-U2015 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199, ( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195 > Page 1480 Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2200-P22ZZ > P2255 - P2259, ( P2256 P2257 P2258 2255 2256 2257 2258 2259 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2257 P2255 - P2259: Testing and Inspection P2257 For diagnosis of code P2257 refer to chart P2107-Pxxxx If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2200-P22ZZ > P2255 - P2259, ( P2256 P2257 P2258 2255 2256 2257 2258 2259 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2257 > Page 1486 P2255 - P2259: Testing and Inspection P2258 For diagnosis of code P2258 refer to chart P2107-Pxxxx If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2200-P22ZZ > P2270 - P2274, ( P2271 P2272 P2273 2270 2271 2272 2273 2274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2270 P2270 - P2274: Testing and Inspection P2270 For diagnosis of code P2270 refer to chart P2107-Pxxxx If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2200-P22ZZ > P2270 - P2274, ( P2271 P2272 P2273 2270 2271 2272 2273 2274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2270 > Page 1491 P2270 - P2274: Testing and Inspection P2271 For diagnosis of code P2271 refer to chart P2107-Pxxxx If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2200-P22ZZ > P2270 - P2274, ( P2271 P2272 P2273 2270 2271 2272 2273 2274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2270 > Page 1492 P2270 - P2274: Testing and Inspection P2272 For diagnosis of code P2272 refer to chart P2107-Pxxxx If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2200-P22ZZ > P2270 - P2274, ( P2271 P2272 P2273 2270 2271 2272 2273 2274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2270 > Page 1493 P2270 - P2274: Testing and Inspection P2273 For diagnosis of code P2273 refer to chart P2107-Pxxxx If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2200-P22ZZ > P2270 - P2274, ( P2271 P2272 P2273 2270 2271 2272 2273 2274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2270 > Page 1494 P2270 - P2274: Testing and Inspection P2274 For diagnosis of code P2274 refer to chart P2107-Pxxxx If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2200-P22ZZ > P2275 - P2279, ( P2276 P2277 P2278 2275 2276 2277 2278 2279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2275 P2275 - P2279: Testing and Inspection P2275 For diagnosis of code P2275 refer to chart P2107-Pxxxx If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2200-P22ZZ > P2275 - P2279, ( P2276 P2277 P2278 2275 2276 2277 2278 2279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2275 > Page 1499 P2275 - P2279: Testing and Inspection P2278 For diagnosis of code P2278 refer to chart P2107-Pxxxx If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2700-P27ZZ > P2700 - P2704, ( P2701 P2702 P2703 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2700 P2700 - P2704: Testing and Inspection P2700 For diagnosis of code P2700 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2700-P27ZZ > P2700 - P2704, ( P2701 P2702 P2703 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2700 > Page 1505 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2700-P27ZZ > P2700 - P2704, ( P2701 P2702 P2703 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2700 > Page 1506 P2700 - P2704: Testing and Inspection P2701 For diagnosis of code P2701 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2700-P27ZZ > P2700 - P2704, ( P2701 P2702 P2703 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2700 > Page 1507 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2700-P27ZZ > P2700 - P2704, ( P2701 P2702 P2703 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2700 > Page 1508 P2700 - P2704: Testing and Inspection P2702 For diagnosis of code P2702 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2700-P27ZZ > P2700 - P2704, ( P2701 P2702 P2703 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2700 > Page 1509 P2700 - P2704: Testing and Inspection P2703 For diagnosis of code P2703 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2700-P27ZZ > P2700 - P2704, ( P2701 P2702 P2703 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2700 > Page 1510 P2700 - P2704: Testing and Inspection P2704 For diagnosis of code P2704 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1517 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1518 Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1519 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Application and ID Alarm Module: Application and ID For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic Module (GEM) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Application and ID Keyless Entry Module: Application and ID For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic Module (GEM) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist Control Module: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 Parking Assist Control Module: Customer Interest Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 TSB 06-20-5 10/16/06 PARKING AID SPEAKER INOPERATIVE - DTCS C1742 AND C1743 FORD: 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2004-2006 Escape, Expedition, Explorer, F-150 2004-2007 F-250, F-350 MERCURY: 2005-2007 Montego 2004-2006 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner ISSUE Some 2004-2007 vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may experience low or no audible sound due to speaker issues related to the RSS. The speaker is attached to the module which may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1742 (Rear Sounder Circuit Fault) and/or C1743 (Rear Sounder Short). ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify that DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present. Also, low audible or intermittent audible warning condition may exist as well. 2. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present, replace parking aid speaker on module with speaker in Speaker Kit. Follow instructions in Speaker Kit. 3. Clear DTCs and repeat check for DTCs C1742 and/or C1743. 4. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 go away and speaker sounds, the repair is complete. 5. If DTCs remain, follow normal diagnostics in the appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 413-13 Pinpoint Test F. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 062005A 2004-2006 Expedition: 1.2 Hrs. Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2004-2007 Super Duty 0.6 Hr. 250/350: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist Control Module: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 > Page 1534 062005A 2004-2005 1.1 Hrs. Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2006 Explorer/Mountaineer: 1.3 Hrs. Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2004-2006 F-150: Replace 0.5 Hr. Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2004-2006 Escape, 0.8 Hr. 2005-2006 Mariner: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2005-2007 Five 1.3 Hrs. Hundred/Montego: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2005-2007 Freestyle: 0.7 Hr. Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR 31012AL, 31012AT) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15K864 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Control Module: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 Parking Assist Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 TSB 06-20-5 10/16/06 PARKING AID SPEAKER INOPERATIVE - DTCS C1742 AND C1743 FORD: 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2004-2006 Escape, Expedition, Explorer, F-150 2004-2007 F-250, F-350 MERCURY: 2005-2007 Montego 2004-2006 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner ISSUE Some 2004-2007 vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may experience low or no audible sound due to speaker issues related to the RSS. The speaker is attached to the module which may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1742 (Rear Sounder Circuit Fault) and/or C1743 (Rear Sounder Short). ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify that DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present. Also, low audible or intermittent audible warning condition may exist as well. 2. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present, replace parking aid speaker on module with speaker in Speaker Kit. Follow instructions in Speaker Kit. 3. Clear DTCs and repeat check for DTCs C1742 and/or C1743. 4. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 go away and speaker sounds, the repair is complete. 5. If DTCs remain, follow normal diagnostics in the appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 413-13 Pinpoint Test F. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 062005A 2004-2006 Expedition: 1.2 Hrs. Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2004-2007 Super Duty 0.6 Hr. 250/350: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Control Module: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 > Page 1540 062005A 2004-2005 1.1 Hrs. Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2006 Explorer/Mountaineer: 1.3 Hrs. Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2004-2006 F-150: Replace 0.5 Hr. Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2004-2006 Escape, 0.8 Hr. 2005-2006 Mariner: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2005-2007 Five 1.3 Hrs. Hundred/Montego: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2005-2007 Freestyle: 0.7 Hr. Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR 31012AL, 31012AT) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15K864 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1541 View 151-28 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1542 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1543 Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair PARKING AID MODULE REMOVAL 1. Remove the right rear quarter trim panel. 2. Remove the parking aid module. 1 Remove the screws. 2 Disconnect the electrical connectors. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Application and ID Keyless Entry Module: Application and ID For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic Module (GEM) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component Information > Application and ID Power Door Lock Control Module: Application and ID For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic Module (GEM) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Driver Side Front View 151-36 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Driver Side Front > Page 1555 View 151-37 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Passenger Side Front Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Passenger Side Front > Page 1558 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1559 Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair HEATED SEAT MODULE Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so may result in air bag deployment, which may result in personal injury. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. NOTE: - Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor connector. - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle. - Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side air bag to floor connector. - After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed before operating the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1560 - A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. - If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary. 1. Remove the front seat. 2. Remove the heated seat module. - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Using a small flat-blade screwdriver, release the locking tab and slide the module off the bracket. INSTALLATION WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which may result in personal injury. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. NOTE: - Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor connector. - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle. - Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side air bag to floor connector. - After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed before operating the vehicle. - A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1561 carry out the diagnostic procedure again. - If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary. 1. Install the heated seat module. - Slide the heated seat module down over the attachment bracket until the locking tab snaps into place. - Connect the electrical connector. 2. Install the front seat. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-21 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 1565 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 1566 Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Service and Repair ROOF OPENING PANEL MODULE REMOVAL 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Remove the roof opening panel module. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the screw. 3 Remove the roof opening panel module. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair Technical Service Bulletin # 07S51S2 Date: 091009 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1576 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes. OASIS was activated April 10, 2007. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes. Available through the website. Owner names and addresses were made available April 30, 2007. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1577 NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles have been directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC). The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option, directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251 Dearborn, MI 48121-6251. ^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund claims that include other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be accepted for reimbursement. ^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair. Claiming a refund will not close the recall on the vehicle. ^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.) - Program Code: 07S51 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs. RENTAL VEHICLES If an ABS module needs to be ordered, Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except for fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim form. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Handling Allowance: An allowance of $1.00 per repair is being provided to cover the costs of locally obtained materials and XG-12 Electrical Grease. To claim the allowance, enter $1.00 as "HANDLG" in the "MISC EXPENSE" area of the claim form. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1578 ^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires approval from Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires approval from Special Service Support Center. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1579 Parts will not be direct shipped for this program Order your parts requirements through normal order processing channels. The DOR/COR number for this safety recall is 50376. Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Support Center or E-mailed. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Affected ABS Modules (Part number YL8Z-2C065-AA and YL8Z-2B373-BA) and the removed ABS connector are subject to random selection for return to the Ford Warranty Parts Analysis Center (WPAC). Refer to your daily PEARS (Parts Entry and Return System) register for part disposition and return instructions. Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures". EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW This program includes making sure the wiring harness connector is properly sealed against moisture/contamination, and inspecting the ABS module for evidence of corrosion resulting from an inadequately sealed connector. During the inspection, we expect that most of the affected vehicles will not have any evidence of corrosion in the ABS module. However, the ABS wiring harness connector still needs to be inspected for missing or improperly seated seals and/or incorrect connector number. If the ABS module is corroded, the ABS module and connector must be replaced. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1580 A flow chart has been developed to help direct you to the proper repair. See Figure 1. Inspect Connector Seals INSPECTION 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. NOTE: When disconnecting the ABS module connector, be sure the blue connector lock stays engaged with the harness connector and does not remain in the module. Remove it from the module if necessary and make sure the white 0-ring seal is properly installed. Disconnect the ABS module 25-pin connector by sliding the lock mechanism out (towards the passenger side of the vehicle) and pulling the connector off the module. 3. Disconnect the speed sensor harness, then remove the 2 harness retainers from the studs and position the harness above the air cleaner assembly to provide access for inspection. 4. Inspect the top of the ABS module connector cover for 2 yellow "X" marks. ^ If 2 yellow "X" marks are present, perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. ^ If no yellow "X" marks are present, proceed to Step 5. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1581 5. Inspect the ABS module connector pins for corrosion. See Figure 2. ^ If corrosion is present, perform Labor Operation E - Install Pigtail, New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. ^ If corrosion is not present, proceed to Step 6. 6. CAUTION: Do not cut any of the harness wires or the wire insulation when cutting off the tie strap. Remove the tie strap from the connector dress cover, then slide the cover off the connector. See Figure 3. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1582 7. Verify the wire seals are present on the 4 heavier gauge wires. See Figure 4. 8. Verify the numbers 054" are stamped on the slide-lock end of the mat cover (wipe the mat cover clean if necessary to view). See Figure 5. NOTE: Mat covers with any other number will be missing plugs in the unused pin locations. 9. Perform Labor Operation C - Install Pigtail and Apply Electrical Grease if: ^ any seals are missing or, ^ if the number on the mat cover is not "054". 10. Perform Labor Operation D - Seat Connector and Apply Electrical Grease if: ^ Any of the 4 wire seals are not fully seated in the connector cavities. ^ Each seal should sit approximately 1-2 mm (1/16 in) below the top of the round cavity. See Figure 4. 11. Perform Labor Operation A - Apply Electrical Grease if: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1583 ^ The module is not corroded. and ^ All seals are present. and ^ All seals are fully seated. and ^ The number on the mat cover is "054". LABOR OPERATION A - APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE 1. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 6. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 6. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a "hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 2. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 3. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. LABOR OPERATION C - INSTALL PIGTAIL AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1584 USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 7. 1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module connector. See Figure 8. 2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness (all wires) to the same length. See Figure 8. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1585 3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/2 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See Figure 9. CAUTION: The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag. Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing circuits when splicing wires. NOTE: The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation. NOTE: The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1586 4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness. Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903. See Figure 10. 5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice connector. 6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit, shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all wires are insulated. See Figure 11. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1587 7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on the other. See Figure 12. 8. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 13. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1588 connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 13. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 9. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 10. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. 11. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds). ^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle. ^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special Support Service Center. LABOR OPERATION D - SEAT CONNECTOR SEALS AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE 1. If the seals are not fully seated, reseat any seals not fully seated with a blunt tool. DO NOT use anything sharp such as a screwdriver, awl or punch that could penetrate the seal and allow moisture to enter the terminal. See Figure 14. 2. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1589 b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 15. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 15. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 3. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 4. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. LABOR OPERATION E - INSTALL PIGTAIL, NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1590 USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 16. PROCEDURE TO REPLACE VEHICLE HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module connector. See Figure 17. 2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness (all wires) to the same length. See Figure 17. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1591 3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See Figure 18. CAUTION: The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag. Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing circuits when splicing wires. NOTE: The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation. NOTE: The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1592 4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness. Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903. See Figure 19. 5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice connector. 6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit, shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all wires are insulated. See Figure 20. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1593 7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on the other. See Figure 21. 8. Install a new ABS module. Perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. 9. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. 10. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds). ^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle. ^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special Support Service Center. LABOR OPERATION F - INSTALL NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE NOTE: Module configuration or reprogramming is not required when installing a new ABS module. 1. Disconnect the 2-wire electrical connector at the ABS module. 2. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 3. Remove the screws and the ABS module. 4. Position the new module and install the screws. Tighten the screws no more than 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 5. Lower the hoist. 6. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1594 ^ Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 22. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 22. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 7. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 8. Reconnect the 2-wire connector to the ABS module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1595 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1596 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1597 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1598 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1599 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1600 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > NHTSA07V156000 > Mar > 07 > Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect Electronic Brake Control Module: Recalls Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2004 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V156000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: March 30, 2007 COMPONENT: Service Brakes, Hydraulic: Antilock: Control Unit/Module POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 446460 SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with Antilock Brakes (ABS), the ABS module connector may have missing or dislodged wire seals. This condition could allow contamination to enter the module connector, creating a potential for an electrical short. CONSEQUENCE: An electrical short might cause an ABS malfunction that would illuminate the ABS warning light, and in some cases, the module may overheat resulting in burning odor, smoke, and/or fire. This condition could occur either when the vehicle ignition switch is in the off position or while the vehicle is being operated. Remedy: Dealers will inspect the wire harness connector to the ABS module for missing or dislodged wire seals, and repair or replace the harness connector as appropriate. The dealer will also inspect the connector on the ABS module and replace it if it is found to be corroded or damaged. The recall began on April 23, 2007. Owners may contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. NOTES: Ford recall No. 07S51. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair Technical Service Bulletin # 07S51S2 Date: 091009 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1614 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes. OASIS was activated April 10, 2007. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes. Available through the website. Owner names and addresses were made available April 30, 2007. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1615 NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles have been directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC). The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option, directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251 Dearborn, MI 48121-6251. ^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund claims that include other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be accepted for reimbursement. ^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair. Claiming a refund will not close the recall on the vehicle. ^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.) - Program Code: 07S51 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs. RENTAL VEHICLES If an ABS module needs to be ordered, Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except for fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim form. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Handling Allowance: An allowance of $1.00 per repair is being provided to cover the costs of locally obtained materials and XG-12 Electrical Grease. To claim the allowance, enter $1.00 as "HANDLG" in the "MISC EXPENSE" area of the claim form. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1616 ^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires approval from Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires approval from Special Service Support Center. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1617 Parts will not be direct shipped for this program Order your parts requirements through normal order processing channels. The DOR/COR number for this safety recall is 50376. Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Support Center or E-mailed. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Affected ABS Modules (Part number YL8Z-2C065-AA and YL8Z-2B373-BA) and the removed ABS connector are subject to random selection for return to the Ford Warranty Parts Analysis Center (WPAC). Refer to your daily PEARS (Parts Entry and Return System) register for part disposition and return instructions. Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures". EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW This program includes making sure the wiring harness connector is properly sealed against moisture/contamination, and inspecting the ABS module for evidence of corrosion resulting from an inadequately sealed connector. During the inspection, we expect that most of the affected vehicles will not have any evidence of corrosion in the ABS module. However, the ABS wiring harness connector still needs to be inspected for missing or improperly seated seals and/or incorrect connector number. If the ABS module is corroded, the ABS module and connector must be replaced. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1618 A flow chart has been developed to help direct you to the proper repair. See Figure 1. Inspect Connector Seals INSPECTION 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. NOTE: When disconnecting the ABS module connector, be sure the blue connector lock stays engaged with the harness connector and does not remain in the module. Remove it from the module if necessary and make sure the white 0-ring seal is properly installed. Disconnect the ABS module 25-pin connector by sliding the lock mechanism out (towards the passenger side of the vehicle) and pulling the connector off the module. 3. Disconnect the speed sensor harness, then remove the 2 harness retainers from the studs and position the harness above the air cleaner assembly to provide access for inspection. 4. Inspect the top of the ABS module connector cover for 2 yellow "X" marks. ^ If 2 yellow "X" marks are present, perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. ^ If no yellow "X" marks are present, proceed to Step 5. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1619 5. Inspect the ABS module connector pins for corrosion. See Figure 2. ^ If corrosion is present, perform Labor Operation E - Install Pigtail, New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. ^ If corrosion is not present, proceed to Step 6. 6. CAUTION: Do not cut any of the harness wires or the wire insulation when cutting off the tie strap. Remove the tie strap from the connector dress cover, then slide the cover off the connector. See Figure 3. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1620 7. Verify the wire seals are present on the 4 heavier gauge wires. See Figure 4. 8. Verify the numbers 054" are stamped on the slide-lock end of the mat cover (wipe the mat cover clean if necessary to view). See Figure 5. NOTE: Mat covers with any other number will be missing plugs in the unused pin locations. 9. Perform Labor Operation C - Install Pigtail and Apply Electrical Grease if: ^ any seals are missing or, ^ if the number on the mat cover is not "054". 10. Perform Labor Operation D - Seat Connector and Apply Electrical Grease if: ^ Any of the 4 wire seals are not fully seated in the connector cavities. ^ Each seal should sit approximately 1-2 mm (1/16 in) below the top of the round cavity. See Figure 4. 11. Perform Labor Operation A - Apply Electrical Grease if: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1621 ^ The module is not corroded. and ^ All seals are present. and ^ All seals are fully seated. and ^ The number on the mat cover is "054". LABOR OPERATION A - APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE 1. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 6. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 6. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a "hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 2. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 3. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. LABOR OPERATION C - INSTALL PIGTAIL AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1622 USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 7. 1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module connector. See Figure 8. 2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness (all wires) to the same length. See Figure 8. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1623 3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/2 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See Figure 9. CAUTION: The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag. Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing circuits when splicing wires. NOTE: The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation. NOTE: The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1624 4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness. Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903. See Figure 10. 5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice connector. 6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit, shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all wires are insulated. See Figure 11. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1625 7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on the other. See Figure 12. 8. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 13. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1626 connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 13. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 9. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 10. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. 11. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds). ^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle. ^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special Support Service Center. LABOR OPERATION D - SEAT CONNECTOR SEALS AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE 1. If the seals are not fully seated, reseat any seals not fully seated with a blunt tool. DO NOT use anything sharp such as a screwdriver, awl or punch that could penetrate the seal and allow moisture to enter the terminal. See Figure 14. 2. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1627 b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 15. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 15. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 3. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 4. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. LABOR OPERATION E - INSTALL PIGTAIL, NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1628 USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 16. PROCEDURE TO REPLACE VEHICLE HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module connector. See Figure 17. 2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness (all wires) to the same length. See Figure 17. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1629 3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See Figure 18. CAUTION: The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag. Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing circuits when splicing wires. NOTE: The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation. NOTE: The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1630 4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness. Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903. See Figure 19. 5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice connector. 6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit, shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all wires are insulated. See Figure 20. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1631 7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on the other. See Figure 21. 8. Install a new ABS module. Perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. 9. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. 10. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds). ^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle. ^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special Support Service Center. LABOR OPERATION F - INSTALL NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE NOTE: Module configuration or reprogramming is not required when installing a new ABS module. 1. Disconnect the 2-wire electrical connector at the ABS module. 2. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 3. Remove the screws and the ABS module. 4. Position the new module and install the screws. Tighten the screws no more than 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 5. Lower the hoist. 6. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1632 ^ Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 22. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 22. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 7. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 8. Reconnect the 2-wire connector to the ABS module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1633 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1634 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1635 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1636 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1637 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1638 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > NHTSA07V156000 > Mar > 07 > Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect Electronic Brake Control Module: Recalls Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2004 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V156000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: March 30, 2007 COMPONENT: Service Brakes, Hydraulic: Antilock: Control Unit/Module POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 446460 SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with Antilock Brakes (ABS), the ABS module connector may have missing or dislodged wire seals. This condition could allow contamination to enter the module connector, creating a potential for an electrical short. CONSEQUENCE: An electrical short might cause an ABS malfunction that would illuminate the ABS warning light, and in some cases, the module may overheat resulting in burning odor, smoke, and/or fire. This condition could occur either when the vehicle ignition switch is in the off position or while the vehicle is being operated. Remedy: Dealers will inspect the wire harness connector to the ABS module for missing or dislodged wire seals, and repair or replace the harness connector as appropriate. The dealer will also inspect the connector on the ABS module and replace it if it is found to be corroded or damaged. The recall began on April 23, 2007. Owners may contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. NOTES: Ford recall No. 07S51. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > Page 1643 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair SPEED CONTROL SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the steering wheel. 2. WARNING: When carrying a live air bag, make sure the bag and trim cover are pointed away from your body. In the unlikely event of an accidental deployment, the bag will then deploy with minimal chance of injury. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Remove the steering wheel cover. 3. Remove the steering wheel frame. 1 Remove the nuts. 2 Disconnect the ground wire. 3 Remove the steering wheel frame. 4. Disconnect the speed control switches electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > Page 1644 5. Remove the speed control switches. 1 Remove the screws. 2 Remove the speed control switches. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Locations View 151-20 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Locations > Page 1647 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair SPEED CONTROL SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the steering wheel. 2. WARNING: When carrying a live air bag, make sure the bag and trim cover are pointed away from your body. In the unlikely event of an accidental deployment, the bag will then deploy with minimal chance of injury. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Remove the steering wheel cover. 3. Remove the steering wheel frame. 1 Remove the nuts. 2 Disconnect the ground wire. 3 Remove the steering wheel frame. 4. Disconnect the speed control switches electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Locations > Page 1648 5. Remove the speed control switches. 1 Remove the screws. 2 Remove the speed control switches. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose Steering Wheel: Customer Interest Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose TSB 07-4-3 03/05/07 LEATHER - WRAPPED STEERING WHEEL - LEATHER COMING LOOSE FORD: 2000-2005 Thunderbird 2000-2007 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2008 F-Super Duty 2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, Ranger 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2008 Escape 2004-2007 F-150, Freestar 2005-2008 Escape Hybrid 2007 Edge 2004-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 2000-2002 Continental 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2000-2007 Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 2000-2007 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT 2007 MKX MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 2000-2007 Mountaineer 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2008 Mariner 2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 04-24-3 to update the vehicle model years. ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with leather-wrapped steering wheels may exhibit the leather coming loose from the spoke area. ACTION Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive to re-adhere the loose leather to the wheel spoke. Refer to the following Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE IF RE-ADHERING LEATHER TO THE FRONT SIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL ONLY, OMIT STEPS 1 AND 6. STEERING WHEEL/AIR BAG ASSEMBLY REMOVAL IS NECESSARY ONLY WHEN REPAIRING LOOSE LEATHER ON THE BACKSIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL. CAUTION AVOID SKIN CONTACT WITH MOTORCRAFT INSTANT GEL ADHESIVE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose > Page 1656 1. Remove the steering wheel (ONLY NECESSARY TO REPAIR BACKSIDE OF STEERING WHEEL). Refer to Workshop Manual Sections 211-04 and 501-20B. 2. Fold loose leather out of the way. 3. Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive evenly over the wheel spoke. 4. Fold the leather back into its original position. 5. Smooth the leather tuck in for neat appearance, and apply pressure until the leather is bonded to the wheel spoke (apply pressure for at least 30 seconds). NOTE THE ADHESIVE SHOULD BE COMPLETELY SET AFTER 5 MINUTES. DO NOT PULL ON THE REPAIR AREA. 6. Reinstall steering wheel. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT070403 Use SLIS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3600 33 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1659 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair Technical Service Bulletin # 07S51S2 Date: 091009 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1665 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes. OASIS was activated April 10, 2007. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes. Available through the website. Owner names and addresses were made available April 30, 2007. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1666 NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles have been directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC). The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option, directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251 Dearborn, MI 48121-6251. ^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund claims that include other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be accepted for reimbursement. ^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair. Claiming a refund will not close the recall on the vehicle. ^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.) - Program Code: 07S51 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs. RENTAL VEHICLES If an ABS module needs to be ordered, Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except for fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim form. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Handling Allowance: An allowance of $1.00 per repair is being provided to cover the costs of locally obtained materials and XG-12 Electrical Grease. To claim the allowance, enter $1.00 as "HANDLG" in the "MISC EXPENSE" area of the claim form. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1667 ^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires approval from Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires approval from Special Service Support Center. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1668 Parts will not be direct shipped for this program Order your parts requirements through normal order processing channels. The DOR/COR number for this safety recall is 50376. Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Support Center or E-mailed. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Affected ABS Modules (Part number YL8Z-2C065-AA and YL8Z-2B373-BA) and the removed ABS connector are subject to random selection for return to the Ford Warranty Parts Analysis Center (WPAC). Refer to your daily PEARS (Parts Entry and Return System) register for part disposition and return instructions. Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures". EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW This program includes making sure the wiring harness connector is properly sealed against moisture/contamination, and inspecting the ABS module for evidence of corrosion resulting from an inadequately sealed connector. During the inspection, we expect that most of the affected vehicles will not have any evidence of corrosion in the ABS module. However, the ABS wiring harness connector still needs to be inspected for missing or improperly seated seals and/or incorrect connector number. If the ABS module is corroded, the ABS module and connector must be replaced. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1669 A flow chart has been developed to help direct you to the proper repair. See Figure 1. Inspect Connector Seals INSPECTION 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. NOTE: When disconnecting the ABS module connector, be sure the blue connector lock stays engaged with the harness connector and does not remain in the module. Remove it from the module if necessary and make sure the white 0-ring seal is properly installed. Disconnect the ABS module 25-pin connector by sliding the lock mechanism out (towards the passenger side of the vehicle) and pulling the connector off the module. 3. Disconnect the speed sensor harness, then remove the 2 harness retainers from the studs and position the harness above the air cleaner assembly to provide access for inspection. 4. Inspect the top of the ABS module connector cover for 2 yellow "X" marks. ^ If 2 yellow "X" marks are present, perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. ^ If no yellow "X" marks are present, proceed to Step 5. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1670 5. Inspect the ABS module connector pins for corrosion. See Figure 2. ^ If corrosion is present, perform Labor Operation E - Install Pigtail, New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. ^ If corrosion is not present, proceed to Step 6. 6. CAUTION: Do not cut any of the harness wires or the wire insulation when cutting off the tie strap. Remove the tie strap from the connector dress cover, then slide the cover off the connector. See Figure 3. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1671 7. Verify the wire seals are present on the 4 heavier gauge wires. See Figure 4. 8. Verify the numbers 054" are stamped on the slide-lock end of the mat cover (wipe the mat cover clean if necessary to view). See Figure 5. NOTE: Mat covers with any other number will be missing plugs in the unused pin locations. 9. Perform Labor Operation C - Install Pigtail and Apply Electrical Grease if: ^ any seals are missing or, ^ if the number on the mat cover is not "054". 10. Perform Labor Operation D - Seat Connector and Apply Electrical Grease if: ^ Any of the 4 wire seals are not fully seated in the connector cavities. ^ Each seal should sit approximately 1-2 mm (1/16 in) below the top of the round cavity. See Figure 4. 11. Perform Labor Operation A - Apply Electrical Grease if: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1672 ^ The module is not corroded. and ^ All seals are present. and ^ All seals are fully seated. and ^ The number on the mat cover is "054". LABOR OPERATION A - APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE 1. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 6. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 6. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a "hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 2. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 3. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. LABOR OPERATION C - INSTALL PIGTAIL AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1673 USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 7. 1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module connector. See Figure 8. 2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness (all wires) to the same length. See Figure 8. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1674 3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/2 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See Figure 9. CAUTION: The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag. Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing circuits when splicing wires. NOTE: The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation. NOTE: The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1675 4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness. Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903. See Figure 10. 5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice connector. 6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit, shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all wires are insulated. See Figure 11. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1676 7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on the other. See Figure 12. 8. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 13. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1677 connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 13. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 9. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 10. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. 11. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds). ^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle. ^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special Support Service Center. LABOR OPERATION D - SEAT CONNECTOR SEALS AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE 1. If the seals are not fully seated, reseat any seals not fully seated with a blunt tool. DO NOT use anything sharp such as a screwdriver, awl or punch that could penetrate the seal and allow moisture to enter the terminal. See Figure 14. 2. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1678 b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 15. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 15. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 3. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 4. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. LABOR OPERATION E - INSTALL PIGTAIL, NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1679 USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 16. PROCEDURE TO REPLACE VEHICLE HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module connector. See Figure 17. 2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness (all wires) to the same length. See Figure 17. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1680 3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See Figure 18. CAUTION: The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag. Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing circuits when splicing wires. NOTE: The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation. NOTE: The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1681 4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness. Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903. See Figure 19. 5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice connector. 6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit, shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all wires are insulated. See Figure 20. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1682 7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on the other. See Figure 21. 8. Install a new ABS module. Perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. 9. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. 10. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds). ^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle. ^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special Support Service Center. LABOR OPERATION F - INSTALL NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE NOTE: Module configuration or reprogramming is not required when installing a new ABS module. 1. Disconnect the 2-wire electrical connector at the ABS module. 2. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 3. Remove the screws and the ABS module. 4. Position the new module and install the screws. Tighten the screws no more than 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 5. Lower the hoist. 6. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1683 ^ Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 22. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 22. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 7. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 8. Reconnect the 2-wire connector to the ABS module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1684 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1685 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1686 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1687 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1688 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1689 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > NHTSA07V156000 > Mar > 07 > Customer Interest for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose Steering Wheel: Customer Interest Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose TSB 07-4-3 03/05/07 LEATHER - WRAPPED STEERING WHEEL - LEATHER COMING LOOSE FORD: 2000-2005 Thunderbird 2000-2007 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2008 F-Super Duty 2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, Ranger 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2008 Escape 2004-2007 F-150, Freestar 2005-2008 Escape Hybrid 2007 Edge 2004-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 2000-2002 Continental 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2000-2007 Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 2000-2007 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT 2007 MKX MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 2000-2007 Mountaineer 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2008 Mariner 2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 04-24-3 to update the vehicle model years. ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with leather-wrapped steering wheels may exhibit the leather coming loose from the spoke area. ACTION Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive to re-adhere the loose leather to the wheel spoke. Refer to the following Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE IF RE-ADHERING LEATHER TO THE FRONT SIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL ONLY, OMIT STEPS 1 AND 6. STEERING WHEEL/AIR BAG ASSEMBLY REMOVAL IS NECESSARY ONLY WHEN REPAIRING LOOSE LEATHER ON THE BACKSIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL. CAUTION AVOID SKIN CONTACT WITH MOTORCRAFT INSTANT GEL ADHESIVE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > NHTSA07V156000 > Mar > 07 > Customer Interest for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose > Page 1698 1. Remove the steering wheel (ONLY NECESSARY TO REPAIR BACKSIDE OF STEERING WHEEL). Refer to Workshop Manual Sections 211-04 and 501-20B. 2. Fold loose leather out of the way. 3. Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive evenly over the wheel spoke. 4. Fold the leather back into its original position. 5. Smooth the leather tuck in for neat appearance, and apply pressure until the leather is bonded to the wheel spoke (apply pressure for at least 30 seconds). NOTE THE ADHESIVE SHOULD BE COMPLETELY SET AFTER 5 MINUTES. DO NOT PULL ON THE REPAIR AREA. 6. Reinstall steering wheel. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT070403 Use SLIS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3600 33 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR Typical Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor The engine oil temperature (EOT) sensor (Figure 35) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system near the oil filter or screwed into the oil pan. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the following: - On Variable Cam Timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM will begin reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Filler Cap: Description and Operation FUEL CAP OFF INDICATOR LAMP The Fuel Cap Off Indicator Lamp (FCIL) is an output signal that is controlled by the PCM and will illuminate when the strategy determines that there is a failure in the vapor management system due to the fuel filler cap not being sealed properly. This would be detected by the inability to pull vacuum in the fuel tank, after a fueling event. NOTE: The Escape, Freestar/Monterey, Mustang, Thunderbird, Town Car, Lincoln LS6/LS8, Expedition and Navigator do not have a dedicated (separate) output wire from the PCM to the instrument cluster. The PCM commands the FCIL on and off through the BUS +/- circuits (SCP). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1709 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1710 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1711 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1714 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1715 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection High Speed Fan Control Relay 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1716 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1717 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Low Speed Fan Control Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1718 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1719 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Medium Speed Fan Control Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1720 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations View 151-18 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1725 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1726 Blower Motor Relay: Description and Operation BLOWER MOTOR RELAY The blower motor relay supplies voltage to the blower motor and is activated when the key is ON and the function selector switch is in any position besides OFF. The blower motor relay is located under the instrument panel next to the steering column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1727 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1728 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1732 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1733 Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY The A/C compressor clutch relay supplies voltage to the A/C compressor clutch and is located in the battery junction box (BJB). The power control module (PCM) can interrupt the A/C compressor operation through the A/C compressor clutch relay under the following conditions: - during engine start-up - wide open throttle (WOT) - low engine idle conditions - excessively high engine temperatures Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1734 Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1735 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations View 151-23 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 1740 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 1741 Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Service and Repair DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (DRL) MODULE REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the nut and the DRL module. - Disconnect the electrical connectors. - Transfer parts as necessary. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations View 151-23 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1745 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1746 Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1747 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Exterior Lighting Module > Component Information > Application and ID Exterior Lighting Module: Application and ID For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic Module (GEM) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1754 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1755 Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1756 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Control Module > Component Information > Application and ID Headlamp Control Module: Application and ID For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic Module (GEM) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1763 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1764 Headlamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1765 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1769 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1770 Horn Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1771 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Application and ID Interior Lighting Module: Application and ID For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic Module (GEM) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1778 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1779 Parking Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1780 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1785 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1789 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1793 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1794 Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1795 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 1800 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 1801 Relay Box: Locations Central Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 1802 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 1803 Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1806 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1807 Relay Box: Diagrams Central Junction Box (CJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1808 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1809 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 1812 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 1813 Relay Box: Application and ID Central Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 1814 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 1815 Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-18 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Find Wiring Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams ^ System Diagrams Component Circuits that work together as a system ^ Grounds Diagrams Circuits grounding the system diagrams Power Distribution Diagrams The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any "dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any "blown" fuses. System Diagrams These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's indirect relationship with components in other systems. Grounds Diagrams The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different systems. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1823 Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#". These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc). All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions. Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of diagrams. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. Introduction To Ford Diagrams Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1824 System Overview Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information, connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent diagrams in the set. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1825 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram where the splice appears in full. Component Referencing (4) Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component (i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations. Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1826 Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1827 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. "Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle. NUMBER ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................... LOCATION 100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment, Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200 ................................................................................................................................................ Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300 .............................................................................................................................................. From instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ................................................................... ............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper; Truck bed 500 ...................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Driver door 600 .................................................. ...................................................................................................................................................... Passenger door, front 700 ................................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 ............................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ...... Passenger door, right rear Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1828 900 ....................................................................................................................................................... ........................ Above door trim panel and headliner Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification Symbols Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1829 Symbols Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1830 Symbols Part 3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1831 Symbols Part 4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1832 Symbols Part 5 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1833 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 Locked terminal 2 Male half 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1834 Defective insulation stripping 1 Proper crimp 2 Insulation not removed 3 Wire strands missing 4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 Seal 2 Displaced tab Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1835 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Male half 7 Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 Enlarged 2 Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1836 Electrical short inside the harness 1 Solder coated wire to ground 2 Harness protective tape 3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1837 Splice tape removed 1 Intermittent short Splice covered 1 Wire strand 2 Splice tape 3 Harness tape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1838 Broken wire strands in harness 1 Wiring harness tape 2 Wiring strand 3 Broken strands intermittent signal 4 Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1839 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1840 6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1841 8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1842 Body Control Module: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1843 Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 59-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1844 59-2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1845 59-3 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1846 Body Control Module: Service and Repair GENERIC ELECTRONIC MODULE (GEM) REMOVAL 1. NOTE: Prior to removal of the GEM, it is necessary to upload module configuration information to a diagnostic tool. This information needs to be downloaded into the new module once installed. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the pin-type retainer and the lower shield. 3. Position the RH and LH carpet aside from the center tunnel. 4. Disconnect the GEM electrical connectors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1847 5. Remove the GEM 1 Pull back the insulation and remove the nuts. 2 Remove the GEM. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Configure the GEM. Refer to Information Bus (Module Configuration). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation TORQUE BASED ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) Overview The Generation II (Gen II) Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) is a hardware and software strategy that delivers a transmission output shaft torque (via throttle angle) based on driver demand (pedal position). It utilizes an electronic throttle body, the PCM and a accelerator pedal assembly to control throttle opening and engine torque. The ETC system basically replaces the standard cable operated accelerator pedal, idle air control (IAC) motor, 3-wire throttle position sensor (TPS) and mechanical throttle body Background "Why Torque Based ETC" Torque based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver. It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as: VCT (deliver same torque during transitions) - Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV) Torque based ETC also results is a less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with smoother traction control. Other generic benefits of ETC are: Eliminate cruise control actuators - Eliminate Idle Air Control (IAC) Bypass actuator - Better airflow range - Packaging (no cable) - More responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality It should be noted that the ETC system includes a wrench light on the instrument cluster that illuminates when a fault is detected. Faults are also accompanied by DTCS and the "Check Engine Soon" light. Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) The Gen II electronic throttle body (Figure 133) has the following characteristics 1. The DC motor is driven by the PCM (requires two wires). The gear ratio from the motor to the throttle plate shaft is 17:1. 2. There are two designs; parallel and in-series. The parallel design has the motor under the bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing (in general this is more difficult to package). The in-series design has a separate motor housing that protrudes out and offers more packaging flexibility. 3. Two springs are used: one is used to close the throttle (main spring) and the other is in a plunger assembly that results in a default angle with no power applied. This is for limp home reasons (force of plunger spring is 2 times stronger than the main spring). Default angle is usually set to result in a top vehicle speed of 30 MPH (48 Km). Typically this throttle angle is 7 to 8 degrees from the hard-stop angle. 4. The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to avoid the throttle from binding in the bore (approximately 0.75 degree). This hard stop setting is non-adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle. 5. Unlike cable type throttle bodies, the intent for the ETB is not to have a hole in the throttle plate or to use plate sealant. The hole is not required in the ETB because the required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate angle controls idle and idle quality and eliminates the need for IAC bypass actuator. 6. The system has two throttle position sensors. Redundant throttle position signals are required for monitor reasons. TP1 has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and TP2 has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation the negative sloped TP sensor (TP1) is used by the control strategy as the indication of throttle position. The TP sensor assembly requires four wires. 5 V Reference Voltage - Signal Return (ground) - TP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0) - TP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5) Accelerator Pedal Position Sensors (APPS) The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand. 1. There are three pedal position sensors required for system monitoring. APP1 has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and APP2 & APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. 2. There are two VREF wires, two signal return wires and three signal wires (total of seven wires and pins) between the PCM and APPS assembly. - 2-5 V Reference Voltage - 2- Signal Return (ground) - APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0) - APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5) - APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5) 3. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1851 which is the input to the torque based strategy. Electronic Throttle Body And Accelerator Pedal Assembly 4. The three pedal position signals ensure a correct input to the PCM, if any one signal has a fault. The PCM knows if a signal is wrong by calculating where it should be, inferred by the other signals. A value will be substituted for a faulty signal if two out of the three signals are bad. Electronic Throttle Control System Strategy GEN II ETC System As stated earlier the torque based ETC strategy was developed mainly to improve fuel economy and to accommodate Variable Cam Timing. This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the drivers pedal position. By uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from pedal position (driver demand). This allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and transmission shift schedules while delivering the requested wheel torque. ETC is used on the 2004 MY Lincoln LS and Ford Thunderbird, Explorer/Mountaineer, and the new light-duty F-series. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1852 The ETC monitor system is distributed across two processors within the PCM: the main powertrain control processor unit (CPU) and a monitoring processor called an Enhanced-Quizzer (E-Quizzer) processor. The primary monitoring function is performed by the Independent Plausibility Check (IPC) software, which resides on the main processor. It is responsible for determining the driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the generated torque exceeds driver demand by specified amount, the IPC takes appropriate mitigating action. ETC System Failure Mode And Effects Management, Part 1 ETC System Failure Mode And Effects Management, Part 2 Since the IPC and main controller share the same processor, they are subject to a number of potential, common failure modes. Therefore, the E-Quizzer processor was added to redundantly monitor selected PCM inputs and to act as an intelligent watchdog and monitor the performance of the IPC and the main processor. If it determines that the IPC function is impaired in any way, it takes appropriate Failure Mode and Effects Management (FMEM) actions. Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1853 Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation, Part 1 Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation, Part 2 Accelerator and Throttle Position Sensor Inputs Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Check Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Check: Throttle Position Sensor Check Throttle Position Sensor Check: Throttle Plate Position Controller (TPPC) Outputs Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1854 Throttle Plate Controller Check Operation The purpose of the TPPC is to control the throttle position to the desired throttle angle. It is a separate chip embedded in the PCM. The desired angle is communicated from the main CPU via a 312.5 Hz duty cycle signal. The TPPC interprets the duty cycle signal as follows: 0% <= DC < 5% - Out of range, limp home default position. - 5% <= DC < 6% - Commanded default position, closed. - 6% <= DC < 7% - Commanded default position. Used for key-on, engine off. - 7% <= DC < 10% - Closed against hard-stop. Used to learn zero throttle angle position (hard-stop) after key-up. - 10% <= DC <= 92% - Normal operation, between 0 degrees (hard-stop) and 82%, 10% duty cycle = 0 degrees throttle angle, 92% duty cycle = 82 degrees throttle angle. - 92% < DC <= 96% - Wide Open Throttle, 82 to 86 degrees throttle angle. - 96% < DC <= 100% - Out of Range, limp home default position. The desired angle is relative to the hard-stop angle. The hard-stop angle is learned during each key-up process before the main CPU requests the throttle plate to be closed against the hard-stop. The output of the TPPC is a voltage request to the H-driver (also in PCM). The "H" driver is capable of positive or negative voltage to the Electronic Throttle Body Motor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures TSB 04-24-14 12/13/04 FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS 1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis, Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement. ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed. ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs. Verify repair after reprogramming. SERVICE PROCEDURE PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement 1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle. 2. Use WDS if available. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 1859 a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply. b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level. 3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool, such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS. NOTE IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS, GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF. PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD 1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. 2. Install the new PCM. NOTE IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER. 3. Attempt to start the vehicle. 4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM. 5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639. a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1. b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc. 6. Check for DTC B2900. a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during this procedure. b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7. 7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures. REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement 1. Verify all cables are properly connected. 2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level. 3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level. 4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again. 5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open previous session, and attempt reprogramming again. 6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure. 1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits. 2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity. NOTE IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 1860 INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC. 3. Connect WDS to vehicle. 4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK. 5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK. 6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK. 7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press TICK. 8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK. 9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK. 10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above". 11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK. 12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed above. Press TICK. 13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. 14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1861 View 151-11 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Engine Control Module: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1864 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 1865 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1866 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE - VEHICLE SPEED OUTPUT (VSO) The PCM-VSO (Powertrain Control Module - Vehicle Speed Output) speed signal subsystem generates vehicle speed information for distribution to the vehicle's electrical/electronic modules and subsystems that require vehicle speed data. This subsystem senses the transmission output shaft speed with a sensor. The data is processed by the PCM, and distributed as a hard-wired signal or as a message on the vehicle communication network (SCP or HS-CAN). The key features of the PCM-VSO system are to: - Infer vehicle movement from the output shaft sensor signal - Convert transmission output shaft rotational information to vehicle speed information - Compensate for tire size and axle ratio with a programmed calibration variable - Utilize a transfer case sensor for four wheel drive applications - Distribute vehicle speed information as a multiplexed message and/or an analog signal The signal from a non-contact shaft sensor (Output Shaft Sensor--OSS or Transfer Case Shaft Sensor--TCSS) mounted on the transmission (automatics, manuals, or 4X4 transfer cases) is sensed directly by the PCM. The PCM converts the OSS or TCSS information to 8000 pulses per mile, based on a tire and axle ratio conversion factor. This conversion factor is programmed into the PCM at the time the vehicle is assembled and can be reprogrammed in the field for servicing changes in the tire size and axle ratio. The PCM transmits the computed vehicle speed and distance traveled information to all the vehicle speed signal users on the vehicle. VSO information can be transmitted by a hard-wired interface between the vehicle speed signal user and the PCM, or by Speed and Odometer data message via the vehicle communication network data link. The VSO hard -wired signal wave form is a DC square wave with a voltage level of 0 to VBAT. Typical output operating range is 2.22 Hz per MPH (1.3808 Hz per 1 km/h). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module (PCM) POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the powertrain control module (PCM) cover. 1 Loosen the bolt and disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the nuts and the cover. 3. Remove the PCM. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 1869 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Reset POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) RESET Description All OBD II scan tools support the powertrain control module (PCM) reset. The PCM Reset allows the scan tool to command the PCM to clear all emission-related diagnostic information. When resetting the PCM, a DTC P1000 will be stored in the PCM until all the OBD II system monitors or components have been tested to satisfy a drive cycle, without any other faults occurring. For more information about a drive cycle, refer to Drive Cycles. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Drive Cycles The following events occur when a PCM reset is performed: Clears the number of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). - Clears the DTCs. - Clears the freeze frame data. - Clears diagnostic monitoring test results. - Resets status of the OBD II system monitors. - Sets DTC P1000. Resetting Keep Alive Memory (KAM) Resetting Keep Alive Memory will return PCM memory to its default setting. Adaptive learning contents such as idle speed, refueling event, and fuel trim are included. A PCM Reset (described above) is also part of a KAM Reset. Both can be useful in post repair retest. After Keep Alive Memory has been reset, the vehicle may exhibit certain driveability concerns. It will be necessary to drive the vehicle to allow the PCM to relearn values for optimum driveability and performance. This function may not be supported by all scan tools. Refer to scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual. If an error message is received or the scan tool does not support this function, disconnecting the battery ground cable for a minimum of 5 minutes may be used as an alternative procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 1870 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory FLASH ELECTRICALLY ERASEABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY - FLASH EEPROM Description Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) is contained in an Integrated Circuit (IC) internal to the PCM. The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle and is capable of being reprogrammed or reflashed repeatedly. As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the Vehicle Identification (VID) block. The VID block must be programmed when replacing the PCM as described under Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to perform this procedure may generate fault codes: P1635, P1639, VID Block not programmed or is corrupt. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware/parameter changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to perform this procedure properly may generate fault code: P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range is one of the main causes for code: P1639. This is described under Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the VIN number, octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the presence of speed control and four wheel drive electronic shift on the fly versus manual shift on the fly. Only items applicable to vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block will be displayed on the scan tool. When changing items in the VID block, the strategy will place range limits on certain items such as tire and axle ratio. The VID block is also limited to the number of times to be reconfigured. When this limit is reached, the scan tool will display a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again to reset the VID block. Each of the procedures described below use the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS). Reprogramming can be performed by a local Ford dealer for any non Ford facility. There are other Enhanced Scan Tools that may have reprogramming capabilities available. Refer to the manufacturers users manual for details. Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM A new PCM will contain the latest strategy and calibration level for a particular vehicle. However, the VID block will be blank and will need programming. There are two procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM and the second is manual data entry into the new PCM. Automatic data transfer will be performed if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by the use of a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The stored data can now be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been replaced. Manual data entry must be performed if the old module is damaged and/or incapable of communicating. Remove and replace the old PCM. Using a compatible Scan Tool select and execute Module/Parameter reprogramming referring to the manufacturers users manual. Important, make certain that all parameters are included. Failure to properly program Tire Size in revolutions per mile, (rev/mile = 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches) Axle Ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or Manual/Electronic shift on the fly (MSOF/ESOF) may result in codes: P1635, P1639. You may be instructed to contact the "AS BUILT" data center for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center ONLY if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford L-M technician's, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web sight for "AS Built" data. Non Ford technicians, use the Fed World website at "fedworld.gov". Select Auto Service Information and search for "Calibrations" or "Vehicle Calibrations" then specify vehicle manufacturer, model name and model year as required. For Ford L-M technician's, check out the "Programmable Module Installation" link on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web sight for quick Programmable Module data information by vehicle when using WDS or NGS. Making Changes to the VID Block A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to accommodate vehicle hardware. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool. Making Changes to the PCM Calibration At certain times, the entire EEPROM will need to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to changes made to the strategy or calibration after production or the need to reset the VID block because it has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1874 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1875 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1876 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1881 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1882 Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1883 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1887 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1888 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1889 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1894 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1895 Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1896 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-25 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 1901 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 1902 Air Bag Control Module: Service Precautions WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 1903 Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE The restraints control module (RCM) carries out the following functions: signals the inflators to deploy the air bags in the event of a deployable crash - monitors the air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) for faults - illuminates the air bag indicator if a fault is detected - flashes the air bag indicator to indicate the lamp fault code (LFC) detected - communicates through the data link connector (DLC) the current or historical diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) - signals the instrument cluster to activate a chime if the air bag indicator is not available and another SRS fault exists NOTE: The safety sensor is internal to the RCM and is not serviced separately. The RCM monitors the SRS for possible faults. If a fault is detected while the ignition switch is in the RUN position, the RCM will flash the air bag indicator located in the instrument cluster. When the ignition is cycled (turned off and then on), the air bag indicator will prove out by lighting for six seconds and then off for two seconds. After the prove out, the air bag indicator will then flash the two-digit LFC for any current SRS fault. If an SRS fault exists, the air bag indicator will flash the LFC five times, and then remain illuminated for the rest of the key cycle. The RCM will also communicate the current and historical DTCs through the DLC, to the scan tool. If the air bag indicator does not function, and the system detects a fault condition, the RCM will signal the instrument cluster to activate an audible chime. The chime is a series of five sets of five tone bursts. If the chime is heard, the SRS and the air bag indicator require repair. LFCs are prioritized. If two or more faults occur at the same time, the fault having the highest priority will be displayed. After that fault has been corrected, the next highest priority fault will be displayed. The RCM includes a backup power supply. This feature provides sufficient backup power to deploy the air bags in the event that the ignition circuit is damaged in a collision before the safing and air bag sensors determine that a deployment is required. The backup power supply will deplete its stored energy approximately one minute after the battery ground cable is disconnected. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Repair - Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Repair - "J" Nut, Restr Ctrl Module (RCM)/ Side Impact Sensor WELD NUT REPAIR - "J" NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND SIDE IMPACT SENSOR WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). NOTE: - There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld nut(s). Read both this procedures and Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, restraints control module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair. - If two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according to this procedure. Weld nuts must be installed according to Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor. - The following procedure applies to vehicles that have a rectangular hole in the sheet metal that is in close proximity to the missing weld nut. 1. Obtain a "J" nut (part number N623332-S301) or any of the following optional "J" nuts (part numbers: N623342-S101, N800854-S100, N800925-S100). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190) or equivalent. 3. Install the "J" nut through the rectangular hole in the sheet metal. 4. NOTE: Be sure the threaded portion of the "J" nut is aligned with the clearance hole in the sheet metal. Install the crash sensor. 5. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Repair - Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Repair - Missing Nut, Restr Ctrl Module (RCM)/Impact Sensor WELD NUT REPAIR - MISSING WELD NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND SIDE IMPACT SENSOR WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). NOTE: - There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld nut(s). Read both this procedure and Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, restraints control module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair. - Use only this procedure if two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according to Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Crash Sensor. - Radiator support repair shown, others are similar. 1. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) weld nut (part number N806285-S190). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190). 3. Route a sufficient length of copper welding wire through the weld nut clearance hole and back out an adjacent access hole. 4. Feed the copper welding wire through the weld nut, then through a standard flat washer. 5. Secure the flat washer so that it cannot be pulled off the end of the copper welding wire. 6. Pull the copper welding wire back through the clearance hole, allowing the weld nut and flat washer to follow the copper welding wire through. 7. Position the weld nut to the weld nut clearance hole, firmly pulling on the copper welding wire allowing the secured flat washer to hold the weld nut in position. 8. Holding the weld nut securely in place and using a MIG welder, weld in four places around the edge of the weld nut. 9. Metal finish as required. 10. Verify the nut is securely in place. 11. Install the crash sensor. 12. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Repair - Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Repair - Stripped Nut, Restr Ctrl Module (RCM)/Impact Sensor WELD NUT REPAIR - STRIPPED WELD NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND SIDE IMPACT SENSOR WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). 1. Obtain an 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw (part number N802455-S190). 2. Drill out the internal threads of the stripped-out weld nut to 7.37 mm (0.29 in) using a letter "L" size drill bit. 3. Position the crash sensor to the vehicle. 4. Install the 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw into the drilled-out weld nut. 5. Install the remaining attaching screws. 6. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1912 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1913 Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1914 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations View 151-17 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1920 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1921 Shift Interlock Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1922 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1927 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1932 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1933 Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1934 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Application and ID Wiper Control Module: Application and ID For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic Module (GEM) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations View 151-15 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1944 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Customer Interest Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings TSB 05-6-4 04/04/05 FALSE PARKING AID WARNINGS FORD: 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2002-2003 Windstar 2002-2005 Excursion, Expedition, Explorer, F-Super Duty 2003-2005 Escape 2004-2005 F-150, Freestar LINCOLN: 2002 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 2005 Montego 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 05-4-19 to update the description for labor operation F. ISSUE Vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may sound a warning tone when the vehicle is in reverse, even though there are no objects behind the vehicle. This condition may also occur on vehicles equipped with the forward sensing system (FSS) when vehicle is in reverse or drive. ACTION The condition MAY NOT be due to proximity sensor(s) malfunction but may be a normal operation characteristic, or due to sensor contamination (sensor being covered with dirt). Refer to the following description of OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS, before replacing any sensor(s). SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE THE FOLLOWING DESCRIPTIONS ARE TRUE FOR BOTH THE RSS AND FSS. OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS The RSS is only operational when the vehicle is in reverse. For vehicles also equipped with the FSS the system is operational when the vehicle is in reverse or drive. The FSS and RSS give an audible warning to the driver when obstacles are within 6' (1.8 meters) from the vehicle, and when obstacles are within 18" (46 cm) on either side of the bumper. NOTE CERTAIN OBSTACLES MAY BE DIFFICULT FOR THE RSS/FSS TO DETECT DEPENDING ON GEOMETRIC SHAPE OR PROFILE OF THE OBJECT AND THE MATERIAL THE OBJECT IS COMPOSED OF. NOTE THE NEAREST OBSTACLE WILL ALWAYS BE THE OBSTACLE REPORTED, WITH THE EXCEPTION STATED IN THE NOTE ABOVE. NOTE THE VEHICLE OPERATOR MUST BE AWARE THAT THE WARNING TONES ARE AT A MODERATE VOLUME LEVEL AND THAT THE TONES MAY BE DIFFICULT TO HEAR WITH BACKGROUND NOISE (RADIO, BLOWERS, PASSENGER CONVERSATION, ETC). THE RSS/FSS SPEAKER VOLUME IS ALREADY AT MAXIMUM VOLUME AND IS NOT ADJUSTABLE. In cases where the RSS/FSS give warnings but nothing is within range of the vehicle sensors, or give warnings for 3 seconds then ceases, the occurrence may be due to any of the following reasons: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 1953 BLOCKED/CONTAMINATED PROXIMITY SENSOR SURFACE: Proximity sensor surfaces may be covered with snow, ice, dirt or mud. There is a gap between the sensor membrane and its plastic housing that must remain clear (Figure 1). If this space is contaminated with any foreign material the system may sound a continuous tone or intermittent tone. The sensor surface can be cleaned by a high pressure water spray. SIDE COVERAGE SENSOR: There is side/rear coverage that extends approximately 18" (46 cm) perpendicular from the side rear fascia. Side coverage is a desirable feature in a parking situation where the vehicle is involved in a very tight turn with little rearward movement, or where the vehicle is backing parallel to a large, extending obstacle such as a garage wall. If there is no encroachment between any of the outer sensors and an obstacle, then the warning will sound for 3 seconds and cease. If vehicle or the obstacle begin to move closer to each other, then the warning will begin again. Obstacles within 10" (25 cm) of the fascia will always be reported with a continuous tone. This is considered normal operation. ABNORMAL ROAD SURFACES: The RSS/FSS may give warnings due to certain road surfaces with surface projections such as rocks, broken pavement, unplowed snow covered roads. This is considered normal operation. OTHER POSSIBLE CAUSES: Very wet weather conditions, such as mist, frost or snow may provoke occasional warnings. The system may detect liftgate while open and certain trailer hitches and/or bicycle racks. External ultrasonic noise may be detected (high velocity air, machinery). This is considered normal operation. SENSOR DIAGNOSTICS 1. Ensure that nothing is in detectable sensor-range 6' (1.8 meters) behind vehicle for the RSS and within 6' (1.8 meters) of the front of the vehicle for the FSS. 2. Clean proximity sensors with a dry shop towel, and if required wash with water or a high pressure water to ensure that the membrane gap is free of any dirt or contamination. 3. Using the New Generation Star (NGS) tester (up to 2004 MY), NGS+ (2005 MY) or WDS observe the following four parking aid module parameter identification displays (PIDs) for distance information: ^ LR_CNTD (NGS)/LRI_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle) ^ RR_CNTD (NGS)/RRI_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle) ^ LR_CNRD (NGS)/LRO_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle) ^ RR_CNRD (NGS)/RRO_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle) NOTE PID IDENTIFIERS ALSO EXIST FOR FRONT SENSORS IF EQUIPPED. a. If the sensor is functioning properly, with no objects in range of the vehicle, each sensor PID as described above should display a full scale numerical reading of 255 cm (NGS) or 100 inches (NGS+ and WDS). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 1954 b. If a PID reading other than 255 or 100 displays, replace only the sensor that is out of specification. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 413-00 as needed for removal and installation procedures. ACCESSING PIDS WITH NGS, SELECT: ^ Vehicle Line ^ Diagnostic Data Link ^ PAM ^ PID/Data Monitor And Record ^ Select The Appropriate PIDS ^ Start ACCESSING PIDS WITH WDS, SELECT: ^ Tool box Icon ^ Datalogger, Then Tick (Check Mark) ^ Modules, Then Tick ^ PAM, Then Tick ^ Select The Appropriate PIDS, Then Tick NOTE FOR SOME VEHICLES, REPLACEMENT SENSORS WILL BE RECEIVED WITH A PRIMED-BLACK PAINTABLE SURFACE AND MUST BE PAINTED TO MATCH VEHICLE COLOR. REFER TO PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS BELOW. PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS ^ Use a Ford-Approved paint gun, apply base/clear coat to match vehicle ^ Surface can be cleaned with Isopropyl alcohol ^ Maximum paint curing temperature is 194~ F (90~ C) for 1 hour ^ Maximum coating thickness 125 micro meters (including the primer) ^ Paint or veil of paint must not get into connector ^ Immersion processes ARE NOT permitted ^ Paint must be applied evenly to the surface ^ Functional test must be done after painting ^ Use NGS tester to confirm settling time of the sensor is within the specified limits: 850 micro sec. to 1500 micro sec. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 050604A 2004-2005 F150, 0.7 Hr. 2002-2005 Excursion, 2002 Expedition/Navigator, 2002-2005 F Super Duty, 2002-2003 Blackwood, 2005 Freestyle: Replace Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 1955 One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604B 2003-2005 Aviator, 0.9 Hr. 2002-2005 Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604B 2004-2005 Monterey, 0.8 Hr. 2004-2005 Freestar, 2002-2003 Windstar: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604B 2003-2005 Expedition: 1.3 Hrs. Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604C 2004-2005 Monterey, 1.2 Hrs. 2004-2005 Freestar, 2005 Montego, 2005 Ford Five Hundred: Replace One Or More FRONT Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604D 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Replace One Or Both INNER Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604E 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Replace One Or Both OUTER Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604F Additional Time To Paint 1.0 Hr. Sensors To Match Bumper Cover On The Following Vehicles: Aviator, Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 1956 Monterey, Five Hundred, Freestyle, Montego DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15K859 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings Parking Assist Distance Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings TSB 05-6-4 04/04/05 FALSE PARKING AID WARNINGS FORD: 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2002-2003 Windstar 2002-2005 Excursion, Expedition, Explorer, F-Super Duty 2003-2005 Escape 2004-2005 F-150, Freestar LINCOLN: 2002 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 2005 Montego 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 05-4-19 to update the description for labor operation F. ISSUE Vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may sound a warning tone when the vehicle is in reverse, even though there are no objects behind the vehicle. This condition may also occur on vehicles equipped with the forward sensing system (FSS) when vehicle is in reverse or drive. ACTION The condition MAY NOT be due to proximity sensor(s) malfunction but may be a normal operation characteristic, or due to sensor contamination (sensor being covered with dirt). Refer to the following description of OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS, before replacing any sensor(s). SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE THE FOLLOWING DESCRIPTIONS ARE TRUE FOR BOTH THE RSS AND FSS. OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS The RSS is only operational when the vehicle is in reverse. For vehicles also equipped with the FSS the system is operational when the vehicle is in reverse or drive. The FSS and RSS give an audible warning to the driver when obstacles are within 6' (1.8 meters) from the vehicle, and when obstacles are within 18" (46 cm) on either side of the bumper. NOTE CERTAIN OBSTACLES MAY BE DIFFICULT FOR THE RSS/FSS TO DETECT DEPENDING ON GEOMETRIC SHAPE OR PROFILE OF THE OBJECT AND THE MATERIAL THE OBJECT IS COMPOSED OF. NOTE THE NEAREST OBSTACLE WILL ALWAYS BE THE OBSTACLE REPORTED, WITH THE EXCEPTION STATED IN THE NOTE ABOVE. NOTE THE VEHICLE OPERATOR MUST BE AWARE THAT THE WARNING TONES ARE AT A MODERATE VOLUME LEVEL AND THAT THE TONES MAY BE DIFFICULT TO HEAR WITH BACKGROUND NOISE (RADIO, BLOWERS, PASSENGER CONVERSATION, ETC). THE RSS/FSS SPEAKER VOLUME IS ALREADY AT MAXIMUM VOLUME AND IS NOT ADJUSTABLE. In cases where the RSS/FSS give warnings but nothing is within range of the vehicle sensors, or give warnings for 3 seconds then ceases, the occurrence may be due to any of the following reasons: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 1962 BLOCKED/CONTAMINATED PROXIMITY SENSOR SURFACE: Proximity sensor surfaces may be covered with snow, ice, dirt or mud. There is a gap between the sensor membrane and its plastic housing that must remain clear (Figure 1). If this space is contaminated with any foreign material the system may sound a continuous tone or intermittent tone. The sensor surface can be cleaned by a high pressure water spray. SIDE COVERAGE SENSOR: There is side/rear coverage that extends approximately 18" (46 cm) perpendicular from the side rear fascia. Side coverage is a desirable feature in a parking situation where the vehicle is involved in a very tight turn with little rearward movement, or where the vehicle is backing parallel to a large, extending obstacle such as a garage wall. If there is no encroachment between any of the outer sensors and an obstacle, then the warning will sound for 3 seconds and cease. If vehicle or the obstacle begin to move closer to each other, then the warning will begin again. Obstacles within 10" (25 cm) of the fascia will always be reported with a continuous tone. This is considered normal operation. ABNORMAL ROAD SURFACES: The RSS/FSS may give warnings due to certain road surfaces with surface projections such as rocks, broken pavement, unplowed snow covered roads. This is considered normal operation. OTHER POSSIBLE CAUSES: Very wet weather conditions, such as mist, frost or snow may provoke occasional warnings. The system may detect liftgate while open and certain trailer hitches and/or bicycle racks. External ultrasonic noise may be detected (high velocity air, machinery). This is considered normal operation. SENSOR DIAGNOSTICS 1. Ensure that nothing is in detectable sensor-range 6' (1.8 meters) behind vehicle for the RSS and within 6' (1.8 meters) of the front of the vehicle for the FSS. 2. Clean proximity sensors with a dry shop towel, and if required wash with water or a high pressure water to ensure that the membrane gap is free of any dirt or contamination. 3. Using the New Generation Star (NGS) tester (up to 2004 MY), NGS+ (2005 MY) or WDS observe the following four parking aid module parameter identification displays (PIDs) for distance information: ^ LR_CNTD (NGS)/LRI_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle) ^ RR_CNTD (NGS)/RRI_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle) ^ LR_CNRD (NGS)/LRO_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle) ^ RR_CNRD (NGS)/RRO_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle) NOTE PID IDENTIFIERS ALSO EXIST FOR FRONT SENSORS IF EQUIPPED. a. If the sensor is functioning properly, with no objects in range of the vehicle, each sensor PID as described above should display a full scale numerical reading of 255 cm (NGS) or 100 inches (NGS+ and WDS). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 1963 b. If a PID reading other than 255 or 100 displays, replace only the sensor that is out of specification. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 413-00 as needed for removal and installation procedures. ACCESSING PIDS WITH NGS, SELECT: ^ Vehicle Line ^ Diagnostic Data Link ^ PAM ^ PID/Data Monitor And Record ^ Select The Appropriate PIDS ^ Start ACCESSING PIDS WITH WDS, SELECT: ^ Tool box Icon ^ Datalogger, Then Tick (Check Mark) ^ Modules, Then Tick ^ PAM, Then Tick ^ Select The Appropriate PIDS, Then Tick NOTE FOR SOME VEHICLES, REPLACEMENT SENSORS WILL BE RECEIVED WITH A PRIMED-BLACK PAINTABLE SURFACE AND MUST BE PAINTED TO MATCH VEHICLE COLOR. REFER TO PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS BELOW. PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS ^ Use a Ford-Approved paint gun, apply base/clear coat to match vehicle ^ Surface can be cleaned with Isopropyl alcohol ^ Maximum paint curing temperature is 194~ F (90~ C) for 1 hour ^ Maximum coating thickness 125 micro meters (including the primer) ^ Paint or veil of paint must not get into connector ^ Immersion processes ARE NOT permitted ^ Paint must be applied evenly to the surface ^ Functional test must be done after painting ^ Use NGS tester to confirm settling time of the sensor is within the specified limits: 850 micro sec. to 1500 micro sec. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 050604A 2004-2005 F150, 0.7 Hr. 2002-2005 Excursion, 2002 Expedition/Navigator, 2002-2005 F Super Duty, 2002-2003 Blackwood, 2005 Freestyle: Replace Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 1964 One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604B 2003-2005 Aviator, 0.9 Hr. 2002-2005 Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604B 2004-2005 Monterey, 0.8 Hr. 2004-2005 Freestar, 2002-2003 Windstar: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604B 2003-2005 Expedition: 1.3 Hrs. Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604C 2004-2005 Monterey, 1.2 Hrs. 2004-2005 Freestar, 2005 Montego, 2005 Ford Five Hundred: Replace One Or More FRONT Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604D 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Replace One Or Both INNER Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604E 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Replace One Or Both OUTER Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604F Additional Time To Paint 1.0 Hr. Sensors To Match Bumper Cover On The Following Vehicles: Aviator, Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 1965 Monterey, Five Hundred, Freestyle, Montego DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15K859 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1966 View 151-38 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left > Page 1969 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left > Page 1970 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left > Page 1971 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1972 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair PARKING AID SENSOR REMOVAL 1. NOTE: The rear bumper removal is only necessary for access to the outer parking aid sensors. The inner parking aid sensors do not require rear bumper removal for access. Remove the rear bumper. 2. Remove the parking aid sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Release the tabs. 3 Remove the parking aid sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-19 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1976 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1977 Parking Assist Switch: Service and Repair PARKING AID SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Remove the parking aid switch. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Press the tabs. 3 Remove the parking aid switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations View 151-15 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1983 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch View 151-34 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 1988 View 151-33 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 1991 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch > Page 1994 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch > Page 1995 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch > Page 1996 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch > Page 1997 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-17 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2001 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2002 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2003 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2004 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Seat Switch: Locations View 151-24 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2008 View 151-36 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2009 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2010 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2011 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2012 Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair SEAT CONTROL SWITCH REMOVAL WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which may result in personal injury. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. NOTE: - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle. - Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side air bag to floor connector. - A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. - If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the seat control switch knob. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2013 3. Remove the front seat cushion side shield. 1 Remove the seat backrest handle. 2 Remove the screw. 3 Remove the shield. - Disconnect the electrical connector(s). 4. Remove the seat control switch. 1 Remove the screws. 2 Remove the switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Driver Side View 151-36 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Driver Side > Page 2018 View 151-37 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side > Page 2021 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2022 Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair HEATED SEAT SWITCH REMOVAL WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which may result in personal injury. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. NOTE: - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle. - Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side air bag to floor connector. - A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. - If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the seat control switch knob. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2023 3. Remove the front seat cushion side shield. 1 Remove the seat backrest handle. 2 Remove the screw. 3 Remove the shield. - Disconnect the electrical connectors. 4. Release the locking tab and remove the heated seat switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-21 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Roof Opening Panel Position Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Roof Opening Panel Position Switch > Page 2029 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-14 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2034 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-26 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2038 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2039 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the parking brake control. 2. Remove the parking brake warning indicator switch. ^ Remove the screws. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips Wheel Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips TSB 04-23-2 11/29/04 WHEEL SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL TIP FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005 Mariner ISSUE When servicing the wheel speed sensors on a 2001-2005 Escape or 2005 Mariner and Escape Hybrid, care must be taken during removal to prevent damage. The wheel speed sensor wire has a body plug attached to it. This plug can be damaged if not removed correctly, such as removal for pinpoint testing. If the body plug is damaged, sensor replacement may be necessary even though the sensor is functional in all other respects. ACTION When removing the body plug, rotate the plug into a position which allows the use of a small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body plug. These two tabs are at right angles (directly above and below) to the sensor wire. See Figures 1 and 2 for reference. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips > Page 2044 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front View 151-14 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 2047 View 151-15 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 2048 View 151-27 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 2049 View 151-28 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 2052 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 2053 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 2054 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor, Front Sensor - Front Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Detach the grommet from the body and pull the connector through the hole. 3. Disconnect the sensor wiring. 4. Detach the retainer. 5. Remove the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 2057 6. NOTE: Clean off any dirt that may have collected around the sensor before removal. Remove the bolt and the sensor. 7. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 2058 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor, Rear Sensor - Rear Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Detach the grommet from the body and pull the connector through the hole. 3. Disconnect the sensor wiring. 4. Detach the bolt. 5. Remove the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 2059 6. NOTE: Clean off any dirt that may have collected around the sensor before removal. Remove the bolt and the sensor. 7. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 2060 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor Ring, Front Sensor Indicator - Front Removal and Installation 1. The front anti-lock brake sensor indicator is attached to the halfshaft. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 2061 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor Ring, Rear Sensor Indicator - Rear Removal and Installation 1. The rear anti-lock brake sensor indicator is attached to the halfshaft. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2067 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2068 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Typical Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor (Figure 33) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine coolant passage. The ECT sensor is similar in construction to the IAT sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2069 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Partially drain the cooling system. 2. Remove the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Unclip and remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2073 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE SENSOR Typical Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor (Figure 32) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and increases as temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy details. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Deactivator Switch View 151-23 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Deactivator Switch > Page 2079 View 151-23 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch > Page 2082 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position Switch Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position Switch BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH Typical Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position (BPP) switch (Figure 27) is used by the PCM to disengage the transmission torque converter clutch and on some applications as an input to the idle speed control for idle quality and for vehicle speed control deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in the following manner: - BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake is applied. - BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM or HEM), BPP signal is than broadcasted over the data link to be received by the PCM. - BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake (ABS)- traction control / stability assist module. The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generate an output called the Driver Brake Application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Note on applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stoplamp circuit, if all stoplamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stoplamp bulbs has failed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position Switch > Page 2085 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pressure Applied/Brake Deactivator Switch BRAKE PRESSURE APPLIED/BRAKE DEACTIVATOR SWITCH The brake pressure applied (BPA) switch also sometimes called the brake deactivator switch for vehicle speed control deactivation. Is a normally closed switch, which supplies battery positive voltage (B+) to the PCM when the brake pedal is NOT applied. When the brake pedal is depressed, the normally closed switch will open and power is removed from the PCM. On some applications the normally closed BPA switch along with the normally open brake pedal position (BPP) switch are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function can be disable if a brake switch failure occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM did not change states when they were expected to a diagnostic trouble code P1572 can be set by the PCM strategy. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2086 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service and Repair SPEED CONTROL DEACTIVATOR SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the deactivator switch. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Rotate counterclockwise 45 degrees and remove the deactivator switch. INSTALLATION CAUTION: Initial installation of a deactivator switch allows for one adjustment. If additional adjustments are required, install a new switch. 1. Release the plunger lock. - Turn the lock knob counterclockwise until the first click is felt. 2. Depress the brake pedal. 3. Install the deactivator switch. 1 Position the deactivator switch in the bracket and rotate clockwise 45 degrees. 2 Connect the electrical connector. 4. NOTE: There should be an extra click heard when tugging on the brake pedal. Slowly release the brake pedal and tug moderately once the pedal reaches the rest position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations View 151-23 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 2090 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 2091 Clutch Switch: Description and Operation CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The clutch pedal position (CPP) switch (Figure 30) is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a 5-volt reference (VREF) signal to the CPP switch. If the CPP switch is closed, indicating the clutch pedal is engaged, the output voltage (5 volts) from the PCM is grounded through the signal return line to the PCM, and there is 1 volt or less. One volt or less indicates there is a reduced load on the engine. If the CPP switch is open, meaning the clutch pedal is disengaged, the input on the CPP signal to the PCM will be approximately 5 volts. Then, the 5-volt signal input at the PCM will indicate a load on the engine. The PCM uses the load information in mass air flow and fuel calculations. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-20 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2095 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair SPEED CONTROL SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the steering wheel. 2. WARNING: When carrying a live air bag, make sure the bag and trim cover are pointed away from your body. In the unlikely event of an accidental deployment, the bag will then deploy with minimal chance of injury. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Remove the steering wheel cover. 3. Remove the steering wheel frame. 1 Remove the nuts. 2 Disconnect the ground wire. 3 Remove the steering wheel frame. 4. Disconnect the speed control switches electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2096 5. Remove the speed control switches. 1 Remove the screws. 2 Remove the speed control switches. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations View 151-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2101 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2102 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Oil Pressure Sender Removal and Installation 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the right side splash shield. 3. NOTE: The A/C compressor has been removed for clarity. Remove the oil pressure sender. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the sender. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR Typical Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor The engine oil temperature (EOT) sensor (Figure 35) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system near the oil filter or screwed into the oil pan. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the following: - On Variable Cam Timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM will begin reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair BLOWER MOTOR SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Remove the blower motor switch knob. 3. Remove the blower motor switch. - Depress the locking tab. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR A/C Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor Voltage And Resistance Chart, Part 1 A/C Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor Voltage And Resistance Chart, Part 2 The air conditioning evaporative temperature (ACET) sensor senses evaporator air discharge temperature. The ACET sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The PCM sources a low current 5 volts on the ACET circuit. With SIG RTN also connected to the ACET sensor, the varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals. As A/C evaporator air temperature changes, the varying resistance of the ACET sensor changes the voltage the PCM detects. The ACET sensor is used to more accurately control A/C clutch cycling, improving defrost/demist performance, reduce A/C clutch cycling, etc. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch View 151-15 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch > Page 2117 View 151-15 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch > Page 2120 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch and A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation A/C Cycling Switch and A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch A/C CYCLING SWITCH AIC Cycling Switch The A/C cycling switch is mounted on a Schrader valve-type fitting on the top of the suction accumulator. - A valve depressor, located inside the threaded end of the A/C cycling switch, presses in on the Schrader valve stem. - This allows the suction pressure inside the suction accumulator to control the operation of the A/C cycling switch. - The electrical switch contacts open when the suction pressure drops to 152-193 kPa (22-28 psi). - The contacts close when the suction pressure rises to 276-324 kPa (40-47 psi). - When the A/C cycling switch contacts close, the signal to energize the A/C clutch is sent to the powertrain control module (PCM) which energizes the A/C relay and supplies B+ voltage to the A/C clutch field coil. - When the A/C cycling switch contacts open, the A/C clutch field coil is deenergized and compressor operation stops. - The A/C cycling switch will control the A/C evaporator core pressure at a point where the plate/fin surface temperature will be maintained slightly above freezing. - This prevents icing of the A/C evaporator core and blockage of airflow. - It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to remove the A/C cycling switch. A/C PRESSURE CUT-OFF SWITCH A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch The A/C pressure cut-off switch is used to interrupt A/C compressor operation in the event of high system discharge pressures. - The A/C pressure cut-off switch is mounted on a Schrader valve-type fitting on the high pressure side of the condenser to evaporator line. - A valve depressor, located inside the threaded end of the A/C pressure cut-off switch, is used to monitor the compressor discharge pressure. - It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch. - The A/C pressure cut-off switch has two sets of contacts. One electrical contact is normally closed. - When the compressor discharge pressure rises to approximately 3,103 kPa (450 psi), the switch contacts open, disengaging the A/C compressor. - When the pressure drops to approximately 1,724 kPa (250 psi), the contacts close to allow operation of the A/C compressor. The switch contains a second set of electrical contacts used for high-speed fan control. - When the compressor discharge pressure reaches approximately 2,241 kPa (325 psi), these contacts close and engage the high-speed fan control. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch and A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch > Page 2123 - When the pressure drops to approximately 1,896 kPa (275 psi), the contacts again open and the high speed fan control is disengaged. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch and A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch > Page 2124 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Cycling Switch AIR CONDITIONING CYCLING SWITCH The air conditioning (A/C) cycling switch may be wired to either the ACCS or ACPSW PCM input. When the A/C cycling switch opens, the PCM will turn off the A/C clutch. For information on the specific function of the A/C cycling switch, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning. The A/C cycling switch (ACCS) circuit to the PCM provides a voltage signal which indicates when the A/C is requested. When the A/C demand switch is turned on, and both the A/C cycling switch and the high pressure contacts of the A/C high pressure switch (if equipped and in circuit) are closed, voltage is supplied to the ACCS circuit at the PCM. Refer to the applicable Vehicle/Diagrams for vehicle specific wiring. If the ACCS signal is not received by the PCM, the PCM circuit will not allow the A/C to operate. For additional information, refer to PCM outputs, wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff. NOTE: Some applications do not have a dedicated (separate) input to the PCM indicating that A/C is requested. This information is received by the PCM through the communication link. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch and A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch > Page 2125 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Pressure Sensor AIR CONDITIONING PRESSURE SENSOR A/C Pressure Sensor Output Voltage Vs. Pressure Chart Typical Air Conditioning Pressure Sensor The air conditioning pressure (A/C pressure) sensor (Figure 26) is located in the high pressure (discharge) side of the air conditioning A/C system. The A/C pressure sensor provides a voltage signal to the powertrain control module (PCM) that is proportional to the A/C pressure. The PCM uses this information for A/C clutch control, fan control and idle speed control. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch and A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch > Page 2126 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning High Pressure Switch AIR CONDITIONING HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH The A/C high pressure switch is used for additional A/C system pressure control. The A/C high pressure switch is either dual function for two-speed electric fan applications or single function for all others. For refrigerant containment control, the normally closed high pressure contacts open at a predetermined A/C pressure. This will result in the A/C turning off, preventing the A/C pressure from rising to a level that would open the A/C high pressure relief valve. For fan control, the normally open medium pressure contacts close at a predetermined A/C pressure. This grounds the ACPSW circuit input to the PCM. The PCM will then turn on the high speed fan to help reduce the pressure. For additional information, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning or Vehicle/Diagrams. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) CYCLING SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the A/C cycling switch. 1 Disconnect the A/C cycling switch electrical connector. 2 Remove the A/C cycling switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch > Page 2129 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Pressure Cutoff Switch PRESSURE CUTOFF SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the pressure cut-off switch. 1 Disconnect the A/C pressure cut-off switch electrical connector. 2 Remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2134 Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2135 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2136 Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair INSTRUMENT PANEL DIMMER SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel dimmer switch. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-32 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 2142 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation FUEL PUMP MODULE Fuel Pump Module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2146 Fuel Pump Module (For Returnable Fuel Systems) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2147 Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2148 Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM) The fuel pump (FP) module (Figure 71),(Figure 72) and(Figure 73) is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-26 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2152 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2153 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the parking brake control. 2. Remove the parking brake warning indicator switch. ^ Remove the screws. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor > Page 2160 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-23 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2164 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2165 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH Typical Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position (BPP) switch (Figure 27) is used by the PCM to disengage the transmission torque converter clutch and on some applications as an input to the idle speed control for idle quality and for vehicle speed control deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in the following manner: - BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake is applied. - BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM or HEM), BPP signal is than broadcasted over the data link to be received by the PCM. - BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake (ABS)- traction control / stability assist module. The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generate an output called the Driver Brake Application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Note on applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stoplamp circuit, if all stoplamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stoplamp bulbs has failed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2166 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the brake pedal position (BPP) switch. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Rotate clockwise and remove the BPP switch. INSTALLATION NOTE: Initial installation of brake pedal position (BPP) switch allows for one adjustment. If additional adjustments are necessary, install a new switch. 1. To unlock, rotate the lock knob counterclockwise to the stop. 2. With the engine running, fully depress and hold the brake pedal. 3. Install the brake pedal position (BPP) switch. 1 Position the BPP switch in the bracket and rotate counterclockwise. 2 Connect the electrical connector. 4. Slowly release the brake pedal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-32 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 2172 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-17 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2176 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2177 Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service and Repair FOG LAMP SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to remove fog lamp switch or damage to the finish panel may occur. Adding tape to the end of a thin tool will reduce marring to the finish panel. 2. Use a thin tool to remove the fog lamp switch. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-18 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2181 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2182 Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair Hazard Flasher Switch Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Position the instrument panel center finish panel rearward from the instrument panel. 3. Remove the hazard flasher switch. 1. Disconnect electrical connector. 2. Remove the hazard flasher switch. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-20 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2186 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2187 Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2188 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-20 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the upper steering column shroud. 3. Remove the lower steering column shroud. 1. Remove the screws. 2. Remove the lower steering column shroud. 4. Remove the multifunction switch. 1. Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Remove the screws. 3. Remove the multifunction switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSORS (APPS) The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand. 1. There are three pedal position sensors required for system monitoring. APP1 has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and APP2 & APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. 2. There are two VREF wires, two signal return wires and three signal wires (total of seven wires and pins) between the PCM and APPS assembly. - 2-5 V Reference Voltage - 2- Signal Return (ground) - APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0) - APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5) - APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5) 3. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. Electronic Throttle Body And Accelerator Pedal Assembly 4. The three pedal position signals ensure a correct input to the PCM, if any one signal has a fault. The PCM knows if a signal is wrong by calculating where it should be, inferred by the other signals. A value will be substituted for a faulty signal if two out of the three signals are bad. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2203 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2204 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire Terminals Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2205 Typical "Drop-in" Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The mass air flow (MAF) sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire (Figure 42). If the hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the air mass flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology (IBT) with an integrated intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2206 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2210 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2211 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR Typical Hall-Effect Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance Sensor The camshaft position (CMP) sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston No.1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the powertrain control module (PCM) and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. The Coil On Plug (COP) ignition applications also use the CMP signal to select the proper ignition coil to fire. The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or circuit. DTC P0340 is associated with this sensor. Vehicles with two CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. DTC P0345 is associated with this sensor and it is referred to as CMP2. There are two types of CMP sensors: the three pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (Figure 28) found on F-Series 4.2L applications, and the two pin connector variable reluctance sensor found on all other vehicles (Figure 29). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2212 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The clutch pedal position (CPP) switch (Figure 30) is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a 5-volt reference (VREF) signal to the CPP switch. If the CPP switch is closed, indicating the clutch pedal is engaged, the output voltage (5 volts) from the PCM is grounded through the signal return line to the PCM, and there is 1 volt or less. One volt or less indicates there is a reduced load on the engine. If the CPP switch is open, meaning the clutch pedal is disengaged, the input on the CPP signal to the PCM will be approximately 5 volts. Then, the 5-volt signal input at the PCM will indicate a load on the engine. The PCM uses the load information in mass air flow and fuel calculations. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2216 Clutch Switch: Service and Repair CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the clutch pedal position (CPP) electrical connector. 2. Remove the CPP locknut and the switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2220 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2221 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Typical Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor (Figure 33) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine coolant passage. The ECT sensor is similar in construction to the IAT sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2222 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Partially drain the cooling system. 2. Remove the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Unclip and remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2226 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2227 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (INTEGRATED IGNITION SYSTEMS) Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block or timing cover and is adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the powertrain control module (PCM). The trigger wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the trigger wheel, the CKP indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to fixed reference (Figure 31). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2228 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the bolts and the right front lower splash shield. 3. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2232 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE SENSOR Typical Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor (Figure 32) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and increases as temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy details. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL LEVEL INPUT The fuel level input (FLI) is a hard wire signal input to the PCM from the fuel pump (FP) module. Refer to the description of the FLI in the On-Board Diagnostics II Monitors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR REMOVAL WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited, resulting in possible personal injury. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. WARNING: The evaporative emission system contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor. Although not present in large quantities, it still presents the danger of explosion or fire. Disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery to minimize the possibility of an electrical spark occurring, possibly causing a fire or explosion if fuel vapor or fuel liquid is present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Disconnect the battery. 2. Remove the rear seat assembly. 3. Remove the fuel tank sending unit access cover. 4. Disconnect the fuel tank pressure sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the fuel tank pressure sensor. - Disconnect the vapor tubes. INSTALLATION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2239 1. NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Carry out a leak test. See: Powertrain Management/Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test - Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Powertrain Management/Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Intake Air Temperature Sensor Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Temperature Sensor INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Typical Stane Alone/Non-integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into A Drop-in Or Flange Type MAF Sensor The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Page 2244 Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The IAT provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, spark and air flow. The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT sensor. Currently there are two design types of IAT sensors used, a stand alone\non-integrated type (Figure 39) and a integrated (Figure 40) type. Both types function the same, however the integrated type is incorporated into the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand alone sensor. Supercharged vehicles use (2) IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate as described above. However, one is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard OBD II/cold weather input, while a second sensor (IAT2) is located after the supercharger in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature information to the PCM to control border-line spark and to help determine intercooler efficiency. Currently two types of IAT2 sensors are used. A non-integrated screw in type (Figure 39) and an integrated type, which is part of the Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) sensor (Figure 48). The TMAP sensor consists of a IAT thermistor and a manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor. The thermistor portion of the TMAP is used for IAT2 function and operates in the same manner as a non-integrated IAT2. For additional information on the MAP portion of the TMAP, refer to the Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor description and operation found later. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Page 2245 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor THERMAL MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) Sensor The Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor (TMAP) (Figure 48) consists of a manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor and an integrated thermistor. The MAP portion of the sensor uses a piezo-resistive silicon sensing element to provide a voltage proportional to the absolute pressure in the intake manifold. The thermistor portion of the sensor operates in the same manner as an intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. For additional information on how the IAT sensor operates, refer to the Intake Air Temperature Sensor description and operation. For the 2.3L Ranger and 2.3L PZEV Focus, the TMAP sensor is part of the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system. The PCM uses information from the MAP portion of the TMAP sensor, throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor or cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor and crankshaft position (CKP) sensor to determine how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. The thermistor portion of the TMAP sensor is currently not being used on this application. For the 4.6L SC Mustang, the PCM uses manifold absolute pressure information from the MAP portion of the TMAP sensor along with other sensor inputs to determine the proper amount of fuel needed for combustion under varying engine load conditions. The thermistor portion of the TMAP sensor is used as a second IAT sensor. This second IAT sensor, located after the supercharger, provides manifold air temperature information to the PCM. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2249 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) The knock sensor (KS) (Figure 41) is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation THERMAL MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) Sensor The Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor (TMAP) (Figure 48) consists of a manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor and an integrated thermistor. The MAP portion of the sensor uses a piezo-resistive silicon sensing element to provide a voltage proportional to the absolute pressure in the intake manifold. The thermistor portion of the sensor operates in the same manner as an intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. For additional information on how the IAT sensor operates, refer to the Intake Air Temperature Sensor description and operation. For the 2.3L Ranger and 2.3L PZEV Focus, the TMAP sensor is part of the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system. The PCM uses information from the MAP portion of the TMAP sensor, throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor or cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor and crankshaft position (CKP) sensor to determine how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. The thermistor portion of the TMAP sensor is currently not being used on this application. For the 4.6L SC Mustang, the PCM uses manifold absolute pressure information from the MAP portion of the TMAP sensor along with other sensor inputs to determine the proper amount of fuel needed for combustion under varying engine load conditions. The thermistor portion of the TMAP sensor is used as a second IAT sensor. This second IAT sensor, located after the supercharger, provides manifold air temperature information to the PCM. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR Typical Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor The engine oil temperature (EOT) sensor (Figure 35) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system near the oil filter or screwed into the oil pan. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the following: - On Variable Cam Timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM will begin reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 2260 Oxygen Sensor: Harness Locations View 151-2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 2261 View 151-2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 2262 View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 2263 View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2266 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2267 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2268 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2269 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) (Figure 38) detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts. Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to temperatures of 800°C (1400°F). At approximately 300 °C (600°F) the engine can enter closed loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater and the PCM will turn on the heater by providing the ground when the proper conditions occur. Since model year 1998 a high power HO2S heater and heater control system have been installed on the Stream 1 HO2S sensors of most vehicles. The high power heater reaches closed loop fuel control temperatures faster, which allows closed loop engine operation sooner. The use of this heater requires that the HO2S heater control be duty cycled, to prevent damage to the heater. The 6 ohm design is not interchangeable with new style 3.3 ohm heater. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S), LH Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the HO2S with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal. Using the special tool, remove the HO2S. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the HO2S to aid in installation. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 2272 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) RH HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S), RH Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the HO2S with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal. Using the special tool, remove the HO2S. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the HO2S to aid in installation. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 2273 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor LH CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR, LH Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. 3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the catalyst monitor sensor with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor to aid in installation. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 2274 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor RH CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR, RH Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the catalyst monitor sensor with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor to aid in installation. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2278 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The power steering pressure (PSP) switch (Figure 45) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Page 2281 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Sensor POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The power steering pressure (PSP) sensor (Figure 46) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2282 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the power steering pressure (PSP) switch. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 2286 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 90) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System > Page 2289 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 91) is identical in operation as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the underside of the sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2290 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar. Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR tube. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation Throttle Full Open Switch: Description and Operation WIDE OPEN THROTTLE A/C CUT-OFF (WAC) The wide open throttle A/C cutoff relay (may be referred to as the A/C clutch relay) is wired normally open (normally closed for Aviator). There is no direct electrical connection between the A/C switch or EATC Module and the A/C clutch. The PCM will receive a signal indicating that A/C is requested (for some applications, this message is sent through the BUS + and BUS - circuits). When A/C is requested, the PCM will check other A/C related inputs that are available (such as ACP (SW), ACCS). If these inputs indicate A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK (such as coolant temperature, engine rpm, throttle position), the PCM will ground the WAC output (unground for Aviator), closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/C clutch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2297 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2298 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is monitored by the OBD system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2299 Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. NOTE: Air cleaner outlet tube is removed for clarity. Remove the throttle position (TP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the screws. 3 Remove the sensor INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2303 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2304 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Special Tools And Equipment Special Tool(s) Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the battery and tray. 3. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor. 1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2305 2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Connect the electrical connector. 3. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray, check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or incorrect routing position. NOTE: When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the vehicle must relearn its adaptive shift strategy. During this relearning process shifts might be slightly firm, early or delayed. This operation is normal and will not affect the function or durability of the transaxle. Normal operation will return once these transaxle parameters are stored by the vehicle PCM. Install the battery and tray. 4. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should illuminate in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed Sensor Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed Sensor OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR The Output Shaft Speed Sensor (OSS), provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft.The (PCM) uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information generated. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 2311 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) (Figure 52) is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low velocity, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control, transmission/transaxle shift scheduling and torque converter clutch scheduling. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor In-Line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor The fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor (Figure 103) or inline fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor (Figure 104) is used to measure the fuel tank pressure during the EVAP Leak Check Monitor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 2319 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 90) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System > Page 2322 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 91) is identical in operation as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the underside of the sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2323 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar. Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR tube. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSORS (APPS) The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand. 1. There are three pedal position sensors required for system monitoring. APP1 has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and APP2 & APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. 2. There are two VREF wires, two signal return wires and three signal wires (total of seven wires and pins) between the PCM and APPS assembly. - 2-5 V Reference Voltage - 2- Signal Return (ground) - APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0) - APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5) - APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5) 3. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. Electronic Throttle Body And Accelerator Pedal Assembly 4. The three pedal position signals ensure a correct input to the PCM, if any one signal has a fault. The PCM knows if a signal is wrong by calculating where it should be, inferred by the other signals. A value will be substituted for a faulty signal if two out of the three signals are bad. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2331 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2332 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire Terminals Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2333 Typical "Drop-in" Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The mass air flow (MAF) sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire (Figure 42). If the hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the air mass flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology (IBT) with an integrated intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2334 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-27 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2338 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR Fuel Rai Pressure (FRP) Sensor The fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor (Figure 36) is a diaphragm strain gauge device in which resistance changes with pressure. The electrical resistance of a strain gauge increases as pressure increases, and decreases as pressure decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to pressure. Strain gauge type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The FRP sensor measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulse width and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder. Fuel Rai Pressure (FRP) Sensor The fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor (Figure 37) senses the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The return fuel line to the fuel tank has been deleted in this type of fuel system. The differential fuel/intake manifold pressure together with measured fuel temperature provides an indication of the fuel vapors in the fuel rail. Both differential pressure and temperature feedback signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserve fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System > Page 2341 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System INJECTION PRESSURE SENSOR Injection pressure sensor which measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulsewidth and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR Engine fuel temperature sensor which measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulsewidth and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-25 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2348 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2349 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service Precautions WARNING: If you smell natural gas at any time other than during fueling, do not reset the IFS switch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch The inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch (Figure 76) is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose of the IFS switch is to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the switch and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner Guide for the location of the IFS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System > Page 2352 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch Operation Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch The inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch (Figure 87) is used in conjunction with electric fuel close valves. The purpose of the IFS switch is to close the fuel shut-off valves if a crash occurs. It consists of a steel ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the switch and closes the electric fuel shut-off valve. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle. On some vehicles a fuel reset light illuminates. Refer to the Owner Guide for the location of the IFS. Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch Reset RESET INSTRUCTIONS 1. Turn key off. 2. Check for natural gas leaks in the engine compartment. 3. NOTE: In the closed position, the button can be depressed an additional 1.57 cm (1/16 inch) against a spring. If no natural gas leak is apparent, reset the IFS by pushing the reset button on the top of the switch (refer to Owner Guide). 4. Turn key to on or start position for a few seconds, then off again. 5. WARNING: If you smell natural gas at any time other than during fueling, do not reset the IFS switch. Again, check for leaking natural gas. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2353 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the cowl side trim panel. 1 Remove the pin-type retainers. 2 Remove the nut. 3 Remove the cowl side trim panel. 2. Remove the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch. 1 Disconnect the connector. 2 Remove the screws and the IFS switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation Throttle Full Open Switch: Description and Operation WIDE OPEN THROTTLE A/C CUT-OFF (WAC) The wide open throttle A/C cutoff relay (may be referred to as the A/C clutch relay) is wired normally open (normally closed for Aviator). There is no direct electrical connection between the A/C switch or EATC Module and the A/C clutch. The PCM will receive a signal indicating that A/C is requested (for some applications, this message is sent through the BUS + and BUS - circuits). When A/C is requested, the PCM will check other A/C related inputs that are available (such as ACP (SW), ACCS). If these inputs indicate A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK (such as coolant temperature, engine rpm, throttle position), the PCM will ground the WAC output (unground for Aviator), closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/C clutch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2360 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2361 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is monitored by the OBD system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2362 Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. NOTE: Air cleaner outlet tube is removed for clarity. Remove the throttle position (TP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the screws. 3 Remove the sensor INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2367 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2368 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR Typical Hall-Effect Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance Sensor The camshaft position (CMP) sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston No.1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the powertrain control module (PCM) and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. The Coil On Plug (COP) ignition applications also use the CMP signal to select the proper ignition coil to fire. The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or circuit. DTC P0340 is associated with this sensor. Vehicles with two CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. DTC P0345 is associated with this sensor and it is referred to as CMP2. There are two types of CMP sensors: the three pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (Figure 28) found on F-Series 4.2L applications, and the two pin connector variable reluctance sensor found on all other vehicles (Figure 29). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2369 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2373 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2374 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (INTEGRATED IGNITION SYSTEMS) Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block or timing cover and is adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the powertrain control module (PCM). The trigger wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the trigger wheel, the CKP indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to fixed reference (Figure 31). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2375 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the bolts and the right front lower splash shield. 3. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 3. Using a small tool, press the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock cylinder out. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2383 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) The knock sensor (KS) (Figure 41) is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left View 151-24 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left > Page 2389 View 151-26 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Right Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Right > Page 2392 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information Impact Sensor: Customer Safety Information WARNING: The restraints control module (RCM) orientation is critical for correct system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) has been involved in a collision in which the center tunnel area has been damaged, inspect the mounting and bracket for deformation. If damaged, the RCM must be replaced whether or not the air bags have deployed. In addition, make sure the area of the RCM mounting is restored to its original condition. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 2395 Impact Sensor: Technician Safety Information WARNING: - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. - The tightening torque of the air bag side crash sensor retaining bolts is critical for proper system operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 2396 Impact Sensor: Description and Operation SENSORS WARNING: The restraints control module (RCM) orientation is critical for correct system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) has been involved in a collision in which the center tunnel area has been damaged, inspect the mounting and bracket for deformation. If damaged, the RCM must be replaced whether or not the air bags have deployed. In addition, make sure the area of the RCM mounting is restored to its original condition. For this vehicle, the SRS employs three crash sensors. One of the sensors is integral to the RCM and is not serviceable separately. In addition, there are two side crash sensors located in the LH and RH B-pillars. The RCM is mounted on the center tunnel under the instrument panel. Mounting orientation is critical for correct operation of all crash sensors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation SIDE IMPACT SENSOR - DRIVER SIDE Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. NOTE: - If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. - Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. - Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. - After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2399 procedure again. 1. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar, To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 2. Remove the steering wheel access cover. 3. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2400 5. Open the glove box past its stops. 6. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the instrument panel (I/P), disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2401 9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket under the seat. 2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. 12. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2402 13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver side air bag module floor electrical connector. 14. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat bracket. 2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system diagnostic tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 19. Remove the B-pillar trim panel. 20. Remove the side crash sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2403 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolts. 3 Remove the side crash sensor. INSTALLATION WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. NOTE: - If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. - Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. - Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. - After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. 1. WARNING: The tightening torque of the air bag side crash sensor retaining bolts is critical for proper system operation. Install the side crash sensor. 1 Position the side crash sensor to the B-pillar. 2 Install the bolts. 3 Connect the side crash sensor electrical connector. 2. Connect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2404 3. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still in place at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 4. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 5. Install the B-pillar trim panel. 6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. 7. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 8. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2405 9. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag module electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 10. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. 11. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 12. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2406 13. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air bag module electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 14. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 15. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 16. Close the glove box. 17. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2407 Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. 18. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 19. Install the steering wheel access cover. 20. Connect the battery ground cable. 21. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 22. Check the restraint system for correct operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2408 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair General Procedures "J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor WELD NUT REPAIR - "J" NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND SIDE IMPACT SENSOR WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). NOTE: - There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld nut(s). Read both this procedures and Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, restraints control module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair. - If two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according to this procedure. Weld nuts must be installed according to Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor. - The following procedure applies to vehicles that have a rectangular hole in the sheet metal that is in close proximity to the missing weld nut. 1. Obtain a "J" nut (part number N623332-S301) or any of the following optional "J" nuts (part numbers: N623342-S101, N800854-S100, N800925-S100). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190) or equivalent. 3. Install the "J" nut through the rectangular hole in the sheet metal. 4. NOTE: Be sure the threaded portion of the "J" nut is aligned with the clearance hole in the sheet metal. Install the crash sensor. 5. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Missing Weld Nut, Restr Ctrl Module (RCM)/Side Impact Sensor WELD NUT REPAIR - MISSING WELD NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND SIDE IMPACT SENSOR WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). NOTE: - There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld nut(s). Read both this procedure and Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, restraints control module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair. - Use only this procedure if two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according to Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Crash Sensor. - Radiator support repair shown, others are similar. 1. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) weld nut (part number N806285-S190). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2409 3. Route a sufficient length of copper welding wire through the weld nut clearance hole and back out an adjacent access hole. 4. Feed the copper welding wire through the weld nut, then through a standard flat washer. 5. Secure the flat washer so that it cannot be pulled off the end of the copper welding wire. 6. Pull the copper welding wire back through the clearance hole, allowing the weld nut and flat washer to follow the copper welding wire through. 7. Position the weld nut to the weld nut clearance hole, firmly pulling on the copper welding wire allowing the secured flat washer to hold the weld nut in position. 8. Holding the weld nut securely in place and using a MIG welder, weld in four places around the edge of the weld nut. 9. Metal finish as required. 10. Verify the nut is securely in place. 11. Install the crash sensor. 12. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Stripped Weld Nut, Restr Ctrl Module (RCM)/Side Impact Sensor WELD NUT REPAIR - STRIPPED WELD NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND SIDE IMPACT SENSOR WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). 1. Obtain an 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw (part number N802455-S190). 2. Drill out the internal threads of the stripped-out weld nut to 7.37 mm (0.29 in) using a letter "L" size drill bit. 3. Position the crash sensor to the vehicle. 4. Install the 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw into the drilled-out weld nut. 5. Install the remaining attaching screws. 6. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2410 Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Safing Sensor, Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation Safing Sensor: Description and Operation NOTE: The safety sensor is internal to the RCM and is not serviced separately. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt Buckle Switch: > 05-17-11 > Sep > 05 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Customer Interest SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set TSB 05-17-11 09/05/05 RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881 FORD: 2001-2004 Escape This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure. ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully functional. ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt buckle pretensioner. One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for complete repair procedure. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs. A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With 14056D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7861202 OR 7861203 X2 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle Switch: > 05-17-11 > Sep > 05 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set Seat Belt Buckle Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set TSB 05-17-11 09/05/05 RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881 FORD: 2001-2004 Escape This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure. ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully functional. ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt buckle pretensioner. One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for complete repair procedure. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs. A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With 14056D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7861202 OR 7861203 X2 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2427 View 151-24 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2428 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-23 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2433 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 3. Using a small tool, press the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock cylinder out. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2441 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2447 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The power steering pressure (PSP) switch (Figure 45) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Page 2450 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Sensor POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The power steering pressure (PSP) sensor (Figure 46) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2451 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the power steering pressure (PSP) switch. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH Typical Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position (BPP) switch (Figure 27) is used by the PCM to disengage the transmission torque converter clutch and on some applications as an input to the idle speed control for idle quality and for vehicle speed control deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in the following manner: - BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake is applied. - BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM or HEM), BPP signal is than broadcasted over the data link to be received by the PCM. - BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake (ABS)- traction control / stability assist module. The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generate an output called the Driver Brake Application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Note on applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stoplamp circuit, if all stoplamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stoplamp bulbs has failed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The transmission control switch (TCS) (Figure 50) and (Figure 51) signals the PCM with keypower whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) lights when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. The operator of the vehicle controls the position of the TCS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2463 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2464 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Special Tools And Equipment Special Tool(s) Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the battery and tray. 3. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor. 1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2465 2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Connect the electrical connector. 3. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray, check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or incorrect routing position. NOTE: When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the vehicle must relearn its adaptive shift strategy. During this relearning process shifts might be slightly firm, early or delayed. This operation is normal and will not affect the function or durability of the transaxle. Normal operation will return once these transaxle parameters are stored by the vehicle PCM. Install the battery and tray. 4. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should illuminate in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 2470 View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 2473 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2474 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Material Materials Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor. 5. Remove the TSS sensor. ^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2475 6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation. Install the TSS sensor. ^ Connect the TSS electrical connector (white connector). 2. Remove the drain pan. 3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using clean automatic transmission fluid. 7. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2476 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor. ^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the OSS bore. 5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation. Install the OSS sensor. ^ Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2477 2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the VSS. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-19 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2486 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2487 Heated Glass Element Switch: Service and Repair REAR WINDOW DEFROST SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the audio unit. 2. Push outward on the rear window defrost switch to remove it from the instrument panel center finish panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch, Passenger Side View 151-33 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch, Passenger Side > Page 2492 View 151-34 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch, Passenger Side > Page 2493 View 151-35 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 2496 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Adjust Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 2497 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 2500 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 2501 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 2502 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Adjust Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 2503 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 2504 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Adjust Switch, Passenger Side Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 2505 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2506 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH REMOVAL NOTE: The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar. 1. Remove the front door trim panel or the rear door trim panel. 2. Release the locking clips and remove the window control switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER SWITCH REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: The windshield wiper/washer switch is part of the multifunction switch assembly. Remove the steering column shroud. 2. Remove the screws. 3. Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-20 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2514 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2515 Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2516 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2517 Wiper Switch: Service and Repair WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER SWITCH REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: The windshield wiper/washer switch is part of the multifunction switch assembly. Remove the steering column shroud. 2. Remove the screws. 3. Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics Alignment: By Symptom Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics TSB 04-21-4 11/01/04 STEERING DRIFT/PULL - IMPROVED DIAGNOSTIC AND REPAIR PROCEDURE - SERVICE TIP FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005 Mariner ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull to either the right or left. This condition may occur even if the alignment settings are within specifications. ACTION The following procedure is designed to supplement the Workshop Manual. It contains a more detailed description of the camber/caster adjustment, updated diagnostics to help determine cause and an updated camber adjustment procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2527 1. Refer to the Drift/Pull diagnostic flow chart (Figure 1). 2. Use procedures in TSB when adjusting alignment if directed by the diagnostic flow chart. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2528 3. Complete worksheet as needed (Figure 5). GENERAL FRONT SUSPENSION UPPER STRUT MOUNT ADJUSTMENT INFORMATION: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2529 Adjustment of camber and caster can be made by rotating the upper strut mount into one (1) of four (4) positions. The orientation of the strut rod relative to the center of the hole for the mount determines the alignment change. The strut rod is offset 180 degrees from the paint mark on the strut bushing. Moving the strut rod inboard or outboard changes camber and moving the strut rod forward or rearward changes caster. Regardless of the start setting, a 90 degree rotation will only change one of the settings (caster or camber), and a 180 degree rotation will change both settings (caster and camber). ADDITIONAL FRONT CAMBER ADJUSTMENT: The clearance between the bolts and the holes in the knuckle to strut joint allows front camber adjustment beyond what the strut mount orientation provides. This additional adjustment can be used on either of the front wheels to increase or decrease a camber split. Rotating the upper strut mount is the primary and preferred method to adjust front camber. If rotating the upper strut mount does not provide enough camber adjustment, perform the following steps to achieve an approximate camber change of up to +/- 0.24 degrees per side: 1. Lift the vehicle up off its tires. 2. Replace the old strut to knuckle fasteners (bolts and nuts) with new fasteners, but do not torque the new fasteners. 3. Move the top of the tire inboard or outboard to adjust camber (Figure 4). a. If more negative camber is desired, push the top of the tire inboard. b. If less negative camber is desired, pull the top of the tire outboard. 4. With the tire at the desired position, torque the new fasteners to 85 lb-ft (115 N.m). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2530 5. Lower the vehicle back down. 6. Place vehicle on alignment rack and measure the alignment to confirm the desired camber change was achieved. NOTE DO NOT ADJUST THE ALIGNMENT SETTINGS (INDIVIDUAL CAMBER) BEYOND THE RELEASED SPECIFICATIONS. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE FRONT W6 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics TSB 04-21-4 11/01/04 STEERING DRIFT/PULL - IMPROVED DIAGNOSTIC AND REPAIR PROCEDURE - SERVICE TIP FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005 Mariner ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull to either the right or left. This condition may occur even if the alignment settings are within specifications. ACTION The following procedure is designed to supplement the Workshop Manual. It contains a more detailed description of the camber/caster adjustment, updated diagnostics to help determine cause and an updated camber adjustment procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2536 1. Refer to the Drift/Pull diagnostic flow chart (Figure 1). 2. Use procedures in TSB when adjusting alignment if directed by the diagnostic flow chart. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2537 3. Complete worksheet as needed (Figure 5). GENERAL FRONT SUSPENSION UPPER STRUT MOUNT ADJUSTMENT INFORMATION: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2538 Adjustment of camber and caster can be made by rotating the upper strut mount into one (1) of four (4) positions. The orientation of the strut rod relative to the center of the hole for the mount determines the alignment change. The strut rod is offset 180 degrees from the paint mark on the strut bushing. Moving the strut rod inboard or outboard changes camber and moving the strut rod forward or rearward changes caster. Regardless of the start setting, a 90 degree rotation will only change one of the settings (caster or camber), and a 180 degree rotation will change both settings (caster and camber). ADDITIONAL FRONT CAMBER ADJUSTMENT: The clearance between the bolts and the holes in the knuckle to strut joint allows front camber adjustment beyond what the strut mount orientation provides. This additional adjustment can be used on either of the front wheels to increase or decrease a camber split. Rotating the upper strut mount is the primary and preferred method to adjust front camber. If rotating the upper strut mount does not provide enough camber adjustment, perform the following steps to achieve an approximate camber change of up to +/- 0.24 degrees per side: 1. Lift the vehicle up off its tires. 2. Replace the old strut to knuckle fasteners (bolts and nuts) with new fasteners, but do not torque the new fasteners. 3. Move the top of the tire inboard or outboard to adjust camber (Figure 4). a. If more negative camber is desired, push the top of the tire inboard. b. If less negative camber is desired, pull the top of the tire outboard. 4. With the tire at the desired position, torque the new fasteners to 85 lb-ft (115 N.m). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2539 5. Lower the vehicle back down. 6. Place vehicle on alignment rack and measure the alignment to confirm the desired camber change was achieved. NOTE DO NOT ADJUST THE ALIGNMENT SETTINGS (INDIVIDUAL CAMBER) BEYOND THE RELEASED SPECIFICATIONS. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE FRONT W6 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2540 Alignment Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2541 Alignment: Description and Operation Wheel Alignment Angles Camber Camber is the inward or outward tilting of the wheels at the top. When the wheel tilts out at the top, then the camber is positive (+). When the wheel tilts in at the top, then the camber is negative (-). Caster Part 1 Of 2 Part 2 Of 2 Caster is the tilting of the steering axis either forward or backward from vertical. A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a separate procedure on this vehicle. Front caster should fall within specification when the front camber is adjusted. Toe Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2542 Toe is a measurement of how much the front of the wheels are turned in or out from the straight-ahead position. When the wheels are turned in toward the front of the vehicle, toe is positive (+) (toe in). When the wheels are turned out toward the front of the vehicle, toe is negative (-) (toe out). Toe is measured in degrees, from side to side, and totaled. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster Adjustment Camber and Caster Adjustment 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the front shock absorber upper mounting bracket nuts. 3. Push the front shock absorber upper mounting bracket downward and turn it to the desired position to set camber and caster. Both camber and caster for front suspension are adjustable within a maximum of 30 minutes angle. 4. Tighten the front shock absorber upper mounting bracket nuts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 2545 Alignment: Service and Repair Front Toe Adjustment Front Toe Adjustment 1. Start the engine and center the steering wheel. 2. Turn the engine off, and lock the steering wheel in position. 3. Check the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 4. NOTE: Do not allow the steering gear bellows to twist when the front wheel spindle tie rod is rotated. Remove the clamps. 5. Loosen the nuts. ^ Clean and lubricate the nut(s) and front wheel spindle tie rod threads. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 2546 6. Rotate the front wheel spindle tie rods. 7. Tighten the nuts. 8. Install the clamp(s). 9. Recheck the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 2547 Alignment: Service and Repair Rear Toe Adjustment Rear Toe Adjustment 1. NOTE: Jounce the vehicle to make sure that the suspension is in its normal resting position. Check the toe setting using suitable wheel alignment equipment. 2. Loosen the LH and RH rear suspension trailing arm and bushing bolt. 3. Turn the LH and RH adjusting cams simultaneously until the toe is within specification. 4. Tighten the LH and RH rear suspension trailing arm and bushing bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 2548 Alignment: Service and Repair Lean Correction Lean Correction NOTE: When installing a new coil spring, install a new one with the same part number and the same spring code. Refer to the Vehicle Certification (VC) Label on the driver side door. 1. Measure the distance from the wheelhouse opening to the center of the wheel and tire at the same point on both sides of the vehicle. 2. If the difference exceeds 10 mm (0.4 inch), a lean correction is necessary. Compare the original with a new coil spring. Note the difference. 3. Remove the higher side coil spring. 1. If the original coil spring exceeds the height of the new one by 10 mm (0.4 inch), install the new coil spring in the vehicle. 2. If the original coil spring is shorter than the new one by 10 mm (0.4 in), remove the low side coil spring from the vehicle. 4. Compare all three coil springs and select the two most evenly matched for installation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pressure Test Port: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System PRESSURE TEST POINT There is a pressure test point with a schrader fitting in the fuel rail that relieves fuel pressure and measures the fuel injector supply pressure for service and diagnostic procedures. Before servicing or testing the fuel system, read any CAUTION, WARNING, and HANDLING information. ON VEHICLES NOT EQUIPPED WITH A SCHRADER VALVE, USE ROTUNDA FUEL PRESSURE TEST KIT #134-R0087 OR EQUIVALENT. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System > Page 2556 Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System SCHRADER/SERVICE VALVE schrader/service valve (if equipped) provides a service port to the low pressure fuel system. This valve is needed to relieve the pressure in the system before and during service. This valve could also be used to monitor the pressure near the injectors during diagnostic procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2557 Fuel Pressure Test Port: Service and Repair FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE REMOVAL WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel system pressure must be relieved. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Remove the pressure relief valve. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................ .......................................................... 725 - 775 RPM Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE REMOVAL 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Remove the battery tray. 3. Remove the bolt and the intake pipe. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Make sure the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel correctly. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Fuel Pressure Gauge SPECIAL TOOL(S) 1. WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Fuel supply tubes will remain pressurized for long periods of time after engine shutdown. This pressure must be relieved before repairing of the fuel system has begun. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system. Remove the Schrader valve cap at the end of the fuel injection supply manifold and attach the Fuel Pressure Gauge. 2. NOTE: Position a suitable container for the fuel to drain into. Open the manual valve slowly to relieve the system pressure. This may drain fuel from the system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order ......................................................................................................................................... ................................................................ 1-4-2-5-3-6 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2572 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap Spark Plug: Specifications Gap Spark Plug Gap ................................................................................................................................... .................................... 0.52 - 0.56 in. (1.3 - 1.4 mm) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap > Page 2581 Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Specifications Spark Plug Torque ............................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 11 ft. lb. (15 Nm) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2582 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark Plug Type .................................................................................................................................. ................................................................ AWSF-32F Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2583 Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG REMOVAL 1. Remove the ignition coil-on-plugs. 2. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Remove the LH and RH spark plugs. 3. Inspect the spark plugs. INSTALLATION 1. To install, the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Locations Drive Belt: Locations With A/C Water Pump Drive Belt with Tensioner Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Locations > Page 2587 Water Pump Drive Belt without Tensioner Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Locations > Page 2588 Drive Belt: Diagrams Accessory Drive Zetec without A/C 2.0L Zetec without A/C Zetec with A/C (Part 1 Of 2) Zetec with A/C (Part 2 Of 2) 2.0L Zetec with A/C Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Locations > Page 2589 With A/C 3.0L (4V) with A/C Water Pump Drive Belt with Tensioner Water Pump Drive Belt - 3.0L (4V) with Tensioner Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Locations > Page 2590 Water Pump Drive Belt without Tensioner Water Pump Drive Belt - 3.0L (4V) without Tensioner Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Drive Belt: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Inspection and Verification 1. Verify the customer's concern by operating the engine to duplicate the condition. 2. Inspect to determine if any of the following mechanical concerns apply: Visual Inspection Chart 3. NOTE: Minor cracks in the V-grooved portion of the drive belt are considered normal and acceptable. If the drive belt has chunks missing from the ribs, a new drive belt should be installed. Install a new drive belt if any of the following conditions exist: rib chunk-out, severe glazing, frayed cords or other concerns. Inspect for drive belt cracking/chunking/wear. V-Ribbed Serpentine Drive Belt With Cracks Across Ribs V-Ribbed Serpentine Drive Belt With Chunks of Rib Missing 4. If the concerns remain after inspection, determine the symptoms. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2593 Drive Belt: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Part 1 Of 2 Part 2 Of 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2594 Drive Belt: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Belt Tensioner-Dynamic Belt Tensioner - Dynamic The belt tensioner can be checked dynamically as follows: 1. With the engine running, observe the belt tensioner movement. The belt tensioner should move (respond) when the A/C clutch cycles (if equipped), or when the engine is accelerated rapidly. If the belt tensioner movement is constant without A/C clutch cycling or acceleration, a pulley or shaft is probably bent or a pulley is out of round. In rare cases, excessive drive belt rideout (uneven depth of grooves in drive belt) can cause excessive drive belt tensioner movement. This condition can be checked by installing a new drive belt, and repeating the observation. 2. With the engine off, check routing of the drive belt. 3. Inspect the belt tensioner wear indicator to confirm the drive belt is within operating range. Install a new drive belt if necessary. Belt Tensioner-Mechanical Belt Tensioner - Mechanical The only mechanical check that needs to be made is a check for tensioner stick grab or bind. 1. Remove the belt in the area of the tensioner. 2. Rotate the tensioner from its relaxed position through its full stroke and back to the relaxed position to make sure there is no stick, grab or bind and to make sure that there is tension on the belt tensioner spring. 3. If the tensioner meets the above criteria, proceed to test the tensioner dynamically. If the tensioner does not meet the above criteria, install a new tensioner. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt Drive Belt: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt Accessory Drive Belt - 3.0L (4V) Removal and Installation 1. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the accessory drive belt. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt > Page 2597 Drive Belt: Service and Repair Water Pump Belt with Tensioner Water Pump Belt with Tensioner Removal and Installation 1. Remove the water pump belt cover. 2. Rotate the drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the water pump belt. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt > Page 2598 Drive Belt: Service and Repair Water Pump Belt Without Tensioner Water Pump Belt without Tensioner Removal 1. Remove the water pump belt cover. 2. Cut and remove the water pump belt. Discard the belt. Installation 1. Install the belt on the water pump pulley and position it on the camshaft pulley. 2. CAUTION: Do not use any screwdrivers, pliers, or other metal objects that could cause damage to the belt or camshaft pulley while installing the belt. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise to seat the belt on the camshaft pulley. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt > Page 2599 3. Install the water pump belt cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE REMOVAL 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Remove the battery tray. 3. Remove the bolt and the intake pipe. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Make sure the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel correctly. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair NOTE: The air distribution system of this vehicle cannot be equipped with a cabin air filter. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair Evaporative Canister Filter: Service and Repair DUST SEPARATOR REMOVAL WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited, resulting in possible personal injury. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. WARNING: The evaporative emission system contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor. Although not present in large quantities, it still presents the danger of explosion or fire. Disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery to minimize the possibility of an electrical spark occurring, possibly causing a fire or explosion if fuel vapor or fuel liquid is present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Disconnect the battery. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the EVAP canister outlet tube. 4. Disconnect the canister vent solenoid electrical connector and the remote canister vent hose. 5. Remove the EVAP canister bracket assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2611 6. Remove the remote canister vent hose. 7. Remove the dust separator. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL (R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Carry out a leak test. See: Powertrain Management/Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test - Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Powertrain Management/Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Locations Fluid Filter - A/T: Locations Part 1 Of 7 Transmission Fluid Filter Location Filter is located at exploded view position number 8 internal. See Transmission Disassembly/Assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2615 Special Tool Seal Removal Transmission Filter Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Fuel Pressure Gauge SPECIAL TOOL(S) 1. WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Fuel supply tubes will remain pressurized for long periods of time after engine shutdown. This pressure must be relieved before repairing of the fuel system has begun. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system. Remove the Schrader valve cap at the end of the fuel injection supply manifold and attach the Fuel Pressure Gauge. 2. NOTE: Position a suitable container for the fuel to drain into. Open the manual valve slowly to relieve the system pressure. This may drain fuel from the system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair Bypass Tube Removal and Installation 1. Drain the engine Cooling System. 3. Disconnect the five hoses from the thermostat housing and remove the thermostat housing. 4. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor from the bypass tube. 5. Remove the bolt, stud, and the bypass tube. 6. NOTE: Clean and inspect the sealing surfaces. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage Heater Hose: Customer Interest A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage TSB 06-21-19 10/30/06 HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY) FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250 Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure. ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have occurred. ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant: a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely due to due to high flow rate - replace the Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2632 heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference Workshop Manual, Section 412. b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis. Testing For Electrolysis Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system. Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible. 1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable. a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle. b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant. NOTE POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING. c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect battery cables and proceed to Step 2. d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly. e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. f. Reconnect battery cables. g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant. 2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions. a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine. b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK. d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections. e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper wire to ground. f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test. g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped. 3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds. a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. b. Crank engine but do not start. c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter. e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm. f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell phone, etc. g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2633 h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair ground to the accessory just identified. j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts. l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4. m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower motor and any fan motors. n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it up then retest. o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck. NOTE If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor voltage when they are on and when off. CAUTION DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE GROUND PATH. 4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03. NOTE IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18476 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage Heater Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage TSB 06-21-19 10/30/06 HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY) FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250 Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure. ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have occurred. ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant: a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely due to due to high flow rate - replace the Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2639 heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference Workshop Manual, Section 412. b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis. Testing For Electrolysis Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system. Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible. 1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable. a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle. b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant. NOTE POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING. c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect battery cables and proceed to Step 2. d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly. e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. f. Reconnect battery cables. g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant. 2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions. a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine. b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK. d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections. e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper wire to ground. f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test. g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped. 3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds. a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. b. Crank engine but do not start. c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter. e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm. f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell phone, etc. g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2640 h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair ground to the accessory just identified. j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts. l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4. m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower motor and any fan motors. n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it up then retest. o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck. NOTE If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor voltage when they are on and when off. CAUTION DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE GROUND PATH. 4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03. NOTE IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18476 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2641 Heater Hose: Service and Repair HEATER HOSE REMOVAL 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core. 3. Disconnect the heater outlet hose from the water hose connection. 4. Disconnect the heater hose connection from the engine. 5. Remove the heater hose from the engine compartment. 6. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater hose junction. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2642 INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation Hose/Line HVAC: Description and Operation REFRIGERANT LINES NOTE: Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the suction accumulator. The condenser to evaporator line contains high-pressure liquid refrigerant upstream of the A/C evaporator core orifice. The A/C manifold and tube assembly is attached to the A/C compressor with O-ring seals. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2646 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair CONDENSER TO EVAPORATOR LINE REMOVAL 1. Remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch. 2. Remove the evaporator core orifice. 3. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture. Disconnect the condenser to evaporator line from the A/C evaporator core. 4. Remove the evaporator line support nut and remove the line from the A/C evaporator core. 5. Remove the front bumper cover. 6. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture. Remove the nut and disconnect the condenser to evaporator line from the A/C condenser core and remove the condenser to evaporator line. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Specifications Power Steering Line/Hose: Specifications Power steering pressure hose to steering gear fitting ..................................................................................................................... 28-33 Nm (21-25 ft. lbs.) Power steering pressure line-to-pump fitting ............................................................................................................................................ 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.) Power steering pressure line bracket-to-engine insulator bracket bolt .................................................................................................. 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.) Power steering pressure and return line retainer plate-to-gear bolt ........................................................................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Power steering pressure line bracket-to-gear bolt ................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.) Power steering return line bracket-to-gear bolt ..................................................................................................................................... 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line-3.0L (4V) Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. NOTE: Drain the excess power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan. NOTE: Do not drop the O-ring seals. Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines. 1 Remove the bolt. 2 Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines. 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. Remove the power steering pressure line bracket bolt to the steering gear. 5. Remove the power steering pressure hose. 1 Remove the power steering pressure line bracket bolt. 2 Disconnect the electrical connector. 3 Loosen the fitting and remove the power steering pressure line. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line > Page 2652 1. Using the special tool, install a new seal on the power steering pressure line fitting. ^ Remove and discard the original seal. ^ Stretch the seal over the special tool and slide it onto the tube nut. 2. Install the power steering pressure hose. 1 Tighten the power steering pressure hose fitting to the pump. 2 Connect the electrical connector. 3 Install the power steering pressure line bracket bolt. 3. Install the power steering pressure line bracket bolt to the steering gear. 4. Raise the vehicle. 5. NOTE: Make sure the O-ring seals are on the power steering pressure and return lines. Connect the power steering pressure and return lines to the steering gear. Install the bolt. 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line > Page 2653 Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Steering Gear to Fluid Cooler Return Hose Steering Gear to Fluid Cooler Return Hose Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Drain the excess power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan. NOTE: Make sure not to drop the O-ring seals. Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines. 1 Remove the bolt. 2 Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines. 2. Remove the power steering return line bracket-to-gear bolt. 3. Release the clamp and remove the power steering return line. 4. NOTE: Make sure the O-ring seals are on the power steering pressure and return lines. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications Brake Fluid Type ......................................................................................................................... High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Clutch Fluid: Specifications Clutch Fluid Type .................................................................................................... Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Engine Coolant Capacity ..................................................................................................................... .......................................................... 10L (10.5 qts.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2665 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant VC-7-A (in Oregon VC-7-B) or equivalent (yellow-color) Ford Specification................................................................................................................................. ......................................................WSS-M97B51-A1 Note: The addition of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets, VC-6, darkens Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant from yellow to golden tan. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Differential Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity .......................................................................................................................................................... 9.5L (10 qts.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2670 Differential Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Ford Part Name - MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid Ford Part Number - XT-5-QM Ford Specification - MERCON(R) V Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Differential Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications Manual Transaxle Fluid Capacity ........................................................................................................ ......................................................... 2.7L (2.85 qts.) NOTE: Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2675 Differential Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications Manual Transaxle Fluid Type .......................................................................................................................................................... SAE 75W-90 Gear Oil Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering Fluid - A/T: Customer Interest Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering TSB 06-11-7 06/12/06 2001-2005 ESCAPE 3.0L UNSTABLE IDLE - 2001-2003 ESCAPE 3.0L AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SHUDDER - MEXICO ONLY FORD: 2001-2005 Escape ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine may exhibit idle speeds outside the specified range. Some 2001-2003 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and CD4E automatic transaxle may exhibit a transmission shudder. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If the concern is a 2001-2005 Escape with idle speeds outside the specified range: a. Install a new idle air control (IAC) valve with jumper harness included in the kit. The new Denso brand IAC will be installed with the electrical connector facing the opposite direction of the original (Hitachi) valve which is why the jumper harness is required. The original (Hitachi) IAC connector faces the front of the vehicle while the new Denso IAC connector faces toward the rear of the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 2684 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 2685 b. Referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. If the concern is a 2001 - 2003 Escape with transaxle shudder, drain, flush and refill the transmission fluid with MERCON(R) Multi-Purpose Automatic Transmission Fluid. Then, referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the PCM using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 3. When reprogramming the PCM use blank path programming. Select the proper file from the chart and manually enter the PCM part number or tear tag number to obtain the updated calibration file. To Perform Blank Path Programming: 1. Connect WDS/IDS to vehicle. 2. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK. 3. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK. 4. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK. 5. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press TICK. 6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Keep ignition in the "OFF" position, press TICK and you will be asked to cycle the key "ON" and "OFF" a few times. Please keep the key position in the "OFF" position through the key cycles. 7. Screen will show "The diagnostic tester is unable to communicate with this vehicle." You will be prompted to "select a vehicle from the vehicle list", press TICK. 8. A list of vehicles will be displayed, select ALL OTHERS, and press TICK. 9. Screen shows "To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of the following: Vehicle Calibration number (7 digits), Tear Tag number (4 digits), or PCM part number, press TICK. 10. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed above. Press TICK. 11. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) per Workshop Manual, Section 419-01. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 2686 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9F715 42 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-14-4 > Jul > 06 > A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage Fluid - A/T: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage TSB 06-14-4 07/24/06 MERCON ATF IS BEING REPLACED BY MERCON V ATF AS A SERVICE FLUID. FORD: 1980-1997 Crown Victoria 1981-1997 Mustang, Thunderbird 1981-2003 Escort 1986-1993 Festiva 1986-1997 Taurus 1989-1997 Probe 1994-1997 Aspire 1995-2000 Contour 1980-1996 Bronco 1981-2003 F-150 1981-2004 E-Series, F-Super Duty 1983-1996 Ranger 1986-1996 Aerostar 1991-1997 Explorer 1993-2004 F-53 Motorhome Chassis 1995-1998 Windstar 1997-2004 Expedition 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2007 Escape 1987-2000 F-B-Series 2000-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 1980-1997 Town Car 1981-1997 Continental 1993-1997 Mark VIII 1998-2004 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood MERCURY: 1980-1997 Grand Marquis 1981-1997 Cougar 1986-1997 Sable 1987-1999 Tracer 1995-2000 Mystique 1999-2002 Cougar 1993-2002 Villager 1997 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner MERKUR: 1985-1989 XR4TI This article supersedes TSB 01-15-7 to update the vehicle application chart. ISSUE MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid is being replaced by MERCON(R) V as a service fluid. ACTION Beginning immediately all automatic transmission / transaxle applications requiring MERCON(R) can now be serviced using MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. After July 1, 2007, MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid will no longer be manufactured, therefore, availability of this fluid will only continue for however long it takes to deplete what remains in inventory. SERVICE PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-14-4 > Jul > 06 > A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage > Page 2692 Service automatic transmissions requiring MERCON(R) with MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V For proper fluid application on current and past model vehicles equipped with automatic transmissions I transaxles refer to the fluid usage chart. (Figure 1) CAUTION AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS / TRANSAXLES THAT REQUIRE MERCON® V SHOULD STILL ONLY USE MERCON(R) V OR DUAL USAGE FLUID LABELED MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-14-4 > Jul > 06 > A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage > Page 2693 CAUTION MERCON(R) SP, MOTORCRAFT PREMIUM AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID AND MOTORCRAFT M5 ATFS ARE UNIQUE FLUIDS AND MUST BE USED IN APPLICATIONS RECOMMENDING THAT PARTICULAR FLUID. USE OF ANY OTHER FLUID MAY CAUSE REDUCED FUNCTIONALITY OR TRANSMISSION DAMAGE. CAUTION THE FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS OF FLUIDS FOR CVT TRANSMISSIONS ARE VERY DIFFERENT THAN THOSE OF OTHER AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUIDS (ATFS). USE OF A FLUID OTHER THAN MOTORCRAFT CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE CHAIN TYPE TRANSMISSION FLUID OR ONE LABELED AS MEETING MERCON(R) C WILL CAUSE FUNCTIONALITY CONCERNS AND INTERNAL TRANSMISSION DAMAGE. CAUTION DO NOT USE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID SUPPLEMENTS, ADDITIVES, TREATMENTS OR CLEANING AGENTS. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering Fluid - A/T: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering TSB 06-11-7 06/12/06 2001-2005 ESCAPE 3.0L UNSTABLE IDLE - 2001-2003 ESCAPE 3.0L AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SHUDDER - MEXICO ONLY FORD: 2001-2005 Escape ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine may exhibit idle speeds outside the specified range. Some 2001-2003 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and CD4E automatic transaxle may exhibit a transmission shudder. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If the concern is a 2001-2005 Escape with idle speeds outside the specified range: a. Install a new idle air control (IAC) valve with jumper harness included in the kit. The new Denso brand IAC will be installed with the electrical connector facing the opposite direction of the original (Hitachi) valve which is why the jumper harness is required. The original (Hitachi) IAC connector faces the front of the vehicle while the new Denso IAC connector faces toward the rear of the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 2698 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 2699 b. Referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. If the concern is a 2001 - 2003 Escape with transaxle shudder, drain, flush and refill the transmission fluid with MERCON(R) Multi-Purpose Automatic Transmission Fluid. Then, referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the PCM using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 3. When reprogramming the PCM use blank path programming. Select the proper file from the chart and manually enter the PCM part number or tear tag number to obtain the updated calibration file. To Perform Blank Path Programming: 1. Connect WDS/IDS to vehicle. 2. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK. 3. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK. 4. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK. 5. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press TICK. 6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Keep ignition in the "OFF" position, press TICK and you will be asked to cycle the key "ON" and "OFF" a few times. Please keep the key position in the "OFF" position through the key cycles. 7. Screen will show "The diagnostic tester is unable to communicate with this vehicle." You will be prompted to "select a vehicle from the vehicle list", press TICK. 8. A list of vehicles will be displayed, select ALL OTHERS, and press TICK. 9. Screen shows "To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of the following: Vehicle Calibration number (7 digits), Tear Tag number (4 digits), or PCM part number, press TICK. 10. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed above. Press TICK. 11. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) per Workshop Manual, Section 419-01. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 2700 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9F715 42 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-14-4 > Jul > 06 > A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage Fluid - A/T: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage TSB 06-14-4 07/24/06 MERCON ATF IS BEING REPLACED BY MERCON V ATF AS A SERVICE FLUID. FORD: 1980-1997 Crown Victoria 1981-1997 Mustang, Thunderbird 1981-2003 Escort 1986-1993 Festiva 1986-1997 Taurus 1989-1997 Probe 1994-1997 Aspire 1995-2000 Contour 1980-1996 Bronco 1981-2003 F-150 1981-2004 E-Series, F-Super Duty 1983-1996 Ranger 1986-1996 Aerostar 1991-1997 Explorer 1993-2004 F-53 Motorhome Chassis 1995-1998 Windstar 1997-2004 Expedition 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2007 Escape 1987-2000 F-B-Series 2000-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 1980-1997 Town Car 1981-1997 Continental 1993-1997 Mark VIII 1998-2004 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood MERCURY: 1980-1997 Grand Marquis 1981-1997 Cougar 1986-1997 Sable 1987-1999 Tracer 1995-2000 Mystique 1999-2002 Cougar 1993-2002 Villager 1997 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner MERKUR: 1985-1989 XR4TI This article supersedes TSB 01-15-7 to update the vehicle application chart. ISSUE MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid is being replaced by MERCON(R) V as a service fluid. ACTION Beginning immediately all automatic transmission / transaxle applications requiring MERCON(R) can now be serviced using MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. After July 1, 2007, MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid will no longer be manufactured, therefore, availability of this fluid will only continue for however long it takes to deplete what remains in inventory. SERVICE PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-14-4 > Jul > 06 > A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage > Page 2706 Service automatic transmissions requiring MERCON(R) with MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V For proper fluid application on current and past model vehicles equipped with automatic transmissions I transaxles refer to the fluid usage chart. (Figure 1) CAUTION AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS / TRANSAXLES THAT REQUIRE MERCON® V SHOULD STILL ONLY USE MERCON(R) V OR DUAL USAGE FLUID LABELED MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-14-4 > Jul > 06 > A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage > Page 2707 CAUTION MERCON(R) SP, MOTORCRAFT PREMIUM AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID AND MOTORCRAFT M5 ATFS ARE UNIQUE FLUIDS AND MUST BE USED IN APPLICATIONS RECOMMENDING THAT PARTICULAR FLUID. USE OF ANY OTHER FLUID MAY CAUSE REDUCED FUNCTIONALITY OR TRANSMISSION DAMAGE. CAUTION THE FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS OF FLUIDS FOR CVT TRANSMISSIONS ARE VERY DIFFERENT THAN THOSE OF OTHER AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUIDS (ATFS). USE OF A FLUID OTHER THAN MOTORCRAFT CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE CHAIN TYPE TRANSMISSION FLUID OR ONE LABELED AS MEETING MERCON(R) C WILL CAUSE FUNCTIONALITY CONCERNS AND INTERNAL TRANSMISSION DAMAGE. CAUTION DO NOT USE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID SUPPLEMENTS, ADDITIVES, TREATMENTS OR CLEANING AGENTS. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Transmission Fluid .............................................................................................................................. .......................................................... 9.5L (10.0 qts.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2710 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Ford Part Name - MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid Ford Part Number - XT-5-QM Ford Specification - MERCON(R) V Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill Material Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Place a suitable container under the transaxle drain plug. 3. NOTE: If an integral problem is suspected, drain the fluid through a paper filter. A small amount of metal or friction particles may be found from normal wear. However, if excessive metal and friction particles are present, internal service will be required. Remove the transaxle drain plug and drain transmission fluid. Installation 1. Install the transaxle drain plug. ^ After the fluid has been drained, clean the drain plug threads and apply a small amount of Pipe Sealant with Teflon D8AZ-19554-A or XW7Z-19554-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSK-M2G350-A2. 2. Lower the vehicle 3. Add 3.7 liters (3.9 quarts) of MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 4. Start the engine and run through all gears for a total of five minutes at idle. Turn off the engine. 5. Repeat the previous steps to help flush fluid from the torque converter. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill > Page 2713 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Check Fluid Level and Condition CAUTION: The vehicle should not be driven if the fluid level is below the bottom hole on the fluid level indicator and the outside temperature is above 10°C (50°F). NOTE: Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an accurate fluid level check, drive the vehicle until warmed, approximately 30 km (20 miles). If your vehicle has been operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic, during hot weather, or while pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about 30 minutes to allow the fluid to cool before checking. Under normal circumstances, there is no need to check the fluid level of the transaxle, since the vehicle does not use up transmission fluid. However, if the transaxle is not working correctly, for instance, the transaxle may slip or shift slowly, or there may be some sign of fluid leakage, the fluid level should be checked. Fluid Level Check 1. Drive the vehicle 30 km (20 miles) or until the vehicle reaches normal operating temperatures. 2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake. 3. With your foot on the brake, start the engine and move the range selector lever through all the gear ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage. 4. Place the range selector in P (park) and leave the engine running. 5. Remove the fluid level indicator and wipe it clean with a clean cloth. 6. Install the fluid level indicator, making sure that it is fully seated in the filler tube. 7. Remove the fluid level indicator. The fluid should be in the designated areas for normal and room temperature. Low Fluid Level Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid level is below the hole at the bottom of the fluid level indicator and the outside temperature is above 10°C (50°F). High Fluid Level Fluid levels above the safe range can result in transmission failure. An overfill condition of transmission fluid can cause shift or engagement concerns, or possible damage. High fluid levels can cause an overheating condition. Adding Fluid CAUTION: Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid can cause internal transmission component damage. An overfill condition of transmission fluid can cause shift or engagement concerns, or possible damage. Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of fluid used is normally indicated on the fluid level indicator. If necessary, add fluid in 250 ml (1/2 pint) increments through the filler tube until the level is correct. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill > Page 2714 If an overfill condition occurs, excess fluid should be removed by a qualified technician. Fluid Condition Check NOTE: Evidence of fluid contamination, breakdown, or incorrect fluid can cause poor shift quality. If the transmission fluid condition is suspect, drain the transaxle and replace the fluid with MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. ^ Make the normal fluid level check as described in, Fluid Level Check. ^ Observe the color and odor of the fluid. It should be red, not brown or black. Odor can indicate an overheating condition or clutch disc or band failure. ^ Use a clean, lint-free cloth and wipe the fluid level indicator. Examine the stain for evidence of solid particles and signs of antifreeze (gum or varnish on the fluid level indicator). If particles are present in the fluid or there is evidence of contamination, the transaxle drain plug should be removed and a sample of the fluid filtered through a paper filter and examined. If transaxle failure is confirmed by further evidence of coolant or excessive particles in the fluid, the transaxle must be completely cleaned and repaired. This includes cleaning and flushing the torque converter and transaxle cooling system. During disassembly and assembly all overhaul checks and adjustments of clearances and end play must be made. After repairing the transaxle, all diagnostic tests and adjustments listed must be completed to make sure that the problem has been eliminated. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications Manual Transmission Capacity ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................... 2.8 Quarts Note: Approximate refill. Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2719 Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications Manual Transaxle Fluid Type...................................................................................................................................................... ............................................... SAE 75W-90 Gear Oil Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil With Filter ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................. 5.2L (5.5 Qt) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2724 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Oil .......................................................................................................................SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Oil XO-5W20-QSP or equivalent Ford specification ............................................. ........................................................................................................................................... WSS-M2C153-H Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage Power Steering Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage TSB 07-1-7 01/22/07 MERCON(R) ATF REPLACED BY MERCON(R) V AS A SERVICE FLUID FOR SOME POWER STEERING SYSTEMS FORD: 1996-1997 Thunderbird 1996-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 1998-2003 Escort 2000-2007 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006 Ford GT 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1996-1997 Aerostar 1996-2007 E-Series, Explorer, Ranger 1997-2004 F-53 Motorhome Chassis 1997-2007 Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty 1998-2003 Windstar 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2007 Escape 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1996-1997 Cargo 1996-1998 L-Series 1996-1999 F- B-Series 2000-2007 F-650, F-750 2006-2007 Low Cab Forward LINCOLN: 1996-1998 Mark VIII 1996-1999 Continental 1996-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT 2007 MKX MERCURY: 1996-1997 Cougar 1996-2005 Sable 1996-2007 Grand Marquis 1999-2002 Cougar 2003-2004 Marauder 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2007 Mountaineer 1998-2002 Villager 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2007 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid is being replaced by MERCON(R) V as a service fluid for power steering systems originally requiring MERCON(R). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage > Page 2729 ACTION Beginning immediately all power steering applications requiring MERCON(R) can now be serviced using MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. After July 1, 2007, MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid will no longer be manufactured, therefore, availability of this fluid will continue until remaining inventory has been depleted. SERVICE PROCEDURE Service power steering Systems requiring MERCON(R) with MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. CAUTION APPLICATIONS RECOMMENDING TYPE F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AND POWER STEERING FLUID MUST CONTINUE TO USE THAT PARTICULAR FLUID. USE OF ANY OTHER FLUID MAY CAUSE REDUCED FUNCTIONALITY OR DAMAGE Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2730 Power Steering Fluid: Specifications Power Steering Fluid Type .................................................................................................................. .................................................. MERCON(R) ATF Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Capacity ............................................................................................................................ ............................................................... 2 lb (907 g) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2735 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications Item ...................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................ Specification R134a Refrigerant YN-19 .................................................................................................................... ...................................................... WSH-M17B19-A Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Electronic Leak Detection Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection Electronic Leak Detection ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTION Refrigerant Leak Detector SPECIAL TOOL(S) CAUTION: Good ventilation is necessary in the area where electronic A/C leak testing is to be carried out. If the surrounding air is contaminated with refrigerant gas, the leak detector will indicate this gas all the time. Odors from other chemicals such as antifreeze, diesel fuel, disc brake cleaner, or other cleaning solvents can cause the same problem. A fan, even in a well-ventilated area, is very helpful in removing small traces of contamination from the air that might affect the leak detector. 1. NOTE: System pressure should be between 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24°C (75°F) with the engine off. Leak test the refrigerant system using the Refrigerant Leak Detector. Follow instructions included with leak detector for handling and operation techniques. 2. If a leak is found, recover the refrigerant and repair the system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Electronic Leak Detection > Page 2738 Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection Tracer Dye Leak Detection TRACER DYE LEAK DETECTION Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) NOTE: Ford Motor Company vehicles are produced with R-134a Leak Tracer Dye incorporated into the A/C system. The location of leaks can be pinpointed by the bright yellow-green glow of the tracer dye. Since more than one leak can exist, always inspect each component. 1. Check for leaks using a 120-watt UV spot lamp. 2. Scan all components, fittings and lines of the A/C system. 3. After the leak is repaired, remove any traces of leak dye with a general purpose oil solvent. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Electronic Leak Detection > Page 2739 4. Verify the repair by operating the system for a short time and inspecting with the UV spot lamp. Tracer Dye Injection NOTE: System pressure should be between 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24°C (75°F) with the engine off. 1. Install the Manifold Gauge Set or a recovery station. 2. Turn the valve on the fluorescent tracer dye injector all the way to the left to close the valve. 3. Fill the reservoir with 7 ml (0.25 ounce) of R-134a Fluorescent Tracer Dye 164-R3712. 4. Install the injector between the low-side quick disconnect and the vehicle low-pressure service gauge port valve. 5. Open all quick disconnect valves and charge the refrigerant system. 6. When system charging is complete, recover the refrigerant from the dye injector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Electronic Leak Detection > Page 2740 7. NOTE: Only connect the dye-injector to the Manifold Gauge Set or the charging/recovery station when dye is to be injected. The dye injector has a one-way check valve that will prevent system refrigerant recovery and evacuation. Remove the dye injector from the low-side quick disconnect valve. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure DISCHARGING AND RECOVERY Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) 1. Prior to recovering or charging the refrigerant system, you must verify the purity of the refrigerant. 2. NOTE: Some R-134a service centers require the use of an A/C manifold gauge set. Connect the R-134a A/C Refrigerant Center to the low and high pressure service gauge port valves. 3. Recover the refrigerant from the system following the operating instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer. 4. Once the service center has recovered the vehicle A/C system refrigerant, close the service center inlet valve (if so equipped). Then switch off the power supply. 5. Allow the vehicle A/C system to remain closed for about two minutes. Observe the system vacuum level as shown on the gauge. If the pressure does not rise, disconnect the recovery station hose(s). 6. If the system pressure rises, repeat Steps 2 through 5 until the vacuum level remains stable for two minutes. 7. Carry out the required repairs, then evacuate and recharge the A/C system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 2743 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Identifying Refrigerants IDENTIFYING REFRIGERANTS Refrigerant Identifier With Air-Radicator SPECIAL TOOL(S) 1. NOTE: Prior to recovering or charging the refrigerant system, you must use an A/C refrigerant analyzer to identify gas samples taken directly from the refrigeration system or storage containers. Follow the instructions included with the refrigerant analyzer to obtain the sample for testing. 2. The analyzer will display one of the following: - A green "PASS" light emitting diode (LED) will light if the purity of the R-134, R-12 or the R-22 is better than 98% by weight. - A red "FAIL" LED will light if the purity of the gases does not meet the 98% purity standard. - A red "FAIL" LED and "HYDROCARBON" light will illuminate and a horn will sound if a hydrocarbon is detected above 5%. This will alert the user of potential hazards. 3. If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into your recovery/recycling equipment. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 2744 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Handling of Contaminated Refrigerants HANDLING OF CONTAMINATED REFRIGERANTS 1. CAUTION: If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into your recovery/recycling equipment. Recover the contaminated refrigerant using suitable recovery-only equipment designed for capturing and storing contaminated refrigerant. This equipment must only be used to recover contaminated refrigerant to prevent the spread to other vehicles. - If this equipment is not available, contact an A/C service facility in your area with the correct equipment to carry out this service. 2. Determine and correct the cause of the customer's initial concern. 3. NOTE: - Residual refrigerant oil in the suction accumulator/drier must be drained and measured for correct oil system matching. - The suction accumulator/drier cannot be cleaned and a new suction accumulator/drier must be installed. Remove the suction accumulator/drier. 4. Clean the A/C evaporator core and the A/C condenser core by flushing. 5. Install the new suction accumulator/drier. 6. Correctly oil match the system. 7. Evacuate and charge the system. 8. Dispose of contaminated refrigerant according to all federal, state and local regulations. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 2745 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Evacuation and Charging AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) SYSTEM EVACUATION AND CHARGING Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) 1. Prior to charging the refrigerant system, you must verify the purity of the refrigerant. 2. NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a charging station to carry out evacuation and charging of the refrigerant system. If a charging station is not available, system charging may be accomplished using a separate vacuum pump, charging cylinder, and manifold gauge set. Connect the R-134a A/C Refrigerant Center to the low and high pressure service gauge port valves. 3. Evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least 99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) (vacuum) and as close to 101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible. Continue to operate the vacuum pump for a minimum of 45 minutes. 4. Turn off the evacuation pump. Observe the low-pressure gauge for five minutes to make sure that the system vacuum is held. If vacuum is not held for five minutes, leak test the system, service the leaks, and evacuate the system again. 5. Correctly oil match the system to verify that the correct amount of refrigerant oil is present in the system. 6. Charge the system with the specified weight of refrigerant and refrigerant oil. 7. When no more refrigerant is being drawn into the system, start the engine and select MAX A/C operation. Adjust the blower motor speed to maximum and allow the remaining refrigerant to be drawn into the system. Continue to add refrigerant into the system until the specified weight of R-134a has been added. Close the charging cylinder valve and allow the system to pull any remaining refrigerant from the hose. When the suction pressure drops to approximately 207 kPa (30 psi), close the charging hose valve. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil Capacity ...................................................................................................................... ............................................................. 9 oz (266 ml) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2750 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Item ...................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................ Specification PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) F7AZ-19589-DA (Motorcraft YN-12-C) ................................................................................................................................................... WSH-M1C231-B Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2751 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair REFRIGERANT OIL ADDING CAUTION: During normal A/C operation, oil is circulated through the system with the refrigerant, and a small amount is retained in each component. If certain components of the system are removed for new installation, some of the refrigerant oil will go with the component. To maintain the original total oil charge, it is necessary to compensate for the oil lost by adding oil to the system with the new part. 1. NOTE: Service A/C compressors are shipped without compressor oil. Rotate the A/C compressor shaft six to eight revolutions while collecting oil in a clean measuring device. If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is between 85-142 ml (3-5 ounces), pour the same amount plus 30 ml (1 ounce) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B into the new A/C compressor. - If the amount of oil that was removed from the old A/C compressor is greater than 142 ml (5 ounces), pour the same amount drained of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B into the new A/C compressor. - If the amount of oil that was removed from the old A/C compressor is less than 85 ml (3 ounces), pour 85 ml (3 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B into the new A/C compressor. 2. For the suction accumulator/drier, drill two 1/2 inch holes in the suction accumulator/drier cylinder and drain the oil into a calibrated container - Add a quantity of new oil to match that drained from the old suction accumulator/drier plus 60 ml (2 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. 3. For the A/C evaporator core, add 89 ml (3 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B to the suction accumulator/drier inlet tube. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2752 4. For the A/C condenser core, add 30 ml (1 ounce) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B to the A/C condenser core or the suction accumulator/drier inlet tube. 5. Add 60 ml (2 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B to the suction accumulator/drier inlet tube when carrying out each of the following repairs: installation of a new A/C evaporator core orifice - installation of a new A/C compressor pressure relief valve - installation of a new refrigerant line - repair of an O-ring seal leak - repair of a charge port leak 6. Installation of new components that do not require discharge of refrigerant and resulting oil loss, such as the A/C cycling switch and the A/C pressure transducer, do not require additional oil. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Brake Bleeding: Technician Safety Information WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with the eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts the eyes, flush the eyes for 15 minutes with cold running water. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 2757 Brake Bleeding: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: Make sure that the vehicle is standing on a level surface. If brake fluid is spilled on the paintwork, the affected areas must be immediately washed down with cold water. Make sure the battery ground cable is disconnected on vehicles fitted with Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Bleeding - System Brake System Bleeding Special Tool(s) Anti-Lock Brakes Bleed NOTE: Bleeding the hydraulic control unit (HCU) is required only when removing or installing the HCU or master cylinder, or opening the lines to the HCU. 1. NOTE: Carrying out the System Bleed function drives trapped air from the HCU. Subsequent bleeding removes the air from the brake hydraulic system through the bleeder screws. NOTE: Adequate voltage to the HCU module is required during the anti-lock control portion of the system bleed. Connect the diagnostic tool. 2. Access the SYSTEM BLEED FUNCTION. Go to the Tool Tab-Chassis-Braking-ABS Service Bleed and follow the directions on the diagnostic tool. 3. Manually bleed the brake hydraulic system. 4. Repeat the procedure carrying out a total of two diagnostic tool cycles and two manual bleed cycles. Manual Bleed Brake system WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. 1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front wheel. Rear drum brakes Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 2760 3. Attach a rubber drain hose to the rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Loosen the bleeder screw until fluid flow stops. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and tighten the bleeder screw. 6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. 7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system. Front disc brakes 9. Attach a rubber drain hose to the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 10. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 11. Loosen the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw until fluid flow stops. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. 12. Repeat Steps 10 and 11 until clear, bubble-free fluid flows. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 2761 13. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. 14. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. Gravity Bleed Brake system 1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front wheel. Rear drum brakes 3. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Loosen the rear wheel cylinder bleeder screw and leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 2762 4. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. Front disc brakes 5. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Open the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. Leave open until clear bubble-free brake fluid flows. 6. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. 7. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with fluid and install the reservoir cap. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 2763 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Bleeding - Components Component Bleeding Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. 1. Support the brake master cylinder body in a soft jaw vise. 2. Remove the master cylinder cap and install short brake hoses to the master cylinder outlet ports with the ends submerged in the brake master cylinder reservoir 3. NOTE: If equipped with a manual transmission, plug the master cylinder feed port. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 2764 Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 brake fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 4. Slowly depress the primary piston until bubble -free brake fluid flows from both brake hoses. 5. Remove the brake hoses from the master cylinder. 6. Install plugs in the front and rear brake outlet port. 7. Install the reservoir cap and install the brake master cylinder in the vehicle. ^ Remove the master cylinder outlet port plugs before installing the lines. Brake Master Cylinder - In-Vehicle Bleed WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 2765 1. Disconnect the brake outlet lines from the brake master cylinder and cap the lines. 2. Install short brake hoses to the master cylinder outlet ports with the ends submerged in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 3. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows from both brake hoses. 5. Remove the short brake hoses and install the brake outlet lines. 6. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 2766 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Pressure Bleeding Brake System Pressure Bleeding Special Tool(s) WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. 1. Clean the outside of the brake master cylinder reservoir. 2. Remove the reservoir cap and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with brake fluid. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 3. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the instructions of the manufacturer when installing the adapter. Install Brake Bleeder to the brake master cylinder reservoir, and attach the Brake Bleeder tank hose to the fitting on the adapter. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 2767 4. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RH rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 5. Open the valve on the Brake Bleeder tank. 6. Loosen the bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then close the bleeder screw and remove the rubber hose. 7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system, going in order from the LH rear wheel to the RH front wheel, ending with the LH front wheel. 9. Close the Brake Bleeder tank valve and remove the tank hose from the adapter, and remove the adapter. 10. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions WARNING: - If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed. The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming Depowering and Repowering Procedure Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered. NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected. 2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover. 4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front of any air bag module when the battery ground cable is connected. Connect the battery ground cable. 5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 2773 Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Seats Removed DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION PROCEDURES There are two deactivation and reactivation procedures. - One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. - The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. Deactivation Procedure WARNING: If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed. The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. NOTE: - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. - After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the affected front seat. 9. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag floor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 11. Disconnect (if necessary) attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical connector. 12. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 2774 Reactivation Procedure 1. WARNING: The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 4. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 5. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector. 6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 7. Install the affected front seat. 8. Connect the drive and passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connectors. 9. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver and passenger side air bag module electrical connectors. 10. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. Reconnect the electrical connector. 11. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 12. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 14. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure Seats Not Removed DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION PROCEDURES There are two deactivation and reactivation procedures. - One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. - The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. Deactivation Procedure WARNING: If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed. The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 2775 non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. NOTE: - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. - After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position. 2. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the front seat. 10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable. Reactivation Procedure 1. WARNING: The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. Reconnect the electrical connector. 4. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 2776 7. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 9. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 2777 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist AIR BAG RECONNECT CHECKLIST The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system concern: 1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3. Restraints control module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors connected? 5. All sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected? Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 2778 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure PROVE OUT PROCEDURE Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the restraints control module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2784 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2785 Fuse: Locations Central Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2786 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2787 Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2790 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2791 Fuse: Application and ID Central Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2792 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2793 Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2798 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2799 Fuse Block: Locations Central Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2800 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2801 Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Fuse Block: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 2804 Central Junction Box (CJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 2805 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 2806 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 2807 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box Fuse Block: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2810 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2811 Fuse Block: Application and ID Central Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2812 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2813 Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2818 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2819 Relay Box: Locations Central Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2820 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2821 Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 2824 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 2825 Relay Box: Diagrams Central Junction Box (CJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 2826 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 2827 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2830 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2831 Relay Box: Application and ID Central Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2832 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2833 Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair Ford provides no information related to a Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator for this vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Check Engine, Service Engine Soon Or ISO Standard Engine Symbol The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) (Figure 17) alerts the driver that the powertrain control module (PCM) has detected an OBD II emission-related component or system fault. When this occurs, an OBD II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be set. - The MIL is located on the instrument cluster and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE SOON or ISO standard engine symbol (Figure 18). - Power is supplied to the MIL whenever the ignition switch is in the RUN or START position. - The MIL will remain on in the RUN/START mode as a bulb check during the instrument cluster proveout for approximately 4 seconds. - If the MIL remains on after the bulb check: The PCM illuminates the MIL for an emission related concern and a DTC will be present. - The instrument cluster will illuminate the MIL if the PCM does not send a control message to the instrument cluster. - The PCM is operating in the Hardware Limited Operation Strategy (HLOS). - The MIL circuit is shorted to ground. - If the MIL remains off (during the bulb check): Bulb is damaged. - MIL circuit is open. - To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the Scan Tool must be sent, or three consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a fault. - For any MIL concern, go to Symptom Charts. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptom Charts - If the MIL blinks at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition could possibly exist. - If the MIL blinks erratically, an intermittent open B+ to the bulb or an intermittent short to ground in the MIL circuit exist. Also, the PCM can reset while cranking if battery voltage is low. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair Ford provides no information related to a Oil Change Reminder Lamp for this vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation JACKING WARNING: - Do not run the engine when jacking the vehicle. The wheels contacting the ground could cause the vehicle to move. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Make sure the jack and jack stands are correctly located to prevent the vehicle from falling. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Wheel chocks should be used to prevent the vehicle from rolling and falling off the jack. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: The service jack provided with the vehicle is only intended to be used in an emergency for changing a deflated tire. Never use the service jack to hoist the vehicle for any other service. Refer to the Owner Guide when using the jack supplied with the vehicle. Jacking Points - Front Jacking Points - Front 1. The front jacking point is at the bolt head of the lower control arm. Jacking Points - Rear Jacking Points - Rear 1. The rear jacking points are located on the rear trailing arms. LIFTING Lifting Points Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2848 Lifting Points 1. CAUTION: Damage to the suspension, exhaust or steering linkage components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters prior to lifting the vehicle. The lifting points are part of the uni-body structure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > System Information > Description and Operation Tire Monitoring System: Description and Operation Ford provides no information regarding a Tire Pressure Monitoring System for this vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and Repair Wheels: Service and Repair Wheel Leaks 1. Pinhole leaks in cast aluminum wheels compromise the wheel integrity. Install a new wheel. Straightening Wheels, Rims or Components 1. NOTE: Do not heat wheels in an attempt to soften them for straightening to repair damage. The special alloy used in these wheels is heat-treated. Uncontrolled heating from welding affects the properties of the material. Do not weld the wheels for any reason. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearing Inspection NOTE: The wheel bearings are not adjustable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Wheel Bearing Part 1 Of 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 2860 Part 2 Of 2 Special Tool(s) Removal NOTE: Install a new wheel bearing when the wheel hub is removed. All vehicles 1. Remove the brake disc. 2. Remove the wheel hub nut. 3. Remove the tie rod end nut. 1. Remove the cotter pin. 2. Remove the nut. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 2861 4. Using the special tool, separate the tie rod end from the knuckle. Vehicles with ABS 5. Remove the bolt and position the anti-lock brake sensor aside. All vehicles 6. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle. 1. Remove the pinch bolt and nut. 2. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle. 7. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the wheel knuckle. ^ Position the halfshaft aside and support. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 2862 8. Remove the wheel knuckle. 1. Remove the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts and nuts. 2. Remove the wheel knuckle. 9. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing and knuckle. 10. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle, after removing the wheel hub. Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 11. Remove the snap ring. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 2863 12. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle. NOTE: The brake disc shield is pressed on. 13. If necessary, remove the brake disc shield. Installation All vehicles 1. If necessary, install a disc brake shield. 2. NOTE: Special Tool 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle. Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 2864 3. Install the snap ring. 4. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. 5. Install the wheel knuckle. 1. Position the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts and nuts. 6. Using the special tool, insert the halfshaft into the wheel hub. 7. Position and align the ball joint stud into the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 2865 8. Install the ball joint pinch bolt and nut into the wheel knuckle. Vehicles with ABS 9. Install the anti-lock brake sensor and tighten the bolt. All vehicles 10. Install the tie rod end into the wheel knuckle. 1. Install the tie rod end nut. 2. Install a new cotter pin. 11. Install the wheel hub nut. 12. Install the brake disc. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 2866 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Bearing-2WD Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 2867 Special Tool(s) Removal 1. Remove the brake drum. 2. NOTE: If equipped, remove the ABS sensor ring. Remove the wheel hub nut. 3. Using the special tools, remove the wheel hub. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 2868 4. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle, after removing the wheel hub. Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 5. Remove the snap ring. 6. Using the special tools, remove the wheel bearing outer race from the wheel knuckle. Installation 1. Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 2869 2. Install the snap ring. 3. Using the special tools, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. 4. NOTE: If equipped, install the ABS sensor ring. Install the wheel hub nut. 5. Install the brake drum. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Wheel hub nut ..................................................................................................................................... .................................................. 290 Nm (214 ft. lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Fastener: Specifications Wheel nuts (all wheels) ....................................................................................................................... .................................................... 133 Nm (98 ft. lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front Wheel Studs Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front wheel bearing. 2. Press out the wheel studs. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 2879 Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Studs Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel bearing. 2. Press out the wheel studs. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Tow Capability/Service Kit Requirements Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Tow Capability/Service Kit Requirements TSB 06-7-1 04/17/06 NEUTRAL TOW CAPABILITY - SERVICE KIT REQUIREMENTS FORD: 2004-2006 Focus 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2006 Escape, Explorer, F-150-350 Series, Ranger 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2007 Explorer Sport Trac LINCOLN: 2006 Mark LT MERCURY: 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 06-4-5 to update the vehicle neutral tow application chart. ISSUE Various vehicles are neutral tow capable. Refer to the following chart to determine neutral tow capability for specific vehicle applications, and to determine if a Service Kit is required to make the vehicle neutral tow capable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Tow Capability/Service Kit Requirements > Page 2884 ACTION Review the neutral tow application chart (Figure 1) and order the kit, if applicable. Reprogramming of various modules may be required for some installations. Installation instructions are included with the kit. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Tow Capability/Service Kit Requirements > Page 2885 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation JACKING WARNING: - Do not run the engine when jacking the vehicle. The wheels contacting the ground could cause the vehicle to move. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Make sure the jack and jack stands are correctly located to prevent the vehicle from falling. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Wheel chocks should be used to prevent the vehicle from rolling and falling off the jack. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: The service jack provided with the vehicle is only intended to be used in an emergency for changing a deflated tire. Never use the service jack to hoist the vehicle for any other service. Refer to the Owner Guide when using the jack supplied with the vehicle. Jacking Points - Front Jacking Points - Front 1. The front jacking point is at the bolt head of the lower control arm. Jacking Points - Rear Jacking Points - Rear 1. The rear jacking points are located on the rear trailing arms. LIFTING Lifting Points Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2889 Lifting Points 1. CAUTION: Damage to the suspension, exhaust or steering linkage components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters prior to lifting the vehicle. The lifting points are part of the uni-body structure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation VARIABLE CAM TIMING SYSTEM Overview Variable Cam Timing (VCT) enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft (phase-shafting) as a function of engine operating conditions. There are four types of VCT systems. - Exhaust Phase Shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded. - Intake Phase Shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced. - Dual Equal Phase Shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and equally advanced or retarded. - Dual Independent Phase Shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are shifted independently. All systems have four operational modes; idle, part throttle, wide open throttle and default mode. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the phase angle are controlled by air flow, engine oil temperature and engine coolant temperature. At part and wide open throttle the PCM controls cam timing based on engine RPM, load and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced emissions and enhanced engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the added benefit of improve torque. In addition, on some applications a VCT system can eliminated the need for an external Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of the EGR system is accomplished by controlling the overlap in valve opening between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve closing. Currently for the 2004 model year, Ford Motor Company uses the PS and DEPS systems. The IPS system is on Lincoln LS, Thunderbird and Focus SVT and the DEPS system is on the F150 5.4L 3V. Variable Cam Timing Variable Cam Timing System The VCT (variable cam timing) system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a CMP (camshaft position sensor) and trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel has a number of equally spaced teeth equal to the number (n) of cylinders on a bank plus one extra tooth (n+1). Four cylinder and V8 engines use a CMP 4+1 tooth trigger wheel. V6 engines use a CMP 3+1 tooth trigger wheel. The extra tooth placed between the equally spaced teeth represents the CMP signal for that bank. A CKP (crankshaft position sensor) provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning information in 10 degree increments (Figure 115). 1. The PCM receives input signals from the IAT (intake air temperature), ECT (engine coolant temperature), EOT (engine oil temperature), CMP, TP (throttle position), MAF (mass air flow) and CKP to determine the operating conditions of the engine. At idle (low engine speeds and closed throttle) the PCM controls camshaft position based on air and coolant temperatures. During part and wide open throttle, camshaft position is determined by engine RPM, load and throttle position. The VCT system will not operate until the engine is at normal operating temperature. 2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the proper conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly. As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2896 cycle. The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It will continually update the VCT solenoid duty cycle until desired positioning is achieved. A difference between the desired and actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM's VCT control loop. The PCM will disable the VCT and place the camshaft in a default position if a fault is detected. A related DTC will also be set when this fault is detected. 5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly which advances or retards the cam timing. One half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the timing chain. Oil chambers between the two halves couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the camshaft to rotate in either a advance or retard position depending on the oil flow. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Camshaft Bearing: > 06-3-5 > Feb > 06 > Engine - Left Bank Cylinder Head Ticking Noise Camshaft Bearing: Customer Interest Engine - Left Bank Cylinder Head Ticking Noise TSB 06-3-5 02/20/06 CAMSHAFT TICK NOISE - 3.0L 4V ENGINE ONLY FORD: 2001-2005 Taurus 2001-2006 Escape MERCURY: 2001-2005 Sable 2005-2006 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 04-20-8 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Taurus/Sable, 2001-2006 Escape and 2005-2006 Mariner vehicles built prior to 1-17-2006 equipped with the 3.0L 4V Duratec engine may exhibit a ticking noise from the left bank cylinder head, with the engine at normal operating temperature only. ACTION To diagnose, with the engine running and warm (normal operation temperature), using a mechanic's stethoscope determine if the ticking noise is coming from the left hand intake camshaft at cylinder number 6, (Figure 1). If the ticking noise can be verified, refer to the following Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left bank valve cover. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section 303-01B. 2. Rotate the engine clock wise until the cylinder number 6 intake cam lobes are pointing up and the valves are fully closed. 3. Remove all left hand intake cam caps individually and reinstall them finger tight. NOTE THE CAMSHAFT CAPS MUST BE COMPLETELY LIFTED OFF AND THEN SET BACK INTO POSITION. LOOSENING AND RE-TORQUEING CAP BOLTS IS NOT SUFFICIENT. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Camshaft Bearing: > 06-3-5 > Feb > 06 > Engine - Left Bank Cylinder Head Ticking Noise > Page 2906 4. Torque bolts in sequence shown in Figure 2 to 72 lb-in (8 N.m) excluding cam cap number 8L camshaft cap. 5. Using a screw driver positioned on each side of the top of cam cap number 8L (Figure 3) apply hand pressure and shift cam cap number 8L toward the exhaust side of the cylinder head. 6. While holding cam cap number 8L in the shifted position, torque the fasteners number 9 (inboard) first, to 72 lb-in (8 N.m) then torque fastener number 10 (Figure 3). 7. Install the left hand camshaft cover. Refer to appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 303-01. 8. Fully warm the engine to normal operating temperature to verify the repair. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 060305A 2001-2003 Taurus/Sable: 0.9 Hr. Remove And Install The Camshaft Caps Includes Time To Remove And Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Camshaft Bearing: > 06-3-5 > Feb > 06 > Engine - Left Bank Cylinder Head Ticking Noise > Page 2907 Install Valve Cover (Do Not Use With 6007A10, 6250AL, 6584AL) 060305A 2004-2005 1.0 Hr. Taurus/Sable: Remove And Install The Camshaft Caps Includes Time To Remove And Install Valve Cover (Do Not Use With 6007A10, 6250AL, 6584AL) 060305A 2001-2006 Escape and 1.2 Hrs. 2005-2006 Mariner: Remove And Install The Camshaft Caps Includes Time To Remove And Install Valve Cover (Do Not Use With 6007A10, 6250AL, 6584AL) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6A267 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Camshaft Bearing: > 06-3-5 > Feb > 06 > Engine - Left Bank Cylinder Head Ticking Noise Camshaft Bearing: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Left Bank Cylinder Head Ticking Noise TSB 06-3-5 02/20/06 CAMSHAFT TICK NOISE - 3.0L 4V ENGINE ONLY FORD: 2001-2005 Taurus 2001-2006 Escape MERCURY: 2001-2005 Sable 2005-2006 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 04-20-8 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Taurus/Sable, 2001-2006 Escape and 2005-2006 Mariner vehicles built prior to 1-17-2006 equipped with the 3.0L 4V Duratec engine may exhibit a ticking noise from the left bank cylinder head, with the engine at normal operating temperature only. ACTION To diagnose, with the engine running and warm (normal operation temperature), using a mechanic's stethoscope determine if the ticking noise is coming from the left hand intake camshaft at cylinder number 6, (Figure 1). If the ticking noise can be verified, refer to the following Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the left bank valve cover. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section 303-01B. 2. Rotate the engine clock wise until the cylinder number 6 intake cam lobes are pointing up and the valves are fully closed. 3. Remove all left hand intake cam caps individually and reinstall them finger tight. NOTE THE CAMSHAFT CAPS MUST BE COMPLETELY LIFTED OFF AND THEN SET BACK INTO POSITION. LOOSENING AND RE-TORQUEING CAP BOLTS IS NOT SUFFICIENT. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Camshaft Bearing: > 06-3-5 > Feb > 06 > Engine - Left Bank Cylinder Head Ticking Noise > Page 2913 4. Torque bolts in sequence shown in Figure 2 to 72 lb-in (8 N.m) excluding cam cap number 8L camshaft cap. 5. Using a screw driver positioned on each side of the top of cam cap number 8L (Figure 3) apply hand pressure and shift cam cap number 8L toward the exhaust side of the cylinder head. 6. While holding cam cap number 8L in the shifted position, torque the fasteners number 9 (inboard) first, to 72 lb-in (8 N.m) then torque fastener number 10 (Figure 3). 7. Install the left hand camshaft cover. Refer to appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 303-01. 8. Fully warm the engine to normal operating temperature to verify the repair. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 060305A 2001-2003 Taurus/Sable: 0.9 Hr. Remove And Install The Camshaft Caps Includes Time To Remove And Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Camshaft Bearing: > 06-3-5 > Feb > 06 > Engine - Left Bank Cylinder Head Ticking Noise > Page 2914 Install Valve Cover (Do Not Use With 6007A10, 6250AL, 6584AL) 060305A 2004-2005 1.0 Hr. Taurus/Sable: Remove And Install The Camshaft Caps Includes Time To Remove And Install Valve Cover (Do Not Use With 6007A10, 6250AL, 6584AL) 060305A 2001-2006 Escape and 1.2 Hrs. 2005-2006 Mariner: Remove And Install The Camshaft Caps Includes Time To Remove And Install Valve Cover (Do Not Use With 6007A10, 6250AL, 6584AL) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6A267 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2915 Camshaft Bearing: Specifications Camshaft Journal-to-bearing clearance Standard ............................................................................................................................................................ 0.025-0.076 mm (0.001-0.0029 inch) Service limit .............................................................................. ............................................................................................. 0.121 mm (0.0047 inch) Journal diameters (all) ........................................................................................................................................... 26.962-26.936 mm (1.061-1.060 inch) Journal inside diameter (cap assembled) ........................................................................................................................................ 27.012-26.987 mm Bearing inside diameter (all) ........................................................................................................................... 27.012-26.987 mm (1.063-1.062 inch) Camshaft Cap bolts ............................................................................................................................. ...................................................... 10 Nm (89 in.lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Camshaft: Specifications Camshaft Lobe lift Intake (primary) ................................................................................................................................... ...................................... 4.79 mm (0.188 inch) Intake (secondary) ..................................................... ................................................................................................................ 4.79 mm (0.188 inch) Exhaust ................................................................................................................................................ ...................................... 4.79 mm (0.188 inch) Lobe lift-allowable lift loss .......................................... ....................................................................................................................... 0 mm (0.0 inch) Valve lift @ zero lash Intake (primary) ................................................................................................................................... ...................................... 9.80 mm (0.388 inch) Intake (secondary) ..................................................... ................................................................................................................ 9.80 mm (0.388 inch) Exhaust ................................................................................................................................................ ...................................... 9.80 mm (0.388 inch) Camshaft end play ............................................................................................................................... ..................................................... 0.027-0.190 mm Standard ............................................................................................................................................................ 0.025-0.165 mm (0.001-0.0064 inch) Service limit .............................................................................. ........................................................................................... 0.190 mm (0.00748 inch) Journal-to-bearing clearance Standard ............................................................................................................................................................ 0.025-0.076 mm (0.001-0.0029 inch) Service limit .............................................................................. ............................................................................................. 0.121 mm (0.0047 inch) Journal diameters (all) ........................................................................................................................................... 26.962-26.936 mm (1.061-1.060 inch) Journal inside diameter (cap assembled) ........................................................................................................................................ 27.012-26.987 mm Bearing inside diameter (all) ........................................................................................................................... 27.012-26.987 mm (1.063-1.062 inch) Camshaft Cap bolts ............................................................................................................................. ...................................................... 10 Nm (89 in.lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > LH Camshaft: Service and Repair LH Camshafts LH Special Tool(s) Material Removal 1. Remove the water pump belt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 2921 2. CAUTION: The OEM pulley is pressed on 4.74 mm (0.18 inch) past flush of the end of the camshaft. The service pulley is pressed on flush to the end of the camshaft. Using the special tools, remove the water pump drive pulley and discard. 3. Remove the timing drive components. 4. NOTE: To make sure of correct sealing, do not scratch the camshaft. Using the special tools, remove the camshaft oil seal and discard. 5. Remove the bolts, the camshaft oil seal retainer and discard the press-in-place gasket. 6. CAUTION: Cylinder head camshaft journal caps and cylinder heads are numbered to verify that they are assembled in their original positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 2922 Loosen the LH camshaft cap bolts evenly in the sequence shown to allow the camshafts to rise from the cylinder head and remove the caps. 7. Remove the camshafts. Installation 1. NOTE: Be sure camshaft bearing caps are installed in the original positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 2923 Lubricate camshafts with clean engine oil and carefully position the camshafts into the cylinder head. Align the camshafts as shown. 2. CAUTION: Do not install the camshaft journal thrust caps until all of the camshaft bearing caps have been installed, or damage to the thrust caps can occur. Lubricate the bearing surfaces of the camshaft bearing caps with clean engine oil. Install the bearing caps and loosely install the bolts. 3. Lubricate the bearing surfaces of the camshaft bearing thrust caps with clean engine oil. Install the bearing thrust caps and loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 2924 4. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown. 5. NOTE: Clean and degrease the sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner. Install a new press-in-place gasket and install the camshaft oil seal retainer. 6. Install the timing drive components. 7. NOTE: Lubricate the camshaft oil seal with clean engine oil. Using special tools, install a new camshaft oil seal. 8. CAUTION: The OEM pulley is pressed on 4.74 mm (0.18 inch) past flush of the camshaft. The service pulley is pressed on flush to the end of the camshaft. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 2925 Using the special tool, install a new service water pump drive pulley. 9. Install the water pump belt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 2926 Camshaft: Service and Repair RH Camshafts RH Material Removal 1. Remove the timing drive components. 2. CAUTION: Cylinder head camshaft journal caps and cylinder heads are numbered to verify that they are assembled in their original positions. Loosen the RH camshaft cap bolts evenly in the sequence shown to allow the camshafts to rise from the cylinder head and remove the caps. 3. Remove the camshafts. Installation 1. NOTE: Be sure camshaft bearing caps are installed in the original positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 2927 Lubricate camshafts with clean engine oil and carefully position the camshafts into the cylinder head. Align the camshafts as shown. 2. CAUTION: Do not install the camshaft journal thrust caps until all of the camshaft bearing caps have been installed, or damage to the thrust caps may occur. Lubricate the bearing surfaces of the camshaft bearing caps with clean engine oil and install the bearing caps and loosely install the bolts. 3. Lubricate the bearing surfaces of the camshaft bearing thrust caps with clean engine oil. Install the bearing thrust caps and loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 2928 4. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown. 5. Install the timing drive components. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Service and Repair Hydraulic Lash Adjusters Material Removal and Installation 1. Remove the camshaft followers. 2. NOTE: Mark the positions of the hydraulic lash adjusters to make sure they are assembled in their original positions. Remove the hydraulic lash adjusters. 3. NOTE: Inspect the hydraulic lash adjusters for scoring marks and uneven wear in the bore. Install new lash adjusters if necessary. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the hydraulic lash adjusters with clean engine oil. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Roller Followers Special Tool(s) Material Removal and Installation 1. Remove the LH and RH valve covers. 2. Remove the LH and RH spark plugs. 3. Remove the RH front wheel. 4. Remove the splash shield. 5. Rotate the crankshaft until the camshaft lobe is pointing directly away from the follower. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2935 6. Using the special tool, remove the followers. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the camshaft followers with clean engine oil. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation VARIABLE CAM TIMING SYSTEM Overview Variable Cam Timing (VCT) enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft (phase-shafting) as a function of engine operating conditions. There are four types of VCT systems. - Exhaust Phase Shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded. - Intake Phase Shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced. - Dual Equal Phase Shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and equally advanced or retarded. - Dual Independent Phase Shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are shifted independently. All systems have four operational modes; idle, part throttle, wide open throttle and default mode. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the phase angle are controlled by air flow, engine oil temperature and engine coolant temperature. At part and wide open throttle the PCM controls cam timing based on engine RPM, load and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced emissions and enhanced engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the added benefit of improve torque. In addition, on some applications a VCT system can eliminated the need for an external Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of the EGR system is accomplished by controlling the overlap in valve opening between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve closing. Currently for the 2004 model year, Ford Motor Company uses the PS and DEPS systems. The IPS system is on Lincoln LS, Thunderbird and Focus SVT and the DEPS system is on the F150 5.4L 3V. Variable Cam Timing Variable Cam Timing System The VCT (variable cam timing) system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a CMP (camshaft position sensor) and trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel has a number of equally spaced teeth equal to the number (n) of cylinders on a bank plus one extra tooth (n+1). Four cylinder and V8 engines use a CMP 4+1 tooth trigger wheel. V6 engines use a CMP 3+1 tooth trigger wheel. The extra tooth placed between the equally spaced teeth represents the CMP signal for that bank. A CKP (crankshaft position sensor) provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning information in 10 degree increments (Figure 115). 1. The PCM receives input signals from the IAT (intake air temperature), ECT (engine coolant temperature), EOT (engine oil temperature), CMP, TP (throttle position), MAF (mass air flow) and CKP to determine the operating conditions of the engine. At idle (low engine speeds and closed throttle) the PCM controls camshaft position based on air and coolant temperatures. During part and wide open throttle, camshaft position is determined by engine RPM, load and throttle position. The VCT system will not operate until the engine is at normal operating temperature. 2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the proper conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly. As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2939 cycle. The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It will continually update the VCT solenoid duty cycle until desired positioning is achieved. A difference between the desired and actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM's VCT control loop. The PCM will disable the VCT and place the camshaft in a default position if a fault is detected. A related DTC will also be set when this fault is detected. 5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly which advances or retards the cam timing. One half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the timing chain. Oil chambers between the two halves couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the camshaft to rotate in either a advance or retard position depending on the oil flow. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications Connecting rod bearings Clearance to crankshaft ........................................................................................................................................... 0.028-0.066 mm (0.001-0.0025 inch) Bearing wall thickness (std.) d ....................................................................................................................................................... 1.503 mm (0.059 inch) Connecting Rod Piston pin bore diameter ........................................................................................................................................ 21.017-21.031 mm (0.827-0.828 inch) Crankshaft bearing bore diameter ..................................................................................................................... 53.015-53.035 mm (2.0872-2.0879 inch) Length (center to center) ....................................................................................................................................... 138.06-138.14 mm (5.435-5.438 inch) Alignment (bore to bore max. difference) e Twist .......................................................................................................................................................... 0.050 mm per 25 (0.0019 per 0.984 inch) Bend .......................................................................................................................................................... 0.038 mm per 25 (0.0014 per 0.984 inch) Side clearance (assembled to crank) Standard ............................................................................................................................................................ 0.100-0.30 mm (0.0039-0.0118 inch) Service limit .............................................................................. ....................................................................................... 0.35 mm (0.0013inch) max. Connecting rod cap bolts Stage 1: Tighten to .............................................................................................................................. .......................................... 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). Stage 2: Tighten to ..................................................... ................................................................................................................... 43 Nm (32 ft. lbs.). e Pin bore and crank bearing bore must be parallel and in same vertical plane within the specified total difference when measured at the ends of a 203 mm bar, 101.5 mm on each side of rod centerline. d 0.250 mm Undersize-Add 0.125 mm to standard or grade 2 thickness. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Connecting Rod: Specifications Connecting rod bearings Clearance to crankshaft ........................................................................................................................................... 0.028-0.066 mm (0.001-0.0025 inch) Bearing wall thickness (std.) d ....................................................................................................................................................... 1.503 mm (0.059 inch) Connecting Rod Piston pin bore diameter ........................................................................................................................................ 21.017-21.031 mm (0.827-0.828 inch) Crankshaft bearing bore diameter ......................................................................................................................... 53.015-53.035 mm (2.0872-2.0879 inch) Length (center to center) ....................................................................................................................................... 138.06-138.14 mm (5.435-5.438 inch) Alignment (bore to bore max. difference) e Twist .......................................................................................................................................................... 0.050 mm per 25 (0.0019 per 0.984 inch) Bend .......................................................................................................................................................... 0.038 mm per 25 (0.0014 per 0.984 inch) Side clearance (assembled to crank) Standard ............................................................................................................................................................ 0.100-0.30 mm (0.0039-0.0118 inch) Service limit .............................................................................. ....................................................................................... 0.35 mm (0.0013inch) max. Connecting rod cap bolts Stage 1: Tighten to .............................................................................................................................. .......................................... 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). Stage 2: Tighten to ..................................................... ................................................................................................................... 43 Nm (32 ft. lbs.). e Pin bore and crank bearing bore must be parallel and in same vertical plane within the specified total difference when measured at the ends of a 203 mm bar, 101.5 mm on each side of rod centerline. d 0.250 mm Undersize-Add 0.125 mm to standard or grade 2 thickness. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications Crankshaft Main bearing journal diameter .............................................................................................................................. 62.968-62.992 mm (2.479-2.480 inch) Connecting rod journal diameter ........................................................................................................................... 49.970-49.990 mm (1.967-1.968 inch) Crankshaft free end play ............................................................................................................................................ 0.110-0.232 mm (0.004-0.009 inch) Crankshaft runout to rear face of cylinder block ........................................................................................................ 0.050 mm (inch) max. (0.001 inch) Lower Cylinder block bolts and studs Stage 1: Tighten fasteners 1-8 to ........................................................................................................................................................ 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). Stage 2: Tighten fasteners 9-16 to ...................................................................................................................................................... 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). Stage 3: Tighten fasteners 1-16 ................................................................................. ...................................................................................... 90 degrees. Stage 4: Tighten fasteners 17-22 to .................................................................................................................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). Main bearings Clearance to crankshaft-desired .......................................................................................................................... 0.025-0.045 mm (0.0009-0.0017 inch) Clearance to crankshaft-allowable ...................................................................................................................... 0.025-0.050 mm (0.0009-0.0019 inch) Bearing wall thickness-grade 1 .................................................................................................................................................. 2.497 mm (0.0983 inch) Bearing wall thickness-grade 2 .................................................................................................................................................. 2.501 mm (0.0985 inch) Bearing wall thickness-grade 3 ................................................................................................................................................... 2.505 mm (0.0986 inch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft: Specifications Crankshaft Main bearing journal diameter .............................................................................................................................. 62.968-62.992 mm (2.479-2.480 inch) Connecting rod journal diameter ........................................................................................................................... 49.970-49.990 mm (1.967-1.968 inch) Crankshaft free end play ............................................................................................................................................ 0.110-0.232 mm (0.004-0.009 inch) Crankshaft runout to rear face of cylinder block ........................................................................................................ 0.050 mm (inch) max. (0.001 inch) Lower cylinder block bolts and studs Stage 1: Tighten fasteners 1-8 to ........................................................................................................................................................ 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). Stage 2: Tighten fasteners 9-16 to ...................................................................................................................................................... 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). Stage 3: Tighten fasteners 1-16 ................................................................................. ...................................................................................... 90 degrees. Stage 4: Tighten fasteners 17-22 to .................................................................................................................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). Main bearings Clearance to crankshaft-desired .......................................................................................................................... 0.025-0.045 mm (0.0009-0.0017 inch) Clearance to crankshaft-allowable ...................................................................................................................... 0.025-0.050 mm (0.0009-0.0019 inch) Bearing wall thickness-grade 1 .................................................................................................................................................. 2.497 mm (0.0983 inch) Bearing wall thickness-grade 2 .................................................................................................................................................. 2.501 mm (0.0985 inch) Bearing wall thickness-grade 3 ................................................................................................................................................... 2.505 mm (0.0986 inch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair Engine Block Heater: Service and Repair Block Heater Removal and Installation 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Raise the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the block heater power cable from the block heater. 4. CAUTION: Do not loosen the block heater retaining screw more than necessary for removal. Remove the block heater. 5. CAUTION: Make sure the power cable is routed and secured away from rotating or hot components or damage to the cable can occur. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications Crankshaft Pulley Install the bolt and the washer and tighten in four stages. Stage 1: Tighten to .............................................................................................................................. ........................................ 120 Nm (86 ft. lbs.). Stage 2: Loosen ......................................................... .............................................................................................................................. 360 degrees. Stage 3: Tighten to .............................................................................................................................. .......................................... 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). Stage 4: Tighten an additional ................................... ................................................................................................................................ 90 degrees. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2959 Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair Crankshaft Pulley Special Tool(s) Material Removal and Installation 1. Remove the accessory drive belt. 2. Remove the splash shield. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2960 3. Install the special tool. 4. Remove the crankshaft pulley bolt and washer. 5. Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft pulley. Installation 1. NOTE: Clean the keyway and slot using metal surface cleaner before applying silicone gasket and sealer. NOTE: Seal surfaces must be free of dirt and oil. NOTE: The crankshaft pulley must be installed within four minutes of applying the silicone gasket and sealer. Apply silicone gasket and sealant to the end of the keyway slot. 2. NOTE: Lubricate the outside diameter sealing surface of the crankshaft pulley with clean engine oil. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2961 Using the special tool, install the crankshaft pulley. 3. NOTE: Use an appropriate strap wrench to hold the crankshaft pulley. Install the bolt and the washer and tighten in four stages. Stage 1: Tighten to 120 Nm (86 ft. lbs.). - Stage 2: Loosen 360 degrees. - Stage 3: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). - Stage 4: Tighten an additional 90 degrees. 4. Install RH front inner splash shield. 5. Install the accessory drive belt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston: Specifications Piston Piston diameter Coated grade 1 .................................................................................................................................................. 88.990-89.010 mm (3.5035-3.5043 inch) Coated grade 2 .................................................................................................................................................. 88.998-89.022 mm (3.5039-3.5048 inch) Coated grade 3 .................................................................................................................................................. 89.010-89.030 mm (3.5043-3.5051 inch) Uncoated grade 1 .......................................................................................................................................... 88.970-88.980 mm (3.50275-3.50314 inch) Uncoated grade 2 .......................................................................................................................................... 88.978-88.992 mm (3.50306-3.50362 inch) Uncoated grade 3 .......................................................................................................................................... 89.010-89.030 mm (3.50432-3.50511 inch) Piston-to-bore clearance .................................................................................................................................... 0.012 to 0.022 mm (0.0005-0.0009 inch) Pin bore diameter (piston) ................................................................................................................................. 21.008-21.012 mm (0.8270-0.8272 inch) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Pin, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston Pin: Specifications Piston pin bore diameter ............................................................................................................................................ 21.017-21.031 mm (0.827-0.828 inch) Crankshaft bearing bore diameter ......................................................................................................................... 53.015-53.035 mm (2.0872-2.0879 inch) Length (center to center) ........................................................................................................................................... 138.06-138.14 mm (5.435-5.438 inch) Alignment (bore to bore max. difference) e Twist .................................................................................................................................................... ............ 0.050 mm per 25 (0.0019 per 0.984 inch) Bend ..................................................................... ........................................................................................... 0.038 mm per 25 (0.0014 per 0.984 inch) Side clearance (assembled to crank) Standard .............................................................................................................................................. .................... 0.100-0.30 mm (0.0039-0.0118 inch) Service limit ......................................................... .................................................................................................................. 0.35 mm (0.0013inch) max. e Pin bore and crank bearing bore must be parallel and in same vertical plane within the specified total difference when measured at the ends of a 203 mm bar, 101.5 mm on each side of rod centerline. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston Ring: Specifications Ring groove width Compression (top) ................................................................................................................................................. 1.230-1.245 mm (0.0484-0.0490 inch) Compression (bottom) ........................................................................................................................................... 1.530-1.545 mm (0.0602-0.0608 inch) Oil ring .................................................................................... .............................................................................. 3.030-3.055 mm (0.1192-0.1203 inch) Piston pin Length .................................................................................................................................................. ..................... 60.51-60.08 mm (2.382-2.365 inch) Diameter ............................................................... ......................................................................................................... 21.011-21.013 mm (0.0013 inch) Pin-to-piston clearance ................................................................................................................................ -0.005 to +0.001 mm (0.0001-0.00003 inch) Pin-to-rod clearance Standard .............................................................................................................................................. .................. 0.004-0.020 mm (0.0001-0.0007 inch) Service limit ......................................................... ........................................................................................................................ 0.035 mm (0.0013 inch) Piston Ring-To-Groove Clearance Compression (top) ................................................................................................................................................. 0.040-0.075 mm (0.0015-0.0029 inch) Compression (bottom) ........................................................................................................................................... 0.040-0.085 mm (0.0015-0.0033 inch) Oil ring ................................................................................................................................................. ..................................................................... Snug Fit Piston ring gap g Compression (top)-gauge diameter ....................................................................................................................... 0.100-0.250 mm (0.0039-0.0098 inch) Compression (bottom)-gauge diameter ..................................................................................................................... 0.27-0.42 mm (0.0106-0.0165 inch) Oil ring (steel rail)-gauge diameter ........................................................................................................................... 0.15-0.65 mm (0.0059-0.0255 inch) Compression (top)-service limit ............................................................................................................................................ 0.50 mm (0.0196 inch) max. Compression (bottom)-service limit ...................................................................................................................................... 0.65 mm (0.0255 inch) max. Oil ring (steel rail)-service 1imit ........................................................................................................................................... 0.90 mm (0.0354 inch) max. g Specification 82.4 mm (3.2441 inch) diameter gauge. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Fuel Pressure Gauge SPECIAL TOOL(S) 1. WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Fuel supply tubes will remain pressurized for long periods of time after engine shutdown. This pressure must be relieved before repairing of the fuel system has begun. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system. Remove the Schrader valve cap at the end of the fuel injection supply manifold and attach the Fuel Pressure Gauge. 2. NOTE: Position a suitable container for the fuel to drain into. Open the manual valve slowly to relieve the system pressure. This may drain fuel from the system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Roller Followers Special Tool(s) Material Removal and Installation 1. Remove the LH and RH valve covers. 2. Remove the LH and RH spark plugs. 3. Remove the RH front wheel. 4. Remove the splash shield. 5. Rotate the crankshaft until the camshaft lobe is pointing directly away from the follower. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2978 6. Using the special tool, remove the followers. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the camshaft followers with clean engine oil. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > LH Valve Cover: Service and Repair LH Valve Cover LH Material Removal 1. Remove the water pump belt cover. 2. Disconnect the crankcase ventilation tube from the valve cover. 3. CAUTION: When removing the coil-on-plugs, a slight twisting motion will break the seal and ease removal. Remove the three LH coil-on-plugs. 1 Disconnect the electrical connectors. 2 Remove the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 2983 3 Remove the coils. 4. Disconnect the wiring harness from the valve cover studs. 5. Remove the engine lift bracket. 6. Position the power steering hose aside. - Remove the bolt. 7. Remove the bolts, studs and the LH valve cover. - Remove and discard the gasket. Installation 1. NOTE: Clean the valve cover sealing area before installing a new gasket. Install a new gasket on the valve cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 2984 2. NOTE: Clean the head and the front cover sealing surfaces using metal surface cleaner before applying silicone gasket and sealant. NOTE: The valve cover must be installed and the bolts tightened within four minutes of applying the sealant. Apply a 5 mm dot of silicone gasket sealant to the front cover to cylinder head joints. 3. Position the valve cover and install the studs and the bolts in the sequence shown. 4. Position the power steering hose and install the bolt. 5. Position the engine lift bracket and install the bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 2985 6. Connect the wiring harness to the valve cover studs. 7. NOTE: Apply a light film of brake caliper grease and dielectric compound to the interior of the spark plug boot prior to installation. Install the three LH coil-on-plugs. 1 Position the coils. 2 Install the bolts. 3 Connect the electrical connectors. 8. Connect the crankcase ventilation tube to the valve cover. 9. Install the water pump belt cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 2986 Valve Cover: Service and Repair RH Valve Cover RH Material Removal 1. Remove the upper intake manifold. 2. CAUTION: When removing the coil-on-plugs, a slight twisting motion will break the seal and ease removal. Remove the three RH coil-on-plugs. 1 Disconnect the electrical connectors. 2 Remove the bolts. 3 Remove the coils. 3. Remove the wiring harness nuts and disconnect the oxygen sensor electrical connectors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 2987 4. Remove the radio ignition interference capacitor. 5. Separate the harness from the center locating pins and position aside. 6. Disconnect the crankcase ventilation tube from the valve cover. 7. Remove the bolts, studs and the RH valve cover. - Remove and discard the gasket. Installation 1. NOTE: Clean the valve cover sealing area before installing a new gasket. Install a new valve cover gasket. 2. NOTE: Clean the head and front cover sealing surfaces using metal surface cleaner before applying silicone gasket and sealant. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 2988 NOTE: The valve cover must be installed and the bolts tightened within four minutes of applying the sealant. Apply a 5 mm dot of silicone gasket sealant to the front cover to cylinder head joints. 3. Position the valve cover and install the bolt and the studs in the sequence shown. 4. Connect the crankcase ventilation tube to the valve cover. 5. Connect the radio ignition interference capacitor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 2989 6. Connect the 02 sensor electrical connectors and wiring harness to the RH valve cover stud. 7. NOTE: Apply a light film of brake caliper and grease compound to the interior of the spark plug boot prior to installation. Install the three RH coil-on-plugs. 1 Position the coils. 2 Install the bolts. 3 Connect the electrical connectors. 8. Install the upper intake manifold. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair Valve Spring: Service and Repair Valve Spring Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation 1. Remove the roller followers. 2. NOTE: If air pressure has forced the piston to the bottom of the cylinder, any loss of air pressure will allow the valve(s) to fall into the cylinder. A rubber band, tape or string wrapped around the end of the valve stem will prevent this from happening. Pressurize the cylinder using compressed air. 3. Using the special tool, remove the key, retainer, and valve spring. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Locations Drive Belt: Locations With A/C Water Pump Drive Belt with Tensioner Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Locations > Page 2997 Water Pump Drive Belt without Tensioner Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Locations > Page 2998 Drive Belt: Diagrams Accessory Drive Zetec without A/C 2.0L Zetec without A/C Zetec with A/C (Part 1 Of 2) Zetec with A/C (Part 2 Of 2) 2.0L Zetec with A/C Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Locations > Page 2999 With A/C 3.0L (4V) with A/C Water Pump Drive Belt with Tensioner Water Pump Drive Belt - 3.0L (4V) with Tensioner Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Locations > Page 3000 Water Pump Drive Belt without Tensioner Water Pump Drive Belt - 3.0L (4V) without Tensioner Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Drive Belt: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Inspection and Verification 1. Verify the customer's concern by operating the engine to duplicate the condition. 2. Inspect to determine if any of the following mechanical concerns apply: Visual Inspection Chart 3. NOTE: Minor cracks in the V-grooved portion of the drive belt are considered normal and acceptable. If the drive belt has chunks missing from the ribs, a new drive belt should be installed. Install a new drive belt if any of the following conditions exist: rib chunk-out, severe glazing, frayed cords or other concerns. Inspect for drive belt cracking/chunking/wear. V-Ribbed Serpentine Drive Belt With Cracks Across Ribs V-Ribbed Serpentine Drive Belt With Chunks of Rib Missing 4. If the concerns remain after inspection, determine the symptoms. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3003 Drive Belt: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Part 1 Of 2 Part 2 Of 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3004 Drive Belt: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Belt Tensioner-Dynamic Belt Tensioner - Dynamic The belt tensioner can be checked dynamically as follows: 1. With the engine running, observe the belt tensioner movement. The belt tensioner should move (respond) when the A/C clutch cycles (if equipped), or when the engine is accelerated rapidly. If the belt tensioner movement is constant without A/C clutch cycling or acceleration, a pulley or shaft is probably bent or a pulley is out of round. In rare cases, excessive drive belt rideout (uneven depth of grooves in drive belt) can cause excessive drive belt tensioner movement. This condition can be checked by installing a new drive belt, and repeating the observation. 2. With the engine off, check routing of the drive belt. 3. Inspect the belt tensioner wear indicator to confirm the drive belt is within operating range. Install a new drive belt if necessary. Belt Tensioner-Mechanical Belt Tensioner - Mechanical The only mechanical check that needs to be made is a check for tensioner stick grab or bind. 1. Remove the belt in the area of the tensioner. 2. Rotate the tensioner from its relaxed position through its full stroke and back to the relaxed position to make sure there is no stick, grab or bind and to make sure that there is tension on the belt tensioner spring. 3. If the tensioner meets the above criteria, proceed to test the tensioner dynamically. If the tensioner does not meet the above criteria, install a new tensioner. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt Drive Belt: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt Accessory Drive Belt - 3.0L (4V) Removal and Installation 1. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the accessory drive belt. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt > Page 3007 Drive Belt: Service and Repair Water Pump Belt with Tensioner Water Pump Belt with Tensioner Removal and Installation 1. Remove the water pump belt cover. 2. Rotate the drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the water pump belt. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt > Page 3008 Drive Belt: Service and Repair Water Pump Belt Without Tensioner Water Pump Belt without Tensioner Removal 1. Remove the water pump belt cover. 2. Cut and remove the water pump belt. Discard the belt. Installation 1. Install the belt on the water pump pulley and position it on the camshaft pulley. 2. CAUTION: Do not use any screwdrivers, pliers, or other metal objects that could cause damage to the belt or camshaft pulley while installing the belt. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise to seat the belt on the camshaft pulley. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt > Page 3009 3. Install the water pump belt cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner Removal and Installation 1. Remove the accessory drive belt. 2. Remove the bolt and the accessory drive belt tensioner. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner > Page 3014 Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Belt Tensioner-Water Pump Belt Tensioner - Water Pump Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: If equipped with belt tensioner. Remove the water pump belt. 2. Remove the bolt and the belt tensioner. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair Engine Mount: Service and Repair Engine Support Insulators-Front, RH Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation 1. Remove the engine ground wire. 2. Using the special tools, support the engine. 3. Remove the A/C line bracket bolt and position the A/C lines out of the way. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3018 4. Remove the engine support insulator bolt. 5. Remove the engine support tool. 1 Remove the nut. 2 Remove the bolts and insulator. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Oil pressure (Minimum at 1,500 RPM with engine warmed up after 10 minutes of idling.) ......................................................................... 76 kPa (11 psi) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: Service and Repair Oil Level Indicator and Tube Material Removal and Installation 1. Remove the oil level indicator. 2. Remove the oil level indicator tube. 1 Remove the stud bolt. 2 Remove the oil level indicator tube. 3. Install a new O-ring. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine oil. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil With Filter ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................. 5.2L (5.5 Qt) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 3030 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Oil .......................................................................................................................SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Oil XO-5W20-QSP or equivalent Ford specification ............................................. ........................................................................................................................................... WSS-M2C153-H Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Cooler: Service and Repair Oil Cooler Material Removal and Installation 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Remove the oil pan drain bolt and drain the engine oil. 3. Remove and discard the oil filter. 4. Disconnect the coolant hoses at the cooler. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3034 5. Remove and discard the oil cooler. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install a new oil cooler. - Fill the crankcase with clean engine oil. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Oil Pan: Specifications Oil pan bolts and studs ........................................................................................................................ ...................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Pan Baffle Oil Pan: Service and Repair Oil Pan Baffle Oil Pan Baffle Removal 1. Remove the oil pump screen cover and tube. 2. Remove the nuts and the oil pan baffle. Installation 1. Position the oil pan baffle and install the nuts. - Tighten the nuts in two stages. - Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs.). - Stage 2: Tighten 45 degrees. 2. Install the oil pump screen cover and tube. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Pan Baffle > Page 3040 Oil Pan: Service and Repair Oil Pan Oil Pan Material Removal 1. Remove the flexible exhaust pipe. 2. Disconnect the downstream catalyst monitor sensor. 3. Drain the oil. 4. Install the drain plug. 5. Remove and discard the oil filter. 6. Remove the 15 bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Pan Baffle > Page 3041 7. Remove the three bolts and the oil pan. Installation CAUTION: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive means to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools cause scratches and gouges which make leak paths. Use a plastic scraping tool to remove all traces of the head gasket. 1. Clean all sealing surfaces on the engine and the oil pan with metal surface cleaner. 2. Position a new gasket on the oil pan. 3. NOTE: Clean and decrease all sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner. NOTE: The oil pan must be installed and the bolts tightened with in four minutes of sealant application. Apply a 10 mm (0.40 inch) diameter dot of silicone gasket and sealer to the areas indicated. 4. Position the oil pan and gasket and loosely install the bolts in the sequence shown. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Pan Baffle > Page 3042 5. Install the oil pan-to-transaxle bolts. 6. Tighten the oil pan bolts in the sequence shown. 7. Lubricate the oil filter O-ring with clean engine oil and install the oil filter. 8. Install the exhaust flexible exhaust pipe. 9. Connect the downstream catalyst monitor. 10. Lower the vehicle. 11. Fill the crankcase with clean engine oil. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations View 151-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 3046 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 3047 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Oil Pressure Sender Removal and Installation 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the right side splash shield. 3. NOTE: The A/C compressor has been removed for clarity. Remove the oil pressure sender. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the sender. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Service and Repair Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube Material Removal 1. Remove the oil pan. 2. Remove the nut, bolts and the oil pump screen and pickup tube. 3. Remove and discard the O-ring seal. Installation 1. Install a new O-ring seal and lubricate with clean engine oil. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3051 2. Install the oil pump screen and pickup tube. 1 Position the oil pump screen and pickup tube. 2 Install the bolts. 3 Install the nut. Tighten the nut in two stages. - Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs.). - Stage 2: Tighten 45 degrees. 3. Install the oil pan. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Oil pressure (Minimum at 1,500 RPM with engine warmed up after 10 minutes of idling.) ......................................................................... 76 kPa (11 psi) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR Typical Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor The engine oil temperature (EOT) sensor (Figure 35) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system near the oil filter or screwed into the oil pan. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the following: - On Variable Cam Timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM will begin reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications Intake Manifold: Specifications Upper intake manifold bolts ................................................................................................................. ................................................. 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.) Lower intake manifold bolts ................................................................................................................. ................................................. 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Upper Upper Intake Manifold Removal 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube. 1 Remove the crankcase ventilation tube. 2 Loosen the clamps. 3 Remove the air cleaner outlet tube. 2. Disconnect the cables. 1 Disconnect the throttle cable. 2 If equipped, disconnect the speed control cable. 3 Remove the throttle cable bracket bolts. 3. Disconnect the throttle position (TP) sensor and idle air control (IAC) electrical connectors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper > Page 3064 4. Disconnect the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve vacuum hose and EGR tube nut. 5. Disconnect the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid electrical connector and vacuum hose. 6. Disconnect the three vacuum hoses on the back of the intake manifold. 1 Disconnect the chassis vacuum hose. 2 Disconnect the engine vacuum hose. 3 Disconnect the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) hose. 7. Disconnect the vapor management valve (VMV) vacuum hose. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper > Page 3065 8. Disconnect the two electrical connectors attached to the left side of the upper intake manifold. 9. Disconnect the power steering pressure (PSP) sensor electrical connector. 10. Remove the bolt and position the transmission vent hose and bracket aside. 11. Remove the nut from the wire harness. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper > Page 3066 12. Remove the eight bolts and the upper intake manifold. - Remove and discard the gaskets. - Clean all sealing surfaces. Installation 1. Install new gaskets in the upper intake manifold. 2. Position the upper intake manifold and tighten the bolts in the sequence shown. 3. Connect the PSP electrical connector. 4. Position the transmission vent tube and bracket and install the bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper > Page 3067 5. Position the wire harness and install the nut. 6. Install the two electrical connectors on the left side of the intake manifold. 7. Install the vapor management valve (VMV) vacuum hose. 8. Connect the three vacuum hoses on the back of the upper intake manifold. 1 Connect the chassis vacuum hose. 2 Connect the engine vacuum hose. 3 Connect the PCV hose. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper > Page 3068 9. Connect the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid electrical connector and the vacuum hose. 10. Install the EGR valve vacuum hose and EGR tube nut. 11. Connect the TP sensor and IAC electrical connectors. 12. Connect the throttle cables. 1 Install the throttle cable bracket bolts. 2 Connect the throttle cable. 3 If equipped, connect the speed control cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper > Page 3069 13. Install the air cleaner outlet tube. 1 Position the air cleaner outlet tube. 2 Install the hoses. 3 Install the clamps. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper > Page 3070 Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Lower Intake Manifold Lower Intake Manifold Material Removal 1. Disconnect the fuel hose spring lock coupling. 2. Remove the upper intake manifold. 3. Disconnect the fuel rail. 1 Disconnect the six fuel injector electrical connectors and wire harness locators. 2 Disconnect the fuel pressure damper vacuum hose. 3 Release the wire harness retainers from the fuel injection supply manifold. 4. Remove the bolts and the lower intake manifold. Remove and discard the gaskets. Installation 1. Clean and inspect all mating surfaces. 2. Install new gaskets in the lower intake manifold. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper > Page 3071 3. Install the lower intake manifold assembly and tighten the bolts in the sequence shown. 4. Connect the fuel rail. 1 Position the wire harness locators and connect the six fuel injector electrical connectors. 2 Connect the fuel pressure damper vacuum hose. 3 Connect the fuel injection harness to the fuel supply manifold. 5. Install the upper intake manifold. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal Special Tool(s) Material Removal 1. Remove the flexplate. 2. Using the special tools, remove the crankshaft rear oil seal and discard. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3076 1. NOTE: Clean all sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner. NOTE: Lubricate the crankshaft rear oil lips with clean engine oil. Using the special tools, install the crankshaft rear oil seal. 2. Install the flexplate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Cylinder Head Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Reman Engine Head Gasket Identification Cylinder Head Gasket: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Reman Engine Head Gasket Identification TSB 06-18-16 09/18/06 IDENTIFYING THE CORRECT REPLACEMENT HEAD GASKET FOR CERTAIN REMANUFACTURED ENGINES - SERVICE TIP FORD: 1999-2006 Mustang, Mustang, Mustang, Mustang, Mustang, Mustang 2000-2005 Thunderbird 2001-2005 Taurus 2001-2006 Crown Victoria, Crown Victoria 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 1997-2005 Expedition 1997-2006 E-Series, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2004 F-53 Motorhome Chassis 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Escape, Escape, Explorer Sport Trac, Ranger 2004-2005 Freestar, Freestar 2006 F-53 Motorhome Chassis LINCOLN: 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2001-2002 Continental 2001-200 Town Car 1998-2004 Navigator, Navigator 2003-2004 Aviator 2006 Mark LT MERCURY: 2001 Cougar 2001-2005 Sable 2001-2006 Grand Marquis 2003-2006 Marauder 2005 Montego 1997-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner ISSUE On various vehicles when servicing the head gasket on certain Ford remanufactured engines, it is critical to determine the type of remanufactured engine that is being serviced, in order to identify the correct replacement gasket. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to help identify if the vehicle is equipped with a SID (for originally equipment level thickness head gasket) or OVR (for oversized service level thicker head gasket) remanufactured engine when replacing a head gasket. SERVICE PROCEDURE Use this TSB to help identify if the vehicle is equipped with a STD or OVR remanufactured engine when replacing a head gasket. This will ensure that you obtain the proper head gasket (thicker for OVR-oversized) for the engine you are repairing, as the engine may have milled engine block deck, milled cylinder head deck, or an over sized bore in the cylinders. This information will be needed when ordering parts. The parts catalogs already reflect the correct service numbers, as long as this additional information is available. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Cylinder Head Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Reman Engine Head Gasket Identification > Page 3081 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Cylinder Head Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Reman Engine Head Gasket Identification > Page 3082 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Cylinder Head Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Reman Engine Head Gasket Identification > Page 3083 For certain remanufactured engines, the long block assembly will be uniquely identified with a build date, reman code, service part number, and serial number. This metal tag will be marked with STD, or with OVR (Figures 1-6). WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair Crankshaft Front Oil Seal Special Tool(s) Material Removal 1. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 2. Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft front oil seal and discard. Installation 1. NOTE: Clean all sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner. Apply clean engine oil to the seal before installing the seal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3087 2. Using the special tool, install the crankshaft front oil seal. 3. Install the crankshaft pulley. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair Valve Seals Special Tool(s) Material Removal 1. Remove the valve spring. 2. NOTE: Camshaft removed for clarity. Remove the valve seal. Installation NOTE: Lubricate the valve guide with clean engine oil. 1. Using the special tool, install the valve seal. 2. Install the valve spring. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations View 151-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 3095 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 3096 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Oil Pressure Sender Removal and Installation 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the right side splash shield. 3. NOTE: The A/C compressor has been removed for clarity. Remove the oil pressure sender. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the sender. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR Typical Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor The engine oil temperature (EOT) sensor (Figure 35) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system near the oil filter or screwed into the oil pan. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the following: - On Variable Cam Timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM will begin reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications Timing Chain Tensioner: Specifications Timing chain tensioner bolts ................................................................................................................ ..................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications Timing Cover: Specifications Timing Cover bolts ............................................................................................................................... ..................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft.lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3107 Timing Cover: Service and Repair Engine Front Cover Special Tool(s) Material Removal 1. Remove the RH and LH valve covers. 2. Remove the oil pan. 3. Remove the generator. 4. Remove the bolt and the camshaft position (CMP) sensor. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Remove the power steering pump. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3108 7. Install front engine support insulator. 8. Remove the special tool. 9. Raise and support the vehicle. 10. Remove the bolt and remove the belt tensioner. 11. Remove the crankshaft front seal. 12. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor. - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Remove the bolt and the sensor. 13. NOTE: Remove the engine front cover with the vehicle raised in the air. Remove the bolts, studs and the engine front cover. Remove and discard the front cover gaskets. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3109 Installation CAUTION: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive means to clean the sealing surface. These tools cause scratches and gouges, which make leak paths. Use a plastic scraping tool to remove all traces of sealant. 1. Clean all sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner. 2. Install three new gaskets in the front cover. 3. NOTE: The engine front cover must be installed and the bolts tightened within four minutes of applying the sealant. Apply a 6 mm (0.24 inch) diameter dot of silicone gasket and sealer to the cylinder block, lower cylinder block and cylinder head mating surfaces. 4. NOTE: Fasteners 1, 3, 4, 8, 10, 11, 14, 15 and 16 are studs. Position the cover and install the studs and bolts in the sequence shown. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3110 5. Install the (CKP) sensor and connect the electrical connector. 6. Install the crankshaft front seal. 7. Install the tensioner and bolt. 8. Install the CMP and the bolt. - Connect the electrical connector. 9. Install the generator. 10. Install the oil pan. 11. Lower the vehicle. 12. Install the special tool. 13. Remove the front engine support insulator. 1 Remove the nut. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3111 2 Remove the bolts and the insulator. 14. Install the power steering pump. 15. Install the RH and LH valve cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation VARIABLE CAM TIMING SYSTEM Overview Variable Cam Timing (VCT) enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft (phase-shafting) as a function of engine operating conditions. There are four types of VCT systems. - Exhaust Phase Shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded. - Intake Phase Shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced. - Dual Equal Phase Shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and equally advanced or retarded. - Dual Independent Phase Shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are shifted independently. All systems have four operational modes; idle, part throttle, wide open throttle and default mode. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the phase angle are controlled by air flow, engine oil temperature and engine coolant temperature. At part and wide open throttle the PCM controls cam timing based on engine RPM, load and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced emissions and enhanced engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the added benefit of improve torque. In addition, on some applications a VCT system can eliminated the need for an external Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of the EGR system is accomplished by controlling the overlap in valve opening between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve closing. Currently for the 2004 model year, Ford Motor Company uses the PS and DEPS systems. The IPS system is on Lincoln LS, Thunderbird and Focus SVT and the DEPS system is on the F150 5.4L 3V. Variable Cam Timing Variable Cam Timing System The VCT (variable cam timing) system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a CMP (camshaft position sensor) and trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel has a number of equally spaced teeth equal to the number (n) of cylinders on a bank plus one extra tooth (n+1). Four cylinder and V8 engines use a CMP 4+1 tooth trigger wheel. V6 engines use a CMP 3+1 tooth trigger wheel. The extra tooth placed between the equally spaced teeth represents the CMP signal for that bank. A CKP (crankshaft position sensor) provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning information in 10 degree increments (Figure 115). 1. The PCM receives input signals from the IAT (intake air temperature), ECT (engine coolant temperature), EOT (engine oil temperature), CMP, TP (throttle position), MAF (mass air flow) and CKP to determine the operating conditions of the engine. At idle (low engine speeds and closed throttle) the PCM controls camshaft position based on air and coolant temperatures. During part and wide open throttle, camshaft position is determined by engine RPM, load and throttle position. The VCT system will not operate until the engine is at normal operating temperature. 2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the proper conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly. As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3116 cycle. The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It will continually update the VCT solenoid duty cycle until desired positioning is achieved. A difference between the desired and actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM's VCT control loop. The PCM will disable the VCT and place the camshaft in a default position if a fault is detected. A related DTC will also be set when this fault is detected. 5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly which advances or retards the cam timing. One half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the timing chain. Oil chambers between the two halves couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the camshaft to rotate in either a advance or retard position depending on the oil flow. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pressure Test Port: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System PRESSURE TEST POINT There is a pressure test point with a schrader fitting in the fuel rail that relieves fuel pressure and measures the fuel injector supply pressure for service and diagnostic procedures. Before servicing or testing the fuel system, read any CAUTION, WARNING, and HANDLING information. ON VEHICLES NOT EQUIPPED WITH A SCHRADER VALVE, USE ROTUNDA FUEL PRESSURE TEST KIT #134-R0087 OR EQUIVALENT. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System > Page 3124 Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System SCHRADER/SERVICE VALVE schrader/service valve (if equipped) provides a service port to the low pressure fuel system. This valve is needed to relieve the pressure in the system before and during service. This valve could also be used to monitor the pressure near the injectors during diagnostic procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3125 Fuel Pressure Test Port: Service and Repair FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE REMOVAL WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel system pressure must be relieved. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Remove the pressure relief valve. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................ .......................................................... 725 - 775 RPM Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE REMOVAL 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Remove the battery tray. 3. Remove the bolt and the intake pipe. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Make sure the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel correctly. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Fuel Pressure Gauge SPECIAL TOOL(S) 1. WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Fuel supply tubes will remain pressurized for long periods of time after engine shutdown. This pressure must be relieved before repairing of the fuel system has begun. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system. Remove the Schrader valve cap at the end of the fuel injection supply manifold and attach the Fuel Pressure Gauge. 2. NOTE: Position a suitable container for the fuel to drain into. Open the manual valve slowly to relieve the system pressure. This may drain fuel from the system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order ......................................................................................................................................... ................................................................ 1-4-2-5-3-6 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3140 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap Spark Plug: Specifications Gap Spark Plug Gap ................................................................................................................................... .................................... 0.52 - 0.56 in. (1.3 - 1.4 mm) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap > Page 3149 Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Specifications Spark Plug Torque ............................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 11 ft. lb. (15 Nm) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3150 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark Plug Type .................................................................................................................................. ................................................................ AWSF-32F Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3151 Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG REMOVAL 1. Remove the ignition coil-on-plugs. 2. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Remove the LH and RH spark plugs. 3. Inspect the spark plugs. INSTALLATION 1. To install, the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications Water Pump: Specifications Water pump bolts ................................................................................................................................ ..................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3155 Water Pump: Service and Repair Water Pump Removal and Installation 1. Drain the engine cooling system. 3. Remove the coolant pump belt tensioner, if equipped. 4. Disconnect the three hoses. 5. Remove the bolts and the coolant pump assembly. 6. Separate the coolant pump from the coolant pump housing. 7. NOTE: Clean and inspect the sealing surfaces. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Engine Coolant Capacity ..................................................................................................................... .......................................................... 10L (10.5 qts.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 3161 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant VC-7-A (in Oregon VC-7-B) or equivalent (yellow-color) Ford Specification................................................................................................................................. ......................................................WSS-M97B51-A1 Note: The addition of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets, VC-6, darkens Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant from yellow to golden tan. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair Bypass Tube Removal and Installation 1. Drain the engine Cooling System. 3. Disconnect the five hoses from the thermostat housing and remove the thermostat housing. 4. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor from the bypass tube. 5. Remove the bolt, stud, and the bypass tube. 6. NOTE: Clean and inspect the sealing surfaces. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair Coolant Reservoir: Service and Repair Degas Bottle Removal and Installation 1. Drain the engine cooling system. 2. Remove the degas bottle. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Locations View 151-12 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3172 View 151-15 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3175 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Description and Operation FAN CONTROL Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis, Town Car: FCV Duty Cycle Output From PCM (Negative Duty Cycle) LS6/LS8, Thunderbird: FCV Duty Cycle Output From PCM The PCM monitors certain parameters (such as engine coolant temperature, vehicle speed, A/C on/off status, A/C pressure, etc) to determine engine cooling fan needs. For Variable Speed Electric Fan(s): The PCM controls the fan speed and operation using a duty cycle output on the Fan Control Variable (FCV) circuit. The fan controller (located at or integral to the engine cooling fan assembly) receives the FCV command and operates the cooling fan at the speed requested (by varying the power applied to the fan motor). For Relay Controlled Fans: The PCM controls the fan operation through the Fan Control (FC) (single speed fan applications), Low Fan Control (LFC), Medium Fan Control (MFC) and/or High Fan Control (HFC) outputs. 2.0L Focus (with A/C) And Taurus/Sable: PCM FC Output State For Cooling Fan Speeds Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3176 2.0L Escape: PCM FC Output State For Cooling Fan Speeds Chart Freestar, Monterey: PCM FC Output State For Cooling Fan Speeds Chart For three speed fans, although the PCM output circuits are called low, medium and high fan control (FC), cooling fan speed is controlled by a combination of these outputs. Refer to the table. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 3182 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 3183 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 3184 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 3187 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 3188 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection High Speed Fan Control Relay 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 3189 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 3190 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Low Speed Fan Control Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 3191 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 3192 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Medium Speed Fan Control Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 3193 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Fan Clutch > Component Information > Tools and Equipment Fan Clutch: Tools and Equipment Fan Clutch Holding Tool AST tool# 8005 Allows the technician to hold the water pump pulleuy in place while loosening the radiator fan. 2009 Suggested user price: $41.20 Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1 800 525 2943 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3201 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3202 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Typical Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor (Figure 33) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine coolant passage. The ECT sensor is similar in construction to the IAT sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3203 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Partially drain the cooling system. 2. Remove the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Unclip and remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3207 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE SENSOR Typical Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor (Figure 32) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and increases as temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy details. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage Heater Core: Customer Interest A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage TSB 06-21-19 10/30/06 HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY) FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250 Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure. ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have occurred. ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant: a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely due to due to high flow rate - replace the Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 3216 heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference Workshop Manual, Section 412. b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis. Testing For Electrolysis Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system. Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible. 1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable. a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle. b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant. NOTE POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING. c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect battery cables and proceed to Step 2. d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly. e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. f. Reconnect battery cables. g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant. 2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions. a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine. b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK. d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections. e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper wire to ground. f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test. g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped. 3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds. a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. b. Crank engine but do not start. c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter. e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm. f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell phone, etc. g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 3217 h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair ground to the accessory just identified. j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts. l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4. m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower motor and any fan motors. n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it up then retest. o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck. NOTE If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor voltage when they are on and when off. CAUTION DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE GROUND PATH. 4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03. NOTE IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18476 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage Heater Core: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage TSB 06-21-19 10/30/06 HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY) FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250 Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure. ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have occurred. ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant: a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely due to due to high flow rate - replace the Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 3223 heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference Workshop Manual, Section 412. b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis. Testing For Electrolysis Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system. Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible. 1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable. a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle. b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant. NOTE POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING. c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect battery cables and proceed to Step 2. d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly. e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. f. Reconnect battery cables. g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant. 2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions. a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine. b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK. d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections. e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper wire to ground. f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test. g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped. 3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds. a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. b. Crank engine but do not start. c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter. e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm. f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell phone, etc. g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 3224 h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair ground to the accessory just identified. j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts. l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4. m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower motor and any fan motors. n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it up then retest. o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck. NOTE If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor voltage when they are on and when off. CAUTION DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE GROUND PATH. 4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03. NOTE IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18476 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3225 Heater Core: Description and Operation HEATER CORE Heater Core The heater core consists of fins and tubes arranged to extract heat from the engine coolant and transfer the heat to air passing through the heater core housing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3226 Heater Core: Testing and Inspection HEATER CORE WARNING: Carbon monoxide gas is colorless, odorless and dangerous. If it is necessary to operate the engine with the vehicle in a closed area such as a garage, always use an exhaust collector to vent the exhaust gases outside the closed area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. NOTE: Testing of returned heater cores reveals that a large percentage of heater cores are good and did not require installation of a new heater core. If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be tested by following the Plugged Heater Core Component Test before the Heater Core Pressure Test. Carry out a system inspection by checking the heater system thoroughly as follows: Inspect for evidence of coolant leakage at the heater water hose to heater core attachments. A coolant leak in the heater water hose could follow the heater core tube to the heater core and appear as a leak in the heater core. CAUTION: Spring-type clamps are installed as original equipment. Installation and overtightening of non-specification clamps can cause leakage at the heater water hose connection and damage the heater core. 2. Check the integrity of the heater water hose clamps. Heater Core - Plugged WARNING: The heater core inlet hose will become too hot to handle if the system is working correctly. 1. Check to see that the engine coolant is at the correct level. 2. Start the engine and turn on the heater. 3. When the engine coolant reaches operating temperature, feel the heater core outlet hose to see if it is hot. If it is not hot: - the heater core may have an air pocket. - the heater core may be plugged, or - the thermostat is not working correctly. Heater Core - Pressure Test Use the radiator/heater core pressure tester to carry out the pressure test. 1. NOTE: Due to space limitations, a bench test may be necessary for pressure testing. Drain the coolant from the cooling system. 2. Disconnect the heater water hoses from the heater core. 3. Install a short piece of heater water hose, approximately 101 mm (4 inches) long on each heater core tube. 4. Fill the heater core and heater water hoses with water and install plug BT-7422-B and adapter BT-7422-A from the radiator/heater core pressure tester in the heater water hose ends. Secure the heater water hoses, plug and adapter with hose clamps. 5. Attach the pump and gauge assembly from the radiator/heater core pressure tester to the adapter. 6. Close the bleed valve at the base of the gauge. Pump 241 kPa (35 psi) of air pressure into the heater core. 7. Observe the pressure gauge for a minimum of three minutes. 8. If the pressure drops, check the heater water hose connections to the core tubes for leaks. If the heater water hoses do not leak, remove the heater core from the vehicle and carry out the bench test. Heater Core - Bench Test 1. Remove the heater core from the vehicle. 2. Drain all of the coolant from the heater core. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3227 3. Connect the 101 mm (4 inch) test heater water hoses with plug and adapter to the core tubes. Then connect the radiator/heater core pressure tester to the adapter. 4. Apply 241 kPa (35 psi) of air pressure to the heater core. Submerge the heater core in water. 5. If a leak is observed, install a new heater core. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3228 Heater Core: Service and Repair HEATER CORE REMOVAL 1. NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be leak tested before the heater core is removed. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core. 3. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to: Body and Frame, Interior Trim, Dashboard/Instrument Panel, Service and Repair, Removal and Installation, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation 4. Remove the heater blending door levers. 1 Remove the screw for heater blending door. 2 Remove the levers for the blending door. 5. Remove the heater core. 1 Remove the three screws. 2 Remove the cover for the heater core and pull the heater core out of the housing. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Before installing the temperature control cable, make sure the blend door, cable and temperature switch are correctly positioned. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage Heater Hose: Customer Interest A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage TSB 06-21-19 10/30/06 HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY) FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250 Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure. ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have occurred. ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant: a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely due to due to high flow rate - replace the Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 3237 heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference Workshop Manual, Section 412. b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis. Testing For Electrolysis Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system. Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible. 1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable. a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle. b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant. NOTE POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING. c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect battery cables and proceed to Step 2. d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly. e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. f. Reconnect battery cables. g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant. 2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions. a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine. b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK. d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections. e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper wire to ground. f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test. g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped. 3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds. a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. b. Crank engine but do not start. c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter. e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm. f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell phone, etc. g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 3238 h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair ground to the accessory just identified. j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts. l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4. m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower motor and any fan motors. n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it up then retest. o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck. NOTE If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor voltage when they are on and when off. CAUTION DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE GROUND PATH. 4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03. NOTE IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18476 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage Heater Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage TSB 06-21-19 10/30/06 HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY) FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250 Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure. ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have occurred. ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant: a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely due to due to high flow rate - replace the Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 3244 heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference Workshop Manual, Section 412. b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis. Testing For Electrolysis Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system. Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible. 1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable. a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle. b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant. NOTE POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING. c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect battery cables and proceed to Step 2. d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly. e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. f. Reconnect battery cables. g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant. 2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions. a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine. b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK. d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections. e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper wire to ground. f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test. g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped. 3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds. a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. b. Crank engine but do not start. c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter. e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm. f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell phone, etc. g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 3245 h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair ground to the accessory just identified. j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts. l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4. m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower motor and any fan motors. n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it up then retest. o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck. NOTE If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor voltage when they are on and when off. CAUTION DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE GROUND PATH. 4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03. NOTE IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18476 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3246 Heater Hose: Service and Repair HEATER HOSE REMOVAL 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core. 3. Disconnect the heater outlet hose from the water hose connection. 4. Disconnect the heater hose connection from the engine. 5. Remove the heater hose from the engine compartment. 6. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater hose junction. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3247 INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Service and Repair Radiator: Service and Repair Radiator Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Drain the engine cooling system. 3. Remove the lower splash shields. Vehicles with 2.0L Zetec engines 4. Disconnect the lower radiator hose and the degas return hose. Vehicles with 3.0L (4V) engines 5. Disconnect the lower radiator hose, the high pressure transmission line and the degas return hose. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3251 All vehicles 6. Remove the lower center support bolt. 7. Lower the vehicle. Vehicles with 2.0L Zetec engines 8. Disconnect the remaining coolant hose connections. Vehicles with 3.0L (4V) engines 9. Disconnect the transmission return line. 10. Disconnect the upper radiator hose and degas supply hose. All vehicles 11. Position the hood latch assemble out of the way. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3252 12. Remove the two bolts and the center support. 13. Remove the two top bolts retaining the cooling fan to the radiator. 14. Remove the upper radiator support brackets, and remove the radiator from the vehicle. 15. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 3259 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 3260 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 3261 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 3264 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 3265 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection High Speed Fan Control Relay 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 3266 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 3267 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Low Speed Fan Control Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 3268 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 3269 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Medium Speed Fan Control Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 3270 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3276 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3277 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Typical Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor (Figure 33) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine coolant passage. The ECT sensor is similar in construction to the IAT sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3278 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Partially drain the cooling system. 2. Remove the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Unclip and remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3282 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE SENSOR Typical Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor (Figure 32) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and increases as temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy details. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications Thermostat: Specifications Starts to open ...................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 90-93°C (194-200°F) Fully open ........................................................ ............................................................................................................................................... 106°C (223°F) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3286 Thermostat: Service and Repair Thermostat Removal and Installation 1. Partially drain the engine cooling system. 2. NOTE: The appearance cover is shown removed for clarity. Separate the thermostat housing. 3. Remove the thermostat and the O-ring seal from the thermostat housing. 4. NOTE: Clean and inspect the sealing surfaces. To install reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications Water Pump: Specifications Water pump bolts ................................................................................................................................ ..................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3290 Water Pump: Service and Repair Water Pump Removal and Installation 1. Drain the engine cooling system. 3. Remove the coolant pump belt tensioner, if equipped. 4. Disconnect the three hoses. 5. Remove the bolts and the coolant pump assembly. 6. Separate the coolant pump from the coolant pump housing. 7. NOTE: Clean and inspect the sealing surfaces. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation CATALYST AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS Overview V-Engines In-Line Engines The Catalytic Converter and Exhaust Systems work together to control the release of harmful engine exhaust emissions into the atmosphere. The engine exhaust gas consists mainly of nitrogen (N), carbon dioxide (CO2) and water vapor (H2O). However, it also contains carbon monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx), hydrogen (H), and various unburned hydrocarbons (HCs). CO, NOx, and HCs are major air pollutants, and their emission into the atmosphere must be controlled. The exhaust system generally consists of an exhaust manifold, front exhaust pipe, front heated oxygen sensor (HO2S), rear exhaust pipe, catalyst HO2S, a muffler and an exhaust tailpipe. The catalytic converter is typically installed between the front and rear exhaust pipes. On some vehicle applications, more than one catalyst will be used between the front and rear exhaust pipes. Catalytic converter efficiency is monitored by the On Board Diagnostic (OBD) system strategy in the PCM. Refer to the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor-Federal Test Procedure at the beginning of Description and Operation for specific OBD catalyst monitor information. The number of HO2S(s) used in the exhaust stream and the location of these sensors depend on the vehicle emission certification level (i.e. LEV, ULEV, PZEV). Refer to (Figure 121) and (Figure 122) for typical HO2S stream locations and naming convention. On most vehicles only two HO2S are used in an exhaust stream. The front sensors (HO2S11/HO2S21) before the catalyst will be used for primary fuel control while the ones after the catalyst (HO2S12/HO2S22) will be utilized to monitor catalyst efficiency. However, some Partial Zero Emission Vehicles (PZEV) will utilize three HO2S sensors for each engine bank. The stream 1 sensors (HO2S11/HO2S21) before the catalyst will be used for primary fuel control, the next group of sensors or stream 2 (HO2S12/HO2S22) is utilized to monitor the light-off catalyst and the last group of sensors or stream 3 (HO2S13/HO2S23) is utilized for long term fuel trim control to optimize catalyst efficiency (Fore Aft Oxygen Sensor Control). Currently Ford's PZEV vehicles use only a Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3295 4-cylinder engine, so only the Bank 1 HO2S(s) will be utilized. Catalytic Converter A catalyst is a material that remains unchanged when it initiates and increases the speed of a chemical reaction. A catalyst will also enable a chemical reaction to occur at a lower temperature. The concentration of exhaust gas products released to the atmosphere must be controlled. The catalytic converter assists in this task. It contains a catalyst in the form of a specially treated ceramic honeycomb structure saturated with catalytically active precious metals. As the exhaust gases come in contact with the catalyst, they are changed into mostly harmless products. The catalyst initiates and speeds up heat producing chemical reactions of the exhaust gas components so they are used up as much as possible. Light Off Catalyst As the catalyst heats up, converter efficiency rises rapidly. The point at which conversion efficiency exceeds 50% is called catalyst light off. For most catalysts this point occurs at 475 to 575°F (246 to 301°C). A fast light catalyst is a three way catalyst (TWC) that is located as close to the exhaust manifold as possible. Because the light off catalyst is located close too the exhaust manifold it will light off faster and reduce emissions quicker than the catalyst located under the body. Once the catalyst lights off, the catalyst will quickly reach the maximum conversion efficiency for that catalyst. Three-Way Catalyst (TWC) Conversion Efficiency TWC Conversion Efficiency Chart A TWC requires a stoichiometric fuel ratio, 14.7 pounds of air to 1 pound of fuel (14.7:1), for high conversion efficiency. In order to achieve these high efficiencies, the air/fuel ratio must be tightly controlled with a narrow window of stoichiometry. Deviations outside of this window will greatly decrease the conversion efficiency (Figure 123). For example a rich mixture will decrease the HC and CO conversion efficiency while a lean mixture will decreases the NOx conversion efficiency. Exhaust System Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3296 Typical Bank 1 Catalyst Two HO2S Configuration Typical Bank 1 Catalyst Three HO2S Configuration The purpose of the exhaust system is to convey engine emissions from the exhaust manifold to the atmosphere. Engine exhaust emissions are directed from the engine exhaust manifold to the catalytic converter through the front exhaust pipe. An HO2S is mounted on the front exhaust pipe before the catalyst. The catalytic converter reduces the concentration of carbon monoxide (CO), unburned hydrocarbons (HCs) and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the exhaust emissions to an acceptable level. The reduced exhaust emissions are directed from the catalytic converter through another HO2S mounted in the rear exhaust pipe (Figure 124) and then on into the muffler. Lastly, the exhaust emissions are directed to the atmosphere through an exhaust tailpipe. Note on some Partial Zero Emission Vehicles (PZEV), there will be a total of 3 HO2S in the exhaust stream. One near the exhaust manifold (stream 1), one in the middle of the light-off catalyst (stream 2) and the third (stream 3) is mounted after the light-off catalyst (Figure 125). Underbody Catalyst The underbody catalyst is located after the light off catalyst. The underbody catalyst may be in-line with the light off catalyst, or the underbody catalyst may be common to two light off catalysts, forming a "Y" pipe configuration. For an exact configuration of the catalyst and exhaust system for a specific vehicle, refer to the Exhaust System for that vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3297 Three-Way Catalytic Converter The three-way catalytic (TWC) converter contains either platinum (Pt) and rhodium (Rh) or palladium (Pd) and rhodium (Rh). The TWC converter catalyzes the oxidation reactions of unburned HCs and CO and the reduction reaction of NOx. The three-way conversion can be best accomplished by always operating the engine air fuel/ratio at or close to stoichiometry. Exhaust Manifold/Runners The exhaust manifold runners collect exhaust gases from engine cylinders. The number of exhaust manifolds and exhaust manifold runners depends on the engine configuration and number of cylinders. Exhaust Pipes Exhaust pipes are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase the life of the product. The pipes serve as guides for the flow of exhaust gases from the engine exhaust manifold through the catalytic converter and the muffler. Heated Oxygen Sensors (HO2S) The HO2S provide the powertrain control module (PCM) with voltage and frequency information related to the oxygen content of the exhaust gas. (Refer to the PCM Inputs for a description of how the HO2S operates.) Muffler Mufflers are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase the life of the product. The muffler reduces the level of noise produced by the engine, and it also reduces the noise produced by exhaust gases as they travel from the catalytic converter to the atmosphere. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3298 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - 3.0L (4V) Removal and Installation 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove and discard the nuts. ^ Discard the gasket. 3. Remove the U-bolt, disconnect the catalytic converter from the hanger. 4. Remove and discard the nuts between main silencer and after silencer pipe. 5. Remove converter and main silencer together. 6. Remove converter from main silencer on the floor. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Install a new gasket. ^ Install new nuts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Specifications Exhaust Manifold: Specifications Right Hand Sequence Left Hand Sequence Exhaust manifold bolts ........................................................................................................................ ...................................................... 20 Nm (15 ft.lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3302 Exhaust Manifold: Description and Operation EXHAUST MANIFOLD/RUNNERS The exhaust manifold runners collect exhaust gases from engine cylinders. The number of exhaust manifolds and exhaust manifold runners depends on the engine configuration and number of cylinders. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > LH Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair LH Exhaust Manifold LH Removal 1. Remove the LH heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) and the LH catalyst monitor. 2. Remove the bolts and the splash shield. 3. Remove the nuts and position the exhaust crossover aside. 4. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise, and remove the belt. 5. Remove the A/C compressor bolts and position aside. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 3305 6. Remove the nuts and LH exhaust manifold and discard the gasket. Installation 1. Position a new gasket and tighten the exhaust manifold in the sequence shown. 2. Position the A/C compressor and install the bolts. 3. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and install the belt. 4. Position the exhaust crossover, and install the nuts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 3306 5. Install the splash shield. 6. Install the LH HO2S and the LH catalyst monitor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 3307 Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair RH Exhaust Manifold RH Removal 1. Remove the generator. 2. Remove the exhaust flexible pipe. 3. Disconnect the RH heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 4. Disconnect the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) tube nut to the exhaust manifold. 5. Remove the RH manifold. ^ Discard the gasket. Installation 1. Position a new gasket and install the exhaust manifold nuts in the sequence shown. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 3308 2. Connect the EGR tube nut to the exhaust manifold. 3. Connect the RH HO2S electrical connector. 4. Install the exhaust flexible pipe. 5. Install the generator. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Description and Operation Exhaust Pipe: Description and Operation EXHAUST PIPES Exhaust pipes are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase the life of the product. The pipes serve as guides for the flow of exhaust gases from the engine exhaust manifold through the catalytic converter and the muffler. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3312 Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Exhaust Flexible Pipe - 3.0L (4V) Removal and Installation 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the RH catalyst monitor. 3. Remove and discard the two nuts and separate the flexible Y-pipe from the manifold. 4. Remove and discard the nuts. ^ Discard the gasket. 5. Remove the nuts. ^ Discard the gasket. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3313 6. Remove the flexible pipe. ^ Disconnect from the hanger. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Install a new gasket. ^ Install new nuts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Description and Operation Muffler: Description and Operation MUFFLER Mufflers are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase the life of the product. The muffler reduces the level of noise produced by the engine, and it also reduces the noise produced by exhaust gases as they travel from the catalytic converter to the atmosphere. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3317 Muffler: Service and Repair Muffler - 3.0L (4V) Removal and Installation 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the U-bolt. 3. Remove the nuts and the muffler. ^ Discard the gasket. ^ Discard the nuts. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Install a new gasket. ^ Install new nuts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Resonator > Component Information > Service and Repair Exhaust Resonator: Service and Repair Resonator 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove and discard the nuts. ^ Discard the gasket. 3. Disconnect the resonator from the hanger and remove the resonator. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Install a new gasket. ^ Install new nuts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-18 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Find Wiring Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams ^ System Diagrams Component Circuits that work together as a system ^ Grounds Diagrams Circuits grounding the system diagrams Power Distribution Diagrams The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any "dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any "blown" fuses. System Diagrams These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's indirect relationship with components in other systems. Grounds Diagrams The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different systems. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3329 Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#". These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc). All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions. Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of diagrams. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. Introduction To Ford Diagrams Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3330 System Overview Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information, connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent diagrams in the set. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3331 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram where the splice appears in full. Component Referencing (4) Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component (i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations. Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3332 Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3333 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. "Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle. NUMBER ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................... LOCATION 100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment, Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200 ................................................................................................................................................ Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300 .............................................................................................................................................. From instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ................................................................... ............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper; Truck bed 500 ...................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Driver door 600 .................................................. ...................................................................................................................................................... Passenger door, front 700 ................................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 ............................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ...... Passenger door, right rear Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3334 900 ....................................................................................................................................................... ........................ Above door trim panel and headliner Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification Symbols Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3335 Symbols Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3336 Symbols Part 3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3337 Symbols Part 4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3338 Symbols Part 5 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3339 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 Locked terminal 2 Male half 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3340 Defective insulation stripping 1 Proper crimp 2 Insulation not removed 3 Wire strands missing 4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 Seal 2 Displaced tab Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3341 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Male half 7 Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 Enlarged 2 Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3342 Electrical short inside the harness 1 Solder coated wire to ground 2 Harness protective tape 3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3343 Splice tape removed 1 Intermittent short Splice covered 1 Wire strand 2 Splice tape 3 Harness tape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3344 Broken wire strands in harness 1 Wiring harness tape 2 Wiring strand 3 Broken strands intermittent signal 4 Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3345 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3346 6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3347 8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3348 Body Control Module: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3349 Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 59-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3350 59-2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3351 59-3 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3352 Body Control Module: Service and Repair GENERIC ELECTRONIC MODULE (GEM) REMOVAL 1. NOTE: Prior to removal of the GEM, it is necessary to upload module configuration information to a diagnostic tool. This information needs to be downloaded into the new module once installed. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the pin-type retainer and the lower shield. 3. Position the RH and LH carpet aside from the center tunnel. 4. Disconnect the GEM electrical connectors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3353 5. Remove the GEM 1 Pull back the insulation and remove the nuts. 2 Remove the GEM. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Configure the GEM. Refer to Information Bus (Module Configuration). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation TORQUE BASED ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) Overview The Generation II (Gen II) Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) is a hardware and software strategy that delivers a transmission output shaft torque (via throttle angle) based on driver demand (pedal position). It utilizes an electronic throttle body, the PCM and a accelerator pedal assembly to control throttle opening and engine torque. The ETC system basically replaces the standard cable operated accelerator pedal, idle air control (IAC) motor, 3-wire throttle position sensor (TPS) and mechanical throttle body Background "Why Torque Based ETC" Torque based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver. It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as: VCT (deliver same torque during transitions) - Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV) Torque based ETC also results is a less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with smoother traction control. Other generic benefits of ETC are: Eliminate cruise control actuators - Eliminate Idle Air Control (IAC) Bypass actuator - Better airflow range - Packaging (no cable) - More responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality It should be noted that the ETC system includes a wrench light on the instrument cluster that illuminates when a fault is detected. Faults are also accompanied by DTCS and the "Check Engine Soon" light. Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) The Gen II electronic throttle body (Figure 133) has the following characteristics 1. The DC motor is driven by the PCM (requires two wires). The gear ratio from the motor to the throttle plate shaft is 17:1. 2. There are two designs; parallel and in-series. The parallel design has the motor under the bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing (in general this is more difficult to package). The in-series design has a separate motor housing that protrudes out and offers more packaging flexibility. 3. Two springs are used: one is used to close the throttle (main spring) and the other is in a plunger assembly that results in a default angle with no power applied. This is for limp home reasons (force of plunger spring is 2 times stronger than the main spring). Default angle is usually set to result in a top vehicle speed of 30 MPH (48 Km). Typically this throttle angle is 7 to 8 degrees from the hard-stop angle. 4. The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to avoid the throttle from binding in the bore (approximately 0.75 degree). This hard stop setting is non-adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle. 5. Unlike cable type throttle bodies, the intent for the ETB is not to have a hole in the throttle plate or to use plate sealant. The hole is not required in the ETB because the required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate angle controls idle and idle quality and eliminates the need for IAC bypass actuator. 6. The system has two throttle position sensors. Redundant throttle position signals are required for monitor reasons. TP1 has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and TP2 has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation the negative sloped TP sensor (TP1) is used by the control strategy as the indication of throttle position. The TP sensor assembly requires four wires. 5 V Reference Voltage - Signal Return (ground) - TP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0) - TP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5) Accelerator Pedal Position Sensors (APPS) The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand. 1. There are three pedal position sensors required for system monitoring. APP1 has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and APP2 & APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. 2. There are two VREF wires, two signal return wires and three signal wires (total of seven wires and pins) between the PCM and APPS assembly. - 2-5 V Reference Voltage - 2- Signal Return (ground) - APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0) - APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5) - APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5) 3. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3357 which is the input to the torque based strategy. Electronic Throttle Body And Accelerator Pedal Assembly 4. The three pedal position signals ensure a correct input to the PCM, if any one signal has a fault. The PCM knows if a signal is wrong by calculating where it should be, inferred by the other signals. A value will be substituted for a faulty signal if two out of the three signals are bad. Electronic Throttle Control System Strategy GEN II ETC System As stated earlier the torque based ETC strategy was developed mainly to improve fuel economy and to accommodate Variable Cam Timing. This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the drivers pedal position. By uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from pedal position (driver demand). This allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and transmission shift schedules while delivering the requested wheel torque. ETC is used on the 2004 MY Lincoln LS and Ford Thunderbird, Explorer/Mountaineer, and the new light-duty F-series. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3358 The ETC monitor system is distributed across two processors within the PCM: the main powertrain control processor unit (CPU) and a monitoring processor called an Enhanced-Quizzer (E-Quizzer) processor. The primary monitoring function is performed by the Independent Plausibility Check (IPC) software, which resides on the main processor. It is responsible for determining the driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the generated torque exceeds driver demand by specified amount, the IPC takes appropriate mitigating action. ETC System Failure Mode And Effects Management, Part 1 ETC System Failure Mode And Effects Management, Part 2 Since the IPC and main controller share the same processor, they are subject to a number of potential, common failure modes. Therefore, the E-Quizzer processor was added to redundantly monitor selected PCM inputs and to act as an intelligent watchdog and monitor the performance of the IPC and the main processor. If it determines that the IPC function is impaired in any way, it takes appropriate Failure Mode and Effects Management (FMEM) actions. Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3359 Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation, Part 1 Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation, Part 2 Accelerator and Throttle Position Sensor Inputs Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Check Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Check: Throttle Position Sensor Check Throttle Position Sensor Check: Throttle Plate Position Controller (TPPC) Outputs Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3360 Throttle Plate Controller Check Operation The purpose of the TPPC is to control the throttle position to the desired throttle angle. It is a separate chip embedded in the PCM. The desired angle is communicated from the main CPU via a 312.5 Hz duty cycle signal. The TPPC interprets the duty cycle signal as follows: 0% <= DC < 5% - Out of range, limp home default position. - 5% <= DC < 6% - Commanded default position, closed. - 6% <= DC < 7% - Commanded default position. Used for key-on, engine off. - 7% <= DC < 10% - Closed against hard-stop. Used to learn zero throttle angle position (hard-stop) after key-up. - 10% <= DC <= 92% - Normal operation, between 0 degrees (hard-stop) and 82%, 10% duty cycle = 0 degrees throttle angle, 92% duty cycle = 82 degrees throttle angle. - 92% < DC <= 96% - Wide Open Throttle, 82 to 86 degrees throttle angle. - 96% < DC <= 100% - Out of Range, limp home default position. The desired angle is relative to the hard-stop angle. The hard-stop angle is learned during each key-up process before the main CPU requests the throttle plate to be closed against the hard-stop. The output of the TPPC is a voltage request to the H-driver (also in PCM). The "H" driver is capable of positive or negative voltage to the Electronic Throttle Body Motor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures TSB 04-24-14 12/13/04 FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS 1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis, Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement. ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed. ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs. Verify repair after reprogramming. SERVICE PROCEDURE PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement 1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle. 2. Use WDS if available. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3365 a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply. b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level. 3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool, such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS. NOTE IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS, GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF. PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD 1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. 2. Install the new PCM. NOTE IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER. 3. Attempt to start the vehicle. 4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM. 5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639. a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1. b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc. 6. Check for DTC B2900. a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during this procedure. b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7. 7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures. REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement 1. Verify all cables are properly connected. 2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level. 3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level. 4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again. 5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open previous session, and attempt reprogramming again. 6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure. 1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits. 2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity. NOTE IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3366 INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC. 3. Connect WDS to vehicle. 4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK. 5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK. 6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK. 7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press TICK. 8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK. 9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK. 10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above". 11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK. 12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed above. Press TICK. 13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. 14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3367 View 151-11 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Engine Control Module: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3370 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3371 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3372 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE - VEHICLE SPEED OUTPUT (VSO) The PCM-VSO (Powertrain Control Module - Vehicle Speed Output) speed signal subsystem generates vehicle speed information for distribution to the vehicle's electrical/electronic modules and subsystems that require vehicle speed data. This subsystem senses the transmission output shaft speed with a sensor. The data is processed by the PCM, and distributed as a hard-wired signal or as a message on the vehicle communication network (SCP or HS-CAN). The key features of the PCM-VSO system are to: - Infer vehicle movement from the output shaft sensor signal - Convert transmission output shaft rotational information to vehicle speed information - Compensate for tire size and axle ratio with a programmed calibration variable - Utilize a transfer case sensor for four wheel drive applications - Distribute vehicle speed information as a multiplexed message and/or an analog signal The signal from a non-contact shaft sensor (Output Shaft Sensor--OSS or Transfer Case Shaft Sensor--TCSS) mounted on the transmission (automatics, manuals, or 4X4 transfer cases) is sensed directly by the PCM. The PCM converts the OSS or TCSS information to 8000 pulses per mile, based on a tire and axle ratio conversion factor. This conversion factor is programmed into the PCM at the time the vehicle is assembled and can be reprogrammed in the field for servicing changes in the tire size and axle ratio. The PCM transmits the computed vehicle speed and distance traveled information to all the vehicle speed signal users on the vehicle. VSO information can be transmitted by a hard-wired interface between the vehicle speed signal user and the PCM, or by Speed and Odometer data message via the vehicle communication network data link. The VSO hard -wired signal wave form is a DC square wave with a voltage level of 0 to VBAT. Typical output operating range is 2.22 Hz per MPH (1.3808 Hz per 1 km/h). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module (PCM) POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the powertrain control module (PCM) cover. 1 Loosen the bolt and disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the nuts and the cover. 3. Remove the PCM. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 3375 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Reset POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) RESET Description All OBD II scan tools support the powertrain control module (PCM) reset. The PCM Reset allows the scan tool to command the PCM to clear all emission-related diagnostic information. When resetting the PCM, a DTC P1000 will be stored in the PCM until all the OBD II system monitors or components have been tested to satisfy a drive cycle, without any other faults occurring. For more information about a drive cycle, refer to Drive Cycles. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Drive Cycles The following events occur when a PCM reset is performed: Clears the number of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). - Clears the DTCs. - Clears the freeze frame data. - Clears diagnostic monitoring test results. - Resets status of the OBD II system monitors. - Sets DTC P1000. Resetting Keep Alive Memory (KAM) Resetting Keep Alive Memory will return PCM memory to its default setting. Adaptive learning contents such as idle speed, refueling event, and fuel trim are included. A PCM Reset (described above) is also part of a KAM Reset. Both can be useful in post repair retest. After Keep Alive Memory has been reset, the vehicle may exhibit certain driveability concerns. It will be necessary to drive the vehicle to allow the PCM to relearn values for optimum driveability and performance. This function may not be supported by all scan tools. Refer to scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual. If an error message is received or the scan tool does not support this function, disconnecting the battery ground cable for a minimum of 5 minutes may be used as an alternative procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 3376 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory FLASH ELECTRICALLY ERASEABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY - FLASH EEPROM Description Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) is contained in an Integrated Circuit (IC) internal to the PCM. The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle and is capable of being reprogrammed or reflashed repeatedly. As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the Vehicle Identification (VID) block. The VID block must be programmed when replacing the PCM as described under Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to perform this procedure may generate fault codes: P1635, P1639, VID Block not programmed or is corrupt. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware/parameter changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to perform this procedure properly may generate fault code: P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range is one of the main causes for code: P1639. This is described under Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the VIN number, octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the presence of speed control and four wheel drive electronic shift on the fly versus manual shift on the fly. Only items applicable to vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block will be displayed on the scan tool. When changing items in the VID block, the strategy will place range limits on certain items such as tire and axle ratio. The VID block is also limited to the number of times to be reconfigured. When this limit is reached, the scan tool will display a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again to reset the VID block. Each of the procedures described below use the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS). Reprogramming can be performed by a local Ford dealer for any non Ford facility. There are other Enhanced Scan Tools that may have reprogramming capabilities available. Refer to the manufacturers users manual for details. Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM A new PCM will contain the latest strategy and calibration level for a particular vehicle. However, the VID block will be blank and will need programming. There are two procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM and the second is manual data entry into the new PCM. Automatic data transfer will be performed if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by the use of a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The stored data can now be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been replaced. Manual data entry must be performed if the old module is damaged and/or incapable of communicating. Remove and replace the old PCM. Using a compatible Scan Tool select and execute Module/Parameter reprogramming referring to the manufacturers users manual. Important, make certain that all parameters are included. Failure to properly program Tire Size in revolutions per mile, (rev/mile = 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches) Axle Ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or Manual/Electronic shift on the fly (MSOF/ESOF) may result in codes: P1635, P1639. You may be instructed to contact the "AS BUILT" data center for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center ONLY if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford L-M technician's, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web sight for "AS Built" data. Non Ford technicians, use the Fed World website at "fedworld.gov". Select Auto Service Information and search for "Calibrations" or "Vehicle Calibrations" then specify vehicle manufacturer, model name and model year as required. For Ford L-M technician's, check out the "Programmable Module Installation" link on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web sight for quick Programmable Module data information by vehicle when using WDS or NGS. Making Changes to the VID Block A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to accommodate vehicle hardware. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool. Making Changes to the PCM Calibration At certain times, the entire EEPROM will need to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to changes made to the strategy or calibration after production or the need to reset the VID block because it has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3380 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3381 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3382 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3387 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3388 Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3389 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3393 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3394 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3395 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3400 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3401 Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3402 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSORS (APPS) The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand. 1. There are three pedal position sensors required for system monitoring. APP1 has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and APP2 & APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. 2. There are two VREF wires, two signal return wires and three signal wires (total of seven wires and pins) between the PCM and APPS assembly. - 2-5 V Reference Voltage - 2- Signal Return (ground) - APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0) - APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5) - APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5) 3. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. Electronic Throttle Body And Accelerator Pedal Assembly 4. The three pedal position signals ensure a correct input to the PCM, if any one signal has a fault. The PCM knows if a signal is wrong by calculating where it should be, inferred by the other signals. A value will be substituted for a faulty signal if two out of the three signals are bad. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3411 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3412 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire Terminals Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3413 Typical "Drop-in" Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The mass air flow (MAF) sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire (Figure 42). If the hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the air mass flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology (IBT) with an integrated intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3414 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3418 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3419 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR Typical Hall-Effect Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance Sensor The camshaft position (CMP) sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston No.1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the powertrain control module (PCM) and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. The Coil On Plug (COP) ignition applications also use the CMP signal to select the proper ignition coil to fire. The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or circuit. DTC P0340 is associated with this sensor. Vehicles with two CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. DTC P0345 is associated with this sensor and it is referred to as CMP2. There are two types of CMP sensors: the three pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (Figure 28) found on F-Series 4.2L applications, and the two pin connector variable reluctance sensor found on all other vehicles (Figure 29). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3420 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The clutch pedal position (CPP) switch (Figure 30) is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a 5-volt reference (VREF) signal to the CPP switch. If the CPP switch is closed, indicating the clutch pedal is engaged, the output voltage (5 volts) from the PCM is grounded through the signal return line to the PCM, and there is 1 volt or less. One volt or less indicates there is a reduced load on the engine. If the CPP switch is open, meaning the clutch pedal is disengaged, the input on the CPP signal to the PCM will be approximately 5 volts. Then, the 5-volt signal input at the PCM will indicate a load on the engine. The PCM uses the load information in mass air flow and fuel calculations. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3424 Clutch Switch: Service and Repair CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the clutch pedal position (CPP) electrical connector. 2. Remove the CPP locknut and the switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3428 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3429 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Typical Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor (Figure 33) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine coolant passage. The ECT sensor is similar in construction to the IAT sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3430 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Partially drain the cooling system. 2. Remove the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Unclip and remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3434 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3435 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (INTEGRATED IGNITION SYSTEMS) Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block or timing cover and is adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the powertrain control module (PCM). The trigger wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the trigger wheel, the CKP indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to fixed reference (Figure 31). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3436 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the bolts and the right front lower splash shield. 3. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3440 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE SENSOR Typical Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor (Figure 32) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and increases as temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy details. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL LEVEL INPUT The fuel level input (FLI) is a hard wire signal input to the PCM from the fuel pump (FP) module. Refer to the description of the FLI in the On-Board Diagnostics II Monitors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR REMOVAL WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited, resulting in possible personal injury. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. WARNING: The evaporative emission system contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor. Although not present in large quantities, it still presents the danger of explosion or fire. Disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery to minimize the possibility of an electrical spark occurring, possibly causing a fire or explosion if fuel vapor or fuel liquid is present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Disconnect the battery. 2. Remove the rear seat assembly. 3. Remove the fuel tank sending unit access cover. 4. Disconnect the fuel tank pressure sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the fuel tank pressure sensor. - Disconnect the vapor tubes. INSTALLATION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3447 1. NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Carry out a leak test. See: Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test - Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Intake Air Temperature Sensor Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Temperature Sensor INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Typical Stane Alone/Non-integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into A Drop-in Or Flange Type MAF Sensor The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Page 3452 Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The IAT provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, spark and air flow. The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT sensor. Currently there are two design types of IAT sensors used, a stand alone\non-integrated type (Figure 39) and a integrated (Figure 40) type. Both types function the same, however the integrated type is incorporated into the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand alone sensor. Supercharged vehicles use (2) IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate as described above. However, one is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard OBD II/cold weather input, while a second sensor (IAT2) is located after the supercharger in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature information to the PCM to control border-line spark and to help determine intercooler efficiency. Currently two types of IAT2 sensors are used. A non-integrated screw in type (Figure 39) and an integrated type, which is part of the Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) sensor (Figure 48). The TMAP sensor consists of a IAT thermistor and a manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor. The thermistor portion of the TMAP is used for IAT2 function and operates in the same manner as a non-integrated IAT2. For additional information on the MAP portion of the TMAP, refer to the Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor description and operation found later. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Page 3453 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor THERMAL MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) Sensor The Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor (TMAP) (Figure 48) consists of a manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor and an integrated thermistor. The MAP portion of the sensor uses a piezo-resistive silicon sensing element to provide a voltage proportional to the absolute pressure in the intake manifold. The thermistor portion of the sensor operates in the same manner as an intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. For additional information on how the IAT sensor operates, refer to the Intake Air Temperature Sensor description and operation. For the 2.3L Ranger and 2.3L PZEV Focus, the TMAP sensor is part of the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system. The PCM uses information from the MAP portion of the TMAP sensor, throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor or cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor and crankshaft position (CKP) sensor to determine how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. The thermistor portion of the TMAP sensor is currently not being used on this application. For the 4.6L SC Mustang, the PCM uses manifold absolute pressure information from the MAP portion of the TMAP sensor along with other sensor inputs to determine the proper amount of fuel needed for combustion under varying engine load conditions. The thermistor portion of the TMAP sensor is used as a second IAT sensor. This second IAT sensor, located after the supercharger, provides manifold air temperature information to the PCM. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3457 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) The knock sensor (KS) (Figure 41) is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation THERMAL MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) Sensor The Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor (TMAP) (Figure 48) consists of a manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor and an integrated thermistor. The MAP portion of the sensor uses a piezo-resistive silicon sensing element to provide a voltage proportional to the absolute pressure in the intake manifold. The thermistor portion of the sensor operates in the same manner as an intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. For additional information on how the IAT sensor operates, refer to the Intake Air Temperature Sensor description and operation. For the 2.3L Ranger and 2.3L PZEV Focus, the TMAP sensor is part of the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system. The PCM uses information from the MAP portion of the TMAP sensor, throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor or cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor and crankshaft position (CKP) sensor to determine how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. The thermistor portion of the TMAP sensor is currently not being used on this application. For the 4.6L SC Mustang, the PCM uses manifold absolute pressure information from the MAP portion of the TMAP sensor along with other sensor inputs to determine the proper amount of fuel needed for combustion under varying engine load conditions. The thermistor portion of the TMAP sensor is used as a second IAT sensor. This second IAT sensor, located after the supercharger, provides manifold air temperature information to the PCM. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR Typical Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor The engine oil temperature (EOT) sensor (Figure 35) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system near the oil filter or screwed into the oil pan. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the following: - On Variable Cam Timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM will begin reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3468 Oxygen Sensor: Harness Locations View 151-2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3469 View 151-2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3470 View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3471 View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 3474 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 3475 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 3476 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3477 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) (Figure 38) detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts. Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to temperatures of 800°C (1400°F). At approximately 300 °C (600°F) the engine can enter closed loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater and the PCM will turn on the heater by providing the ground when the proper conditions occur. Since model year 1998 a high power HO2S heater and heater control system have been installed on the Stream 1 HO2S sensors of most vehicles. The high power heater reaches closed loop fuel control temperatures faster, which allows closed loop engine operation sooner. The use of this heater requires that the HO2S heater control be duty cycled, to prevent damage to the heater. The 6 ohm design is not interchangeable with new style 3.3 ohm heater. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S), LH Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the HO2S with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal. Using the special tool, remove the HO2S. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the HO2S to aid in installation. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 3480 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) RH HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S), RH Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the HO2S with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal. Using the special tool, remove the HO2S. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the HO2S to aid in installation. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 3481 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor LH CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR, LH Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. 3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the catalyst monitor sensor with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor to aid in installation. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 3482 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor RH CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR, RH Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the catalyst monitor sensor with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor to aid in installation. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3486 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The power steering pressure (PSP) switch (Figure 45) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Page 3489 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Sensor POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The power steering pressure (PSP) sensor (Figure 46) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3490 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the power steering pressure (PSP) switch. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 3494 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 90) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System > Page 3497 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 91) is identical in operation as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the underside of the sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3498 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar. Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR tube. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation Throttle Full Open Switch: Description and Operation WIDE OPEN THROTTLE A/C CUT-OFF (WAC) The wide open throttle A/C cutoff relay (may be referred to as the A/C clutch relay) is wired normally open (normally closed for Aviator). There is no direct electrical connection between the A/C switch or EATC Module and the A/C clutch. The PCM will receive a signal indicating that A/C is requested (for some applications, this message is sent through the BUS + and BUS - circuits). When A/C is requested, the PCM will check other A/C related inputs that are available (such as ACP (SW), ACCS). If these inputs indicate A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK (such as coolant temperature, engine rpm, throttle position), the PCM will ground the WAC output (unground for Aviator), closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/C clutch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3505 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3506 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is monitored by the OBD system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3507 Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. NOTE: Air cleaner outlet tube is removed for clarity. Remove the throttle position (TP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the screws. 3 Remove the sensor INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3511 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3512 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Special Tools And Equipment Special Tool(s) Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the battery and tray. 3. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor. 1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3513 2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Connect the electrical connector. 3. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray, check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or incorrect routing position. NOTE: When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the vehicle must relearn its adaptive shift strategy. During this relearning process shifts might be slightly firm, early or delayed. This operation is normal and will not affect the function or durability of the transaxle. Normal operation will return once these transaxle parameters are stored by the vehicle PCM. Install the battery and tray. 4. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should illuminate in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed Sensor Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed Sensor OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR The Output Shaft Speed Sensor (OSS), provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft.The (PCM) uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information generated. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 3519 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) (Figure 52) is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low velocity, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control, transmission/transaxle shift scheduling and torque converter clutch scheduling. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor In-Line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor The fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor (Figure 103) or inline fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor (Figure 104) is used to measure the fuel tank pressure during the EVAP Leak Check Monitor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 3527 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 90) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System > Page 3530 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 91) is identical in operation as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the underside of the sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3531 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar. Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR tube. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSORS (APPS) The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand. 1. There are three pedal position sensors required for system monitoring. APP1 has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and APP2 & APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. 2. There are two VREF wires, two signal return wires and three signal wires (total of seven wires and pins) between the PCM and APPS assembly. - 2-5 V Reference Voltage - 2- Signal Return (ground) - APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0) - APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5) - APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5) 3. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. Electronic Throttle Body And Accelerator Pedal Assembly 4. The three pedal position signals ensure a correct input to the PCM, if any one signal has a fault. The PCM knows if a signal is wrong by calculating where it should be, inferred by the other signals. A value will be substituted for a faulty signal if two out of the three signals are bad. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3539 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3540 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire Terminals Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3541 Typical "Drop-in" Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The mass air flow (MAF) sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire (Figure 42). If the hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the air mass flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology (IBT) with an integrated intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3542 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-27 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3546 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR Fuel Rai Pressure (FRP) Sensor The fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor (Figure 36) is a diaphragm strain gauge device in which resistance changes with pressure. The electrical resistance of a strain gauge increases as pressure increases, and decreases as pressure decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to pressure. Strain gauge type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The FRP sensor measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulse width and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder. Fuel Rai Pressure (FRP) Sensor The fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor (Figure 37) senses the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The return fuel line to the fuel tank has been deleted in this type of fuel system. The differential fuel/intake manifold pressure together with measured fuel temperature provides an indication of the fuel vapors in the fuel rail. Both differential pressure and temperature feedback signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserve fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System > Page 3549 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System INJECTION PRESSURE SENSOR Injection pressure sensor which measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulsewidth and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR Engine fuel temperature sensor which measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulsewidth and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-25 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3556 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3557 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service Precautions WARNING: If you smell natural gas at any time other than during fueling, do not reset the IFS switch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch The inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch (Figure 76) is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose of the IFS switch is to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the switch and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner Guide for the location of the IFS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System > Page 3560 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch Operation Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch The inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch (Figure 87) is used in conjunction with electric fuel close valves. The purpose of the IFS switch is to close the fuel shut-off valves if a crash occurs. It consists of a steel ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the switch and closes the electric fuel shut-off valve. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle. On some vehicles a fuel reset light illuminates. Refer to the Owner Guide for the location of the IFS. Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch Reset RESET INSTRUCTIONS 1. Turn key off. 2. Check for natural gas leaks in the engine compartment. 3. NOTE: In the closed position, the button can be depressed an additional 1.57 cm (1/16 inch) against a spring. If no natural gas leak is apparent, reset the IFS by pushing the reset button on the top of the switch (refer to Owner Guide). 4. Turn key to on or start position for a few seconds, then off again. 5. WARNING: If you smell natural gas at any time other than during fueling, do not reset the IFS switch. Again, check for leaking natural gas. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3561 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the cowl side trim panel. 1 Remove the pin-type retainers. 2 Remove the nut. 3 Remove the cowl side trim panel. 2. Remove the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch. 1 Disconnect the connector. 2 Remove the screws and the IFS switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation Throttle Full Open Switch: Description and Operation WIDE OPEN THROTTLE A/C CUT-OFF (WAC) The wide open throttle A/C cutoff relay (may be referred to as the A/C clutch relay) is wired normally open (normally closed for Aviator). There is no direct electrical connection between the A/C switch or EATC Module and the A/C clutch. The PCM will receive a signal indicating that A/C is requested (for some applications, this message is sent through the BUS + and BUS - circuits). When A/C is requested, the PCM will check other A/C related inputs that are available (such as ACP (SW), ACCS). If these inputs indicate A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK (such as coolant temperature, engine rpm, throttle position), the PCM will ground the WAC output (unground for Aviator), closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/C clutch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3568 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3569 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is monitored by the OBD system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3570 Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. NOTE: Air cleaner outlet tube is removed for clarity. Remove the throttle position (TP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the screws. 3 Remove the sensor INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3575 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3576 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR Typical Hall-Effect Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance Sensor The camshaft position (CMP) sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston No.1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the powertrain control module (PCM) and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. The Coil On Plug (COP) ignition applications also use the CMP signal to select the proper ignition coil to fire. The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or circuit. DTC P0340 is associated with this sensor. Vehicles with two CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. DTC P0345 is associated with this sensor and it is referred to as CMP2. There are two types of CMP sensors: the three pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (Figure 28) found on F-Series 4.2L applications, and the two pin connector variable reluctance sensor found on all other vehicles (Figure 29). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3577 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3581 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3582 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (INTEGRATED IGNITION SYSTEMS) Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block or timing cover and is adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the powertrain control module (PCM). The trigger wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the trigger wheel, the CKP indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to fixed reference (Figure 31). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3583 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the bolts and the right front lower splash shield. 3. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 3. Using a small tool, press the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock cylinder out. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3591 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) The knock sensor (KS) (Figure 41) is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pressure Test Port: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System PRESSURE TEST POINT There is a pressure test point with a schrader fitting in the fuel rail that relieves fuel pressure and measures the fuel injector supply pressure for service and diagnostic procedures. Before servicing or testing the fuel system, read any CAUTION, WARNING, and HANDLING information. ON VEHICLES NOT EQUIPPED WITH A SCHRADER VALVE, USE ROTUNDA FUEL PRESSURE TEST KIT #134-R0087 OR EQUIVALENT. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System > Page 3599 Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System SCHRADER/SERVICE VALVE schrader/service valve (if equipped) provides a service port to the low pressure fuel system. This valve is needed to relieve the pressure in the system before and during service. This valve could also be used to monitor the pressure near the injectors during diagnostic procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3600 Fuel Pressure Test Port: Service and Repair FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE REMOVAL WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel system pressure must be relieved. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Remove the pressure relief valve. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................ .......................................................... 725 - 775 RPM Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE REMOVAL 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Remove the battery tray. 3. Remove the bolt and the intake pipe. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Make sure the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel correctly. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Fuel Pressure Gauge SPECIAL TOOL(S) 1. WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Fuel supply tubes will remain pressurized for long periods of time after engine shutdown. This pressure must be relieved before repairing of the fuel system has begun. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system. Remove the Schrader valve cap at the end of the fuel injection supply manifold and attach the Fuel Pressure Gauge. 2. NOTE: Position a suitable container for the fuel to drain into. Open the manual valve slowly to relieve the system pressure. This may drain fuel from the system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order ......................................................................................................................................... ................................................................ 1-4-2-5-3-6 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3615 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap Spark Plug: Specifications Gap Spark Plug Gap ................................................................................................................................... .................................... 0.52 - 0.56 in. (1.3 - 1.4 mm) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap > Page 3624 Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Specifications Spark Plug Torque ............................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 11 ft. lb. (15 Nm) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3625 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark Plug Type .................................................................................................................................. ................................................................ AWSF-32F Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3626 Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG REMOVAL 1. Remove the ignition coil-on-plugs. 2. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Remove the LH and RH spark plugs. 3. Inspect the spark plugs. INSTALLATION 1. To install, the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSORS (APPS) The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand. 1. There are three pedal position sensors required for system monitoring. APP1 has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and APP2 & APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. 2. There are two VREF wires, two signal return wires and three signal wires (total of seven wires and pins) between the PCM and APPS assembly. - 2-5 V Reference Voltage - 2- Signal Return (ground) - APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0) - APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5) - APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5) 3. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. Electronic Throttle Body And Accelerator Pedal Assembly 4. The three pedal position signals ensure a correct input to the PCM, if any one signal has a fault. The PCM knows if a signal is wrong by calculating where it should be, inferred by the other signals. A value will be substituted for a faulty signal if two out of the three signals are bad. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3634 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3635 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire Terminals Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3636 Typical "Drop-in" Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The mass air flow (MAF) sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire (Figure 42). If the hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the air mass flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology (IBT) with an integrated intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3637 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Intake Air Temperature Sensor Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Temperature Sensor INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Typical Stane Alone/Non-integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into A Drop-in Or Flange Type MAF Sensor The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Page 3642 Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The IAT provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, spark and air flow. The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT sensor. Currently there are two design types of IAT sensors used, a stand alone\non-integrated type (Figure 39) and a integrated (Figure 40) type. Both types function the same, however the integrated type is incorporated into the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand alone sensor. Supercharged vehicles use (2) IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate as described above. However, one is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard OBD II/cold weather input, while a second sensor (IAT2) is located after the supercharger in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature information to the PCM to control border-line spark and to help determine intercooler efficiency. Currently two types of IAT2 sensors are used. A non-integrated screw in type (Figure 39) and an integrated type, which is part of the Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) sensor (Figure 48). The TMAP sensor consists of a IAT thermistor and a manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor. The thermistor portion of the TMAP is used for IAT2 function and operates in the same manner as a non-integrated IAT2. For additional information on the MAP portion of the TMAP, refer to the Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor description and operation found later. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Page 3643 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor THERMAL MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) Sensor The Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor (TMAP) (Figure 48) consists of a manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor and an integrated thermistor. The MAP portion of the sensor uses a piezo-resistive silicon sensing element to provide a voltage proportional to the absolute pressure in the intake manifold. The thermistor portion of the sensor operates in the same manner as an intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. For additional information on how the IAT sensor operates, refer to the Intake Air Temperature Sensor description and operation. For the 2.3L Ranger and 2.3L PZEV Focus, the TMAP sensor is part of the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system. The PCM uses information from the MAP portion of the TMAP sensor, throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor or cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor and crankshaft position (CKP) sensor to determine how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. The thermistor portion of the TMAP sensor is currently not being used on this application. For the 4.6L SC Mustang, the PCM uses manifold absolute pressure information from the MAP portion of the TMAP sensor along with other sensor inputs to determine the proper amount of fuel needed for combustion under varying engine load conditions. The thermistor portion of the TMAP sensor is used as a second IAT sensor. This second IAT sensor, located after the supercharger, provides manifold air temperature information to the PCM. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): Customer Interest Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering TSB 06-11-7 06/12/06 2001-2005 ESCAPE 3.0L UNSTABLE IDLE - 2001-2003 ESCAPE 3.0L AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SHUDDER - MEXICO ONLY FORD: 2001-2005 Escape ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine may exhibit idle speeds outside the specified range. Some 2001-2003 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and CD4E automatic transaxle may exhibit a transmission shudder. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If the concern is a 2001-2005 Escape with idle speeds outside the specified range: a. Install a new idle air control (IAC) valve with jumper harness included in the kit. The new Denso brand IAC will be installed with the electrical connector facing the opposite direction of the original (Hitachi) valve which is why the jumper harness is required. The original (Hitachi) IAC connector faces the front of the vehicle while the new Denso IAC connector faces toward the rear of the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 3652 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 3653 b. Referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. If the concern is a 2001 - 2003 Escape with transaxle shudder, drain, flush and refill the transmission fluid with MERCON(R) Multi-Purpose Automatic Transmission Fluid. Then, referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the PCM using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 3. When reprogramming the PCM use blank path programming. Select the proper file from the chart and manually enter the PCM part number or tear tag number to obtain the updated calibration file. To Perform Blank Path Programming: 1. Connect WDS/IDS to vehicle. 2. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK. 3. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK. 4. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK. 5. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press TICK. 6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Keep ignition in the "OFF" position, press TICK and you will be asked to cycle the key "ON" and "OFF" a few times. Please keep the key position in the "OFF" position through the key cycles. 7. Screen will show "The diagnostic tester is unable to communicate with this vehicle." You will be prompted to "select a vehicle from the vehicle list", press TICK. 8. A list of vehicles will be displayed, select ALL OTHERS, and press TICK. 9. Screen shows "To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of the following: Vehicle Calibration number (7 digits), Tear Tag number (4 digits), or PCM part number, press TICK. 10. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed above. Press TICK. 11. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) per Workshop Manual, Section 419-01. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 3654 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9F715 42 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering TSB 06-11-7 06/12/06 2001-2005 ESCAPE 3.0L UNSTABLE IDLE - 2001-2003 ESCAPE 3.0L AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SHUDDER - MEXICO ONLY FORD: 2001-2005 Escape ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine may exhibit idle speeds outside the specified range. Some 2001-2003 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and CD4E automatic transaxle may exhibit a transmission shudder. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If the concern is a 2001-2005 Escape with idle speeds outside the specified range: a. Install a new idle air control (IAC) valve with jumper harness included in the kit. The new Denso brand IAC will be installed with the electrical connector facing the opposite direction of the original (Hitachi) valve which is why the jumper harness is required. The original (Hitachi) IAC connector faces the front of the vehicle while the new Denso IAC connector faces toward the rear of the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 3660 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 3661 b. Referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. If the concern is a 2001 - 2003 Escape with transaxle shudder, drain, flush and refill the transmission fluid with MERCON(R) Multi-Purpose Automatic Transmission Fluid. Then, referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the PCM using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 3. When reprogramming the PCM use blank path programming. Select the proper file from the chart and manually enter the PCM part number or tear tag number to obtain the updated calibration file. To Perform Blank Path Programming: 1. Connect WDS/IDS to vehicle. 2. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK. 3. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK. 4. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK. 5. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press TICK. 6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Keep ignition in the "OFF" position, press TICK and you will be asked to cycle the key "ON" and "OFF" a few times. Please keep the key position in the "OFF" position through the key cycles. 7. Screen will show "The diagnostic tester is unable to communicate with this vehicle." You will be prompted to "select a vehicle from the vehicle list", press TICK. 8. A list of vehicles will be displayed, select ALL OTHERS, and press TICK. 9. Screen shows "To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of the following: Vehicle Calibration number (7 digits), Tear Tag number (4 digits), or PCM part number, press TICK. 10. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed above. Press TICK. 11. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) per Workshop Manual, Section 419-01. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 3662 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9F715 42 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-18 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Find Wiring Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams ^ System Diagrams Component Circuits that work together as a system ^ Grounds Diagrams Circuits grounding the system diagrams Power Distribution Diagrams The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any "dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any "blown" fuses. System Diagrams These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's indirect relationship with components in other systems. Grounds Diagrams The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different systems. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3668 Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#". These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc). All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions. Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of diagrams. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. Introduction To Ford Diagrams Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3669 System Overview Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information, connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent diagrams in the set. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3670 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram where the splice appears in full. Component Referencing (4) Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component (i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations. Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3671 Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3672 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. "Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle. NUMBER ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................... LOCATION 100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment, Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200 ................................................................................................................................................ Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300 .............................................................................................................................................. From instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ................................................................... ............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper; Truck bed 500 ...................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Driver door 600 .................................................. ...................................................................................................................................................... Passenger door, front 700 ................................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 ............................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ...... Passenger door, right rear Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3673 900 ....................................................................................................................................................... ........................ Above door trim panel and headliner Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification Symbols Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3674 Symbols Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3675 Symbols Part 3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3676 Symbols Part 4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3677 Symbols Part 5 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3678 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 Locked terminal 2 Male half 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3679 Defective insulation stripping 1 Proper crimp 2 Insulation not removed 3 Wire strands missing 4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 Seal 2 Displaced tab Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3680 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Male half 7 Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 Enlarged 2 Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3681 Electrical short inside the harness 1 Solder coated wire to ground 2 Harness protective tape 3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3682 Splice tape removed 1 Intermittent short Splice covered 1 Wire strand 2 Splice tape 3 Harness tape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3683 Broken wire strands in harness 1 Wiring harness tape 2 Wiring strand 3 Broken strands intermittent signal 4 Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3684 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3685 6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3686 8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3687 Body Control Module: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3688 Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 59-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3689 59-2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3690 59-3 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3691 Body Control Module: Service and Repair GENERIC ELECTRONIC MODULE (GEM) REMOVAL 1. NOTE: Prior to removal of the GEM, it is necessary to upload module configuration information to a diagnostic tool. This information needs to be downloaded into the new module once installed. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the pin-type retainer and the lower shield. 3. Position the RH and LH carpet aside from the center tunnel. 4. Disconnect the GEM electrical connectors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3692 5. Remove the GEM 1 Pull back the insulation and remove the nuts. 2 Remove the GEM. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Configure the GEM. Refer to Information Bus (Module Configuration). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component Information > Locations View 151-23 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component Information > Locations > Page 3696 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position Switch Brake Signal: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position Switch BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH Typical Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position (BPP) switch (Figure 27) is used by the PCM to disengage the transmission torque converter clutch and on some applications as an input to the idle speed control for idle quality and for vehicle speed control deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in the following manner: - BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake is applied. - BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM or HEM), BPP signal is than broadcasted over the data link to be received by the PCM. - BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake (ABS)- traction control / stability assist module. The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generate an output called the Driver Brake Application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Note on applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stoplamp circuit, if all stoplamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stoplamp bulbs has failed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position Switch > Page 3699 Brake Signal: Description and Operation Brake Pressure Applied/Brake Deactivator Switch BRAKE PRESSURE APPLIED/BRAKE DEACTIVATOR SWITCH The brake pressure applied (BPA) switch also sometimes called the brake deactivator switch for vehicle speed control deactivation. Is a normally closed switch, which supplies battery positive voltage (B+) to the PCM when the brake pedal is NOT applied. When the brake pedal is depressed, the normally closed switch will open and power is removed from the PCM. On some applications the normally closed BPA switch along with the normally open brake pedal position (BPP) switch are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function can be disable if a brake switch failure occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM did not change states when they were expected to a diagnostic trouble code P1572 can be set by the PCM strategy. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3703 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3704 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR Typical Hall-Effect Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance Sensor The camshaft position (CMP) sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston No.1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the powertrain control module (PCM) and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. The Coil On Plug (COP) ignition applications also use the CMP signal to select the proper ignition coil to fire. The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or circuit. DTC P0340 is associated with this sensor. Vehicles with two CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. DTC P0345 is associated with this sensor and it is referred to as CMP2. There are two types of CMP sensors: the three pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (Figure 28) found on F-Series 4.2L applications, and the two pin connector variable reluctance sensor found on all other vehicles (Figure 29). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3705 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The clutch pedal position (CPP) switch (Figure 30) is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a 5-volt reference (VREF) signal to the CPP switch. If the CPP switch is closed, indicating the clutch pedal is engaged, the output voltage (5 volts) from the PCM is grounded through the signal return line to the PCM, and there is 1 volt or less. One volt or less indicates there is a reduced load on the engine. If the CPP switch is open, meaning the clutch pedal is disengaged, the input on the CPP signal to the PCM will be approximately 5 volts. Then, the 5-volt signal input at the PCM will indicate a load on the engine. The PCM uses the load information in mass air flow and fuel calculations. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3709 Clutch Switch: Service and Repair CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the clutch pedal position (CPP) electrical connector. 2. Remove the CPP locknut and the switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3713 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3714 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Typical Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor (Figure 33) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine coolant passage. The ECT sensor is similar in construction to the IAT sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3715 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Partially drain the cooling system. 2. Remove the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Unclip and remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3719 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3720 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (INTEGRATED IGNITION SYSTEMS) Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block or timing cover and is adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the powertrain control module (PCM). The trigger wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the trigger wheel, the CKP indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to fixed reference (Figure 31). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3721 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the bolts and the right front lower splash shield. 3. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations View 151-17 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Data Link Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Find Wiring Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams ^ System Diagrams Component Circuits that work together as a system ^ Grounds Diagrams Circuits grounding the system diagrams Power Distribution Diagrams The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any "dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any "blown" fuses. System Diagrams These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's indirect relationship with components in other systems. Grounds Diagrams The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different systems. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3727 Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#". These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc). All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions. Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of diagrams. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. Introduction To Ford Diagrams Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3728 System Overview Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information, connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent diagrams in the set. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3729 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram where the splice appears in full. Component Referencing (4) Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component (i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations. Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3730 Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3731 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. "Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle. NUMBER ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................... LOCATION 100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment, Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200 ................................................................................................................................................ Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300 .............................................................................................................................................. From instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ................................................................... ............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper; Truck bed 500 ...................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Driver door 600 .................................................. ...................................................................................................................................................... Passenger door, front 700 ................................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 ............................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ...... Passenger door, right rear Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3732 900 ....................................................................................................................................................... ........................ Above door trim panel and headliner Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification Symbols Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3733 Symbols Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3734 Symbols Part 3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3735 Symbols Part 4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3736 Symbols Part 5 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3737 Data Link Connector: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 Locked terminal 2 Male half 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3738 Defective insulation stripping 1 Proper crimp 2 Insulation not removed 3 Wire strands missing 4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 Seal 2 Displaced tab Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3739 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Male half 7 Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 Enlarged 2 Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3740 Electrical short inside the harness 1 Solder coated wire to ground 2 Harness protective tape 3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3741 Splice tape removed 1 Intermittent short Splice covered 1 Wire strand 2 Splice tape 3 Harness tape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3742 Broken wire strands in harness 1 Wiring harness tape 2 Wiring strand 3 Broken strands intermittent signal 4 Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3743 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3744 6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3745 8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3746 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3747 Data Link Connector: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 14-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3748 Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation TORQUE BASED ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) Overview The Generation II (Gen II) Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) is a hardware and software strategy that delivers a transmission output shaft torque (via throttle angle) based on driver demand (pedal position). It utilizes an electronic throttle body, the PCM and a accelerator pedal assembly to control throttle opening and engine torque. The ETC system basically replaces the standard cable operated accelerator pedal, idle air control (IAC) motor, 3-wire throttle position sensor (TPS) and mechanical throttle body Background "Why Torque Based ETC" Torque based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver. It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as: VCT (deliver same torque during transitions) - Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV) Torque based ETC also results is a less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with smoother traction control. Other generic benefits of ETC are: Eliminate cruise control actuators - Eliminate Idle Air Control (IAC) Bypass actuator - Better airflow range - Packaging (no cable) - More responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality It should be noted that the ETC system includes a wrench light on the instrument cluster that illuminates when a fault is detected. Faults are also accompanied by DTCS and the "Check Engine Soon" light. Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) The Gen II electronic throttle body (Figure 133) has the following characteristics 1. The DC motor is driven by the PCM (requires two wires). The gear ratio from the motor to the throttle plate shaft is 17:1. 2. There are two designs; parallel and in-series. The parallel design has the motor under the bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing (in general this is more difficult to package). The in-series design has a separate motor housing that protrudes out and offers more packaging flexibility. 3. Two springs are used: one is used to close the throttle (main spring) and the other is in a plunger assembly that results in a default angle with no power applied. This is for limp home reasons (force of plunger spring is 2 times stronger than the main spring). Default angle is usually set to result in a top vehicle speed of 30 MPH (48 Km). Typically this throttle angle is 7 to 8 degrees from the hard-stop angle. 4. The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to avoid the throttle from binding in the bore (approximately 0.75 degree). This hard stop setting is non-adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle. 5. Unlike cable type throttle bodies, the intent for the ETB is not to have a hole in the throttle plate or to use plate sealant. The hole is not required in the ETB because the required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate angle controls idle and idle quality and eliminates the need for IAC bypass actuator. 6. The system has two throttle position sensors. Redundant throttle position signals are required for monitor reasons. TP1 has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and TP2 has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation the negative sloped TP sensor (TP1) is used by the control strategy as the indication of throttle position. The TP sensor assembly requires four wires. 5 V Reference Voltage - Signal Return (ground) - TP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0) - TP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5) Accelerator Pedal Position Sensors (APPS) The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand. 1. There are three pedal position sensors required for system monitoring. APP1 has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and APP2 & APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. 2. There are two VREF wires, two signal return wires and three signal wires (total of seven wires and pins) between the PCM and APPS assembly. - 2-5 V Reference Voltage - 2- Signal Return (ground) - APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0) - APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5) - APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5) 3. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3752 which is the input to the torque based strategy. Electronic Throttle Body And Accelerator Pedal Assembly 4. The three pedal position signals ensure a correct input to the PCM, if any one signal has a fault. The PCM knows if a signal is wrong by calculating where it should be, inferred by the other signals. A value will be substituted for a faulty signal if two out of the three signals are bad. Electronic Throttle Control System Strategy GEN II ETC System As stated earlier the torque based ETC strategy was developed mainly to improve fuel economy and to accommodate Variable Cam Timing. This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the drivers pedal position. By uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from pedal position (driver demand). This allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and transmission shift schedules while delivering the requested wheel torque. ETC is used on the 2004 MY Lincoln LS and Ford Thunderbird, Explorer/Mountaineer, and the new light-duty F-series. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3753 The ETC monitor system is distributed across two processors within the PCM: the main powertrain control processor unit (CPU) and a monitoring processor called an Enhanced-Quizzer (E-Quizzer) processor. The primary monitoring function is performed by the Independent Plausibility Check (IPC) software, which resides on the main processor. It is responsible for determining the driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the generated torque exceeds driver demand by specified amount, the IPC takes appropriate mitigating action. ETC System Failure Mode And Effects Management, Part 1 ETC System Failure Mode And Effects Management, Part 2 Since the IPC and main controller share the same processor, they are subject to a number of potential, common failure modes. Therefore, the E-Quizzer processor was added to redundantly monitor selected PCM inputs and to act as an intelligent watchdog and monitor the performance of the IPC and the main processor. If it determines that the IPC function is impaired in any way, it takes appropriate Failure Mode and Effects Management (FMEM) actions. Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3754 Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation, Part 1 Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation, Part 2 Accelerator and Throttle Position Sensor Inputs Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Check Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Check: Throttle Position Sensor Check Throttle Position Sensor Check: Throttle Plate Position Controller (TPPC) Outputs Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3755 Throttle Plate Controller Check Operation The purpose of the TPPC is to control the throttle position to the desired throttle angle. It is a separate chip embedded in the PCM. The desired angle is communicated from the main CPU via a 312.5 Hz duty cycle signal. The TPPC interprets the duty cycle signal as follows: 0% <= DC < 5% - Out of range, limp home default position. - 5% <= DC < 6% - Commanded default position, closed. - 6% <= DC < 7% - Commanded default position. Used for key-on, engine off. - 7% <= DC < 10% - Closed against hard-stop. Used to learn zero throttle angle position (hard-stop) after key-up. - 10% <= DC <= 92% - Normal operation, between 0 degrees (hard-stop) and 82%, 10% duty cycle = 0 degrees throttle angle, 92% duty cycle = 82 degrees throttle angle. - 92% < DC <= 96% - Wide Open Throttle, 82 to 86 degrees throttle angle. - 96% < DC <= 100% - Out of Range, limp home default position. The desired angle is relative to the hard-stop angle. The hard-stop angle is learned during each key-up process before the main CPU requests the throttle plate to be closed against the hard-stop. The output of the TPPC is a voltage request to the H-driver (also in PCM). The "H" driver is capable of positive or negative voltage to the Electronic Throttle Body Motor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures TSB 04-24-14 12/13/04 FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS 1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis, Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement. ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed. ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs. Verify repair after reprogramming. SERVICE PROCEDURE PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement 1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle. 2. Use WDS if available. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3760 a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply. b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level. 3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool, such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS. NOTE IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS, GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF. PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD 1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. 2. Install the new PCM. NOTE IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER. 3. Attempt to start the vehicle. 4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM. 5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639. a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1. b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc. 6. Check for DTC B2900. a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during this procedure. b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7. 7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures. REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement 1. Verify all cables are properly connected. 2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level. 3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level. 4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again. 5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open previous session, and attempt reprogramming again. 6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure. 1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits. 2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity. NOTE IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3761 INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC. 3. Connect WDS to vehicle. 4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK. 5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK. 6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK. 7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press TICK. 8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK. 9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK. 10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above". 11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK. 12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed above. Press TICK. 13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. 14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3762 View 151-11 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Engine Control Module: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3765 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3766 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3767 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE - VEHICLE SPEED OUTPUT (VSO) The PCM-VSO (Powertrain Control Module - Vehicle Speed Output) speed signal subsystem generates vehicle speed information for distribution to the vehicle's electrical/electronic modules and subsystems that require vehicle speed data. This subsystem senses the transmission output shaft speed with a sensor. The data is processed by the PCM, and distributed as a hard-wired signal or as a message on the vehicle communication network (SCP or HS-CAN). The key features of the PCM-VSO system are to: - Infer vehicle movement from the output shaft sensor signal - Convert transmission output shaft rotational information to vehicle speed information - Compensate for tire size and axle ratio with a programmed calibration variable - Utilize a transfer case sensor for four wheel drive applications - Distribute vehicle speed information as a multiplexed message and/or an analog signal The signal from a non-contact shaft sensor (Output Shaft Sensor--OSS or Transfer Case Shaft Sensor--TCSS) mounted on the transmission (automatics, manuals, or 4X4 transfer cases) is sensed directly by the PCM. The PCM converts the OSS or TCSS information to 8000 pulses per mile, based on a tire and axle ratio conversion factor. This conversion factor is programmed into the PCM at the time the vehicle is assembled and can be reprogrammed in the field for servicing changes in the tire size and axle ratio. The PCM transmits the computed vehicle speed and distance traveled information to all the vehicle speed signal users on the vehicle. VSO information can be transmitted by a hard-wired interface between the vehicle speed signal user and the PCM, or by Speed and Odometer data message via the vehicle communication network data link. The VSO hard -wired signal wave form is a DC square wave with a voltage level of 0 to VBAT. Typical output operating range is 2.22 Hz per MPH (1.3808 Hz per 1 km/h). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module (PCM) POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the powertrain control module (PCM) cover. 1 Loosen the bolt and disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the nuts and the cover. 3. Remove the PCM. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 3770 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Reset POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) RESET Description All OBD II scan tools support the powertrain control module (PCM) reset. The PCM Reset allows the scan tool to command the PCM to clear all emission-related diagnostic information. When resetting the PCM, a DTC P1000 will be stored in the PCM until all the OBD II system monitors or components have been tested to satisfy a drive cycle, without any other faults occurring. For more information about a drive cycle, refer to Drive Cycles. See: Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Drive Cycles The following events occur when a PCM reset is performed: Clears the number of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). - Clears the DTCs. - Clears the freeze frame data. - Clears diagnostic monitoring test results. - Resets status of the OBD II system monitors. - Sets DTC P1000. Resetting Keep Alive Memory (KAM) Resetting Keep Alive Memory will return PCM memory to its default setting. Adaptive learning contents such as idle speed, refueling event, and fuel trim are included. A PCM Reset (described above) is also part of a KAM Reset. Both can be useful in post repair retest. After Keep Alive Memory has been reset, the vehicle may exhibit certain driveability concerns. It will be necessary to drive the vehicle to allow the PCM to relearn values for optimum driveability and performance. This function may not be supported by all scan tools. Refer to scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual. If an error message is received or the scan tool does not support this function, disconnecting the battery ground cable for a minimum of 5 minutes may be used as an alternative procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 3771 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory FLASH ELECTRICALLY ERASEABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY - FLASH EEPROM Description Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) is contained in an Integrated Circuit (IC) internal to the PCM. The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle and is capable of being reprogrammed or reflashed repeatedly. As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the Vehicle Identification (VID) block. The VID block must be programmed when replacing the PCM as described under Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to perform this procedure may generate fault codes: P1635, P1639, VID Block not programmed or is corrupt. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware/parameter changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to perform this procedure properly may generate fault code: P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range is one of the main causes for code: P1639. This is described under Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the VIN number, octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the presence of speed control and four wheel drive electronic shift on the fly versus manual shift on the fly. Only items applicable to vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block will be displayed on the scan tool. When changing items in the VID block, the strategy will place range limits on certain items such as tire and axle ratio. The VID block is also limited to the number of times to be reconfigured. When this limit is reached, the scan tool will display a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again to reset the VID block. Each of the procedures described below use the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS). Reprogramming can be performed by a local Ford dealer for any non Ford facility. There are other Enhanced Scan Tools that may have reprogramming capabilities available. Refer to the manufacturers users manual for details. Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM A new PCM will contain the latest strategy and calibration level for a particular vehicle. However, the VID block will be blank and will need programming. There are two procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM and the second is manual data entry into the new PCM. Automatic data transfer will be performed if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by the use of a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The stored data can now be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been replaced. Manual data entry must be performed if the old module is damaged and/or incapable of communicating. Remove and replace the old PCM. Using a compatible Scan Tool select and execute Module/Parameter reprogramming referring to the manufacturers users manual. Important, make certain that all parameters are included. Failure to properly program Tire Size in revolutions per mile, (rev/mile = 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches) Axle Ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or Manual/Electronic shift on the fly (MSOF/ESOF) may result in codes: P1635, P1639. You may be instructed to contact the "AS BUILT" data center for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center ONLY if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford L-M technician's, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web sight for "AS Built" data. Non Ford technicians, use the Fed World website at "fedworld.gov". Select Auto Service Information and search for "Calibrations" or "Vehicle Calibrations" then specify vehicle manufacturer, model name and model year as required. For Ford L-M technician's, check out the "Programmable Module Installation" link on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web sight for quick Programmable Module data information by vehicle when using WDS or NGS. Making Changes to the VID Block A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to accommodate vehicle hardware. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool. Making Changes to the PCM Calibration At certain times, the entire EEPROM will need to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to changes made to the strategy or calibration after production or the need to reset the VID block because it has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3775 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE SENSOR Typical Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor (Figure 32) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and increases as temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy details. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL LEVEL INPUT The fuel level input (FLI) is a hard wire signal input to the PCM from the fuel pump (FP) module. Refer to the description of the FLI in the On-Board Diagnostics II Monitors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Pump Signal > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Pump Signal: Description and Operation FUEL PUMP MONITOR Applications Using a Fuel Pump Relay for Fuel Pump On/Off Control The Fuel Pump Monitor (FPM) circuit is spliced into the fuel pump power (FP PWR) circuit and is used by the PCM for diagnostic purposes. The PCM sources a low current voltage down the FPM circuit. With the fuel pump off, this voltage is pulled low by the path to ground through the fuel pump. With the fuel pump off and the FPM circuit low, the PCM can verify that the FPM circuit and the FP PWR circuit are complete from the FPM splice through the fuel pump to ground. This also confirms that the FP PWR or FPM circuits are not shorted to power. With the fuel pump on, voltage is now being supplied from the fuel pump relay to the FP PWR and FPM circuits. With the fuel pump on and the FPM circuit high, the PCM can verify that the FP PWR circuit from the fuel pump relay to the FPM splice is complete. It can also verify that the fuel pump relay contacts are closed and there is a B+ supply to the fuel pump relay. Fuel Pump Driver Module Applications Fuel Pump Driver Module Duty Cycle Signals The fuel pump driver module (FPDM) communicates diagnostic information to the powertrain control module (PCM) through the Fuel Pump Monitor (FPM) circuit. This information is sent by the FPDM as a duty cycle signal. The three duty cycle signals that may be sent are listed in the table. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR REMOVAL WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited, resulting in possible personal injury. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. WARNING: The evaporative emission system contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor. Although not present in large quantities, it still presents the danger of explosion or fire. Disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery to minimize the possibility of an electrical spark occurring, possibly causing a fire or explosion if fuel vapor or fuel liquid is present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Disconnect the battery. 2. Remove the rear seat assembly. 3. Remove the fuel tank sending unit access cover. 4. Disconnect the fuel tank pressure sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the fuel tank pressure sensor. - Disconnect the vapor tubes. INSTALLATION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3785 1. NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Carry out a leak test. See: Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test - Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3789 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE The idle air control (IAC) valve assembly controls engine idle speed and provides a dashpot function. The IAC valve assembly meters intake air around the throttle plate through a bypass within the IAC valve assembly and throttle body. The PCM determines the desired idle speed or bypass air and signals the IAC valve assembly through a specified duty cycle. The IAC valve responds by positioning the IAC valve to control the amount of bypassed air. The PCM monitors engine rpm and increases or decreases the IAC duty cycle in order to achieve the desired rpm. NOTE: The IAC Valve Assembly is NOT ADJUSTABLE and CANNOT BE CLEANED. The IAC valve (part of throttle body assembly) has an internal diode on some applications. If the internal diode is measured in crossed terminal position with a digital multimeter, there will be an incorrect or negative reading. It is important that the mating component and harness connectors are correctly oriented. Diagnostic procedures emphasize this importance. The PCM uses the IAC valve assembly to control: - No touch start - Cold engine test idle for rapid warm-up - Idle (corrects for engine load) - Stumble or stalling on deceleration (provides a dashpot function) - Over-temperature idle boost. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3790 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVE REMOVAL 1. Remove the idle air control (IAC) valve. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolts. 3 Remove the valve. Discard the gasket. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install a new gasket. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Information Bus: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Find Wiring Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams ^ System Diagrams Component Circuits that work together as a system ^ Grounds Diagrams Circuits grounding the system diagrams Power Distribution Diagrams The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any "dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any "blown" fuses. System Diagrams These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's indirect relationship with components in other systems. Grounds Diagrams The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different systems. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3795 Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#". These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc). All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions. Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of diagrams. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. Introduction To Ford Diagrams Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3796 System Overview Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information, connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent diagrams in the set. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3797 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram where the splice appears in full. Component Referencing (4) Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component (i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations. Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3798 Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3799 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. "Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle. NUMBER ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................... LOCATION 100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment, Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200 ................................................................................................................................................ Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300 .............................................................................................................................................. From instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ................................................................... ............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper; Truck bed 500 ...................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Driver door 600 .................................................. ...................................................................................................................................................... Passenger door, front 700 ................................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 ............................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ...... Passenger door, right rear Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3800 900 ....................................................................................................................................................... ........................ Above door trim panel and headliner Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification Symbols Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3801 Symbols Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3802 Symbols Part 3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3803 Symbols Part 4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3804 Symbols Part 5 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3805 Information Bus: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 Locked terminal 2 Male half 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3806 Defective insulation stripping 1 Proper crimp 2 Insulation not removed 3 Wire strands missing 4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 Seal 2 Displaced tab Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3807 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Male half 7 Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 Enlarged 2 Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3808 Electrical short inside the harness 1 Solder coated wire to ground 2 Harness protective tape 3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3809 Splice tape removed 1 Intermittent short Splice covered 1 Wire strand 2 Splice tape 3 Harness tape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3810 Broken wire strands in harness 1 Wiring harness tape 2 Wiring strand 3 Broken strands intermittent signal 4 Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3811 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3812 6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3813 8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3814 Information Bus: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 14-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3815 Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module Configuration Information Bus: Description and Operation Module Configuration MODULE CONFIGURATION Principles Of Operation Definition of Terms Calibration Update: Some modules are designed to be flashed or reflashed with complete new software packages. This process of reflashing the module is a calibration update. Programmable Parameters: These are options contained within the existing software. These include items such as tire size, customer preference items and anti-theft options. The current settings are downloaded from an existing module then uploaded to a new module. They can also be configured using the diagnostic tool. Programming parameters is different from updating calibrations as no software is changed, only the options already contained in the software. Some modules must be programmed (configured) as part of the repair procedure. If this procedure is not followed, the module will not function correctly and may set a number of DTCs, including B2477 or P1639, which indicate that some necessary data has not been programmed into the module. Modules that need programming should not be exchanged between vehicles. In most cases the parameter values or settings are unique to that vehicle, and if not set correctly will cause concerns or faults. The worldwide diagnostic system (WDS) will automatically attempt to retrieve the module configuration information from all modules, and from a backup location in the powertrain control module (PCM) when vehicle ID is carried out. If the module and the PCM do not contain correct information, the diagnostic tool will either request As-Built data or display a list of items that you will need to manually configure. The diagnostic tool will program the module based on the data you enter. For additional WDS/diagnostic tool programming procedures, refer to Programmable Module Installation (PMI). There are 3 different methods that are used for module programming: programmable module installation - calibration update - programmable parameters Some modules do not support all 3 methods. Programmable Module Installation (PMI) The programmable module installation (PMI) method is used when a new programmable module is installed on the vehicle. It is no longer necessary to command the diagnostic tool to gather module option content from the old module. The diagnostic tool automatically obtains any available module option content information from the old module during the vehicle ID routine that runs when the diagnostic tool is initially connected to the vehicle. It is important that you connect WDS to the vehicle and allow it to identify the vehicle and obtain configuration data prior to removing any modules. Calibration Update Calibration update is used to install a new calibration and strategy into a module. Programmable Parameters If a module that has been modified using programmable parameters needs to be installed, the PMI procedure will maintain the parameters in their altered state if the WDS is able to communicate with the old module during vehicle identification. Otherwise you may need to use programmable parameters to return them to the altered state. Vehicle Identification (VID) Block Some PCMs contain a memory area called a vehicle identification (VID) block. The PCM VID block may contain the factory settings for the configurable modules unless the PCM is flashed with a new calibration, in which case some PCM parameters may be modified. As-Built Data Center The As-Built Data Center maintains a record of the vehicle configuration in a database. The vehicle identification number (VIN) is required to obtain this information. The As-Built Data Center records the applicable module configurations stored in each module before the vehicle leaves the factory. The As-Built Data Center will always reflect the original build of the vehicle as it left the factory. Contact the As-Built Data Center only when directed to do so by the diagnostic tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module Configuration > Page 3818 Information Bus: Description and Operation Communications Network COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK The module communications network consists of the following items: - standard corporate protocol (SCP) communications network - international standards organization (ISO) communications network - generic electronic module (GEM) - powertrain control module (PCM) - anti-lock brake system (ABS) module - restraint control module (RCM) - instrument cluster (IC) PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION The vehicle has two module communications networks. The standard corporate protocol (SCP) network, which is an unshielded twisted pair cable (data bus plus, circuit 914 [TN/OG] and data bus minus, circuit 915 [PK/LB]); and the international standards organization (ISO) 9141 network which is a single wire (circuit 70 [LB/WH]). The diagnostic tool can connect to both networks through the data link connector (DLC). This makes diagnosis and testing of these systems easier by allowing one smart tester to be able to diagnose and control any module on the two networks from one connector. The DLC can be found under the instrument panel on the driver side. The SCP communication network will remain operational even with the severing of one of the bus wires. Communications will also continue if one of the bus wires is shorted to ground or voltage, or if some, but not all, termination resistors are lost. The ISO 9141 communication network does not permit inter-module communication. When the diagnostic tool communicates to modules on the ISO 9141 communication network, the diagnostic tool must ask for all information; the modules cannot initiate communications. Unlike the SCP, the ISO 9141 communication network will not function if the wire is shorted to ground or battery voltage. Also, if one of the modules on the ISO 9141 communication network loses power or shorts internally, communications to that module will fail. There are two modules linked to the SCP communication network and three modules linked to the ISO 9141 communication network. The powertrain control module (PCM) is on the SCP communication network. The PCM controls the engine for better fuel economy, emissions control and failure mode detection and storage. The passive anti-theft system (PATS) is integrated into the PCM module. The PCM/PATS system is connected to the vehicle electrical system, the transceiver module, the vehicle SCP communications network and the vehicle anti-theft indicator located in the instrument cluster (IC). The PCM module uses a microprocessor to control the system functions as well as illumination of the anti-theft indicator. The illumination command is sent from the PCM through the SCP communications network to the IC, which in turn sends power to the anti-theft indicator. The PCM module microprocessor stores the ignition key codes in non-volatile memory. The PCM and IC modules can be diagnosed through the data link connector. The restraint control module (RCM) is on the ISO 9141 communication network. The RCM controls the deployment of the air bags based on sensor input. The generic electronic module (GEM) is on the ISO 9141 communication network. The GEM controls a variety of systems: - rear wiper - cargo lamps - interior lamps - exterior lamps - accessory delay - perimeter anti-theft (if equipped) The anti-lock brake system (ABS) control module is on the ISO 9141 communication network. The ABS module controls the brake pressure to the four wheels to keep the vehicle under control while braking. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network Information Bus: Testing and Inspection Communications Network Initial Inspection INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage. VISUAL INSPECTION CHART Electrical Central junction box (CJB) Fuse ROOM (10A) - Wiring harness - Connectors - Instrument cluster (IC) - Anti-lock brake system (ABS) control module - Restraint control module (RCM) - Generic electronic module (GEM) - Powertrain control module (PCM) 3. If the concern remains after the inspection, connect the diagnostic tool to the data link connector (DLC) located beneath the instrument panel and select the vehicle to be tested from the diagnostic tool menu. If the diagnostic tool does not communicate with the vehicle: check that the program card is correctly installed. - check the connections to the vehicle. - check the ignition switch position is in RUN. If the diagnostic tool still does not communicate with the vehicle, go to Pinpoint Test H. See: Pinpoint Tests/Pinpoint Tests/Test H 4. Go to Pinpoint Test PC. See: Pinpoint Tests/Pinpoint Test PC (Precheck) Pinpoint Test PC (Precheck) PINPOINT TEST PC: DATA LINK DIAGNOSTICS NETWORK TEST Test PC1 Test A PINPOINT TEST A: THE ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) CONTROL MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE DIAGNOSTIC TOOL Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3821 Test A1 Test A2-A3 Test B PINPOINT TEST B: THE RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE DIAGNOSTIC TOOL Test B1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3822 Test B2-B3 Test C PINPOINT TEST C: THE GENERIC ELECTRONIC MODULE (GEM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE DIAGNOSTIC TOOL Test C1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3823 Test C2-C3 Test D PINPOINT TEST D: THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE DIAGNOSTIC TOOL Test D1-D2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3824 Test D2-D3 Test E PINPOINT TEST E: THE POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE DIAGNOSTIC TOOL Test E1-E2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3825 Test E2-E3 Test F PINPOINT TEST F: NO MODULE / NETWORK COMMUNICATION - ISO 9141 NETWORK Test F1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3826 Test F2-F6 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3827 Test F7-F11 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3828 Test F12 Test G PINPOINT TEST G: NO MODULE / NETWORK COMMUNICATION - SCP NETWORK Test G1-G5 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3829 Test G6-G8 Test H PINPOINT TEST H: NO MODULE/NETWORK COMMUNICATION - NO POWER TO THE DIAGNOSTIC TOOL Test H1-H2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3830 Test H2-H4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3831 Symptom Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3832 Information Bus: Testing and Inspection Module Configuration Configurable Modules CONFIGURABLE MODULES The vehicle contains the following modules that are configurable: - generic electronic module (GEM) - instrument cluster - powertrain control module (PCM) - anti-lock brake system (ABS) module Initial Inspection INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION 1. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage. Refer to the chart. VISUAL INSPECTION CHART Electrical Wiring harness - Connectors Programmable Parameters Index Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Service and Repair > Programmable Module Installation Information Bus: Service and Repair Programmable Module Installation PROGRAMMABLE MODULE INSTALLATION Using The New Generation STAR (NGS) Tester When The Original Body Chassis Electrical Module Is Not Available 1. Install the new module. 2. Using the NGS tester and the latest version service function card, SELECT: Programmable Module Installation. 3. Select: the module being installed. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 5. SELECT: Retrieve Module Configuration - Old ECU and press trigger. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions. 7. The NGS will attempt to retrieve module data from the powertrain control module (PCM). - If the module data is available go to Step A. - If the NGS displays: Call As-Built Data Center go to Step B Step A 1. SELECT: Restore Configuration - New ECU then press trigger. 2. The NGS will complete loading the retrieved data and display: Module Download Successful. 3. Test the module for correct operation. Step B 1. Press trigger. 2. If the NGS asks for vehicle data - enter the vehicle data then press store. 3. The NGS will ask for module data line 1 - enter data and press store. 4. The NGS will then ask if there is an additional line of data available for that address - Select YES or NO depending on the information in the As Built Data Sheet. 5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until the answer is NO for Step 4. 6. The NGS should show a screen stating that module data was stored - press trigger. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions. 8. SELECT: Restore Configuration - New ECU then press trigger. 9. The NGS will complete loading the entered data. Using The New Generation STAR (NGS) Tester When The Original Body Chassis Electrical Module Is Available 1. With the original module still installed, using the NGS tester and the latest version service function card, SELECT: Programmable Module Installation. 2. Select: the module being installed and press trigger. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. 4. SELECT: Retrieve Module Configuration - Old ECU and press trigger. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. 6. INSTALL new module, SELECT: Restore Configuration - New ECU then press trigger. 7. The NGS will complete loading the retrieved data. Using The Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS) When The Original Body Chassis Electrical Module Is Not Available 1. Install the new module. 2. Connect the WDS and ID the vehicle as normal. 3. From the Toolbox icon, select and highlight: Module Programming and then highlight the module that was installed and press the check mark. 4. Select and highlight: Programmable Module Installation and then highlight the module that was installed then press the check mark. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions and turn the ignition key to the OFF position and press the check mark. 6. The WDS will retrieve the module data from the PCM and automatically download the data into the new module and display Module Configuration Complete. 7. If the data is not available in the PCM, the WDS will display a screen stating to contact the As-Built Data Center. 8. Enter the module data. 9. WDS will download the data into the new module and display. Using The Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS) When The Original Body Chassis Electrical Module Is Available 1. Connect the WDS and ID the vehicle as normal. 2. From the Toolbox icon, select and highlight: Module Programming and press the check mark. 3. Select and highlight: Programmable Module Installation. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 5. Install the new module. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Service and Repair > Programmable Module Installation > Page 3835 7. Module configuration is complete. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Service and Repair > Programmable Module Installation > Page 3836 Information Bus: Service and Repair Programmable Module Installation - Using Backup Data PROGRAMMABLE MODULE INSTALLATION - USING BACKUP DATA NOTE: - If using the WDS, select Module Configuration and Programming, then follow the screen prompts. - Make sure to use the flash cable when programming calibrations or running a PMI routine on the PCM. 1. Select Programmable Module Installation on the diagnostic tool. 2. Select Retrieve Module Configuration - Old ECU. The diagnostic tool will give you a message to reinstall the old module or to continue for backup data. If the module to be replaced will not communicate or has incorrect data, continue and allow the diagnostic tool to find backup data. If the diagnostic tool successfully retrieves the backup data, GO to Step 7 in this procedure. If the diagnostic tool prompts you to contact the As-Built Data Center for backup information, contact the As-Built Data Center and obtain the backup data for the vehicle and continue on. 3. After the As-Built Data Center backup data is obtained continue with the routine by entering the VIN number of the vehicle when the diagnostic tool prompts you to do so. 4. The diagnostic tool will prompt you to enter the vehicle data. The vehicle data is listed on the As-Built Data Center sheet in the upper left-hand portion, directly underneath the VIN for the vehicle. 5. The diagnostic tool will prompt you to enter information for the module that needs to be reprogrammed. Enter all of the data that the diagnostic tool requests. If the diagnostic tool requests information that is not listed on the As-Built Data Center sheet, press NO. 6. Follow the text screens until all pertinent data is entered and the module data is stored. 7. Select Restore Module Configuration - New ECU, and follow the text screens until successful. 8. Manually validate each customer preference item for correct setting. If necessary, ask the customer what setting would be their preference. Refer to the Module Configuration Index for the list of customer preference items. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Service and Repair > Programmable Module Installation > Page 3837 Information Bus: Service and Repair Customer Preference Items CUSTOMER PREFERENCE ITEMS NOTE: - If using the WDS, select Module Configuration and Programming, then follow the screen prompts. - Make sure module is listed as supporting customer preference items and supports the specific item to be configured in the Module Configuration Index. 1. Select Service Bay Functions on the diagnostic tool. 2. Select the module that contains the customer preference item to be programmed. Refer to the Module Configuration Index. 3. Select Customer Preference Items on the diagnostic tool. 4. Select Module Option Content. 5. Select the item to be enabled or disabled. 6. Enable or disable the item as necessary to reflect the customer preference. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3838 Information Bus: Tools and Equipment Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3842 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) The knock sensor (KS) (Figure 41) is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3846 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3847 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3848 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Check Engine, Service Engine Soon Or ISO Standard Engine Symbol The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) (Figure 17) alerts the driver that the powertrain control module (PCM) has detected an OBD II emission-related component or system fault. When this occurs, an OBD II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be set. - The MIL is located on the instrument cluster and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE SOON or ISO standard engine symbol (Figure 18). - Power is supplied to the MIL whenever the ignition switch is in the RUN or START position. - The MIL will remain on in the RUN/START mode as a bulb check during the instrument cluster proveout for approximately 4 seconds. - If the MIL remains on after the bulb check: The PCM illuminates the MIL for an emission related concern and a DTC will be present. - The instrument cluster will illuminate the MIL if the PCM does not send a control message to the instrument cluster. - The PCM is operating in the Hardware Limited Operation Strategy (HLOS). - The MIL circuit is shorted to ground. - If the MIL remains off (during the bulb check): Bulb is damaged. - MIL circuit is open. - To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the Scan Tool must be sent, or three consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a fault. - For any MIL concern, go to Symptom Charts. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptom Charts - If the MIL blinks at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition could possibly exist. - If the MIL blinks erratically, an intermittent open B+ to the bulb or an intermittent short to ground in the MIL circuit exist. Also, the PCM can reset while cranking if battery voltage is low. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation THERMAL MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) Sensor The Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor (TMAP) (Figure 48) consists of a manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor and an integrated thermistor. The MAP portion of the sensor uses a piezo-resistive silicon sensing element to provide a voltage proportional to the absolute pressure in the intake manifold. The thermistor portion of the sensor operates in the same manner as an intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. For additional information on how the IAT sensor operates, refer to the Intake Air Temperature Sensor description and operation. For the 2.3L Ranger and 2.3L PZEV Focus, the TMAP sensor is part of the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system. The PCM uses information from the MAP portion of the TMAP sensor, throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor or cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor and crankshaft position (CKP) sensor to determine how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. The thermistor portion of the TMAP sensor is currently not being used on this application. For the 4.6L SC Mustang, the PCM uses manifold absolute pressure information from the MAP portion of the TMAP sensor along with other sensor inputs to determine the proper amount of fuel needed for combustion under varying engine load conditions. The thermistor portion of the TMAP sensor is used as a second IAT sensor. This second IAT sensor, located after the supercharger, provides manifold air temperature information to the PCM. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR Typical Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor The engine oil temperature (EOT) sensor (Figure 35) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system near the oil filter or screwed into the oil pan. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the following: - On Variable Cam Timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM will begin reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3862 Oxygen Sensor: Harness Locations View 151-2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3863 View 151-2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3864 View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3865 View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 3868 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 3869 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 3870 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3871 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) (Figure 38) detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts. Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to temperatures of 800°C (1400°F). At approximately 300 °C (600°F) the engine can enter closed loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater and the PCM will turn on the heater by providing the ground when the proper conditions occur. Since model year 1998 a high power HO2S heater and heater control system have been installed on the Stream 1 HO2S sensors of most vehicles. The high power heater reaches closed loop fuel control temperatures faster, which allows closed loop engine operation sooner. The use of this heater requires that the HO2S heater control be duty cycled, to prevent damage to the heater. The 6 ohm design is not interchangeable with new style 3.3 ohm heater. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S), LH Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the HO2S with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal. Using the special tool, remove the HO2S. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the HO2S to aid in installation. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 3874 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) RH HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S), RH Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the HO2S with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal. Using the special tool, remove the HO2S. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the HO2S to aid in installation. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 3875 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor LH CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR, LH Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. 3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the catalyst monitor sensor with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor to aid in installation. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 3876 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor RH CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR, RH Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the catalyst monitor sensor with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor to aid in installation. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3880 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The power steering pressure (PSP) switch (Figure 45) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Page 3883 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Sensor POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The power steering pressure (PSP) sensor (Figure 46) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3884 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the power steering pressure (PSP) switch. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 3888 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 90) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System > Page 3891 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 91) is identical in operation as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the underside of the sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3892 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar. Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR tube. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-18 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Find Wiring Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams ^ System Diagrams Component Circuits that work together as a system ^ Grounds Diagrams Circuits grounding the system diagrams Power Distribution Diagrams The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any "dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any "blown" fuses. System Diagrams These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's indirect relationship with components in other systems. Grounds Diagrams The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different systems. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3899 Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#". These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc). All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions. Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of diagrams. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. Introduction To Ford Diagrams Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3900 System Overview Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information, connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent diagrams in the set. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3901 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram where the splice appears in full. Component Referencing (4) Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component (i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations. Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3902 Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3903 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. "Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle. NUMBER ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................... LOCATION 100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment, Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200 ................................................................................................................................................ Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300 .............................................................................................................................................. From instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ................................................................... ............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper; Truck bed 500 ...................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Driver door 600 .................................................. ...................................................................................................................................................... Passenger door, front 700 ................................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 ............................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ...... Passenger door, right rear Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3904 900 ....................................................................................................................................................... ........................ Above door trim panel and headliner Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification Symbols Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3905 Symbols Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3906 Symbols Part 3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3907 Symbols Part 4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3908 Symbols Part 5 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3909 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 Locked terminal 2 Male half 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3910 Defective insulation stripping 1 Proper crimp 2 Insulation not removed 3 Wire strands missing 4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 Seal 2 Displaced tab Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3911 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Male half 7 Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 Enlarged 2 Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3912 Electrical short inside the harness 1 Solder coated wire to ground 2 Harness protective tape 3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3913 Splice tape removed 1 Intermittent short Splice covered 1 Wire strand 2 Splice tape 3 Harness tape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3914 Broken wire strands in harness 1 Wiring harness tape 2 Wiring strand 3 Broken strands intermittent signal 4 Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3915 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3916 6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3917 8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3918 Body Control Module: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3919 Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 59-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3920 59-2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3921 59-3 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3922 Body Control Module: Service and Repair GENERIC ELECTRONIC MODULE (GEM) REMOVAL 1. NOTE: Prior to removal of the GEM, it is necessary to upload module configuration information to a diagnostic tool. This information needs to be downloaded into the new module once installed. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the pin-type retainer and the lower shield. 3. Position the RH and LH carpet aside from the center tunnel. 4. Disconnect the GEM electrical connectors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3923 5. Remove the GEM 1 Pull back the insulation and remove the nuts. 2 Remove the GEM. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Configure the GEM. Refer to Information Bus (Module Configuration). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation TORQUE BASED ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) Overview The Generation II (Gen II) Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) is a hardware and software strategy that delivers a transmission output shaft torque (via throttle angle) based on driver demand (pedal position). It utilizes an electronic throttle body, the PCM and a accelerator pedal assembly to control throttle opening and engine torque. The ETC system basically replaces the standard cable operated accelerator pedal, idle air control (IAC) motor, 3-wire throttle position sensor (TPS) and mechanical throttle body Background "Why Torque Based ETC" Torque based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver. It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as: VCT (deliver same torque during transitions) - Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV) Torque based ETC also results is a less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with smoother traction control. Other generic benefits of ETC are: Eliminate cruise control actuators - Eliminate Idle Air Control (IAC) Bypass actuator - Better airflow range - Packaging (no cable) - More responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality It should be noted that the ETC system includes a wrench light on the instrument cluster that illuminates when a fault is detected. Faults are also accompanied by DTCS and the "Check Engine Soon" light. Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) The Gen II electronic throttle body (Figure 133) has the following characteristics 1. The DC motor is driven by the PCM (requires two wires). The gear ratio from the motor to the throttle plate shaft is 17:1. 2. There are two designs; parallel and in-series. The parallel design has the motor under the bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing (in general this is more difficult to package). The in-series design has a separate motor housing that protrudes out and offers more packaging flexibility. 3. Two springs are used: one is used to close the throttle (main spring) and the other is in a plunger assembly that results in a default angle with no power applied. This is for limp home reasons (force of plunger spring is 2 times stronger than the main spring). Default angle is usually set to result in a top vehicle speed of 30 MPH (48 Km). Typically this throttle angle is 7 to 8 degrees from the hard-stop angle. 4. The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to avoid the throttle from binding in the bore (approximately 0.75 degree). This hard stop setting is non-adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle. 5. Unlike cable type throttle bodies, the intent for the ETB is not to have a hole in the throttle plate or to use plate sealant. The hole is not required in the ETB because the required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate angle controls idle and idle quality and eliminates the need for IAC bypass actuator. 6. The system has two throttle position sensors. Redundant throttle position signals are required for monitor reasons. TP1 has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and TP2 has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation the negative sloped TP sensor (TP1) is used by the control strategy as the indication of throttle position. The TP sensor assembly requires four wires. 5 V Reference Voltage - Signal Return (ground) - TP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0) - TP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5) Accelerator Pedal Position Sensors (APPS) The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand. 1. There are three pedal position sensors required for system monitoring. APP1 has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and APP2 & APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. 2. There are two VREF wires, two signal return wires and three signal wires (total of seven wires and pins) between the PCM and APPS assembly. - 2-5 V Reference Voltage - 2- Signal Return (ground) - APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0) - APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5) - APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5) 3. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3927 which is the input to the torque based strategy. Electronic Throttle Body And Accelerator Pedal Assembly 4. The three pedal position signals ensure a correct input to the PCM, if any one signal has a fault. The PCM knows if a signal is wrong by calculating where it should be, inferred by the other signals. A value will be substituted for a faulty signal if two out of the three signals are bad. Electronic Throttle Control System Strategy GEN II ETC System As stated earlier the torque based ETC strategy was developed mainly to improve fuel economy and to accommodate Variable Cam Timing. This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the drivers pedal position. By uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from pedal position (driver demand). This allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and transmission shift schedules while delivering the requested wheel torque. ETC is used on the 2004 MY Lincoln LS and Ford Thunderbird, Explorer/Mountaineer, and the new light-duty F-series. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3928 The ETC monitor system is distributed across two processors within the PCM: the main powertrain control processor unit (CPU) and a monitoring processor called an Enhanced-Quizzer (E-Quizzer) processor. The primary monitoring function is performed by the Independent Plausibility Check (IPC) software, which resides on the main processor. It is responsible for determining the driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the generated torque exceeds driver demand by specified amount, the IPC takes appropriate mitigating action. ETC System Failure Mode And Effects Management, Part 1 ETC System Failure Mode And Effects Management, Part 2 Since the IPC and main controller share the same processor, they are subject to a number of potential, common failure modes. Therefore, the E-Quizzer processor was added to redundantly monitor selected PCM inputs and to act as an intelligent watchdog and monitor the performance of the IPC and the main processor. If it determines that the IPC function is impaired in any way, it takes appropriate Failure Mode and Effects Management (FMEM) actions. Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3929 Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation, Part 1 Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation, Part 2 Accelerator and Throttle Position Sensor Inputs Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Check Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Check: Throttle Position Sensor Check Throttle Position Sensor Check: Throttle Plate Position Controller (TPPC) Outputs Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3930 Throttle Plate Controller Check Operation The purpose of the TPPC is to control the throttle position to the desired throttle angle. It is a separate chip embedded in the PCM. The desired angle is communicated from the main CPU via a 312.5 Hz duty cycle signal. The TPPC interprets the duty cycle signal as follows: 0% <= DC < 5% - Out of range, limp home default position. - 5% <= DC < 6% - Commanded default position, closed. - 6% <= DC < 7% - Commanded default position. Used for key-on, engine off. - 7% <= DC < 10% - Closed against hard-stop. Used to learn zero throttle angle position (hard-stop) after key-up. - 10% <= DC <= 92% - Normal operation, between 0 degrees (hard-stop) and 82%, 10% duty cycle = 0 degrees throttle angle, 92% duty cycle = 82 degrees throttle angle. - 92% < DC <= 96% - Wide Open Throttle, 82 to 86 degrees throttle angle. - 96% < DC <= 100% - Out of Range, limp home default position. The desired angle is relative to the hard-stop angle. The hard-stop angle is learned during each key-up process before the main CPU requests the throttle plate to be closed against the hard-stop. The output of the TPPC is a voltage request to the H-driver (also in PCM). The "H" driver is capable of positive or negative voltage to the Electronic Throttle Body Motor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls General PCM Programming Procedures Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures TSB 04-24-14 12/13/04 FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS 1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis, Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement. ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed. ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs. Verify repair after reprogramming. SERVICE PROCEDURE PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement 1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle. 2. Use WDS if available. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3935 a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply. b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level. 3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool, such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS. NOTE IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS, GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF. PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD 1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. 2. Install the new PCM. NOTE IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER. 3. Attempt to start the vehicle. 4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM. 5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639. a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1. b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc. 6. Check for DTC B2900. a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during this procedure. b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7. 7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures. REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement 1. Verify all cables are properly connected. 2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level. 3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level. 4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again. 5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open previous session, and attempt reprogramming again. 6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure. 1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits. 2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity. NOTE IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3936 INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC. 3. Connect WDS to vehicle. 4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK. 5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK. 6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK. 7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press TICK. 8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK. 9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK. 10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above". 11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK. 12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed above. Press TICK. 13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. 14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3937 View 151-11 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Engine Control Module: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3940 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3941 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3942 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE - VEHICLE SPEED OUTPUT (VSO) The PCM-VSO (Powertrain Control Module - Vehicle Speed Output) speed signal subsystem generates vehicle speed information for distribution to the vehicle's electrical/electronic modules and subsystems that require vehicle speed data. This subsystem senses the transmission output shaft speed with a sensor. The data is processed by the PCM, and distributed as a hard-wired signal or as a message on the vehicle communication network (SCP or HS-CAN). The key features of the PCM-VSO system are to: - Infer vehicle movement from the output shaft sensor signal - Convert transmission output shaft rotational information to vehicle speed information - Compensate for tire size and axle ratio with a programmed calibration variable - Utilize a transfer case sensor for four wheel drive applications - Distribute vehicle speed information as a multiplexed message and/or an analog signal The signal from a non-contact shaft sensor (Output Shaft Sensor--OSS or Transfer Case Shaft Sensor--TCSS) mounted on the transmission (automatics, manuals, or 4X4 transfer cases) is sensed directly by the PCM. The PCM converts the OSS or TCSS information to 8000 pulses per mile, based on a tire and axle ratio conversion factor. This conversion factor is programmed into the PCM at the time the vehicle is assembled and can be reprogrammed in the field for servicing changes in the tire size and axle ratio. The PCM transmits the computed vehicle speed and distance traveled information to all the vehicle speed signal users on the vehicle. VSO information can be transmitted by a hard-wired interface between the vehicle speed signal user and the PCM, or by Speed and Odometer data message via the vehicle communication network data link. The VSO hard -wired signal wave form is a DC square wave with a voltage level of 0 to VBAT. Typical output operating range is 2.22 Hz per MPH (1.3808 Hz per 1 km/h). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module (PCM) POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the powertrain control module (PCM) cover. 1 Loosen the bolt and disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the nuts and the cover. 3. Remove the PCM. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 3945 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Reset POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) RESET Description All OBD II scan tools support the powertrain control module (PCM) reset. The PCM Reset allows the scan tool to command the PCM to clear all emission-related diagnostic information. When resetting the PCM, a DTC P1000 will be stored in the PCM until all the OBD II system monitors or components have been tested to satisfy a drive cycle, without any other faults occurring. For more information about a drive cycle, refer to Drive Cycles. See: Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Drive Cycles The following events occur when a PCM reset is performed: Clears the number of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). - Clears the DTCs. - Clears the freeze frame data. - Clears diagnostic monitoring test results. - Resets status of the OBD II system monitors. - Sets DTC P1000. Resetting Keep Alive Memory (KAM) Resetting Keep Alive Memory will return PCM memory to its default setting. Adaptive learning contents such as idle speed, refueling event, and fuel trim are included. A PCM Reset (described above) is also part of a KAM Reset. Both can be useful in post repair retest. After Keep Alive Memory has been reset, the vehicle may exhibit certain driveability concerns. It will be necessary to drive the vehicle to allow the PCM to relearn values for optimum driveability and performance. This function may not be supported by all scan tools. Refer to scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual. If an error message is received or the scan tool does not support this function, disconnecting the battery ground cable for a minimum of 5 minutes may be used as an alternative procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 3946 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory FLASH ELECTRICALLY ERASEABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY - FLASH EEPROM Description Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) is contained in an Integrated Circuit (IC) internal to the PCM. The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle and is capable of being reprogrammed or reflashed repeatedly. As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the Vehicle Identification (VID) block. The VID block must be programmed when replacing the PCM as described under Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to perform this procedure may generate fault codes: P1635, P1639, VID Block not programmed or is corrupt. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware/parameter changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to perform this procedure properly may generate fault code: P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range is one of the main causes for code: P1639. This is described under Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the VIN number, octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the presence of speed control and four wheel drive electronic shift on the fly versus manual shift on the fly. Only items applicable to vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block will be displayed on the scan tool. When changing items in the VID block, the strategy will place range limits on certain items such as tire and axle ratio. The VID block is also limited to the number of times to be reconfigured. When this limit is reached, the scan tool will display a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again to reset the VID block. Each of the procedures described below use the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS). Reprogramming can be performed by a local Ford dealer for any non Ford facility. There are other Enhanced Scan Tools that may have reprogramming capabilities available. Refer to the manufacturers users manual for details. Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM A new PCM will contain the latest strategy and calibration level for a particular vehicle. However, the VID block will be blank and will need programming. There are two procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM and the second is manual data entry into the new PCM. Automatic data transfer will be performed if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by the use of a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The stored data can now be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been replaced. Manual data entry must be performed if the old module is damaged and/or incapable of communicating. Remove and replace the old PCM. Using a compatible Scan Tool select and execute Module/Parameter reprogramming referring to the manufacturers users manual. Important, make certain that all parameters are included. Failure to properly program Tire Size in revolutions per mile, (rev/mile = 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches) Axle Ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or Manual/Electronic shift on the fly (MSOF/ESOF) may result in codes: P1635, P1639. You may be instructed to contact the "AS BUILT" data center for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center ONLY if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford L-M technician's, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web sight for "AS Built" data. Non Ford technicians, use the Fed World website at "fedworld.gov". Select Auto Service Information and search for "Calibrations" or "Vehicle Calibrations" then specify vehicle manufacturer, model name and model year as required. For Ford L-M technician's, check out the "Programmable Module Installation" link on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web sight for quick Programmable Module data information by vehicle when using WDS or NGS. Making Changes to the VID Block A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to accommodate vehicle hardware. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool. Making Changes to the PCM Calibration At certain times, the entire EEPROM will need to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to changes made to the strategy or calibration after production or the need to reset the VID block because it has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3950 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3951 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3952 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSORS (APPS) The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand. 1. There are three pedal position sensors required for system monitoring. APP1 has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and APP2 & APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. 2. There are two VREF wires, two signal return wires and three signal wires (total of seven wires and pins) between the PCM and APPS assembly. - 2-5 V Reference Voltage - 2- Signal Return (ground) - APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0) - APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5) - APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5) 3. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. Electronic Throttle Body And Accelerator Pedal Assembly 4. The three pedal position signals ensure a correct input to the PCM, if any one signal has a fault. The PCM knows if a signal is wrong by calculating where it should be, inferred by the other signals. A value will be substituted for a faulty signal if two out of the three signals are bad. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3960 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3961 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire Terminals Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3962 Typical "Drop-in" Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The mass air flow (MAF) sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire (Figure 42). If the hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the air mass flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology (IBT) with an integrated intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3963 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3967 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3968 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR Typical Hall-Effect Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance Sensor The camshaft position (CMP) sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston No.1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the powertrain control module (PCM) and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. The Coil On Plug (COP) ignition applications also use the CMP signal to select the proper ignition coil to fire. The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or circuit. DTC P0340 is associated with this sensor. Vehicles with two CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. DTC P0345 is associated with this sensor and it is referred to as CMP2. There are two types of CMP sensors: the three pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (Figure 28) found on F-Series 4.2L applications, and the two pin connector variable reluctance sensor found on all other vehicles (Figure 29). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3969 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The clutch pedal position (CPP) switch (Figure 30) is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a 5-volt reference (VREF) signal to the CPP switch. If the CPP switch is closed, indicating the clutch pedal is engaged, the output voltage (5 volts) from the PCM is grounded through the signal return line to the PCM, and there is 1 volt or less. One volt or less indicates there is a reduced load on the engine. If the CPP switch is open, meaning the clutch pedal is disengaged, the input on the CPP signal to the PCM will be approximately 5 volts. Then, the 5-volt signal input at the PCM will indicate a load on the engine. The PCM uses the load information in mass air flow and fuel calculations. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3973 Clutch Switch: Service and Repair CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the clutch pedal position (CPP) electrical connector. 2. Remove the CPP locknut and the switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3977 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3978 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Typical Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor (Figure 33) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine coolant passage. The ECT sensor is similar in construction to the IAT sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3979 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Partially drain the cooling system. 2. Remove the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Unclip and remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3983 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3984 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (INTEGRATED IGNITION SYSTEMS) Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block or timing cover and is adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the powertrain control module (PCM). The trigger wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the trigger wheel, the CKP indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to fixed reference (Figure 31). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3985 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the bolts and the right front lower splash shield. 3. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3989 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE SENSOR Typical Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor (Figure 32) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and increases as temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy details. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL LEVEL INPUT The fuel level input (FLI) is a hard wire signal input to the PCM from the fuel pump (FP) module. Refer to the description of the FLI in the On-Board Diagnostics II Monitors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR REMOVAL WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited, resulting in possible personal injury. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. WARNING: The evaporative emission system contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor. Although not present in large quantities, it still presents the danger of explosion or fire. Disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery to minimize the possibility of an electrical spark occurring, possibly causing a fire or explosion if fuel vapor or fuel liquid is present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Disconnect the battery. 2. Remove the rear seat assembly. 3. Remove the fuel tank sending unit access cover. 4. Disconnect the fuel tank pressure sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the fuel tank pressure sensor. - Disconnect the vapor tubes. INSTALLATION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3996 1. NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Carry out a leak test. See: Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test - Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Intake Air Temperature Sensor Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Temperature Sensor INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Typical Stane Alone/Non-integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into A Drop-in Or Flange Type MAF Sensor The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Page 4001 Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The IAT provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, spark and air flow. The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT sensor. Currently there are two design types of IAT sensors used, a stand alone\non-integrated type (Figure 39) and a integrated (Figure 40) type. Both types function the same, however the integrated type is incorporated into the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand alone sensor. Supercharged vehicles use (2) IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate as described above. However, one is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard OBD II/cold weather input, while a second sensor (IAT2) is located after the supercharger in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature information to the PCM to control border-line spark and to help determine intercooler efficiency. Currently two types of IAT2 sensors are used. A non-integrated screw in type (Figure 39) and an integrated type, which is part of the Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) sensor (Figure 48). The TMAP sensor consists of a IAT thermistor and a manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor. The thermistor portion of the TMAP is used for IAT2 function and operates in the same manner as a non-integrated IAT2. For additional information on the MAP portion of the TMAP, refer to the Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor description and operation found later. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Page 4002 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor THERMAL MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) Sensor The Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor (TMAP) (Figure 48) consists of a manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor and an integrated thermistor. The MAP portion of the sensor uses a piezo-resistive silicon sensing element to provide a voltage proportional to the absolute pressure in the intake manifold. The thermistor portion of the sensor operates in the same manner as an intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. For additional information on how the IAT sensor operates, refer to the Intake Air Temperature Sensor description and operation. For the 2.3L Ranger and 2.3L PZEV Focus, the TMAP sensor is part of the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system. The PCM uses information from the MAP portion of the TMAP sensor, throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor or cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor and crankshaft position (CKP) sensor to determine how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. The thermistor portion of the TMAP sensor is currently not being used on this application. For the 4.6L SC Mustang, the PCM uses manifold absolute pressure information from the MAP portion of the TMAP sensor along with other sensor inputs to determine the proper amount of fuel needed for combustion under varying engine load conditions. The thermistor portion of the TMAP sensor is used as a second IAT sensor. This second IAT sensor, located after the supercharger, provides manifold air temperature information to the PCM. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4006 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) The knock sensor (KS) (Figure 41) is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation THERMAL MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) Sensor The Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor (TMAP) (Figure 48) consists of a manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor and an integrated thermistor. The MAP portion of the sensor uses a piezo-resistive silicon sensing element to provide a voltage proportional to the absolute pressure in the intake manifold. The thermistor portion of the sensor operates in the same manner as an intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. For additional information on how the IAT sensor operates, refer to the Intake Air Temperature Sensor description and operation. For the 2.3L Ranger and 2.3L PZEV Focus, the TMAP sensor is part of the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system. The PCM uses information from the MAP portion of the TMAP sensor, throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor or cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor and crankshaft position (CKP) sensor to determine how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. The thermistor portion of the TMAP sensor is currently not being used on this application. For the 4.6L SC Mustang, the PCM uses manifold absolute pressure information from the MAP portion of the TMAP sensor along with other sensor inputs to determine the proper amount of fuel needed for combustion under varying engine load conditions. The thermistor portion of the TMAP sensor is used as a second IAT sensor. This second IAT sensor, located after the supercharger, provides manifold air temperature information to the PCM. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR Typical Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor The engine oil temperature (EOT) sensor (Figure 35) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system near the oil filter or screwed into the oil pan. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the following: - On Variable Cam Timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM will begin reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 4017 Oxygen Sensor: Harness Locations View 151-2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 4018 View 151-2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 4019 View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 4020 View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 4023 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 4024 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 4025 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4026 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) (Figure 38) detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts. Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to temperatures of 800°C (1400°F). At approximately 300 °C (600°F) the engine can enter closed loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater and the PCM will turn on the heater by providing the ground when the proper conditions occur. Since model year 1998 a high power HO2S heater and heater control system have been installed on the Stream 1 HO2S sensors of most vehicles. The high power heater reaches closed loop fuel control temperatures faster, which allows closed loop engine operation sooner. The use of this heater requires that the HO2S heater control be duty cycled, to prevent damage to the heater. The 6 ohm design is not interchangeable with new style 3.3 ohm heater. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S), LH Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the HO2S with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal. Using the special tool, remove the HO2S. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the HO2S to aid in installation. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 4029 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) RH HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S), RH Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the HO2S with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal. Using the special tool, remove the HO2S. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the HO2S to aid in installation. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 4030 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor LH CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR, LH Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. 3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the catalyst monitor sensor with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor to aid in installation. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 4031 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor RH CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR, RH Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the catalyst monitor sensor with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor to aid in installation. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4035 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The power steering pressure (PSP) switch (Figure 45) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Page 4038 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Sensor POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The power steering pressure (PSP) sensor (Figure 46) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4039 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the power steering pressure (PSP) switch. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 4043 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 90) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System > Page 4046 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 91) is identical in operation as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the underside of the sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4047 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar. Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR tube. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation Throttle Full Open Switch: Description and Operation WIDE OPEN THROTTLE A/C CUT-OFF (WAC) The wide open throttle A/C cutoff relay (may be referred to as the A/C clutch relay) is wired normally open (normally closed for Aviator). There is no direct electrical connection between the A/C switch or EATC Module and the A/C clutch. The PCM will receive a signal indicating that A/C is requested (for some applications, this message is sent through the BUS + and BUS - circuits). When A/C is requested, the PCM will check other A/C related inputs that are available (such as ACP (SW), ACCS). If these inputs indicate A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK (such as coolant temperature, engine rpm, throttle position), the PCM will ground the WAC output (unground for Aviator), closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/C clutch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4054 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4055 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is monitored by the OBD system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4056 Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. NOTE: Air cleaner outlet tube is removed for clarity. Remove the throttle position (TP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the screws. 3 Remove the sensor INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4060 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4061 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Special Tools And Equipment Special Tool(s) Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the battery and tray. 3. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor. 1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4062 2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Connect the electrical connector. 3. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray, check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or incorrect routing position. NOTE: When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the vehicle must relearn its adaptive shift strategy. During this relearning process shifts might be slightly firm, early or delayed. This operation is normal and will not affect the function or durability of the transaxle. Normal operation will return once these transaxle parameters are stored by the vehicle PCM. Install the battery and tray. 4. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should illuminate in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed Sensor Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed Sensor OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR The Output Shaft Speed Sensor (OSS), provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft.The (PCM) uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information generated. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 4068 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) (Figure 52) is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low velocity, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control, transmission/transaxle shift scheduling and torque converter clutch scheduling. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation Throttle Full Open Switch: Description and Operation WIDE OPEN THROTTLE A/C CUT-OFF (WAC) The wide open throttle A/C cutoff relay (may be referred to as the A/C clutch relay) is wired normally open (normally closed for Aviator). There is no direct electrical connection between the A/C switch or EATC Module and the A/C clutch. The PCM will receive a signal indicating that A/C is requested (for some applications, this message is sent through the BUS + and BUS - circuits). When A/C is requested, the PCM will check other A/C related inputs that are available (such as ACP (SW), ACCS). If these inputs indicate A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK (such as coolant temperature, engine rpm, throttle position), the PCM will ground the WAC output (unground for Aviator), closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/C clutch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4075 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4076 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is monitored by the OBD system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4077 Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. NOTE: Air cleaner outlet tube is removed for clarity. Remove the throttle position (TP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the screws. 3 Remove the sensor INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4081 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4082 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Special Tools And Equipment Special Tool(s) Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the battery and tray. 3. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor. 1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4083 2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Connect the electrical connector. 3. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray, check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or incorrect routing position. NOTE: When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the vehicle must relearn its adaptive shift strategy. During this relearning process shifts might be slightly firm, early or delayed. This operation is normal and will not affect the function or durability of the transaxle. Normal operation will return once these transaxle parameters are stored by the vehicle PCM. Install the battery and tray. 4. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should illuminate in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation VARIABLE CAM TIMING SYSTEM Overview Variable Cam Timing (VCT) enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft (phase-shafting) as a function of engine operating conditions. There are four types of VCT systems. - Exhaust Phase Shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded. - Intake Phase Shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced. - Dual Equal Phase Shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and equally advanced or retarded. - Dual Independent Phase Shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are shifted independently. All systems have four operational modes; idle, part throttle, wide open throttle and default mode. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the phase angle are controlled by air flow, engine oil temperature and engine coolant temperature. At part and wide open throttle the PCM controls cam timing based on engine RPM, load and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced emissions and enhanced engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the added benefit of improve torque. In addition, on some applications a VCT system can eliminated the need for an external Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of the EGR system is accomplished by controlling the overlap in valve opening between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve closing. Currently for the 2004 model year, Ford Motor Company uses the PS and DEPS systems. The IPS system is on Lincoln LS, Thunderbird and Focus SVT and the DEPS system is on the F150 5.4L 3V. Variable Cam Timing Variable Cam Timing System The VCT (variable cam timing) system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a CMP (camshaft position sensor) and trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel has a number of equally spaced teeth equal to the number (n) of cylinders on a bank plus one extra tooth (n+1). Four cylinder and V8 engines use a CMP 4+1 tooth trigger wheel. V6 engines use a CMP 3+1 tooth trigger wheel. The extra tooth placed between the equally spaced teeth represents the CMP signal for that bank. A CKP (crankshaft position sensor) provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning information in 10 degree increments (Figure 115). 1. The PCM receives input signals from the IAT (intake air temperature), ECT (engine coolant temperature), EOT (engine oil temperature), CMP, TP (throttle position), MAF (mass air flow) and CKP to determine the operating conditions of the engine. At idle (low engine speeds and closed throttle) the PCM controls camshaft position based on air and coolant temperatures. During part and wide open throttle, camshaft position is determined by engine RPM, load and throttle position. The VCT system will not operate until the engine is at normal operating temperature. 2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the proper conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly. As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4087 cycle. The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It will continually update the VCT solenoid duty cycle until desired positioning is achieved. A difference between the desired and actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM's VCT control loop. The PCM will disable the VCT and place the camshaft in a default position if a fault is detected. A related DTC will also be set when this fault is detected. 5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly which advances or retards the cam timing. One half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the timing chain. Oil chambers between the two halves couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the camshaft to rotate in either a advance or retard position depending on the oil flow. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed Sensor Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed Sensor OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR The Output Shaft Speed Sensor (OSS), provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft.The (PCM) uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information generated. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 4093 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) (Figure 52) is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low velocity, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control, transmission/transaxle shift scheduling and torque converter clutch scheduling. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Diverter Solenoid > Component Information > Description and Operation Air Diverter Solenoid: Description and Operation AIR BYPASS SOLENOID Secondary Air Injection Bypass Solenoid The secondary air injection bypass (AIR bypass) solenoid (Figure 113) is used by the PCM to control vacuum to the secondary air injection diverter (AIR diverter) valve. The AIR bypass solenoid is a normally closed solenoid. The AIR bypass solenoid also has a filtered vent feature to permit vacuum release. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Diverter Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation Air Diverter Valve: Description and Operation AIR DIVERTER VALVE Air Injection Diverter (AIR Diverter) Valve The secondary air injection diverter (AIR diverter) valve (Figure 114) is used with the electric AIR pump to provide on/off control of air to the exhaust manifold and catalytic converter. When the electric AIR pump is on and vacuum is supplied to the AIR diverter valve, air passes the integral check valve disk. When the electric AIR pump is off, and vacuum is removed from the AIR diverter valve, the integral check valve disk is held on the seat and stops air from being drawn into the exhaust system and prevents the back flow of the exhaust into the Secondary Air Injection System. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Injection Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation Air Injection Pump: Description and Operation ELECTRIC AIR PUMP Electric Air Pump The electric AIR pump (Figure 112) provides pressurized air to the Secondary Air Injection system. The electric AIR pump functions independently of rpm and is controlled by the PCM. The electric AIR pump is only used for short periods of time. Delivery of air is dependent on the amount of system backpressure and system voltage. The inlet system of the AIR pump incorporates a splash cap which helps to guard against dirt and water. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation CATALYST AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS Overview V-Engines In-Line Engines The Catalytic Converter and Exhaust Systems work together to control the release of harmful engine exhaust emissions into the atmosphere. The engine exhaust gas consists mainly of nitrogen (N), carbon dioxide (CO2) and water vapor (H2O). However, it also contains carbon monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx), hydrogen (H), and various unburned hydrocarbons (HCs). CO, NOx, and HCs are major air pollutants, and their emission into the atmosphere must be controlled. The exhaust system generally consists of an exhaust manifold, front exhaust pipe, front heated oxygen sensor (HO2S), rear exhaust pipe, catalyst HO2S, a muffler and an exhaust tailpipe. The catalytic converter is typically installed between the front and rear exhaust pipes. On some vehicle applications, more than one catalyst will be used between the front and rear exhaust pipes. Catalytic converter efficiency is monitored by the On Board Diagnostic (OBD) system strategy in the PCM. Refer to the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor-Federal Test Procedure at the beginning of Description and Operation for specific OBD catalyst monitor information. The number of HO2S(s) used in the exhaust stream and the location of these sensors depend on the vehicle emission certification level (i.e. LEV, ULEV, PZEV). Refer to (Figure 121) and (Figure 122) for typical HO2S stream locations and naming convention. On most vehicles only two HO2S are used in an exhaust stream. The front sensors (HO2S11/HO2S21) before the catalyst will be used for primary fuel control while the ones after the catalyst (HO2S12/HO2S22) will be utilized to monitor catalyst efficiency. However, some Partial Zero Emission Vehicles (PZEV) will utilize three HO2S sensors for each engine bank. The stream 1 sensors (HO2S11/HO2S21) before the catalyst will be used for primary fuel control, the next group of sensors or stream 2 (HO2S12/HO2S22) is utilized to monitor the light-off catalyst and the last group of sensors or stream 3 (HO2S13/HO2S23) is utilized for long term fuel trim control to optimize catalyst efficiency (Fore Aft Oxygen Sensor Control). Currently Ford's PZEV vehicles use only a Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4108 4-cylinder engine, so only the Bank 1 HO2S(s) will be utilized. Catalytic Converter A catalyst is a material that remains unchanged when it initiates and increases the speed of a chemical reaction. A catalyst will also enable a chemical reaction to occur at a lower temperature. The concentration of exhaust gas products released to the atmosphere must be controlled. The catalytic converter assists in this task. It contains a catalyst in the form of a specially treated ceramic honeycomb structure saturated with catalytically active precious metals. As the exhaust gases come in contact with the catalyst, they are changed into mostly harmless products. The catalyst initiates and speeds up heat producing chemical reactions of the exhaust gas components so they are used up as much as possible. Light Off Catalyst As the catalyst heats up, converter efficiency rises rapidly. The point at which conversion efficiency exceeds 50% is called catalyst light off. For most catalysts this point occurs at 475 to 575°F (246 to 301°C). A fast light catalyst is a three way catalyst (TWC) that is located as close to the exhaust manifold as possible. Because the light off catalyst is located close too the exhaust manifold it will light off faster and reduce emissions quicker than the catalyst located under the body. Once the catalyst lights off, the catalyst will quickly reach the maximum conversion efficiency for that catalyst. Three-Way Catalyst (TWC) Conversion Efficiency TWC Conversion Efficiency Chart A TWC requires a stoichiometric fuel ratio, 14.7 pounds of air to 1 pound of fuel (14.7:1), for high conversion efficiency. In order to achieve these high efficiencies, the air/fuel ratio must be tightly controlled with a narrow window of stoichiometry. Deviations outside of this window will greatly decrease the conversion efficiency (Figure 123). For example a rich mixture will decrease the HC and CO conversion efficiency while a lean mixture will decreases the NOx conversion efficiency. Exhaust System Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4109 Typical Bank 1 Catalyst Two HO2S Configuration Typical Bank 1 Catalyst Three HO2S Configuration The purpose of the exhaust system is to convey engine emissions from the exhaust manifold to the atmosphere. Engine exhaust emissions are directed from the engine exhaust manifold to the catalytic converter through the front exhaust pipe. An HO2S is mounted on the front exhaust pipe before the catalyst. The catalytic converter reduces the concentration of carbon monoxide (CO), unburned hydrocarbons (HCs) and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the exhaust emissions to an acceptable level. The reduced exhaust emissions are directed from the catalytic converter through another HO2S mounted in the rear exhaust pipe (Figure 124) and then on into the muffler. Lastly, the exhaust emissions are directed to the atmosphere through an exhaust tailpipe. Note on some Partial Zero Emission Vehicles (PZEV), there will be a total of 3 HO2S in the exhaust stream. One near the exhaust manifold (stream 1), one in the middle of the light-off catalyst (stream 2) and the third (stream 3) is mounted after the light-off catalyst (Figure 125). Underbody Catalyst The underbody catalyst is located after the light off catalyst. The underbody catalyst may be in-line with the light off catalyst, or the underbody catalyst may be common to two light off catalysts, forming a "Y" pipe configuration. For an exact configuration of the catalyst and exhaust system for a specific vehicle, refer to the Exhaust System for that vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4110 Three-Way Catalytic Converter The three-way catalytic (TWC) converter contains either platinum (Pt) and rhodium (Rh) or palladium (Pd) and rhodium (Rh). The TWC converter catalyzes the oxidation reactions of unburned HCs and CO and the reduction reaction of NOx. The three-way conversion can be best accomplished by always operating the engine air fuel/ratio at or close to stoichiometry. Exhaust Manifold/Runners The exhaust manifold runners collect exhaust gases from engine cylinders. The number of exhaust manifolds and exhaust manifold runners depends on the engine configuration and number of cylinders. Exhaust Pipes Exhaust pipes are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase the life of the product. The pipes serve as guides for the flow of exhaust gases from the engine exhaust manifold through the catalytic converter and the muffler. Heated Oxygen Sensors (HO2S) The HO2S provide the powertrain control module (PCM) with voltage and frequency information related to the oxygen content of the exhaust gas. (Refer to the PCM Inputs for a description of how the HO2S operates.) Muffler Mufflers are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase the life of the product. The muffler reduces the level of noise produced by the engine, and it also reduces the noise produced by exhaust gases as they travel from the catalytic converter to the atmosphere. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4111 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - 3.0L (4V) Removal and Installation 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove and discard the nuts. ^ Discard the gasket. 3. Remove the U-bolt, disconnect the catalytic converter from the hanger. 4. Remove and discard the nuts between main silencer and after silencer pipe. 5. Remove converter and main silencer together. 6. Remove converter from main silencer on the floor. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Install a new gasket. ^ Install new nuts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4116 Canister Purge Control Valve: Description and Operation EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE EVAP Canister Purge Valve Electronic EVAP Canister Purge Valve The EVAP canister purge valve (Figure 101) is part of the Enhanced EVAP system that is controlled by the PCM. This valve controls the flow of vapors (purging) from the EVAP canister to the intake manifold during various engine operating modes. The EVAP canister purge valve is normally closed valve. The electronic EVAP canister purge valve (Figure 102) controls the flow of vapors electronically by way of a solenoid thereby, eliminating the need for an electronic vacuum regulator and vacuum diaphragm. The PCM outputs a signal between 0% and 100% duty cycle to control the EVAP canister purge valve. On applications with Electronic EVAP canister purge valve, the PCM outputs a signal between 0 mA and 1000 mA to control the solenoid. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4117 Canister Purge Control Valve: Service and Repair EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CANISTER PURGE VALVE REMOVAL WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited, resulting in possible personal injury. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. WARNING: The evaporative emission system contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor. Although not present in large quantities, it still presents the danger of explosion or fire. Disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery to minimize the possibility of an electrical spark occurring, possibly causing a fire or explosion if fuel vapor or fuel liquid is present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Disconnect the battery. 2. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve. - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Disconnect the vacuum tube. - Disconnect the EVAP canister outlet tube. - Disconnect the EVAP return tube. 3. Remove the EVAP canister purge valve. - Remove the two nuts. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL (R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Carry out a leak test. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test - Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair Evaporative Canister Filter: Service and Repair DUST SEPARATOR REMOVAL WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited, resulting in possible personal injury. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. WARNING: The evaporative emission system contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor. Although not present in large quantities, it still presents the danger of explosion or fire. Disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery to minimize the possibility of an electrical spark occurring, possibly causing a fire or explosion if fuel vapor or fuel liquid is present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Disconnect the battery. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the EVAP canister outlet tube. 4. Disconnect the canister vent solenoid electrical connector and the remote canister vent hose. 5. Remove the EVAP canister bracket assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4121 6. Remove the remote canister vent hose. 7. Remove the dust separator. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL (R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Carry out a leak test. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test - Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4125 Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Service and Repair EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CANISTER REMOVAL WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited, resulting in possible personal injury. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. WARNING: The evaporative emission system contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor. Although not present in large quantities, it still presents the danger of explosion or fire. Disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery to minimize the possibility of an electrical spark occurring, possibly causing a fire or explosion if fuel vapor or fuel liquid is present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Disconnect the battery. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the EVAP canister outlet tube. 4. Disconnect the canister vent solenoid electrical connector and the remote canister vent hose. 5. Remove the EVAP canister bracket assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4126 6. Remove the remote canister vent hose, dust separator and canister vent solenoid. 7. Remove the EVAP canister outlet tube. 8. Remove the EVAP canister. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL (R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Carry out a leak test. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test - Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor In-Line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor The fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor (Figure 103) or inline fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor (Figure 104) is used to measure the fuel tank pressure during the EVAP Leak Check Monitor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Solenoid, Evaporative System > Component Information > Description and Operation Leak Detection Solenoid: Description and Operation CANISTER VENT SOLENOID Typical Canister Vent (CV) Solenoid During the EVAP Leak Check Monitor, the canister vent (CV) solenoid (Figure 105) seals the EVAP canister from atmospheric pressure. This allows the EVAP canister purge valve to obtain the target vacuum in the fuel tank during the EVAP Leak Check Monitor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations View 151-24 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 4136 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 4137 Leak Detection Valve: Description and Operation CANISTER VENT SOLENOID Typical Canister Vent (CV) Solenoid During the EVAP Leak Check Monitor, the canister vent (CV) solenoid (Figure 105) seals the EVAP canister from atmospheric pressure. This allows the EVAP canister purge valve to obtain the target vacuum in the fuel tank during the EVAP Leak Check Monitor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 4138 Leak Detection Valve: Service and Repair EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CANISTER VENT SOLENOID REMOVAL WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited, resulting in possible personal injury. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. WARNING: The evaporative emission system contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor. Although not present in large quantities, it still presents the danger of explosion or fire. Disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery to minimize the possibility of an electrical spark occurring, possibly causing a fire or explosion if fuel vapor or fuel liquid is present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Disconnect the battery. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the EVAP canister outlet tube. 4. Disconnect the canister vent solenoid electrical connector and the remote canister vent hose. 5. Remove the EVAP canister bracket assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 4139 6. Remove the remote canister vent hose and the dust separator. 7. Remove the canister vent solenoid. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Carry out a leak test. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test - Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid > Component Information > Specifications EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid: Specifications ITEM..................................................................................................................................................... .................................................SPECIFICATIONS EGR vacuum regulator valve bolts/nuts............................................................................................... ............................................................6 Nm (53 lb-in) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4144 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4145 EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid: Description and Operation EGR VACUUM REGULATOR SOLENOID EVR Solenoid Test Graph EGR Vacuum Regulator Solenoid Data Chart The EGR vacuum regulator solenoid (EVR), (Figure 92) is an electromagnetic device which is used to regulate the vacuum supply to the EGR valve. The solenoid contains a coil which magnetically controls the position of a disc to regulate the vacuum. As the duty cycle to the coil increases, the vacuum signal passed through the solenoid to the EGR valve also increases. Vacuum not directed to the EGR valve is vented through the solenoid vent to atmosphere. Note that at 0% duty cycle (no electrical signal applied), the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid allows some vacuum to pass, but not enough to open the EGR valve. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4146 EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid: Service and Repair EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VACUUM REGULATOR VALVE REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the EGR vacuum regulator valve. - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Disconnect the vacuum hoses. 3. Remove the PCM wiring harness bracket. - Remove the nut. - Position the bracket aside. 4. Remove the bolts and remove the EGR vacuum regulator valve. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube > Component Information > Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4150 EGR Tube: Description and Operation Orifice Tube Assembly Orifice Tube Assembly The orifice tube assembly (Figure 94) is a section of tubing connecting the exhaust system to the intake manifold. The assembly provides the flow path for the EGR to the intake manifold and also contains the metering orifice and two pressure pick-up tubes. The internal metering orifice creates a measurable pressure drop across it as the EGR valve opens and closes. This pressure differential across the orifice is picked up by the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor which provides feedback to the PCM. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4151 EGR Tube: Service and Repair EXHAUST MANIFOLD TO EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VALVE TUBE REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the EGR tube nut at the manifold connector. 2. Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor from the EGR tube. 3. Disconnect the EGR tube fitting and remove the EGR tube. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Specifications EGR Valve: Specifications ITEM..................................................................................................................................................... .................................................SPECIFICATIONS EGR valve bolts.................................................................................................................................... ..........................................................25 Nm (18 lb-ft) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4155 EGR Valve: Description and Operation Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve EGR Valve The EGR valve (Figure 93) in the Differential Pressure Feedback EGR system is a conventional, vacuum-actuated EGR valve. The valve increases or decreases the flow of exhaust gas recirculation. As vacuum applied to the EGR valve diaphragm overcomes the spring force, the valve begins to open. As the vacuum signal weakens, at 5.4 kPa (1.6 in-Hg) or less, the spring force closes the valve. The EGR valve is fully open at about 15 kPa (4.5 in-Hg). Since EGR flow requirement varies greatly, providing service specifications on flow rate is impractical. The on-board diagnostic system monitors the EGR valve function and triggers a Diagnostic Trouble Code if the test criteria is not met. The EGR valve flow rate is not measured directly as part of the field diagnostic procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4156 EGR Valve: Service and Repair EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VALVE REMOVAL 1. Remove the EGR valve. 1 Disconnect the vacuum line. 2 Disconnect the EGR tube. 3 Remove the EGR valve and discard the gasket. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: The EGR valve sealing surfaces are soft metals. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Carefully clean all sealing surfaces and install a new EGR valve gasket. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 4160 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 90) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System > Page 4163 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 91) is identical in operation as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the underside of the sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4164 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar. Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR tube. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Oil Separator > Component Information > Specifications Oil Separator: Specifications ITEM..................................................................................................................................................... .................................................SPECIFICATIONS Crankcase vent oil separator bolts....................................................................................................... ...........................................................10 Nm (89 lb-in) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Oil Separator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4169 Oil Separator: Service and Repair CRANKCASE VENT OIL SEPARATOR REMOVAL 1. Remove the left cylinder head. 2. Remove the two bolts. 3. Remove the crankcase vent oil separator and discard the gasket. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: The sealing surfaces are soft metal. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Carefully clean both sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner and install a new crankcase vent oil separator gasket. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > PCV Valve Hose > Component Information > Specifications PCV Valve Hose: Specifications ITEM..................................................................................................................................................... .................................................SPECIFICATIONS PCV tube bolt....................................................................................................................................... ..........................................................23 Nm (17 lb-ft) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Service and Repair POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) VALVE REMOVAL 1. Remove the crankcase vent hose from the air cleaner outlet tube. 2. Remove the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and detach the wire harness from the air cleaner box stud. 3. Loosen the clamp. 4. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube and the air cleaner box cover. 1 Release the air cleaner box clamps. 2 Remove the air cleaner outlet tube from the throttle body. 3 Separate the air cleaner box outlet cover from the air cleaner box. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4176 4 Remove the air cleaner outlet tube and the air cleaner box cover assembly. 5. Remove the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) hose from the PCV valve. 6. Remove the PCV valve by rotating the valve 180 degrees and removing it from the oil separator. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor In-Line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor The fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor (Figure 103) or inline fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor (Figure 104) is used to measure the fuel tank pressure during the EVAP Leak Check Monitor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 4184 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 90) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System > Page 4187 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 91) is identical in operation as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the underside of the sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4188 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar. Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR tube. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pressure Test Port: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System PRESSURE TEST POINT There is a pressure test point with a schrader fitting in the fuel rail that relieves fuel pressure and measures the fuel injector supply pressure for service and diagnostic procedures. Before servicing or testing the fuel system, read any CAUTION, WARNING, and HANDLING information. ON VEHICLES NOT EQUIPPED WITH A SCHRADER VALVE, USE ROTUNDA FUEL PRESSURE TEST KIT #134-R0087 OR EQUIVALENT. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System > Page 4196 Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System SCHRADER/SERVICE VALVE schrader/service valve (if equipped) provides a service port to the low pressure fuel system. This valve is needed to relieve the pressure in the system before and during service. This valve could also be used to monitor the pressure near the injectors during diagnostic procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4197 Fuel Pressure Test Port: Service and Repair FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE REMOVAL WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel system pressure must be relieved. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Remove the pressure relief valve. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Fuel Pressure Gauge SPECIAL TOOL(S) 1. WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Fuel supply tubes will remain pressurized for long periods of time after engine shutdown. This pressure must be relieved before repairing of the fuel system has begun. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system. Remove the Schrader valve cap at the end of the fuel injection supply manifold and attach the Fuel Pressure Gauge. 2. NOTE: Position a suitable container for the fuel to drain into. Open the manual valve slowly to relieve the system pressure. This may drain fuel from the system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................ .......................................................... 725 - 775 RPM Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4207 Accelerator Pedal: Description and Operation ACCELERATION CONTROL The acceleration control consists of the pedal and shaft assembly, accelerator cable and accelerator cable bracket. WARNING: Make sure surrounding components such as wiring, hoses, sound insulation and floor carpeting are not contacting the sliding inner cable of the accelerator cable or the accelerator pedal and shaft. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. The throttle is controlled by an accelerator cable attached to the accelerator pedal and shaft. The accelerator pedal and shaft should travel smoothly from the idle to the wide-open throttle positions. Hesitation on return or prevention of return to the idle position must not occur. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Accelerator Pedal: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION Verify the condition by operating the accelerator pedal and shaft from idle to wide open-throttle and back again. Check for any resistance in forward travel of the accelerator pedal and shaft or hesitation on return. If a concern exists, visually inspect all components of the accelerator pedal and shaft. Look for damage or binding of the accelerator cable. Look for obstructions at the throttle body and accelerator pedal and shaft. For vehicles equipped with speed control, examine the speed control cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4210 Symptom Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4211 Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR PEDAL AND SHAFT REMOVAL 2.0L Zetec 1. Disconnect the accelerator cable from the throttle lever and bracket. 3.0L (4V) 2. Disconnect the crankcase ventilation hose. 3. Disconnect the accelerator cable from the throttle lever. 1 Rotate the throttle lever. 2 Slide the accelerator cable end out of the throttle lever. All vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4212 4. Remove the accelerator pedal and shaft assembly. 1 Disconnect the accelerator cable. 2 Remove the bolts. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: To ease installation, remove the grommet from the throttle lever and install it onto the accelerator cable end. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSORS (APPS) The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand. 1. There are three pedal position sensors required for system monitoring. APP1 has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and APP2 & APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. 2. There are two VREF wires, two signal return wires and three signal wires (total of seven wires and pins) between the PCM and APPS assembly. - 2-5 V Reference Voltage - 2- Signal Return (ground) - APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0) - APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5) - APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5) 3. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. Electronic Throttle Body And Accelerator Pedal Assembly 4. The three pedal position signals ensure a correct input to the PCM, if any one signal has a fault. The PCM knows if a signal is wrong by calculating where it should be, inferred by the other signals. A value will be substituted for a faulty signal if two out of the three signals are bad. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE REMOVAL 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Remove the battery tray. 3. Remove the bolt and the intake pipe. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Make sure the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel correctly. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4223 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4224 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire Terminals Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4225 Typical "Drop-in" Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The mass air flow (MAF) sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire (Figure 42). If the hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the air mass flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology (IBT) with an integrated intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4226 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): Customer Interest Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering TSB 06-11-7 06/12/06 2001-2005 ESCAPE 3.0L UNSTABLE IDLE - 2001-2003 ESCAPE 3.0L AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SHUDDER - MEXICO ONLY FORD: 2001-2005 Escape ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine may exhibit idle speeds outside the specified range. Some 2001-2003 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and CD4E automatic transaxle may exhibit a transmission shudder. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If the concern is a 2001-2005 Escape with idle speeds outside the specified range: a. Install a new idle air control (IAC) valve with jumper harness included in the kit. The new Denso brand IAC will be installed with the electrical connector facing the opposite direction of the original (Hitachi) valve which is why the jumper harness is required. The original (Hitachi) IAC connector faces the front of the vehicle while the new Denso IAC connector faces toward the rear of the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 4235 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 4236 b. Referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. If the concern is a 2001 - 2003 Escape with transaxle shudder, drain, flush and refill the transmission fluid with MERCON(R) Multi-Purpose Automatic Transmission Fluid. Then, referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the PCM using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 3. When reprogramming the PCM use blank path programming. Select the proper file from the chart and manually enter the PCM part number or tear tag number to obtain the updated calibration file. To Perform Blank Path Programming: 1. Connect WDS/IDS to vehicle. 2. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK. 3. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK. 4. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK. 5. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press TICK. 6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Keep ignition in the "OFF" position, press TICK and you will be asked to cycle the key "ON" and "OFF" a few times. Please keep the key position in the "OFF" position through the key cycles. 7. Screen will show "The diagnostic tester is unable to communicate with this vehicle." You will be prompted to "select a vehicle from the vehicle list", press TICK. 8. A list of vehicles will be displayed, select ALL OTHERS, and press TICK. 9. Screen shows "To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of the following: Vehicle Calibration number (7 digits), Tear Tag number (4 digits), or PCM part number, press TICK. 10. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed above. Press TICK. 11. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) per Workshop Manual, Section 419-01. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 4237 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9F715 42 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering TSB 06-11-7 06/12/06 2001-2005 ESCAPE 3.0L UNSTABLE IDLE - 2001-2003 ESCAPE 3.0L AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SHUDDER - MEXICO ONLY FORD: 2001-2005 Escape ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine may exhibit idle speeds outside the specified range. Some 2001-2003 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and CD4E automatic transaxle may exhibit a transmission shudder. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If the concern is a 2001-2005 Escape with idle speeds outside the specified range: a. Install a new idle air control (IAC) valve with jumper harness included in the kit. The new Denso brand IAC will be installed with the electrical connector facing the opposite direction of the original (Hitachi) valve which is why the jumper harness is required. The original (Hitachi) IAC connector faces the front of the vehicle while the new Denso IAC connector faces toward the rear of the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 4243 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 4244 b. Referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. If the concern is a 2001 - 2003 Escape with transaxle shudder, drain, flush and refill the transmission fluid with MERCON(R) Multi-Purpose Automatic Transmission Fluid. Then, referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the PCM using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 3. When reprogramming the PCM use blank path programming. Select the proper file from the chart and manually enter the PCM part number or tear tag number to obtain the updated calibration file. To Perform Blank Path Programming: 1. Connect WDS/IDS to vehicle. 2. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK. 3. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK. 4. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK. 5. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press TICK. 6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Keep ignition in the "OFF" position, press TICK and you will be asked to cycle the key "ON" and "OFF" a few times. Please keep the key position in the "OFF" position through the key cycles. 7. Screen will show "The diagnostic tester is unable to communicate with this vehicle." You will be prompted to "select a vehicle from the vehicle list", press TICK. 8. A list of vehicles will be displayed, select ALL OTHERS, and press TICK. 9. Screen shows "To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of the following: Vehicle Calibration number (7 digits), Tear Tag number (4 digits), or PCM part number, press TICK. 10. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed above. Press TICK. 11. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) per Workshop Manual, Section 419-01. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 4245 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9F715 42 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Specifications Fuel: Specifications Fuel Type ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................ 87 Octane Unleaded Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Filler Cap: Description and Operation FUEL CAP OFF INDICATOR LAMP The Fuel Cap Off Indicator Lamp (FCIL) is an output signal that is controlled by the PCM and will illuminate when the strategy determines that there is a failure in the vapor management system due to the fuel filler cap not being sealed properly. This would be detected by the inability to pull vacuum in the fuel tank, after a fueling event. NOTE: The Escape, Freestar/Monterey, Mustang, Thunderbird, Town Car, Lincoln LS6/LS8, Expedition and Navigator do not have a dedicated (separate) output wire from the PCM to the instrument cluster. The PCM commands the FCIL on and off through the BUS +/- circuits (SCP). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator: Description and Operation FUEL CAP OFF INDICATOR LAMP The Fuel Cap Off Indicator Lamp (FCIL) is an output signal that is controlled by the PCM and will illuminate when the strategy determines that there is a failure in the vapor management system due to the fuel filler cap not being sealed properly. This would be detected by the inability to pull vacuum in the fuel tank, after a fueling event. NOTE: The Escape, Freestar/Monterey, Mustang, Thunderbird, Town Car, Lincoln LS6/LS8, Expedition and Navigator do not have a dedicated (separate) output wire from the PCM to the instrument cluster. The PCM commands the FCIL on and off through the BUS +/- circuits (SCP). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Fuel Pressure Gauge SPECIAL TOOL(S) 1. WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Fuel supply tubes will remain pressurized for long periods of time after engine shutdown. This pressure must be relieved before repairing of the fuel system has begun. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system. Remove the Schrader valve cap at the end of the fuel injection supply manifold and attach the Fuel Pressure Gauge. 2. NOTE: Position a suitable container for the fuel to drain into. Open the manual valve slowly to relieve the system pressure. This may drain fuel from the system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Fuel Injector Wiring Harness > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Injector Wiring Harness: Service and Repair FUEL CHARGING WIRING HARNESS REMOVAL WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. Remove the upper intake manifold. 2. Disconnect the coil-on-plug electrical connectors. 3. Disconnect the radio ignition noise suppressor electrical connector. 4. Remove the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Fuel Injector Wiring Harness > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4263 5. Disconnect the 16-pin electrical connectors. 6. Disconnect power steering pressure (PSP) switch electrical connector. 7. NOTE: One connector is shown, the other five connectors are similar. Disconnect the six fuel injector electrical connectors and release the wiring harness locators from the fuel injection supply manifold. 8. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 9. Remove the RH wheel and tire assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Fuel Injector Wiring Harness > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4264 10. Remove the RH lower splash shield. 11. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 12. NOTE: The oil pressure sensor is located behind the rear of the A/C compressor. The A/C compressor has been removed for clarity. Disconnect the oil pressure sensor electrical connector. 13. Lower the vehicle. 14. Remove the fuel charging wiring harness from the vehicle. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Line Coupler: Description and Operation FUEL LINES AND FITTINGS Fuel Line Assembly A fuel line assembly (Figure 84) consists of flexible hose and/or stainless steel seamless tubing, end fittings and tube nuts. The hose is a conductive polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) liner reinforced with a stainless steel wire braided covering. The fittings are inserted into the hose ends and crimped into place. The stainless steel tubing contains end fittings which are brazed to the tube. There are high pressure fuel lines that are identified by either 1/4-inch or 3/8-inch outer diameter and a low pressure fuel line identified by a 1/2-inch outer diameter. The low pressure fuel line has a quick-connect at one end for connection to the fuel rail. The other fittings used on the natural gas vehicle to connect fuel components are SAE O-ring face seal tube fittings. There are two end types: an O-ring face seal end and a straight thread end. On tee and elbow fittings, a washer and a positionable nut are provided to aid in orientation of the fitting. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Spring Lock Couplings SPRING LOCK COUPLINGS Fuel Pipe 1/2 Inch Remover (Green) SPECIAL TOOL(S) DISCONNECT WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before repairing or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel system pressure must be relieved. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Remove the fuel line clip. 4. Install the special tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 4270 5. Close and push the special tool into the open side of the cage. 6. Separate the coupling. 7. Remove the special tool. CONNECT 1. Clean and inspect both coupling ends. Install new O-ring seals and garter springs if necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 4271 2. Fit the male coupling into the female end and push until the garter spring snaps over the flared end of the female coupling. 3. Verify coupling engagement by pulling on the lines. 4. Install the fuel line clip. 5. Connect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 4272 Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Vapor Tube Fittings VAPOR TUBE FITTINGS DISCONNECT 1. WARNING: The evaporative emission system contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor. Although not present in large quantities, it still presents the danger of explosion or fire. Disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery to minimize the possibility of an electrical spark occurring, possibly causing a fire or explosion if fuel vapor or liquid fuel is present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the vapor tube from the fitting. 1 Squeeze the fitting. 2 Disconnect the vapor tube from the fitting. CONNECT 1. Clean and inspect the fitting and the tube for damage. 2. Remove any dirt or obstructions. 3. Push the tube into the fitting until it snaps in place. 4. Pull on the connection to make sure the fitting is secure. 5. Connect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 4273 Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Push Connect Quick Release Coupling QUICK RELEASE COUPLING - PUSH CONNECT DISCONNECT 1. WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel- related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before repairing or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel pressure must be relieved to prevent accidental spraying of fuel, causing personal injury or a fire hazard. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Separate the coupling. 1 Depress the tabs 2 Separate the coupling. CONNECT 1. Clean and inspect the coupling and the tube for damage. 2. Align the tube to the coupling and push until you hear a click. 3. Pull on the coupling to make sure it is fully engaged. 4. Connect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 4274 Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair R-Clip Quick Release Coupling QUICK RELEASE COUPLING - R-CLIP DISCONNECT WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before repairing or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel pressure must be relieved to prevent accidental spraying of fuel, causing personal injury or a fire hazard. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip components which may cause fuel leaks. 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Remove the shipping tab by bending downward. 4. Spread the R-clip legs and push the clip into the fitting. 5. Separate the fitting from the tube. CONNECT 1. Clean and inspect the fitting and the tube for damage. Remove any foreign material or obstructions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 4275 2. Insert the R-clip into the fitting. 3. Align the tube and the fitting. 4. Insert the tube in the fitting and push together until a click is heard. 5. Pull on the connection to make sure it is fully engaged. 6. Connect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System Fuel Pressure Regulator: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System The fuel system consists of the following 1. Fuel Rail 2. Fuel Injector 3. Fuel Pump Module (FPM) 4. Fuel Tank 5. Fuel Lines 6. Fuel Filter The engines are equipped with sequential multiport fuel injection that is supplied by a new returnless fuel delivery system (RFS). The powertrain control module (PCM) is able to maintain constant fuel pressure by varying fuel pump module (FPM) output. This is accomplished by increasing or decreasing voltage supplied to the tank mounted FPM. The RFS offers improved economy, lower fuel temperature and decreased fuel vapor in the tank. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System > Page 4280 Fuel Pressure Regulator: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR Fuel Pressure Regulator The fuel pressure regulator (Figure 82) used in the Natural Gas fuel system is a single-stage pressure reducing regulator which expands natural gas from storage pressures of 1,379 to 20,685 kPa (200 to 3,000 psig) to engine fuel injector pressures of 724 to 862 kPa (105 to 125 psig). The regulator contains a pressure relief device, a 1,896 kPa (275 psig) check valve, which protects the low pressure fuel system. The low pressure fuel system no longer must fulfill the design requirements of the high pressure fuel system, therefore reducing cost, weight and complexity. When gas expands, the fuel temperature drops significantly causing extreme cold temperatures (-177°C or -160°F) that may damage synthetic fuel system components as well as cause water vapor within the fuel to condense, freeze and plug the lines, valve and injectors. To prevent this, engine coolant is routed through the fuel pressure regulator to warm the fuel before it expands. The regulator has an internal thermostat in its coolant bowl to control the flow of engine coolant. This prevents overheating and subsequent thinning of the fuel which may cause lean combustion. Outlet coolant flow is restricted by the thermostat when it rises above approximately 82°C (100°F). If service of the coolant bowl and/or thermostat is required, the coolant bowl and thermostat are serviced separately. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-27 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4284 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR Fuel Rai Pressure (FRP) Sensor The fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor (Figure 36) is a diaphragm strain gauge device in which resistance changes with pressure. The electrical resistance of a strain gauge increases as pressure increases, and decreases as pressure decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to pressure. Strain gauge type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The FRP sensor measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulse width and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder. Fuel Rai Pressure (FRP) Sensor The fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor (Figure 37) senses the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The return fuel line to the fuel tank has been deleted in this type of fuel system. The differential fuel/intake manifold pressure together with measured fuel temperature provides an indication of the fuel vapors in the fuel rail. Both differential pressure and temperature feedback signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserve fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System > Page 4287 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System INJECTION PRESSURE SENSOR Injection pressure sensor which measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulsewidth and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pressure Test Port: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System PRESSURE TEST POINT There is a pressure test point with a schrader fitting in the fuel rail that relieves fuel pressure and measures the fuel injector supply pressure for service and diagnostic procedures. Before servicing or testing the fuel system, read any CAUTION, WARNING, and HANDLING information. ON VEHICLES NOT EQUIPPED WITH A SCHRADER VALVE, USE ROTUNDA FUEL PRESSURE TEST KIT #134-R0087 OR EQUIVALENT. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System > Page 4293 Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System SCHRADER/SERVICE VALVE schrader/service valve (if equipped) provides a service port to the low pressure fuel system. This valve is needed to relieve the pressure in the system before and during service. This valve could also be used to monitor the pressure near the injectors during diagnostic procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4294 Fuel Pressure Test Port: Service and Repair FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE REMOVAL WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel system pressure must be relieved. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Remove the pressure relief valve. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper: Description and Operation FUEL RAIL PULSE DAMPER The fuel rail pulse damper located on the fuel rail reduces fuel system noise caused by the pulsing of the fuel injectors. The vacuum port located on the damper is connected to manifold vacuum to avoid fuel spillage in the event the pulse damper diaphragm were to rupture. (The pulse damper should not be confused with a fuel pressure regulator, it does not regulate fuel rail pressure.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4298 Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper: Service and Repair FUEL PULSE DAMPER REMOVAL 1. Remove the throttle body. 2. Remove the fuel pulse damper. 1 Disconnect the vacuum hose. 2 Remove the snap ring. 3 Remove the damper. 3. Remove and discard the O-ring seal. INSTALLATION 1. CAUTION: Use an O-ring seal that is made of special fuel resistant material. Use of an ordinary O-ring seal can cause the fuel system to leak. Do not reuse the O-ring seal. NOTE: Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pressure Test Port: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System PRESSURE TEST POINT There is a pressure test point with a schrader fitting in the fuel rail that relieves fuel pressure and measures the fuel injector supply pressure for service and diagnostic procedures. Before servicing or testing the fuel system, read any CAUTION, WARNING, and HANDLING information. ON VEHICLES NOT EQUIPPED WITH A SCHRADER VALVE, USE ROTUNDA FUEL PRESSURE TEST KIT #134-R0087 OR EQUIVALENT. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System > Page 4306 Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System SCHRADER/SERVICE VALVE schrader/service valve (if equipped) provides a service port to the low pressure fuel system. This valve is needed to relieve the pressure in the system before and during service. This valve could also be used to monitor the pressure near the injectors during diagnostic procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4307 Fuel Pressure Test Port: Service and Repair FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE REMOVAL WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel system pressure must be relieved. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Remove the pressure relief valve. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4311 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4312 Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4313 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Rail: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Fuel Rail Components The fuel rail (Figure 80) distributes low pressure fuel from the chassis supply line to each fuel injector. Fuel pressure at the top of each fuel injector is maintained within 1% of the other fuel injectors at all times; this is done with nearly symmetric flow paths. The fuel rail is also designed to have minimal flow restriction by increasing the cross-sectional flow area and reducing the flow path length. The fuel rail contains several other parts in assembly (PIA) components that perform crucial functions. These include: - Injection pressure sensor which measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulsewidth and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder. - Engine fuel temperature sensor which measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulsewidth and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder. - Low pressure solenoid shut-off valve which isolates the fuel rail from the upstream fuel system when the engine is OFF. This minimizes the amount of fuel available to flow through the fuel injectors when the engine is off or leak from a damaged fuel rail during and after a crash. The valve is controlled by the PCM fuel shut-off valve circuit and contains an inertia switch. The valve is only on for one second after a key-on or whenever CKP signals are being received by the PCM. - schrader/service valve (if equipped) provides a service port to the low pressure fuel system. This valve is needed to relieve the pressure in the system before and during service. This valve could also be used to monitor the pressure near the injectors during diagnostic procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4317 Fuel Rail: Service and Repair FUEL INJECTION SUPPLY MANIFOLD REMOVAL WARNING: - Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel system pressure must be relieved. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. Remove the upper intake manifold. 2. Disconnect the fuel line. 3. NOTE: One connector is shown, the other five connectors are similar. Disconnect the six fuel injector electrical connectors and release the wiring harness locators from the fuel injection supply manifold. 4. Remove the fuel injection supply manifold. - Remove the vacuum hose. - Remove the bolts and the manifold. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Lubricate the fuel injector O-ring seals with clean engine oil to aid installation. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Shut-off Solenoid > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Shut-off Solenoid: Description and Operation LOW PRESSURE SOLENOID SHUT-OFF VALVE Low pressure solenoid shut-off valve which isolates the fuel rail from the upstream fuel system when the engine is OFF. This minimizes the amount of fuel available to flow through the fuel injectors when the engine is off or leak from a damaged fuel rail during and after a crash. The valve is controlled by the PCM fuel shut-off valve circuit and contains an inertia switch. The valve is only on for one second after a key-on or whenever CKP signals are being received by the PCM. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Filler Hose: Service and Repair FUEL TANK FILLER PIPE Heavy - Duty Riveter SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL 1. WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited, resulting in possible personal injury. Remove the left rear wheel. 2. WARNING: The fuel tank may be pressurized. remove the fuel tank filler cap slowly. If a hissing sound is heard, wait until the condition stops before removing the fuel tank filler cap. If these precautions are not followed, fuel may spray and cause personal injury. Remove the gas cap. 3. Remove the filler neck retaining screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4325 4. Remove the rivets and the fuel tank filler tube shield. 5. Remove the fuel filler tube. 1 Disconnect the hoses. 2 Remove the bolt and the fuel filler tube. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Use the Heavy-Duty Riveter to install the rivets. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation FUEL PUMP MODULE Fuel Pump Module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4329 Fuel Pump Module (For Returnable Fuel Systems) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4330 Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4331 Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM) The fuel pump (FP) module (Figure 71),(Figure 72) and(Figure 73) is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Mounting Straps > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Tank Mounting Straps: Service and Repair FUEL TANK SUPPORT STRAPS REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Use a suitable jack to support the fuel tank. 3. Disconnect the pin-type retainer from the fuel tank strap and position the parking brake cable aside. 4. NOTE: For 4WD vehicles, it will be necessary to disconnect a wiring harness clip from the fuel tank strap. Remove the bolts and the fuel tank straps. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4338 Fuel Tank Unit: Service and Repair FUEL PUMP MODULE Fuel Sender Wrench SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: Do not smoke or carry an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited, resulting in possible personal injury. 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Lift the LH rear seat cushion. 4. Position the carpet aside. 5. Remove the screws and the fuel pump module access cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4339 6. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 7. Disconnect the fuel and vapor lines from the fuel tank. 8. WARNING: The fuel tank may be pressurized. Remove the fuel tank filler cap slowly. If a hissing sound is heard, wait until the condition stops before removing the fuel tank filler cap. If these precautions are not followed, fuel may spray and cause personal injury. Remove the gas cap. 9. Using the special tool, remove the fuel pump module. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Install a new fuel pump mounting gasket. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Start the engine and visually inspect for leaks. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR Engine fuel temperature sensor which measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulsewidth and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4346 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE The idle air control (IAC) valve assembly controls engine idle speed and provides a dashpot function. The IAC valve assembly meters intake air around the throttle plate through a bypass within the IAC valve assembly and throttle body. The PCM determines the desired idle speed or bypass air and signals the IAC valve assembly through a specified duty cycle. The IAC valve responds by positioning the IAC valve to control the amount of bypassed air. The PCM monitors engine rpm and increases or decreases the IAC duty cycle in order to achieve the desired rpm. NOTE: The IAC Valve Assembly is NOT ADJUSTABLE and CANNOT BE CLEANED. The IAC valve (part of throttle body assembly) has an internal diode on some applications. If the internal diode is measured in crossed terminal position with a digital multimeter, there will be an incorrect or negative reading. It is important that the mating component and harness connectors are correctly oriented. Diagnostic procedures emphasize this importance. The PCM uses the IAC valve assembly to control: - No touch start - Cold engine test idle for rapid warm-up - Idle (corrects for engine load) - Stumble or stalling on deceleration (provides a dashpot function) - Over-temperature idle boost. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4347 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVE REMOVAL 1. Remove the idle air control (IAC) valve. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolts. 3 Remove the valve. Discard the gasket. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install a new gasket. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-25 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4351 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4352 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service Precautions WARNING: If you smell natural gas at any time other than during fueling, do not reset the IFS switch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch The inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch (Figure 76) is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose of the IFS switch is to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the switch and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner Guide for the location of the IFS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System > Page 4355 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch Operation Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch The inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch (Figure 87) is used in conjunction with electric fuel close valves. The purpose of the IFS switch is to close the fuel shut-off valves if a crash occurs. It consists of a steel ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the switch and closes the electric fuel shut-off valve. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle. On some vehicles a fuel reset light illuminates. Refer to the Owner Guide for the location of the IFS. Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch Reset RESET INSTRUCTIONS 1. Turn key off. 2. Check for natural gas leaks in the engine compartment. 3. NOTE: In the closed position, the button can be depressed an additional 1.57 cm (1/16 inch) against a spring. If no natural gas leak is apparent, reset the IFS by pushing the reset button on the top of the switch (refer to Owner Guide). 4. Turn key to on or start position for a few seconds, then off again. 5. WARNING: If you smell natural gas at any time other than during fueling, do not reset the IFS switch. Again, check for leaking natural gas. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4356 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the cowl side trim panel. 1 Remove the pin-type retainers. 2 Remove the nut. 3 Remove the cowl side trim panel. 2. Remove the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch. 1 Disconnect the connector. 2 Remove the screws and the IFS switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Intake Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair Intake Air Duct: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER OUTLET PIPE REMOVAL 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. 1 Disconnect the crankcase vent hose. 2 Loosen the screw clamps. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: The air cleaner outlet pipe should be securely sealed to prevent unmetered air from entering the engine. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4363 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4364 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4365 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4370 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4371 Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4372 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4376 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4377 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4378 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Resonator, Intake Air > Component Information > Service and Repair Resonator: Service and Repair INTAKE AIR RESONATOR REMOVAL 1. Remove the left front wheel. 2. Remove the seven pin-type retainers and four screws and position aside the left inner fender splash shield. 3. Remove the bolt and remove the intake air resonator. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Make sure the front rubber grommet is seated in the bracket. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSORS (APPS) The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand. 1. There are three pedal position sensors required for system monitoring. APP1 has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and APP2 & APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. 2. There are two VREF wires, two signal return wires and three signal wires (total of seven wires and pins) between the PCM and APPS assembly. - 2-5 V Reference Voltage - 2- Signal Return (ground) - APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0) - APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5) - APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5) 3. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. Electronic Throttle Body And Accelerator Pedal Assembly 4. The three pedal position signals ensure a correct input to the PCM, if any one signal has a fault. The PCM knows if a signal is wrong by calculating where it should be, inferred by the other signals. A value will be substituted for a faulty signal if two out of the three signals are bad. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4389 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4390 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire Terminals Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4391 Typical "Drop-in" Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The mass air flow (MAF) sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire (Figure 42). If the hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the air mass flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology (IBT) with an integrated intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4392 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube. 2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-27 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4396 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR Fuel Rai Pressure (FRP) Sensor The fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor (Figure 36) is a diaphragm strain gauge device in which resistance changes with pressure. The electrical resistance of a strain gauge increases as pressure increases, and decreases as pressure decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to pressure. Strain gauge type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The FRP sensor measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulse width and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder. Fuel Rai Pressure (FRP) Sensor The fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor (Figure 37) senses the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The return fuel line to the fuel tank has been deleted in this type of fuel system. The differential fuel/intake manifold pressure together with measured fuel temperature provides an indication of the fuel vapors in the fuel rail. Both differential pressure and temperature feedback signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserve fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System > Page 4399 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System INJECTION PRESSURE SENSOR Injection pressure sensor which measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulsewidth and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation ENGINE FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR Engine fuel temperature sensor which measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulsewidth and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-25 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4406 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4407 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service Precautions WARNING: If you smell natural gas at any time other than during fueling, do not reset the IFS switch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch The inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch (Figure 76) is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose of the IFS switch is to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the switch and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner Guide for the location of the IFS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System > Page 4410 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch Operation Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch The inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch (Figure 87) is used in conjunction with electric fuel close valves. The purpose of the IFS switch is to close the fuel shut-off valves if a crash occurs. It consists of a steel ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the switch and closes the electric fuel shut-off valve. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle. On some vehicles a fuel reset light illuminates. Refer to the Owner Guide for the location of the IFS. Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch Reset RESET INSTRUCTIONS 1. Turn key off. 2. Check for natural gas leaks in the engine compartment. 3. NOTE: In the closed position, the button can be depressed an additional 1.57 cm (1/16 inch) against a spring. If no natural gas leak is apparent, reset the IFS by pushing the reset button on the top of the switch (refer to Owner Guide). 4. Turn key to on or start position for a few seconds, then off again. 5. WARNING: If you smell natural gas at any time other than during fueling, do not reset the IFS switch. Again, check for leaking natural gas. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4411 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the cowl side trim panel. 1 Remove the pin-type retainers. 2 Remove the nut. 3 Remove the cowl side trim panel. 2. Remove the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch. 1 Disconnect the connector. 2 Remove the screws and the IFS switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation Throttle Full Open Switch: Description and Operation WIDE OPEN THROTTLE A/C CUT-OFF (WAC) The wide open throttle A/C cutoff relay (may be referred to as the A/C clutch relay) is wired normally open (normally closed for Aviator). There is no direct electrical connection between the A/C switch or EATC Module and the A/C clutch. The PCM will receive a signal indicating that A/C is requested (for some applications, this message is sent through the BUS + and BUS - circuits). When A/C is requested, the PCM will check other A/C related inputs that are available (such as ACP (SW), ACCS). If these inputs indicate A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK (such as coolant temperature, engine rpm, throttle position), the PCM will ground the WAC output (unground for Aviator), closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/C clutch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4418 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4419 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is monitored by the OBD system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4420 Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. NOTE: Air cleaner outlet tube is removed for clarity. Remove the throttle position (TP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the screws. 3 Remove the sensor INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Description and Operation > Throttle Body Housing Throttle Body: Description and Operation Throttle Body Housing THROTTLE BODY HOUSING The throttle body housing assembly is a single piece of aluminum casting with an air passage and a butterfly throttle plate with linkage mechanisms. When the throttle plate is in the idle (or closed) position, the throttle lever arm should be in contact with the Throttle Return Stop. The throttle return stop prevents the throttle plate from contacting the bore and sticking closed. The setting also establishes the amount of air flow between the throttle plate and bore. To minimize the closed plate air flow, a special coating is applied to the throttle plate and bore to help seal this area. This sealant/coating also makes the throttle body resistant to engine intake sludge accumulation. Features of the Throttle Body Assembly include: 1. Idle air control (IAC) valve assembly mounted directly to the throttle body assembly (some vehicles). 2. A pre-set stop to locate the WOT position. 3. An air supply channel upstream of the throttle plate to provide fresh air to the PCV system (some vehicles only). 4. Individual vacuum taps for PCV, EGR, EVAP and miscellaneous control signals (some vehicles only). 5. PCV air return (if applicable). 6. A throttle body-mounted throttle position (TP) sensor. Typical Attention Decal Locations 7. A sealant/coating on the throttle bore and throttle plate makes the throttle body air flow tolerant to engine intake sludge accumulation. These throttle body assemblies MUST NOT BE CLEANED and have a white/black attention decal (Figure 110) advising not to clean. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Description and Operation > Throttle Body Housing > Page 4425 Throttle Body: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) ELECTRONIC THROTTLE BODY (ETB) The Gen II electronic throttle body (Figure 133) has the following characteristics 1. The DC motor is driven by the PCM (requires two wires). The gear ratio from the motor to the throttle plate shaft is 17:1. 2. There are two designs; parallel and in-series. The parallel design has the motor under the bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing (in general this is more difficult to package). The in-series design has a separate motor housing that protrudes out and offers more packaging flexibility. 3. Two springs are used: one is used to close the throttle (main spring) and the other is in a plunger assembly that results in a default angle with no power applied. This is for limp home reasons (force of plunger spring is 2 times stronger than the main spring). Default angle is usually set to result in a top vehicle speed of 30 MPH (48 Km). Typically this throttle angle is 7 to 8 degrees from the hard-stop angle. 4. The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to avoid the throttle from binding in the bore (-0.75 degree). This hard stop setting is non-adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle. 5. Unlike cable type throttle bodies, the intent for the ETB is not to have a hole in the throttle plate or to use plate sealant. The hole is not required in the ETB because the required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate angle controls idle and idle quality and eliminates the need for IAC bypass actuator. 6. The system has two throttle position sensors. Redundant throttle position signals are required for monitor reasons. TP1 has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and TP2 has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation the negative sloped TP sensor (TP1) is used by the control strategy as the indication of throttle position. The TP sensor assembly requires four wires. 5 V Reference Voltage - Signal Return (ground) - TP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0) - TP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4426 Throttle Body: Service and Repair THROTTLE BODY REMOVAL WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Throttle body bore and plate area have a special coating and should not be cleaned. 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube. 2. Disconnect the accelerator cable and the speed control cable (if equipped) from the throttle body lever. 3. Disconnect the throttle position (TP) sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and position the transmission vent tube and bracket aside. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4427 5. Remove the bolt, the stud bolt and the throttle body. - Discard the gasket. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install a new gasket. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 04S25U Date: 051006 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4436 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes OASIS was activated on December 07, 2004. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes Available through the website on December 09, 2004. Owner names and addresses were available on January 17, 2005. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states provinces and countries. Accordingly you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action. [New!] RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4437 Note: Related damage claims will not be accepted for speed control cable replacement. Please review the revised technical instructions/illustrations found in Attachment III. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan which is posted with this bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC). The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or at their option directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251, Dearborn, MI 48121-6251. ^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund claims that include other non-covered repairs or those judged by Ford to be excessive will not be accepted for reimbursement. ^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair. Claiming a refund will not close out the VIN for this recall. ^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.) - Program Code: 04S25 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirements through normal order processing channels. The DOR/COR for this program is 50336. This number identifies parts ordered for this recall through the Special Service Support Center. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4438 DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." CLAIM HANDLING PROCEDURE FOR RETURNING PRIOR LEVEL ACCELERATOR CABLES Immediate Purge Required ------YL8Z-9A758-AD Accelerator Cable - 3.0L Prepare and submit a PCS claim as described below: ^ DO NOT ship the parts until Return Authorization is granted. ^ The return authorizations will include shipping addresses. PCS CLAIM INSTRUCTIONS When you create your PCS claim, use the following information for the REASON CODE, SHIPPER NBR, and LINE EXPLANATION fields: ^ REASON CODE: GB ^ SHIPPER NBR: 04S25 ^ LINE EXPLANATION: Purge Required When preparing your PCS claim, list the part number being returned on the claim, and indicate the quantity of that part number being returned. Your PCS claim must be submitted by January 31, 2005. Claims filed after this date will be denied. EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information SERVICE PROCEDURE ACCELERATOR CABLE REMOVAL 1. From inside the vehicle, disconnect the accelerator cable from the pedal. 2. Remove the engine appearance cover, if equipped. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4439 [NEW] CAUTION: Damage to the speed control cable may result if the throttle body cam is rotated by lifting upon the speed control cable or the speed control cable connector end. When disconnecting the accelerator cable from the throttle body, rotate the throttle body cam only by lifting upon the cam itself. See Figure 1. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4440 3. Disconnect the accelerator cable as follows: See Figure 2. A) Disconnect the cable by rotating the throttle body cam and sliding the cable barrel out of the cam. B) Remove the accelerator cable from bracket # 1 by turning the cable housing 45 degrees either way and pulling it from the bracket. C) Open bracket # 2 with a screwdriver and remove the accelerator cable from the bracket. See Figure 3. D) Detach the accelerator cable from the clip located on the brake booster vacuum hose. E) Disengage the grommet at the dash panel and remove the accelerator cable from the vehicle. ACCELERATOR CABLE INSTALLATION 1. Feed the new cable through the dash panel and fully seat the grommet. 2. Install and connect the accelerator cable as follows: A) Connect the cable to the throttle body by rotating the cam and sliding the cable barrel into the cam. B) Attach the accelerator cable to the clip located on the brake booster vacuum hose. C) Secure the accelerator cable to bracket # 1 by inserting it and rotating the cable housing 45 degrees to lock it in place. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4441 D) Position the accelerator cable in bracket # 2 and, using a suitable tool, bend down the tab to retain the cable while ensuring the cable moves freely in the bracket. See Figure 4. 3. Connect the accelerator cable to the pedal. 4. Install the appearance cover, if equipped. 5. Check for free movement of the accelerator pedal and that there is no binding. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4442 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4443 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > NHTSA04V574000 > Dec > 04 > Recall 04V574000: Throttle Cable Replacement Throttle Cable/Linkage: Recalls Recall 04V574000: Throttle Cable Replacement MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2002-2004 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 04V574000 Recall Date: Dec 06, 2004 COMPONENT: Vehicle Speed Control: Cables POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 470245 SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles built with 3.0L V6 engines, the accelerator cable may prevent the throttle from returning to the idle position. CONSEQUENCE: An unexpected increase in engine idle speed may increase stopping distance and may result in a vehicle crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the accelerator cable. The recall is expected to begin on January 17, 2005. Owners should contact Ford at 1-866-436-7332. NOTES: Ford recall No. 04S25. Customers can also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall - (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 04S25U Date: 051006 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall - (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4453 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes OASIS was activated on December 07, 2004. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes Available through the website on December 09, 2004. Owner names and addresses were available on January 17, 2005. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states provinces and countries. Accordingly you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action. [New!] RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall - (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4454 Note: Related damage claims will not be accepted for speed control cable replacement. Please review the revised technical instructions/illustrations found in Attachment III. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the repair of the covered condition call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan which is posted with this bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC). The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or at their option directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251, Dearborn, MI 48121-6251. ^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund claims that include other non-covered repairs or those judged by Ford to be excessive will not be accepted for reimbursement. ^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair. Claiming a refund will not close out the VIN for this recall. ^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.) - Program Code: 04S25 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirements through normal order processing channels. The DOR/COR for this program is 50336. This number identifies parts ordered for this recall through the Special Service Support Center. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall - (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4455 DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." CLAIM HANDLING PROCEDURE FOR RETURNING PRIOR LEVEL ACCELERATOR CABLES Immediate Purge Required ------YL8Z-9A758-AD Accelerator Cable - 3.0L Prepare and submit a PCS claim as described below: ^ DO NOT ship the parts until Return Authorization is granted. ^ The return authorizations will include shipping addresses. PCS CLAIM INSTRUCTIONS When you create your PCS claim, use the following information for the REASON CODE, SHIPPER NBR, and LINE EXPLANATION fields: ^ REASON CODE: GB ^ SHIPPER NBR: 04S25 ^ LINE EXPLANATION: Purge Required When preparing your PCS claim, list the part number being returned on the claim, and indicate the quantity of that part number being returned. Your PCS claim must be submitted by January 31, 2005. Claims filed after this date will be denied. EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information SERVICE PROCEDURE ACCELERATOR CABLE REMOVAL 1. From inside the vehicle, disconnect the accelerator cable from the pedal. 2. Remove the engine appearance cover, if equipped. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall - (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4456 [NEW] CAUTION: Damage to the speed control cable may result if the throttle body cam is rotated by lifting upon the speed control cable or the speed control cable connector end. When disconnecting the accelerator cable from the throttle body, rotate the throttle body cam only by lifting upon the cam itself. See Figure 1. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall - (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4457 3. Disconnect the accelerator cable as follows: See Figure 2. A) Disconnect the cable by rotating the throttle body cam and sliding the cable barrel out of the cam. B) Remove the accelerator cable from bracket # 1 by turning the cable housing 45 degrees either way and pulling it from the bracket. C) Open bracket # 2 with a screwdriver and remove the accelerator cable from the bracket. See Figure 3. D) Detach the accelerator cable from the clip located on the brake booster vacuum hose. E) Disengage the grommet at the dash panel and remove the accelerator cable from the vehicle. ACCELERATOR CABLE INSTALLATION 1. Feed the new cable through the dash panel and fully seat the grommet. 2. Install and connect the accelerator cable as follows: A) Connect the cable to the throttle body by rotating the cam and sliding the cable barrel into the cam. B) Attach the accelerator cable to the clip located on the brake booster vacuum hose. C) Secure the accelerator cable to bracket # 1 by inserting it and rotating the cable housing 45 degrees to lock it in place. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall - (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4458 D) Position the accelerator cable in bracket # 2 and, using a suitable tool, bend down the tab to retain the cable while ensuring the cable moves freely in the bracket. See Figure 4. 3. Connect the accelerator cable to the pedal. 4. Install the appearance cover, if equipped. 5. Check for free movement of the accelerator pedal and that there is no binding. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall - (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4459 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall - (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4460 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > NHTSA04V574000 > Dec > 04 > Recall 04V574000: Throttle Cable Replacement Throttle Cable/Linkage: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 04V574000: Throttle Cable Replacement MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2002-2004 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 04V574000 Recall Date: Dec 06, 2004 COMPONENT: Vehicle Speed Control: Cables POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 470245 SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles built with 3.0L V6 engines, the accelerator cable may prevent the throttle from returning to the idle position. CONSEQUENCE: An unexpected increase in engine idle speed may increase stopping distance and may result in a vehicle crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the accelerator cable. The recall is expected to begin on January 17, 2005. Owners should contact Ford at 1-866-436-7332. NOTES: Ford recall No. 04S25. Customers can also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4465 Torque Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4466 Throttle Cable/Linkage: Description and Operation ACCELERATION CONTROL The acceleration control consists of the pedal and shaft assembly, accelerator cable and accelerator cable bracket. WARNING: Make sure surrounding components such as wiring, hoses, sound insulation and floor carpeting are not contacting the sliding inner cable of the accelerator cable or the accelerator pedal and shaft. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. The throttle is controlled by an accelerator cable attached to the accelerator pedal and shaft. The accelerator pedal and shaft should travel smoothly from the idle to the wide-open throttle positions. Hesitation on return or prevention of return to the idle position must not occur. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Throttle Cable/Linkage: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION Verify the condition by operating the accelerator pedal and shaft from idle to wide open-throttle and back again. Check for any resistance in forward travel of the accelerator pedal and shaft or hesitation on return. If a concern exists, visually inspect all components of the accelerator pedal and shaft. Look for damage or binding of the accelerator cable. Look for obstructions at the throttle body and accelerator pedal and shaft. For vehicles equipped with speed control, examine the speed control cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4469 Symptom Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accelerator Cable Throttle Cable/Linkage: Service and Repair Accelerator Cable ACCELERATOR CABLE REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the crankcase ventilation hose. 2. Disconnect the accelerator cable from the bracket. 1 Rotate the throttle lever. 2 Slide the accelerator cable end out of the throttle lever. 3 Disconnect the accelerator cable from the bracket. 3. Disconnect the accelerator cable from the pedal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accelerator Cable > Page 4472 4. CAUTION: Do not pull the accelerator cable out by the cable housing. Remove the accelerator cable. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accelerator Cable > Page 4473 Throttle Cable/Linkage: Service and Repair Accelerator Cable Bracket ACCELERATOR CABLE BRACKET REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the crankcase ventilation hose. 2. Disconnect the throttle control linkage from the throttle lever. 1 If equipped, disconnect the speed control cable from the throttle lever. 2 Rotate the throttle lever. 3 Slide the accelerator cable end out of the throttle lever. 3. Disconnect the throttle control linkage from the accelerator cable bracket. 1 Disconnect the accelerator cable from the bracket. 2 If equipped, squeeze the tabs and disconnect the speed control cable from the accelerator cable bracket. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accelerator Cable > Page 4474 4. Remove the bolts and the accelerator cable bracket. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation Throttle Full Open Switch: Description and Operation WIDE OPEN THROTTLE A/C CUT-OFF (WAC) The wide open throttle A/C cutoff relay (may be referred to as the A/C clutch relay) is wired normally open (normally closed for Aviator). There is no direct electrical connection between the A/C switch or EATC Module and the A/C clutch. The PCM will receive a signal indicating that A/C is requested (for some applications, this message is sent through the BUS + and BUS - circuits). When A/C is requested, the PCM will check other A/C related inputs that are available (such as ACP (SW), ACCS). If these inputs indicate A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK (such as coolant temperature, engine rpm, throttle position), the PCM will ground the WAC output (unground for Aviator), closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/C clutch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4481 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4482 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is monitored by the OBD system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4483 Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. NOTE: Air cleaner outlet tube is removed for clarity. Remove the throttle position (TP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the screws. 3 Remove the sensor INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Variable Induction System > Variable Induction Control Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation Variable Induction Control Actuator: Description and Operation INTAKE MANIFOLD TUNING VALVE (IMTV) Intake Manifold Tuning Valve (IMTV) The intake manifold tuning valve (IMTV) (Figure 109) is a motorized actuated unit mounted directly to the intake manifold. The IMTV actuator controls a shutter device attached to the actuator shaft. There is no monitor input to the PCM with this system to indicate shutter position. The motorized IMTV unit will not be energized below approximately 2600 rpm or higher on some vehicles. The shutter will be in the closed position not allowing airflow blend to occur in the intake manifold. Above approximately 2600 rpm or higher, the motorized unit will be energized. The motorized unit will be commanded on by the PCM initially at a 100 percent duty cycle to move the shutter to the open position and then falling to approximately 50 percent to continue to hold the shutter open. 1. The PCM uses the TP sensor and CKP signals to determine activation of the IMTV system. There must be a positive change in voltage from the TP sensor along with the increase in rpm to open the shutter. 2. The PCM uses the information from the input signals to control the IMTV. 3. When commanded on by the PCM, the motorized actuator shutter opens up the end of the vertical separating wall at high engine speeds to allow both sides of the manifold to blend together. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order ......................................................................................................................................... ................................................................ 1-4-2-5-3-6 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4492 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4500 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4501 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR Typical Hall-Effect Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance Sensor The camshaft position (CMP) sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston No.1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the powertrain control module (PCM) and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. The Coil On Plug (COP) ignition applications also use the CMP signal to select the proper ignition coil to fire. The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or circuit. DTC P0340 is associated with this sensor. Vehicles with two CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. DTC P0345 is associated with this sensor and it is referred to as CMP2. There are two types of CMP sensors: the three pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (Figure 28) found on F-Series 4.2L applications, and the two pin connector variable reluctance sensor found on all other vehicles (Figure 29). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4502 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4506 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4507 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (INTEGRATED IGNITION SYSTEMS) Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block or timing cover and is adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the powertrain control module (PCM). The trigger wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the trigger wheel, the CKP indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to fixed reference (Figure 31). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4508 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the bolts and the right front lower splash shield. 3. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips Ignition Coil: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips TSB 05-22-8 11/14/05 WDS COP KIT DIAGNOSTIC TIPS - COIL ON PLUG (COP) IGNITION SYSTEMS - ENGINE MISFIRE OR ROUGH RUNNING FORD: 1996-1999 Taurus SHO 1998-2006 Crown Victoria, Mustang 2000 Taurus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2003-2006 Focus 2004-2006 Taurus 2005-2006 Five Hundred, Freestyle 1997-2006 E-Series, Expedition, F-150 1999-2006 F-Super Duty 2000-2005 Excursion, F-53 2001-2006 Escape 2002-2005 Explorer 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1998-2002 Continental 1998-2006 Town Car 2000-2006 LS 1998-2006 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 1998-2006 Grand Marquis 2000 Sable 2004-2005 Sable 2005-2006 Montego 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 04-16-01 to update the vehicle applications and model years. NOTE FOLLOW THIS TSB PROCEDURE ONLY IF THERE ARE NO SPECIFIC MISFIRE TSBs/SSMs RELEASED FOR THE VEHICLE SYMPTOM BEING EXPERIENCED. ISSUE Approximately 50% of coil on plug (COP) coils returned for warranty do not have a problem. ACTION The misfiring cylinder must be identified through Self-Test misfire codes or through WDS Power Balance. Rule out base engine problems, rule out fuel problems, and then look at ignition problems (be sure to rule out coil primary circuit issues). Once the above steps have been completed, and the issue is in the secondary part of the ignition system, the oscilloscope procedure outlined in this TSB can isolate the difference between a coil or spark plug problem. SERVICE PROCEDURE The optional WDS COP Kit available through Rotunda will provide more accurate diagnosis and help reduce replacement of non-defective parts. The Kit (418-F5528) can be purchased through 1-800-ROTUNDA. The following material will detail the diagnostic steps on WDS to take the guesswork out of misfire diagnosis using the COP Kit. The following procedure is for cylinder specific misfires and not random misfires. Random misfires have a different root cause and are not covered by this TSB. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 4513 Misfire Definition: A misfiring cylinder is lacking power relative to the other cylinders. The causes for a cylinder specific misfire could be fuel, spark, or mechanical problems. Perform a thorough visual inspection. If no visible concerns are found use the following WDS tools for misfire diagnosis: ^ Self-test (Check for codes first) Power Balance (Identify the cylinder of concern) ^ Relative Compression (Rule out a possible mechanical issue) ^ Fuel (Make sure fuel injectors are not restricted) ^ Ignition (Make sure spark plugs and coils are working properly) ^ Oscilloscope (Detailed signal analysis) NOTE USE THE ENCYCLOPEDIA BUTTON IN THE LOWER LEFT CORNER OF THE SCREEN FOR DETAILED INFORMATION ON THE WDS TOOL BEING DISPLAYED. If there is a self-test code identifying a particular cylinder then you just need to determine if it is a fuel, ignition, or possibly a mechanical problem. Proceed to Step 2 after running Relative Compression to rule out any mechanical issues. If there is no self-test code and the customer concern is a miss, proceed to Step 1. Step 1: (Select Toolbox Icon, then Powertrain, then Power Balance) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 4514 The cylinder specific miss has to be identified as shown in the example in Figure 2 in order to proceed with the remaining steps. If the miss does not occur at idle (in the bay), try to brake torque the engine. This extra loading should reproduce the miss in the bay. If the miss cannot be reproduced during brake torque, select Relative Compression under Powertrain on WDS before going on a road test to rule out mechanical problems. If Relative Compression shows a problem then the base engine issue must be serviced. If Relative Compression results are good (Figure 3), road test under as many different driving conditions as possible until the miss occurs on Power Balance. Some misses may be very intermiffent so be patient and concentrate on steady load conditions. Once a cylinder dropout is identified proceed to Step 2. Step 2: (Select Toolbox Icon, then Powertrain, then Fuel System Test) Run Fuel System Test on WDS to determine if there may be a fuel problem. After completing fuel Pressure/Leakdown test, select Injector flow to isolate Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 4515 a restricted injector as shown in Figure 4. If all the injectors are within specification, proceed to Step 3. Step 3: (Select Toolbox Icon, then Powertrain, then Ignition System Test) Run Ignition System Test on WDS to determine if there is an ignition problem. Look at both duration (DUR) and kilovolts (KV) and look for values that standout from the rest as shown in Figure 5 and Figure 6. NOTE LIVE DISPLAY HAS TO AVERAGE IGNITION VALUES BECAUSE THERE IS TOO MUCH DATA TO DISPLAY. MAKE A CAPTURE TO VIEW EACH ENGINE EVENT WITHOUT AVERAGING. THIS CAN BE HELPFUL WHEN THE PROBLEM IS INTERMITTENT. IF THE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 4516 MISS IS EXTREMELY INTERMITTENT AND DOES NOT SHOW UP IN IGNITION, PROCEED TO STEP 4. If either spark duration or peak KV on the Red Probe (Suspect Cylinder) are offset from the values displayed on the Black Probe (Known Good Cylinder) then the problem is in the ignition system. Rule out coil primary circuit issues before proceeding to coil secondary issues such as the spark plug , coil boot, or possibly the coil. Use the WDS Oscilloscope with the COP kit to determine if the issue is the coil or the spark plug. Step 4: (Select Toolbox, then Oscilloscope) WARNING SECONDARY IGNITION VOLTAGES ARE VERY HIGH. KEEP HANDS AND TOOLS AWAY FROM THE END OF THE COIL THAT SUPPLIES THE SPARK. SET-UP: With the engine off, pull the suspect coil from the cylinder well and turn it upside down so the coil cannot spark to any other surface as shown in Figure 1. Wrap a clean shop cloth around the hard shell of the coil to help keep the coil propped up and stable. CAUTION THE COIL BOOT CAN BE DAMAGED IF THE COIL SPARKS TO ANOTHER SURFACE DURING THIS PROCEDURE. Keep the coil connected to the harness and leave the WDS COP clip attached to the coil. Route the coil clip wire and cable away from the coil being tested as well as other coils to avoid noise interference. Disconnect the injector of the cylinder being tested so raw fuel is not washing the cylinder. This is a stress test for the coil. The type of waveform displayed on the oscilloscope will show whether a coil or the plug is the problem if all previous steps have been followed. Keep hands and tools away from the end of the coil that supplies the spark. COP Stress Test Procedure: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 4517 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 4518 Go to the Oscilloscope Tool and select Channel 3, then select Auto, then select COP_STRESS_TEST_RED. This pre-configured setting will zoom-in on the peak firing of the coil being tested. Start the engine and be sure the coil is not sparking to any surface. If the coil is sparking to other surfaces, turn the engine off immediately and readjust the coil so it cannot spark to any other surface. Restart the engine and touch the Red Man icon to start the oscilloscope. All settings are pre-configured and no adjustments are necessary. Compare the waveform you get with the examples provided in Figures 7, 8, and 9). Figure 7 is a good waveform. If your waveform is similar to Figure 7 the coil is working correctly. Suspect the spark plug. Figure 8 and Figure 9 are examples of problem coils. Replace the coil if the waveform is similar to Figures 8 or 9. The coil is causing the misfire when the peak firing appears like those shown in Figures 8 and 9. Notice the difference in the peak-firing signal when compared to the good peak signal in Figure 7. Figure 9 shows a more dramatic fault in the peak failure. Most root causes of misfire issues can be identified quickly using the steps outlined above. Some misfire issues can be difficult making the oscilloscope an important part of your diagnostic toolbox. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 05-13-4 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4519 Ignition Coil: Specifications ITEM..................................................................................................................................................... .................................................SPECIFICATIONS Coil hold-down bolts............................................................................................................................. ...........................................................6 Nm (53 lb-in) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 4522 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 4523 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 4524 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 4525 Ignition Coil: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 4526 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 4527 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 4528 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Coil On Plug (COP) Ignition Coil: Description and Operation Coil On Plug (COP) COIL ON PLUG Coil On Plug The coil on plug (COP) (Figure 65) ignition operates similar to standard coil pack ignition except each plug has one coil per plug. COP has three different modes of operation: engine crank, engine running, and CMP Failure Mode Effects Management (FMEM). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Coil On Plug (COP) > Page 4531 Ignition Coil: Description and Operation Coil Pack COIL PACK Horizontal Connector Six Tower Coil Pack Series 5 Six Tower Coil Pack Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Coil On Plug (COP) > Page 4532 Four-Tower Coil Packs Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Coil On Plug (COP) > Page 4533 Series 5 Four Tower Coil Pack Coil packs come in four tower, Series 5 four tower, six-tower horizontal connector and Series 5 Six tower models. Two adjacent coil towers share a common coil and are called a matched pair. For six-tower coil pack (six cylinder) applications the matched pairs are 1 and 5, 2 and 6, and 3 and 4 (Figure 61) and (Figure 62). For four-tower coil pack (four cylinder) applications the matched pairs are 1 and 4, and 2 and 3 (Figure 63) and (Figure 64). When the coil is fired by the PCM, spark is delivered through the matched pair towers to their respective spark plugs. The spark plugs are fired simultaneously and are paired so that as one fires on the compression stroke, the other spark plug fires on the exhaust stroke. The next time the coil is fired the situation is reversed. The next pair of spark plugs fire according to the engine firing order. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coil-On-Plug - LH Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Coil-On-Plug - LH IGNITION COIL-ON-PLUG - LH REMOVAL 1. Remove the ignition coil-on-plug. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the coil-on-plug. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Apply a light film of silicone brake caliper grease and dielectric compound to the interior of the spark plug boot prior to installation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coil-On-Plug - LH > Page 4536 Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Coil-On-Plug - RH IGNITION COIL-ON-PLUG - RH REMOVAL 1. Remove the upper intake manifold. 2. Remove the ignition coil-on-plug. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the coil-on-plug. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Apply a light film of silicone brake caliper grease and dielectric compound to the interior of the spark plug boot prior to installation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4540 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4541 Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4542 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4546 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) The knock sensor (KS) (Figure 41) is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4551 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4552 Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4553 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4558 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4559 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR Typical Hall-Effect Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance Sensor The camshaft position (CMP) sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston No.1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the powertrain control module (PCM) and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. The Coil On Plug (COP) ignition applications also use the CMP signal to select the proper ignition coil to fire. The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or circuit. DTC P0340 is associated with this sensor. Vehicles with two CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. DTC P0345 is associated with this sensor and it is referred to as CMP2. There are two types of CMP sensors: the three pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (Figure 28) found on F-Series 4.2L applications, and the two pin connector variable reluctance sensor found on all other vehicles (Figure 29). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4560 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4564 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4565 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (INTEGRATED IGNITION SYSTEMS) Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block or timing cover and is adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the powertrain control module (PCM). The trigger wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the trigger wheel, the CKP indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to fixed reference (Figure 31). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4566 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the bolts and the right front lower splash shield. 3. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 3. Using a small tool, press the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock cylinder out. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4574 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation KNOCK SENSOR Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) The knock sensor (KS) (Figure 41) is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap Spark Plug: Specifications Gap Spark Plug Gap ................................................................................................................................... .................................... 0.52 - 0.56 in. (1.3 - 1.4 mm) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap > Page 4579 Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Specifications Spark Plug Torque ............................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 11 ft. lb. (15 Nm) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4580 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark Plug Type .................................................................................................................................. ................................................................ AWSF-32F Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4581 Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG REMOVAL 1. Remove the ignition coil-on-plugs. 2. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Remove the LH and RH spark plugs. 3. Inspect the spark plugs. INSTALLATION 1. To install, the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations View 151-27 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Page 4592 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair Shift Indicator: Service and Repair SELECTOR LEVER INDICATOR BULB REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument cluster. 2. Remove the selector lever indicator bulb. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations View 151-17 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4603 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4604 Shift Interlock Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4605 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4610 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH Typical Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position (BPP) switch (Figure 27) is used by the PCM to disengage the transmission torque converter clutch and on some applications as an input to the idle speed control for idle quality and for vehicle speed control deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in the following manner: - BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake is applied. - BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM or HEM), BPP signal is than broadcasted over the data link to be received by the PCM. - BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake (ABS)- traction control / stability assist module. The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generate an output called the Driver Brake Application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Note on applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stoplamp circuit, if all stoplamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stoplamp bulbs has failed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The transmission control switch (TCS) (Figure 50) and (Figure 51) signals the PCM with keypower whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) lights when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. The operator of the vehicle controls the position of the TCS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4622 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4623 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Special Tools And Equipment Special Tool(s) Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the battery and tray. 3. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor. 1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4624 2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Connect the electrical connector. 3. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray, check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or incorrect routing position. NOTE: When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the vehicle must relearn its adaptive shift strategy. During this relearning process shifts might be slightly firm, early or delayed. This operation is normal and will not affect the function or durability of the transaxle. Normal operation will return once these transaxle parameters are stored by the vehicle PCM. Install the battery and tray. 4. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should illuminate in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4629 View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4632 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4633 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Material Materials Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor. 5. Remove the TSS sensor. ^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4634 6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation. Install the TSS sensor. ^ Connect the TSS electrical connector (white connector). 2. Remove the drain pan. 3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using clean automatic transmission fluid. 7. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4635 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor. ^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the OSS bore. 5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation. Install the OSS sensor. ^ Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4636 2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the VSS. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering TSB 06-11-7 06/12/06 2001-2005 ESCAPE 3.0L UNSTABLE IDLE - 2001-2003 ESCAPE 3.0L AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SHUDDER - MEXICO ONLY FORD: 2001-2005 Escape ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine may exhibit idle speeds outside the specified range. Some 2001-2003 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and CD4E automatic transaxle may exhibit a transmission shudder. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If the concern is a 2001-2005 Escape with idle speeds outside the specified range: a. Install a new idle air control (IAC) valve with jumper harness included in the kit. The new Denso brand IAC will be installed with the electrical connector facing the opposite direction of the original (Hitachi) valve which is why the jumper harness is required. The original (Hitachi) IAC connector faces the front of the vehicle while the new Denso IAC connector faces toward the rear of the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 4649 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 4650 b. Referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. If the concern is a 2001 - 2003 Escape with transaxle shudder, drain, flush and refill the transmission fluid with MERCON(R) Multi-Purpose Automatic Transmission Fluid. Then, referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the PCM using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 3. When reprogramming the PCM use blank path programming. Select the proper file from the chart and manually enter the PCM part number or tear tag number to obtain the updated calibration file. To Perform Blank Path Programming: 1. Connect WDS/IDS to vehicle. 2. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK. 3. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK. 4. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK. 5. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press TICK. 6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Keep ignition in the "OFF" position, press TICK and you will be asked to cycle the key "ON" and "OFF" a few times. Please keep the key position in the "OFF" position through the key cycles. 7. Screen will show "The diagnostic tester is unable to communicate with this vehicle." You will be prompted to "select a vehicle from the vehicle list", press TICK. 8. A list of vehicles will be displayed, select ALL OTHERS, and press TICK. 9. Screen shows "To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of the following: Vehicle Calibration number (7 digits), Tear Tag number (4 digits), or PCM part number, press TICK. 10. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed above. Press TICK. 11. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) per Workshop Manual, Section 419-01. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 4651 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9F715 42 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls/A/T Unstable Idle/Shuddering TSB 06-11-7 06/12/06 2001-2005 ESCAPE 3.0L UNSTABLE IDLE - 2001-2003 ESCAPE 3.0L AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SHUDDER - MEXICO ONLY FORD: 2001-2005 Escape ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine may exhibit idle speeds outside the specified range. Some 2001-2003 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and CD4E automatic transaxle may exhibit a transmission shudder. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If the concern is a 2001-2005 Escape with idle speeds outside the specified range: a. Install a new idle air control (IAC) valve with jumper harness included in the kit. The new Denso brand IAC will be installed with the electrical connector facing the opposite direction of the original (Hitachi) valve which is why the jumper harness is required. The original (Hitachi) IAC connector faces the front of the vehicle while the new Denso IAC connector faces toward the rear of the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 4657 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 4658 b. Referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. If the concern is a 2001 - 2003 Escape with transaxle shudder, drain, flush and refill the transmission fluid with MERCON(R) Multi-Purpose Automatic Transmission Fluid. Then, referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the PCM using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 3. When reprogramming the PCM use blank path programming. Select the proper file from the chart and manually enter the PCM part number or tear tag number to obtain the updated calibration file. To Perform Blank Path Programming: 1. Connect WDS/IDS to vehicle. 2. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK. 3. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK. 4. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK. 5. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press TICK. 6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Keep ignition in the "OFF" position, press TICK and you will be asked to cycle the key "ON" and "OFF" a few times. Please keep the key position in the "OFF" position through the key cycles. 7. Screen will show "The diagnostic tester is unable to communicate with this vehicle." You will be prompted to "select a vehicle from the vehicle list", press TICK. 8. A list of vehicles will be displayed, select ALL OTHERS, and press TICK. 9. Screen shows "To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of the following: Vehicle Calibration number (7 digits), Tear Tag number (4 digits), or PCM part number, press TICK. 10. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed above. Press TICK. 11. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) per Workshop Manual, Section 419-01. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 4659 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9F715 42 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls General PCM Programming Procedures TSB 04-24-14 12/13/04 FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS 1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis, Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement. ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed. ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs. Verify repair after reprogramming. SERVICE PROCEDURE PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement 1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle. 2. Use WDS if available. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 4664 a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply. b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level. 3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool, such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS. NOTE IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS, GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF. PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD 1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. 2. Install the new PCM. NOTE IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER. 3. Attempt to start the vehicle. 4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM. 5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639. a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1. b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc. 6. Check for DTC B2900. a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during this procedure. b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7. 7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures. REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement 1. Verify all cables are properly connected. 2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level. 3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level. 4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again. 5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open previous session, and attempt reprogramming again. 6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure. 1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits. 2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity. NOTE IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 4665 INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC. 3. Connect WDS to vehicle. 4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK. 5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK. 6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK. 7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press TICK. 8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK. 9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK. 10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above". 11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK. 12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed above. Press TICK. 13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. 14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls General PCM Programming Procedures TSB 04-24-14 12/13/04 FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS 1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis, Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement. ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed. ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs. Verify repair after reprogramming. SERVICE PROCEDURE PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement 1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle. 2. Use WDS if available. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 4671 a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply. b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level. 3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool, such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS. NOTE IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS, GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF. PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD 1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. 2. Install the new PCM. NOTE IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER. 3. Attempt to start the vehicle. 4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM. 5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639. a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1. b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc. 6. Check for DTC B2900. a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during this procedure. b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7. 7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures. REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement 1. Verify all cables are properly connected. 2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level. 3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level. 4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again. 5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open previous session, and attempt reprogramming again. 6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure. 1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits. 2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity. NOTE IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 4672 INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC. 3. Connect WDS to vehicle. 4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK. 5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK. 6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK. 7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press TICK. 8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK. 9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK. 10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above". 11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK. 12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed above. Press TICK. 13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. 14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations View 151-27 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Page 4683 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Band Apply Servo: Service and Repair Special Tools And Equipment Special Tool(s) Removal 1. NOTE: Servicing the intermediate/overdrive servo in the vehicle is only recommended in the event of a leak. If servicing is required due to a servo condition, it is necessary to remove and disassemble the transaxle to inspect the intermediate/overdrive band assembly and direct clutch for damage. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. WARNING: The servo is under pressure. Servo and servo cover are under high spring force. Use caution when removing servo cover. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Assemble the special tool. 3. Remove the splash shield. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4692 4. Remove the transmission cooler line bracket and bolt, and position the bracket out of the way. 5. CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to remove the retaining ring or damage to the case may occur. Use only snap ring pliers to remove the retaining ring. Using the special tool, remove the servo retaining ring. 1. Install the special tool. 2. Compress the servo assembly by tightening the bolt. 3. Remove the retaining ring. 6. Remove the special tool. 7. Remove the servo cover assembly. 8. Remove the intermediate and overdrive servo piston and return spring. 9. Wipe the servo piston and the servo cover cap with a lint-free cloth. 10. CAUTION: Do not clean the rubber sealing surfaces of the servo piston and the servo cover cap with cleaning solvent or damage to the sealing surface may result. Inspect the servo piston for cracks on its pressure surfaces and in the sealing area. Look for damage near the point where the servo piston is attached to the servo rod. 11. Squeeze the servo piston lip for flexibility. If the lip feels brittle, install a new piston. 12. Inspect the servo retainer spring for cracks, breaks or deformation. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4693 1. WARNING: Servo return spring force is very high. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Assemble the special tool. 2. Install the special tool. 3. CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to install the retaining ring or damage to the case may occur. Use only snap ring pliers to install the retaining ring. NOTE: If the servo cover will not seat deep enough in the bore to install the servo cover retaining ring, use a blunt punch or small hammer and gently tap the cover around the outer edge until the servo cover retaining ring can be installed. Tighten the special tool bolt. ^ Install the servo cover retaining ring. 4. If the case is stamped "WG", install a wide-groove snap ring, or the servo will be damaged. 5. Loosen the special tool bolt. ^ When the spring tension is released, remove the special tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4694 6. Install the transmission fluid cooler line. 7. Install the splash shield. 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Start the vehicle. Place transmission range selector lever in each gear and allow to engage. Check for leaks. 10. Check transmission fluid. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH Typical Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position (BPP) switch (Figure 27) is used by the PCM to disengage the transmission torque converter clutch and on some applications as an input to the idle speed control for idle quality and for vehicle speed control deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in the following manner: - BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake is applied. - BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM or HEM), BPP signal is than broadcasted over the data link to be received by the PCM. - BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake (ABS)- traction control / stability assist module. The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generate an output called the Driver Brake Application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Note on applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stoplamp circuit, if all stoplamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stoplamp bulbs has failed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Differential Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Differential Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity .......................................................................................................................................................... 9.5L (10 qts.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Differential Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4703 Differential Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Ford Part Name - MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid Ford Part Number - XT-5-QM Ford Specification - MERCON(R) V Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering Fluid - A/T: Customer Interest Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering TSB 06-11-7 06/12/06 2001-2005 ESCAPE 3.0L UNSTABLE IDLE - 2001-2003 ESCAPE 3.0L AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SHUDDER - MEXICO ONLY FORD: 2001-2005 Escape ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine may exhibit idle speeds outside the specified range. Some 2001-2003 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and CD4E automatic transaxle may exhibit a transmission shudder. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If the concern is a 2001-2005 Escape with idle speeds outside the specified range: a. Install a new idle air control (IAC) valve with jumper harness included in the kit. The new Denso brand IAC will be installed with the electrical connector facing the opposite direction of the original (Hitachi) valve which is why the jumper harness is required. The original (Hitachi) IAC connector faces the front of the vehicle while the new Denso IAC connector faces toward the rear of the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 4712 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 4713 b. Referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. If the concern is a 2001 - 2003 Escape with transaxle shudder, drain, flush and refill the transmission fluid with MERCON(R) Multi-Purpose Automatic Transmission Fluid. Then, referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the PCM using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 3. When reprogramming the PCM use blank path programming. Select the proper file from the chart and manually enter the PCM part number or tear tag number to obtain the updated calibration file. To Perform Blank Path Programming: 1. Connect WDS/IDS to vehicle. 2. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK. 3. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK. 4. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK. 5. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press TICK. 6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Keep ignition in the "OFF" position, press TICK and you will be asked to cycle the key "ON" and "OFF" a few times. Please keep the key position in the "OFF" position through the key cycles. 7. Screen will show "The diagnostic tester is unable to communicate with this vehicle." You will be prompted to "select a vehicle from the vehicle list", press TICK. 8. A list of vehicles will be displayed, select ALL OTHERS, and press TICK. 9. Screen shows "To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of the following: Vehicle Calibration number (7 digits), Tear Tag number (4 digits), or PCM part number, press TICK. 10. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed above. Press TICK. 11. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) per Workshop Manual, Section 419-01. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 4714 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9F715 42 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-14-4 > Jul > 06 > A/T Mercon V ATF Usage Fluid - A/T: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage TSB 06-14-4 07/24/06 MERCON ATF IS BEING REPLACED BY MERCON V ATF AS A SERVICE FLUID. FORD: 1980-1997 Crown Victoria 1981-1997 Mustang, Thunderbird 1981-2003 Escort 1986-1993 Festiva 1986-1997 Taurus 1989-1997 Probe 1994-1997 Aspire 1995-2000 Contour 1980-1996 Bronco 1981-2003 F-150 1981-2004 E-Series, F-Super Duty 1983-1996 Ranger 1986-1996 Aerostar 1991-1997 Explorer 1993-2004 F-53 Motorhome Chassis 1995-1998 Windstar 1997-2004 Expedition 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2007 Escape 1987-2000 F-B-Series 2000-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 1980-1997 Town Car 1981-1997 Continental 1993-1997 Mark VIII 1998-2004 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood MERCURY: 1980-1997 Grand Marquis 1981-1997 Cougar 1986-1997 Sable 1987-1999 Tracer 1995-2000 Mystique 1999-2002 Cougar 1993-2002 Villager 1997 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner MERKUR: 1985-1989 XR4TI This article supersedes TSB 01-15-7 to update the vehicle application chart. ISSUE MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid is being replaced by MERCON(R) V as a service fluid. ACTION Beginning immediately all automatic transmission / transaxle applications requiring MERCON(R) can now be serviced using MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. After July 1, 2007, MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid will no longer be manufactured, therefore, availability of this fluid will only continue for however long it takes to deplete what remains in inventory. SERVICE PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-14-4 > Jul > 06 > A/T Mercon V ATF Usage > Page 4720 Service automatic transmissions requiring MERCON(R) with MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V For proper fluid application on current and past model vehicles equipped with automatic transmissions I transaxles refer to the fluid usage chart. (Figure 1) CAUTION AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS / TRANSAXLES THAT REQUIRE MERCON® V SHOULD STILL ONLY USE MERCON(R) V OR DUAL USAGE FLUID LABELED MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-14-4 > Jul > 06 > A/T Mercon V ATF Usage > Page 4721 CAUTION MERCON(R) SP, MOTORCRAFT PREMIUM AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID AND MOTORCRAFT M5 ATFS ARE UNIQUE FLUIDS AND MUST BE USED IN APPLICATIONS RECOMMENDING THAT PARTICULAR FLUID. USE OF ANY OTHER FLUID MAY CAUSE REDUCED FUNCTIONALITY OR TRANSMISSION DAMAGE. CAUTION THE FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS OF FLUIDS FOR CVT TRANSMISSIONS ARE VERY DIFFERENT THAN THOSE OF OTHER AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUIDS (ATFS). USE OF A FLUID OTHER THAN MOTORCRAFT CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE CHAIN TYPE TRANSMISSION FLUID OR ONE LABELED AS MEETING MERCON(R) C WILL CAUSE FUNCTIONALITY CONCERNS AND INTERNAL TRANSMISSION DAMAGE. CAUTION DO NOT USE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID SUPPLEMENTS, ADDITIVES, TREATMENTS OR CLEANING AGENTS. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering Fluid - A/T: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering TSB 06-11-7 06/12/06 2001-2005 ESCAPE 3.0L UNSTABLE IDLE - 2001-2003 ESCAPE 3.0L AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SHUDDER - MEXICO ONLY FORD: 2001-2005 Escape ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine may exhibit idle speeds outside the specified range. Some 2001-2003 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and CD4E automatic transaxle may exhibit a transmission shudder. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If the concern is a 2001-2005 Escape with idle speeds outside the specified range: a. Install a new idle air control (IAC) valve with jumper harness included in the kit. The new Denso brand IAC will be installed with the electrical connector facing the opposite direction of the original (Hitachi) valve which is why the jumper harness is required. The original (Hitachi) IAC connector faces the front of the vehicle while the new Denso IAC connector faces toward the rear of the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 4726 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 4727 b. Referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. If the concern is a 2001 - 2003 Escape with transaxle shudder, drain, flush and refill the transmission fluid with MERCON(R) Multi-Purpose Automatic Transmission Fluid. Then, referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the PCM using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 3. When reprogramming the PCM use blank path programming. Select the proper file from the chart and manually enter the PCM part number or tear tag number to obtain the updated calibration file. To Perform Blank Path Programming: 1. Connect WDS/IDS to vehicle. 2. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK. 3. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK. 4. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK. 5. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press TICK. 6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Keep ignition in the "OFF" position, press TICK and you will be asked to cycle the key "ON" and "OFF" a few times. Please keep the key position in the "OFF" position through the key cycles. 7. Screen will show "The diagnostic tester is unable to communicate with this vehicle." You will be prompted to "select a vehicle from the vehicle list", press TICK. 8. A list of vehicles will be displayed, select ALL OTHERS, and press TICK. 9. Screen shows "To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of the following: Vehicle Calibration number (7 digits), Tear Tag number (4 digits), or PCM part number, press TICK. 10. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed above. Press TICK. 11. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) per Workshop Manual, Section 419-01. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 4728 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9F715 42 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-14-4 > Jul > 06 > A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage Fluid - A/T: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage TSB 06-14-4 07/24/06 MERCON ATF IS BEING REPLACED BY MERCON V ATF AS A SERVICE FLUID. FORD: 1980-1997 Crown Victoria 1981-1997 Mustang, Thunderbird 1981-2003 Escort 1986-1993 Festiva 1986-1997 Taurus 1989-1997 Probe 1994-1997 Aspire 1995-2000 Contour 1980-1996 Bronco 1981-2003 F-150 1981-2004 E-Series, F-Super Duty 1983-1996 Ranger 1986-1996 Aerostar 1991-1997 Explorer 1993-2004 F-53 Motorhome Chassis 1995-1998 Windstar 1997-2004 Expedition 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2007 Escape 1987-2000 F-B-Series 2000-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 1980-1997 Town Car 1981-1997 Continental 1993-1997 Mark VIII 1998-2004 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood MERCURY: 1980-1997 Grand Marquis 1981-1997 Cougar 1986-1997 Sable 1987-1999 Tracer 1995-2000 Mystique 1999-2002 Cougar 1993-2002 Villager 1997 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner MERKUR: 1985-1989 XR4TI This article supersedes TSB 01-15-7 to update the vehicle application chart. ISSUE MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid is being replaced by MERCON(R) V as a service fluid. ACTION Beginning immediately all automatic transmission / transaxle applications requiring MERCON(R) can now be serviced using MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. After July 1, 2007, MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid will no longer be manufactured, therefore, availability of this fluid will only continue for however long it takes to deplete what remains in inventory. SERVICE PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-14-4 > Jul > 06 > A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage > Page 4734 Service automatic transmissions requiring MERCON(R) with MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V For proper fluid application on current and past model vehicles equipped with automatic transmissions I transaxles refer to the fluid usage chart. (Figure 1) CAUTION AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS / TRANSAXLES THAT REQUIRE MERCON® V SHOULD STILL ONLY USE MERCON(R) V OR DUAL USAGE FLUID LABELED MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-14-4 > Jul > 06 > A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage > Page 4735 CAUTION MERCON(R) SP, MOTORCRAFT PREMIUM AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID AND MOTORCRAFT M5 ATFS ARE UNIQUE FLUIDS AND MUST BE USED IN APPLICATIONS RECOMMENDING THAT PARTICULAR FLUID. USE OF ANY OTHER FLUID MAY CAUSE REDUCED FUNCTIONALITY OR TRANSMISSION DAMAGE. CAUTION THE FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS OF FLUIDS FOR CVT TRANSMISSIONS ARE VERY DIFFERENT THAN THOSE OF OTHER AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUIDS (ATFS). USE OF A FLUID OTHER THAN MOTORCRAFT CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE CHAIN TYPE TRANSMISSION FLUID OR ONE LABELED AS MEETING MERCON(R) C WILL CAUSE FUNCTIONALITY CONCERNS AND INTERNAL TRANSMISSION DAMAGE. CAUTION DO NOT USE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID SUPPLEMENTS, ADDITIVES, TREATMENTS OR CLEANING AGENTS. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Transmission Fluid .............................................................................................................................. .......................................................... 9.5L (10.0 qts.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4738 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Ford Part Name - MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid Ford Part Number - XT-5-QM Ford Specification - MERCON(R) V Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill Material Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Place a suitable container under the transaxle drain plug. 3. NOTE: If an integral problem is suspected, drain the fluid through a paper filter. A small amount of metal or friction particles may be found from normal wear. However, if excessive metal and friction particles are present, internal service will be required. Remove the transaxle drain plug and drain transmission fluid. Installation 1. Install the transaxle drain plug. ^ After the fluid has been drained, clean the drain plug threads and apply a small amount of Pipe Sealant with Teflon D8AZ-19554-A or XW7Z-19554-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSK-M2G350-A2. 2. Lower the vehicle 3. Add 3.7 liters (3.9 quarts) of MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 4. Start the engine and run through all gears for a total of five minutes at idle. Turn off the engine. 5. Repeat the previous steps to help flush fluid from the torque converter. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill > Page 4741 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Check Fluid Level and Condition CAUTION: The vehicle should not be driven if the fluid level is below the bottom hole on the fluid level indicator and the outside temperature is above 10°C (50°F). NOTE: Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an accurate fluid level check, drive the vehicle until warmed, approximately 30 km (20 miles). If your vehicle has been operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic, during hot weather, or while pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about 30 minutes to allow the fluid to cool before checking. Under normal circumstances, there is no need to check the fluid level of the transaxle, since the vehicle does not use up transmission fluid. However, if the transaxle is not working correctly, for instance, the transaxle may slip or shift slowly, or there may be some sign of fluid leakage, the fluid level should be checked. Fluid Level Check 1. Drive the vehicle 30 km (20 miles) or until the vehicle reaches normal operating temperatures. 2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake. 3. With your foot on the brake, start the engine and move the range selector lever through all the gear ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage. 4. Place the range selector in P (park) and leave the engine running. 5. Remove the fluid level indicator and wipe it clean with a clean cloth. 6. Install the fluid level indicator, making sure that it is fully seated in the filler tube. 7. Remove the fluid level indicator. The fluid should be in the designated areas for normal and room temperature. Low Fluid Level Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid level is below the hole at the bottom of the fluid level indicator and the outside temperature is above 10°C (50°F). High Fluid Level Fluid levels above the safe range can result in transmission failure. An overfill condition of transmission fluid can cause shift or engagement concerns, or possible damage. High fluid levels can cause an overheating condition. Adding Fluid CAUTION: Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid can cause internal transmission component damage. An overfill condition of transmission fluid can cause shift or engagement concerns, or possible damage. Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of fluid used is normally indicated on the fluid level indicator. If necessary, add fluid in 250 ml (1/2 pint) increments through the filler tube until the level is correct. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill > Page 4742 If an overfill condition occurs, excess fluid should be removed by a qualified technician. Fluid Condition Check NOTE: Evidence of fluid contamination, breakdown, or incorrect fluid can cause poor shift quality. If the transmission fluid condition is suspect, drain the transaxle and replace the fluid with MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. ^ Make the normal fluid level check as described in, Fluid Level Check. ^ Observe the color and odor of the fluid. It should be red, not brown or black. Odor can indicate an overheating condition or clutch disc or band failure. ^ Use a clean, lint-free cloth and wipe the fluid level indicator. Examine the stain for evidence of solid particles and signs of antifreeze (gum or varnish on the fluid level indicator). If particles are present in the fluid or there is evidence of contamination, the transaxle drain plug should be removed and a sample of the fluid filtered through a paper filter and examined. If transaxle failure is confirmed by further evidence of coolant or excessive particles in the fluid, the transaxle must be completely cleaned and repaired. This includes cleaning and flushing the torque converter and transaxle cooling system. During disassembly and assembly all overhaul checks and adjustments of clearances and end play must be made. After repairing the transaxle, all diagnostic tests and adjustments listed must be completed to make sure that the problem has been eliminated. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Locations Fluid Filter - A/T: Locations Part 1 Of 7 Transmission Fluid Filter Location Filter is located at exploded view position number 8 internal. See Transmission Disassembly/Assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4746 Special Tool Seal Removal Transmission Filter Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Fluid Line/Hose: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front bumper cover. 2. Disconnect the cooler tubes. 3. Disconnect the front cooler tube. 4. Disconnect and remove the front cooler tube. 5. Disconnect the rear cooler tube. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4750 6. Remove the rear transmission cooler tube bracket bolt and the cooler tube. 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Disconnect and remove the integral to auxiliary cooler tube. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Fill the transaxle to the specified level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Fluid Pan: Specifications Transmission Pan Torque Sequence Transmission Fluid Pan Bolts .............................................................................................................. ..................................................... 13 Nm (10 ft. lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair Shift Indicator: Service and Repair SELECTOR LEVER INDICATOR BULB REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument cluster. 2. Remove the selector lever indicator bulb. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations View 151-17 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4762 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4763 Shift Interlock Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4764 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Main Control Cover and Gasket Removal 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Disconnect the wiring harness from the battery tray bracket. 3. Remove the battery tray bracket. 4. Remove the breather tube and disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the intake tube and the air cleaner cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket > Page 4769 6. Remove the vent tube hose. 7. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 8. Remove the LH front wheel. 9. Remove the LH splash shield. 10. Remove the main control cover bolts and the cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket > Page 4770 11. Remove the main control cover gasket from the pan. Installation 1. Position the main control cover gasket on the case. 2. Position the main control cover on the case and loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket > Page 4771 3. Tighten the bolts in the sequence as indicated. 4. Install the LH splash shield. 5. Install the LH front wheel. 6. Install the vent tube hose. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket > Page 4772 7. Install the intake tube and the air cleaner cover. 8. Install the breather tube and connect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 9. Install the battery tray bracket. 10. Connect the wiring harness to the battery tray bracket. 11. Install the battery tray. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket > Page 4773 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Differential Fluid Seals-LH Special Tools And Equipment Special Tool(s) Materials Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket > Page 4774 2. NOTE: Place a suitable drain pan under the vehicle. Remove the transaxle drain plug and drain the fluid. 3. Remove the LH halfshaft. 4. Using the special tools, remove and discard the LH differential seal. Installation 1. Using the special tool, install the LH differential seal. 2. Install the LH halfshaft. 3. Remove the drain pan and lower the vehicle. 4. Install the transaxle drain plug. ^ After the fluid has been drained, clean the drain plug threads and apply a small amount of pipe sealant. 5. Add automatic transmission fluid. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket > Page 4775 6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Refill as necessary. 7. Allow the transmission fluid to reach operating temperature and fill as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket > Page 4776 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Differential Fluid Seals-RH Special Tools And Equipment Special Tool(s) Materials Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. NOTE: Determine the source of the fluid leak. If the leak is from the transaxle, continue with this procedure. If it is determined that the fluid leak is coming from the power take-off (PTO) unit, remove the PTO. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket > Page 4777 3. NOTE: Place a suitable drain pan under the vehicle. Remove the transaxle drain plug and drain the fluid 4. Remove the RH halfshaft. 5. If equipped remove the PTO. 6. If the vehicle is equipped with a PTO, use the special tools to remove the RH differential seal. 7. If the vehicle is not equipped with a PTO, use the special tools to remove the RH differential seal. Installation 1. If the vehicle is equipped with a PTO, use the special tools to install the RH differential seal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket > Page 4778 2. If the vehicle is not equipped with a PTO, use the special tools to install the RH differential seal. 3. If equipped install the PTO. 4. Install the RH halfshaft. 5. Install the transaxle drain plug. ^ After the fluid has been drained, clean the drain plug threads and apply a small amount of pipe sealant. 6. Remove the drain pan and lower the vehicle. 7. Add automatic transmission fluid. 8. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Refill as necessary. 9. Allow the transmission fluid to reach operating temperature and fill as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH Typical Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position (BPP) switch (Figure 27) is used by the PCM to disengage the transmission torque converter clutch and on some applications as an input to the idle speed control for idle quality and for vehicle speed control deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in the following manner: - BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake is applied. - BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM or HEM), BPP signal is than broadcasted over the data link to be received by the PCM. - BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake (ABS)- traction control / stability assist module. The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generate an output called the Driver Brake Application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Note on applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stoplamp circuit, if all stoplamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stoplamp bulbs has failed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The transmission control switch (TCS) (Figure 50) and (Figure 51) signals the PCM with keypower whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) lights when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. The operator of the vehicle controls the position of the TCS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4789 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4790 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Special Tools And Equipment Special Tool(s) Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the battery and tray. 3. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor. 1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4791 2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Connect the electrical connector. 3. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray, check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or incorrect routing position. NOTE: When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the vehicle must relearn its adaptive shift strategy. During this relearning process shifts might be slightly firm, early or delayed. This operation is normal and will not affect the function or durability of the transaxle. Normal operation will return once these transaxle parameters are stored by the vehicle PCM. Install the battery and tray. 4. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should illuminate in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4796 View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4799 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4800 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Material Materials Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor. 5. Remove the TSS sensor. ^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4801 6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation. Install the TSS sensor. ^ Connect the TSS electrical connector (white connector). 2. Remove the drain pan. 3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using clean automatic transmission fluid. 7. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4802 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor. ^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the OSS bore. 5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation. Install the OSS sensor. ^ Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4803 2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations View 151-17 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4808 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4809 Shift Interlock Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4810 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Shifter A/T: Service and Repair Removal and Installation NOTE: LH drive is shown, RH drive is similar. 1. Remove the clockspring. 2. Remove the multifunction switch. 3. Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch. 4. Disconnect the gearshift cable. 5. Disconnect the electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the wiring harness from the gear shifter assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4817 7. Remove the bolts and the gearshift lever assembly. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments Shift Cable: Adjustments Special Tools And Equipment Special Tool(s) 1. Remove the upper steering column shroud. 2. Remove the lower steering column shroud. 1. Remove the screws. 2. Remove the lower steering column shroud. 3. Position a 0.6 mm (0.023 inch) feeler gauge between the gearshift lever selector and the gearshift lever detent. 4. Place the gearshift lever in the DRIVE position and hang a 1.4 kg (3 lb) weight from the gearshift lever. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4822 5. Loosen the gearshift cable adjuster to adjust the cable then tighten. 6. Remove the weight from the gearshift lever. 7. Place the gearshift lever in the PARK position and remove the feeler gauge. 8. Install the lower steering column shroud. 1. Position the lower steering column shroud. 2. Install the screws. 9. Install the upper steering column shroud. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4823 Shift Cable: Service and Repair Special Tools And Equipment Special Tool(s) Removal NOTE: LH drive shown; RH drive similar. 1. Remove the upper steering column shroud. 2. Remove the lower steering column shroud. 1. Remove the screws. 2. Remove the lower steering column shroud. 3. Disconnect the gearshift cable from the steering column bracket. 1. Disconnect the gearshift cable from the gearshift lever. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4824 2. Disconnect the gearshift cable from the steering column bracket. 4. Remove the gearshift cable nuts. 5. Detach the gearshift cable from the transaxle shifter lever. 6. Disconnect the gearshift cable from the bracket by depressing the locking tabs at the bracket. 7. Remove the gearshift cable. Installation NOTE: LH drive shown; RH drive similar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4825 1. Install the gearshift cable. 2. Install the gearshift cable in the bracket. 3. Connect the gearshift cable to the transaxle shifter lever. 4. Install the gearshift cable nuts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4826 5. Connect the gearshift cable to the gearshift lever. 1. Attach the gearshift cable to the steering column bracket. 2. Connect the gearshift cable to the gearshift lever. 6. Position a 0.6 mm (0.023 inch) feeler gauge between the gearshift lever selector and the gearshift lever detent. 7. Place the gearshift lever in the DRIVE position and hang a 1.4 kg (3 lb) weight from the gearshift lever. 8. Loosen the gearshift cable adjuster to adjust the cable then tighten. 9. Install the lower steering column shroud. 1. Position the lower steering column shroud. 2. Install the screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4827 10. Install the upper steering column shroud. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T CD4E - Cold Weather Transmission Failure Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T CD4E - Cold Weather Transmission Failure TSB 09-25-4 12/28/09 CD4E TRANSMISSION FAILURE - REPLACE OR INSTALL TRANSMISSION FLUID COOLER COLD WEATHER BYPASS KIT FORD: 2001-2008 Escape MERCURY: 2001-2008 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 4-14-1 to update the model year coverage, Part List and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2001-2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a CD4E transmission may experience a transmission failure due to inadequate lube flow during warm up in cold weather. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Follow the Workshop Manual, Section 307-01 service procedure to repair the transmission. When overhauling or replacing a CD4E transmission, always install a new cold weather transmission fluid bypass kit, even if not previously equipped. Do not flush or back flush existing transmission cooler bypass valve system or cooler tube system. Follow instruction sheets included in the new Cold Weather Transmission Fluid Cooler Bypass Kit. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT092504 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual Performed As Actual Time Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7K177 55 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4832 Transmission Cooler: Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4833 Transmission Cooler: Description and Operation All vehicles with automatic transmissions are equipped with a transmission fluid cooler integral to the radiator which cannot be repaired separately. The integral transmission fluid cooler transfers heat from the transmission fluid to the engine coolant. The auxiliary transmission fluid cooler transfers heat from the transmission fluid to the outside air. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Transmission Cooler: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview 1. Verify the customer's concern by operating the vehicle to duplicate the condition. 2. If the inspection reveals obvious concern(s) that can be readily identified, repair as necessary. 3. Install new components if a fluid leak is found in any of the transaxle cooling components. 4. If the concern(s) remains after the inspection, determine the symptom(s) and go to the following Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4836 Symptom Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Auxiliary Transmission Fluid Cooler Transmission Cooler: Service and Repair Auxiliary Transmission Fluid Cooler Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front bumper cover. 2. Disconnect the cooler tubes. 3. Remove the bolts and the auxiliary transmission fluid cooler. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Fill the transaxle to the specified level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Auxiliary Transmission Fluid Cooler > Page 4839 Transmission Cooler: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Cooler 1. NOTE: Rubber hoses must be attached to the ends of the fluid cooler tubes, to aid in connecting them to the cleaner. Connect the cleaner pressure and return lines appropriately. 1. Connect the pressure line to the fluid cooler inlet tube. 2. Connect the return line to the fluid cooler outlet tube. 3. Place the outlet end of the return line in the solvent tank reservoir. 2. NOTE: Cycling the solvent pump on and off helps dislodge contaminants in the cooler system. Switch the solvent pumps on. Allow the solvent to circulate a minimum of 5 minutes. 3. Switch the solvent pump off. 4. Disconnect the cleaner pressure line at the fluid cooler tube. 5. Using compressed air, blow through the fluid cooler inlet tube until all solvent is removed. 6. Remove the rubber hoses from the fluid cooler tubes. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Auxiliary Transmission Fluid Cooler > Page 4840 Transmission Cooler: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Cooler-Backflushing and Cleaning Special Tools And Equipment Special Tool(s) CAUTION: Test the Torque Converter Cleaner to make sure that a vigorous fluid flow is present before proceeding. Install a new system filter if flow is weak or contaminated. 1. NOTE: Rubber hoses must be attached to the ends of this fluid cooler tubes to connect them to the cleaner. Connect the cleaner pressure and return lines appropriately. 1. Connect the pressure line to the fluid cooler inlet tube. 2. Connect the return line to the fluid cooler outlet tube. 3. Place the outlet end of the return line in the solvent tank reservoir. 2. NOTE: Cycling the solvent pump on and off will help dislodge contaminants in the cooler system. Switch the solvent pumps on. Allow the solvent to circulate a minimum of five minutes. 3. Switch the solvent pump off. 4. Disconnect the cleaner pressure line at the fluid cooler tube. 5. Using compressed air, blow through the fluid cooler inlet tube until all solvent is removed. 6. Remove the rubber hoses from the fluid cooler tubes. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The transmission control switch (TCS) (Figure 50) and (Figure 51) signals the PCM with keypower whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) lights when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. The operator of the vehicle controls the position of the TCS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator-Lower, Front Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator-Lower, Front Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Remove the cross brace. 4. Remove the lower vibration dampener. 5. Remove the cross brace. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator-Lower, Front > Page 4848 6. Remove the top and bottom mount cups. 7. Remove the rubber mount. Installation 1. Install a new rubber mount. 2. Install the top and bottom mount cups. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator-Lower, Front > Page 4849 3. Install the cross brace. 4. Install the lower vibration dampener. 5. Install the cross brace. 6. Install the splash shield. 7. Lower the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator-Lower, Front > Page 4850 Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator-Lower, Rear, 3.0L DOHC Removal 1. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor. 2. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover. 3. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 4. Remove the bolts and nuts from the mount, and remove the mount. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator-Lower, Front > Page 4851 1. NOTE: Prior to tightening the mount nuts install the mount bolt for correct alignment. Install a new mount and bolts. 1. Install the mount. 2. Loosely install the bolt for correct alignment. 3. Tighten the bolt. 2. Install the air cleaner assembly. 3. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover. 4. Connect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator-Lower, Front > Page 4852 Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator-LH Special Tools And Equipment Special Tool(s) Removal 1. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator-Lower, Front > Page 4853 2. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover. 3. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 4. Install the special tools. 5. Install the special tools. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator-Lower, Front > Page 4854 6. Remove the upper transaxle mount bolt. 7. Remove the upper transaxle insulator. 8. Remove the top and bottom mount cups. Installation 1. Install the top and bottom mount cups. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator-Lower, Front > Page 4855 2. Install the upper transaxle insulator. 3. Install the upper transaxle bolt. 4. Remove the special tool. 5. Remove the special tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator-Lower, Front > Page 4856 6. Install the air cleaner assembly. 7. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover. 8. Connect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4860 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4861 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Special Tools And Equipment Special Tool(s) Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the battery and tray. 3. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor. 1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4862 2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Connect the electrical connector. 3. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray, check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or incorrect routing position. NOTE: When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the vehicle must relearn its adaptive shift strategy. During this relearning process shifts might be slightly firm, early or delayed. This operation is normal and will not affect the function or durability of the transaxle. Normal operation will return once these transaxle parameters are stored by the vehicle PCM. Install the battery and tray. 4. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should illuminate in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4867 View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4870 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4871 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Material Materials Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor. 5. Remove the TSS sensor. ^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4872 6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation. Install the TSS sensor. ^ Connect the TSS electrical connector (white connector). 2. Remove the drain pan. 3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using clean automatic transmission fluid. 7. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4873 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor. ^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the OSS bore. 5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation. Install the OSS sensor. ^ Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4874 2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4878 Valve Body: Service and Repair Special Tools And Equipment Special Tool(s) Material Materials Removal 1. Disconnect the battery cables. 2. Remove the battery and tray. 3. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4879 4. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover. 5. Disconnect the transaxle wiring harness electrical connector, and TR sensor connector. 6. Disconnect the shift cable. 7. Remove the shift cable and bracket, and position out of the way. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4880 8. Remove the vent tube hose. 9. Raise and support the vehicle. 10. Remove the LH front wheel. 11. Remove the splash shield. 12. Remove the main control cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4881 13. Remove the main control cover gasket. 14. NOTE: Remove the bolts in the indicated sequence. Remove the main control valve body bolts. 15. NOTE: Do not damage the manual valve. Lift the main control valve body while disconnecting the manual valve link. 16. Depress the retaining tabs and push the solenoid valve body electrical connector down through the transaxle case. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4882 17. Make sure the manual valve control lever does not fall out of the main control valve body while removing from the vehicle. Installation 1. NOTE: Inspect the solenoid valve body harness connector O-ring seal for damage. Install a new O-ring seal, if damaged, before installing the connector into the case. Push the solenoid valve body harness connector into the case. 2. Connect the manual valve link to the main control valve body. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4883 3. Install the main control valve body and tighten the bolts in sequence as indicated. 4. Loosen the nut on the ball stud for the manual valve detent lever actuating rod assembly. 5. Move the manual control lever shaft to the "D" position. ^ Install the pin to hold the special tool in place. 6. Move the manual valve detent lever assembly to the "D" position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4884 7. Tighten the nut on the ball. ^ Remove the shifter pin from the special tool. 8. Tighten the detent nut. Rotate the manual control lever back to "D" to recheck the adjustment. 9. Using the special tool, recheck the manual control lever assembly setting. 10. Install the manual control lever. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4885 11. Install and rotate the manual valve detent lever assembly to the neutral position. 1. Low 1 2. Low 2 3. Drive 4. Neutral 5. Reverse 6. Park 12. Install the gasket on the case. 13. Install the main control cover, and tighten the bolts in sequence as shown. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4886 14. Install the splash shield. 15. Install the LH front wheel. 16. Lower the vehicle. 17. Install the shift cable and bracket. 18. Connect the shift cable. 19. NOTE: Before installing the vent tube hose, clean out any obstructions in the hose using low air pressure. Install the vent tube hose to the fitting on the main control cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4887 20. Connect the transaxle harness connector, and the TR sensor connector. 21. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover. 22. Connect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor. 23. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or incorrect routing position. Install the battery tray and battery. 24. NOTE: When the battery is disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the strategy. Connect the battery cables. 25. Check the transmission fluid, add fluid as necessary. 26. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Refill as necessary. 27. Make sure the vehicle will only start in PARK, and then in NEUTRAL. Verify that the backup lamps illuminate in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Clutch Disc: Service and Repair Special Tools And Equipment Special Tool(s) Removal WARNING: Clutches and brakes contain asbestos fibers. Avoid breathing dust. Breathing asbestos dust may cause asbestosis and cancer. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Breathing asbestos dust is hazardous to your health. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Dust and dirt present on wheel brake and clutch assemblies may contain asbestos fibers that are hazardous to your health when made airborne by cleaning with compressed air or by dry brushing. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Wheel brake assemblies and clutch facings should be cleaned using a vacuum cleaner recommended for use with asbestos fibers such as brake/clutch/service vacuum 164-R3600. Dust and dirt from vacuum should be disposed of in a manner that prevents dust exposure such as sealed bags. The bag must be labeled as per OSHA instructions and the trash hauler notified as to the bag's contents. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: If a vacuum suitable for asbestos is not available, cleaning should be done wet. If dust generation is still possible, technicians should wear government approved toxic dust purifying respirators. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Grinding or sanding on brake linings, pads, rotors, drums or clutch facings should be done only while using correctly exhaust-ventilated equipment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: OSHA requires areas where asbestos dust generation is possible to be isolated and posted with warning signs. Only technicians concerned with carrying out brake or clutch service should be present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. Remove the transaxle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4892 2. Using the special tool, lock the flywheel to the engine. 3. WARNING: The clutch disc and clutch pressure plate are heavy and may fall if not held when the bolts are removed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Loosen bolts evenly to prevent pressure plate damage. Remove the bolts, clutch pressure plate and clutch disc. 4. CAUTION: Do not use cleaners with a petroleum base and do not immerse the clutch pressure plate in solvent. Using a suitable commercial alcohol base solvent, clean the clutch pressure plate. 5. Inspect the clutch pressure plate surface for burn marks, scores, flatness or ridges. 6. Inspect the clutch pressure plate diaphragm fingers for wear. Install a new clutch pressure plate as necessary. 7. Measure the depth to the rivet heads. Install a new clutch disc if any rivet head measurement is not within specifications. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4893 8. CAUTION: If the clutch disc is saturated with oil, inspect the rear engine crankshaft seal for leakage. If leakage is found, install a new seal prior to clutch disc installation. NOTE: Use an emery cloth to remove minor imperfections in the clutch disc lining surface. NOTE: Install a new clutch disc if any of the following conditions are present. Inspect the clutch disc for: ^ oil or grease saturation ^ worn or loose facings ^ warpage or loose rivets at the hub ^ loose or broken torsion dampening springs ^ wear or rust on splines 9. Using the special tool, check clutch disc runout. Install a new clutch disc if not within specifications. 10. NOTE: Install a new clutch release fork if any of the following conditions are present. Inspect the clutch release fork for: ^ cracks ^ distortion ^ excessive wear on the release bearing contact surface Installation 1. Using the special tool, position the clutch disc on the flywheel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4894 2. Position the clutch pressure plate on the flywheel, install the pressure plate bolts and tighten them in sequence to specification. 3. Remove the special tool. 4. Remove the special tool. 5. Install the transaxle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Clutch Fluid: Specifications Clutch Fluid Type .................................................................................................... Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 06-9-4 > May > 06 > M/T - Clutch Master Cylinder Squeaking Noise Clutch Master Cylinder: Customer Interest M/T - Clutch Master Cylinder Squeaking Noise TSB 06-9-4 05/15/06 SQUEAKING NOISE FROM CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER FORD: 2001-2004 Escape ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit a squeaking noise from the clutch master cylinder as the clutch pedal is depressed or released. This noise is typically only present in ambient temperatures of 70° F (21° C) or higher. This condition may be caused by the design of the master cylinder seal. ACTION Install an updated master cylinder containing a seal with an improved design. Replace the master cylinder following the procedure in Workshop Manual, Section 308-02. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 060904A 2001-2004 Escape 0.8 hr. 4X2/4X4: Replace Clutch Master Cylinder (Do Not Use With 7543A) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7A543 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 06-9-4 > May > 06 > M/T - Clutch Master Cylinder Squeaking Noise Clutch Master Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Clutch Master Cylinder Squeaking Noise TSB 06-9-4 05/15/06 SQUEAKING NOISE FROM CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER FORD: 2001-2004 Escape ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit a squeaking noise from the clutch master cylinder as the clutch pedal is depressed or released. This noise is typically only present in ambient temperatures of 70° F (21° C) or higher. This condition may be caused by the design of the master cylinder seal. ACTION Install an updated master cylinder containing a seal with an improved design. Replace the master cylinder following the procedure in Workshop Manual, Section 308-02. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 060904A 2001-2004 Escape 0.8 hr. 4X2/4X4: Replace Clutch Master Cylinder (Do Not Use With 7543A) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7A543 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4912 Clutch Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. CAUTION: Note the location and orientation of the clutch push rod retainer. If any damage to the retainer occurs during removal or installation, replace the retainer clip. The retainer must be correctly installed during assembly. Disconnect the clutch master cylinder rod from the clutch pedal. 2. Remove the clutch pedal bracket nut. 3. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglyeol ethers and polyglyeols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, wash it immediately with water. Disconnect the clutch master cylinder hose from the clutch master cylinder and plug it to prevent excess fluid loss. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4913 4. Disconnect the clutch slave cylinder tube from the clutch master cylinder. 5. Remove the clutch master cylinder. 1. Remove the clutch master cylinder nut. 2. Remove the clutch master cylinder. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Make sure that the push rod retainer is correctly positioned. ^ Bleed the air from the system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Slave Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Clutch Slave Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglyeol ethers and polyglyeols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, wash it immediately with water. Disconnect the clutch slave cylinder tube and plug it to prevent excess fluid loss. 2. Remove the clutch slave cylinder. 1. Remove the clutch slave cylinder bolts 2. Remove the clutch slave cylinder. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the air from the system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair Clutch Pedal Assembly: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the clutch master cylinder nut. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 4. CAUTION: Note the location and orientation of the clutch push rod retainer. If any damage to the retainer occurs during removal or installation, replace the retainer clip. The retainer must be correctly installed during assembly. Disconnect the clutch master cylinder rod from the clutch pedal. 5. Remove the clutch pedal. 1. Remove the nuts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4920 2. Remove the clutch pedal. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Make sure that the push rod retainer is correctly positioned. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-23 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4924 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Fork, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Clutch Release Fork: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Remove the transaxle. 2. Remove the rubber boot. 3. Remove the clutch release fork and bearing. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pilot Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair Pilot Bearing: Service and Repair Special Tools And Equipment Special Tool(s) Removal 1. Remove the flywheel. 2. Inspect the pilot bearing for: ^ misalignment and looseness in the crankshaft ^ needle rollers for scoring, worn or broken rollers, inadequate grease or discoloration ^ seal leakage 3. NOTE: Install a new pilot bearing only if it is damaged. Using the special tool, remove the pilot bearing. 1. Install the special tool. 2. Remove the pilot bearing. 4. Clean the transaxle input shaft with a wire brush. 5. Inspect the transmission input shaft for: ^ burrs ^ rust ^ damage to the input shaft spline ^ damage to the input shaft on the pilot bearing contact surface Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pilot Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4931 1. Using the special tool, install the pilot bearing. 2. Apply a light coating of Premium Long-Life Grease XG-1-C, XG-1-K or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M1C75-B to the transaxle input shaft. 3. Install the flywheel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications Pressure Plate: Specifications Clutch pressure plate bolts .................................................................................................................. ...................................................... 29 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4935 Pressure Plate: Service and Repair Special Tools And Equipment Special Tool(s) Removal WARNING: Clutches and brakes contain asbestos fibers. Avoid breathing dust. Breathing asbestos dust may cause asbestosis and cancer. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Breathing asbestos dust is hazardous to your health. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Dust and dirt present on wheel brake and clutch assemblies may contain asbestos fibers that are hazardous to your health when made airborne by cleaning with compressed air or by dry brushing. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Wheel brake assemblies and clutch facings should be cleaned using a vacuum cleaner recommended for use with asbestos fibers such as brake/clutch/service vacuum 164-R3600. Dust and dirt from vacuum should be disposed of in a manner that prevents dust exposure such as sealed bags. The bag must be labeled as per OSHA instructions and the trash hauler notified as to the bag's contents. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: If a vacuum suitable for asbestos is not available, cleaning should be done wet. If dust generation is still possible, technicians should wear government approved toxic dust purifying respirators. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Grinding or sanding on brake linings, pads, rotors, drums or clutch facings should be done only while using correctly exhaust-ventilated equipment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: OSHA requires areas where asbestos dust generation is possible to be isolated and posted with warning signs. Only technicians concerned with carrying out brake or clutch service should be present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. Remove the transaxle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4936 2. Using the special tool, lock the flywheel to the engine. 3. WARNING: The clutch disc and clutch pressure plate are heavy and may fall if not held when the bolts are removed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Loosen bolts evenly to prevent pressure plate damage. Remove the bolts, clutch pressure plate and clutch disc. 4. CAUTION: Do not use cleaners with a petroleum base and do not immerse the clutch pressure plate in solvent. Using a suitable commercial alcohol base solvent, clean the clutch pressure plate. 5. Inspect the clutch pressure plate surface for burn marks, scores, flatness or ridges. 6. Inspect the clutch pressure plate diaphragm fingers for wear. Install a new clutch pressure plate as necessary. 7. Measure the depth to the rivet heads. Install a new clutch disc if any rivet head measurement is not within specifications. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4937 8. CAUTION: If the clutch disc is saturated with oil, inspect the rear engine crankshaft seal for leakage. If leakage is found, install a new seal prior to clutch disc installation. NOTE: Use an emery cloth to remove minor imperfections in the clutch disc lining surface. NOTE: Install a new clutch disc if any of the following conditions are present. Inspect the clutch disc for: ^ oil or grease saturation ^ worn or loose facings ^ warpage or loose rivets at the hub ^ loose or broken torsion dampening springs ^ wear or rust on splines 9. Using the special tool, check clutch disc runout. Install a new clutch disc if not within specifications. 10. NOTE: Install a new clutch release fork if any of the following conditions are present. Inspect the clutch release fork for: ^ cracks ^ distortion ^ excessive wear on the release bearing contact surface Installation 1. Using the special tool, position the clutch disc on the flywheel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4938 2. Position the clutch pressure plate on the flywheel, install the pressure plate bolts and tighten them in sequence to specification. 3. Remove the special tool. 4. Remove the special tool. 5. Install the transaxle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Tow Capability/Service Kit Requirements Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Tow Capability/Service Kit Requirements TSB 06-7-1 04/17/06 NEUTRAL TOW CAPABILITY - SERVICE KIT REQUIREMENTS FORD: 2004-2006 Focus 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2006 Escape, Explorer, F-150-350 Series, Ranger 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2007 Explorer Sport Trac LINCOLN: 2006 Mark LT MERCURY: 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 06-4-5 to update the vehicle neutral tow application chart. ISSUE Various vehicles are neutral tow capable. Refer to the following chart to determine neutral tow capability for specific vehicle applications, and to determine if a Service Kit is required to make the vehicle neutral tow capable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Tow Capability/Service Kit Requirements > Page 4943 ACTION Review the neutral tow application chart (Figure 1) and order the kit, if applicable. Reprogramming of various modules may be required for some installations. Installation instructions are included with the kit. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Tow Capability/Service Kit Requirements > Page 4944 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations View 151-27 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Page 4950 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Cover > Component Information > Specifications Differential Cover: Specifications Rear Drive Axle Differential Housing Cover Retaining Bolt ................................................................................................................... 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4954 Differential Cover: Service and Repair Rear Drive Axle Differential Housing Cover Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. NOTE: Drain the differential fluid into a suitable drain pan. Remove the bolts and the rear differential cover. ^ Drain the differential fluid from the housing. Installation 1. CAUTION: Make sure the machined surfaces on the rear axle housing, the differential housing cover and the rotary blade coupling housing are clean and free of oil before installing the new silicone sealant. The inside of the rear axle must be covered when cleaning the machined surface to prevent contamination. Clean the gasket mating surfaces of the differential housing, the differential housing cover and the rotary blade coupling housing. 2. NOTE: The differential housing cover must be installed within 15 minutes of application of the silicone, or new sealant must be applied. If possible, allow one hour before filling with lubricant to make sure the silicone sealant has correctly cured. Apply a new continuous bead of clear silicone rubber as shown in the illustration. 3. Install the differential housing cover and bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4955 4. Fill the rear axle with 1.4 liters (2.95 pints) of rear axle lubricant. ^ Tighten the filler plug. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Lock > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations View 151-27 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Lock > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Page 4960 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Drive Axle Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Rear Drive Axle Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal Rear Drive Axle Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal Part 1 Of 2 Part 2 Of 2 Special Tool(s) Removal 1. Remove the halfshaft assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Drive Axle Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal > Page 4965 2. To remove the seal only, use the special tool and remove the stub shaft seal. 3. To remove the bearing and seal use the special tools and remove the stub shaft pilot bearing and seal. Installation 1. NOTE: Lubricate the new stub shaft pilot bearing with rear axle lubricant. To install the bearing, use the special tools and install the stub shaft pilot bearing. 2. NOTE: Lubricate the new stub shaft pilot bearing housing seal with grease. To install the seal, use the special tools and install the stub shaft pilot bearing housing seal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Drive Axle Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal > Page 4966 3. CAUTION: Inspect the inboard CV joint seal journal for rust or nicks/scratches prior to installing the halfshaft. If necessary, polish the seal journal with fine crocus cloth. Install the halfshaft assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Axle Shaft Assembly: > 05-10-7 > May > 05 > Drivetrain - Whine Noise at 20-45 MPH Axle Shaft Assembly: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Whine Noise at 20-45 MPH TSB 05-10-7 05/30/05 DRIVELINE WHINE 20-45 MPH (32-72 KM/H) FORD: 2001-2006 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2006 Mariner ISSUE Some 2001-2006 Escape and 2005-2006 Mariner vehicles equipped with a CD4E transaxle may exhibit a driveline whine at 20-45 MPH (32-72 Km/h) during light acceleration or deceleration. The sound may be more pronounced on vehicles equipped with steel wheels. ACTION If the whine noise occurs at the specified speed range 20-45 MPH (32-72 Km/h) during light acceleration or deceleration, install new dampened halfshaft assemblies. The revised halfshafts are designed to minimize the whine, however, a small amount of noise may be inherently characteristic. The dampened axle halfshafts will not correct driveline noises below or above 20-45 MPH (32-72 Km/h). Refer to Workshop Manual Section 307. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 051007A 2001-2004 Escape 1.1 Hrs. Replace The Front Halfshafts, Includes Time For Road Test To Verify Concern (Do Not Use With 4462A, 3329A) 051007B 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 1.4 Hrs. Replace The Front Half shafts, Includes Time For Road Test To Verify Concern (Do Not Use With 4462A, 3329A) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A427 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Axle Shaft Assembly: > 05-10-7 > May > 05 > Drivetrain - Whine Noise at 20-45 MPH Axle Shaft Assembly: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Whine Noise at 20-45 MPH TSB 05-10-7 05/30/05 DRIVELINE WHINE 20-45 MPH (32-72 KM/H) FORD: 2001-2006 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2006 Mariner ISSUE Some 2001-2006 Escape and 2005-2006 Mariner vehicles equipped with a CD4E transaxle may exhibit a driveline whine at 20-45 MPH (32-72 Km/h) during light acceleration or deceleration. The sound may be more pronounced on vehicles equipped with steel wheels. ACTION If the whine noise occurs at the specified speed range 20-45 MPH (32-72 Km/h) during light acceleration or deceleration, install new dampened halfshaft assemblies. The revised halfshafts are designed to minimize the whine, however, a small amount of noise may be inherently characteristic. The dampened axle halfshafts will not correct driveline noises below or above 20-45 MPH (32-72 Km/h). Refer to Workshop Manual Section 307. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 051007A 2001-2004 Escape 1.1 Hrs. Replace The Front Halfshafts, Includes Time For Road Test To Verify Concern (Do Not Use With 4462A, 3329A) 051007B 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 1.4 Hrs. Replace The Front Half shafts, Includes Time For Road Test To Verify Concern (Do Not Use With 4462A, 3329A) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A427 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Specifications > General Specifications Axle Shaft Assembly: Specifications General Specifications General Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Specifications > General Specifications > Page 4983 Axle Shaft Assembly: Specifications Torque Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4984 Axle Shaft Assembly: Description and Operation Rear Drive Halfshafts CAUTION: An inspection of the outer and inner boots is necessary so that if damage or grease leakage is evident, installation of a new halfshaft can take place immediately. Continued operation with damage or grease leakage will result in CV joint wear and noise due to contamination and loss of the CV joint grease. ^ The RH and LH halfshafts are the same length. ^ Inboard and outboard CV joints connect to a splined shaft. A circlip stopper holds the cross groove inboard race assembly (inboard CV joint) together. ^ An axle circlip retains the splined inboard CV joint to the differential side gear. Install a new axle circlip each time the halfshaft is removed from the vehicle ^ A rear axle wheel hub nut secures the side shaft assembly (interconnecting shaft and outboard CV joint) to the rear hub. Install a new rear axle wheel hub nut each time the halfshaft is removed from the vehicle. Halfshaft Handling CAUTION: Never pick up or hold the halfshaft only by the inboard or outboard CV joint. Do not over-angle the CV joints. Damage will occur to an assembled inboard CV joint if it is over-plunged outward from the joint housing. Never use a hammer to remove or install the halfshafts. Never use the halfshaft assembly as a lever to position other components. Always support the free end of the halfshaft. Do not allow the boots to contact sharp edges or hot exhaust components. Handle the halfshaft only by the interconnecting shaft to avoid pull-apart and potential damage to the CV joints. Do not drop assembled halfshafts. The impact will cut the boots from the inside without evidence of external damage. Handle all halfshaft components carefully during removal and installation procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Rear Drive Half Shaft Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Removal and Installation, Rear Drive Half Shaft Halfshaft Special Tool(s) Removal 1. Remove the rear coil spring. 2. Remove and discard the nut. 3. CAUTION: Make sure to support the wheel knuckle. Remove the nut and separate the lower ball joints. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Rear Drive Half Shaft > Page 4987 4. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the knuckle. 5. Using the special tool, remove the halfshaft. Installation 1. Install the halfshaft into the differential. 2. Using the special tool, install the halfshaft end into the hub assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Rear Drive Half Shaft > Page 4988 3. Position the lower ball joint and install the nut. 4. Install the halfshaft nut. 5. Install the rear coil spring. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Rear Drive Half Shaft > Page 4989 Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly, Rear Half Shaft Joint Halfshaft Joint Special Tools Special Tool(s) Disassembly 1. Remove the halfshaft. 2. Secure the halfshaft and Constant Velocity (CV) joint in a vise using protective jaw covers. 3. Remove the inboard halfshaft boot clamps. 4. Slide the inboard halfshaft boot off the inboard CV joint housing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Rear Drive Half Shaft > Page 4990 5. If reinstalling the original inner joint, mark the inner joint and the halfshaft to make sure of correct installation. 6. Using a soft face hammer, separate the halfshaft from the inboard joint housing. 7. Remove and discard the bearing retainer circlip. 8. Remove and discard the snap ring. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Rear Drive Half Shaft > Page 4991 9. Remove the inboard halfshaft boot from the halfshaft. 10. Remove the two outboard halfshaft boot clamps. 11. Slide the outboard halfshaft joint boot back out of the way exposing the outboard CV joint. 12. If reinstalling the original outboard CV joint, mark the outboard CV joint and halfshaft to make sure of correct installation. 13. Use a soft-face hammer to separate the outboard CV joint by gently tapping it off the halfshaft. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Rear Drive Half Shaft > Page 4992 14. Remove the halfshaft bearing retainer circlip and discard. 15. Remove the snap ring from the halfshaft. 16. Slide the outboard halfshaft boot off of the halfshaft. Assembly 1. Lubricate the inboard and outboard CV joint with joint grease. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Rear Drive Half Shaft > Page 4993 2. Install the outboard halfshaft boot. 3. Install the snap ring on the halfshaft. 4. Install a new halfshaft shaft bearing retainer circlip. 5. Use a soft-face hammer to install the inboard CV joint by gently tapping it onto the halfshaft. 6. Remove any excess grease on the mating surfaces and slide the outboard halfshaft joint boot forward onto the outboard CV joint. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Rear Drive Half Shaft > Page 4994 7. Remove any excess air trapped in the outboard halfshaft boot using a cloth covered screwdriver after adjusting the outboard halfshaft boot spacing. 8. Using the special tool, crimp two new outboard halfshaft boot clamps. 9. Position the inboard halfshaft boot. 10. Install the snap ring. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Rear Drive Half Shaft > Page 4995 11. Install the bearing retainer circlip. 12. Using a soft face hammer, install the halfshaft on the inboard joint. 13. Position the inboard halfshaft boot. 14. Remove any excess air trapped in the halfshaft boot using a cloth covered screwdriver after adjusting the halfshaft boot spacing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Rear Drive Half Shaft > Page 4996 15. Using the special tool, install two new inboard joint boot clamps. 16. Install the front wheel halfshaft. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearing Inspection NOTE: The wheel bearings are not adjustable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Wheel Bearing Part 1 Of 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5002 Part 2 Of 2 Special Tool(s) Removal NOTE: Install a new wheel bearing when the wheel hub is removed. All vehicles 1. Remove the brake disc. 2. Remove the wheel hub nut. 3. Remove the tie rod end nut. 1. Remove the cotter pin. 2. Remove the nut. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5003 4. Using the special tool, separate the tie rod end from the knuckle. Vehicles with ABS 5. Remove the bolt and position the anti-lock brake sensor aside. All vehicles 6. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle. 1. Remove the pinch bolt and nut. 2. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle. 7. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the wheel knuckle. ^ Position the halfshaft aside and support. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5004 8. Remove the wheel knuckle. 1. Remove the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts and nuts. 2. Remove the wheel knuckle. 9. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing and knuckle. 10. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle, after removing the wheel hub. Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 11. Remove the snap ring. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5005 12. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle. NOTE: The brake disc shield is pressed on. 13. If necessary, remove the brake disc shield. Installation All vehicles 1. If necessary, install a disc brake shield. 2. NOTE: Special Tool 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle. Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5006 3. Install the snap ring. 4. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. 5. Install the wheel knuckle. 1. Position the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts and nuts. 6. Using the special tool, insert the halfshaft into the wheel hub. 7. Position and align the ball joint stud into the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5007 8. Install the ball joint pinch bolt and nut into the wheel knuckle. Vehicles with ABS 9. Install the anti-lock brake sensor and tighten the bolt. All vehicles 10. Install the tie rod end into the wheel knuckle. 1. Install the tie rod end nut. 2. Install a new cotter pin. 11. Install the wheel hub nut. 12. Install the brake disc. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5008 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Bearing-2WD Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5009 Special Tool(s) Removal 1. Remove the brake drum. 2. NOTE: If equipped, remove the ABS sensor ring. Remove the wheel hub nut. 3. Using the special tools, remove the wheel hub. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5010 4. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle, after removing the wheel hub. Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 5. Remove the snap ring. 6. Using the special tools, remove the wheel bearing outer race from the wheel knuckle. Installation 1. Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5011 2. Install the snap ring. 3. Using the special tools, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. 4. NOTE: If equipped, install the ABS sensor ring. Install the wheel hub nut. 5. Install the brake drum. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Wheel hub nut ..................................................................................................................................... .................................................. 290 Nm (214 ft. lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Indexing Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service and Repair Driveshaft Indexing Driveshaft Indexing NOTE: If indexing the driveshaft does not eliminate the vibration, balance the driveshaft. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. CAUTION: Do not reuse the CV joint bolts and washers. Install new bolts and washers only or damage to the vehicle may occur. Remove the six front driveshaft to power take off bolts and washers. ^ Discard the bolts and washers. 3. Rotate the flange 60 degrees. 4. Connect the front driveshaft and install the new bolts and washers. 5. CAUTION: Do not reuse the bolts and straps for the pinion yoke. Install new bolts and straps or damage to the vehicle may occur. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Indexing > Page 5021 Disconnect the rear driveshaft universal joint. ^ Discard the bolts and straps. 6. Rotate the rear pinion yoke 180 degrees. 7. Connect the rear driveshaft and install new bolts and straps. 8. Lower the vehicle and test drive. 9. Repeat the procedure if necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Indexing > Page 5022 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service and Repair Driveshaft Runout and Balancing Driveshaft Runout and Balancing Special Tools Special Tool(s) 1. Remove the rear tires. ^ Install the lug nuts to retain the brake drums. 2. Check the rear driveshaft attachment. If there are any worn parts, new parts need to be installed. 3. Using the special tool, measure the runout at the front, the center, and the rear of the driveshaft. 4. If the runout measurements are within specifications, proceed to Step 13. 5. If the runout measurements exceed the specifications at the front or the center, then install a new driveshaft. 6. If the runout measurement exceeds the specifications at the rear, mark the rear runout high point on the driveshaft. 7. Scribe alignment marks on the driveshaft and the axle pinion flange. 8. Index the driveshaft. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Indexing > Page 5023 9. Using the special tool, measure the runout at the rear of the driveshaft. 10. If the runout measurement still exceeds the specification at the rear, mark the rear runout high point on the driveshaft. 11. If the runout measurement is within specifications, proceed to Step 13. 12. NOTE: Excessive driveshaft runout may originate in the driveshaft itself or in the axle pinion flange. Compare the two high points marked in Steps 6 and 10. ^ If the marks are within 25 mm (1 inch), then install a new driveshaft. ^ If the marks are not within 25 mm (1 inch), balance the driveshaft. Proceed to Step 13. 13. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not run the vehicle on the hoist for an extended period of time. ^ Record baseline speed with the transmission in gear. ^ Increase the vehicle speed to the maximum vibration level. ^ Record the speed of the vibration as a baseline. 14. WARNING: Keep hands away from the balance weights while the driveshaft is rotating. With the transmission in gear, run the vehicle with the driveshaft rotating 97 - 113 km/h (60 - 70 mph). 15. WARNING: Keep hands away from the balance weights while the driveshaft is rotating. Have an assistant contact the driveshaft with a marker in the rear, middle and front end to indicate heavy spots. 16. WARNING: Keep hands away from the balance weights while the driveshaft is rotating. To balance the driveshaft, install two screw-type hose clamps on the driveshaft and rotate them in 90 degree intervals. Check the vibration for each position and place the screws at the position that produces the least vibration. 17. Run the vehicle at the baseline speed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Indexing > Page 5024 18. If the vibration is still evident, rotate the clamps away from each other until the driveshaft is balanced. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Indexing > Page 5025 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Driveshaft Removal and Installation WARNING: The normal operating temperature of the exhaust system is very high. Never attempt to remove any part of the system until it has cooled. Be especially careful when working around the catalytic converters. The temperature of the converter rises to a high level after only a few minutes of engine operation. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Front driveshaft and driveshaft assembly 1. Place the selector lever in NEUTRAL 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Driveshaft assembly 3. Remove the ground strap bolt 4. CAUTION: Do not reuse the bolts and straps for the pinion yoke. Install new bolts and straps. NOTE: There is a difference in the length of the head of the replacement yoke strap bolts from the production bolts. The longer head pinion bolts can be used in either location. Remove the rear driveshaft universal joint caps 1 Index-mark the pinion and yoke to the rear of the driveshaft 2 Remove and discard the bolts and straps Front driveshaft and driveshaft assembly Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Indexing > Page 5026 5. CAUTION: Do not reuse the CV joint bolts and washers. Install new bolts and washers only or damage to the vehicle may occur. Remove the six front driveshaft to power take off bolts and washers ^ Discard the bolts and washers Driveshaft assembly 6. With the help of an assistant, remove the driveshaft. ^ Remove the center bearing nuts. Front driveshaft 7. CAUTION: Do not reuse the bolts and straps for the center U-joint. Install new bolts and straps or damage to the vehicle may occur. NOTE: There is a difference in the length of the head of the replacement yoke strap bolts from the production bolts. The longer head pinion bolts can be used in either location. Remove the front driveshaft. 1 Index-mark the front driveshaft to the center bearing. 2 Remove and discard the bolts and caps. Front driveshaft and driveshaft assembly 8. NOTE: If a driveshaft is installed and driveshaft vibration is encountered after installation, index the driveshaft. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Specifications Universal Joint: Specifications Universal joint cap bolts ....................................................................................................................... .................................................... 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5030 Universal Joint: Service and Repair Universal Joint - Center and Rear Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation CAUTION: Do not reuse the bolts and straps for either of the center U-joint or the pinion yoke U-joint. Install new bolts and straps or damage to the vehicle may occur. NOTE: There is a difference in length of the head of the replacement yoke strap bolts from the production bolts. The longer head pinion bolts can be used in either location. 1. NOTE: Index the driveshaft yoke to the driveshaft. Remove the driveshaft. 2. Clamp the special tool into a vise. 3. Remove the snap rings. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5031 4. Press out the bearing cups. ^ Rotate the driveshaft 180 degrees and repeat. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications Flex Plate: Specifications Flex Plate to Torque Convertor Bolts ...................................................................................................................................................... 36 Nm (27 ft. lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair Shift Indicator: Service and Repair SELECTOR LEVER INDICATOR BULB REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument cluster. 2. Remove the selector lever indicator bulb. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Manual Transaxle > Differential Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Differential Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications Manual Transaxle Fluid Capacity ........................................................................................................ ......................................................... 2.7L (2.85 qts.) NOTE: Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Manual Transaxle > Differential Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 5046 Differential Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications Manual Transaxle Fluid Type .......................................................................................................................................................... SAE 75W-90 Gear Oil Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications Manual Transmission Capacity ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................... 2.8 Quarts Note: Approximate refill. Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 5051 Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications Manual Transaxle Fluid Type...................................................................................................................................................... ............................................... SAE 75W-90 Gear Oil Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Flywheel Gear, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Flywheel Gear: Service and Repair Removal WARNING: This procedure should be carried out only by a correctly equipped and experienced acetylene torch operator. To avoid personal injury, tongs must be used or asbestos gloves worn when handling the heated flywheel ring gear. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. Remove the flywheel. 2. CAUTION: Tap the flywheel ring gear evenly to prevent binding. Remove the flywheel ring gear from the flywheel. ^ Evenly heat the flywheel ring gear and use brass drift to drive the flywheel ring gear off the flywheel. Installation WARNING: This procedure should be carried out only by a correctly equipped and experienced acetylene torch operator. To avoid personal injury, tongs must be used or asbestos gloves worn when handling the heated flywheel ring gear. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. CAUTION: Do not heat the flywheel ring gear beyond 278°C (532°F). Use heat indicating crayons to prevent overheating. CAUTION: Keep the torch moving to prevent hot spots. Evenly heat the flywheel ring gear. 2. CAUTION: The bevel on the flywheel ring gear must face the rear of the flywheel. Install the flywheel ring gear. ^ Use a brass drift to tap the flywheel ring gear into position. 3. Install the flywheel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the VSS. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Gearshift Linkage Shift Linkage: Service and Repair Gearshift Linkage Removal and Installation 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the gearshift linkage to transaxle bolt and nut. 3. Remove the gearshift linkage. 1. Remove the bolt and nut. 2. Remove the gearshift linkage. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Gearshift Linkage > Page 5063 Shift Linkage: Service and Repair Gearshift Lever Removal and Installation 1. Remove the center console trim and gearshift lever boot. 1. Remove the gearshift lever knob. 2. Remove the center console trim and gearshift lever boot. 2. Remove the snap ring. 3. Remove the plastic clip. 4. Remove the rubber bushing. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Gearshift Linkage > Page 5064 6. Disconnect the gearshift linkage. 1. Remove the bolt and nut. 2. Disconnect the gearshift linkage. 7. Remove the gearshift lever. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle LH Support Insulator Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle LH Support Insulator Special Tools And Equipment Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation 1. Using the special tool, support the engine. 2. Remove the air cleaner. 3. Remove the LH transaxle support insulator. 1. Remove the bolt. 2. Remove the four bolts. 3. Remove the LH transaxle support insulator. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle LH Support Insulator > Page 5069 Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Front Support Insulator Special Tools And Equipment Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation 1. Using the special tool, support the engine. 2. Remove the front transaxle support insulator bolt. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. 4. Remove the transverse crossmember. 1. Remove the bolts. 2. Remove the transverse crossmember. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle LH Support Insulator > Page 5070 5. Remove the front-to-aft crossmember. 1. Remove the splash shield screw. 2. Remove the bolts and the nut. 3. Remove the front-to-aft crossmember. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle LH Support Insulator > Page 5071 Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Rear Support Insulator Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear transaxle support insulator. 1. Remove the bolt. 2. Remove the bolt and the nuts. 3. Remove the rear transaxle support insulator. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the VSS. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations View 151-17 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5080 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5081 Shift Interlock Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5082 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5087 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH Typical Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position (BPP) switch (Figure 27) is used by the PCM to disengage the transmission torque converter clutch and on some applications as an input to the idle speed control for idle quality and for vehicle speed control deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in the following manner: - BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake is applied. - BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM or HEM), BPP signal is than broadcasted over the data link to be received by the PCM. - BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake (ABS)- traction control / stability assist module. The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generate an output called the Driver Brake Application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Note on applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stoplamp circuit, if all stoplamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stoplamp bulbs has failed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The transmission control switch (TCS) (Figure 50) and (Figure 51) signals the PCM with keypower whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) lights when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. The operator of the vehicle controls the position of the TCS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5099 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5100 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Special Tools And Equipment Special Tool(s) Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the battery and tray. 3. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor. 1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5101 2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Connect the electrical connector. 3. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray, check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or incorrect routing position. NOTE: When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the vehicle must relearn its adaptive shift strategy. During this relearning process shifts might be slightly firm, early or delayed. This operation is normal and will not affect the function or durability of the transaxle. Normal operation will return once these transaxle parameters are stored by the vehicle PCM. Install the battery and tray. 4. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should illuminate in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5106 View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5109 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5110 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Material Materials Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor. 5. Remove the TSS sensor. ^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5111 6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation. Install the TSS sensor. ^ Connect the TSS electrical connector (white connector). 2. Remove the drain pan. 3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using clean automatic transmission fluid. 7. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5112 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor. ^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the OSS bore. 5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation. Install the OSS sensor. ^ Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5113 2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the VSS. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5122 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5127 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations View 151-27 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Page 5138 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair Shift Indicator: Service and Repair SELECTOR LEVER INDICATOR BULB REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument cluster. 2. Remove the selector lever indicator bulb. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations View 151-17 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5149 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5150 Shift Interlock Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5151 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5156 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH Typical Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position (BPP) switch (Figure 27) is used by the PCM to disengage the transmission torque converter clutch and on some applications as an input to the idle speed control for idle quality and for vehicle speed control deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in the following manner: - BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake is applied. - BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM or HEM), BPP signal is than broadcasted over the data link to be received by the PCM. - BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake (ABS)- traction control / stability assist module. The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generate an output called the Driver Brake Application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Note on applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stoplamp circuit, if all stoplamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stoplamp bulbs has failed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The transmission control switch (TCS) (Figure 50) and (Figure 51) signals the PCM with keypower whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) lights when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. The operator of the vehicle controls the position of the TCS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5168 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5169 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Special Tools And Equipment Special Tool(s) Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the battery and tray. 3. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor. 1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5170 2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Connect the electrical connector. 3. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray, check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or incorrect routing position. NOTE: When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the vehicle must relearn its adaptive shift strategy. During this relearning process shifts might be slightly firm, early or delayed. This operation is normal and will not affect the function or durability of the transaxle. Normal operation will return once these transaxle parameters are stored by the vehicle PCM. Install the battery and tray. 4. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should illuminate in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5175 View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5178 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5179 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Material Materials Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor. 5. Remove the TSS sensor. ^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5180 6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation. Install the TSS sensor. ^ Connect the TSS electrical connector (white connector). 2. Remove the drain pan. 3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using clean automatic transmission fluid. 7. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5181 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor. ^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the OSS bore. 5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation. Install the OSS sensor. ^ Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5182 2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the VSS. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > ABS Diode > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Diagnostic Connector - ABS > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair Technical Service Bulletin # 07S51S2 Date: 091009 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5203 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes. OASIS was activated April 10, 2007. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes. Available through the website. Owner names and addresses were made available April 30, 2007. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5204 NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles have been directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC). The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option, directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251 Dearborn, MI 48121-6251. ^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund claims that include other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be accepted for reimbursement. ^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair. Claiming a refund will not close the recall on the vehicle. ^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.) - Program Code: 07S51 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs. RENTAL VEHICLES If an ABS module needs to be ordered, Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except for fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim form. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Handling Allowance: An allowance of $1.00 per repair is being provided to cover the costs of locally obtained materials and XG-12 Electrical Grease. To claim the allowance, enter $1.00 as "HANDLG" in the "MISC EXPENSE" area of the claim form. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5205 ^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires approval from Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires approval from Special Service Support Center. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5206 Parts will not be direct shipped for this program Order your parts requirements through normal order processing channels. The DOR/COR number for this safety recall is 50376. Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Support Center or E-mailed. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Affected ABS Modules (Part number YL8Z-2C065-AA and YL8Z-2B373-BA) and the removed ABS connector are subject to random selection for return to the Ford Warranty Parts Analysis Center (WPAC). Refer to your daily PEARS (Parts Entry and Return System) register for part disposition and return instructions. Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures". EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW This program includes making sure the wiring harness connector is properly sealed against moisture/contamination, and inspecting the ABS module for evidence of corrosion resulting from an inadequately sealed connector. During the inspection, we expect that most of the affected vehicles will not have any evidence of corrosion in the ABS module. However, the ABS wiring harness connector still needs to be inspected for missing or improperly seated seals and/or incorrect connector number. If the ABS module is corroded, the ABS module and connector must be replaced. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5207 A flow chart has been developed to help direct you to the proper repair. See Figure 1. Inspect Connector Seals INSPECTION 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. NOTE: When disconnecting the ABS module connector, be sure the blue connector lock stays engaged with the harness connector and does not remain in the module. Remove it from the module if necessary and make sure the white 0-ring seal is properly installed. Disconnect the ABS module 25-pin connector by sliding the lock mechanism out (towards the passenger side of the vehicle) and pulling the connector off the module. 3. Disconnect the speed sensor harness, then remove the 2 harness retainers from the studs and position the harness above the air cleaner assembly to provide access for inspection. 4. Inspect the top of the ABS module connector cover for 2 yellow "X" marks. ^ If 2 yellow "X" marks are present, perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. ^ If no yellow "X" marks are present, proceed to Step 5. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5208 5. Inspect the ABS module connector pins for corrosion. See Figure 2. ^ If corrosion is present, perform Labor Operation E - Install Pigtail, New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. ^ If corrosion is not present, proceed to Step 6. 6. CAUTION: Do not cut any of the harness wires or the wire insulation when cutting off the tie strap. Remove the tie strap from the connector dress cover, then slide the cover off the connector. See Figure 3. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5209 7. Verify the wire seals are present on the 4 heavier gauge wires. See Figure 4. 8. Verify the numbers 054" are stamped on the slide-lock end of the mat cover (wipe the mat cover clean if necessary to view). See Figure 5. NOTE: Mat covers with any other number will be missing plugs in the unused pin locations. 9. Perform Labor Operation C - Install Pigtail and Apply Electrical Grease if: ^ any seals are missing or, ^ if the number on the mat cover is not "054". 10. Perform Labor Operation D - Seat Connector and Apply Electrical Grease if: ^ Any of the 4 wire seals are not fully seated in the connector cavities. ^ Each seal should sit approximately 1-2 mm (1/16 in) below the top of the round cavity. See Figure 4. 11. Perform Labor Operation A - Apply Electrical Grease if: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5210 ^ The module is not corroded. and ^ All seals are present. and ^ All seals are fully seated. and ^ The number on the mat cover is "054". LABOR OPERATION A - APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE 1. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 6. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 6. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a "hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 2. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 3. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. LABOR OPERATION C - INSTALL PIGTAIL AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5211 USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 7. 1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module connector. See Figure 8. 2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness (all wires) to the same length. See Figure 8. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5212 3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/2 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See Figure 9. CAUTION: The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag. Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing circuits when splicing wires. NOTE: The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation. NOTE: The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5213 4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness. Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903. See Figure 10. 5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice connector. 6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit, shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all wires are insulated. See Figure 11. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5214 7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on the other. See Figure 12. 8. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 13. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5215 connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 13. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 9. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 10. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. 11. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds). ^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle. ^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special Support Service Center. LABOR OPERATION D - SEAT CONNECTOR SEALS AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE 1. If the seals are not fully seated, reseat any seals not fully seated with a blunt tool. DO NOT use anything sharp such as a screwdriver, awl or punch that could penetrate the seal and allow moisture to enter the terminal. See Figure 14. 2. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5216 b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 15. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 15. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 3. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 4. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. LABOR OPERATION E - INSTALL PIGTAIL, NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5217 USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 16. PROCEDURE TO REPLACE VEHICLE HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module connector. See Figure 17. 2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness (all wires) to the same length. See Figure 17. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5218 3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See Figure 18. CAUTION: The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag. Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing circuits when splicing wires. NOTE: The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation. NOTE: The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5219 4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness. Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903. See Figure 19. 5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice connector. 6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit, shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all wires are insulated. See Figure 20. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5220 7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on the other. See Figure 21. 8. Install a new ABS module. Perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. 9. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. 10. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds). ^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle. ^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special Support Service Center. LABOR OPERATION F - INSTALL NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE NOTE: Module configuration or reprogramming is not required when installing a new ABS module. 1. Disconnect the 2-wire electrical connector at the ABS module. 2. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 3. Remove the screws and the ABS module. 4. Position the new module and install the screws. Tighten the screws no more than 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 5. Lower the hoist. 6. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5221 ^ Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 22. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 22. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 7. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 8. Reconnect the 2-wire connector to the ABS module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5222 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5223 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5224 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5225 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5226 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5227 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > NHTSA07V156000 > Mar > 07 > Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect Electronic Brake Control Module: Recalls Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2004 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V156000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: March 30, 2007 COMPONENT: Service Brakes, Hydraulic: Antilock: Control Unit/Module POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 446460 SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with Antilock Brakes (ABS), the ABS module connector may have missing or dislodged wire seals. This condition could allow contamination to enter the module connector, creating a potential for an electrical short. CONSEQUENCE: An electrical short might cause an ABS malfunction that would illuminate the ABS warning light, and in some cases, the module may overheat resulting in burning odor, smoke, and/or fire. This condition could occur either when the vehicle ignition switch is in the off position or while the vehicle is being operated. Remedy: Dealers will inspect the wire harness connector to the ABS module for missing or dislodged wire seals, and repair or replace the harness connector as appropriate. The dealer will also inspect the connector on the ABS module and replace it if it is found to be corroded or damaged. The recall began on April 23, 2007. Owners may contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. NOTES: Ford recall No. 07S51. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair Technical Service Bulletin # 07S51S2 Date: 091009 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5237 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes. OASIS was activated April 10, 2007. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes. Available through the website. Owner names and addresses were made available April 30, 2007. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5238 NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles have been directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC). The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option, directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251 Dearborn, MI 48121-6251. ^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund claims that include other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be accepted for reimbursement. ^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair. Claiming a refund will not close the recall on the vehicle. ^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.) - Program Code: 07S51 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs. RENTAL VEHICLES If an ABS module needs to be ordered, Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except for fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim form. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Handling Allowance: An allowance of $1.00 per repair is being provided to cover the costs of locally obtained materials and XG-12 Electrical Grease. To claim the allowance, enter $1.00 as "HANDLG" in the "MISC EXPENSE" area of the claim form. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5239 ^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires approval from Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires approval from Special Service Support Center. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5240 Parts will not be direct shipped for this program Order your parts requirements through normal order processing channels. The DOR/COR number for this safety recall is 50376. Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Support Center or E-mailed. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Affected ABS Modules (Part number YL8Z-2C065-AA and YL8Z-2B373-BA) and the removed ABS connector are subject to random selection for return to the Ford Warranty Parts Analysis Center (WPAC). Refer to your daily PEARS (Parts Entry and Return System) register for part disposition and return instructions. Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures". EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW This program includes making sure the wiring harness connector is properly sealed against moisture/contamination, and inspecting the ABS module for evidence of corrosion resulting from an inadequately sealed connector. During the inspection, we expect that most of the affected vehicles will not have any evidence of corrosion in the ABS module. However, the ABS wiring harness connector still needs to be inspected for missing or improperly seated seals and/or incorrect connector number. If the ABS module is corroded, the ABS module and connector must be replaced. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5241 A flow chart has been developed to help direct you to the proper repair. See Figure 1. Inspect Connector Seals INSPECTION 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. NOTE: When disconnecting the ABS module connector, be sure the blue connector lock stays engaged with the harness connector and does not remain in the module. Remove it from the module if necessary and make sure the white 0-ring seal is properly installed. Disconnect the ABS module 25-pin connector by sliding the lock mechanism out (towards the passenger side of the vehicle) and pulling the connector off the module. 3. Disconnect the speed sensor harness, then remove the 2 harness retainers from the studs and position the harness above the air cleaner assembly to provide access for inspection. 4. Inspect the top of the ABS module connector cover for 2 yellow "X" marks. ^ If 2 yellow "X" marks are present, perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. ^ If no yellow "X" marks are present, proceed to Step 5. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5242 5. Inspect the ABS module connector pins for corrosion. See Figure 2. ^ If corrosion is present, perform Labor Operation E - Install Pigtail, New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. ^ If corrosion is not present, proceed to Step 6. 6. CAUTION: Do not cut any of the harness wires or the wire insulation when cutting off the tie strap. Remove the tie strap from the connector dress cover, then slide the cover off the connector. See Figure 3. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5243 7. Verify the wire seals are present on the 4 heavier gauge wires. See Figure 4. 8. Verify the numbers 054" are stamped on the slide-lock end of the mat cover (wipe the mat cover clean if necessary to view). See Figure 5. NOTE: Mat covers with any other number will be missing plugs in the unused pin locations. 9. Perform Labor Operation C - Install Pigtail and Apply Electrical Grease if: ^ any seals are missing or, ^ if the number on the mat cover is not "054". 10. Perform Labor Operation D - Seat Connector and Apply Electrical Grease if: ^ Any of the 4 wire seals are not fully seated in the connector cavities. ^ Each seal should sit approximately 1-2 mm (1/16 in) below the top of the round cavity. See Figure 4. 11. Perform Labor Operation A - Apply Electrical Grease if: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5244 ^ The module is not corroded. and ^ All seals are present. and ^ All seals are fully seated. and ^ The number on the mat cover is "054". LABOR OPERATION A - APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE 1. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 6. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 6. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a "hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 2. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 3. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. LABOR OPERATION C - INSTALL PIGTAIL AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5245 USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 7. 1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module connector. See Figure 8. 2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness (all wires) to the same length. See Figure 8. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5246 3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/2 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See Figure 9. CAUTION: The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag. Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing circuits when splicing wires. NOTE: The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation. NOTE: The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5247 4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness. Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903. See Figure 10. 5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice connector. 6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit, shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all wires are insulated. See Figure 11. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5248 7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on the other. See Figure 12. 8. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 13. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5249 connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 13. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 9. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 10. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. 11. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds). ^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle. ^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special Support Service Center. LABOR OPERATION D - SEAT CONNECTOR SEALS AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE 1. If the seals are not fully seated, reseat any seals not fully seated with a blunt tool. DO NOT use anything sharp such as a screwdriver, awl or punch that could penetrate the seal and allow moisture to enter the terminal. See Figure 14. 2. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5250 b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 15. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 15. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 3. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 4. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. LABOR OPERATION E - INSTALL PIGTAIL, NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5251 USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 16. PROCEDURE TO REPLACE VEHICLE HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module connector. See Figure 17. 2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness (all wires) to the same length. See Figure 17. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5252 3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See Figure 18. CAUTION: The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag. Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing circuits when splicing wires. NOTE: The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation. NOTE: The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5253 4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness. Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903. See Figure 19. 5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice connector. 6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit, shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all wires are insulated. See Figure 20. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5254 7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on the other. See Figure 21. 8. Install a new ABS module. Perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. 9. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. 10. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds). ^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle. ^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special Support Service Center. LABOR OPERATION F - INSTALL NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE NOTE: Module configuration or reprogramming is not required when installing a new ABS module. 1. Disconnect the 2-wire electrical connector at the ABS module. 2. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 3. Remove the screws and the ABS module. 4. Position the new module and install the screws. Tighten the screws no more than 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 5. Lower the hoist. 6. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5255 ^ Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 22. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 22. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 7. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 8. Reconnect the 2-wire connector to the ABS module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5256 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5257 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5258 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5259 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5260 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5261 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > NHTSA07V156000 > Mar > 07 > Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2004 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V156000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: March 30, 2007 COMPONENT: Service Brakes, Hydraulic: Antilock: Control Unit/Module POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 446460 SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with Antilock Brakes (ABS), the ABS module connector may have missing or dislodged wire seals. This condition could allow contamination to enter the module connector, creating a potential for an electrical short. CONSEQUENCE: An electrical short might cause an ABS malfunction that would illuminate the ABS warning light, and in some cases, the module may overheat resulting in burning odor, smoke, and/or fire. This condition could occur either when the vehicle ignition switch is in the off position or while the vehicle is being operated. Remedy: Dealers will inspect the wire harness connector to the ABS module for missing or dislodged wire seals, and repair or replace the harness connector as appropriate. The dealer will also inspect the connector on the ABS module and replace it if it is found to be corroded or damaged. The recall began on April 23, 2007. Owners may contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. NOTES: Ford recall No. 07S51. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5266 View 151-14 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5267 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5268 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Module - Anti-Lock Brake Control Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. 4. Remove the screws and the control module. 5. NOTE: The 4x2 module cannot be interchanged with the 4x4 module. The 4x4 module is interchangeable with the 4x2 module. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Specifications Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Specifications Control module bolts ............................................................................................................................ ............................................ 1-2 Nm (9-17 inch lbs.) Hydraulic control unit (HCU) to bracket bolts ........................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.) Inlet brake line to HCU nuts (M12-1) ...................................................................................................................................................... 17 Nm (13 ft. lbs.) Outlet brake line to HCU nuts (M12-1) .................................................................................................................................................... 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5272 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Hydraulic Control Unit Removal and Installation WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the air cleaner and the air cleaner outlet pipe. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Disconnect the brake lines. 5. Remove the bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5273 6. Remove the bolts and the HCU. 7. NOTE: The 4x2 module cannot be interchanged with the 4x4 module. The 4x4 module is interchangeable with the 4x2 module. Remove the screws and the control module, if necessary. 8. NOTE: Bleed the HCU after performing this procedure. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips Wheel Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips TSB 04-23-2 11/29/04 WHEEL SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL TIP FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005 Mariner ISSUE When servicing the wheel speed sensors on a 2001-2005 Escape or 2005 Mariner and Escape Hybrid, care must be taken during removal to prevent damage. The wheel speed sensor wire has a body plug attached to it. This plug can be damaged if not removed correctly, such as removal for pinpoint testing. If the body plug is damaged, sensor replacement may be necessary even though the sensor is functional in all other respects. ACTION When removing the body plug, rotate the plug into a position which allows the use of a small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body plug. These two tabs are at right angles (directly above and below) to the sensor wire. See Figures 1 and 2 for reference. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips > Page 5278 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front View 151-14 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 5281 View 151-15 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 5282 View 151-27 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 5283 View 151-28 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 5286 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 5287 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 5288 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor, Front Sensor - Front Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Detach the grommet from the body and pull the connector through the hole. 3. Disconnect the sensor wiring. 4. Detach the retainer. 5. Remove the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 5291 6. NOTE: Clean off any dirt that may have collected around the sensor before removal. Remove the bolt and the sensor. 7. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 5292 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor, Rear Sensor - Rear Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Detach the grommet from the body and pull the connector through the hole. 3. Disconnect the sensor wiring. 4. Detach the bolt. 5. Remove the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 5293 6. NOTE: Clean off any dirt that may have collected around the sensor before removal. Remove the bolt and the sensor. 7. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 5294 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor Ring, Front Sensor Indicator - Front Removal and Installation 1. The front anti-lock brake sensor indicator is attached to the halfshaft. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 5295 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor Ring, Rear Sensor Indicator - Rear Removal and Installation 1. The rear anti-lock brake sensor indicator is attached to the halfshaft. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Brake Bleeding: Technician Safety Information WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with the eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts the eyes, flush the eyes for 15 minutes with cold running water. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 5300 Brake Bleeding: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: Make sure that the vehicle is standing on a level surface. If brake fluid is spilled on the paintwork, the affected areas must be immediately washed down with cold water. Make sure the battery ground cable is disconnected on vehicles fitted with Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Bleeding - System Brake System Bleeding Special Tool(s) Anti-Lock Brakes Bleed NOTE: Bleeding the hydraulic control unit (HCU) is required only when removing or installing the HCU or master cylinder, or opening the lines to the HCU. 1. NOTE: Carrying out the System Bleed function drives trapped air from the HCU. Subsequent bleeding removes the air from the brake hydraulic system through the bleeder screws. NOTE: Adequate voltage to the HCU module is required during the anti-lock control portion of the system bleed. Connect the diagnostic tool. 2. Access the SYSTEM BLEED FUNCTION. Go to the Tool Tab-Chassis-Braking-ABS Service Bleed and follow the directions on the diagnostic tool. 3. Manually bleed the brake hydraulic system. 4. Repeat the procedure carrying out a total of two diagnostic tool cycles and two manual bleed cycles. Manual Bleed Brake system WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. 1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front wheel. Rear drum brakes Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 5303 3. Attach a rubber drain hose to the rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Loosen the bleeder screw until fluid flow stops. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and tighten the bleeder screw. 6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. 7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system. Front disc brakes 9. Attach a rubber drain hose to the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 10. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 11. Loosen the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw until fluid flow stops. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. 12. Repeat Steps 10 and 11 until clear, bubble-free fluid flows. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 5304 13. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. 14. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. Gravity Bleed Brake system 1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front wheel. Rear drum brakes 3. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Loosen the rear wheel cylinder bleeder screw and leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 5305 4. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. Front disc brakes 5. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Open the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. Leave open until clear bubble-free brake fluid flows. 6. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. 7. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with fluid and install the reservoir cap. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 5306 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Bleeding - Components Component Bleeding Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. 1. Support the brake master cylinder body in a soft jaw vise. 2. Remove the master cylinder cap and install short brake hoses to the master cylinder outlet ports with the ends submerged in the brake master cylinder reservoir 3. NOTE: If equipped with a manual transmission, plug the master cylinder feed port. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 5307 Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 brake fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 4. Slowly depress the primary piston until bubble -free brake fluid flows from both brake hoses. 5. Remove the brake hoses from the master cylinder. 6. Install plugs in the front and rear brake outlet port. 7. Install the reservoir cap and install the brake master cylinder in the vehicle. ^ Remove the master cylinder outlet port plugs before installing the lines. Brake Master Cylinder - In-Vehicle Bleed WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 5308 1. Disconnect the brake outlet lines from the brake master cylinder and cap the lines. 2. Install short brake hoses to the master cylinder outlet ports with the ends submerged in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 3. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows from both brake hoses. 5. Remove the short brake hoses and install the brake outlet lines. 6. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 5309 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Pressure Bleeding Brake System Pressure Bleeding Special Tool(s) WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. 1. Clean the outside of the brake master cylinder reservoir. 2. Remove the reservoir cap and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with brake fluid. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 3. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the instructions of the manufacturer when installing the adapter. Install Brake Bleeder to the brake master cylinder reservoir, and attach the Brake Bleeder tank hose to the fitting on the adapter. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 5310 4. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RH rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 5. Open the valve on the Brake Bleeder tank. 6. Loosen the bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then close the bleeder screw and remove the rubber hose. 7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system, going in order from the LH rear wheel to the RH front wheel, ending with the LH front wheel. 9. Close the Brake Bleeder tank valve and remove the tank hose from the adapter, and remove the adapter. 10. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Specifications Brake Pedal Assy: Specifications Brake Pedal Pedal free play ..................................................................................................................................... ..................................... 7.8-12 mm (0.3-0.47 inch) Brake pedal bracket nuts .................................... ................................................................................................................................... 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5314 Brake Pedal Assy: Adjustments Brake Pedal Pedal free play mm (inch) ............................................................................................... ............................................................................ 7.8-12 (0.3-0.47) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5315 Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair Brake Pedal and Bracket Removal and Installation 1. Remove the Brake Pedal Position (BPP) switch. 2. If equipped, remove the speed control deactivator switch. 3. Disconnect the push rod from the brake pedal pin. ^ Remove the cotter pin and bushing. 4. Remove the brake pedal and bracket. ^ Remove the nuts. 5. To install reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Specifications > Front Antilock Brake Sensor Brake Warning Indicator: Specifications Front Antilock Brake Sensor Front anti-lock brake sensor bolt (4x2) ......................................................................................................................................... 8-10 Nm (71-89 inch lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Specifications > Front Antilock Brake Sensor > Page 5320 Brake Warning Indicator: Specifications Rear Antilock Brake Sensor Rear anti-lock brake sensor bolt .............................................................................................................................................................. 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Specifications Brake Caliper: Specifications Disc brake caliper bleeder screws ............................................................................................................................................................. 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.) Front disc brake caliper bore mm (in) .................................................................... .............................................................................................. 60.0 (2.36) Brake caliper anchor plate bolts ........................................................................................................................................................... 150 Nm (111 ft. lbs.) Brake caliper bolts ............................................................................................. ....................................................................................... 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.) Brake line to caliper ....... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Removal and Installation Brake Caliper Removal WARNING: Asbestos fiber dust may be present on brake and clutch assemblies and is hazardous to health if inhaled. Brake and clutch assemblies should be cleaned using a vacuum cleaner recommended for use with asbestos fibers such as a brake/clutch/service vacuum. The bag must be labeled per OSHA instructions, sealed, and the trash hauler notified as to the bag's contents. If a vacuum suitable for asbestos is not available, cleaning should be done wet. If dust generation is still possible, technicians should wear government-approved toxic dust purifying respirators. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the brake caliper clip 3. Position the caliper aside 1 Remove the brake caliper bolt caps and bolts 2 Position the caliper aside 4. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5327 with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new component has been installed, air may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. The hydraulic system can be bled manually or with a Brake Bleeder. Disconnect and cap the brake line from the caliper and remove the caliper. 5. CAUTION: Do no use denatured alcohol for flushing the brake system or cleaning assemblies where alcohol could be trapped. If denatured alcohol is trapped, it can cause eventual failure of rubber components in the system. CAUTION: Never allow any petroleum product or mineral oil to contact the inside of a brake hydraulic system. Mineral oil and petroleum products deteriorate the natural rubber seals used in brake hydraulic systems. If a brake system becomes contaminated, it must be flushed with clean brake fluid and all rubber seals and flex hoses replaced. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the brake system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5328 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Disassembly and Assembly Brake Caliper Disassembly 1. Remove front disc brake caliper from the vehicle. 2. Remove the front caliper slide pins and boots. 3. Remove the dust seal. 4. WARNING: Use only as much compressed air as necessary to remove the piston. Excessive pressure can force the piston out of the caliper bore with enough force to cause personal injury. Never attempt to catch the piston by hand as it comes out of the bore. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver or any other similar tool to pry the piston out of the bore. Piston damage could result. NOTE: Inspect the piston for wear, rust, or pits. If any of these conditions exist, a new piston must be installed. Remove the caliper piston. 1 Position a block of wood between the piston and the disc brake caliper. 2 Apply compressed air to caliper to remove piston. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5329 5. Remove the bleeder screw. 6. CAUTION: Use a plastic or wooden pick to remove the piston seal from the caliper bore. A metal tool may scratch or nick the seal groove, which could result in a seal leak. NOTE: Inspect the caliper bore for wear, rust or pits If any of these conditions exist, do not hone; a new caliper must be installed Remove the piston seal. Assembly CAUTION: Do not use denatured alcohol to clean rubber components or assemblies that have rubber components. Cleaning rubber components with denatured alcohol weakens the rubber and may result in failure of the component. CAUTION: Never allow any petroleum product or mineral oil to contact the inside of a brake hydraulic system. Mineral oil and petroleum products deteriorate the natural rubber seals used in brake hydraulic system. If a brake system becomes contaminated, it must be flushed with clean brake fluid and all rubber seals and flex hoses replaced. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. NOTE: Be sure the seal is not twisted and is firmly seated in the caliper bore NOTE: Clean all brake caliper components. All parts must be air-dried completely Coat all internal parts and piston seal with High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A. DOT 3 before installation. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5330 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Anchor Plate Brake Caliper Anchor Plate Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the brake caliper clip. 3. Position the caliper aside. 1 Remove the brake caliper bolt caps and the bolts. 2 Position the caliper aside and support. 4. Remove the outboard brake pad. 5. Remove the bolts and brake caliper anchor plate. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Specifications Brake Pad: Specifications Brake pad minimum thickness ............................................................................................................. .................................................. 3.0 mm (0.118 inch) Brake pad maximum thickness variation (pad-to-pad) .......................................................................................................................... 2.0 mm (0.079 inch) Brake pad maximum taper wear (in any direction) ................................................................................................................................ 3.0 mm (0.118 inch) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5334 Brake Pad: Service and Repair Brake Pads Removal WARNING: Asbestos fiber may be present on brake and clutch assemblies and is hazardous to health if inhaled. Brake and clutch assemblies should be cleaned using a vacuum cleaner recommended for use with asbestos fibers such as a brake/clutch/service vacuum. The bag must be labeled per OSHA instructions, sealed, and the trash hauler notified as to the bag's contents. If a vacuum suitable for asbestos is not available, cleaning should be done wet. If dust generation is still possible, technicians should wear government-approved toxic dust purifying respirators. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the brake caliper clip 3. Position the caliper aside 1 Remove brake caliper bolt caps and the bolts. 2 Position the caliper aside and support. 4. Remove the brake pads. ^ Remove the outer brake pad from the anchor ^ Remove the inner brake pad from the caliper piston 5. To install reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Specifications Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications Brake Rotor/Disc Specifications Brake disc minimum thickness ......................................................................................................................................................... 22.0 mm (0.86 inch) Brake disc minimum thickness to machine ....................................................................................................................................... 22.6 mm (0.88 inch) Rotor mount mm (in) .......................................................................................................... ........................................................................... 0.05 (0.002) Front disc brake rotor Runout mm (in) ............................................................................................................................................................ 0.1 (0.004) Front disc brake rotor thickness mm (in) .............................................................................................................................................. 22-24 (0.87-0.94) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Front Brake Disc 1. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate. 2. Remove the brake disc retaining clips (if equipped) and the brake disc. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5340 Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Brake Disc Machining Brake Disc Machining Special Tool(s) Material Brake Disc Machining CAUTION: Do not use a bench lathe to machine brake discs. NOTE: Read the entire operating manual and view the video shipped with the lathe before installing, operating, or repairing the lathe. NOTE: If the thickness of the brake disc is less than the minimum thickness to machine specification, install a new brake disc. This will make sure that the brake disc will be above minimum thickness after machining. NOTE: Do not machine new brake discs. NOTE: Lateral runout and disc thickness variation measurements are not required because correct adjustment of the on-vehicle brake lathe will make sure that these dimensions are within specifications. 1. NOTE: It is not necessary to disconnect the brake line from the brake caliper. Position the brake caliper and brake caliper anchor bracket aside. 2. For vehicles with a two-piece brake disc and hub assembly: 1 Mark the brake disc and the wheel stud for correct indexing during re-assembly. 2 Remove the brake disc from the hub. 3 CAUTION: Do not use an abrasive sanding disc since it will remove paint or other protective finishes from the wheel or metal from the mounting surfaces, adversely affecting corrosion protection and brake disc lateral runout. Remove corrosion from the wheel mounting surface, both disc mounting surfaces, and hub mounting surface. 4 Align the match marks and install the brake disc on the hub. 3. Machine the brake disc using an on-car brake lathe. 1 Install the hub adapter and silencer belt, if necessary. 2 Install the cutting lathe. 3 If the lathe is not self adjusting, adjust the lathe oscillation using a dial indicator. Total indicated reading (TIR) target is 0.000 mm (0.000 inch), maximum is 0.08 mm (0.003 inch). 4 Center the cutting head, adjust the cutting bits, and install the chip deflector. 5 NOTE: The depth of cut should be between 0.10 and 0.20 mm (0.004 and 0.008 inch). Lighter cuts will cause the bit to heat up and wear faster. Heavier cuts will cause poor brake disc surface finish. Machine the brake disc. 6 Remove the lathe and, if installed, the silencer belt. 7 Remove the hub adapter. 4. Remove metal shavings. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5341 5. For vehicles with a two-piece brake disc and hub assembly: 1 Remove the brake disc from the hub. 2 Remove metal shavings from the hub, the brake disc mounting surfaces and from the ABS sensors. 3 Apply anti-seize lubricant to hub mounting surface to prevent corrosion. 4 Align the match marks and install the brake disc on the hub. 6. NOTE: It is not required to install new brake pads if friction material properties are within guidelines. Install the brake caliper and brake caliper anchor bracket. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information > Specifications Backing Plate: Specifications Brake backing plate bolts .................................................................................................................... ..................................................... 66 Nm (49 ft. lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5346 Backing Plate: Service and Repair Brake Backing Plate Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear wheel cylinder. 2. Remove the rear wheel hub. 3. Remove the parking brake cable from the brake backing plate. 1 Remove the bolt. 2 Remove the parking brake cable. 4. Remove the brake backing plate. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the brake backing plate. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Specifications Brake Drum: Specifications Rear Brake Drum Maximum inside diameter ......................................................................................................................................................... 230.10 mm (9.0590 inch) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5350 Brake Drum: Service and Repair Brake Drum Special Tool(s) Removal WARNING: Asbestos fiber dust can be present on brake and clutch assemblies and is hazardous to health if inhaled. Brake and clutch assemblies must be cleaned using a vacuum cleaner recommended for use with asbestos filters, such as brake/clutch/service vacuum. The bag must be labeled per the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) instructions, sealed, and the trash hauler notified as to the bag's contents. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: If a vacuum suitable for asbestos is not available, cleaning must be done wet. If dust generation is still possible, technicians must wear government-approved toxic dust purifying respirators. The Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) requires where asbestos dust generation is possible to be isolated and posted with warning signs. Only technicians carrying out brake or clutch repair are to be present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: To reduce the possibility of uneven braking, always install new rear brake shoes at both ends of an axle. 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 2. CAUTION: Use of a brake drum puller or a torch is not recommended. Brake drum distortion can result. NOTE: If the brake drum is rusted to the axle shaft pilot diameter, tap the center of the brake drum between the wheel studs. Remove the brake drum ^ If equipped, remove the brake drum retaining clips. 3. If the brake drums will not come off follow these steps. 1 Move the brake shoe adjusting lever off the brake adjuster screw 2 Loosen the brake shoe adjuster screw nut by adjusting the nut upward. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5351 4. Using the special tool. measure the brake drum inside diameter. ^ Install a new brake drum if the maximum inside diameter exceeds the specification shown on the outside of the brake drum. Installation 1. NOTE: If adjusting the rear brakes refer to Brake Shoe Adjustment. Position the brake drum on the vehicle. 2. WARNING: Whenever a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign material present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion, causing loss of control. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Clean the wheel hub mounting surface and wheel pilot. 3. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications Brake Shoe: Specifications Brake shoe minimum thickness ........................................................................................................... .................................................... 1.0 mm (0.03 inch) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5355 Brake Shoe: Adjustments Brake Shoe Adjustment Special Tool(s) 1. Remove the brake drum. 2. Using the special tool, measure the inside diameter of the brake drum. 3. Position the special tool on the brake shoes and linings and adjust accordingly. 4. Install the brake drum. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5356 Brake Shoe: Service and Repair Brake Shoes Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation 1. Remove the brake drum. 2. Use the Brake/Clutch/Service Vacuum to remove brake dust and dirt from the brake assemblies. 3. NOTE: If new rear brake shoes and linings are being installed. resurface the brake drums to remove glazing and to ensure an equal friction surface from side-to-side. Resurfacing wild also correct out-of-round and bell conditions. Inning the special tool, measure the braking surface diameter. If the inside diameter measures more than the maximum specification shown on the outside of the brake drum. install a new brake drum. 4. Remove the parking brake cable from the parking brake cable lever. 5. Remove the hold-down clips and pins. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5357 6. Remove the lower spring. 7. Remove the rear brake shoes. 1 Pull the bottom of the brake shoe forward. 2 Release the upper return spring. 3 Remove both brake shoes together. 8. Remove the self adjuster lever. 9. Remove the self adjuster and spring assembly. ^ Return the self adjuster to the fully seated position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5358 10. Remove the parking brake lever. 1 Remove the horseshoe clip. 2 Remove the parking brake lever. 11. Inspect the rear brake shoes for minimum thickness above the backing plate, and install new as necessary. 12. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Cylinder: Specifications Wheel cylinder inner diameter mm (in) ............................................................................................................................................................ 23.81 (0.937) Brake line to rear wheel cylinder fitting ................................................................................................................................................... 14 Nm (10 ft. lbs.) Rear wheel cylinder bolts ............................................................................................ ............................................................................... 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Wheel Cylinder Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear brake drum. 2. Using the Brake/Clutch/Service Vacuum, remove brake dust and dirt from the brake assemblies. 3. Remove the parking brake cable from the parking brake cable lever. 4. Remove the hold-down clips and pins. 5. Remove the lower spring. 6. Remove the rear brake shoes. 1 Pull the bottom of the brake shoe forward. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5364 2 Release the upper return spring. 3 Remove both brake shoes together. 7. WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 4 or DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. Disconnect the brake line fitting from the wheel cylinder. 8. Remove the wheel cylinder. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the wheel cylinder. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the brake hydraulic system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5365 Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly Wheel Cylinder Disassembly 1. Remove the rear wheel cylinder. 2. CAUTION: Do not use denatured alcohol for flushing the brake system or cleaning assemblies where alcohol could be trapped. If denatured alcohol is trapped, it can cause eventual failure of rubber components in the system. CAUTION: Never allow any petroleum product or mineral oil to contact the inside of a brake hydraulic system. Mineral oil and petroleum products deteriorate the natural rubber seals used in brake hydraulic system. If a brake system becomes contaminated, it must be flushed with clean brake fluid and all new rubber seals and flex hoses must be installed. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. Disassemble the rear wheel cylinder. 1 Remove the bleeder screw cap. 2 Remove the bleeder screw. 3 Remove the dust boots. 4 Remove the pistons and piston seals. 5 Remove the spring. 3. Inspect the rear wheel cylinder bore for wear, rust or pits. If any of these conditions exist, install a new wheel cylinder. Assembly 1. CAUTION: Always install new piston seals and dust boots when assembling the rear wheel cylinder. Always lubricate the bore with new brake fluid. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Brake Bleeding: Technician Safety Information WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with the eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts the eyes, flush the eyes for 15 minutes with cold running water. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 5371 Brake Bleeding: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: Make sure that the vehicle is standing on a level surface. If brake fluid is spilled on the paintwork, the affected areas must be immediately washed down with cold water. Make sure the battery ground cable is disconnected on vehicles fitted with Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Bleeding - System Brake System Bleeding Special Tool(s) Anti-Lock Brakes Bleed NOTE: Bleeding the hydraulic control unit (HCU) is required only when removing or installing the HCU or master cylinder, or opening the lines to the HCU. 1. NOTE: Carrying out the System Bleed function drives trapped air from the HCU. Subsequent bleeding removes the air from the brake hydraulic system through the bleeder screws. NOTE: Adequate voltage to the HCU module is required during the anti-lock control portion of the system bleed. Connect the diagnostic tool. 2. Access the SYSTEM BLEED FUNCTION. Go to the Tool Tab-Chassis-Braking-ABS Service Bleed and follow the directions on the diagnostic tool. 3. Manually bleed the brake hydraulic system. 4. Repeat the procedure carrying out a total of two diagnostic tool cycles and two manual bleed cycles. Manual Bleed Brake system WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. 1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front wheel. Rear drum brakes Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 5374 3. Attach a rubber drain hose to the rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Loosen the bleeder screw until fluid flow stops. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and tighten the bleeder screw. 6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. 7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system. Front disc brakes 9. Attach a rubber drain hose to the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 10. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 11. Loosen the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw until fluid flow stops. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. 12. Repeat Steps 10 and 11 until clear, bubble-free fluid flows. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 5375 13. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. 14. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. Gravity Bleed Brake system 1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front wheel. Rear drum brakes 3. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Loosen the rear wheel cylinder bleeder screw and leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 5376 4. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. Front disc brakes 5. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Open the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. Leave open until clear bubble-free brake fluid flows. 6. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. 7. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with fluid and install the reservoir cap. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 5377 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Bleeding - Components Component Bleeding Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. 1. Support the brake master cylinder body in a soft jaw vise. 2. Remove the master cylinder cap and install short brake hoses to the master cylinder outlet ports with the ends submerged in the brake master cylinder reservoir 3. NOTE: If equipped with a manual transmission, plug the master cylinder feed port. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 5378 Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 brake fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 4. Slowly depress the primary piston until bubble -free brake fluid flows from both brake hoses. 5. Remove the brake hoses from the master cylinder. 6. Install plugs in the front and rear brake outlet port. 7. Install the reservoir cap and install the brake master cylinder in the vehicle. ^ Remove the master cylinder outlet port plugs before installing the lines. Brake Master Cylinder - In-Vehicle Bleed WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 5379 1. Disconnect the brake outlet lines from the brake master cylinder and cap the lines. 2. Install short brake hoses to the master cylinder outlet ports with the ends submerged in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 3. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows from both brake hoses. 5. Remove the short brake hoses and install the brake outlet lines. 6. Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 5380 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Pressure Bleeding Brake System Pressure Bleeding Special Tool(s) WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. 1. Clean the outside of the brake master cylinder reservoir. 2. Remove the reservoir cap and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with brake fluid. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 3. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the instructions of the manufacturer when installing the adapter. Install Brake Bleeder to the brake master cylinder reservoir, and attach the Brake Bleeder tank hose to the fitting on the adapter. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 5381 4. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RH rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 5. Open the valve on the Brake Bleeder tank. 6. Loosen the bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then close the bleeder screw and remove the rubber hose. 7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system, going in order from the LH rear wheel to the RH front wheel, ending with the LH front wheel. 9. Close the Brake Bleeder tank valve and remove the tank hose from the adapter, and remove the adapter. 10. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Specifications Brake Caliper: Specifications Disc brake caliper bleeder screws ............................................................................................................................................................. 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.) Front disc brake caliper bore mm (in) .................................................................... .............................................................................................. 60.0 (2.36) Brake caliper anchor plate bolts ........................................................................................................................................................... 150 Nm (111 ft. lbs.) Brake caliper bolts ............................................................................................. ....................................................................................... 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.) Brake line to caliper ....... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............. 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Removal and Installation Brake Caliper Removal WARNING: Asbestos fiber dust may be present on brake and clutch assemblies and is hazardous to health if inhaled. Brake and clutch assemblies should be cleaned using a vacuum cleaner recommended for use with asbestos fibers such as a brake/clutch/service vacuum. The bag must be labeled per OSHA instructions, sealed, and the trash hauler notified as to the bag's contents. If a vacuum suitable for asbestos is not available, cleaning should be done wet. If dust generation is still possible, technicians should wear government-approved toxic dust purifying respirators. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the brake caliper clip 3. Position the caliper aside 1 Remove the brake caliper bolt caps and bolts 2 Position the caliper aside 4. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5387 with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new component has been installed, air may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. The hydraulic system can be bled manually or with a Brake Bleeder. Disconnect and cap the brake line from the caliper and remove the caliper. 5. CAUTION: Do no use denatured alcohol for flushing the brake system or cleaning assemblies where alcohol could be trapped. If denatured alcohol is trapped, it can cause eventual failure of rubber components in the system. CAUTION: Never allow any petroleum product or mineral oil to contact the inside of a brake hydraulic system. Mineral oil and petroleum products deteriorate the natural rubber seals used in brake hydraulic systems. If a brake system becomes contaminated, it must be flushed with clean brake fluid and all rubber seals and flex hoses replaced. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the brake system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5388 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Disassembly and Assembly Brake Caliper Disassembly 1. Remove front disc brake caliper from the vehicle. 2. Remove the front caliper slide pins and boots. 3. Remove the dust seal. 4. WARNING: Use only as much compressed air as necessary to remove the piston. Excessive pressure can force the piston out of the caliper bore with enough force to cause personal injury. Never attempt to catch the piston by hand as it comes out of the bore. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver or any other similar tool to pry the piston out of the bore. Piston damage could result. NOTE: Inspect the piston for wear, rust, or pits. If any of these conditions exist, a new piston must be installed. Remove the caliper piston. 1 Position a block of wood between the piston and the disc brake caliper. 2 Apply compressed air to caliper to remove piston. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5389 5. Remove the bleeder screw. 6. CAUTION: Use a plastic or wooden pick to remove the piston seal from the caliper bore. A metal tool may scratch or nick the seal groove, which could result in a seal leak. NOTE: Inspect the caliper bore for wear, rust or pits If any of these conditions exist, do not hone; a new caliper must be installed Remove the piston seal. Assembly CAUTION: Do not use denatured alcohol to clean rubber components or assemblies that have rubber components. Cleaning rubber components with denatured alcohol weakens the rubber and may result in failure of the component. CAUTION: Never allow any petroleum product or mineral oil to contact the inside of a brake hydraulic system. Mineral oil and petroleum products deteriorate the natural rubber seals used in brake hydraulic system. If a brake system becomes contaminated, it must be flushed with clean brake fluid and all rubber seals and flex hoses replaced. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. NOTE: Be sure the seal is not twisted and is firmly seated in the caliper bore NOTE: Clean all brake caliper components. All parts must be air-dried completely Coat all internal parts and piston seal with High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A. DOT 3 before installation. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5390 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Anchor Plate Brake Caliper Anchor Plate Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the brake caliper clip. 3. Position the caliper aside. 1 Remove the brake caliper bolt caps and the bolts. 2 Position the caliper aside and support. 4. Remove the outboard brake pad. 5. Remove the bolts and brake caliper anchor plate. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications Brake Fluid Type ......................................................................................................................... High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-14 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5397 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Specifications Brake Hose/Line: Specifications Brake line master cylinder fittings ............................................................................................................................................................ 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.) Disc brake caliper bleeder screws ............................................................................................................................................................. 16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.) Wheel cylinder bleeder screws .............................................................................. .................................................................................. 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Specifications Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Specifications Control module bolts ............................................................................................................................ ............................................ 1-2 Nm (9-17 inch lbs.) Hydraulic control unit (HCU) to bracket bolts ........................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.) Inlet brake line to HCU nuts (M12-1) ...................................................................................................................................................... 17 Nm (13 ft. lbs.) Outlet brake line to HCU nuts (M12-1) .................................................................................................................................................... 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5404 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Hydraulic Control Unit Removal and Installation WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the air cleaner and the air cleaner outlet pipe. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Disconnect the brake lines. 5. Remove the bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5405 6. Remove the bolts and the HCU. 7. NOTE: The 4x2 module cannot be interchanged with the 4x4 module. The 4x4 module is interchangeable with the 4x2 module. Remove the screws and the control module, if necessary. 8. NOTE: Bleed the HCU after performing this procedure. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Specifications Brake Master Cylinder: Specifications Brake line master cylinder fittings ........................................................................................................................................................... 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.) Brake master cylinder ............................................................................................ ................................................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Master cylinder nuts ........... .............................................................................................................................................................. ........ 17 Nm (13 ft. lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5409 Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition Test 1. Check the brake hydraulic system for leaks or insufficient brake fluid. Repair as necessary. 2. Observe the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir as the brake pedal is slowly pressed and quickly released. If the brake fluid level rises when the brake pedal is pressed and drops when the brake pedal is released, but the net brake fluid level remains unchanged, the brake master cylinder is bypassing. Repair or install a new brake master cylinder. Brake Master Cylinder - Non-Pressure External Leaks A low brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir may be caused by the following non-pressure external leaks: Type 1. An external leak may exist at the brake master cylinder filler cap due to incorrect position of the cap, cap gasket, or cap gasket deterioration. Type 2. An external leak may exist at the brake master cylinder mounting flange due to internal seal failure. Repair or install a new brake master cylinder. Type 3. An external leak may exist at the base of the brake master cylinder reservoir due to deteriorated reservoir mounting seals. Repair or install a new brake master cylinder. Brake Master Cylinder - Compensator Port Check The purpose of the compensator ports in the brake master cylinder is to: ^ Supply additional brake fluid from the brake master cylinder reservoir needed by the brake system due to brake shoe and lining wear. ^ Allow brake fluid to return to the brake master cylinder reservoir when the brakes are released. The returning brake fluid will create a slight turbulence in the brake master cylinder reservoir . This is a normal condition and indicates that the compensator ports are not clogged. Clogged compensator ports may cause the brakes to hang up or not fully release. If clogged compensator ports are suspected, proceed as follows: 1. Raise and support the vehicle; refer to Vehicle Lifting. 2. With the brakes released, attempt to rotate each wheel. If an excessive amount of brake drag exists, continue with the test. If an excessive amount of brake drag exists at only one wheel, it indicates a possible seized rear disc brake caliper, front disc brake caliper, rear wheel cylinder, or parking brake component. Repair or install new components as necessary. 3. Check the brake pedal position (BPP) switch adjustment, and brake pedal free play to verify that the brake pedal is not partially applied. 4. Loosen the nuts attaching the brake master cylinder to the power brake booster and pull the brake master cylinder away from the power brake booster. 5. Repeat Steps 1 and 2. If the brake drag disappears, the power brake booster is binding and new one must be installed. If the brake drag continues, the brake master cylinder is binding and new one must be installed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Removal and Installation WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. 1. Disconnect the brake fluid level warning switch electrical connector 2. Using a suitable suction device drain the brake master cylinder reservoir 3. If equipped with manual transmission, disconnect the clutch master cylinder feed. 4. Disconnect the brake lines and plug the lines and the brake master cylinder ports. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5412 5. NOTE: Whenever the brake master cylinder is removed from the brake booster, new nuts must be installed. Remove the nuts and the brake master cylinder. 6. NOTE: Whenever installing a new brake master cylinder reservoir, install new seals. Lubricate the new seals with clean brake fluid. Transfer the brake master cylinder reservoir if a new master cylinder is to be installed. 1 Lubricate the two O-ring seals with clean brake fluid and insert into the brake master cylinder. 2 Press the brake master cylinder reservoir into the O-ring seals until it snaps into the brake master cylinder securely. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the master cylinder. ^ If equipped with manual transmission, bleed the clutch master cylinder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5413 Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. 1. Remove the brake master cylinder. 2. Clean the outside of the brake master cylinder. 3. Remove the brake master cylinder reservoir. 4. Remove the seals. 5. Remove the snap ring. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5414 6. Remove the primary and secondary piston. 7. NOTE: If the brake master cylinder bore is damaged a new brake master cylinder must be installed. Use isopropyl alcohol to clean and inspect the brake master cylinder bore for damage. Assembly WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. 1. Use clean brake fluid to lubricate the new piston assembly seals and the brake master cylinder bore. 2. Install the secondary piston assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5415 3. Install the primary piston assembly 4. Install the snap ring. 5. Install the seals ^ Lubricate the seals with clean brake fluid and insert the seals into the brake master cylinder. 6. Install the brake master cylinder reservoir. ^ Press the brake master cylinder reservoir into the seals until it snaps in securely. 7. Install master cylinder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5416 Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Brake Fluid Reservoir Removal WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. 1. Disconnect the fluid level electrical connector. 2. Using a suitable suction device, drain the brake master cylinder reservoir. 3. If equipped with manual transmission, disconnect the clutch master cylinder feed. 4. Remove the brake master cylinder reservoir. Installation NOTE: Whenever installing a new brake master cylinder reservoir, install new seals. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5417 1. Install the new brake master cylinder reservoir. 1 Lubricate the two seals with clean brake fluid and insert the seals into the brake master cylinder. 2 Press the brake master cylinder reservoir into the seals until it snaps in securely. 3 Connect the brake master cylinder fluid level warning switch electrical connector. 2. If equipped with manual transmission, connect the clutch master cylinder feed. ^ Bleed the clutch master cylinder. 3. Bleed the master cylinder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Cylinder: Specifications Wheel cylinder inner diameter mm (in) ............................................................................................................................................................ 23.81 (0.937) Brake line to rear wheel cylinder fitting ................................................................................................................................................... 14 Nm (10 ft. lbs.) Rear wheel cylinder bolts ............................................................................................ ............................................................................... 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Wheel Cylinder Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear brake drum. 2. Using the Brake/Clutch/Service Vacuum, remove brake dust and dirt from the brake assemblies. 3. Remove the parking brake cable from the parking brake cable lever. 4. Remove the hold-down clips and pins. 5. Remove the lower spring. 6. Remove the rear brake shoes. 1 Pull the bottom of the brake shoe forward. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5423 2 Release the upper return spring. 3 Remove both brake shoes together. 7. WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 4 or DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. Disconnect the brake line fitting from the wheel cylinder. 8. Remove the wheel cylinder. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the wheel cylinder. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the brake hydraulic system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5424 Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly Wheel Cylinder Disassembly 1. Remove the rear wheel cylinder. 2. CAUTION: Do not use denatured alcohol for flushing the brake system or cleaning assemblies where alcohol could be trapped. If denatured alcohol is trapped, it can cause eventual failure of rubber components in the system. CAUTION: Never allow any petroleum product or mineral oil to contact the inside of a brake hydraulic system. Mineral oil and petroleum products deteriorate the natural rubber seals used in brake hydraulic system. If a brake system becomes contaminated, it must be flushed with clean brake fluid and all new rubber seals and flex hoses must be installed. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. Disassemble the rear wheel cylinder. 1 Remove the bleeder screw cap. 2 Remove the bleeder screw. 3 Remove the dust boots. 4 Remove the pistons and piston seals. 5 Remove the spring. 3. Inspect the rear wheel cylinder bore for wear, rust or pits. If any of these conditions exist, install a new wheel cylinder. Assembly 1. CAUTION: Always install new piston seals and dust boots when assembling the rear wheel cylinder. Always lubricate the bore with new brake fluid. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Specifications Parking Brake Cable: Specifications Parking brake cable bracket bolt ......................................................................................................... ...................................................... 22 Nm (16 ft. lbs.) Parking brake cable equalizer bracket bolt .............................................................................................................................................. 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.) Rear parking brake cable bracket bolts ..................................................................................................................................................... 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.) Rear parking brake cable to knuckle bracket bolts ................................................................................................................................... 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5429 Parking Brake Cable: Adjustments Parking Brake Cable Adjustment Vehicle with low series floor console 1. Remove the floor console front finish panel. 1 If equipped, remove the manual transmission shift knob by turning counterclockwise. 2 Remove the floor console front finish panel. 2. Remove the floor console rear finish panel. 1 Apply the parking brake. 2 Remove the floor console rear finish panel. Vehicle with high series floor console 3. Remove the floor console finish panel. 1 Apply the parking brake. 2 Remove the floor console finish panel. All vehicles 4. Remove the adjustment nut clip. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5430 5. Turn the parking brake control adjustment nut so that the parking brake control stroke is three to five notches when pulled. 6. Confirm the parking brake is applied. 7. Install the adjustment nut clip. Vehicle with high series floor console 8. Install the floor console rear finish panel. Vehicle with low series floor console 9. Install the floor console rear finish panel. 10. Install the floor console front finish panel. ^ If equipped, install the manual transmission shifter knob by turning clockwise. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Cable - Front Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Parking Brake Cable - Front Removal and Installation All Vehicles 1. Remove the parking brake control. With Floor Console 2. Remove the two bolts and the floor console bracket. Without Floor Console 3. Remove the LH front seat. 4. Remove the LH front door scuff plate. 5. Remove the LH lower A-pillar trim panel. 6. Remove the LH front safety belt. 7. Pull back carpet to gain access to the console bracket. 8. Remove the two bolts and the floor console bracket. All Vehicles 9. Raise and support the vehicle. 10. Remove the front parking brake cable. 1 Disconnect the parking brake cable from the RH side rear parking brake cable. 2 Disconnect the front parking brake cable from the parking brake cable equalizer. 11. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Cable - Front > Page 5433 Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Parking Brake Cable - Rear Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Remove the rear drum brake shoes. ABS-equipped vehicles 2. Remove the ABS cable bracket bolt. All vehicles 3. Remove the rear parking brake cable to trailing arm bracket bolts. 4. Disconnect the rear parking brake cable from the backing plates. 5. Remove the rear parking brake cable bracket bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Cable - Front > Page 5434 6. Remove the RH side rear parking brake cable. 1 Disconnect the RH side rear parking brake cable from the front parking brake cable. 2 Disconnect the RH side rear parking brake cable from the body-mounted parking brake cable support bracket. 7. Disconnect the LH rear parking brake cable to fuel tank support strap. 8. Disconnect the front parking brake cable. 9. Remove the LH rear parking brake cable. 1 Remove the two bolts. 2 Disconnect the LH rear parking brake cable from the body-mounted parking brake cable support bracket. 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Control > Component Information > Specifications Parking Brake Control: Specifications Parking brake control bolts .................................................................................................................. ..................................................... 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Control > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5438 Parking Brake Control: Service and Repair Parking Brake Control Removal and Installation 1. Remove the floor console. 2. Release the parking brake control. 3. Disconnect the parking brake warning indicator switch electrical connector. 4. Remove the parking brake adjusting nut. 5. Remove the parking brake control. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the parking brake cable. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Adjust the parking brake cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-26 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5442 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5443 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the parking brake control. 2. Remove the parking brake warning indicator switch. ^ Remove the screws. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications Vacuum Brake Booster: Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5448 Vacuum Brake Booster: Description and Operation Brake Booster The brake booster consists of the following components: ^ power brake booster ^ vacuum booster hose ^ power brake booster check valve The power brake booster reduces the effort required to push the brake pedal to actuate the brakes The vacuum booster hose supplies vacuum to the brake booster. The vacuum booster check valve closes when the engine is turned off and traps engine vacuum in the power brake booster. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5449 Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection Brake Booster - Operation Check 1. Inspect all vacuum hoses and connections. All unused vacuum connectors must be capped. Hoses and their connections must be correctly secured and in good condition with no holes, cracks, or collapsed areas. 2. Check the brake hydraulic system for leaks or insufficient brake fluid. Repair as necessary. 3. With the engine off, place the transaxle in PARK (A/T) or NEUTRAL (M/T) and apply the parking brake. 4. NOTE: If the power brake booster is noisy when the brakes are applied, a new component must be installed. Press the brake pedal several times to exhaust all of the vacuum from the system. 5. Press and hold the brake pedal. 6. Start the engine. If the vacuum system is operating, the brake pedal will move downward under constant foot pressure. If no movement occurs, the power brake booster system is not functioning. 7. Remove the vacuum booster hose from the power brake booster. 8. Place the transaxle in PARK (A/T) or NEUTRAL (M/T) and apply the parking brake. Start the engine. Manifold vacuum should be available from the vacuum booster hose. If manifold vacuum is not available, inspect all of the hoses and hose connections. Repair as necessary. 9. Reconnect the vacuum booster hose and run the engine at fast idle for 10 seconds. 10. Stop the engine and let the vehicle stand for 10 minutes. 11. Apply the brake pedal with approximately 89 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) of force. The brake pedal feel should be the same as normal power assisted brake operation for at least one application. If the brake pedal feel is normal, then the power brake booster is OK. If the brake pedal feels hard, continue with the test. 12. Remove the vacuum booster hose from the power brake booster. Apply 57.3 kPa (17 in-Hg) of vacuum to the vacuum booster hose. If the vacuum does not leak off after 10 minutes, install a new power brake booster. If the vacuum does leak off, install a new check valve and/or new vacuum booster hoses. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5450 Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Remove the brake pedal push rod cotter pin and washer. 2. Remove the four power brake booster pushrod bracket nuts. 3. Disconnect the brake pedal pushrod. 3.0 L (4V) 4. Disconnect the Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve and position it aside. 1 Disconnect the cable locator. 2 Remove the nuts. 3 Position the evaporative emission canister purge valve aside. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5451 All vehicles 5. Disconnect the master cylinder and position aside. ^ Remove the nuts ^ Position the master cylinder aside. 6. Remove the brake booster. 1 Disconnect the vacuum hose. 2 Remove the brake booster. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: Testing and Inspection Check Valve 1. Remove the vacuum booster hose from the power brake booster. 2. Apply 57.3 kPa (17 in-Hg) of vacuum to the vacuum booster hose. If the vacuum does not leak off after ten minutes, the check valve is OK. Otherwise, install a new check valve. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair Technical Service Bulletin # 07S51S2 Date: 091009 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5464 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes. OASIS was activated April 10, 2007. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes. Available through the website. Owner names and addresses were made available April 30, 2007. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5465 NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles have been directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC). The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option, directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251 Dearborn, MI 48121-6251. ^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund claims that include other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be accepted for reimbursement. ^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair. Claiming a refund will not close the recall on the vehicle. ^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.) - Program Code: 07S51 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs. RENTAL VEHICLES If an ABS module needs to be ordered, Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except for fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim form. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Handling Allowance: An allowance of $1.00 per repair is being provided to cover the costs of locally obtained materials and XG-12 Electrical Grease. To claim the allowance, enter $1.00 as "HANDLG" in the "MISC EXPENSE" area of the claim form. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5466 ^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires approval from Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires approval from Special Service Support Center. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5467 Parts will not be direct shipped for this program Order your parts requirements through normal order processing channels. The DOR/COR number for this safety recall is 50376. Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Support Center or E-mailed. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Affected ABS Modules (Part number YL8Z-2C065-AA and YL8Z-2B373-BA) and the removed ABS connector are subject to random selection for return to the Ford Warranty Parts Analysis Center (WPAC). Refer to your daily PEARS (Parts Entry and Return System) register for part disposition and return instructions. Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures". EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW This program includes making sure the wiring harness connector is properly sealed against moisture/contamination, and inspecting the ABS module for evidence of corrosion resulting from an inadequately sealed connector. During the inspection, we expect that most of the affected vehicles will not have any evidence of corrosion in the ABS module. However, the ABS wiring harness connector still needs to be inspected for missing or improperly seated seals and/or incorrect connector number. If the ABS module is corroded, the ABS module and connector must be replaced. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5468 A flow chart has been developed to help direct you to the proper repair. See Figure 1. Inspect Connector Seals INSPECTION 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. NOTE: When disconnecting the ABS module connector, be sure the blue connector lock stays engaged with the harness connector and does not remain in the module. Remove it from the module if necessary and make sure the white 0-ring seal is properly installed. Disconnect the ABS module 25-pin connector by sliding the lock mechanism out (towards the passenger side of the vehicle) and pulling the connector off the module. 3. Disconnect the speed sensor harness, then remove the 2 harness retainers from the studs and position the harness above the air cleaner assembly to provide access for inspection. 4. Inspect the top of the ABS module connector cover for 2 yellow "X" marks. ^ If 2 yellow "X" marks are present, perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. ^ If no yellow "X" marks are present, proceed to Step 5. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5469 5. Inspect the ABS module connector pins for corrosion. See Figure 2. ^ If corrosion is present, perform Labor Operation E - Install Pigtail, New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. ^ If corrosion is not present, proceed to Step 6. 6. CAUTION: Do not cut any of the harness wires or the wire insulation when cutting off the tie strap. Remove the tie strap from the connector dress cover, then slide the cover off the connector. See Figure 3. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5470 7. Verify the wire seals are present on the 4 heavier gauge wires. See Figure 4. 8. Verify the numbers 054" are stamped on the slide-lock end of the mat cover (wipe the mat cover clean if necessary to view). See Figure 5. NOTE: Mat covers with any other number will be missing plugs in the unused pin locations. 9. Perform Labor Operation C - Install Pigtail and Apply Electrical Grease if: ^ any seals are missing or, ^ if the number on the mat cover is not "054". 10. Perform Labor Operation D - Seat Connector and Apply Electrical Grease if: ^ Any of the 4 wire seals are not fully seated in the connector cavities. ^ Each seal should sit approximately 1-2 mm (1/16 in) below the top of the round cavity. See Figure 4. 11. Perform Labor Operation A - Apply Electrical Grease if: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5471 ^ The module is not corroded. and ^ All seals are present. and ^ All seals are fully seated. and ^ The number on the mat cover is "054". LABOR OPERATION A - APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE 1. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 6. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 6. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a "hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 2. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 3. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. LABOR OPERATION C - INSTALL PIGTAIL AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5472 USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 7. 1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module connector. See Figure 8. 2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness (all wires) to the same length. See Figure 8. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5473 3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/2 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See Figure 9. CAUTION: The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag. Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing circuits when splicing wires. NOTE: The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation. NOTE: The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5474 4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness. Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903. See Figure 10. 5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice connector. 6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit, shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all wires are insulated. See Figure 11. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5475 7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on the other. See Figure 12. 8. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 13. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5476 connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 13. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 9. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 10. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. 11. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds). ^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle. ^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special Support Service Center. LABOR OPERATION D - SEAT CONNECTOR SEALS AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE 1. If the seals are not fully seated, reseat any seals not fully seated with a blunt tool. DO NOT use anything sharp such as a screwdriver, awl or punch that could penetrate the seal and allow moisture to enter the terminal. See Figure 14. 2. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5477 b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 15. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 15. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 3. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 4. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. LABOR OPERATION E - INSTALL PIGTAIL, NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5478 USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 16. PROCEDURE TO REPLACE VEHICLE HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module connector. See Figure 17. 2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness (all wires) to the same length. See Figure 17. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5479 3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See Figure 18. CAUTION: The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag. Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing circuits when splicing wires. NOTE: The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation. NOTE: The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5480 4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness. Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903. See Figure 19. 5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice connector. 6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit, shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all wires are insulated. See Figure 20. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5481 7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on the other. See Figure 21. 8. Install a new ABS module. Perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. 9. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. 10. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds). ^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle. ^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special Support Service Center. LABOR OPERATION F - INSTALL NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE NOTE: Module configuration or reprogramming is not required when installing a new ABS module. 1. Disconnect the 2-wire electrical connector at the ABS module. 2. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 3. Remove the screws and the ABS module. 4. Position the new module and install the screws. Tighten the screws no more than 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 5. Lower the hoist. 6. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5482 ^ Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 22. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 22. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 7. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 8. Reconnect the 2-wire connector to the ABS module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5483 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5484 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5485 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5486 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5487 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5488 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > NHTSA07V156000 > Mar > 07 > Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect Electronic Brake Control Module: Recalls Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2004 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V156000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: March 30, 2007 COMPONENT: Service Brakes, Hydraulic: Antilock: Control Unit/Module POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 446460 SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with Antilock Brakes (ABS), the ABS module connector may have missing or dislodged wire seals. This condition could allow contamination to enter the module connector, creating a potential for an electrical short. CONSEQUENCE: An electrical short might cause an ABS malfunction that would illuminate the ABS warning light, and in some cases, the module may overheat resulting in burning odor, smoke, and/or fire. This condition could occur either when the vehicle ignition switch is in the off position or while the vehicle is being operated. Remedy: Dealers will inspect the wire harness connector to the ABS module for missing or dislodged wire seals, and repair or replace the harness connector as appropriate. The dealer will also inspect the connector on the ABS module and replace it if it is found to be corroded or damaged. The recall began on April 23, 2007. Owners may contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. NOTES: Ford recall No. 07S51. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair Technical Service Bulletin # 07S51S2 Date: 091009 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5498 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes. OASIS was activated April 10, 2007. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes. Available through the website. Owner names and addresses were made available April 30, 2007. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5499 NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles have been directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC). The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option, directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251 Dearborn, MI 48121-6251. ^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund claims that include other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be accepted for reimbursement. ^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair. Claiming a refund will not close the recall on the vehicle. ^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.) - Program Code: 07S51 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs. RENTAL VEHICLES If an ABS module needs to be ordered, Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except for fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim form. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Handling Allowance: An allowance of $1.00 per repair is being provided to cover the costs of locally obtained materials and XG-12 Electrical Grease. To claim the allowance, enter $1.00 as "HANDLG" in the "MISC EXPENSE" area of the claim form. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5500 ^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires approval from Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires approval from Special Service Support Center. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5501 Parts will not be direct shipped for this program Order your parts requirements through normal order processing channels. The DOR/COR number for this safety recall is 50376. Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Support Center or E-mailed. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Affected ABS Modules (Part number YL8Z-2C065-AA and YL8Z-2B373-BA) and the removed ABS connector are subject to random selection for return to the Ford Warranty Parts Analysis Center (WPAC). Refer to your daily PEARS (Parts Entry and Return System) register for part disposition and return instructions. Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures". EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW This program includes making sure the wiring harness connector is properly sealed against moisture/contamination, and inspecting the ABS module for evidence of corrosion resulting from an inadequately sealed connector. During the inspection, we expect that most of the affected vehicles will not have any evidence of corrosion in the ABS module. However, the ABS wiring harness connector still needs to be inspected for missing or improperly seated seals and/or incorrect connector number. If the ABS module is corroded, the ABS module and connector must be replaced. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5502 A flow chart has been developed to help direct you to the proper repair. See Figure 1. Inspect Connector Seals INSPECTION 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. NOTE: When disconnecting the ABS module connector, be sure the blue connector lock stays engaged with the harness connector and does not remain in the module. Remove it from the module if necessary and make sure the white 0-ring seal is properly installed. Disconnect the ABS module 25-pin connector by sliding the lock mechanism out (towards the passenger side of the vehicle) and pulling the connector off the module. 3. Disconnect the speed sensor harness, then remove the 2 harness retainers from the studs and position the harness above the air cleaner assembly to provide access for inspection. 4. Inspect the top of the ABS module connector cover for 2 yellow "X" marks. ^ If 2 yellow "X" marks are present, perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. ^ If no yellow "X" marks are present, proceed to Step 5. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5503 5. Inspect the ABS module connector pins for corrosion. See Figure 2. ^ If corrosion is present, perform Labor Operation E - Install Pigtail, New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. ^ If corrosion is not present, proceed to Step 6. 6. CAUTION: Do not cut any of the harness wires or the wire insulation when cutting off the tie strap. Remove the tie strap from the connector dress cover, then slide the cover off the connector. See Figure 3. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5504 7. Verify the wire seals are present on the 4 heavier gauge wires. See Figure 4. 8. Verify the numbers 054" are stamped on the slide-lock end of the mat cover (wipe the mat cover clean if necessary to view). See Figure 5. NOTE: Mat covers with any other number will be missing plugs in the unused pin locations. 9. Perform Labor Operation C - Install Pigtail and Apply Electrical Grease if: ^ any seals are missing or, ^ if the number on the mat cover is not "054". 10. Perform Labor Operation D - Seat Connector and Apply Electrical Grease if: ^ Any of the 4 wire seals are not fully seated in the connector cavities. ^ Each seal should sit approximately 1-2 mm (1/16 in) below the top of the round cavity. See Figure 4. 11. Perform Labor Operation A - Apply Electrical Grease if: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5505 ^ The module is not corroded. and ^ All seals are present. and ^ All seals are fully seated. and ^ The number on the mat cover is "054". LABOR OPERATION A - APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE 1. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 6. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 6. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a "hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 2. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 3. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. LABOR OPERATION C - INSTALL PIGTAIL AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5506 USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 7. 1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module connector. See Figure 8. 2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness (all wires) to the same length. See Figure 8. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5507 3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/2 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See Figure 9. CAUTION: The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag. Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing circuits when splicing wires. NOTE: The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation. NOTE: The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5508 4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness. Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903. See Figure 10. 5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice connector. 6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit, shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all wires are insulated. See Figure 11. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5509 7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on the other. See Figure 12. 8. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 13. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5510 connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 13. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 9. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 10. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. 11. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds). ^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle. ^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special Support Service Center. LABOR OPERATION D - SEAT CONNECTOR SEALS AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE 1. If the seals are not fully seated, reseat any seals not fully seated with a blunt tool. DO NOT use anything sharp such as a screwdriver, awl or punch that could penetrate the seal and allow moisture to enter the terminal. See Figure 14. 2. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5511 b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 15. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 15. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 3. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 4. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. LABOR OPERATION E - INSTALL PIGTAIL, NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5512 USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 16. PROCEDURE TO REPLACE VEHICLE HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module connector. See Figure 17. 2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness (all wires) to the same length. See Figure 17. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5513 3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See Figure 18. CAUTION: The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag. Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing circuits when splicing wires. NOTE: The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation. NOTE: The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5514 4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness. Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903. See Figure 19. 5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice connector. 6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit, shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all wires are insulated. See Figure 20. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5515 7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on the other. See Figure 21. 8. Install a new ABS module. Perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. 9. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. 10. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds). ^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle. ^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special Support Service Center. LABOR OPERATION F - INSTALL NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE NOTE: Module configuration or reprogramming is not required when installing a new ABS module. 1. Disconnect the 2-wire electrical connector at the ABS module. 2. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 3. Remove the screws and the ABS module. 4. Position the new module and install the screws. Tighten the screws no more than 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 5. Lower the hoist. 6. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5516 ^ Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 22. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 22. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 7. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 8. Reconnect the 2-wire connector to the ABS module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5517 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5518 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5519 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5520 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5521 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5522 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > NHTSA07V156000 > Mar > 07 > Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2004 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V156000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: March 30, 2007 COMPONENT: Service Brakes, Hydraulic: Antilock: Control Unit/Module POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 446460 SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with Antilock Brakes (ABS), the ABS module connector may have missing or dislodged wire seals. This condition could allow contamination to enter the module connector, creating a potential for an electrical short. CONSEQUENCE: An electrical short might cause an ABS malfunction that would illuminate the ABS warning light, and in some cases, the module may overheat resulting in burning odor, smoke, and/or fire. This condition could occur either when the vehicle ignition switch is in the off position or while the vehicle is being operated. Remedy: Dealers will inspect the wire harness connector to the ABS module for missing or dislodged wire seals, and repair or replace the harness connector as appropriate. The dealer will also inspect the connector on the ABS module and replace it if it is found to be corroded or damaged. The recall began on April 23, 2007. Owners may contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. NOTES: Ford recall No. 07S51. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5527 View 151-14 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5528 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5529 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Module - Anti-Lock Brake Control Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. 4. Remove the screws and the control module. 5. NOTE: The 4x2 module cannot be interchanged with the 4x4 module. The 4x4 module is interchangeable with the 4x2 module. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-14 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5534 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-26 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5538 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5539 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the parking brake control. 2. Remove the parking brake warning indicator switch. ^ Remove the screws. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips Wheel Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips TSB 04-23-2 11/29/04 WHEEL SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL TIP FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005 Mariner ISSUE When servicing the wheel speed sensors on a 2001-2005 Escape or 2005 Mariner and Escape Hybrid, care must be taken during removal to prevent damage. The wheel speed sensor wire has a body plug attached to it. This plug can be damaged if not removed correctly, such as removal for pinpoint testing. If the body plug is damaged, sensor replacement may be necessary even though the sensor is functional in all other respects. ACTION When removing the body plug, rotate the plug into a position which allows the use of a small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body plug. These two tabs are at right angles (directly above and below) to the sensor wire. See Figures 1 and 2 for reference. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips > Page 5544 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front View 151-14 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 5547 View 151-15 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 5548 View 151-27 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 5549 View 151-28 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 5552 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 5553 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 5554 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor, Front Sensor - Front Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Detach the grommet from the body and pull the connector through the hole. 3. Disconnect the sensor wiring. 4. Detach the retainer. 5. Remove the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 5557 6. NOTE: Clean off any dirt that may have collected around the sensor before removal. Remove the bolt and the sensor. 7. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 5558 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor, Rear Sensor - Rear Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Detach the grommet from the body and pull the connector through the hole. 3. Disconnect the sensor wiring. 4. Detach the bolt. 5. Remove the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 5559 6. NOTE: Clean off any dirt that may have collected around the sensor before removal. Remove the bolt and the sensor. 7. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 5560 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor Ring, Front Sensor Indicator - Front Removal and Installation 1. The front anti-lock brake sensor indicator is attached to the halfshaft. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 5561 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor Ring, Rear Sensor Indicator - Rear Removal and Installation 1. The rear anti-lock brake sensor indicator is attached to the halfshaft. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-23 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5567 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 3. Using a small tool, press the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock cylinder out. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5575 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5580 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5581 Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5582 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair Battery Cable: Service and Repair BATTERY CABLES REMOVAL 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 3. Remove the fuse junction box cover. 4. Remove the cables. 1 Remove the nuts and cable. 2 Release the lock clip and pull down on the connector. 5. Remove the bolt from the inner fender bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5587 6. Remove the battery ground cable bolt and the cable from the top of the transaxle. 7. Disconnect the harness clip retainer. 8. Remove the cable ends from starter solenoid. 1 Remove the upper nut. 2 Remove the lower nut. 9. Remove the cable harness from the vehicle. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Alternator: Electrical Specifications ITEM..................................................................................................................................................... .................................................SPECIFICATIONS Output Amps......................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................................110 Generator Base Voltage........................................................................................................................................ .................................................................12.0 volts No Load at 2000 rpm.......................................... ..........................................................................................................................between 13.0 - 15.0 volts Load at 2000 rpm......................................................................................................................... ....................minimum of 0.5 volt above the base voltage Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 5593 Torque Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Alternator: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5596 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5597 Alternator: Description and Operation GENERATOR The charging system consists of the following components: - generator - integral voltage regulator The generator maximum output provides 110 amps. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5598 Alternator: Service and Repair GENERATOR REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cables. 2. Remove the right intermediate axle shaft. 3. Remove the right lower splash shield screws and the pin-type retainer. 4. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the accessory drive belt. 5. Remove the nut and position the bracket and wiring harness aside. 6. Remove the upper generator mounting bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5599 7. Remove the lower generator bolts and position the generator aside. 8. Remove the generator mounting bracket bolts and remove the bracket. 9. Remove the generator electrical connectors. 1 Remove the B+ nut and cable. 2 Remove the connector. 10. Rotate the generator to gain clearance, and remove through the opening in the fender well. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-23 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5604 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair Ignition Lock: Service and Repair IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 3. Using a small tool, press the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock cylinder out. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 3. Using a small tool, press the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock cylinder out. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5615 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Starter Drive/Bendix > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Starter Drive/Bendix: Testing and Inspection STARTER DRIVE AND FLYWHEEL RING GEAR INSPECTION 1. Remove the starter motor. 2. Check the wear patterns on the starter drive gear and the flywheel ring gear. If the wear pattern is normal, install the starter motor. 3. If the starter drive gear and the flywheel ring gear are not fully meshing and both of the gears are scored or damaged, install a new starter motor. If necessary, install a new flywheel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5623 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5624 Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5625 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Rear Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Rear > Page 5631 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Diode > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5642 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5643 Fuse: Locations Central Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5644 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5645 Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5648 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5649 Fuse: Application and ID Central Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5650 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5651 Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5656 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5657 Fuse Block: Locations Central Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5658 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5659 Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Fuse Block: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5662 Central Junction Box (CJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5663 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5664 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5665 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box Fuse Block: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5668 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5669 Fuse Block: Application and ID Central Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5670 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5671 Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Ground Strap > Component Information > Service and Repair Ground Strap: Service and Repair GROUND STRAP REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cables. 2. NOTE: The 2.0L is shown, the 3.0L is similar. Remove the ground strap. 1 Remove the nut. 2 Remove the bolt. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5678 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5682 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set Multiple Junction Connector: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set TSB 06-9-3 05/15/06 PCM FAILURE - ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES INTERMITTENT - INOPERATIVE FORD: 2001-2004 Escape ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a powertrain control module (PCM) concern that results in no crank, no start, or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) with one or more diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) present. There may also be intermittent or inoperative power windows, door locks, keyless entry system, lighting, speed control, radio, instrument cluster warning lamps (possibly dimly illuminated instead of being off), or other electrical accessories. The concern is typically more noticeable in wet and/or cold weather conditions. This may be the result of connector terminal corrosion in C134, C263, or the central junction box (CJB) which results in either high resistance between the male and female terminals or a short between two or more circuits due to bridging through any corrosion that may be present. Corrosion in C134 may be the result of improper positioning/sealing of C134. Corrosion in C263 or the CJB may be due to a water leak in the left hand A-Pillar area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to inspect and repair the connector terminals for evidence of corrosion. Repair any sources of water entry. If no signs of corrosion or water entry are found, follow normal diagnostics. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE WHEN DIAGNOSING THE CAUSE OF A PCM FAILURE IT IS CRITICAL THAT THIS INSPECTION AND REPAIR PROCEDURE BE COMPLETED IN ITS ENTIRETY BEFORE INSTALLING A REPLACEMENT SERVICE PART. THE POSSIBILITY EXISTS FOR A 12 VOLT SHORT TO THE 5 VOLT VREF (CIRCUIT). INSTALLATION OF A SERVICE REPLACEMENT PCM WITHOUT ELIMINATING THE 12 VOLT SHORT WILL RESULT IN REPEAT PCM FAILURE. Inspect and repair the following connectors: C134 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5691 1. Open the hood and locate C134 (Figure 1). 2. Disconnect the connector halves and thoroughly inspect the terminals. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals. 3. Use shop air to blow out any moisture that may be present in the terminals, then apply dielectric grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector. 4. Reconnect the connector halves and close the hood. C263 1. Open the drivers door and remove the lower kick panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5692 2. Locate C263 as shown in Figure 2. 3. Disconnect the connector halves. 4. Pry out the terminal retainer as shown in Figure 3 and thoroughly inspect the terminals. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5693 NOTE THE CORROSION WILL NOT BE VISIBLE UNLESS THE TERMINAL RETAINER IS REMOVED. 5. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals. 6. Work dielectric grease into the side opening in the connector, then reinstall the terminal retainer. 7. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector. 8. Reconnect the connector halves. CJB (Central Junction Box) 1. Locate the CJB (Figure 2). 2. Disconnect the four harness connectors from the front and the two connectors from the rear of the CJB, and remove the CJB. 3. Inspect the terminals and also the back side of the CJB or evidence of water damage or corrosion. 4. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals or components. 5. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in the harness connectors. 6. Reconnect the six harness connectors and reinstall the CJB. 7. Reinstall the lower kick panel. NOTE IF ANY CORROSION WAS FOUND IN EITHER C263 OR THE CJB, THE SOURCE OF THE WATER ENTRY MUST BE IDENTIFIED TO PREVENT A REPEAT REPAIR. Follow standard water testing procedures to identify the source of any leaks. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5694 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5695 Figures 4 through 8 identify some common sources of water leaks. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT060903 Claim Labor As Actual Actual Time Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14A187 68 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set TSB 06-9-3 05/15/06 PCM FAILURE - ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES INTERMITTENT - INOPERATIVE FORD: 2001-2004 Escape ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a powertrain control module (PCM) concern that results in no crank, no start, or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) with one or more diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) present. There may also be intermittent or inoperative power windows, door locks, keyless entry system, lighting, speed control, radio, instrument cluster warning lamps (possibly dimly illuminated instead of being off), or other electrical accessories. The concern is typically more noticeable in wet and/or cold weather conditions. This may be the result of connector terminal corrosion in C134, C263, or the central junction box (CJB) which results in either high resistance between the male and female terminals or a short between two or more circuits due to bridging through any corrosion that may be present. Corrosion in C134 may be the result of improper positioning/sealing of C134. Corrosion in C263 or the CJB may be due to a water leak in the left hand A-Pillar area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to inspect and repair the connector terminals for evidence of corrosion. Repair any sources of water entry. If no signs of corrosion or water entry are found, follow normal diagnostics. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE WHEN DIAGNOSING THE CAUSE OF A PCM FAILURE IT IS CRITICAL THAT THIS INSPECTION AND REPAIR PROCEDURE BE COMPLETED IN ITS ENTIRETY BEFORE INSTALLING A REPLACEMENT SERVICE PART. THE POSSIBILITY EXISTS FOR A 12 VOLT SHORT TO THE 5 VOLT VREF (CIRCUIT). INSTALLATION OF A SERVICE REPLACEMENT PCM WITHOUT ELIMINATING THE 12 VOLT SHORT WILL RESULT IN REPEAT PCM FAILURE. Inspect and repair the following connectors: C134 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5701 1. Open the hood and locate C134 (Figure 1). 2. Disconnect the connector halves and thoroughly inspect the terminals. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals. 3. Use shop air to blow out any moisture that may be present in the terminals, then apply dielectric grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector. 4. Reconnect the connector halves and close the hood. C263 1. Open the drivers door and remove the lower kick panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5702 2. Locate C263 as shown in Figure 2. 3. Disconnect the connector halves. 4. Pry out the terminal retainer as shown in Figure 3 and thoroughly inspect the terminals. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5703 NOTE THE CORROSION WILL NOT BE VISIBLE UNLESS THE TERMINAL RETAINER IS REMOVED. 5. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals. 6. Work dielectric grease into the side opening in the connector, then reinstall the terminal retainer. 7. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector. 8. Reconnect the connector halves. CJB (Central Junction Box) 1. Locate the CJB (Figure 2). 2. Disconnect the four harness connectors from the front and the two connectors from the rear of the CJB, and remove the CJB. 3. Inspect the terminals and also the back side of the CJB or evidence of water damage or corrosion. 4. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals or components. 5. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in the harness connectors. 6. Reconnect the six harness connectors and reinstall the CJB. 7. Reinstall the lower kick panel. NOTE IF ANY CORROSION WAS FOUND IN EITHER C263 OR THE CJB, THE SOURCE OF THE WATER ENTRY MUST BE IDENTIFIED TO PREVENT A REPEAT REPAIR. Follow standard water testing procedures to identify the source of any leaks. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5704 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5705 Figures 4 through 8 identify some common sources of water leaks. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT060903 Claim Labor As Actual Actual Time Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14A187 68 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls/A/T Unstable Idle/Shuddering TSB 06-11-7 06/12/06 2001-2005 ESCAPE 3.0L UNSTABLE IDLE - 2001-2003 ESCAPE 3.0L AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SHUDDER - MEXICO ONLY FORD: 2001-2005 Escape ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine may exhibit idle speeds outside the specified range. Some 2001-2003 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and CD4E automatic transaxle may exhibit a transmission shudder. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If the concern is a 2001-2005 Escape with idle speeds outside the specified range: a. Install a new idle air control (IAC) valve with jumper harness included in the kit. The new Denso brand IAC will be installed with the electrical connector facing the opposite direction of the original (Hitachi) valve which is why the jumper harness is required. The original (Hitachi) IAC connector faces the front of the vehicle while the new Denso IAC connector faces toward the rear of the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 5711 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 5712 b. Referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. If the concern is a 2001 - 2003 Escape with transaxle shudder, drain, flush and refill the transmission fluid with MERCON(R) Multi-Purpose Automatic Transmission Fluid. Then, referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the PCM using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 3. When reprogramming the PCM use blank path programming. Select the proper file from the chart and manually enter the PCM part number or tear tag number to obtain the updated calibration file. To Perform Blank Path Programming: 1. Connect WDS/IDS to vehicle. 2. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK. 3. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK. 4. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK. 5. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press TICK. 6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Keep ignition in the "OFF" position, press TICK and you will be asked to cycle the key "ON" and "OFF" a few times. Please keep the key position in the "OFF" position through the key cycles. 7. Screen will show "The diagnostic tester is unable to communicate with this vehicle." You will be prompted to "select a vehicle from the vehicle list", press TICK. 8. A list of vehicles will be displayed, select ALL OTHERS, and press TICK. 9. Screen shows "To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of the following: Vehicle Calibration number (7 digits), Tear Tag number (4 digits), or PCM part number, press TICK. 10. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed above. Press TICK. 11. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) per Workshop Manual, Section 419-01. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 5713 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9F715 42 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls General PCM Programming Procedures TSB 04-24-14 12/13/04 FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS 1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis, Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement. ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed. ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs. Verify repair after reprogramming. SERVICE PROCEDURE PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement 1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle. 2. Use WDS if available. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 5718 a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply. b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level. 3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool, such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS. NOTE IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS, GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF. PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD 1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. 2. Install the new PCM. NOTE IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER. 3. Attempt to start the vehicle. 4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM. 5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639. a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1. b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc. 6. Check for DTC B2900. a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during this procedure. b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7. 7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures. REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement 1. Verify all cables are properly connected. 2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level. 3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level. 4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again. 5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open previous session, and attempt reprogramming again. 6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure. 1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits. 2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity. NOTE IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 5719 INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC. 3. Connect WDS to vehicle. 4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK. 5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK. 6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK. 7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press TICK. 8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK. 9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK. 10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above". 11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK. 12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed above. Press TICK. 13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. 14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 5725 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 5726 b. Referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 2. If the concern is a 2001 - 2003 Escape with transaxle shudder, drain, flush and refill the transmission fluid with MERCON(R) Multi-Purpose Automatic Transmission Fluid. Then, referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the PCM using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. 3. When reprogramming the PCM use blank path programming. Select the proper file from the chart and manually enter the PCM part number or tear tag number to obtain the updated calibration file. To Perform Blank Path Programming: 1. Connect WDS/IDS to vehicle. 2. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK. 3. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK. 4. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK. 5. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press TICK. 6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Keep ignition in the "OFF" position, press TICK and you will be asked to cycle the key "ON" and "OFF" a few times. Please keep the key position in the "OFF" position through the key cycles. 7. Screen will show "The diagnostic tester is unable to communicate with this vehicle." You will be prompted to "select a vehicle from the vehicle list", press TICK. 8. A list of vehicles will be displayed, select ALL OTHERS, and press TICK. 9. Screen shows "To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of the following: Vehicle Calibration number (7 digits), Tear Tag number (4 digits), or PCM part number, press TICK. 10. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed above. Press TICK. 11. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) per Workshop Manual, Section 419-01. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 5727 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9F715 42 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 5732 a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply. b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level. 3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool, such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS. NOTE IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS, GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF. PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD 1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. 2. Install the new PCM. NOTE IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER. 3. Attempt to start the vehicle. 4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM. 5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639. a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1. b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc. 6. Check for DTC B2900. a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during this procedure. b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7. 7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures. REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement 1. Verify all cables are properly connected. 2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level. 3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level. 4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again. 5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open previous session, and attempt reprogramming again. 6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure. 1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits. 2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity. NOTE IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 5733 INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC. 3. Connect WDS to vehicle. 4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK. 5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK. 6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK. 7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press TICK. 8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK. 9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK. 10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above". 11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK. 12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed above. Press TICK. 13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. 14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5736 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5737 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5738 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5739 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5740 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5741 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5742 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5743 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5744 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5745 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5746 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5747 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5748 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5749 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5750 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5751 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5752 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5753 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5757 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5758 Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5759 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5764 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5768 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5772 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5773 Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5774 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5779 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5780 Relay Box: Locations Central Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5781 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5782 Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5785 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5786 Relay Box: Diagrams Central Junction Box (CJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5787 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5788 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5791 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5792 Relay Box: Application and ID Central Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5793 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5794 Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5799 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5800 Relay Box: Locations Central Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5801 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5802 Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5805 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5806 Relay Box: Diagrams Central Junction Box (CJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5807 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5808 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5811 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5812 Relay Box: Application and ID Central Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5813 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5814 Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-26-12 > Dec > 04 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998 Set Wiring Harness: Customer Interest SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998 Set TSB 04-26-12 12/31/04 SIDE AIR BAG DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1994 OR B1998 FORD: 2001-2004 Escape ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit the air bag warning lamp illuminating intermiffently with DTC B1994 (driver side, side mount air bag circuit open) or B1998 (passenger side, side mount air bag circuit open). This condition may be caused by a variation in the electrical continuity at connector C337 (passenger side) or C367 (driver side) at the body harness wire terminal crimp. ACTION Install a replacement body harness pigtail connector in the affected circuit. Refer to the instruction sheet included in the connector repair kit. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 042612A 2001-2004 Escape One 1.2 Hrs. Seat: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seat) 042612B 2001-2004 Escape Both 1.8 Hrs. Seats: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seats) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14405 X2 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips Technical Service Bulletin # 05-18-7 Date: 050922 Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips TSB 05-18-7 09/22/05 WIRING - SOLDERING AND CRIMPING REPAIRS - SERVICE TIPS FORD: 2000-2006 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006 Five Hundred, Ford GT, Freestyle 2006 Fusion 2000-2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004-2006 Freestar 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2000-2006 F-650, F-750 2006 Low Cab Forward LINCOLN: 2000-2006 LS, Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2000-2006 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT MERCURY: 2000-2002 Cougar 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2006 Grand Marquis 2005-2006 Montego 2006 Milan 2000-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 03-11-6 to update the service procedure, vehicle lines and model years. ISSUE Wire harness repairs are supported through the availability of individual components such as: ^ Wire terminals with machine crimped pigtails ^ Hard shell connectors ^ Dual wall heat shrink tubing ^ Complete, loaded, wiring pigtail kits Some of the available tools and service parts that are helpful when performing wiring harness repairs are: ^ Motorcraft Wiring Pigtail Catalog (see website for more information) ^ Rotunda Wire Splice Tool kit 164-R5903 ^ General Wire Terminal Repair Kit (order through Ford Component Sales) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5828 Information on the pigtail and terminal repair kits can also be accessed by technicians via the P15 web site. To access on PTS: ^ Select the year/model of the vehicle on the P15 home page ^ Select the wiring tab ^ Select the link to the pigtail or terminal repair kit at the top right of screen. Additional service information contained in this TSB detailing wire folding, soldering, and crimping techniques may be helpful. ACTION REPAIR VS REPLACEMENT The approved procedure is to repair wiring harnesses with pigtail kits, wire terminals, or hard shell connectors when available. The only exceptions to this procedure are when: ^ The repair cost exceeds the cost to replace the wiring harness ^ There are no component parts released to service the wiring harness RESTRAINTS RELATED WIRING REPAIRS If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in a stand-alone harness, do not repair them; replace the restraints harness unless directed to repair the circuit by a TSB or other Ford Motor Company publication. If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in the main vehicle wiring harnesses (14401, 14A005, etc.), they should be repaired using the solder and heat-shrink repair procedure specified in this TSB. The General Wire Terminal Repair Kit contains gold plated terminated pigtails (with white insulation) and dual wall heat shrink tubing to perform these repairs. Loaded wiring pigtail kits with gold plated terminals are also available in the parts catalog. Disclaimer Service Tips Refer to applicable model year wiring diagrams for circuit information. Twisted Wire Circuits For "Twisted Wire" circuit repair (Figure 1), the twisting must not be disrupted for more than 2" (51 mm) Twist the repaired wires in the same direction and with the same general twist rate as the original wiring. Reapply the shielding on shielded circuits. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5829 Stagger the repairs to minimize harness diameter and maintain harness length (Figure 2). Any leads that are not going to be used need to be sealed with dual wall heat shrink and stowed (Figure 2). Silicone must not be used. Excess wire from the harness can be folded back on itself to maintain the harness length. Reapply any convolute and tape that was removed to make the repair. For 16 AGW and Smaller Diameter Wire Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5830 1. Strip 1-1/2" (37.2 mm) of insulation from Wire # 1 and 3/4" (19.5 mm) of insulation from Wire # 2, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands (Figure 3). Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire is pulled at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during stripping, cut off the end and re-strip. 2. Install heat shrink tubing at least 1" (26 mm) away from one of the stripped ends being spliced. Twist wires together. Solder wires together (Figure 4). NOTE USE ROSIN CORE MILDLY ACTIVATED (RMS) SOLDER. DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER FOR WIRE REPAIR. 3. Bend Wire # 1 back in a straight line for sealing (Figure 4). Inspect solder joint bond. NOTE WAIT FOR SOLDER TO COOL BEFORE MOVING WIRES. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5831 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5832 4. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5). NOTE OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES. 5. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the solder point (Figure 5). For 14 AGW and Larger Diameter Wire (Excluding Restraints Wiring Repairs) 1. Strip 1/4" (6.35 mm) of insulation from pigtail wire end once the wire lengths are sized so repairs can be staggered. Take care not to nick or cut wire strands. Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire is pulled at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during stripping, cut off the end and re-strip. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5833 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5834 NOTE THE STRIP LENGTH WILL VARY DEPENDING ON THE BUTT SPLICE AND WIRE IN HARNESS. LONGER STRIP LENGTHS ARE REQUIRED WHEN THE WIRE NEEDS TO BE FOLDED TO MATE WITH THE BUTT SPLICE. REFER TO FIGURE 10 CHART FOR STRIP LENGTHS AND FOLDING TECHNIQUES. 2. Slide heat shrink tubing onto one (1) of the wire ends to be crimped, must be at least 1" (25.4 mm) away from stripped end (Figure 6). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5835 3. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber of the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper (or equivalent) by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice (Figure 7). Hold the crimping tool so the identified wire sizes are facing you. Squeeze tool handles together until the ratchet releases, then allow the jaws of the tool to open fully. 4. Center one (1) end of the butt splice on the appropriate crimping chamber. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam of the butt splice toward the indenter (Figure 8). 5. Hold the butt splice in place and squeeze the tool handles together until the ratchet engages sufficiently to hold the butt splice in position (typically one (1) or two (2) clicks). DO NOT deform the butt splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5836 6. Insert stripped wire into the buff splice, making sure the insulation on wire does not enter the butt splice (Figure 8). 7. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles together until ratchet releases. Allow tool handles to open, then remove crimped butt splice. 8. To crimp the other half of the splice, reposition the un-crimped wire barrel in the same crimping chamber, and repeat Steps 3-8. If splice cannot be turned for crimping the other half, turn the tool around. 9. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. It is acceptable for crimp to be slightly off center, but not off the end of the buff splice (Figure 9-a). b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. Wire is flush with or extends slightly beyond end of buff splice (Figure 9-b). c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices (Figure 9-c). 10. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5). NOTE OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES. 11. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the solder point (Figure 5). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 04-26-12 > Dec > 04 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998 Set Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998 Set TSB 04-26-12 12/31/04 SIDE AIR BAG DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1994 OR B1998 FORD: 2001-2004 Escape ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit the air bag warning lamp illuminating intermiffently with DTC B1994 (driver side, side mount air bag circuit open) or B1998 (passenger side, side mount air bag circuit open). This condition may be caused by a variation in the electrical continuity at connector C337 (passenger side) or C367 (driver side) at the body harness wire terminal crimp. ACTION Install a replacement body harness pigtail connector in the affected circuit. Refer to the instruction sheet included in the connector repair kit. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 042612A 2001-2004 Escape One 1.2 Hrs. Seat: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seat) 042612B 2001-2004 Escape Both 1.8 Hrs. Seats: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seats) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14405 X2 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips Technical Service Bulletin # 05-18-7 Date: 050922 Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips TSB 05-18-7 09/22/05 WIRING - SOLDERING AND CRIMPING REPAIRS - SERVICE TIPS FORD: 2000-2006 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006 Five Hundred, Ford GT, Freestyle 2006 Fusion 2000-2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004-2006 Freestar 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2000-2006 F-650, F-750 2006 Low Cab Forward LINCOLN: 2000-2006 LS, Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2000-2006 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT MERCURY: 2000-2002 Cougar 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2006 Grand Marquis 2005-2006 Montego 2006 Milan 2000-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 03-11-6 to update the service procedure, vehicle lines and model years. ISSUE Wire harness repairs are supported through the availability of individual components such as: ^ Wire terminals with machine crimped pigtails ^ Hard shell connectors ^ Dual wall heat shrink tubing ^ Complete, loaded, wiring pigtail kits Some of the available tools and service parts that are helpful when performing wiring harness repairs are: ^ Motorcraft Wiring Pigtail Catalog (see website for more information) ^ Rotunda Wire Splice Tool kit 164-R5903 ^ General Wire Terminal Repair Kit (order through Ford Component Sales) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5846 Information on the pigtail and terminal repair kits can also be accessed by technicians via the P15 web site. To access on PTS: ^ Select the year/model of the vehicle on the P15 home page ^ Select the wiring tab ^ Select the link to the pigtail or terminal repair kit at the top right of screen. Additional service information contained in this TSB detailing wire folding, soldering, and crimping techniques may be helpful. ACTION REPAIR VS REPLACEMENT The approved procedure is to repair wiring harnesses with pigtail kits, wire terminals, or hard shell connectors when available. The only exceptions to this procedure are when: ^ The repair cost exceeds the cost to replace the wiring harness ^ There are no component parts released to service the wiring harness RESTRAINTS RELATED WIRING REPAIRS If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in a stand-alone harness, do not repair them; replace the restraints harness unless directed to repair the circuit by a TSB or other Ford Motor Company publication. If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in the main vehicle wiring harnesses (14401, 14A005, etc.), they should be repaired using the solder and heat-shrink repair procedure specified in this TSB. The General Wire Terminal Repair Kit contains gold plated terminated pigtails (with white insulation) and dual wall heat shrink tubing to perform these repairs. Loaded wiring pigtail kits with gold plated terminals are also available in the parts catalog. Disclaimer Service Tips Refer to applicable model year wiring diagrams for circuit information. Twisted Wire Circuits For "Twisted Wire" circuit repair (Figure 1), the twisting must not be disrupted for more than 2" (51 mm) Twist the repaired wires in the same direction and with the same general twist rate as the original wiring. Reapply the shielding on shielded circuits. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5847 Stagger the repairs to minimize harness diameter and maintain harness length (Figure 2). Any leads that are not going to be used need to be sealed with dual wall heat shrink and stowed (Figure 2). Silicone must not be used. Excess wire from the harness can be folded back on itself to maintain the harness length. Reapply any convolute and tape that was removed to make the repair. For 16 AGW and Smaller Diameter Wire Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5848 1. Strip 1-1/2" (37.2 mm) of insulation from Wire # 1 and 3/4" (19.5 mm) of insulation from Wire # 2, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands (Figure 3). Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire is pulled at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during stripping, cut off the end and re-strip. 2. Install heat shrink tubing at least 1" (26 mm) away from one of the stripped ends being spliced. Twist wires together. Solder wires together (Figure 4). NOTE USE ROSIN CORE MILDLY ACTIVATED (RMS) SOLDER. DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER FOR WIRE REPAIR. 3. Bend Wire # 1 back in a straight line for sealing (Figure 4). Inspect solder joint bond. NOTE WAIT FOR SOLDER TO COOL BEFORE MOVING WIRES. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5849 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5850 4. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5). NOTE OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES. 5. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the solder point (Figure 5). For 14 AGW and Larger Diameter Wire (Excluding Restraints Wiring Repairs) 1. Strip 1/4" (6.35 mm) of insulation from pigtail wire end once the wire lengths are sized so repairs can be staggered. Take care not to nick or cut wire strands. Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire is pulled at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during stripping, cut off the end and re-strip. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5851 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5852 NOTE THE STRIP LENGTH WILL VARY DEPENDING ON THE BUTT SPLICE AND WIRE IN HARNESS. LONGER STRIP LENGTHS ARE REQUIRED WHEN THE WIRE NEEDS TO BE FOLDED TO MATE WITH THE BUTT SPLICE. REFER TO FIGURE 10 CHART FOR STRIP LENGTHS AND FOLDING TECHNIQUES. 2. Slide heat shrink tubing onto one (1) of the wire ends to be crimped, must be at least 1" (25.4 mm) away from stripped end (Figure 6). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5853 3. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber of the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper (or equivalent) by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice (Figure 7). Hold the crimping tool so the identified wire sizes are facing you. Squeeze tool handles together until the ratchet releases, then allow the jaws of the tool to open fully. 4. Center one (1) end of the butt splice on the appropriate crimping chamber. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam of the butt splice toward the indenter (Figure 8). 5. Hold the butt splice in place and squeeze the tool handles together until the ratchet engages sufficiently to hold the butt splice in position (typically one (1) or two (2) clicks). DO NOT deform the butt splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5854 6. Insert stripped wire into the buff splice, making sure the insulation on wire does not enter the butt splice (Figure 8). 7. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles together until ratchet releases. Allow tool handles to open, then remove crimped butt splice. 8. To crimp the other half of the splice, reposition the un-crimped wire barrel in the same crimping chamber, and repeat Steps 3-8. If splice cannot be turned for crimping the other half, turn the tool around. 9. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. It is acceptable for crimp to be slightly off center, but not off the end of the buff splice (Figure 9-a). b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. Wire is flush with or extends slightly beyond end of buff splice (Figure 9-b). c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices (Figure 9-c). 10. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5). NOTE OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES. 11. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the solder point (Figure 5). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Rear Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Rear > Page 5860 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Diode > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5871 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5872 Fuse: Locations Central Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5873 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5874 Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5877 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5878 Fuse: Application and ID Central Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5879 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5880 Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5885 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5886 Fuse Block: Locations Central Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5887 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5888 Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Fuse Block: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5891 Central Junction Box (CJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5892 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5893 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5894 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box Fuse Block: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5897 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5898 Fuse Block: Application and ID Central Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5899 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5900 Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Ground Strap > Component Information > Service and Repair Ground Strap: Service and Repair GROUND STRAP REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cables. 2. NOTE: The 2.0L is shown, the 3.0L is similar. Remove the ground strap. 1 Remove the nut. 2 Remove the bolt. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5907 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5911 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set Multiple Junction Connector: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set TSB 06-9-3 05/15/06 PCM FAILURE - ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES INTERMITTENT - INOPERATIVE FORD: 2001-2004 Escape ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a powertrain control module (PCM) concern that results in no crank, no start, or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) with one or more diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) present. There may also be intermittent or inoperative power windows, door locks, keyless entry system, lighting, speed control, radio, instrument cluster warning lamps (possibly dimly illuminated instead of being off), or other electrical accessories. The concern is typically more noticeable in wet and/or cold weather conditions. This may be the result of connector terminal corrosion in C134, C263, or the central junction box (CJB) which results in either high resistance between the male and female terminals or a short between two or more circuits due to bridging through any corrosion that may be present. Corrosion in C134 may be the result of improper positioning/sealing of C134. Corrosion in C263 or the CJB may be due to a water leak in the left hand A-Pillar area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to inspect and repair the connector terminals for evidence of corrosion. Repair any sources of water entry. If no signs of corrosion or water entry are found, follow normal diagnostics. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE WHEN DIAGNOSING THE CAUSE OF A PCM FAILURE IT IS CRITICAL THAT THIS INSPECTION AND REPAIR PROCEDURE BE COMPLETED IN ITS ENTIRETY BEFORE INSTALLING A REPLACEMENT SERVICE PART. THE POSSIBILITY EXISTS FOR A 12 VOLT SHORT TO THE 5 VOLT VREF (CIRCUIT). INSTALLATION OF A SERVICE REPLACEMENT PCM WITHOUT ELIMINATING THE 12 VOLT SHORT WILL RESULT IN REPEAT PCM FAILURE. Inspect and repair the following connectors: C134 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5920 1. Open the hood and locate C134 (Figure 1). 2. Disconnect the connector halves and thoroughly inspect the terminals. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals. 3. Use shop air to blow out any moisture that may be present in the terminals, then apply dielectric grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector. 4. Reconnect the connector halves and close the hood. C263 1. Open the drivers door and remove the lower kick panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5921 2. Locate C263 as shown in Figure 2. 3. Disconnect the connector halves. 4. Pry out the terminal retainer as shown in Figure 3 and thoroughly inspect the terminals. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5922 NOTE THE CORROSION WILL NOT BE VISIBLE UNLESS THE TERMINAL RETAINER IS REMOVED. 5. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals. 6. Work dielectric grease into the side opening in the connector, then reinstall the terminal retainer. 7. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector. 8. Reconnect the connector halves. CJB (Central Junction Box) 1. Locate the CJB (Figure 2). 2. Disconnect the four harness connectors from the front and the two connectors from the rear of the CJB, and remove the CJB. 3. Inspect the terminals and also the back side of the CJB or evidence of water damage or corrosion. 4. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals or components. 5. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in the harness connectors. 6. Reconnect the six harness connectors and reinstall the CJB. 7. Reinstall the lower kick panel. NOTE IF ANY CORROSION WAS FOUND IN EITHER C263 OR THE CJB, THE SOURCE OF THE WATER ENTRY MUST BE IDENTIFIED TO PREVENT A REPEAT REPAIR. Follow standard water testing procedures to identify the source of any leaks. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5923 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5924 Figures 4 through 8 identify some common sources of water leaks. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT060903 Claim Labor As Actual Actual Time Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14A187 68 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set TSB 06-9-3 05/15/06 PCM FAILURE - ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES INTERMITTENT - INOPERATIVE FORD: 2001-2004 Escape ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a powertrain control module (PCM) concern that results in no crank, no start, or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) with one or more diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) present. There may also be intermittent or inoperative power windows, door locks, keyless entry system, lighting, speed control, radio, instrument cluster warning lamps (possibly dimly illuminated instead of being off), or other electrical accessories. The concern is typically more noticeable in wet and/or cold weather conditions. This may be the result of connector terminal corrosion in C134, C263, or the central junction box (CJB) which results in either high resistance between the male and female terminals or a short between two or more circuits due to bridging through any corrosion that may be present. Corrosion in C134 may be the result of improper positioning/sealing of C134. Corrosion in C263 or the CJB may be due to a water leak in the left hand A-Pillar area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to inspect and repair the connector terminals for evidence of corrosion. Repair any sources of water entry. If no signs of corrosion or water entry are found, follow normal diagnostics. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE WHEN DIAGNOSING THE CAUSE OF A PCM FAILURE IT IS CRITICAL THAT THIS INSPECTION AND REPAIR PROCEDURE BE COMPLETED IN ITS ENTIRETY BEFORE INSTALLING A REPLACEMENT SERVICE PART. THE POSSIBILITY EXISTS FOR A 12 VOLT SHORT TO THE 5 VOLT VREF (CIRCUIT). INSTALLATION OF A SERVICE REPLACEMENT PCM WITHOUT ELIMINATING THE 12 VOLT SHORT WILL RESULT IN REPEAT PCM FAILURE. Inspect and repair the following connectors: C134 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5930 1. Open the hood and locate C134 (Figure 1). 2. Disconnect the connector halves and thoroughly inspect the terminals. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals. 3. Use shop air to blow out any moisture that may be present in the terminals, then apply dielectric grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector. 4. Reconnect the connector halves and close the hood. C263 1. Open the drivers door and remove the lower kick panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5931 2. Locate C263 as shown in Figure 2. 3. Disconnect the connector halves. 4. Pry out the terminal retainer as shown in Figure 3 and thoroughly inspect the terminals. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5932 NOTE THE CORROSION WILL NOT BE VISIBLE UNLESS THE TERMINAL RETAINER IS REMOVED. 5. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals. 6. Work dielectric grease into the side opening in the connector, then reinstall the terminal retainer. 7. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector. 8. Reconnect the connector halves. CJB (Central Junction Box) 1. Locate the CJB (Figure 2). 2. Disconnect the four harness connectors from the front and the two connectors from the rear of the CJB, and remove the CJB. 3. Inspect the terminals and also the back side of the CJB or evidence of water damage or corrosion. 4. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals or components. 5. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in the harness connectors. 6. Reconnect the six harness connectors and reinstall the CJB. 7. Reinstall the lower kick panel. NOTE IF ANY CORROSION WAS FOUND IN EITHER C263 OR THE CJB, THE SOURCE OF THE WATER ENTRY MUST BE IDENTIFIED TO PREVENT A REPEAT REPAIR. Follow standard water testing procedures to identify the source of any leaks. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5933 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5934 Figures 4 through 8 identify some common sources of water leaks. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT060903 Claim Labor As Actual Actual Time Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14A187 68 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5937 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5938 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5939 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5940 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5941 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5942 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5943 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5944 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5945 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5946 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5947 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5948 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5949 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5950 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5951 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5952 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5953 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5954 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5958 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5959 Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5960 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5965 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5969 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5973 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5974 Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5975 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5980 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5981 Relay Box: Locations Central Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5982 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5983 Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5986 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5987 Relay Box: Diagrams Central Junction Box (CJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5988 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5989 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5992 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5993 Relay Box: Application and ID Central Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5994 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5995 Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6001 Relay Box: Locations Central Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6002 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6003 Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6006 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6007 Relay Box: Diagrams Central Junction Box (CJB) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6008 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 6009 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6012 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6013 Relay Box: Application and ID Central Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6014 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6015 Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-26-12 > Dec > 04 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998 Set Wiring Harness: Customer Interest SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998 Set TSB 04-26-12 12/31/04 SIDE AIR BAG DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1994 OR B1998 FORD: 2001-2004 Escape ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit the air bag warning lamp illuminating intermiffently with DTC B1994 (driver side, side mount air bag circuit open) or B1998 (passenger side, side mount air bag circuit open). This condition may be caused by a variation in the electrical continuity at connector C337 (passenger side) or C367 (driver side) at the body harness wire terminal crimp. ACTION Install a replacement body harness pigtail connector in the affected circuit. Refer to the instruction sheet included in the connector repair kit. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 042612A 2001-2004 Escape One 1.2 Hrs. Seat: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seat) 042612B 2001-2004 Escape Both 1.8 Hrs. Seats: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seats) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14405 X2 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips Technical Service Bulletin # 05-18-7 Date: 050922 Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips TSB 05-18-7 09/22/05 WIRING - SOLDERING AND CRIMPING REPAIRS - SERVICE TIPS FORD: 2000-2006 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006 Five Hundred, Ford GT, Freestyle 2006 Fusion 2000-2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004-2006 Freestar 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2000-2006 F-650, F-750 2006 Low Cab Forward LINCOLN: 2000-2006 LS, Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2000-2006 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT MERCURY: 2000-2002 Cougar 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2006 Grand Marquis 2005-2006 Montego 2006 Milan 2000-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 03-11-6 to update the service procedure, vehicle lines and model years. ISSUE Wire harness repairs are supported through the availability of individual components such as: ^ Wire terminals with machine crimped pigtails ^ Hard shell connectors ^ Dual wall heat shrink tubing ^ Complete, loaded, wiring pigtail kits Some of the available tools and service parts that are helpful when performing wiring harness repairs are: ^ Motorcraft Wiring Pigtail Catalog (see website for more information) ^ Rotunda Wire Splice Tool kit 164-R5903 ^ General Wire Terminal Repair Kit (order through Ford Component Sales) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6029 Information on the pigtail and terminal repair kits can also be accessed by technicians via the P15 web site. To access on PTS: ^ Select the year/model of the vehicle on the P15 home page ^ Select the wiring tab ^ Select the link to the pigtail or terminal repair kit at the top right of screen. Additional service information contained in this TSB detailing wire folding, soldering, and crimping techniques may be helpful. ACTION REPAIR VS REPLACEMENT The approved procedure is to repair wiring harnesses with pigtail kits, wire terminals, or hard shell connectors when available. The only exceptions to this procedure are when: ^ The repair cost exceeds the cost to replace the wiring harness ^ There are no component parts released to service the wiring harness RESTRAINTS RELATED WIRING REPAIRS If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in a stand-alone harness, do not repair them; replace the restraints harness unless directed to repair the circuit by a TSB or other Ford Motor Company publication. If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in the main vehicle wiring harnesses (14401, 14A005, etc.), they should be repaired using the solder and heat-shrink repair procedure specified in this TSB. The General Wire Terminal Repair Kit contains gold plated terminated pigtails (with white insulation) and dual wall heat shrink tubing to perform these repairs. Loaded wiring pigtail kits with gold plated terminals are also available in the parts catalog. Disclaimer Service Tips Refer to applicable model year wiring diagrams for circuit information. Twisted Wire Circuits For "Twisted Wire" circuit repair (Figure 1), the twisting must not be disrupted for more than 2" (51 mm) Twist the repaired wires in the same direction and with the same general twist rate as the original wiring. Reapply the shielding on shielded circuits. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6030 Stagger the repairs to minimize harness diameter and maintain harness length (Figure 2). Any leads that are not going to be used need to be sealed with dual wall heat shrink and stowed (Figure 2). Silicone must not be used. Excess wire from the harness can be folded back on itself to maintain the harness length. Reapply any convolute and tape that was removed to make the repair. For 16 AGW and Smaller Diameter Wire Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6031 1. Strip 1-1/2" (37.2 mm) of insulation from Wire # 1 and 3/4" (19.5 mm) of insulation from Wire # 2, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands (Figure 3). Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire is pulled at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during stripping, cut off the end and re-strip. 2. Install heat shrink tubing at least 1" (26 mm) away from one of the stripped ends being spliced. Twist wires together. Solder wires together (Figure 4). NOTE USE ROSIN CORE MILDLY ACTIVATED (RMS) SOLDER. DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER FOR WIRE REPAIR. 3. Bend Wire # 1 back in a straight line for sealing (Figure 4). Inspect solder joint bond. NOTE WAIT FOR SOLDER TO COOL BEFORE MOVING WIRES. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6032 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6033 4. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5). NOTE OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES. 5. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the solder point (Figure 5). For 14 AGW and Larger Diameter Wire (Excluding Restraints Wiring Repairs) 1. Strip 1/4" (6.35 mm) of insulation from pigtail wire end once the wire lengths are sized so repairs can be staggered. Take care not to nick or cut wire strands. Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire is pulled at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during stripping, cut off the end and re-strip. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6034 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6035 NOTE THE STRIP LENGTH WILL VARY DEPENDING ON THE BUTT SPLICE AND WIRE IN HARNESS. LONGER STRIP LENGTHS ARE REQUIRED WHEN THE WIRE NEEDS TO BE FOLDED TO MATE WITH THE BUTT SPLICE. REFER TO FIGURE 10 CHART FOR STRIP LENGTHS AND FOLDING TECHNIQUES. 2. Slide heat shrink tubing onto one (1) of the wire ends to be crimped, must be at least 1" (25.4 mm) away from stripped end (Figure 6). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6036 3. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber of the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper (or equivalent) by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice (Figure 7). Hold the crimping tool so the identified wire sizes are facing you. Squeeze tool handles together until the ratchet releases, then allow the jaws of the tool to open fully. 4. Center one (1) end of the butt splice on the appropriate crimping chamber. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam of the butt splice toward the indenter (Figure 8). 5. Hold the butt splice in place and squeeze the tool handles together until the ratchet engages sufficiently to hold the butt splice in position (typically one (1) or two (2) clicks). DO NOT deform the butt splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6037 6. Insert stripped wire into the buff splice, making sure the insulation on wire does not enter the butt splice (Figure 8). 7. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles together until ratchet releases. Allow tool handles to open, then remove crimped butt splice. 8. To crimp the other half of the splice, reposition the un-crimped wire barrel in the same crimping chamber, and repeat Steps 3-8. If splice cannot be turned for crimping the other half, turn the tool around. 9. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. It is acceptable for crimp to be slightly off center, but not off the end of the buff splice (Figure 9-a). b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. Wire is flush with or extends slightly beyond end of buff splice (Figure 9-b). c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices (Figure 9-c). 10. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5). NOTE OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES. 11. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the solder point (Figure 5). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 04-26-12 > Dec > 04 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998 Set Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998 Set TSB 04-26-12 12/31/04 SIDE AIR BAG DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1994 OR B1998 FORD: 2001-2004 Escape ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit the air bag warning lamp illuminating intermiffently with DTC B1994 (driver side, side mount air bag circuit open) or B1998 (passenger side, side mount air bag circuit open). This condition may be caused by a variation in the electrical continuity at connector C337 (passenger side) or C367 (driver side) at the body harness wire terminal crimp. ACTION Install a replacement body harness pigtail connector in the affected circuit. Refer to the instruction sheet included in the connector repair kit. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 042612A 2001-2004 Escape One 1.2 Hrs. Seat: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seat) 042612B 2001-2004 Escape Both 1.8 Hrs. Seats: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seats) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14405 X2 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips Technical Service Bulletin # 05-18-7 Date: 050922 Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips TSB 05-18-7 09/22/05 WIRING - SOLDERING AND CRIMPING REPAIRS - SERVICE TIPS FORD: 2000-2006 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006 Five Hundred, Ford GT, Freestyle 2006 Fusion 2000-2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004-2006 Freestar 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2000-2006 F-650, F-750 2006 Low Cab Forward LINCOLN: 2000-2006 LS, Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2000-2006 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT MERCURY: 2000-2002 Cougar 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2006 Grand Marquis 2005-2006 Montego 2006 Milan 2000-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 03-11-6 to update the service procedure, vehicle lines and model years. ISSUE Wire harness repairs are supported through the availability of individual components such as: ^ Wire terminals with machine crimped pigtails ^ Hard shell connectors ^ Dual wall heat shrink tubing ^ Complete, loaded, wiring pigtail kits Some of the available tools and service parts that are helpful when performing wiring harness repairs are: ^ Motorcraft Wiring Pigtail Catalog (see website for more information) ^ Rotunda Wire Splice Tool kit 164-R5903 ^ General Wire Terminal Repair Kit (order through Ford Component Sales) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6047 Information on the pigtail and terminal repair kits can also be accessed by technicians via the P15 web site. To access on PTS: ^ Select the year/model of the vehicle on the P15 home page ^ Select the wiring tab ^ Select the link to the pigtail or terminal repair kit at the top right of screen. Additional service information contained in this TSB detailing wire folding, soldering, and crimping techniques may be helpful. ACTION REPAIR VS REPLACEMENT The approved procedure is to repair wiring harnesses with pigtail kits, wire terminals, or hard shell connectors when available. The only exceptions to this procedure are when: ^ The repair cost exceeds the cost to replace the wiring harness ^ There are no component parts released to service the wiring harness RESTRAINTS RELATED WIRING REPAIRS If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in a stand-alone harness, do not repair them; replace the restraints harness unless directed to repair the circuit by a TSB or other Ford Motor Company publication. If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in the main vehicle wiring harnesses (14401, 14A005, etc.), they should be repaired using the solder and heat-shrink repair procedure specified in this TSB. The General Wire Terminal Repair Kit contains gold plated terminated pigtails (with white insulation) and dual wall heat shrink tubing to perform these repairs. Loaded wiring pigtail kits with gold plated terminals are also available in the parts catalog. Disclaimer Service Tips Refer to applicable model year wiring diagrams for circuit information. Twisted Wire Circuits For "Twisted Wire" circuit repair (Figure 1), the twisting must not be disrupted for more than 2" (51 mm) Twist the repaired wires in the same direction and with the same general twist rate as the original wiring. Reapply the shielding on shielded circuits. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6048 Stagger the repairs to minimize harness diameter and maintain harness length (Figure 2). Any leads that are not going to be used need to be sealed with dual wall heat shrink and stowed (Figure 2). Silicone must not be used. Excess wire from the harness can be folded back on itself to maintain the harness length. Reapply any convolute and tape that was removed to make the repair. For 16 AGW and Smaller Diameter Wire Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6049 1. Strip 1-1/2" (37.2 mm) of insulation from Wire # 1 and 3/4" (19.5 mm) of insulation from Wire # 2, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands (Figure 3). Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire is pulled at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during stripping, cut off the end and re-strip. 2. Install heat shrink tubing at least 1" (26 mm) away from one of the stripped ends being spliced. Twist wires together. Solder wires together (Figure 4). NOTE USE ROSIN CORE MILDLY ACTIVATED (RMS) SOLDER. DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER FOR WIRE REPAIR. 3. Bend Wire # 1 back in a straight line for sealing (Figure 4). Inspect solder joint bond. NOTE WAIT FOR SOLDER TO COOL BEFORE MOVING WIRES. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6050 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6051 4. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5). NOTE OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES. 5. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the solder point (Figure 5). For 14 AGW and Larger Diameter Wire (Excluding Restraints Wiring Repairs) 1. Strip 1/4" (6.35 mm) of insulation from pigtail wire end once the wire lengths are sized so repairs can be staggered. Take care not to nick or cut wire strands. Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire is pulled at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during stripping, cut off the end and re-strip. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6052 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6053 NOTE THE STRIP LENGTH WILL VARY DEPENDING ON THE BUTT SPLICE AND WIRE IN HARNESS. LONGER STRIP LENGTHS ARE REQUIRED WHEN THE WIRE NEEDS TO BE FOLDED TO MATE WITH THE BUTT SPLICE. REFER TO FIGURE 10 CHART FOR STRIP LENGTHS AND FOLDING TECHNIQUES. 2. Slide heat shrink tubing onto one (1) of the wire ends to be crimped, must be at least 1" (25.4 mm) away from stripped end (Figure 6). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6054 3. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber of the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper (or equivalent) by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice (Figure 7). Hold the crimping tool so the identified wire sizes are facing you. Squeeze tool handles together until the ratchet releases, then allow the jaws of the tool to open fully. 4. Center one (1) end of the butt splice on the appropriate crimping chamber. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam of the butt splice toward the indenter (Figure 8). 5. Hold the butt splice in place and squeeze the tool handles together until the ratchet engages sufficiently to hold the butt splice in position (typically one (1) or two (2) clicks). DO NOT deform the butt splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6055 6. Insert stripped wire into the buff splice, making sure the insulation on wire does not enter the butt splice (Figure 8). 7. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles together until ratchet releases. Allow tool handles to open, then remove crimped butt splice. 8. To crimp the other half of the splice, reposition the un-crimped wire barrel in the same crimping chamber, and repeat Steps 3-8. If splice cannot be turned for crimping the other half, turn the tool around. 9. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. It is acceptable for crimp to be slightly off center, but not off the end of the buff splice (Figure 9-a). b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. Wire is flush with or extends slightly beyond end of buff splice (Figure 9-b). c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices (Figure 9-c). 10. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5). NOTE OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES. 11. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the solder point (Figure 5). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics Alignment: By Symptom Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics TSB 04-21-4 11/01/04 STEERING DRIFT/PULL - IMPROVED DIAGNOSTIC AND REPAIR PROCEDURE - SERVICE TIP FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005 Mariner ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull to either the right or left. This condition may occur even if the alignment settings are within specifications. ACTION The following procedure is designed to supplement the Workshop Manual. It contains a more detailed description of the camber/caster adjustment, updated diagnostics to help determine cause and an updated camber adjustment procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 6065 1. Refer to the Drift/Pull diagnostic flow chart (Figure 1). 2. Use procedures in TSB when adjusting alignment if directed by the diagnostic flow chart. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 6066 3. Complete worksheet as needed (Figure 5). GENERAL FRONT SUSPENSION UPPER STRUT MOUNT ADJUSTMENT INFORMATION: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 6067 Adjustment of camber and caster can be made by rotating the upper strut mount into one (1) of four (4) positions. The orientation of the strut rod relative to the center of the hole for the mount determines the alignment change. The strut rod is offset 180 degrees from the paint mark on the strut bushing. Moving the strut rod inboard or outboard changes camber and moving the strut rod forward or rearward changes caster. Regardless of the start setting, a 90 degree rotation will only change one of the settings (caster or camber), and a 180 degree rotation will change both settings (caster and camber). ADDITIONAL FRONT CAMBER ADJUSTMENT: The clearance between the bolts and the holes in the knuckle to strut joint allows front camber adjustment beyond what the strut mount orientation provides. This additional adjustment can be used on either of the front wheels to increase or decrease a camber split. Rotating the upper strut mount is the primary and preferred method to adjust front camber. If rotating the upper strut mount does not provide enough camber adjustment, perform the following steps to achieve an approximate camber change of up to +/- 0.24 degrees per side: 1. Lift the vehicle up off its tires. 2. Replace the old strut to knuckle fasteners (bolts and nuts) with new fasteners, but do not torque the new fasteners. 3. Move the top of the tire inboard or outboard to adjust camber (Figure 4). a. If more negative camber is desired, push the top of the tire inboard. b. If less negative camber is desired, pull the top of the tire outboard. 4. With the tire at the desired position, torque the new fasteners to 85 lb-ft (115 N.m). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 6068 5. Lower the vehicle back down. 6. Place vehicle on alignment rack and measure the alignment to confirm the desired camber change was achieved. NOTE DO NOT ADJUST THE ALIGNMENT SETTINGS (INDIVIDUAL CAMBER) BEYOND THE RELEASED SPECIFICATIONS. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE FRONT W6 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics TSB 04-21-4 11/01/04 STEERING DRIFT/PULL - IMPROVED DIAGNOSTIC AND REPAIR PROCEDURE - SERVICE TIP FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005 Mariner ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull to either the right or left. This condition may occur even if the alignment settings are within specifications. ACTION The following procedure is designed to supplement the Workshop Manual. It contains a more detailed description of the camber/caster adjustment, updated diagnostics to help determine cause and an updated camber adjustment procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 6074 1. Refer to the Drift/Pull diagnostic flow chart (Figure 1). 2. Use procedures in TSB when adjusting alignment if directed by the diagnostic flow chart. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 6075 3. Complete worksheet as needed (Figure 5). GENERAL FRONT SUSPENSION UPPER STRUT MOUNT ADJUSTMENT INFORMATION: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 6076 Adjustment of camber and caster can be made by rotating the upper strut mount into one (1) of four (4) positions. The orientation of the strut rod relative to the center of the hole for the mount determines the alignment change. The strut rod is offset 180 degrees from the paint mark on the strut bushing. Moving the strut rod inboard or outboard changes camber and moving the strut rod forward or rearward changes caster. Regardless of the start setting, a 90 degree rotation will only change one of the settings (caster or camber), and a 180 degree rotation will change both settings (caster and camber). ADDITIONAL FRONT CAMBER ADJUSTMENT: The clearance between the bolts and the holes in the knuckle to strut joint allows front camber adjustment beyond what the strut mount orientation provides. This additional adjustment can be used on either of the front wheels to increase or decrease a camber split. Rotating the upper strut mount is the primary and preferred method to adjust front camber. If rotating the upper strut mount does not provide enough camber adjustment, perform the following steps to achieve an approximate camber change of up to +/- 0.24 degrees per side: 1. Lift the vehicle up off its tires. 2. Replace the old strut to knuckle fasteners (bolts and nuts) with new fasteners, but do not torque the new fasteners. 3. Move the top of the tire inboard or outboard to adjust camber (Figure 4). a. If more negative camber is desired, push the top of the tire inboard. b. If less negative camber is desired, pull the top of the tire outboard. 4. With the tire at the desired position, torque the new fasteners to 85 lb-ft (115 N.m). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 6077 5. Lower the vehicle back down. 6. Place vehicle on alignment rack and measure the alignment to confirm the desired camber change was achieved. NOTE DO NOT ADJUST THE ALIGNMENT SETTINGS (INDIVIDUAL CAMBER) BEYOND THE RELEASED SPECIFICATIONS. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE FRONT W6 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6078 Alignment Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6079 Alignment: Description and Operation Wheel Alignment Angles Camber Camber is the inward or outward tilting of the wheels at the top. When the wheel tilts out at the top, then the camber is positive (+). When the wheel tilts in at the top, then the camber is negative (-). Caster Part 1 Of 2 Part 2 Of 2 Caster is the tilting of the steering axis either forward or backward from vertical. A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a separate procedure on this vehicle. Front caster should fall within specification when the front camber is adjusted. Toe Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6080 Toe is a measurement of how much the front of the wheels are turned in or out from the straight-ahead position. When the wheels are turned in toward the front of the vehicle, toe is positive (+) (toe in). When the wheels are turned out toward the front of the vehicle, toe is negative (-) (toe out). Toe is measured in degrees, from side to side, and totaled. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster Adjustment Camber and Caster Adjustment 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the front shock absorber upper mounting bracket nuts. 3. Push the front shock absorber upper mounting bracket downward and turn it to the desired position to set camber and caster. Both camber and caster for front suspension are adjustable within a maximum of 30 minutes angle. 4. Tighten the front shock absorber upper mounting bracket nuts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 6083 Alignment: Service and Repair Front Toe Adjustment Front Toe Adjustment 1. Start the engine and center the steering wheel. 2. Turn the engine off, and lock the steering wheel in position. 3. Check the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 4. NOTE: Do not allow the steering gear bellows to twist when the front wheel spindle tie rod is rotated. Remove the clamps. 5. Loosen the nuts. ^ Clean and lubricate the nut(s) and front wheel spindle tie rod threads. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 6084 6. Rotate the front wheel spindle tie rods. 7. Tighten the nuts. 8. Install the clamp(s). 9. Recheck the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 6085 Alignment: Service and Repair Rear Toe Adjustment Rear Toe Adjustment 1. NOTE: Jounce the vehicle to make sure that the suspension is in its normal resting position. Check the toe setting using suitable wheel alignment equipment. 2. Loosen the LH and RH rear suspension trailing arm and bushing bolt. 3. Turn the LH and RH adjusting cams simultaneously until the toe is within specification. 4. Tighten the LH and RH rear suspension trailing arm and bushing bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 6086 Alignment: Service and Repair Lean Correction Lean Correction NOTE: When installing a new coil spring, install a new one with the same part number and the same spring code. Refer to the Vehicle Certification (VC) Label on the driver side door. 1. Measure the distance from the wheelhouse opening to the center of the wheel and tire at the same point on both sides of the vehicle. 2. If the difference exceeds 10 mm (0.4 inch), a lean correction is necessary. Compare the original with a new coil spring. Note the difference. 3. Remove the higher side coil spring. 1. If the original coil spring exceeds the height of the new one by 10 mm (0.4 inch), install the new coil spring in the vehicle. 2. If the original coil spring is shorter than the new one by 10 mm (0.4 in), remove the low side coil spring from the vehicle. 4. Compare all three coil springs and select the two most evenly matched for installation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6092 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The power steering pressure (PSP) switch (Figure 45) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Page 6095 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Sensor POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The power steering pressure (PSP) sensor (Figure 46) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6096 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the power steering pressure (PSP) switch. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair Power Steering Bleeding: Service and Repair Power Steering System Purging Special Tool(s) CAUTION: If the air is not purged from the power steering system correctly, premature power steering pump failure can result. The condition can occur on pre-delivery vehicles with evidence of aerated fluid or on vehicles that have had steering component repairs. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. NOTE: A whine heard from the power steering pump can be caused by air in the system. The power steering purge procedure must be carried out prior to any component repair for which power steering noise complaints are accompanied by evidence of aerated fluid. Remove the power steering pump reservoir cap. Check the fluid. 2. Raise the front wheels off the floor. 3. Tightly insert the stopper of the vacuum pump into the reservoir. 4. Start the engine. 5. Install the vacuum pump and maintain maximum vacuum, 68-85 kPa (20-25 in-Hg). 6. CAUTION: Do not hold the steering wheel against the stops for more than 3 to 5 seconds at a time. Damage to the power steering pump can occur. Cycle the steering wheel fully from stop to stop 10 times. 7. Stop the engine. 8. Release the vacuum and remove the vacuum pump. 9. CAUTION: Do not overfill the reservoir. Fill the reservoir. ^ Use approved transmission fluid. 10. Start the engine. 11. Reinstall the vacuum pump. Apply and maintain maximum vacuum, 68-85 kPa (20-25 Hg). 12. CAUTION: Do not hold the steering wheel against the stops for more than 3 to 5 seconds at a time. Damage to the power steering pump can occur. Cycle the steering wheel fully from stop to stop 10 times. 13. Stop the engine, release the vacuum, and remove the vacuum pump. 14. CAUTION: Do not overfill the reservoir. Fill the reservoir as needed and install the reservoir cap. 15. Visually inspect the power steering system for leaks. 16. Lower the vehicle. 17. CAUTION: Do not overfill the reservoir. Fill the reservoir as needed and visually inspect the power steering system for leaks. 18. Install the reservoir cap. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage Power Steering Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage TSB 07-1-7 01/22/07 MERCON(R) ATF REPLACED BY MERCON(R) V AS A SERVICE FLUID FOR SOME POWER STEERING SYSTEMS FORD: 1996-1997 Thunderbird 1996-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 1998-2003 Escort 2000-2007 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006 Ford GT 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1996-1997 Aerostar 1996-2007 E-Series, Explorer, Ranger 1997-2004 F-53 Motorhome Chassis 1997-2007 Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty 1998-2003 Windstar 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2007 Escape 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1996-1997 Cargo 1996-1998 L-Series 1996-1999 F- B-Series 2000-2007 F-650, F-750 2006-2007 Low Cab Forward LINCOLN: 1996-1998 Mark VIII 1996-1999 Continental 1996-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT 2007 MKX MERCURY: 1996-1997 Cougar 1996-2005 Sable 1996-2007 Grand Marquis 1999-2002 Cougar 2003-2004 Marauder 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2007 Mountaineer 1998-2002 Villager 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2007 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid is being replaced by MERCON(R) V as a service fluid for power steering systems originally requiring MERCON(R). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage > Page 6106 ACTION Beginning immediately all power steering applications requiring MERCON(R) can now be serviced using MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. After July 1, 2007, MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid will no longer be manufactured, therefore, availability of this fluid will continue until remaining inventory has been depleted. SERVICE PROCEDURE Service power steering Systems requiring MERCON(R) with MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. CAUTION APPLICATIONS RECOMMENDING TYPE F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AND POWER STEERING FLUID MUST CONTINUE TO USE THAT PARTICULAR FLUID. USE OF ANY OTHER FLUID MAY CAUSE REDUCED FUNCTIONALITY OR DAMAGE Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6107 Power Steering Fluid: Specifications Power Steering Fluid Type .................................................................................................................. .................................................. MERCON(R) ATF Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Cooler > Component Information > Specifications Power Steering Fluid Cooler: Specifications Power steering fluid cooler mounting bolts .......................................................................................................................................... 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Cooler > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6111 Power Steering Fluid Cooler: Service and Repair Power Steering Fluid Cooler Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the hose from the power steering fluid reservoir. Vehicles built before 10/1/2003 2. Disconnect the power steering cooler hose. Vehicles built after 10/1/2003 3. Release the clamp and remove the power steering fluid return hose. 4. Remove the power steering fluid cooler bracket nuts. All Vehicles 5. Remove the front bumper cover. 4. Remove the bolts and the power steering fluid cooler. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Reservoir > Component Information > Specifications Power Steering Fluid Reservoir: Specifications Power steering pump fluid reservoir mounting bolts ............................................................................................................................ 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Reservoir > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6115 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Drain the power steering fluid into a suitable drain pain. Disconnect the power steering fluid return hose. 2. Disconnect the power steering low pressure hose. 3. Remove the bolts and the power steering pump reservoir. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Fill power steering system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Specifications Power Steering Line/Hose: Specifications Power steering pressure hose to steering gear fitting ..................................................................................................................... 28-33 Nm (21-25 ft. lbs.) Power steering pressure line-to-pump fitting ............................................................................................................................................ 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.) Power steering pressure line bracket-to-engine insulator bracket bolt .................................................................................................. 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.) Power steering pressure and return line retainer plate-to-gear bolt ........................................................................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Power steering pressure line bracket-to-gear bolt ................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.) Power steering return line bracket-to-gear bolt ..................................................................................................................................... 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line-3.0L (4V) Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. NOTE: Drain the excess power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan. NOTE: Do not drop the O-ring seals. Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines. 1 Remove the bolt. 2 Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines. 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. Remove the power steering pressure line bracket bolt to the steering gear. 5. Remove the power steering pressure hose. 1 Remove the power steering pressure line bracket bolt. 2 Disconnect the electrical connector. 3 Loosen the fitting and remove the power steering pressure line. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line > Page 6121 1. Using the special tool, install a new seal on the power steering pressure line fitting. ^ Remove and discard the original seal. ^ Stretch the seal over the special tool and slide it onto the tube nut. 2. Install the power steering pressure hose. 1 Tighten the power steering pressure hose fitting to the pump. 2 Connect the electrical connector. 3 Install the power steering pressure line bracket bolt. 3. Install the power steering pressure line bracket bolt to the steering gear. 4. Raise the vehicle. 5. NOTE: Make sure the O-ring seals are on the power steering pressure and return lines. Connect the power steering pressure and return lines to the steering gear. Install the bolt. 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line > Page 6122 Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Steering Gear to Fluid Cooler Return Hose Steering Gear to Fluid Cooler Return Hose Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Drain the excess power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan. NOTE: Make sure not to drop the O-ring seals. Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines. 1 Remove the bolt. 2 Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines. 2. Remove the power steering return line bracket-to-gear bolt. 3. Release the clamp and remove the power steering return line. 4. NOTE: Make sure the O-ring seals are on the power steering pressure and return lines. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications Power Steering Pump: Mechanical Specifications Power steering pump pulley nut .......................................................................................................... ..................................................... 49 Nm (36 ft. lbs.) Power steering pump bracket-to-pump bolts ........................................................................................................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Power steering pump bracket mounting nuts ........................................................................................................................................ 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 6127 Power Steering Pump: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications Power Steering Pump Flow (1) ................................................................................................................................................ ................... 6-8.25 liters/minute (1.79-2.19 gpm) Pressure (1) ........................................................... .................................................................................................................................. 414 kPa (60 psi) Relief pressure ......................................................................................................................................................... 8,964- 10,205 kPa (1,300-1,480 psi) (1)Fluid 74°-80° C (165°-175° F) Engine at idle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 6128 Power Steering Pump: Capacity Specifications Power Steering Pump Minimum capacity (1) .......................................................................................................................................................... 4.4 liters/minute (1.15 8pm) (1) Fluid @ 74°-80° C (165°-175° F). Engine at idle. Pressure at 5,171 kPa (750 psi) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump Power Steering Pump Special Tool(s) Removal 1. Remove the ground strap. ^ Remove the nut and the ground strap. 2. Using the special tools, support the engine. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump > Page 6131 3. Loosen the power steering pump pulley bolt. 4. Remove the drive belt. 5. Remove the bolt and the power steering pump pulley. 6. NOTE: Drain the power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan. Disconnect the power steering low pressure hose. 7. Disconnect the power steering pressure hose and position aside. 1 Remove the power steering pressure line bracket bolt. 2 Disconnect the electrical connector. 3 Disconnect the power steering pressure line and position aside. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump > Page 6132 8. Remove the upper engine insulator bracket bolt. 9. Remove the A/C line support nut. 10. NOTE: The engine isolator bracket is shown removed for clarity. Remove the engine insulator. 1 Remove the nut. 2 Remove the bolt and the engine insulator. 11. Remove the power steering pump bracket. 1 Remove the pressure line bracket screw. 2 Remove the six nuts. 3 Remove five bolts and the power steering pump bracket. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump > Page 6133 12. Remove the power steering pump. Installation 1. Position the power steering pump. 2. Install the power steering pump bracket. 1 Install the five bolts. 2 Install the six nuts. 3 Install the pressure line bracket screw. 3. NOTE: The engine isolator bracket is shown removed for clarity. Install the engine insulator. 1 Install the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump > Page 6134 2 Install the nut. 4. Install the upper engine insulator bracket bolt. 5. Position the A/C line support and install the nut. 6. Using the special tool, install a new seal on the power steering pressure hose fitting. ^ Remove and discard the original seal. ^ Stretch the seal over the special tool and slide it onto the tube nut. 7. Connect the power steering pressure hose. 1 Connect the power steering pressure hose to the pump. 2 Connect the electrical connector. 3 Install the power steering pressure line bracket bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump > Page 6135 8. Connect the power steering low pressure hose. 9. Install the power steering pump pulley and bolt. 10. Install the drive belt. 11. Tighten the power steering pump pulley bolt. 12. Remove the special tools. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump > Page 6136 13. Install the ground strap. ^ Position the ground strap and install the nut. 14. Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump > Page 6137 Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump Pulley Power Steering Pump Pulley Removal and Installation 1. Loosen the power steering pump pulley bolt. 2. Remove the drive belt. 3. Remove the bolt and the power steering pump pulley. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6142 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The power steering pressure (PSP) switch (Figure 45) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Page 6145 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Sensor POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The power steering pressure (PSP) sensor (Figure 46) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6146 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the power steering pressure (PSP) switch. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions WARNING: - If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed. The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming Depowering and Repowering Procedure Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered. NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected. 2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover. 4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front of any air bag module when the battery ground cable is connected. Connect the battery ground cable. 5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6153 Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Seats Removed DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION PROCEDURES There are two deactivation and reactivation procedures. - One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. - The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. Deactivation Procedure WARNING: If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed. The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. NOTE: - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. - After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the affected front seat. 9. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag floor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 11. Disconnect (if necessary) attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical connector. 12. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6154 Reactivation Procedure 1. WARNING: The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 4. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 5. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector. 6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 7. Install the affected front seat. 8. Connect the drive and passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connectors. 9. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver and passenger side air bag module electrical connectors. 10. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. Reconnect the electrical connector. 11. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 12. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 14. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure Seats Not Removed DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION PROCEDURES There are two deactivation and reactivation procedures. - One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. - The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. Deactivation Procedure WARNING: If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed. The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6155 non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. NOTE: - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. - After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position. 2. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the front seat. 10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable. Reactivation Procedure 1. WARNING: The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. Reconnect the electrical connector. 4. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6156 7. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 9. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6157 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist AIR BAG RECONNECT CHECKLIST The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system concern: 1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3. Restraints control module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors connected? 5. All sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected? Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6158 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure PROVE OUT PROCEDURE Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the restraints control module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Specifications Steering Gear: Specifications Power Steering Gear Turning effort ....................................................................................................................................... .................................................... 30 Nm (6.75 lb) Steering gear mounting bolts ............................................................................................................... ................................................... 126 Nm (93 ft. lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Gear Steering Gear: Service and Repair Steering Gear Steering Gear Special Tools Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. NOTE: 2.0L Zetec shown; 3.0L (4V) similar. Remove the rear transaxle insulator. 1 Remove the bolts and nuts. 2 Remove the rear transaxle insulator. Vehicles equipped with automatic transmission 2. Remove the bolts and the rear transaxle insulator bracket. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Gear > Page 6164 All vehicles 3. Remove the power steering pressure and return line bracket bolts. 4. Remove the front wheels. Vehicles equipped with manual transmission 5. Remove the bolts and the rear transaxle insulator bracket. All vehicles 6. NOTE: LH side shown; RH similar. Remove the tie rod end nut. 1 Remove the cotter pin. 2 Remove the nut. 7. NOTE: LH side shown; RH similar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Gear > Page 6165 Using the special tool, separate the tie rod end from the knuckle. 8. NOTE: Record the number of turns required to remove the tie rod end. Remove the tie rod ends and the tie rod end jam nuts. 9. Remove the steering gear coupling pinch bolt. 1 Slide the boot up. 2 Remove the steering gear coupling pinch bolt. 10. NOTE: Drain the excess power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan. NOTE: Do not drop the O-ring seals. Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines. 1 Remove the bolt. 2 Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines. 11. Lower the vehicle on the hoist. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Gear > Page 6166 12. Remove the steering shaft. 13. Remove the steering shaft boot. 1 Remove the nuts. 2 Remove the steering shaft boot. 14. NOTE: LH shown; RH similar. Remove the two steering gear mounting bolts. 15. Raise the vehicle on the hoist. NOTE: With the mounting bolts removed, slide the gear forward to separate the steering coupling from the steering gear shaft. Remove the steering gear. Installation All vehicles 1. NOTE: With the mounting bolts removed, slide the gear rearward to connect the steering coupling to the steering gear shaft. Position the steering gear in the vehicle. 2. Lower the hoist. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Gear > Page 6167 3. Install the two steering gear mounting bolts. 4. Install the steering shaft boot. 5. Install the steering shaft. 6. Install the power steering pressure and return line bracket bolts. 7. Raise the vehicle on the hoist. 8. NOTE: Make sure the O-ring seals are on the power steering pressure and return lines. Connect the power steering pressure and return lines to the steering gear and install the bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Gear > Page 6168 9. Install the steering gear coupling pinch bolt and slide the boot down. 10. Thread the tie rod end jam nuts onto the front wheel spindle tie rods. 11. NOTE: Use the numbers recorded from removal to install the tie rod ends. Thread the tie rod ends onto the front wheel spindle tie rods. 12. Tighten the tie rod end jam nuts. 13. NOTE: LH side shown; RH similar. Connect the tie rod end to the knuckle. 1 Install the nut. 2 Install the cotter pin. Vehicles equipped with manual transmission Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Gear > Page 6169 14. Install the rear transaxle insulator bracket and the bolts. All vehicles 15. Install the front wheels. Vehicles equipped with automatic transmission 16. Install the rear transaxle insulator bracket and the bolts. All vehicles 17. NOTE: 2.0L Zetec shown; 3.0L (4V) similar. Install the rear transaxle insulator. 18. Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system. 19. Align the front wheels to specifications. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Gear > Page 6170 Steering Gear: Service and Repair Steering Gear Boot Steering Gear Boot Removal and Installation 1. Position the steering gear boot cover aside. 2. NOTE: The nut cannot be reused. Install a new nut. Disconnect the steering column shaft from the flexible coupling. 1 Remove and discard the nut. 2 Disconnect the steering column shaft from the flexible coupling. 3. Remove the steering gear boot. 1 Remove the nuts. 2 Remove the steering gear boot. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose Steering Wheel: Customer Interest Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose TSB 07-4-3 03/05/07 LEATHER - WRAPPED STEERING WHEEL - LEATHER COMING LOOSE FORD: 2000-2005 Thunderbird 2000-2007 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2008 F-Super Duty 2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, Ranger 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2008 Escape 2004-2007 F-150, Freestar 2005-2008 Escape Hybrid 2007 Edge 2004-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 2000-2002 Continental 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2000-2007 Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 2000-2007 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT 2007 MKX MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 2000-2007 Mountaineer 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2008 Mariner 2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 04-24-3 to update the vehicle model years. ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with leather-wrapped steering wheels may exhibit the leather coming loose from the spoke area. ACTION Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive to re-adhere the loose leather to the wheel spoke. Refer to the following Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE IF RE-ADHERING LEATHER TO THE FRONT SIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL ONLY, OMIT STEPS 1 AND 6. STEERING WHEEL/AIR BAG ASSEMBLY REMOVAL IS NECESSARY ONLY WHEN REPAIRING LOOSE LEATHER ON THE BACKSIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL. CAUTION AVOID SKIN CONTACT WITH MOTORCRAFT INSTANT GEL ADHESIVE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose > Page 6179 1. Remove the steering wheel (ONLY NECESSARY TO REPAIR BACKSIDE OF STEERING WHEEL). Refer to Workshop Manual Sections 211-04 and 501-20B. 2. Fold loose leather out of the way. 3. Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive evenly over the wheel spoke. 4. Fold the leather back into its original position. 5. Smooth the leather tuck in for neat appearance, and apply pressure until the leather is bonded to the wheel spoke (apply pressure for at least 30 seconds). NOTE THE ADHESIVE SHOULD BE COMPLETELY SET AFTER 5 MINUTES. DO NOT PULL ON THE REPAIR AREA. 6. Reinstall steering wheel. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT070403 Use SLIS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3600 33 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose Steering Wheel: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose TSB 07-4-3 03/05/07 LEATHER - WRAPPED STEERING WHEEL - LEATHER COMING LOOSE FORD: 2000-2005 Thunderbird 2000-2007 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2008 F-Super Duty 2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, Ranger 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2008 Escape 2004-2007 F-150, Freestar 2005-2008 Escape Hybrid 2007 Edge 2004-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 2000-2002 Continental 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2000-2007 Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 2000-2007 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT 2007 MKX MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 2000-2007 Mountaineer 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2008 Mariner 2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 04-24-3 to update the vehicle model years. ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with leather-wrapped steering wheels may exhibit the leather coming loose from the spoke area. ACTION Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive to re-adhere the loose leather to the wheel spoke. Refer to the following Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE IF RE-ADHERING LEATHER TO THE FRONT SIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL ONLY, OMIT STEPS 1 AND 6. STEERING WHEEL/AIR BAG ASSEMBLY REMOVAL IS NECESSARY ONLY WHEN REPAIRING LOOSE LEATHER ON THE BACKSIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL. CAUTION AVOID SKIN CONTACT WITH MOTORCRAFT INSTANT GEL ADHESIVE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose > Page 6185 1. Remove the steering wheel (ONLY NECESSARY TO REPAIR BACKSIDE OF STEERING WHEEL). Refer to Workshop Manual Sections 211-04 and 501-20B. 2. Fold loose leather out of the way. 3. Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive evenly over the wheel spoke. 4. Fold the leather back into its original position. 5. Smooth the leather tuck in for neat appearance, and apply pressure until the leather is bonded to the wheel spoke (apply pressure for at least 30 seconds). NOTE THE ADHESIVE SHOULD BE COMPLETELY SET AFTER 5 MINUTES. DO NOT PULL ON THE REPAIR AREA. 6. Reinstall steering wheel. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT070403 Use SLIS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3600 33 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6186 Steering Wheel: Service and Repair Removal 1. Position the front seats rearward. 2. Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). See: Steering Column/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Air Bag Disarming and Arming/Depowering and Repowering Procedure 3. Lower the steering wheel air bag connector access cover. 4. Turn the pinion shaft to release the steering wheel from the column shaft. 5. Remove the steering wheel. - Position the steering wheel rearward. - Disconnect the electrical connector. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6187 1. Install the steering wheel. - Connect the electrical connector. - Position the steering wheel onto the steering column shaft. 2. Tighten the pinion shaft. 3. Close the steering wheel air bag connector access cover. 4. Repower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). See: Steering Column/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Air Bag Disarming and Arming/Depowering and Repowering Procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Tie Rod End Inspection Procedures Tie Rod End: Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Tie Rod End Inspection Procedures Article No. 03-15-13 08/04/03 STEERING - TIE ROD END INSPECTION PROCEDURE FORD: 1997-2002 EXPEDITION 1997-2003 F-150 2001-2004 ESCAPE LINCOLN: 1998-2002 NAVIGATOR 2002-2003 BLACKWOOD This article supersedes 03-9-9 to update the vehicle models covered. ISSUE This article is to be used as an updated procedure for inspecting tie rod end wear. ACTION This procedure is designed to supplement the Workshop Manual, as it provides a more detailed tie rod end inspection procedure. SERVICE INFORMATION NOTE FOR ESCAPE VEHICLES, THIS TIE ROD END INSPECTION PROCEDURE SHOULD ONLY BE COMPLETED ON THE OUTER TIE RODS. FOR ESCAPE INNER TIE ROD INSPECTION PROCEDURES, REFER TO WORKSHOP MANUAL SECTION 211-00. Step 1 - Free Play: Check the outer tie rod ends by grasping by hand and push up and down. Check the inner tie rod ends, pushing them front to rear. If any free play is observed in a joint, it is worn and should be replaced. Step 2 - Stud Lash - Free Play: While vehicle is on the ground or on a drive-on hoist, have an assistant rotate the steering wheel rapidly back and forth from 10 o'clock to 2 o'clock to 10 o'clock while observing the inner and outer tie rods. If the outer tie rod ends have any vertical movement or the inner tie rod ends have any horizontal movement, the tie rod end with the observed movement should be replaced. Step 3 - Seal Inspection: Raise the vehicle on a hoist and remove the front wheels. The wheels will need to be turned to the right in order to inspect the passenger side inner tie rod end and to the left to inspect the drivers side inner tie rod end. Inspect all four seals for tears, perforations and wear. If there is any indication of wear or perforations on the seal, that tie rod end should be replaced. Step 4 - Stud Corrosion: For Escape Vehicles - If Squeak is noticed during Step 2, disconnect tie rod from knuckle and articulate stud in socket. If squeak is verified, replace part. While pushing down on seal, at stud end, if corrosion present at contact point at base of stud, replace part. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Tie Rod End Inspection Procedures > Page 6193 For All Other Vehicles Covered In This Article: Using a wrench, rotate the tie rod end so that the front of the seal on the outer tie rod end is expanded (Figure 1). Using a puffy knife or other hard, flat, dull object, lift the bottom of the seal up, exposing the stud (Figure 2). If any water escapes from the seal in the form of bubbles or in a liquid form, that tie rod end should be replaced. Closely examine the stud for signs of corrosion, especially around the interface with the knuckle. A rag might be needed to clean off any grease on the stud that impairs a good visual inspection. If there is any sign of corrosion, that tie rod end should be replaced. Rotate the tie rod end in the opposite direction to expand the inner tie rod seal. Repeat the inspection procedure used on the outer tie rod. Repeat this entire procedure on the other side of the vehicle. If there is sign of corrosion, that tie rod end should be replaced. NOTE IF ANY TIE ROD ENDS ARE REMOVED, INSPECT THE SEAL AND THE STUD AGAIN NOTING ANY DIFFERENCES IN VISUAL PERCEPTIONS FROM WHEN THE PART WAS ON THE VEHICLE. CHECKING THE STUD AFTER REMOVAL HELPS IMPROVE CONSCIOUSNESS OF ISSUES WHEN INSPECTING PARTS ON VEHICLE. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 03-9-9 WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Tie Rod End Inspection Procedures > Page 6194 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6195 Tie Rod End: Specifications Tie rod end lain nuts ............................................................................................................................ ..................................................... 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs.) Tie rod end nut ................................................. ........................................................................................................................................ 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs.) Tie rod end castellated ................................................................................................................ .............................................................. 50 Nm (17 ft. lbs.) Tie rod end jam nut ................................. .................................................................................................................................................. 45 Nm (33 ft. lbs.) Inner tie rod end ................................................................................................................ ...................................................................... 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inner Tie Rod End: Service and Repair Inner Tie Rod End-Inner Removal 1. Remove the steering gear. 2. NOTE: RH side shown; LH side similar. NOTE: It is necessary to remove both steering gear boots when removing the RH inner lie rod end. Remove the boot clamps and the steering gear boot. 3. NOTE: LH side shown; RH side similar. Using a suitable tool, hold the piston shaft. 4. NOTE: RH side shown; LH side similar. Using a suitable tool, remove the inner tie rod end. 5. NOTE: Using a suitable tool, hold the piston shaft while tightening. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inner > Page 6198 Tie Rod End: Service and Repair Outer Tie Rod End-Outer Special Tools Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation 1. Turn the ignition switch to the unlock position. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the castellated nut. 1 Remove the cotter pin. 2 Remove the castellated nut. 4. Loosen the tie rod end jam nut. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Service and Repair > Inner > Page 6199 5. Using the special tool, separate the tie rod end 6. Remove the tie rod end. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Adjust the front toe. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications Ball Joint: Specifications Front Lower Balljoint Measurement .................................................................................................................................................. Between lower control arm and knuckle Deflection ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................... 0-0.008 in (0-0.2mm) Reference Diagram ............................................................................................................................. ............................................................................. D Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ball Joint Inspection Ball Joint: Testing and Inspection Ball Joint Inspection Ball Joint Inspection 1. Prior to inspecting the ball joints for wear, inspect the wheel bearings. 2. NOTE: In order to obtain accurate measurements, the suspension must be in full rebound with the weight of the vehicle supported by the frame. Raise and support the vehicle by the frame to allow the wheels to hang in the rebound position. 3. Inspect the ball joint and ball joint boot for damage. ^ If the ball Joint or ball Joint boot is damaged, install a new ball joint as necessary. 4. CAUTION: Do not use any tools or equipment to move the wheel and tire assembly or suspension components while checking for relative movement. Suspension damage can occur. The use of tools or equipment will also create relative movement that may not exist when using hand force. Relative movement must be measured using hand force only. ^ Inspect the ball joint for relative movement by alternately pulling downward and pushing upward on the lower control arm by hand. Note any relative vertical movement between the wheel knuckle and lower arm at the lower ball joint. ^ If relative movement is not felt or seen, the ball Joint is OK. Do not install a new ball joint. ^ If relative movement is found, continue with Step 5. 5. NOTE: In order to obtain an accurate measurement, the dial indicator should be aligned as close as possible with the vertical axis (center line) of the ball joint. To measure ball joint deflection, attach a suitable dial indicator with a flexible arm between the lower control arm and the wheel knuckle or ball joint stud. 6. Measure the ball joint deflection while an assistant pushes up and pulls down on the lower control arm, by hand. ^ If the deflection exceeds the specification, a new ball joint must be installed. ^ If the deflection meets the specification, no further action is required. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Ball Joint Inspection > Page 6206 Ball Joint: Testing and Inspection Front Suspension Balljoint Inspection Job Aid Front Lower Balljoint Measurement .................................................................................................................................................. Between lower control arm and knuckle Deflection ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................... 0-0.008 in (0-0.2mm) Reference Diagram ............................................................................................................................. ............................................................................. D Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection Control Arm Bushing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection TSB 09-5-1 03/23/09 LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING INSPECTION PROCEDURE FORD: 2001-2009 Escape 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid ISSUE Many states and Canadian provinces require annual safety inspections which include the evaluation of suspension components. The information in this procedure is intended to assist the technician performing the inspection with specific criteria for 2001-2009 Escape and Mariner lower control arm (LCA) bushings and will prevent the unnecessary replacement of good components. ACTION Inspect according to the procedure below. INSPECTION PROCEDURE The LCA bushing is located at the rear of the front suspension lower control arm. The bushing is identified as number 1 of Figure 1. The control arm is mounted in the front subframe with bolts number 2 and number 3. The bushing is part of the LCA and cannot be serviced separately from the arm. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection > Page 6212 Figure 2 - Shows a new bushing prior to assembly into the control arm. Bolt number 2 passes through the inner sleeve and the outer sleeve is pressed into the control arm. The rubber bushing is bonded to both the inner and outer sleeves. Figure 3 - Illustrates a generic bushing showing minor sur[ace cracks that do not adversely affect the performance of the bushing. Bushings exhibiting sur[ace cracks with a depth less than 3/8" (10 mm) are acceptable and will continue to function normally. These do not require replacement. Figure 4 - Illustrates a partial separation between the rubber and the outer sleeve. The bushing may show signs of movement on the rubber surface, making the surface shiny. Bushings with a separation or crack depth less than or equal to 3/8" (10 mm) are acceptable and meet all functional requirements. These do not require replacement. Bushings with a separation or crack greater than 3/8" (10 mm) in depth should be replaced. The customer may hear a bang or clunk in the front suspension if there is enough separation for the arm to contact the subframe. This does not affect the retention of the control arm to the vehicle as the bushing is sandwiched in the subframe and held in place with the bolt. The vehicle can be safely operated in this condition until the bushing is replaced. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection > Page 6213 WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair Rear Knuckle: Service and Repair Wheel Knuckle-2WD Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6217 Special Tool(s) Removal All vehicles NOTE: When a new wheel knuckle is installed a new wheel bearing must also be installed. 1. Remove the brake shoes. 2. NOTE: If equipped, remove ABS sensor ring. Remove the wheel hub nut. 3. Using the special tools, remove the wheel hub. 4. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle, after removing the wheel hub. Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6218 5. Remove the snap ring. Vehicles with ABS 6. Position the anti-lock brake sensor (ABS) aside. 1. Remove the ABS sensor bolt and bracket bolts. 2. Position the ABS sensor aside. All vehicles 7. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the brake backing plate. ^ Remove the parking brake cable bolt from the wheel knuckle. 8. Disconnect the brake line from the wheel cylinder. ^ Remove the brake line bracket bolt. 9. Support the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6219 10. Remove the lower shock absorber nut. 11. NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the nut. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle. 1. Remove the nut. 2. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle. 12. NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the nut. Separate the upper ball joint from the wheel knuckle. 1. Remove the nut. 2. Separate the upper ball joint from the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6220 13. NOTE: Note the position of the spring insulator and spring for installation. Remove the spring. ^ Lower the support to the wheel knuckle. 14. Remove the wheel knuckle cam bolt. 1. Mark the position of the adjustment cam notch. 2. Remove the wheel knuckle cam bolt and nut. 15. Remove the wheel knuckle. 1. Remove the wheel knuckle cam. 2. Remove the wheel knuckle. 16. Remove the brake backing plate from the wheel knuckle. 1. Remove the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6221 2. Remove the brake backing plate from the wheel knuckle. Installation All vehicles 1. Using the special tools, install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the snap ring into the wheel knuckle. 3. Position the brake backing plate to the wheel knuckle and install the bolts. 4. Using the wheel hub washer and the special tool, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6222 5. NOTE: If equipped, install the ABS sensor ring. Install the wheel hub nut. 6. Position the wheel knuckle and install the wheel knuckle cam. 7. Install the wheel knuckle cam bolt and nut loosely. 8. Support the wheel knuckle and install the spring. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6223 9. Install the lower shock absorber nut. 10. Position the upper ball joint and install the nut. 11. Position the lower ball joint and install the nut. 12. Tighten the wheel knuckle cam bolt and nut. 1. Align the wheel knuckle cam. 2. Tighten the wheel knuckle cam bolt and nut. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6224 13. Connect the brake line to the wheel cylinder. ^ Install the brake line bracket bolt. 14. Install the parking brake cable through the brake backing plate. 1. Install the bolt. 2. Install the parking brake cable. Vehicles with ABS 15. Position the ABS sensor and bracket bolts. ^ Install the bolts. All vehicles 16. Install the brake shoes. 17. Bleed the brake system. 18. Check and adjust the wheel alignment as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair Stabilizer Bar Link Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Remove the stabilizer bar link. 1. Remove the upper and lower stabilizer bar link nuts. 2. Remove the stabilizer bar link. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6238 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6239 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6245 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6246 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6247 Front Subframe: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6248 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6249 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6250 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6251 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6252 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6253 Front Subframe: Service and Repair SUBFRAME - FRONT Special Tool(S) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Remove the rear transmission mount nuts and bolt. 3. Using the special tool, support the engine. 4. Remove the 2 front wheel and tire assemblies. 5. Remove the 2 engine air deflectors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6254 6. Remove the 2 lower control arm ball joint pinch bolts and nuts (1 on each side). 7. Disconnect the stabilizer bar link. 1 Remove the nuts. 2 Disconnect the link from the stabilizer bar. 8. Remove the lateral support crossmember. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the crossmember. 9. Remove the front transmission mount bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6255 10. Remove the engine support crossmember bolts. 11. Remove the nut and the engine support crossmember. 12. Remove the 2 steering gear bolts. 13. Position the steering gear out of the subframe mounts. 14. Remove the dual converter Y-pipe on the 3.0L (4V) engine or the muffler inlet pipe on the 2.0L (Zetec) engine. Vehicles with manual transmission Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6256 15. Remove the 2 bolts and disconnect the manual transmission shift linkage. Vehicles with 4WD 16. Remove the driveshaft. 17. NOTE: Lower the rear of the engine to allow the subframe to clear the companion flange on the transfer case. Lower the rear of the engine approximately 150 mm (6 in). All vehicles 18. CAUTION: Do not allow the rear subframe bolts to come out of the lower control arm bushing. Completely loosen the 2 front subframe bolts, but do not remove them. 19. NOTE: The lower control arm ball joints must be disconnected from the spindles at the same time the subframe is lowered. With an assistant, remove the 2 subframe nuts lower the subframe from the vehicle. 20. Transfer all necessary components. 21. CAUTION: When installing the subframe bolts, make sure that both of the subframe rear bolts are fully engaged in the cage nuts before tightening to specification. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6265 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6266 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6272 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6273 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6274 Front Subframe Mount: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6275 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6276 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6277 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6278 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6279 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6288 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6289 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6295 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6296 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6297 Rear Subframe: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6298 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6299 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6300 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6301 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6302 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6303 Rear Subframe: Service and Repair SUBFRAME - REAR Removal Vehicles with 4WD 1. Remove the rear axle assembly. All vehicles 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Remove the 4 bolts and position the rear control arm aside. 4. Disconnect the exhaust hanger from the subframe. 5. With an assistant, remove the 4 bolts and rear subframe. Installation All vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6304 1. With an assistant, position the rear subframe and loosely install the bolts. 2. With a 19 mm (0.76 in) rod, align the rear subframe with the alignment holes. 3. Tighten the rear subframe bolts. 4. Connect the exhaust hanger on the subframe. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6305 5. Position the four rear control arms in the subframe. - Loosely install the bolts. Vehicles with 4WD 6. Install the rear axle assembly. All vehicles 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. NOTE: The vehicles must be at ride height before tightening the bolts. Tighten the 4 control arms bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6314 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6315 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6321 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6322 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6323 Rear Subframe Mount: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6324 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6325 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6326 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6327 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6328 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Spring Removal and Installation NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. NOTE: After removing the wheel, finger-tighten one lug nut to retain the drum if the drum retainers have been removed. All vehicles 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Disconnect the brake line from the wheel cylinder. ^ Remove the brake line bracket bolt. Vehicles with ABS 3. Position the anti-lock brake (ABS) sensor aside. 1. Remove the ABS sensor bolt and bracket bolts. 2. Position the ABS sensor aside. All vehicles 4. Support the rear wheel knuckle. 5. Remove the upper arm bolt. ^ Loosen the lower arm bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6332 6. Remove the lower shock nut and position aside. 7. NOTE: Note the position of the spring insulator and spring for installation. Remove the spring. ^ Lower the support to the wheel knuckle. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the brake system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Customer Interest Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises TSB 09-6-5 04/06/09 NOISE - FRONT STRUT AREA FORD: 2001-2009 Escape 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid ISSUE Some 2001-2009 Escape, 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a pop, rub, grunt, squeak, and/or creak noise from the front strut area during slow, lock-to-lock turns such as parking maneuvers. Vehicles built on or before 1/13/2009 may also exhibit a clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise from the front strut area while driving over a series of bumps and/or rough roads. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Using chassis ears on the front strut mounts is pop, rub, grunt, squeak, creak, clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise present from the front strut area during slow parking lot type maneuvers? a. No - Procedure does not apply, proceed with normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00 diagnostics. b. Yes on turns - Boot may be binding, go to Step 2 Dust Boot Greasing Procedure. c. Yes over bumps (built on or before 1/13/2009) - Go to Step 3 Dust Boot Replacement Procedure and install new dust boot designed for this concern. d. Yes over bumps (built after 1/13/09) - Procedure does not apply. Proceed with normal WSM, Section 204-00 diagnostics. 2. Dust Boot Greasing Procedure. a. Raise the vehicle per WSM, Section 100-02. b. Reach through the spring and pull the strut dust boot and jounce bumper assembly straight down, out of the upper spring seat. c. Apply Motorcraft(R) Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1) (1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around the rod. (2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust cover. d. Raise dust cover so that jounce bumper is accessible and apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself. e. Slide the dust cover and jounce bumper upward into its original location on the strut. f. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle. 3. Dust Boot Replacement Procedure (vehicles built on/before 1/13/2009). a. Remove front strut per WSM, Section 204-01. b. Disassemble front strut and replace dust boot with latest level part per WSM, Section 204-01. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 6341 C. Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1) (1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around the rod. (2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust boot. (3) Apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself. d. Assemble front strut and install per WSM, Section 204-01. e. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090605A 2001-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A) 090605B 2001-2009 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Strut Dust Boots, Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test Can Be Claimed With Operations C And D (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A) 090605C 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber and, Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And D (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090605D 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Correct Caster, Camber And Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 6342 Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18A179 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises TSB 09-6-5 04/06/09 NOISE - FRONT STRUT AREA FORD: 2001-2009 Escape 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid ISSUE Some 2001-2009 Escape, 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a pop, rub, grunt, squeak, and/or creak noise from the front strut area during slow, lock-to-lock turns such as parking maneuvers. Vehicles built on or before 1/13/2009 may also exhibit a clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise from the front strut area while driving over a series of bumps and/or rough roads. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Using chassis ears on the front strut mounts is pop, rub, grunt, squeak, creak, clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise present from the front strut area during slow parking lot type maneuvers? a. No - Procedure does not apply, proceed with normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00 diagnostics. b. Yes on turns - Boot may be binding, go to Step 2 Dust Boot Greasing Procedure. c. Yes over bumps (built on or before 1/13/2009) - Go to Step 3 Dust Boot Replacement Procedure and install new dust boot designed for this concern. d. Yes over bumps (built after 1/13/09) - Procedure does not apply. Proceed with normal WSM, Section 204-00 diagnostics. 2. Dust Boot Greasing Procedure. a. Raise the vehicle per WSM, Section 100-02. b. Reach through the spring and pull the strut dust boot and jounce bumper assembly straight down, out of the upper spring seat. c. Apply Motorcraft(R) Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1) (1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around the rod. (2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust cover. d. Raise dust cover so that jounce bumper is accessible and apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself. e. Slide the dust cover and jounce bumper upward into its original location on the strut. f. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle. 3. Dust Boot Replacement Procedure (vehicles built on/before 1/13/2009). a. Remove front strut per WSM, Section 204-01. b. Disassemble front strut and replace dust boot with latest level part per WSM, Section 204-01. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 6348 C. Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1) (1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around the rod. (2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust boot. (3) Apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself. d. Assemble front strut and install per WSM, Section 204-01. e. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090605A 2001-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A) 090605B 2001-2009 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Strut Dust Boots, Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test Can Be Claimed With Operations C And D (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A) 090605C 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber and, Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And D (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090605D 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Correct Caster, Camber And Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 6349 Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18A179 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Strut and Spring Assembly Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Unclip the brake hose from the bracket. Vehicles with ABS 3. Disconnect the anti-lock brake harness from the strut and spring assembly. 1. Remove the bolt. 2. Position the bracket aside. All vehicles 4. Position the stabilizer bar link aside. 1. Remove the upper stabilizer bar link nut. 2. Position the stabilizer bar link aside. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6352 5. Remove the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts and nuts. 6. Mark the bearing plate outer studs. Marking the studs will aid in the installation in restoring the caster/camber to its original settings. 7. NOTE: Support the strut and spring assembly when removing upper nuts. Remove the strut and spring assembly. ^ Remove the nuts. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Align the front wheels to specifications. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6353 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly Strut and Spring Assembly Disassembly and Assembly 1. Remove the strut and spring assembly. 2. WARNING: Always wear safety goggles when using a spring compressor. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Mount the assembly in a suitable holding fixture and use a suitable spring compressor to compress the front coil spring. 3. Remove the strut piston rod nut. 4. Disassemble the strut and spring assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6354 1. Remove the metal sheet plate. 2. Remove the upper strut mount. 3. Remove the thrust bearing plate. 4. Remove the thrust bearing. 5. Remove the upper spring seat. 6. Remove the upper spring seat isolator. 7. Remove the spring. 8. Remove the dust boot. 9. Remove the rubber bump stopper. 10. Remove the lower spring seat. 5. NOTE: New fasteners must be used when old fasteners are loosened and/or removed. NOTE: Make sure that an alignment procedure is carried out any time the strut and spring assembly or the front shock absorber mounting bracket bolts are loosened. NOTE: Be sure the spring is correctly seated in the insulator. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6355 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Shock Absorber Shock Absorber Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear quarter trim panel. 2. Remove the upper shock absorber nut. 3. Raise and support the vehicle enough to relax the suspension system. 4. Remove the shock absorber. ^ Remove the lower shock absorber nut. ^ Reprove the shock absorber. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearing Inspection NOTE: The wheel bearings are not adjustable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Wheel Bearing Part 1 Of 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6361 Part 2 Of 2 Special Tool(s) Removal NOTE: Install a new wheel bearing when the wheel hub is removed. All vehicles 1. Remove the brake disc. 2. Remove the wheel hub nut. 3. Remove the tie rod end nut. 1. Remove the cotter pin. 2. Remove the nut. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6362 4. Using the special tool, separate the tie rod end from the knuckle. Vehicles with ABS 5. Remove the bolt and position the anti-lock brake sensor aside. All vehicles 6. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle. 1. Remove the pinch bolt and nut. 2. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle. 7. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the wheel knuckle. ^ Position the halfshaft aside and support. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6363 8. Remove the wheel knuckle. 1. Remove the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts and nuts. 2. Remove the wheel knuckle. 9. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing and knuckle. 10. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle, after removing the wheel hub. Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 11. Remove the snap ring. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6364 12. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle. NOTE: The brake disc shield is pressed on. 13. If necessary, remove the brake disc shield. Installation All vehicles 1. If necessary, install a disc brake shield. 2. NOTE: Special Tool 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle. Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6365 3. Install the snap ring. 4. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. 5. Install the wheel knuckle. 1. Position the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts and nuts. 6. Using the special tool, insert the halfshaft into the wheel hub. 7. Position and align the ball joint stud into the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6366 8. Install the ball joint pinch bolt and nut into the wheel knuckle. Vehicles with ABS 9. Install the anti-lock brake sensor and tighten the bolt. All vehicles 10. Install the tie rod end into the wheel knuckle. 1. Install the tie rod end nut. 2. Install a new cotter pin. 11. Install the wheel hub nut. 12. Install the brake disc. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6367 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Bearing-2WD Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6368 Special Tool(s) Removal 1. Remove the brake drum. 2. NOTE: If equipped, remove the ABS sensor ring. Remove the wheel hub nut. 3. Using the special tools, remove the wheel hub. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6369 4. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle, after removing the wheel hub. Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 5. Remove the snap ring. 6. Using the special tools, remove the wheel bearing outer race from the wheel knuckle. Installation 1. Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6370 2. Install the snap ring. 3. Using the special tools, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. 4. NOTE: If equipped, install the ABS sensor ring. Install the wheel hub nut. 5. Install the brake drum. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Wheel hub nut ..................................................................................................................................... .................................................. 290 Nm (214 ft. lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation JACKING WARNING: - Do not run the engine when jacking the vehicle. The wheels contacting the ground could cause the vehicle to move. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Make sure the jack and jack stands are correctly located to prevent the vehicle from falling. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Wheel chocks should be used to prevent the vehicle from rolling and falling off the jack. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: The service jack provided with the vehicle is only intended to be used in an emergency for changing a deflated tire. Never use the service jack to hoist the vehicle for any other service. Refer to the Owner Guide when using the jack supplied with the vehicle. Jacking Points - Front Jacking Points - Front 1. The front jacking point is at the bolt head of the lower control arm. Jacking Points - Rear Jacking Points - Rear 1. The rear jacking points are located on the rear trailing arms. LIFTING Lifting Points Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6379 Lifting Points 1. CAUTION: Damage to the suspension, exhaust or steering linkage components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters prior to lifting the vehicle. The lifting points are part of the uni-body structure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > System Information > Description and Operation Tire Monitoring System: Description and Operation Ford provides no information regarding a Tire Pressure Monitoring System for this vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and Repair Wheels: Service and Repair Wheel Leaks 1. Pinhole leaks in cast aluminum wheels compromise the wheel integrity. Install a new wheel. Straightening Wheels, Rims or Components 1. NOTE: Do not heat wheels in an attempt to soften them for straightening to repair damage. The special alloy used in these wheels is heat-treated. Uncontrolled heating from welding affects the properties of the material. Do not weld the wheels for any reason. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearing Inspection NOTE: The wheel bearings are not adjustable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Wheel Bearing Part 1 Of 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6391 Part 2 Of 2 Special Tool(s) Removal NOTE: Install a new wheel bearing when the wheel hub is removed. All vehicles 1. Remove the brake disc. 2. Remove the wheel hub nut. 3. Remove the tie rod end nut. 1. Remove the cotter pin. 2. Remove the nut. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6392 4. Using the special tool, separate the tie rod end from the knuckle. Vehicles with ABS 5. Remove the bolt and position the anti-lock brake sensor aside. All vehicles 6. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle. 1. Remove the pinch bolt and nut. 2. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle. 7. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the wheel knuckle. ^ Position the halfshaft aside and support. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6393 8. Remove the wheel knuckle. 1. Remove the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts and nuts. 2. Remove the wheel knuckle. 9. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing and knuckle. 10. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle, after removing the wheel hub. Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 11. Remove the snap ring. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6394 12. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle. NOTE: The brake disc shield is pressed on. 13. If necessary, remove the brake disc shield. Installation All vehicles 1. If necessary, install a disc brake shield. 2. NOTE: Special Tool 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle. Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6395 3. Install the snap ring. 4. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. 5. Install the wheel knuckle. 1. Position the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts and nuts. 6. Using the special tool, insert the halfshaft into the wheel hub. 7. Position and align the ball joint stud into the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6396 8. Install the ball joint pinch bolt and nut into the wheel knuckle. Vehicles with ABS 9. Install the anti-lock brake sensor and tighten the bolt. All vehicles 10. Install the tie rod end into the wheel knuckle. 1. Install the tie rod end nut. 2. Install a new cotter pin. 11. Install the wheel hub nut. 12. Install the brake disc. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6397 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Bearing-2WD Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6398 Special Tool(s) Removal 1. Remove the brake drum. 2. NOTE: If equipped, remove the ABS sensor ring. Remove the wheel hub nut. 3. Using the special tools, remove the wheel hub. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6399 4. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle, after removing the wheel hub. Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 5. Remove the snap ring. 6. Using the special tools, remove the wheel bearing outer race from the wheel knuckle. Installation 1. Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6400 2. Install the snap ring. 3. Using the special tools, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. 4. NOTE: If equipped, install the ABS sensor ring. Install the wheel hub nut. 5. Install the brake drum. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Wheel hub nut ..................................................................................................................................... .................................................. 290 Nm (214 ft. lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Fastener: Specifications Wheel nuts (all wheels) ....................................................................................................................... .................................................... 133 Nm (98 ft. lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front Wheel Studs Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front wheel bearing. 2. Press out the wheel studs. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6410 Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Studs Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel bearing. 2. Press out the wheel studs. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Accumulator HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation Accumulator HVAC: Description and Operation SUCTION ACCUMULATOR NOTE: Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the suction accumulator. The suction accumulator is mounted to the A/C accumulator bracket. The inlet tube of the suction accumulator is connected to the A/C evaporator outlet tube. The outlet tube is connected to the A/C manifold and tube assembly. After entering the inlet of the suction accumulator, heavier oil-laden refrigerant contacts an internally mounted dome (which serves as an umbrella) and drips down onto the bottom of the canister. - A small diameter oil bleed hole, in the bottom of the vapor return tube, allows the accumulated heavier liquid refrigerant and oil mixture to re-enter the compressor suction line at a controlled rate. - As the heavier mixture passes through the small diameter liquid bleed hole, it has a second chance to vaporize and recirculate through the A/C compressor without causing compressor damage due to slugging. - A fine mesh screened filter fits tightly around the bottom of the vapor return tube to filter out refrigerant system contaminant particles. - A desiccant bag is mounted inside the canister to absorb any moisture which may be in the refrigerant system. - A fitting located on the top of the suction accumulator is used to attach the A/C cycling switch. A long-travel Schrader-type valve stem core is installed in the fitting so that the A/C cycling switch can be removed without discharging the A/C system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Accumulator HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6415 Accumulator HVAC: Service and Repair SUCTION ACCUMULATOR REMOVAL 1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the A/C cycling switch. 3. Remove the nuts from the A/C manifold and tube mounting bracket. 4. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture. Disconnect the A/C manifold and tube from the suction accumulator. 5. Remove the two suction accumulator mounting bracket nuts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Accumulator HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6416 6. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture. Disconnect the suction line from the A/C evaporator core. 7. Remove the suction accumulator. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the new suction accumulator with the correct amount of PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Vacuum Control Motor - Defrost Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Vacuum Control Motor - Defrost VACUUM CONTROL MOTOR - DEFROST REMOVAL 1. Remove the vacuum control motor. 1 Disconnect the vacuum line. 2 Remove the two screws. 3 Disconnect the vacuum control motor from the door lever. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Vacuum Control Motor - Defrost > Page 6422 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Vacuum Control Motor - Panel Vent VACUUM CONTROL MOTOR - PANEL VENT REMOVAL 1. Remove the vacuum control motor. 1 Disconnect the vacuum line. 2 Remove the two screws. 3 Disconnect the vacuum control motor from the door lever. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Vacuum Control Motor - Defrost > Page 6423 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Vacuum Control Motor - Footwell Vent VACUUM CONTROL MOTOR - FOOTWELL VENT REMOVAL 1. Remove the vacuum control motor. 1 Disconnect the vacuum line. 2 Remove the two screws. 3 Disconnect the vacuum control motor from the door lever. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Vacuum Control Motor - Defrost > Page 6424 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Vacuum Control Motor - Outside Air Inlet VACUUM CONTROL MOTOR - OUTSIDE AIR INLET REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to: Body and Frame, Interior Moulding/Trim, Dashboard/Instrument Panel, Service and Repair, Instrument Panel, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation 2. Remove the vacuum control motor. 1 Disconnect the vacuum line. 2 Remove the two screws. 3 Disconnect the vacuum control motor from the door lever. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Cable, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Door Cable: Service and Repair TEMPERATURE BLEND DOOR CONTROL CABLE Alignment Pin, Temperature Blend Door SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Lower the glove compartment door. - Press the glove compartment release tabs inward while pulling downward on the glove compartment. 3. Disconnect the temperature blend door control cable. 1 Align the locator holes and insert the special tool. 2 Release the locking tab. 3 Remove the temperature blend door control cable from the blend door shaft. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Cable, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6428 4. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. - Disconnect the electrical connectors. 5. Depress the three tabs and remove the temperature blend door control cable. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Rotate the gear to align the locking tab with the notch in the gear before installing. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Duct: Service and Repair REAR FOOTWELL DUCT Removal 1. Remove the driver and front passenger seats. 2. Remove the utility compartment. 1 Remove the four plastic fasteners. 2 Remove the utility compartment. - Disconnect the electrical connection. 3. Remove LH and RH front door scuff plates. 4. Remove LH and RH lower A-pillar panels. 5. Remove the LH foot rest. 6. Pull back the carpet to gain access to the rear floor vent. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6432 7. Remove the wire harness pin-type retainer. 8. Remove the floor duct pin-type retainers and remove the duct. Installation 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. DEFROSTER DUCT Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to: Body and Frame, Interior Moulding/Trim, Dashboard/Instrument Panel, Service and Repair, Removal and Installation, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation 2. Remove the screws and the retaining guides. 3. Remove the screws and remove the duct. Installation 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. CENTER REGISTER DUCT Removal 1. Remove the defroster duct. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6433 2. Remove the screws from the front side of the instrument panel. 3. Remove the screw for the left vent duct. 4. Remove the screw for the right vent duct. 5. Remove the screws for the center vent duct and remove the vent duct. Installation 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 04-25-13 > Dec > 04 > A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust Air Register: Customer Interest A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust TSB 04-25-13 12/27/04 SERVICEABILITY OF INSTRUMENT PANEL REGISTER VENTS FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005 Mariner ISSUE Some 2001-2005 vehicles may exhibit instrument panel (IP) register vents that are difficult to adjust or are limited in their adjustability. ACTION Register vents for the IP center finish panel can now be ordered and replaced individually. Replacement of an entire center finish panel assembly to correct a register vent condition is no longer necessary. The IP outboard register vents can be replaced similarly without replacing the entire housing assembly, however, the outboard vent must be ordered as an assembly with the housing. Refer to the following Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE CENTER REGISTER REPLACEMENT 1. Remove center finish panel. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 501-12. 2. With center finish panel removed, release the register retention tabs and remove the register. 3. Replace register with Part Number YL8Z-19893-CAA left or YL8Z-19893-CAB right. 4. Reinstall the center finish panel. OUTBOARD REGISTER REPLACEMENT 1. Tilt the vehicle's outboard register to the down most position. Pull the top of the register out until it is released from the housing. 2. Remove the new register from the service replacement register housing assembly (base # -19893-), as described in Step 1. 3. Snap the new register into the vehicle's existing outboard register housing. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 042513A Register Replace Right 0.2 Hr. Outboard Vent Only 042513B Register Replace Left 0.2 Hr. Outboard Vent Only 042513C Register Replace Both 0.4 Hr. Center Vents (Includes Time To Remove And Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 04-25-13 > Dec > 04 > A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust > Page 6442 Install Center Finish Panel) 042513D Register Replace All Vents 0.4 Hr. (Includes Time To Remove And Install Center Finish Panel) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19893 41 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 04-25-13 > Dec > 04 > A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust Air Register: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust TSB 04-25-13 12/27/04 SERVICEABILITY OF INSTRUMENT PANEL REGISTER VENTS FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005 Mariner ISSUE Some 2001-2005 vehicles may exhibit instrument panel (IP) register vents that are difficult to adjust or are limited in their adjustability. ACTION Register vents for the IP center finish panel can now be ordered and replaced individually. Replacement of an entire center finish panel assembly to correct a register vent condition is no longer necessary. The IP outboard register vents can be replaced similarly without replacing the entire housing assembly, however, the outboard vent must be ordered as an assembly with the housing. Refer to the following Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE CENTER REGISTER REPLACEMENT 1. Remove center finish panel. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 501-12. 2. With center finish panel removed, release the register retention tabs and remove the register. 3. Replace register with Part Number YL8Z-19893-CAA left or YL8Z-19893-CAB right. 4. Reinstall the center finish panel. OUTBOARD REGISTER REPLACEMENT 1. Tilt the vehicle's outboard register to the down most position. Pull the top of the register out until it is released from the housing. 2. Remove the new register from the service replacement register housing assembly (base # -19893-), as described in Step 1. 3. Snap the new register into the vehicle's existing outboard register housing. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 042513A Register Replace Right 0.2 Hr. Outboard Vent Only 042513B Register Replace Left 0.2 Hr. Outboard Vent Only 042513C Register Replace Both 0.4 Hr. Center Vents (Includes Time To Remove And Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 04-25-13 > Dec > 04 > A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust > Page 6448 Install Center Finish Panel) 042513D Register Replace All Vents 0.4 Hr. (Includes Time To Remove And Install Center Finish Panel) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19893 41 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Locations View 151-19 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6454 Blower Motor: Description and Operation BLOWER MOTOR Blower Motor The blower motor pulls air from the air inlet and forces it into the heater core housing where it is mixed and distributed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blower Motor Blower Motor: Service and Repair Blower Motor BLOWER MOTOR REMOVAL 1. Remove the RH A-pillar lower trim. 2. Remove the blower motor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the washer screws. 3 Remove the blower motor and cover, lower the assembly from the housing. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blower Motor > Page 6457 Blower Motor: Service and Repair Blower Motor - Wheel BLOWER MOTOR - WHEEL REMOVAL 1. Remove the blower motor. 2. Remove the blower motor wheel retainer from the motor shaft, and remove the wheel. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Install a new blower wheel retainer. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations View 151-18 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6461 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6462 Blower Motor Relay: Description and Operation BLOWER MOTOR RELAY The blower motor relay supplies voltage to the blower motor and is activated when the key is ON and the function selector switch is in any position besides OFF. The blower motor relay is located under the instrument panel next to the steering column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6463 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6464 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations View 151-19 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6468 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6469 Blower Motor Resistor: Description and Operation BLOWER MOTOR SWITCH RESISTOR Blower Motor Switch Resistor The four-speed operation of the blower motor is achieved through the blower motor switch resistor and contains a thermal limiter which is used as a temperature protecting fuse. The assembly is located on the passenger side on the evaporator core housing behind the glove compartment. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair BLOWER MOTOR SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Remove the blower motor switch knob. 3. Remove the blower motor switch. - Depress the locking tab. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair NOTE: The air distribution system of this vehicle cannot be equipped with a cabin air filter. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications Compressor Clutch: Specifications Magnetic Clutch Air gap between pulley and hub........................................................................................................... ....................................0.35-0.75 mm (0.014-0.029 in) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6480 Compressor Clutch: Description and Operation A/C COMPRESSOR AND CLUTCH ASSEMBLY AIC Compressor And Clutch Assembly NOTE: - Internal A/C compressor components are not repaired separately. Install a new FS-10 A/C compressor only as an assembly. The A/C clutch, A/C clutch pulley, A/C clutch field coil and the shaft seals are repairable. - Installation of a new suction accumulator is not required when repairing the air conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the suction accumulator. The FS-10 A/C compressor has the following characteristics: - a 10-cylinder swashplate design utilizing the tangential design mount - displacement of 170 cc (10.4 cubic inches) - A one-piece lip-type seal (repaired from the front of the A/C compressor) is used to seal it at the shaft opening in the assembly. - Five double-acting pistons operate within the cylinder assembly. The pistons are actuated by a swashplate that changes the rotating action of the shaft to a reciprocating force. - Reed-type discharge valves are located between the cylinder assembly and the head at each end of the A/C compressor. - The A/C compressor uses PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. This oil contains special additives necessary for the A/C compressor. - The A/C compressor oil from vehicles equipped with an FS-10 A/C compressor may have a dark color while maintaining a normal oil viscosity. This is normal for this A/C compressor because carbon from the piston rings will discolor the oil. The magnetic A/C clutch has the following characteristics: - It drives the compressor shaft. - When battery positive voltage (B+) is applied to the A/C clutch field coil, the clutch disc and hub assembly is drawn toward the A/C clutch pulley. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6481 - The magnetic force locks the clutch disc and hub assembly and the A/C clutch pulley together as one unit, causing the compressor shaft to rotate. - When B+ is removed from the A/C clutch field coil, springs in the clutch disc and hub assembly move the clutch disc away from the A/C clutch pulley. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6482 Compressor Clutch: Adjustments AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) CLUTCH AIR GAP ADJUSTMENT 1. Check the A/C clutch air gap at three equally-spaced places between the clutch hub and the A/C clutch pulley. 2. Remove the A/C clutch. Add or remove spacers between the A/C clutch and the compressor shaft until clearance is within specification. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6483 Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair CLUTCH AND CLUTCH FIELD COIL Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL 1. Remove the A/C compressor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6484 2. Using the special tool, remove the A/C clutch bolt. 3. Remove the disk and hub assembly and the A/C clutch hub spacer. 1 Thread an 8 x 1.25 mm bolt into the A/C clutch to force it from the compressor shaft. 2 Lift the disk and hub assembly and the A/C clutch hub spacer from the compressor shaft. 4. Remove the pulley snap ring. 5. Remove the A/C clutch pulley. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6485 6. CAUTION: Do not use air tools. The A/C clutch field coil can be easily damaged. Remove the A/C clutch field coil. 1 Note the location of the A/C clutch field coil electrical connector. 2 Using the special tools, remove the A/C clutch field coil. INSTALLATION 1. Clean the A/C clutch field coil and pulley mounting surfaces. 2. CAUTION: Do not use air tools. The A/C clutch field coil can be easily damaged. NOTE: Position the clutch field coil on the A/C compressor as previously marked. Using the special tools, install the A/C clutch field coil. 3. NOTE: The A/C clutch pulley is a tight fit on the A/C compressor head. It must be correctly aligned during installation. Install the A/C clutch pulley. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6486 4. Install the pulley snap ring with the bevel side out. 5. Place one nominal thickness A/C clutch hub spacer inside the clutch hub spline opening. 6. Install the disk and hub assembly. 7. Using the special tool, install and tighten the A/C clutch bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6487 8. Measure and adjust the clutch air gap by removing or adding A/C clutch hub spacers. 9. Install the A/C compressor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component Information > Locations View 151-15 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component Information > Locations > Page 6491 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component Information > Locations > Page 6492 Compressor Clutch Coil: Service and Repair CLUTCH AND CLUTCH FIELD COIL Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL 1. Remove the A/C compressor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component Information > Locations > Page 6493 2. Using the special tool, remove the A/C clutch bolt. 3. Remove the disk and hub assembly and the A/C clutch hub spacer. 1 Thread an 8 x 1.25 mm bolt into the A/C clutch to force it from the compressor shaft. 2 Lift the disk and hub assembly and the A/C clutch hub spacer from the compressor shaft. 4. Remove the pulley snap ring. 5. Remove the A/C clutch pulley. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component Information > Locations > Page 6494 6. CAUTION: Do not use air tools. The A/C clutch field coil can be easily damaged. Remove the A/C clutch field coil. 1 Note the location of the A/C clutch field coil electrical connector. 2 Using the special tools, remove the A/C clutch field coil. INSTALLATION 1. Clean the A/C clutch field coil and pulley mounting surfaces. 2. CAUTION: Do not use air tools. The A/C clutch field coil can be easily damaged. NOTE: Position the clutch field coil on the A/C compressor as previously marked. Using the special tools, install the A/C clutch field coil. 3. NOTE: The A/C clutch pulley is a tight fit on the A/C compressor head. It must be correctly aligned during installation. Install the A/C clutch pulley. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component Information > Locations > Page 6495 4. Install the pulley snap ring with the bevel side out. 5. Place one nominal thickness A/C clutch hub spacer inside the clutch hub spline opening. 6. Install the disk and hub assembly. 7. Using the special tool, install and tighten the A/C clutch bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component Information > Locations > Page 6496 8. Measure and adjust the clutch air gap by removing or adding A/C clutch hub spacers. 9. Install the A/C compressor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Compressor Shaft Seal: > 06-4-9 > Mar > 06 > A/C Compressor Leaking/Inoperative Compressor Shaft Seal: Customer Interest A/C - Compressor Leaking/Inoperative TSB 06-4-9 03/06/06 A/C COMPRESSOR NOT OPERATIONAL / LOW FREON-SHAFT SEAL LEAKS FORD: 2003 Escort 2003-2006 Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2003-2005 Excursion, Explorer Sport Trac 2003-2006 Escape, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2004-2006 Freestar 2006 Low Cab Forward LINCOLN: 2002 Blackwood 2006 Mark LT MERCURY: 2003-2005 Sable 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner ISSUE Some 2002-2006 vehicles equipped with an FS-10 A/C compressor may experience a non operational A/C compressor due to a low freon level caused by a leaking shaft seal. ACTION Replace the A/C compressor shaft seal following the Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE If the shaft seal on the front of the A/C compressor is leaking, replace the shaft seal (F1VY-19D665-A) and not the compressor assembly. Replacing the shaft seal should correct the leaking condition. When replacing the seal, follow the procedure outlined in Workshop Manual, Section 412-03. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT060409 Use Standard Labor Actual Operation For Compressor Time Removal And Installation If Available, And Claim Additional Labor Required As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19D665 42 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Compressor Shaft Seal: > 06-4-9 > Mar > 06 > A/C Compressor Leaking/Inoperative > Page 6505 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Compressor Shaft Seal: > 06-4-9 > Mar > 06 > A/C - Compressor Leaking/Inoperative Compressor Shaft Seal: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Compressor Leaking/Inoperative TSB 06-4-9 03/06/06 A/C COMPRESSOR NOT OPERATIONAL / LOW FREON-SHAFT SEAL LEAKS FORD: 2003 Escort 2003-2006 Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2003-2005 Excursion, Explorer Sport Trac 2003-2006 Escape, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2004-2006 Freestar 2006 Low Cab Forward LINCOLN: 2002 Blackwood 2006 Mark LT MERCURY: 2003-2005 Sable 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner ISSUE Some 2002-2006 vehicles equipped with an FS-10 A/C compressor may experience a non operational A/C compressor due to a low freon level caused by a leaking shaft seal. ACTION Replace the A/C compressor shaft seal following the Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE If the shaft seal on the front of the A/C compressor is leaking, replace the shaft seal (F1VY-19D665-A) and not the compressor assembly. Replacing the shaft seal should correct the leaking condition. When replacing the seal, follow the procedure outlined in Workshop Manual, Section 412-03. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT060409 Use Standard Labor Actual Operation For Compressor Time Removal And Installation If Available, And Claim Additional Labor Required As Actual Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19D665 42 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Compressor Shaft Seal: > 06-4-9 > Mar > 06 > A/C - Compressor Leaking/Inoperative > Page 6511 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6512 Compressor Shaft Seal: Service and Repair AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) COMPRESSOR SHAFT SEAL Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL 1. Remove the disk and hub assembly from the A/C compressor. 2. Using the special tool, remove the shaft seal felt from the nose of the A/C compressor. 3. CAUTION: To prevent refrigerant system contamination, do not allow dirt or other foreign materials to enter the A/C compressor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6513 Clean the compressor nose area. 4. Using the special tool, remove the shaft seal snap ring. 5. Using the special tool, remove the shaft seal from the A/C compressor. INSTALLATION 1. CAUTION: To prevent refrigerant system contamination, do not allow dirt or other foreign materials to enter the A/C compressor. Clean the A/C compressor nose area. 2. Lubricate the shaft seal and special tool with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. Place the shaft seal on the special tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6514 3. Position the special tool, with the shaft seal, over the A/C compressor shaft. 4. Using the special tool, push the shaft seal onto the A/C compressor shaft until seated. 5. Using the special tool, install the shaft seal snap ring. 6. Carry out the A/C compressor external leak test. 7. Using the special tool, install the shaft seal felt. 8. Install the disk and hub assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Diode HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6521 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6522 Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY The A/C compressor clutch relay supplies voltage to the A/C compressor clutch and is located in the battery junction box (BJB). The power control module (PCM) can interrupt the A/C compressor operation through the A/C compressor clutch relay under the following conditions: - during engine start-up - wide open throttle (WOT) - low engine idle conditions - excessively high engine temperatures Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6523 Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6524 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Fitting HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair Compressor Fitting HVAC: Service and Repair MANIFOLD AND TUBE ASSEMBLY REMOVAL 1. Remove the nuts from the A/C manifold and tube mounting bracket. 2. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture. Disconnect the A/C manifold and tube from the suction accumulator. 3. Remove the front bumper cover. 4. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture. Remove the nut and disconnect the A/C manifold and tube to A/C condenser core air conditioning line (peanut) fitting. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Fitting HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6528 5. Position aside the speed control actuator assembly. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Disconnect the electrical harness pin-type retainers. 3 Remove the nuts. 6. Raise and support the vehicle. 7. Remove the RH splash shield. 8. If equipped, disconnect the engine block heater electrical connector. 9. Disconnect the A/C clutch field coil electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Fitting HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6529 10. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture. NOTE: Vehicles with 2.0L Zetec engine shown, vehicles with 3.0L (4V) engine similar. Remove the A/C manifold and tube assembly bolt. 11. Remove the A/C manifold and tube assembly through the bottom of the vehicle. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. - Apply Pipe Sealant with Teflon (R) D8AZ-19554-A or equivalent meeting Ford specifications WSK-M2G350-A2 and ESR-M18P7-A to the threads of the A/C manifold retaining bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation Condenser HVAC: Description and Operation A/C CONDENSER CORE NOTE: Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the suction accumulator. The A/C condenser core has the following characteristics: - It is an aluminum fin-and-tube design heat exchanger located in front of the vehicle radiator. - It cools compressed refrigerant gas by allowing air to pass over the fins and tubes to extract heat and by condensing gas to liquid refrigerant as it is cooled. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6533 Condenser HVAC: Testing and Inspection A/C EVAPORATOR/CONDENSER CORE - ON-VEHICLE LEAK TEST 1. Discharge and recover the refrigerant. 2. NOTE: DO NOT leak test an A/C evaporator core with the suction accumulator/drier attached to the core tubes. Disconnect the suspect A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core from the A/C system. 3. Clean the spring lock couplings. 4. Connect the appropriate test fittings from the A/C Test Fitting Set to the evaporator or condenser tube connections. 5. NOTE: The automatic shut-off valves on some gauge set hoses do not open when connected to the test fittings. If available, use hoses without shut-off valves. If hoses with shut-off valves are used, make sure the valve opens when attached to the test fittings or install an adapter which will activate the valve. The test is not valid if the shut-off valve does not open. Connect the red and blue hoses from the manifold gauge set 023-00046 to the test fittings on the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. Connect the yellow hose to a known good vacuum pump 023-R0163. 6. Open both gauge set valves and start the vacuum pump. Allow the vacuum pump to operate for a minimum of 45 minutes after the gauge set low pressure gauge indicates 101 kPa (30 in-Hg). The 45-minute evacuation is necessary to remove any refrigerant from oil left in the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. If the refrigerant is not completely removed from the oil, outgassing will degrade the vacuum and appear as a refrigerant leak. 7. If the low pressure gauge reading will not drop to 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) when the valves on the gauge and manifold set are open and the vacuum pump is operating, close the gauge set valves and observe the low pressure gauge. If the pressure rises rapidly to zero, a large leak is indicated. Recheck the test fitting connections and gauge set connections before installing a new A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. 8. After evacuating for 45 minutes, close the gauge set valves and stop the vacuum pump. Observe the low pressure gauge; it should remain at the 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) mark. If the low pressure gauge reading rises 34 or more kPa (10 or more in-Hg) of vacuum from the 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) position in 10 minutes, a leak is indicated. - If a very small leak is suspected, wait 30 minutes and observe the vacuum gauge. - If a small amount of vacuum is lost, operate the vacuum pump with gauge valves open for an additional 30 minutes to remove any remaining refrigerant from the oil in the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. Then recheck for loss of vacuum. - If a very small leak is suspected, allow the system to sit overnight with vacuum applied and check for vacuum loss. 9. If the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core does leak, as verified by the above procedure, install a new A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6534 Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair CONDENSER CORE REMOVAL NOTE: - Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the suction accumulator. - If an A/C condenser core leak is suspected, the A/C condenser core must be leak tested before it is removed from the vehicle. 1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the front bumper cover. 3. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture. Remove the nuts from the two condenser core air conditioning line (peanut) fittings. 4. Remove the screws and the A/C condenser core brackets. 5. NOTE: When removing the A/C condenser core, disconnect the two air conditioning line (peanut) fittings from the A/C condenser core. Remove the A/C condenser core. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the new A/C condenser core with the correct amount of PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. - Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations View 151-19 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Control Assembly: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 6540 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6541 Control Assembly: Description and Operation CLIMATE CONTROL ASSEMBLY Climate Control Assembly The climate control assembly has three system controls: - The A/C heater function selector switch combines a vacuum selector valve with two electrical switches to supply battery positive voltage (B+) to the A/C clutch circuit and the blower motor control circuit. - The temperature selection is accomplished through cable-controlled positioning of the temperature blend door located in the heater core housing. - The blower motor switch controls the blower motor speed by adding or bypassing resistors in the heater blower motor switch resistor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Climate Control Assembly Control Assembly: Service and Repair Climate Control Assembly CLIMATE CONTROL ASSEMBLY REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Remove the four screws and the climate control assembly. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Climate Control Assembly > Page 6544 Control Assembly: Service and Repair Temperature Control Switch TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH Alignment Pin, Temperature Blend Door SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Remove the temperature control switch knob. 3. Disconnect the temperature blend door control cable. 1 Align the locator holes and insert the special tool. 2 Release the locking tab. 3 Remove the temperature blend door control cable from the blend door shaft. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Climate Control Assembly > Page 6545 4. Depress the three tabs and remove the temperature blend door control cable. 5. Remove the temperature control switch. 1 Remove the screw. 2 Depress the tab and rotate the temperature control switch counterclockwise. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Rotate the gear to align the locking tab with the notch in the gear before installing. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Climate Control Assembly > Page 6546 Control Assembly: Service and Repair Function Selector Switch FUNCTION SELECTOR SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Remove the function selector switch knob. 3. Remove the function selector switch. - Push in the locking tab on one side of the function selector switch. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Align the function selector switch locking tabs with the holes in the housing and press the function selector into the housing. Verify that both locking tabs are secured. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Climate Control Assembly > Page 6547 Control Assembly: Service and Repair Climate Control Assembly Illumination Bulbs CLIMATE CONTROL ASSEMBLY ILLUMINATION BULBS REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Remove the illumination bulb(s) by turning a quarter turn counterclockwise and lifting straight up. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation Coupler HVAC: Description and Operation SPRING LOCK COUPLING Spring Lock Coupling The spring lock coupling is a refrigerant line coupling held together by a garter spring inside a circular cage. - When the coupling is connected together, the flared end of the female fitting slips behind the garter spring inside the cage of the male fitting. - The garter spring and cage then prevent the flared end of the female fitting from pulling out of the cage. - The O-ring seals are green in color and are made of a special material. - Use only the green O-ring seals listed in the Ford Master Parts Catalog for the spring lock coupling. - A plastic indicator ring is used on the spring lock couplings of the A/C evaporator core to indicate, during vehicle assembly, that the coupling is connected. Once the coupling is connected, the indicator ring is no longer necessary but will remain captive by the coupling near the cage opening. - An A/C tube lock coupling clip may be used to secure the coupling but is not necessary. AIR CONDITIONING LINE (PEANUT) FITTING Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6551 The air conditioning line (peanut) fitting is an integral part of the refrigeration line or component. - The male and female blocks of the air conditioning line (peanut) fitting are retained with a nut. - An O-ring seal is installed around the tube on the male block. - The female block is welded to the tube and is not adjustable. - Support the female fittings with a wrench to prevent twisting of the tubes. - The male block will pivot around the tube to allow for alignment with the female block during assembly. - When correctly assembled the male and female fittings should be flush. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Coupling Coupler HVAC: Service and Repair Spring Lock Coupling SPRING LOCK COUPLING Spring Lock Coupling Disconnect Tool Set SPECIAL TOOL(S) DISCONNECT 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Discharging and Recovery. 2. Remove the A/C tube lock coupling clip. 3. Using the special tool, disengage the spring lock coupling fittings. 4. CAUTION: Do not use metal tools to remove the O-ring seals. They can cause axial scratches across the O-ring seal grooves resulting in refrigerant leaks. Remove the O-ring seals with a non-metallic tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Coupling > Page 6554 5. CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver or similar tool to remove the A/C tube lock coupling spring; this can cause axial scratches across the O-ring seal grooves resulting in refrigerant leaks. Remove the A/C tube lock coupling spring with a small hooked wire. CLEANING 1. Fabricate a cleaning tool from a 1/8 inch diameter brazing rod. 2. Cut an abrasive pad from maroon colored 3M Scotch Brite(R) with the dimensions corresponding to the coupling size. 3. Assemble the pad to the tool. 4. Coat the abrasive pad with PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) F7AZ-19589-DA (Motorcraft YN-12-C) or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. 5. Roll the pad on the tool and install it in a variable speed motor drill. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Coupling > Page 6555 6. CAUTION: Maintain low speed drill rotation when inserting or removing the cleaning tool to prevent axial scratches which may cause future leaks. Polish for one minute at moderate speed (less than 1,500 rpm) or until the surface is clean and free of scratches or foreign material. 7. Clean the fitting with a lint-free cloth. 8. Inspect the surface for grooves or scratches. If grooves or scratches are still present, install a new component. 9. Clean the O-ring seal grooves with a 300 mm (12 inch) length of natural fiber string. - Loop the string around the grooves and pull the string back and forth. 10. Remove any foreign material from the grooves with a lint-free cloth. CONNECT 1. Install the A/C tube lock coupling spring. 2. Lubricate the inside of the coupling with PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) F7AZ-19589-DA (Motorcraft YN-12-C) or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Coupling > Page 6556 3. CAUTION: Use only new green O-ring seals. The use of any O-ring seals other than specified may result in intermittent leakage during vehicle operation. NOTE: Some connections may have two or three O-ring seals. Install the O-ring seals. 1 Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) F7AZ-19589-DA (Motorcraft YN-12-C) or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. 4. Connect the spring lock coupling fittings with a twisting motion until the A/C tube lock coupling spring snaps over the flared end of the female fitting. 5. Install the A/C tube lock coupling clip. 6. Charge the system. Refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Evacuation And Charging. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Coupling > Page 6557 Coupler HVAC: Service and Repair Air Conditioning Line (Peanut) Fitting AIR CONDITIONING LINE (PEANUT) FITTING DISCONNECT 1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Discharging and Recovery. 2. CAUTION: Support the female fitting with a wrench to prevent the tubes from twisting. Remove the nut from the air conditioning line (peanut) fitting. 3. Pull the air conditioning line (peanut) fitting apart. 4. CAUTION: Do not use metal tools to remove the O-ring seal. They can cause axial scratches across the O-ring seal groove resulting in refrigerant leaks. Remove the O-ring seal with a non-metallic tool. CONNECT 1. Clean all dirt or foreign material from the fittings. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Coupling > Page 6558 2. CAUTION: Use only new purple O-ring seals. The use of any O-ring seals other than specified may result in intermittent leakage during vehicle operation. Install the O-ring seal. 1 Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) F7AZ-19589-DA (Motorcraft YN-12-C) or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. 3. Lubricate the inside of the fittings with PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) F7AZ-19589-DA (Motorcraft YN-12-C) or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. 4. NOTE: When correctly assembled, the male and female fittings should be flush. Assemble the male and female fittings together. 5. Charge the system. Refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Evacuation And Charging. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Case > Component Information > Service and Repair Evaporator Case: Service and Repair EVAPORATOR CORE HOUSING REMOVAL 1. Discharge and recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to: Body and Frame, Interior Trim, Dashboard/Instrument Panel, Service and Repair, Removal and Installation, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation 3. Disconnect the refrigerant line spring lock couplings from the A/C evaporator core. 4. Disconnect the vacuum hose. 5. Remove the evaporator core housing. 1 Remove the nuts. 2 Carefully remove the evaporator core housing to avoid spilling PAG compressor oil in the passenger area. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: - Feed the vacuum hose through the opening in the cowl while installing the housing. - Before installing the temperature control cable, make sure the blend door, cable and temperature switch are correctly positioned. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Description and Operation Evaporator Core: Description and Operation A/C EVAPORATOR CORE A/C Evaporator Core NOTE: Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C component or damage to the suction accumulator. The A/C evaporator housing contains the A/C evaporator core. The A/C evaporator core is the plate/fin type with a unique refrigerant flow path. - A mixture of refrigerant and oil enters the bottom of the A/C evaporator core through the A/C evaporator core inlet tube and is routed so it flows through the partitioned first four plate/fin sections. - The next four plate/fin sections are partitioned to force the refrigerant to flow toward the other end of the A/C evaporator core. - The next five plate/fin sections are partitioned to force the refrigerant to flow toward the bottom of the A/C evaporator core. - Refrigerant then continues through to the remaining five plate/fin sections and then moves out of the A/C evaporator core through the A/C evaporator core outlet tube. - This W-pass flow pattern transfers the flow of refrigerant and oil through the A/C evaporator core. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6565 Evaporator Core: Testing and Inspection A/C EVAPORATOR/CONDENSER CORE - ON-VEHICLE LEAK TEST 1. Discharge and recover the refrigerant. 2. NOTE: DO NOT leak test an A/C evaporator core with the suction accumulator/drier attached to the core tubes. Disconnect the suspect A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core from the A/C system. 3. Clean the spring lock couplings. 4. Connect the appropriate test fittings from the A/C Test Fitting Set to the evaporator or condenser tube connections. 5. NOTE: The automatic shut-off valves on some gauge set hoses do not open when connected to the test fittings. If available, use hoses without shut-off valves. If hoses with shut-off valves are used, make sure the valve opens when attached to the test fittings or install an adapter which will activate the valve. The test is not valid if the shut-off valve does not open. Connect the red and blue hoses from the manifold gauge set 023-00046 to the test fittings on the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. Connect the yellow hose to a known good vacuum pump 023-R0163. 6. Open both gauge set valves and start the vacuum pump. Allow the vacuum pump to operate for a minimum of 45 minutes after the gauge set low pressure gauge indicates 101 kPa (30 in-Hg). The 45-minute evacuation is necessary to remove any refrigerant from oil left in the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. If the refrigerant is not completely removed from the oil, outgassing will degrade the vacuum and appear as a refrigerant leak. 7. If the low pressure gauge reading will not drop to 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) when the valves on the gauge and manifold set are open and the vacuum pump is operating, close the gauge set valves and observe the low pressure gauge. If the pressure rises rapidly to zero, a large leak is indicated. Recheck the test fitting connections and gauge set connections before installing a new A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. 8. After evacuating for 45 minutes, close the gauge set valves and stop the vacuum pump. Observe the low pressure gauge; it should remain at the 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) mark. If the low pressure gauge reading rises 34 or more kPa (10 or more in-Hg) of vacuum from the 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) position in 10 minutes, a leak is indicated. - If a very small leak is suspected, wait 30 minutes and observe the vacuum gauge. - If a small amount of vacuum is lost, operate the vacuum pump with gauge valves open for an additional 30 minutes to remove any remaining refrigerant from the oil in the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. Then recheck for loss of vacuum. - If a very small leak is suspected, allow the system to sit overnight with vacuum applied and check for vacuum loss. 9. If the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core does leak, as verified by the above procedure, install a new A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6566 Evaporator Core: Service and Repair EVAPORATOR CORE REMOVAL NOTE: - Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C component or damage to the suction accumulator. - If an A/C evaporator core leak is suspected, the A/C evaporator core must be leak tested before it is removed from the vehicle. - The evaporator core and evaporator housing must be installed as a complete unit. 1. Remove the A/C evaporator core housing. 2. Transfer, the components from the old evaporator core housing to the new evaporator core housing. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the new A/C evaporator core with the correct amount of PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR A/C Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor Voltage And Resistance Chart, Part 1 A/C Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor Voltage And Resistance Chart, Part 2 The air conditioning evaporative temperature (ACET) sensor senses evaporator air discharge temperature. The ACET sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The PCM sources a low current 5 volts on the ACET circuit. With SIG RTN also connected to the ACET sensor, the varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals. As A/C evaporator air temperature changes, the varying resistance of the ACET sensor changes the voltage the PCM detects. The ACET sensor is used to more accurately control A/C clutch cycling, improving defrost/demist performance, reduce A/C clutch cycling, etc. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information > Description and Operation Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Description and Operation A/C EVAPORATOR CORE ORIFICE AIC Evaporator Core Orifice NOTE: Install a new A/C evaporator core orifice whenever a new A/C compressor is installed. The A/C evaporator core orifice has the following characteristics: - color-coded green - an orifice diameter of 1.25 mm (0.052 inch) - located in the condenser to evaporator line - Changes the high-pressure liquid refrigerant into a low-pressure liquid - filter screens located on the inlet and outlet ends of the orifice body - The inlet filter screen acts as a strainer for the liquid refrigerant flowing through the A/C evaporator core orifice. - O-ring seals on the A/C evaporator core orifice prevent the high-pressure liquid refrigerant from bypassing the A/C evaporator core orifice. - Adjustment or repair cannot be made to the A/C evaporator core orifice. A new A/C evaporator core orifice must be installed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6573 Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Service and Repair EVAPORATOR CORE ORIFICE Specail Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL 1. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture. Disconnect the condenser to evaporator line at the orifice tube. 2. Engage the special tool onto the A/C evaporator core orifice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6574 3. Hold the special tool T-handle stationary and rotate the special tool body to remove the A/C evaporator core orifice. 4. If the A/C evaporator core orifice is broken, screw the end of the special tool into the broken A/C evaporator core orifice. 5. Hold the special tool T-handle stationary and rotate the special tool body to remove the broken A/C evaporator core orifice. INSTALLATION 1. Lubricate and install the O-ring seals on the A/C evaporator core orifice. - Use PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. 2. Place the A/C evaporator core orifice into the special tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6575 3. Using the special tool, insert the A/C evaporator core orifice into the condenser to evaporator line until seated. 4. Remove the special tool. 5. Connect the condenser to evaporator line at the orifice tube. 6. Recharge the A/C system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage Heater Core: Customer Interest A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage TSB 06-21-19 10/30/06 HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY) FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250 Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure. ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have occurred. ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant: a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely due to due to high flow rate - replace the Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 6584 heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference Workshop Manual, Section 412. b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis. Testing For Electrolysis Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system. Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible. 1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable. a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle. b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant. NOTE POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING. c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect battery cables and proceed to Step 2. d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly. e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. f. Reconnect battery cables. g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant. 2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions. a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine. b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK. d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections. e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper wire to ground. f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test. g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped. 3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds. a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. b. Crank engine but do not start. c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter. e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm. f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell phone, etc. g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 6585 h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair ground to the accessory just identified. j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts. l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4. m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower motor and any fan motors. n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it up then retest. o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck. NOTE If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor voltage when they are on and when off. CAUTION DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE GROUND PATH. 4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03. NOTE IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18476 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage Heater Core: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage TSB 06-21-19 10/30/06 HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY) FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250 Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure. ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have occurred. ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant: a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely due to due to high flow rate - replace the Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 6591 heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference Workshop Manual, Section 412. b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis. Testing For Electrolysis Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system. Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible. 1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable. a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle. b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant. NOTE POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING. c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect battery cables and proceed to Step 2. d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly. e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. f. Reconnect battery cables. g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant. 2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions. a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine. b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK. d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections. e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper wire to ground. f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test. g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped. 3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds. a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. b. Crank engine but do not start. c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter. e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm. f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell phone, etc. g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 6592 h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair ground to the accessory just identified. j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts. l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4. m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower motor and any fan motors. n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it up then retest. o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck. NOTE If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor voltage when they are on and when off. CAUTION DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE GROUND PATH. 4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03. NOTE IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18476 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6593 Heater Core: Description and Operation HEATER CORE Heater Core The heater core consists of fins and tubes arranged to extract heat from the engine coolant and transfer the heat to air passing through the heater core housing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6594 Heater Core: Testing and Inspection HEATER CORE WARNING: Carbon monoxide gas is colorless, odorless and dangerous. If it is necessary to operate the engine with the vehicle in a closed area such as a garage, always use an exhaust collector to vent the exhaust gases outside the closed area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. NOTE: Testing of returned heater cores reveals that a large percentage of heater cores are good and did not require installation of a new heater core. If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be tested by following the Plugged Heater Core Component Test before the Heater Core Pressure Test. Carry out a system inspection by checking the heater system thoroughly as follows: Inspect for evidence of coolant leakage at the heater water hose to heater core attachments. A coolant leak in the heater water hose could follow the heater core tube to the heater core and appear as a leak in the heater core. CAUTION: Spring-type clamps are installed as original equipment. Installation and overtightening of non-specification clamps can cause leakage at the heater water hose connection and damage the heater core. 2. Check the integrity of the heater water hose clamps. Heater Core - Plugged WARNING: The heater core inlet hose will become too hot to handle if the system is working correctly. 1. Check to see that the engine coolant is at the correct level. 2. Start the engine and turn on the heater. 3. When the engine coolant reaches operating temperature, feel the heater core outlet hose to see if it is hot. If it is not hot: - the heater core may have an air pocket. - the heater core may be plugged, or - the thermostat is not working correctly. Heater Core - Pressure Test Use the radiator/heater core pressure tester to carry out the pressure test. 1. NOTE: Due to space limitations, a bench test may be necessary for pressure testing. Drain the coolant from the cooling system. 2. Disconnect the heater water hoses from the heater core. 3. Install a short piece of heater water hose, approximately 101 mm (4 inches) long on each heater core tube. 4. Fill the heater core and heater water hoses with water and install plug BT-7422-B and adapter BT-7422-A from the radiator/heater core pressure tester in the heater water hose ends. Secure the heater water hoses, plug and adapter with hose clamps. 5. Attach the pump and gauge assembly from the radiator/heater core pressure tester to the adapter. 6. Close the bleed valve at the base of the gauge. Pump 241 kPa (35 psi) of air pressure into the heater core. 7. Observe the pressure gauge for a minimum of three minutes. 8. If the pressure drops, check the heater water hose connections to the core tubes for leaks. If the heater water hoses do not leak, remove the heater core from the vehicle and carry out the bench test. Heater Core - Bench Test 1. Remove the heater core from the vehicle. 2. Drain all of the coolant from the heater core. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6595 3. Connect the 101 mm (4 inch) test heater water hoses with plug and adapter to the core tubes. Then connect the radiator/heater core pressure tester to the adapter. 4. Apply 241 kPa (35 psi) of air pressure to the heater core. Submerge the heater core in water. 5. If a leak is observed, install a new heater core. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6596 Heater Core: Service and Repair HEATER CORE REMOVAL 1. NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be leak tested before the heater core is removed. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core. 3. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to: Body and Frame, Interior Trim, Dashboard/Instrument Panel, Service and Repair, Removal and Installation, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation 4. Remove the heater blending door levers. 1 Remove the screw for heater blending door. 2 Remove the levers for the blending door. 5. Remove the heater core. 1 Remove the three screws. 2 Remove the cover for the heater core and pull the heater core out of the housing. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Before installing the temperature control cable, make sure the blend door, cable and temperature switch are correctly positioned. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core Case > Component Information > Description and Operation Heater Core Case: Description and Operation HEATER CORE HOUSING The heater core housing contains the following components: - heater core - air temperature control door - panel air flow control door - defrost/floor air flow control door Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6600 Heater Core Case: Service and Repair HEATER CORE HOUSING REMOVAL 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core. 3. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to: Body and Frame, Interior Trim, Dashboard/Instrument Panel, Service and Repair, Removal and Installation, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation 4. If equipped with A/C, remove the A/C evaporator core housing. 5. Remove the heater core housing. 1 Remove the heater core housing retaining nuts. 2 Carefully remove the heater core housing to avoid spilling engine coolant in the passenger area. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage Heater Hose: Customer Interest A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage TSB 06-21-19 10/30/06 HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY) FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250 Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure. ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have occurred. ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant: a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely due to due to high flow rate - replace the Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 6609 heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference Workshop Manual, Section 412. b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis. Testing For Electrolysis Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system. Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible. 1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable. a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle. b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant. NOTE POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING. c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect battery cables and proceed to Step 2. d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly. e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. f. Reconnect battery cables. g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant. 2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions. a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine. b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK. d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections. e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper wire to ground. f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test. g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped. 3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds. a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. b. Crank engine but do not start. c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter. e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm. f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell phone, etc. g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 6610 h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair ground to the accessory just identified. j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts. l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4. m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower motor and any fan motors. n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it up then retest. o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck. NOTE If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor voltage when they are on and when off. CAUTION DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE GROUND PATH. 4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03. NOTE IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18476 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage Heater Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage TSB 06-21-19 10/30/06 HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY) FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250 Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure. ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have occurred. ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant: a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely due to due to high flow rate - replace the Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 6616 heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference Workshop Manual, Section 412. b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis. Testing For Electrolysis Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system. Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible. 1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable. a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle. b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant. NOTE POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING. c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect battery cables and proceed to Step 2. d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly. e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. f. Reconnect battery cables. g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant. 2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions. a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine. b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK. d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections. e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper wire to ground. f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test. g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped. 3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds. a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. b. Crank engine but do not start. c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter. e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm. f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell phone, etc. g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 6617 h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair ground to the accessory just identified. j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts. l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4. m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower motor and any fan motors. n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it up then retest. o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck. NOTE If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor voltage when they are on and when off. CAUTION DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE GROUND PATH. 4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03. NOTE IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18476 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6618 Heater Hose: Service and Repair HEATER HOSE REMOVAL 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core. 3. Disconnect the heater outlet hose from the water hose connection. 4. Disconnect the heater hose connection from the engine. 5. Remove the heater hose from the engine compartment. 6. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater hose junction. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6619 INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC: Description and Operation A/C COMPRESSOR PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE An A/C compressor pressure relief valve is incorporated in the compressor A/C manifold and tube to: - relieve unusually high refrigerant system discharge pressure buildups of (3,792 kPa [550 psi] and above). - prevent damage to the A/C compressor and other system components. - avoid total refrigerant loss by closing after the excessive pressure has been relieved. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6623 High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC: Service and Repair AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE REMOVAL 1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Remove the RH splash shield. 4. If equipped, disconnect the engine block heater electrical connector. 5. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture. If equipped with the 3.0L (4V) engine, remove the A/C manifold and tube assembly bolt and disconnect the A/C manifold and tube. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6624 6. NOTE: Vehicles with the 2.0L Zetec engine shown, vehicles with the 3.0L (4V) engine similar. Remove the A/C compressor pressure relief valve. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation Hose/Line HVAC: Description and Operation REFRIGERANT LINES NOTE: Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the suction accumulator. The condenser to evaporator line contains high-pressure liquid refrigerant upstream of the A/C evaporator core orifice. The A/C manifold and tube assembly is attached to the A/C compressor with O-ring seals. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6628 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair CONDENSER TO EVAPORATOR LINE REMOVAL 1. Remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch. 2. Remove the evaporator core orifice. 3. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture. Disconnect the condenser to evaporator line from the A/C evaporator core. 4. Remove the evaporator line support nut and remove the line from the A/C evaporator core. 5. Remove the front bumper cover. 6. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture. Remove the nut and disconnect the condenser to evaporator line from the A/C condenser core and remove the condenser to evaporator line. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Capacity ............................................................................................................................ ............................................................... 2 lb (907 g) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 6633 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications Item ...................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................ Specification R134a Refrigerant YN-19 .................................................................................................................... ...................................................... WSH-M17B19-A Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Electronic Leak Detection Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection Electronic Leak Detection ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTION Refrigerant Leak Detector SPECIAL TOOL(S) CAUTION: Good ventilation is necessary in the area where electronic A/C leak testing is to be carried out. If the surrounding air is contaminated with refrigerant gas, the leak detector will indicate this gas all the time. Odors from other chemicals such as antifreeze, diesel fuel, disc brake cleaner, or other cleaning solvents can cause the same problem. A fan, even in a well-ventilated area, is very helpful in removing small traces of contamination from the air that might affect the leak detector. 1. NOTE: System pressure should be between 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24°C (75°F) with the engine off. Leak test the refrigerant system using the Refrigerant Leak Detector. Follow instructions included with leak detector for handling and operation techniques. 2. If a leak is found, recover the refrigerant and repair the system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Electronic Leak Detection > Page 6636 Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection Tracer Dye Leak Detection TRACER DYE LEAK DETECTION Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) NOTE: Ford Motor Company vehicles are produced with R-134a Leak Tracer Dye incorporated into the A/C system. The location of leaks can be pinpointed by the bright yellow-green glow of the tracer dye. Since more than one leak can exist, always inspect each component. 1. Check for leaks using a 120-watt UV spot lamp. 2. Scan all components, fittings and lines of the A/C system. 3. After the leak is repaired, remove any traces of leak dye with a general purpose oil solvent. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Electronic Leak Detection > Page 6637 4. Verify the repair by operating the system for a short time and inspecting with the UV spot lamp. Tracer Dye Injection NOTE: System pressure should be between 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24°C (75°F) with the engine off. 1. Install the Manifold Gauge Set or a recovery station. 2. Turn the valve on the fluorescent tracer dye injector all the way to the left to close the valve. 3. Fill the reservoir with 7 ml (0.25 ounce) of R-134a Fluorescent Tracer Dye 164-R3712. 4. Install the injector between the low-side quick disconnect and the vehicle low-pressure service gauge port valve. 5. Open all quick disconnect valves and charge the refrigerant system. 6. When system charging is complete, recover the refrigerant from the dye injector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Electronic Leak Detection > Page 6638 7. NOTE: Only connect the dye-injector to the Manifold Gauge Set or the charging/recovery station when dye is to be injected. The dye injector has a one-way check valve that will prevent system refrigerant recovery and evacuation. Remove the dye injector from the low-side quick disconnect valve. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure DISCHARGING AND RECOVERY Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) 1. Prior to recovering or charging the refrigerant system, you must verify the purity of the refrigerant. 2. NOTE: Some R-134a service centers require the use of an A/C manifold gauge set. Connect the R-134a A/C Refrigerant Center to the low and high pressure service gauge port valves. 3. Recover the refrigerant from the system following the operating instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer. 4. Once the service center has recovered the vehicle A/C system refrigerant, close the service center inlet valve (if so equipped). Then switch off the power supply. 5. Allow the vehicle A/C system to remain closed for about two minutes. Observe the system vacuum level as shown on the gauge. If the pressure does not rise, disconnect the recovery station hose(s). 6. If the system pressure rises, repeat Steps 2 through 5 until the vacuum level remains stable for two minutes. 7. Carry out the required repairs, then evacuate and recharge the A/C system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 6641 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Identifying Refrigerants IDENTIFYING REFRIGERANTS Refrigerant Identifier With Air-Radicator SPECIAL TOOL(S) 1. NOTE: Prior to recovering or charging the refrigerant system, you must use an A/C refrigerant analyzer to identify gas samples taken directly from the refrigeration system or storage containers. Follow the instructions included with the refrigerant analyzer to obtain the sample for testing. 2. The analyzer will display one of the following: - A green "PASS" light emitting diode (LED) will light if the purity of the R-134, R-12 or the R-22 is better than 98% by weight. - A red "FAIL" LED will light if the purity of the gases does not meet the 98% purity standard. - A red "FAIL" LED and "HYDROCARBON" light will illuminate and a horn will sound if a hydrocarbon is detected above 5%. This will alert the user of potential hazards. 3. If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into your recovery/recycling equipment. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 6642 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Handling of Contaminated Refrigerants HANDLING OF CONTAMINATED REFRIGERANTS 1. CAUTION: If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into your recovery/recycling equipment. Recover the contaminated refrigerant using suitable recovery-only equipment designed for capturing and storing contaminated refrigerant. This equipment must only be used to recover contaminated refrigerant to prevent the spread to other vehicles. - If this equipment is not available, contact an A/C service facility in your area with the correct equipment to carry out this service. 2. Determine and correct the cause of the customer's initial concern. 3. NOTE: - Residual refrigerant oil in the suction accumulator/drier must be drained and measured for correct oil system matching. - The suction accumulator/drier cannot be cleaned and a new suction accumulator/drier must be installed. Remove the suction accumulator/drier. 4. Clean the A/C evaporator core and the A/C condenser core by flushing. 5. Install the new suction accumulator/drier. 6. Correctly oil match the system. 7. Evacuate and charge the system. 8. Dispose of contaminated refrigerant according to all federal, state and local regulations. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 6643 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Evacuation and Charging AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) SYSTEM EVACUATION AND CHARGING Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) 1. Prior to charging the refrigerant system, you must verify the purity of the refrigerant. 2. NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a charging station to carry out evacuation and charging of the refrigerant system. If a charging station is not available, system charging may be accomplished using a separate vacuum pump, charging cylinder, and manifold gauge set. Connect the R-134a A/C Refrigerant Center to the low and high pressure service gauge port valves. 3. Evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least 99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) (vacuum) and as close to 101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible. Continue to operate the vacuum pump for a minimum of 45 minutes. 4. Turn off the evacuation pump. Observe the low-pressure gauge for five minutes to make sure that the system vacuum is held. If vacuum is not held for five minutes, leak test the system, service the leaks, and evacuate the system again. 5. Correctly oil match the system to verify that the correct amount of refrigerant oil is present in the system. 6. Charge the system with the specified weight of refrigerant and refrigerant oil. 7. When no more refrigerant is being drawn into the system, start the engine and select MAX A/C operation. Adjust the blower motor speed to maximum and allow the remaining refrigerant to be drawn into the system. Continue to add refrigerant into the system until the specified weight of R-134a has been added. Close the charging cylinder valve and allow the system to pull any remaining refrigerant from the hose. When the suction pressure drops to approximately 207 kPa (30 psi), close the charging hose valve. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil Capacity ...................................................................................................................... ............................................................. 9 oz (266 ml) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 6648 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Item ...................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................ Specification PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) F7AZ-19589-DA (Motorcraft YN-12-C) ................................................................................................................................................... WSH-M1C231-B Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6649 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair REFRIGERANT OIL ADDING CAUTION: During normal A/C operation, oil is circulated through the system with the refrigerant, and a small amount is retained in each component. If certain components of the system are removed for new installation, some of the refrigerant oil will go with the component. To maintain the original total oil charge, it is necessary to compensate for the oil lost by adding oil to the system with the new part. 1. NOTE: Service A/C compressors are shipped without compressor oil. Rotate the A/C compressor shaft six to eight revolutions while collecting oil in a clean measuring device. If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is between 85-142 ml (3-5 ounces), pour the same amount plus 30 ml (1 ounce) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B into the new A/C compressor. - If the amount of oil that was removed from the old A/C compressor is greater than 142 ml (5 ounces), pour the same amount drained of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B into the new A/C compressor. - If the amount of oil that was removed from the old A/C compressor is less than 85 ml (3 ounces), pour 85 ml (3 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B into the new A/C compressor. 2. For the suction accumulator/drier, drill two 1/2 inch holes in the suction accumulator/drier cylinder and drain the oil into a calibrated container - Add a quantity of new oil to match that drained from the old suction accumulator/drier plus 60 ml (2 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. 3. For the A/C evaporator core, add 89 ml (3 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B to the suction accumulator/drier inlet tube. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6650 4. For the A/C condenser core, add 30 ml (1 ounce) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B to the A/C condenser core or the suction accumulator/drier inlet tube. 5. Add 60 ml (2 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B to the suction accumulator/drier inlet tube when carrying out each of the following repairs: installation of a new A/C evaporator core orifice - installation of a new A/C compressor pressure relief valve - installation of a new refrigerant line - repair of an O-ring seal leak - repair of a charge port leak 6. Installation of new components that do not require discharge of refrigerant and resulting oil loss, such as the A/C cycling switch and the A/C pressure transducer, do not require additional oil. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch View 151-15 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch > Page 6655 View 151-15 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch > Page 6658 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch and A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation A/C Cycling Switch and A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch A/C CYCLING SWITCH AIC Cycling Switch The A/C cycling switch is mounted on a Schrader valve-type fitting on the top of the suction accumulator. - A valve depressor, located inside the threaded end of the A/C cycling switch, presses in on the Schrader valve stem. - This allows the suction pressure inside the suction accumulator to control the operation of the A/C cycling switch. - The electrical switch contacts open when the suction pressure drops to 152-193 kPa (22-28 psi). - The contacts close when the suction pressure rises to 276-324 kPa (40-47 psi). - When the A/C cycling switch contacts close, the signal to energize the A/C clutch is sent to the powertrain control module (PCM) which energizes the A/C relay and supplies B+ voltage to the A/C clutch field coil. - When the A/C cycling switch contacts open, the A/C clutch field coil is deenergized and compressor operation stops. - The A/C cycling switch will control the A/C evaporator core pressure at a point where the plate/fin surface temperature will be maintained slightly above freezing. - This prevents icing of the A/C evaporator core and blockage of airflow. - It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to remove the A/C cycling switch. A/C PRESSURE CUT-OFF SWITCH A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch The A/C pressure cut-off switch is used to interrupt A/C compressor operation in the event of high system discharge pressures. - The A/C pressure cut-off switch is mounted on a Schrader valve-type fitting on the high pressure side of the condenser to evaporator line. - A valve depressor, located inside the threaded end of the A/C pressure cut-off switch, is used to monitor the compressor discharge pressure. - It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch. - The A/C pressure cut-off switch has two sets of contacts. One electrical contact is normally closed. - When the compressor discharge pressure rises to approximately 3,103 kPa (450 psi), the switch contacts open, disengaging the A/C compressor. - When the pressure drops to approximately 1,724 kPa (250 psi), the contacts close to allow operation of the A/C compressor. The switch contains a second set of electrical contacts used for high-speed fan control. - When the compressor discharge pressure reaches approximately 2,241 kPa (325 psi), these contacts close and engage the high-speed fan control. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch and A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch > Page 6661 - When the pressure drops to approximately 1,896 kPa (275 psi), the contacts again open and the high speed fan control is disengaged. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch and A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch > Page 6662 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Cycling Switch AIR CONDITIONING CYCLING SWITCH The air conditioning (A/C) cycling switch may be wired to either the ACCS or ACPSW PCM input. When the A/C cycling switch opens, the PCM will turn off the A/C clutch. For information on the specific function of the A/C cycling switch, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning. The A/C cycling switch (ACCS) circuit to the PCM provides a voltage signal which indicates when the A/C is requested. When the A/C demand switch is turned on, and both the A/C cycling switch and the high pressure contacts of the A/C high pressure switch (if equipped and in circuit) are closed, voltage is supplied to the ACCS circuit at the PCM. Refer to the applicable Vehicle/Diagrams for vehicle specific wiring. If the ACCS signal is not received by the PCM, the PCM circuit will not allow the A/C to operate. For additional information, refer to PCM outputs, wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff. NOTE: Some applications do not have a dedicated (separate) input to the PCM indicating that A/C is requested. This information is received by the PCM through the communication link. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch and A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch > Page 6663 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Pressure Sensor AIR CONDITIONING PRESSURE SENSOR A/C Pressure Sensor Output Voltage Vs. Pressure Chart Typical Air Conditioning Pressure Sensor The air conditioning pressure (A/C pressure) sensor (Figure 26) is located in the high pressure (discharge) side of the air conditioning A/C system. The A/C pressure sensor provides a voltage signal to the powertrain control module (PCM) that is proportional to the A/C pressure. The PCM uses this information for A/C clutch control, fan control and idle speed control. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch and A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch > Page 6664 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning High Pressure Switch AIR CONDITIONING HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH The A/C high pressure switch is used for additional A/C system pressure control. The A/C high pressure switch is either dual function for two-speed electric fan applications or single function for all others. For refrigerant containment control, the normally closed high pressure contacts open at a predetermined A/C pressure. This will result in the A/C turning off, preventing the A/C pressure from rising to a level that would open the A/C high pressure relief valve. For fan control, the normally open medium pressure contacts close at a predetermined A/C pressure. This grounds the ACPSW circuit input to the PCM. The PCM will then turn on the high speed fan to help reduce the pressure. For additional information, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning or Vehicle/Diagrams. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) CYCLING SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the A/C cycling switch. 1 Disconnect the A/C cycling switch electrical connector. 2 Remove the A/C cycling switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch > Page 6667 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Pressure Cutoff Switch PRESSURE CUTOFF SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the pressure cut-off switch. 1 Disconnect the A/C pressure cut-off switch electrical connector. 2 Remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations View 151-18 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6672 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6673 Blower Motor Relay: Description and Operation BLOWER MOTOR RELAY The blower motor relay supplies voltage to the blower motor and is activated when the key is ON and the function selector switch is in any position besides OFF. The blower motor relay is located under the instrument panel next to the steering column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6674 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6675 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6679 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6680 Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY The A/C compressor clutch relay supplies voltage to the A/C compressor clutch and is located in the battery junction box (BJB). The power control module (PCM) can interrupt the A/C compressor operation through the A/C compressor clutch relay under the following conditions: - during engine start-up - wide open throttle (WOT) - low engine idle conditions - excessively high engine temperatures Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6681 Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6682 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair BLOWER MOTOR SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Remove the blower motor switch knob. 3. Remove the blower motor switch. - Depress the locking tab. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR A/C Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor Voltage And Resistance Chart, Part 1 A/C Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor Voltage And Resistance Chart, Part 2 The air conditioning evaporative temperature (ACET) sensor senses evaporator air discharge temperature. The ACET sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The PCM sources a low current 5 volts on the ACET circuit. With SIG RTN also connected to the ACET sensor, the varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals. As A/C evaporator air temperature changes, the varying resistance of the ACET sensor changes the voltage the PCM detects. The ACET sensor is used to more accurately control A/C clutch cycling, improving defrost/demist performance, reduce A/C clutch cycling, etc. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch View 151-15 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch > Page 6694 View 151-15 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch > Page 6697 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch and A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation A/C Cycling Switch and A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch A/C CYCLING SWITCH AIC Cycling Switch The A/C cycling switch is mounted on a Schrader valve-type fitting on the top of the suction accumulator. - A valve depressor, located inside the threaded end of the A/C cycling switch, presses in on the Schrader valve stem. - This allows the suction pressure inside the suction accumulator to control the operation of the A/C cycling switch. - The electrical switch contacts open when the suction pressure drops to 152-193 kPa (22-28 psi). - The contacts close when the suction pressure rises to 276-324 kPa (40-47 psi). - When the A/C cycling switch contacts close, the signal to energize the A/C clutch is sent to the powertrain control module (PCM) which energizes the A/C relay and supplies B+ voltage to the A/C clutch field coil. - When the A/C cycling switch contacts open, the A/C clutch field coil is deenergized and compressor operation stops. - The A/C cycling switch will control the A/C evaporator core pressure at a point where the plate/fin surface temperature will be maintained slightly above freezing. - This prevents icing of the A/C evaporator core and blockage of airflow. - It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to remove the A/C cycling switch. A/C PRESSURE CUT-OFF SWITCH A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch The A/C pressure cut-off switch is used to interrupt A/C compressor operation in the event of high system discharge pressures. - The A/C pressure cut-off switch is mounted on a Schrader valve-type fitting on the high pressure side of the condenser to evaporator line. - A valve depressor, located inside the threaded end of the A/C pressure cut-off switch, is used to monitor the compressor discharge pressure. - It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch. - The A/C pressure cut-off switch has two sets of contacts. One electrical contact is normally closed. - When the compressor discharge pressure rises to approximately 3,103 kPa (450 psi), the switch contacts open, disengaging the A/C compressor. - When the pressure drops to approximately 1,724 kPa (250 psi), the contacts close to allow operation of the A/C compressor. The switch contains a second set of electrical contacts used for high-speed fan control. - When the compressor discharge pressure reaches approximately 2,241 kPa (325 psi), these contacts close and engage the high-speed fan control. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch and A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch > Page 6700 - When the pressure drops to approximately 1,896 kPa (275 psi), the contacts again open and the high speed fan control is disengaged. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch and A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch > Page 6701 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Cycling Switch AIR CONDITIONING CYCLING SWITCH The air conditioning (A/C) cycling switch may be wired to either the ACCS or ACPSW PCM input. When the A/C cycling switch opens, the PCM will turn off the A/C clutch. For information on the specific function of the A/C cycling switch, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning. The A/C cycling switch (ACCS) circuit to the PCM provides a voltage signal which indicates when the A/C is requested. When the A/C demand switch is turned on, and both the A/C cycling switch and the high pressure contacts of the A/C high pressure switch (if equipped and in circuit) are closed, voltage is supplied to the ACCS circuit at the PCM. Refer to the applicable Vehicle/Diagrams for vehicle specific wiring. If the ACCS signal is not received by the PCM, the PCM circuit will not allow the A/C to operate. For additional information, refer to PCM outputs, wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff. NOTE: Some applications do not have a dedicated (separate) input to the PCM indicating that A/C is requested. This information is received by the PCM through the communication link. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch and A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch > Page 6702 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Pressure Sensor AIR CONDITIONING PRESSURE SENSOR A/C Pressure Sensor Output Voltage Vs. Pressure Chart Typical Air Conditioning Pressure Sensor The air conditioning pressure (A/C pressure) sensor (Figure 26) is located in the high pressure (discharge) side of the air conditioning A/C system. The A/C pressure sensor provides a voltage signal to the powertrain control module (PCM) that is proportional to the A/C pressure. The PCM uses this information for A/C clutch control, fan control and idle speed control. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch and A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch > Page 6703 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning High Pressure Switch AIR CONDITIONING HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH The A/C high pressure switch is used for additional A/C system pressure control. The A/C high pressure switch is either dual function for two-speed electric fan applications or single function for all others. For refrigerant containment control, the normally closed high pressure contacts open at a predetermined A/C pressure. This will result in the A/C turning off, preventing the A/C pressure from rising to a level that would open the A/C high pressure relief valve. For fan control, the normally open medium pressure contacts close at a predetermined A/C pressure. This grounds the ACPSW circuit input to the PCM. The PCM will then turn on the high speed fan to help reduce the pressure. For additional information, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning or Vehicle/Diagrams. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) CYCLING SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the A/C cycling switch. 1 Disconnect the A/C cycling switch electrical connector. 2 Remove the A/C cycling switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch > Page 6706 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Pressure Cutoff Switch PRESSURE CUTOFF SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the pressure cut-off switch. 1 Disconnect the A/C pressure cut-off switch electrical connector. 2 Remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Locations Service Port HVAC: Locations Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6710 Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6711 Service Port HVAC: Description and Operation GAUGE PORT VALVES The high-pressure gauge port valve is located on the condenser to evaporator line. The low-pressure gauge port valve is located on the A/C manifold and tube assembly. The fitting is an integral part of the refrigeration line or component. - Special couplings are required for both the high-side and low-side gauge ports. - The Schrader-type valve core can be repaired if the seal leaks. - Always install the A/C charging valve cap on gauge port valves after repairing the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Vacuum Harness HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair Vacuum Harness HVAC: Service and Repair VACUUM HOSE REPAIR Vacuum Tester SPECIAL TOOL(S) 1. Measure the length of the damaged area of the mini-tube vacuum hose. 2. Cut a piece of standard 3 mm (0.125 inch) inner diameter vacuum hose approximately 25 mm (1 inch) longer than the damaged area of the mini-tube vacuum hose. 3. Cut off the mini-tube vacuum hose on each side of the damaged area. 4. WARNING: Read the warning information on the product label. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Dip the mini-tube hose ends in commercially available paint thinner containing methyl ethyl ketone (MEK). This solvent will seal the mini-tube in the vacuum hose. 5. Insert the ends of the mini-tube vacuum hose approximately 9 mm (0.375 inch) into the ends of the standard 3 mm (0.125 inch) service vacuum hose section. 6. Shake the service joint after assembly to make sure the O-ring seal solvent is dispersed and the vacuum line is not plugged. 7. Test the system for a vacuum leak in the repair area. - Use the Vacuum Tester or equivalent. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment Inspection and Repair After a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment WARNING: Remove restraint system diagnostic tools from the vehicle prior to road testing. If tools are not removed, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) device may not deploy in a crash. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash and possibly violate vehicle safety standards. NOTE: After diagnosing or repairing a supplemental restraint system (SRS), the restraint system diagnostic tools (if required) must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. NOTE: Deployable devices (such as air bag modules, pretensioners) may deploy alone or in various combinations depending on the impact event. NOTE: Always refer to the appropriate workshop manual procedures prior to carrying out vehicle repairs affecting the SRS and safety belt system. NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. All vehicles 1. NOTE: Refer to the correct removal and installation procedure for all SRS components being installed. When any deployable device or combination of devices are deployed and/or the restraints control module (RCM) has the DTC B1231 (Event Threshold Exceeded) in memory, the repair of the vehicle's SRS is to include the removal of all deployed devices and the installation of new deployable devices, the removal and installation of new impact sensors, and the removal and installation of a new RCM. DTCs must cleared from all required modules after repairs are carried out. Vehicles with occupant classification sensor (OCS) system 2. NOTE: After installation of new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system components carry out the OCS System Reset procedure as instructed in the workshop manual. Refer to the appropriate workshop manual for OCS system removal and installation procedure. When a vehicle has been involved in a collision and the occupant classification system module (OCSM) has DTC B1231 stored in memory, the repair of the OCS system is to include the following procedures for the specified system: - For rail type OCS system, inspect the passenger side floorpan for damage and repair as necessary. Install new OCS system rails. - For weight sensor bolt type OCS system, inspect the passenger side floorpan for damage and repair as necessary. Install a new seat track with OCS system weight sensor bolts. DTC must be cleared from the OCSM before carrying out Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset. Do not install a new OCSM unless DTC B1231 cannot be cleared. - NOTE: Most bladder type OCSM do not store a DTC B1231 in memory after deployment. The DTC B1231 is stored only by the RCM. For bladder type OCS system, inspect for damage and repair as necessary. If installation of an OCS system component is required, an OCS system service kit must be installed. All vehicles 3. When any damage to the impact sensor mounting points or mounting hardware has occurred, repair or install new mounting points and mounting hardware as needed. 4. When the driver air bag module has deployed, a new clockspring must be installed. 5. New driver and/or front passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of the driver and/or front passenger safety belt pretensioners. For additional information, refer to Safety Belt System. 6. Inspect the entire vehicle for damage, including the following components: Steering column (deployable column if equipped) Instrument panel knee bolsters and mounting points Instrument panel braces and brackets Instrument panel and mounting points Seats and seat mounting points Safety belts, safety belt buckles and safety belt retractors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment > Page 6720 SRS wiring, wiring harnesses and connectors 7. After carrying out the review and inspection of the entire vehicle for damage, repair or install new components as needed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment > Page 6721 Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Safety Belt Procedure After A Collision SAFETY BELT PROCEDURE AFTER A COLLISION 1. WARNING: All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar), shoulder belt height adjusters, if so equipped, child safety seat tether attachments, and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. All belt assemblies should be replaced unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and operate correctly. Belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. NOTE: Safety belt assemblies should be periodically inspected to make sure they have not become damaged and that they remain in correct operating condition, particularly if they have been subjected to severe stress. Before installing the new safety belt assembly, the safety belt attaching areas must be inspected for damage and distortion. If the attaching points are damaged and distorted, the sheet metal must be reworked back to its original shape and structural integrity. Install the new safety belt(s) using the appropriate instructions. Perform the Functional Test. See: Seat Belt Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions WARNING: - If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed. The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming Depowering and Repowering Procedure Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered. NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected. 2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover. 4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front of any air bag module when the battery ground cable is connected. Connect the battery ground cable. 5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6728 Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Seats Removed DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION PROCEDURES There are two deactivation and reactivation procedures. - One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. - The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. Deactivation Procedure WARNING: If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed. The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. NOTE: - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. - After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the affected front seat. 9. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag floor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 11. Disconnect (if necessary) attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical connector. 12. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6729 Reactivation Procedure 1. WARNING: The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 4. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 5. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector. 6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 7. Install the affected front seat. 8. Connect the drive and passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connectors. 9. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver and passenger side air bag module electrical connectors. 10. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. Reconnect the electrical connector. 11. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 12. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 14. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure Seats Not Removed DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION PROCEDURES There are two deactivation and reactivation procedures. - One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. - The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. Deactivation Procedure WARNING: If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed. The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6730 non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. NOTE: - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. - After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position. 2. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the front seat. 10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable. Reactivation Procedure 1. WARNING: The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. Reconnect the electrical connector. 4. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6731 7. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 9. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6732 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist AIR BAG RECONNECT CHECKLIST The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system concern: 1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3. Restraints control module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors connected? 5. All sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected? Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6733 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure PROVE OUT PROCEDURE Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the restraints control module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Passenger Air Bag Module View 151-19 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Passenger Air Bag Module > Page 6738 Air Bag: Locations Side Air Bag Module View 151-24 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Passenger Air Bag Module > Page 6739 View 151-26 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Air Bag Unit Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Air Bag Unit > Page 6742 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Air Bag Unit > Page 6743 Air Bag: Diagrams Side Air Bag Module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6744 Air Bag: Description and Operation AIR BAG MODULE - DRIVER NOTE: References to the driver air bag module must not be confused with the seat-mounted air bag components of the supplemental restraint system (SRS). The driver air bag module: is steering wheel mounted. - will deploy upon receiving a signal from the restraints control module (RCM). - has no subassemblies. - is serviced with the steering wheel as an assembly. AIR BAG MODULE - DRIVER SIDE NOTE: References to side air bag modules refer to the seat-mounted and not to the steering wheel or instrument panel mounted air bag components of the supplemental restraint system (SRS). - When installing a new side air bag module after deployment, refer to Seats for additional information. The driver side air bag module: will deploy upon receiving a signal from the restraints control module (RCM) initiated by the driver side crash sensor. - is installed as an assembly. - is mounted in the driver seat back. AIR BAG MODULE - PASSENGER NOTE: References to the passenger air bag module must not be confused with the seat-mounted air bag components of the supplemental restraint system (SRS). The passenger air bag module: has no separately repairable parts and is installed as an assembly. - is mounted in the RH side of the instrument panel. AIR BAG MODULE - PASSENGER SIDE NOTE: References to side air bag modules refer to the seat-mounted and not to the steering wheel or instrument panel mounted air bag components of the supplemental restraint system (SRS). - When installing a new side air bag module after deployment, refer to Seats. The passenger side air bag module: will deploy upon receiving a signal from the restraints control module (RCM) initiated by the passenger side crash sensor. - is installed as an assembly. - is mounted in the passenger seat back. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6745 Air Bag: Service and Repair Removal and Installation WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and trim cover pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: Do not set a live air bag module down with the trim cover face down. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. WARNING: Air bag modules with discolored or damaged trim covers must be installed new, not repainted. WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Depower the system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Air Bag Disarming and Arming/Depowering and Repowering Procedure 2. NOTE: The driver air bag module and steering wheel must be serviced as an assembly. These components are not serviced separately NOTE: Make sure to follow all steps and instructions in the removal of the steering wheel. Remove the steering wheel. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 4. Repower the system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Air Bag Disarming and Arming/Depowering and Repowering Procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-25 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6749 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6750 Air Bag Control Module: Service Precautions WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6751 Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE The restraints control module (RCM) carries out the following functions: signals the inflators to deploy the air bags in the event of a deployable crash - monitors the air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) for faults - illuminates the air bag indicator if a fault is detected - flashes the air bag indicator to indicate the lamp fault code (LFC) detected - communicates through the data link connector (DLC) the current or historical diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) - signals the instrument cluster to activate a chime if the air bag indicator is not available and another SRS fault exists NOTE: The safety sensor is internal to the RCM and is not serviced separately. The RCM monitors the SRS for possible faults. If a fault is detected while the ignition switch is in the RUN position, the RCM will flash the air bag indicator located in the instrument cluster. When the ignition is cycled (turned off and then on), the air bag indicator will prove out by lighting for six seconds and then off for two seconds. After the prove out, the air bag indicator will then flash the two-digit LFC for any current SRS fault. If an SRS fault exists, the air bag indicator will flash the LFC five times, and then remain illuminated for the rest of the key cycle. The RCM will also communicate the current and historical DTCs through the DLC, to the scan tool. If the air bag indicator does not function, and the system detects a fault condition, the RCM will signal the instrument cluster to activate an audible chime. The chime is a series of five sets of five tone bursts. If the chime is heard, the SRS and the air bag indicator require repair. LFCs are prioritized. If two or more faults occur at the same time, the fault having the highest priority will be displayed. After that fault has been corrected, the next highest priority fault will be displayed. The RCM includes a backup power supply. This feature provides sufficient backup power to deploy the air bags in the event that the ignition circuit is damaged in a collision before the safing and air bag sensors determine that a deployment is required. The backup power supply will deplete its stored energy approximately one minute after the battery ground cable is disconnected. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Repair - Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Repair - "J" Nut, Restr Ctrl Module (RCM)/ Side Impact Sensor WELD NUT REPAIR - "J" NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND SIDE IMPACT SENSOR WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). NOTE: - There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld nut(s). Read both this procedures and Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, restraints control module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair. - If two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according to this procedure. Weld nuts must be installed according to Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor. - The following procedure applies to vehicles that have a rectangular hole in the sheet metal that is in close proximity to the missing weld nut. 1. Obtain a "J" nut (part number N623332-S301) or any of the following optional "J" nuts (part numbers: N623342-S101, N800854-S100, N800925-S100). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190) or equivalent. 3. Install the "J" nut through the rectangular hole in the sheet metal. 4. NOTE: Be sure the threaded portion of the "J" nut is aligned with the clearance hole in the sheet metal. Install the crash sensor. 5. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Repair - Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Repair - Missing Nut, Restr Ctrl Module (RCM)/Impact Sensor WELD NUT REPAIR - MISSING WELD NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND SIDE IMPACT SENSOR WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). NOTE: - There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld nut(s). Read both this procedure and Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, restraints control module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair. - Use only this procedure if two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according to Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Crash Sensor. - Radiator support repair shown, others are similar. 1. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) weld nut (part number N806285-S190). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190). 3. Route a sufficient length of copper welding wire through the weld nut clearance hole and back out an adjacent access hole. 4. Feed the copper welding wire through the weld nut, then through a standard flat washer. 5. Secure the flat washer so that it cannot be pulled off the end of the copper welding wire. 6. Pull the copper welding wire back through the clearance hole, allowing the weld nut and flat washer to follow the copper welding wire through. 7. Position the weld nut to the weld nut clearance hole, firmly pulling on the copper welding wire allowing the secured flat washer to hold the weld nut in position. 8. Holding the weld nut securely in place and using a MIG welder, weld in four places around the edge of the weld nut. 9. Metal finish as required. 10. Verify the nut is securely in place. 11. Install the crash sensor. 12. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Repair - Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Repair - Stripped Nut, Restr Ctrl Module (RCM)/Impact Sensor WELD NUT REPAIR - STRIPPED WELD NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND SIDE IMPACT SENSOR WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). 1. Obtain an 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw (part number N802455-S190). 2. Drill out the internal threads of the stripped-out weld nut to 7.37 mm (0.29 in) using a letter "L" size drill bit. 3. Position the crash sensor to the vehicle. 4. Install the 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw into the drilled-out weld nut. 5. Install the remaining attaching screws. 6. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6759 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Description and Operation CLOCKSPRING The clockspring: - is mounted on the steering column, behind the steering wheel. - provides a continuous electrical path between the restraints control module (RCM) and the driver air bag module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left View 151-24 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left > Page 6764 View 151-26 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Right Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Right > Page 6767 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information Impact Sensor: Customer Safety Information WARNING: The restraints control module (RCM) orientation is critical for correct system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) has been involved in a collision in which the center tunnel area has been damaged, inspect the mounting and bracket for deformation. If damaged, the RCM must be replaced whether or not the air bags have deployed. In addition, make sure the area of the RCM mounting is restored to its original condition. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 6770 Impact Sensor: Technician Safety Information WARNING: - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. - The tightening torque of the air bag side crash sensor retaining bolts is critical for proper system operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 6771 Impact Sensor: Description and Operation SENSORS WARNING: The restraints control module (RCM) orientation is critical for correct system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) has been involved in a collision in which the center tunnel area has been damaged, inspect the mounting and bracket for deformation. If damaged, the RCM must be replaced whether or not the air bags have deployed. In addition, make sure the area of the RCM mounting is restored to its original condition. For this vehicle, the SRS employs three crash sensors. One of the sensors is integral to the RCM and is not serviceable separately. In addition, there are two side crash sensors located in the LH and RH B-pillars. The RCM is mounted on the center tunnel under the instrument panel. Mounting orientation is critical for correct operation of all crash sensors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation SIDE IMPACT SENSOR - DRIVER SIDE Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. NOTE: - If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. - Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. - Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. - After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6774 procedure again. 1. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar, To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 2. Remove the steering wheel access cover. 3. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6775 5. Open the glove box past its stops. 6. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the instrument panel (I/P), disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6776 9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket under the seat. 2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. 12. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6777 13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver side air bag module floor electrical connector. 14. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat bracket. 2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system diagnostic tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 19. Remove the B-pillar trim panel. 20. Remove the side crash sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6778 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolts. 3 Remove the side crash sensor. INSTALLATION WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. NOTE: - If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. - Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. - Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. - After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. 1. WARNING: The tightening torque of the air bag side crash sensor retaining bolts is critical for proper system operation. Install the side crash sensor. 1 Position the side crash sensor to the B-pillar. 2 Install the bolts. 3 Connect the side crash sensor electrical connector. 2. Connect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6779 3. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still in place at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 4. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 5. Install the B-pillar trim panel. 6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. 7. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 8. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6780 9. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag module electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 10. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. 11. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 12. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6781 13. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air bag module electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 14. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 15. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 16. Close the glove box. 17. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6782 Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. 18. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 19. Install the steering wheel access cover. 20. Connect the battery ground cable. 21. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 22. Check the restraint system for correct operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6783 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair General Procedures "J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor WELD NUT REPAIR - "J" NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND SIDE IMPACT SENSOR WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). NOTE: - There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld nut(s). Read both this procedures and Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, restraints control module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair. - If two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according to this procedure. Weld nuts must be installed according to Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor. - The following procedure applies to vehicles that have a rectangular hole in the sheet metal that is in close proximity to the missing weld nut. 1. Obtain a "J" nut (part number N623332-S301) or any of the following optional "J" nuts (part numbers: N623342-S101, N800854-S100, N800925-S100). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190) or equivalent. 3. Install the "J" nut through the rectangular hole in the sheet metal. 4. NOTE: Be sure the threaded portion of the "J" nut is aligned with the clearance hole in the sheet metal. Install the crash sensor. 5. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Missing Weld Nut, Restr Ctrl Module (RCM)/Side Impact Sensor WELD NUT REPAIR - MISSING WELD NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND SIDE IMPACT SENSOR WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). NOTE: - There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld nut(s). Read both this procedure and Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, restraints control module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair. - Use only this procedure if two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according to Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Crash Sensor. - Radiator support repair shown, others are similar. 1. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) weld nut (part number N806285-S190). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6784 3. Route a sufficient length of copper welding wire through the weld nut clearance hole and back out an adjacent access hole. 4. Feed the copper welding wire through the weld nut, then through a standard flat washer. 5. Secure the flat washer so that it cannot be pulled off the end of the copper welding wire. 6. Pull the copper welding wire back through the clearance hole, allowing the weld nut and flat washer to follow the copper welding wire through. 7. Position the weld nut to the weld nut clearance hole, firmly pulling on the copper welding wire allowing the secured flat washer to hold the weld nut in position. 8. Holding the weld nut securely in place and using a MIG welder, weld in four places around the edge of the weld nut. 9. Metal finish as required. 10. Verify the nut is securely in place. 11. Install the crash sensor. 12. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Stripped Weld Nut, Restr Ctrl Module (RCM)/Side Impact Sensor WELD NUT REPAIR - STRIPPED WELD NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND SIDE IMPACT SENSOR WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). 1. Obtain an 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw (part number N802455-S190). 2. Drill out the internal threads of the stripped-out weld nut to 7.37 mm (0.29 in) using a letter "L" size drill bit. 3. Position the crash sensor to the vehicle. 4. Install the 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw into the drilled-out weld nut. 5. Install the remaining attaching screws. 6. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6785 Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Safing Sensor, Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation Safing Sensor: Description and Operation NOTE: The safety sensor is internal to the RCM and is not serviced separately. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Locations Side Air Bag: Locations View 151-24 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 6792 View 151-26 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Right Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Right > Page 6795 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-25 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6800 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6801 Air Bag Control Module: Service Precautions WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6802 Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE The restraints control module (RCM) carries out the following functions: signals the inflators to deploy the air bags in the event of a deployable crash - monitors the air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) for faults - illuminates the air bag indicator if a fault is detected - flashes the air bag indicator to indicate the lamp fault code (LFC) detected - communicates through the data link connector (DLC) the current or historical diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) - signals the instrument cluster to activate a chime if the air bag indicator is not available and another SRS fault exists NOTE: The safety sensor is internal to the RCM and is not serviced separately. The RCM monitors the SRS for possible faults. If a fault is detected while the ignition switch is in the RUN position, the RCM will flash the air bag indicator located in the instrument cluster. When the ignition is cycled (turned off and then on), the air bag indicator will prove out by lighting for six seconds and then off for two seconds. After the prove out, the air bag indicator will then flash the two-digit LFC for any current SRS fault. If an SRS fault exists, the air bag indicator will flash the LFC five times, and then remain illuminated for the rest of the key cycle. The RCM will also communicate the current and historical DTCs through the DLC, to the scan tool. If the air bag indicator does not function, and the system detects a fault condition, the RCM will signal the instrument cluster to activate an audible chime. The chime is a series of five sets of five tone bursts. If the chime is heard, the SRS and the air bag indicator require repair. LFCs are prioritized. If two or more faults occur at the same time, the fault having the highest priority will be displayed. After that fault has been corrected, the next highest priority fault will be displayed. The RCM includes a backup power supply. This feature provides sufficient backup power to deploy the air bags in the event that the ignition circuit is damaged in a collision before the safing and air bag sensors determine that a deployment is required. The backup power supply will deplete its stored energy approximately one minute after the battery ground cable is disconnected. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Repair - Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Repair - "J" Nut, Restr Ctrl Module (RCM)/ Side Impact Sensor WELD NUT REPAIR - "J" NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND SIDE IMPACT SENSOR WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). NOTE: - There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld nut(s). Read both this procedures and Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, restraints control module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair. - If two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according to this procedure. Weld nuts must be installed according to Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor. - The following procedure applies to vehicles that have a rectangular hole in the sheet metal that is in close proximity to the missing weld nut. 1. Obtain a "J" nut (part number N623332-S301) or any of the following optional "J" nuts (part numbers: N623342-S101, N800854-S100, N800925-S100). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190) or equivalent. 3. Install the "J" nut through the rectangular hole in the sheet metal. 4. NOTE: Be sure the threaded portion of the "J" nut is aligned with the clearance hole in the sheet metal. Install the crash sensor. 5. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Repair - Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Repair - Missing Nut, Restr Ctrl Module (RCM)/Impact Sensor WELD NUT REPAIR - MISSING WELD NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND SIDE IMPACT SENSOR WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). NOTE: - There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld nut(s). Read both this procedure and Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, restraints control module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair. - Use only this procedure if two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according to Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Crash Sensor. - Radiator support repair shown, others are similar. 1. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) weld nut (part number N806285-S190). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190). 3. Route a sufficient length of copper welding wire through the weld nut clearance hole and back out an adjacent access hole. 4. Feed the copper welding wire through the weld nut, then through a standard flat washer. 5. Secure the flat washer so that it cannot be pulled off the end of the copper welding wire. 6. Pull the copper welding wire back through the clearance hole, allowing the weld nut and flat washer to follow the copper welding wire through. 7. Position the weld nut to the weld nut clearance hole, firmly pulling on the copper welding wire allowing the secured flat washer to hold the weld nut in position. 8. Holding the weld nut securely in place and using a MIG welder, weld in four places around the edge of the weld nut. 9. Metal finish as required. 10. Verify the nut is securely in place. 11. Install the crash sensor. 12. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Repair - Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Repair - Stripped Nut, Restr Ctrl Module (RCM)/Impact Sensor WELD NUT REPAIR - STRIPPED WELD NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND SIDE IMPACT SENSOR WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). 1. Obtain an 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw (part number N802455-S190). 2. Drill out the internal threads of the stripped-out weld nut to 7.37 mm (0.29 in) using a letter "L" size drill bit. 3. Position the crash sensor to the vehicle. 4. Install the 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw into the drilled-out weld nut. 5. Install the remaining attaching screws. 6. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions WARNING: - If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed. The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming Depowering and Repowering Procedure Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered. NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected. 2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover. 4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front of any air bag module when the battery ground cable is connected. Connect the battery ground cable. 5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6813 Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Seats Removed DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION PROCEDURES There are two deactivation and reactivation procedures. - One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. - The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. Deactivation Procedure WARNING: If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed. The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. NOTE: - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. - After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the affected front seat. 9. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag floor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 11. Disconnect (if necessary) attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical connector. 12. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6814 Reactivation Procedure 1. WARNING: The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 4. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 5. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector. 6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 7. Install the affected front seat. 8. Connect the drive and passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connectors. 9. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver and passenger side air bag module electrical connectors. 10. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. Reconnect the electrical connector. 11. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 12. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 14. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure Seats Not Removed DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION PROCEDURES There are two deactivation and reactivation procedures. - One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. - The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. Deactivation Procedure WARNING: If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed. The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6815 non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. NOTE: - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. - After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position. 2. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the front seat. 10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable. Reactivation Procedure 1. WARNING: The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. Reconnect the electrical connector. 4. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6816 7. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 9. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6817 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist AIR BAG RECONNECT CHECKLIST The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system concern: 1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3. Restraints control module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors connected? 5. All sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected? Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6818 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure PROVE OUT PROCEDURE Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the restraints control module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Service Precautions Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service Precautions WARNING: - All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar), shoulder belt height adjusters (if so equipped), child safety seat tether attachments, and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. All belt assemblies should be replaced unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and operate properly. Belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. - It is important that the bolt/anchor be securely tightened to specification. Otherwise, the child's safety seat may not be properly secured, and the child can be injured in case of a sudden stop or accident. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 6823 Child Seat Tether Attachment: Description and Operation ATTACHING SAFETY SEATS WITH TETHER STRAPS Some manufacturers make child safety seats that include a tether strap that goes over the back of the vehicle seat and attaches to an anchoring point. Other manufacturers offer the tether strap as an accessory. Contact the manufacturer of the child safety seat for information about ordering a tether strap. Child safety seat tether anchors are manufactured into the vehicle. See the owners manual for locations. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 6824 Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ANCHOR REMOVAL WARNING: All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar), shoulder belt height adjusters (if so equipped), child safety seat tether attachments, and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. All belt assemblies should be replaced unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and operate properly. Belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. 1. At the roof, near the rear liftgate door, remove the child safety seat tether anchor cover. 2. Remove the child safety seat tether anchor. 1 Remove the bolt. 2 Remove the child safety seat tether anchor. INSTALLATION 1. WARNING: It is important that the bolt/anchor be securely tightened to specification. Otherwise, the child's safety seat may not be properly secured, and the child can be injured in case of a sudden stop or accident. NOTE: Rework the sheet metal to its original condition and structural integrity. - Make sure to tighten the bolts to specification. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 2. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-17-11 > Sep > 05 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set Seat Belt: Customer Interest SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set TSB 05-17-11 09/05/05 RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881 FORD: 2001-2004 Escape This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure. ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully functional. ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt buckle pretensioner. One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for complete repair procedure. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs. A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With 14056D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7861202 OR 7861203 X2 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 05-17-11 > Sep > 05 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set TSB 05-17-11 09/05/05 RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881 FORD: 2001-2004 Escape This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure. ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully functional. ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt buckle pretensioner. One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for complete repair procedure. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs. A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With 14056D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7861202 OR 7861203 X2 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 05-3-10 > Feb > 05 > Restraints - Seat Belt Stop Button Service Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Stop Button Service TSB 05-3-10 02/21/05 SAFETY BELT WEB STOP BUTTON SERVICE FORD: 2000-2004 Mustang 2000-2005 Crown Victoria, Focus, Taurus 1999-2005 F-Super Duty 2000-2003 Windstar 2000-2005 Excursion, F-150, Ranger 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2002-2005 Explorer 2003-2004 Expedition 2004-2005 Freestar 2005 Escape Hybrid LINCOLN: 2000-2005 LS, Town Car 2003-2004 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2001-2005 Mariner 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey ISSUE To service a safety belt web stop button (the button that keeps the belt tongue from sliding down when not in use), a service kit is now available. ACTION Install the safety belt button kit, DO NOT replace the entire safety belt assembly. Follow the Service Procedure in the Instruction Sheet that comes with the kit. Refer to Section 501-20A of the appropriate model year Workshop Manual for additional information if needed. NOTE ONE KIT WILL REPAIR ONE SEAT BELT BUTTON. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 70611B09 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 05-3-10 > Feb > 05 > Restraints - Seat Belt Stop Button Service Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Stop Button Service TSB 05-3-10 02/21/05 SAFETY BELT WEB STOP BUTTON SERVICE FORD: 2000-2004 Mustang 2000-2005 Crown Victoria, Focus, Taurus 1999-2005 F-Super Duty 2000-2003 Windstar 2000-2005 Excursion, F-150, Ranger 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2002-2005 Explorer 2003-2004 Expedition 2004-2005 Freestar 2005 Escape Hybrid LINCOLN: 2000-2005 LS, Town Car 2003-2004 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2001-2005 Mariner 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey ISSUE To service a safety belt web stop button (the button that keeps the belt tongue from sliding down when not in use), a service kit is now available. ACTION Install the safety belt button kit, DO NOT replace the entire safety belt assembly. Follow the Service Procedure in the Instruction Sheet that comes with the kit. Refer to Section 501-20A of the appropriate model year Workshop Manual for additional information if needed. NOTE ONE KIT WILL REPAIR ONE SEAT BELT BUTTON. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 70611B09 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information Seat Belt: Customer Safety Information WARNING: Rear-facing infant seats should never be placed in the front seat. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 6849 Seat Belt: Technician Safety Information WARNING: - Do not bleach or re-dye the webbing, as the webbing may weaken. - All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar), shoulder belt height adjusters (if so equipped), child safety seat tether attachments, and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. All belt assemblies should be replaced unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and operate properly. Belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. - The safety belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so could result in pretensioner or air bag deployment and could result in personal injury. - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module or safety belt retractor/pretensioner assembly. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and trim cover or deployment door pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Remote deployment is to be performed outdoors with all personnel at least 6.1 meters (20 feet) away to ensure personal safety. Due to the loud report which occurs when the air bag is deployed, hearing protection is required. - Do not place the driver or passenger air bag module with the trim cover or deployment door facing down, as the forces of the deploying air bag could cause it to ricochet and cause personal injury. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 6850 Seat Belt: Description and Operation SAFETY BELT, LAP/SHOULDER - DUAL LOCKING MODE WARNING: Rear-facing infant seats should never be placed in the front seat. The dual locking mode retractor on the shoulder belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder safety belt for the front outboard passenger and both rear outboard seating positions, operates in two ways. The driver single locking mode retractor on the shoulder belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder safety belt works only in the vehicle sensitive mode. 1. In the vehicle-sensitive (emergency locking) mode, the shoulder belt retractor allows the occupant freedom of movement, locking tight only on hard braking, hard cornering or impacts of approximately 8 km/h (5 mph) or more. The front and rear outboard seat belt retractors can also be made to lock by pulling/jerking on the belt. 2. In the automatic locking mode, the shoulder belt retractor automatically locks and remains locked when the combination lap/shoulder safety belt is buckled and does not allow the occupant freedom of movement. This mode provides tight lap/shoulder belt fit on the occupant and on a child safety seat. 3. When the combination lap/shoulder belt is unbuckled and allowed to retract completely, the retractor switches to the vehicle-sensitive (emergency) locking mode. The automatic locking mode must be used when installing a child safety seat in the front outboard passenger and both rear outboard passenger seating positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Seat Belt: Service and Repair Removal and Installation SAFETY BELT - CENTER, REAR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION WARNING: All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar), shoulder belt height adjusters (if so equipped), child safety seat tether attachments, and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. All belt assemblies should be replaced unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and operate properly. Belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. 1. Remove the safety belt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6853 Seat Belt: Service and Repair General Procedures Safety Belt Cleaning SAFETY BELT CLEANING 1. WARNING: Do not bleach or re-dye the webbing, as the webbing may weaken. Clean the safety belt webbing only with a mild soap solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpets. Follow the instructions provided with the soap. Safety Belt With Anchor Plate Thread Damage SAFETY BELT WITH ANCHOR PLATE THREAD DAMAGE 1. Remove the broken or stripped bolt and discard. 2. Drill out the internal threads in the safety belt anchor plate with a 10.7 mm (27/64 in) drill. 3. Rethread the anchor plate with a 1/2-13 tap (seat belt). 4. Clean out the chips. 5. Install the attachment parts. Original parts are to be replaced with the repair parts indicated in the Safety Belt Parts Replacement Guidelines. 6. When repairing a multiple belt and attachment, install the nut to the bolt in the tunnel area from the underside of the floorpan. Safety Belt Tongue Rotated on Belt SAFETY BELT TONGUE ROTATED ON BELT 1. Fold the safety belt as indicated. 2. Pull the safety belt tongue over the fold in the safety belt. Deployed SAFETY BELT PRETENSIONER DISPOSAL - DEPLOYED 1. WARNING: The safety belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so could result in pretensioner or air bag deployment and could result in personal injury. Dispose of the deployed safety belt pretensioner in the same manner as any other part to be scrapped. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6854 Inoperative SAFETY BELT PRETENSIONER DISPOSAL - UNDEPLOYED, INOPERATIVE WARNING: - The safety belt pretensioner is pyrotechnic devices. Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so could result in personal injury. - Carry a live safety belt retractor pretensioner or safety belt buckle pretensioner so as to keep fingers and clothing away from moveable parts. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. NOTE: All inoperative safety belt buckle pretensioners and safety belt retractor pretensioners have been placed on the Mandatory Return List. All damaged safety belt buckle pretensioners and safety belt retractor pretensioners must be treated the same as any inoperative live safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt retractor pretensioner being returned. 1. Remove the inoperative safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt retractor pretensioner from the vehicle. 2. Package and return the inoperative safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt retractor pretensioner to Ford Motor Company. Scrapped Vehicle SAFETY BELT PRETENSIONER DISPOSAL - UNDEPLOYED, INOPERATIVE REMOTE DEPLOYMENT WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module or safety belt retractor/pretensioner assembly. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and trim cover or deployment door pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Remote deployment is to be performed outdoors with all personnel at least 6.1 meters (20 feet) away to ensure personal safety. Due to the loud report which occurs when the air bag is deployed, hearing protection is required. - Do not place the driver or passenger air bag module with the trim cover or deployment door facing down, as the forces of the deploying air bag could cause it to ricochet and cause personal injury. 1. Remove the safety belt pretensioner from the vehicle. 2. Cut and strip the wires near the electrical connector. 3. Obtain two wires (20 gauge minimum) at least 6.1 meters (20 feet) long and attach one end of each wire to stripped ends of the pretensioner wires. 4. Place the pretensioner on a flat surface in an open outdoor area. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6855 5. Remain at least 6.1 meters (20 feet) away from the safety belt pretensioner. 6. Deploy the safety belt pretensioner by touching the other ends of the two wires to the terminals of a 12-volt battery. 7. To allow for cooling, wait at least ten minutes before approaching the deployed safety belt pretensioner. 8. Dispose of the deployed safety belt pretensioner in the same manner as any other part to be scrapped. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Seat Belt Buckle: Technician Safety Information WARNING: - The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when servicing an air bag-equipped vehicle and when handling a belt and buckle assembly pretensioner. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Never probe the connectors on a pyrotechnic device. Doing so could result in belt and buckle assembly pretensioner or air bag deployment and could result in personal injury. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. - All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar), shoulder belt height adjusters (if so equipped), child safety seat tether attachments, and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. All belt assemblies should be replaced unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and operate properly. Belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 6860 Seat Belt Buckle: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 6861 Seat Belt Buckle: Description and Operation SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER ASSEMBLY - FRONT The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt buckle and pretensioner are secured to the front seat cushion frame assembly. This allows the front safety belt buckle end to move with the front seat. The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device that removes excess webbing from the safety belt system. The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner uses the same crash sensor system as the air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS). When the belt and buckle assembly pretensioner deploys, the buckle moves downward, pulling excess webbing from the lap and shoulder safety belts. If the safety belt buckle and pretensioner assembly is deployed, a new assembly must be installed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER Seat Belt Bolt Bit SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: - The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when servicing an air bag-equipped vehicle and when handling a belt and buckle assembly pretensioner. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Never probe the connectors on a pyrotechnic device. Doing so could result in belt and buckle assembly pretensioner or air bag deployment and could result in personal injury. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. NOTE: - If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. - Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. - Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. - After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. 1. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 6864 To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 2. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. NOTE: Make sure to follow all steps and instructions in the removal procedure of the affected seat. Remove the affected seat from the vehicle. 3. NOTE: The driver seat safety belt buckle and pretensioner is shown, the passenger side is similar. Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield. Pull out to release the retaining clips. 4. NOTE: Note the wire harness routing for installation. Release the pin-type retainers and separate the safety belt buckle and pretensioner electrical connector and wire harness from the seat. 5. NOTE: Do not handle the safety belt buckle and pretensioner in the area of the safety belt buckle and pretensioner cable or retaining nut. Accidental pretensioner deployment could occur and result in personal injury. Remove the safety belt buckle and pretensioner. 1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt. 2 Remove the safety belt buckle and pretensioner. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 6865 INSTALLATION WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. NOTE: - If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. - Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped;) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. - Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. - After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. - The driver seat safety belt buckle and pretensioner is shown, the passenger side is similar. 1. Install the safety belt buckle and pretensioner. 1 Position the safety belt buckle and pretensioner to the seat cushion frame. 2 Align and install the anti-rotation tab of the safety belt buckle and pretensioner to the slot in the seat cushion frame. 3 Using the special tool, install the bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 6866 2. Route the safety belt buckle and pretensioner wire harness as noted in removal. Install the wire harness and electrical connector pin-type retainers. 3. Align the retaining clips and push in, installing the inboard seat cushion side shield. 4. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. NOTE: Make sure to follow all steps and instructions in the installation procedure of the affected seat. Install the affected seat into the vehicle. 5. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 6. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 6867 Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Safety Belt Buckle - Center and Passenger Side, Rear SAFETY BELT BUCKLE - CENTER AND PASSENGER SIDE, REAR Seat Belt Bolt Bit SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar), shoulder belt height adjusters (if so equipped), child safety seat tether attachments, and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. All belt assemblies should be replaced unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and operate properly. Belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. 1. Pivot the seat bottom forward. 2. Pivot the seat backrest back. 3. Remove the safety belt buckle assembly. 1 Position the carpet out of the way. 2 Using the special tool, remove the bolt. 3 Remove the safety belt buckle assembly. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: - Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to repositioning the seat. - Make sure that the safety belt buckles are accessible after repositioning the seat. - Make sure to tighten the bolt to specification. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 2. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 6868 Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Safety Belt Buckle - Driver Side, Rear SAFETY BELT BUCKLE - DRIVER SIDE, REAR Seat Belt Bolt Bit SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar), shoulder belt height adjusters (if so equipped), child safety seat tether attachments, and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. All belt assemblies should be replaced unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and operate properly. Belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. 1. Pivot the seat bottom forward. 2. Pivot the seat backrest back. 3. Remove the safety belt and buckle assembly. 1 Position the carpet out of the way. 2 Using the special tool, remove the bolt. 3 Feed the safety belt and buckle through the carpet and remove the assembly. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: - Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted after repositioning the seat. - Make sure that the safety belt and buckle are accessible after repositioning the seat. - Make sure to tighten the bolt to specification. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 2. Check the restraint system for correct operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6869 Seat Belt Bolt Bit Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt Buckle Switch: > 05-17-11 > Sep > 05 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Customer Interest SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set TSB 05-17-11 09/05/05 RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881 FORD: 2001-2004 Escape This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure. ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully functional. ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt buckle pretensioner. One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for complete repair procedure. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs. A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With 14056D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7861202 OR 7861203 X2 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle Switch: > 05-17-11 > Sep > 05 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set Seat Belt Buckle Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set TSB 05-17-11 09/05/05 RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881 FORD: 2001-2004 Escape This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure. ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully functional. ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt buckle pretensioner. One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for complete repair procedure. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs. A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With 14056D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7861202 OR 7861203 X2 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6883 View 151-24 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6884 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Extension > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Belt Extension: Description and Operation SAFETY BELT EXTENSION A safety belt that is too short even when fully extended can be lengthened. The safety belt extension is available. This assembly will add approximately 20 cm (8 inches) to the length of the safety belt. Use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short when fully extended. Do not use the safety belt extension to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso. Safety belt extensions are available at no cost from any authorized Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information > Service Precautions Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Service Precautions WARNING: All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar), shoulder belt height adjusters (if so equipped), child safety seat tether attachments, and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. All belt assemblies should be replaced unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and operate properly. Belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Service and Repair Removal and Installation SAFETY BELT SHOULDER HEIGHT ADJUSTER REMOVAL WARNING: All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar), shoulder belt height adjusters (if so equipped), child safety seat tether attachments, and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. All belt assemblies should be replaced unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and operate properly. Belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. NOTE: The driver side is shown, the passenger side is similar. 1. Remove the B-pillar trim panel. 2. Lower the height adjuster. 3. Remove the upper height adjuster bolt. 4. Raise the height adjuster. 5. Remove the height adjuster. 1 Remove the bolt. 2 Remove the height adjuster. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: - Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation. - Make sure to tighten bolts to specification. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure that the front safety belt retractor is not in the automatic locking retractor (ALR) mode. 2. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. - Carry out the emergency locking retractor (ELR) Mode Functional Test to make sure that the new retractor operates correctly. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6893 Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Service and Repair General Procedures SAFETY BELT SHOULDER HEIGHT ADJUSTER WITH STRIPPED WELD NUTS D-Ring Installation Kit SPECIAL TOOL(S) 1. Remove the trim panels. 2. Use the half-inch drill provided in D-Ring Installation Kit 100-F012 (134-00018) or equivalent to drill out the damaged threads in the upper B-pillar structure. 3. NOTE: After each rotation, back tap off slightly to remove new cuttings and be sure to clean out any chips before proceeding. Apply a suitable lubricant to the M14x1.5 tap provided in D-Ring Installation Kit 100-F012 (134-00018) and tap new threads. 4. Use a threaded insert provided in D-Ring Installation Kit 100-F012 (134-00018) or equivalent and screw it into the retapped hole until it is slightly Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6894 below the surface of the hole. 5. NOTE: If the two hex-head bolts on the front seat shoulder strap adjuster are not stripped, refer to Safety Belt Shoulder Height Adjuster to install the height adjuster to the body. If the front seat shoulder strap adjuster bolts are stripped, replace the adjuster. Use a hammer to lightly tap the installation tool provided in D-Ring Installation Kit 100-F012 (134-00018) several times to drive down the insert keys. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6895 D-Ring Installation Kit Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer: Description and Operation SAFETY BELT WARNING SYSTEM The safety belt warning indicator illuminates and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts. The conditions of operation for the safety belt warning indicator and chime are as follows: If the driver's safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned to RUN, the safety belt warning indicator illuminates for 1-2 minutes and the warning chime sounds for 4-8 seconds. - If the driver's safety belt is buckled while the warning indicator is illuminated and the reminder chime is sounding, the safety belt warning indicator and reminder chime turn off. - If the driver's safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to RUN, the safety belt warning indicator and reminder chime remain off. BELT MINDER The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function. This feature provides additional reminders to the driver that the driver's safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster. To activate or deactivate the Belt Minder feature, refer to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation SAFETY BELT WARNING SYSTEM The safety belt warning indicator illuminates and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts. The conditions of operation for the safety belt warning indicator and chime are as follows: If the driver's safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned to RUN, the safety belt warning indicator illuminates for 1-2 minutes and the warning chime sounds for 4-8 seconds. - If the driver's safety belt is buckled while the warning indicator is illuminated and the reminder chime is sounding, the safety belt warning indicator and reminder chime turn off. - If the driver's safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to RUN, the safety belt warning indicator and reminder chime remain off. BELT MINDER The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function. This feature provides additional reminders to the driver that the driver's safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster. To activate or deactivate the Belt Minder feature, refer to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt Retractor: > 05-16-11 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Seat Belts Slow to Retract Seat Belt Retractor: Customer Interest Restraints - Seat Belts Slow to Retract TSB 05-16-11 08/22/05 SAFETY BELT RETRACTION SPEED FORD: 2000-2003 Mustang 2000-2006 Crown Victoria, Taurus 2000-2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2000-2005 Excursion, Explorer 2000-2006 E-Series, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004-2006 Freestar 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2004-2006 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 2000-2002 Continental 2000-2006 LS, Town Car, Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2006 Grand Marquis 2000-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 04-24-21 to update the vehicle model years. ISSUE A service kit is now available to improve safety belt retraction speed. ACTION See the part application chart and select the appropriate kit. Follow the Instruction Sheet included in the kit. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 501-20A for additional information. NOTE TEFLON TAPE SHOULD ONLY BE USED ON THE FRONT ROW SEATS FOR VEHICLES LISTED IN THIS TSB, WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR AND THE MOUNTAINEER. TEFLON TAPE CAN ALSO BE USED ON SECOND ROW SEATS FOR THESE THREE VEHICLES. NOTE FOR MUSTANG, AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR AND MOUNTAINEER, REFER TO THE FOLLOWING BUILD DATE INFORMATION BEFORE PERFORMING THIS TSB. TEFLON TAPE HAS ALREADY BEEN INSTALLED DURING PRODUCTION ON SOME OF THESE VEHICLES. ^ MUSTANG: Only install on vehicles built through 6/15/2003. Teflon tape was already installed on vehicles built on/after 6/16/2003. ^ AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR/MOUNTAINEER (FRONT ROW SEATS): Only install on vehicles built through 6/24/2004. Teflon tape was already installed on vehicles built on/after 6/25/2004. ^ AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR/MOUNTAINEER (SECOND ROW SEATS): Only install on vehicles built through 10/21/2004. Teflon tape was already installed on vehicles built on/after 10/22/2004. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt Retractor: > 05-16-11 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Seat Belts Slow to Retract > Page 6910 Parts Block NOTE THE LABOR OPERATIONS WITHIN THIS TSB CAN BE CLAIMED IN COMBINATION AS NEEDED TO COVER THE REQUIRED REPAIRS. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 051611A Install Teflon Tape B 0.8 Hr. Pillars Both Sides (Includes Time To Remove And Install Trim Panels If Necessary) 051611B Install Teflon Tape C 1.1 Hrs. Pillars Both Sides (Includes Time To Remove And Install Trim Panels And Seats If Necessary) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 70611B08 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Retractor: > 05-16-11 > Aug > 05 > Restraints Seat Belts Slow to Retract Seat Belt Retractor: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belts Slow to Retract TSB 05-16-11 08/22/05 SAFETY BELT RETRACTION SPEED FORD: 2000-2003 Mustang 2000-2006 Crown Victoria, Taurus 2000-2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2000-2005 Excursion, Explorer 2000-2006 E-Series, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004-2006 Freestar 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2004-2006 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 2000-2002 Continental 2000-2006 LS, Town Car, Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2006 Grand Marquis 2000-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 04-24-21 to update the vehicle model years. ISSUE A service kit is now available to improve safety belt retraction speed. ACTION See the part application chart and select the appropriate kit. Follow the Instruction Sheet included in the kit. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 501-20A for additional information. NOTE TEFLON TAPE SHOULD ONLY BE USED ON THE FRONT ROW SEATS FOR VEHICLES LISTED IN THIS TSB, WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR AND THE MOUNTAINEER. TEFLON TAPE CAN ALSO BE USED ON SECOND ROW SEATS FOR THESE THREE VEHICLES. NOTE FOR MUSTANG, AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR AND MOUNTAINEER, REFER TO THE FOLLOWING BUILD DATE INFORMATION BEFORE PERFORMING THIS TSB. TEFLON TAPE HAS ALREADY BEEN INSTALLED DURING PRODUCTION ON SOME OF THESE VEHICLES. ^ MUSTANG: Only install on vehicles built through 6/15/2003. Teflon tape was already installed on vehicles built on/after 6/16/2003. ^ AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR/MOUNTAINEER (FRONT ROW SEATS): Only install on vehicles built through 6/24/2004. Teflon tape was already installed on vehicles built on/after 6/25/2004. ^ AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR/MOUNTAINEER (SECOND ROW SEATS): Only install on vehicles built through 10/21/2004. Teflon tape was already installed on vehicles built on/after 10/22/2004. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Retractor: > 05-16-11 > Aug > 05 > Restraints Seat Belts Slow to Retract > Page 6916 Parts Block NOTE THE LABOR OPERATIONS WITHIN THIS TSB CAN BE CLAIMED IN COMBINATION AS NEEDED TO COVER THE REQUIRED REPAIRS. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 051611A Install Teflon Tape B 0.8 Hr. Pillars Both Sides (Includes Time To Remove And Install Trim Panels If Necessary) 051611B Install Teflon Tape C 1.1 Hrs. Pillars Both Sides (Includes Time To Remove And Install Trim Panels And Seats If Necessary) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 70611B08 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6917 Seat Belt Retractor: Service Precautions WARNING: All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar), shoulder belt height adjusters (if so equipped), child safety seat tether attachments, and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. All belt assemblies should be replaced unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and operate properly. Belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Front Safety Belt Retractor FRONT SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR Seat Belt Bolt Bit SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar), shoulder belt height adjusters (if so equipped), child safety seat tether attachments, and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. All belt assemblies should be replaced unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and operate properly. Belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. NOTE: The driver side is shown, the passenger side is similar. 1. Remove the B-pillar trim panel. 2. Remove the safety belt anchor. 1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt. 2 Remove the safety belt anchor. 3. Separate the front safety belt retractor from the B-pillar. 1 Remove the bolt. 2 Using the special tool, remove the bolt. 3 Separate the front safety belt retractor from the B-pillar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6920 4. Remove the front safety belt retractor. 1 Disconnect the front safety belt retractor. 2 Remove the front safety belt retractor. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: - Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation. - Make sure to tighten bolts to specification. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure that after the front passenger safety belt retractor is installed, the retractor is not in the automatic locking retractor (ALR) mode. 2. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. - Carry out the emergency locking retractor (ELR) Mode Functional Test to make sure that the new retractor operates correctly. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6921 Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Rear Safety Belt Retractor REAR SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR Torx Bit, Safety Belt Bolt SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar), shoulder belt height adjusters (if so equipped), child safety seat tether attachments, and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. All belt assemblies should be replaced unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and operate properly. Belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. NOTE: Driver side shown, passenger side is similar. Vehicles with rear power point 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. Both rear safety belt retractors 2. Remove the rear door scuff plate. 1 Open the cover. 2 Remove the two pin-type retainers (one shown). 3 Remove the rear door scuff plate 3. Separate the weather-stripping from the C-pillar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6922 4. NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar. Pivot the seat cushion forward. 5. Remove the safety belt anchor. 1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt. 2 Remove the safety belt anchor. 6. NOTE: The rear safety belt guide has been removed for clarity. From behind the rear safety belt guide cover, release the retaining tabs, slide the cover up and remove it. 7. Remove the rear safety belt guide. 1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6923 2 Remove the safety belt guide. If necessary, remove the spacer from the rear safety belt guide. 8. Lower the second row seat backrest. 9. Separate the rear hatch weather-stripping along the scuff plate and rear quarter trim panel on the side of the safety belt retractor being serviced. 10. Remove the rear hatch scuff plate. - Pull up to release the relaining clips. Vehicles with a cargo cover 11. Remove the cargo cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6924 12. Remove the cargo cover hold-down. RH side only 13. Pull out to release the retaining clips and remove the rear quarter trim panel. LH side only 14. Pull out to release the retaining clips and separate the rear quarter trim panel. 15. Disconnect the power point connector, if equipped and remove the rear quarter trim panel. Both rear safety belt retractors Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6925 16. Remove the rear safety belt retractor. 1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt. 2 Remove the rear safety belt retractor. INSTALLATION Both rear safety belt retractors 1. Install the rear safety belt retractor. 1 Position the rear safety belt retractor to the C-pillar. 2 Using the special tool, install the bolt. LH side only 2. Position the rear quarter trim panel and connect the power point electrical connector. Both retractors Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6926 3. NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation. Install the quarter trim panel. 1 Position the quarter trim panel and feed the safety belt webbing through the opening. 2 Align the quarter trim panel and push in, fastening the retainers. Vehicles with a cargo cover 4. Install the cargo cover hold-down. 5. Install the cargo cover. Both rear safety belt retractors Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6927 6. Install the rear hatch scuff plate. 7. Install the rear hatch weather-stripping. 8. Make sure the spacer is installed onto the rear safety belt guide bolt. 9. NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation. Install the rear safety belt guide. 1 Position the safety belt guide. 2 Using the special tool, install the bolt. 10. NOTE: If the safety belt guide cover is damaged or if it does not remain in position, install a new cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6928 Install the rear safety belt guide cover. 11. Raise the second row seat backrest. 12. NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation. Install the safety belt anchor. 1 Position the safety belt anchor. 2 Using the special tool, install the bolt. 13. Install the C-pillar weatherstripping. 14. Install the rear door scuff plate. 1 Position the rear door scuff plate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6929 2 Install the two pin-type retainers (one shown). 3 Close the cover. 15. Position the seat cushion down. Vehicles with a rear power point 16. Connect the battery ground cable. All vehicles 17. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. 1 Make sure that after the rear safety belt retractor is installed, the retractor is not in the automatic locking retractor (ALR) mode. 2 Carry out the emergency locking retractor (ELR) Mode Functional Test to make sure that the new retractor operates correctly. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6930 Seat Belt Bolt Bit Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Seat Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Seat > Page 6935 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Seat Belt Tensioner: Technician Safety Information WARNING: - The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when servicing an air bag-equipped vehicle and when handling a belt and buckle assembly pretensioner. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Never probe the connectors on a pyrotechnic device. Doing so could result in belt and buckle assembly pretensioner or air bag deployment and could result in personal injury. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. - The safety belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so could result in pretensioner or air bag deployment and could result in personal injury. - Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and trim cover or deployment door pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Remote deployment is to be performed outdoors with all personnel at least 6.1 meters (20 feet) away to ensure personal safety. Due to the loud report which occurs when the air bag is deployed, hearing protection is required. - Do not place the driver or passenger air bag module with the trim cover or deployment door facing down, as the forces of the deploying air bag could cause it to ricochet and cause personal injury. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 6938 Seat Belt Tensioner: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Description and Operation > Occupant Restraints - Active Seat Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation Occupant Restraints - Active SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER ASSEMBLY - FRONT The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt buckle and pretensioner are secured to the front seat cushion frame assembly. This allows the front safety belt buckle end to move with the front seat. The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device that removes excess webbing from the safety belt system. The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner uses the same crash sensor system as the air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS). When the belt and buckle assembly pretensioner deploys, the buckle moves downward, pulling excess webbing from the lap and shoulder safety belts. If the safety belt buckle and pretensioner assembly is deployed, a new assembly must be installed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Description and Operation > Occupant Restraints - Active > Page 6941 Seat Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation Occupant Restraints - Passive - Supplemental Air Bag System SAFETY BELT PRETENSIONER As part of the supplemental restraint system (SRS), the safety belt buckles are equipped with pretensioners. The safety belt buckle pretensioners remove excess slack from the safety belt webbing. The pretensioners are activated by the restraints control module (RCM) when the module detects a crash event force exceeding a programmed unit. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Seat Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Removal and Installation SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER Seat Belt Bolt Bit SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: - The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when servicing an air bag-equipped vehicle and when handling a belt and buckle assembly pretensioner. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Never probe the connectors on a pyrotechnic device. Doing so could result in belt and buckle assembly pretensioner or air bag deployment and could result in personal injury. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. NOTE: - If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. - Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. - Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. - After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. 1. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6944 To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 2. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. NOTE: Make sure to follow all steps and instructions in the removal procedure of the affected seat. Remove the affected seat from the vehicle. 3. NOTE: The driver seat safety belt buckle and pretensioner is shown, the passenger side is similar. Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield. Pull out to release the retaining clips. 4. NOTE: Note the wire harness routing for installation. Release the pin-type retainers and separate the safety belt buckle and pretensioner electrical connector and wire harness from the seat. 5. NOTE: Do not handle the safety belt buckle and pretensioner in the area of the safety belt buckle and pretensioner cable or retaining nut. Accidental pretensioner deployment could occur and result in personal injury. Remove the safety belt buckle and pretensioner. 1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt. 2 Remove the safety belt buckle and pretensioner. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6945 INSTALLATION WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. NOTE: - If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. - Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped;) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. - Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. - After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. - The driver seat safety belt buckle and pretensioner is shown, the passenger side is similar. 1. Install the safety belt buckle and pretensioner. 1 Position the safety belt buckle and pretensioner to the seat cushion frame. 2 Align and install the anti-rotation tab of the safety belt buckle and pretensioner to the slot in the seat cushion frame. 3 Using the special tool, install the bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6946 2. Route the safety belt buckle and pretensioner wire harness as noted in removal. Install the wire harness and electrical connector pin-type retainers. 3. Align the retaining clips and push in, installing the inboard seat cushion side shield. 4. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. NOTE: Make sure to follow all steps and instructions in the installation procedure of the affected seat. Install the affected seat into the vehicle. 5. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 6. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6947 Seat Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair General Procedures Deployed SAFETY BELT PRETENSIONER DISPOSAL - DEPLOYED 1. WARNING: The safety belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so could result in pretensioner or air bag deployment and could result in personal injury. Dispose of the deployed safety belt pretensioner in the same manner as any other part to be scrapped. Inoperative SAFETY BELT PRETENSIONER DISPOSAL - UNDEPLOYED, INOPERATIVE WARNING: - The safety belt pretensioner is pyrotechnic devices. Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so could result in personal injury. - Carry a live safety belt retractor pretensioner or safety belt buckle pretensioner so as to keep fingers and clothing away from moveable parts. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. NOTE: All inoperative safety belt buckle pretensioners and safety belt retractor pretensioners have been placed on the Mandatory Return List. All damaged safety belt buckle pretensioners and safety belt retractor pretensioners must be treated the same as any inoperative live safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt retractor pretensioner being returned. 1. Remove the inoperative safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt retractor pretensioner from the vehicle. 2. Package and return the inoperative safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt retractor pretensioner to Ford Motor Company. Scrapped Vehicle SAFETY BELT PRETENSIONER DISPOSAL - UNDEPLOYED, INOPERATIVE REMOTE DEPLOYMENT WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module or safety belt retractor/pretensioner assembly. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and trim cover or deployment door pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Remote deployment is to be performed outdoors with all personnel at least 6.1 meters (20 feet) away to ensure personal safety. Due to the loud report which occurs when the air bag is deployed, hearing protection is required. - Do not place the driver or passenger air bag module with the trim cover or deployment door facing down, as the forces of the deploying air bag could cause it to ricochet and cause personal injury. 1. Remove the safety belt pretensioner from the vehicle. 2. Cut and strip the wires near the electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6948 3. Obtain two wires (20 gauge minimum) at least 6.1 meters (20 feet) long and attach one end of each wire to stripped ends of the pretensioner wires. 4. Place the pretensioner on a flat surface in an open outdoor area. 5. Remain at least 6.1 meters (20 feet) away from the safety belt pretensioner. 6. Deploy the safety belt pretensioner by touching the other ends of the two wires to the terminals of a 12-volt battery. 7. To allow for cooling, wait at least ten minutes before approaching the deployed safety belt pretensioner. 8. Dispose of the deployed safety belt pretensioner in the same manner as any other part to be scrapped. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6949 Seat Belt Bolt Bit Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left View 151-24 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left > Page 6955 View 151-26 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Right Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Right > Page 6958 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information Impact Sensor: Customer Safety Information WARNING: The restraints control module (RCM) orientation is critical for correct system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) has been involved in a collision in which the center tunnel area has been damaged, inspect the mounting and bracket for deformation. If damaged, the RCM must be replaced whether or not the air bags have deployed. In addition, make sure the area of the RCM mounting is restored to its original condition. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 6961 Impact Sensor: Technician Safety Information WARNING: - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. - The tightening torque of the air bag side crash sensor retaining bolts is critical for proper system operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 6962 Impact Sensor: Description and Operation SENSORS WARNING: The restraints control module (RCM) orientation is critical for correct system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) has been involved in a collision in which the center tunnel area has been damaged, inspect the mounting and bracket for deformation. If damaged, the RCM must be replaced whether or not the air bags have deployed. In addition, make sure the area of the RCM mounting is restored to its original condition. For this vehicle, the SRS employs three crash sensors. One of the sensors is integral to the RCM and is not serviceable separately. In addition, there are two side crash sensors located in the LH and RH B-pillars. The RCM is mounted on the center tunnel under the instrument panel. Mounting orientation is critical for correct operation of all crash sensors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation SIDE IMPACT SENSOR - DRIVER SIDE Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. NOTE: - If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. - Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. - Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. - After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6965 procedure again. 1. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar, To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 2. Remove the steering wheel access cover. 3. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6966 5. Open the glove box past its stops. 6. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the instrument panel (I/P), disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6967 9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket under the seat. 2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. 12. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6968 13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver side air bag module floor electrical connector. 14. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat bracket. 2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system diagnostic tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 19. Remove the B-pillar trim panel. 20. Remove the side crash sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6969 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolts. 3 Remove the side crash sensor. INSTALLATION WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. NOTE: - If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. - Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. - Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. - After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. 1. WARNING: The tightening torque of the air bag side crash sensor retaining bolts is critical for proper system operation. Install the side crash sensor. 1 Position the side crash sensor to the B-pillar. 2 Install the bolts. 3 Connect the side crash sensor electrical connector. 2. Connect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6970 3. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still in place at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 4. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 5. Install the B-pillar trim panel. 6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. 7. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 8. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6971 9. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag module electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 10. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. 11. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 12. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6972 13. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air bag module electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 14. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 15. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 16. Close the glove box. 17. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6973 Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. 18. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 19. Install the steering wheel access cover. 20. Connect the battery ground cable. 21. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 22. Check the restraint system for correct operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6974 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair General Procedures "J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor WELD NUT REPAIR - "J" NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND SIDE IMPACT SENSOR WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). NOTE: - There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld nut(s). Read both this procedures and Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, restraints control module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair. - If two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according to this procedure. Weld nuts must be installed according to Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor. - The following procedure applies to vehicles that have a rectangular hole in the sheet metal that is in close proximity to the missing weld nut. 1. Obtain a "J" nut (part number N623332-S301) or any of the following optional "J" nuts (part numbers: N623342-S101, N800854-S100, N800925-S100). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190) or equivalent. 3. Install the "J" nut through the rectangular hole in the sheet metal. 4. NOTE: Be sure the threaded portion of the "J" nut is aligned with the clearance hole in the sheet metal. Install the crash sensor. 5. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Missing Weld Nut, Restr Ctrl Module (RCM)/Side Impact Sensor WELD NUT REPAIR - MISSING WELD NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND SIDE IMPACT SENSOR WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). NOTE: - There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld nut(s). Read both this procedure and Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, restraints control module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair. - Use only this procedure if two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according to Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Crash Sensor. - Radiator support repair shown, others are similar. 1. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) weld nut (part number N806285-S190). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6975 3. Route a sufficient length of copper welding wire through the weld nut clearance hole and back out an adjacent access hole. 4. Feed the copper welding wire through the weld nut, then through a standard flat washer. 5. Secure the flat washer so that it cannot be pulled off the end of the copper welding wire. 6. Pull the copper welding wire back through the clearance hole, allowing the weld nut and flat washer to follow the copper welding wire through. 7. Position the weld nut to the weld nut clearance hole, firmly pulling on the copper welding wire allowing the secured flat washer to hold the weld nut in position. 8. Holding the weld nut securely in place and using a MIG welder, weld in four places around the edge of the weld nut. 9. Metal finish as required. 10. Verify the nut is securely in place. 11. Install the crash sensor. 12. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Stripped Weld Nut, Restr Ctrl Module (RCM)/Side Impact Sensor WELD NUT REPAIR - STRIPPED WELD NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND SIDE IMPACT SENSOR WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). 1. Obtain an 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw (part number N802455-S190). 2. Drill out the internal threads of the stripped-out weld nut to 7.37 mm (0.29 in) using a letter "L" size drill bit. 3. Position the crash sensor to the vehicle. 4. Install the 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw into the drilled-out weld nut. 5. Install the remaining attaching screws. 6. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6976 Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Safing Sensor, Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation Safing Sensor: Description and Operation NOTE: The safety sensor is internal to the RCM and is not serviced separately. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt Buckle Switch: > 05-17-11 > Sep > 05 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Customer Interest SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set TSB 05-17-11 09/05/05 RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881 FORD: 2001-2004 Escape This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure. ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully functional. ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt buckle pretensioner. One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for complete repair procedure. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs. A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With 14056D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7861202 OR 7861203 X2 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle Switch: > 05-17-11 > Sep > 05 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set Seat Belt Buckle Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set TSB 05-17-11 09/05/05 RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881 FORD: 2001-2004 Escape This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure. ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully functional. ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt buckle pretensioner. One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for complete repair procedure. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs. A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With 14056D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7861202 OR 7861203 X2 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6993 View 151-24 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6994 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7001 Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7002 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair Antenna Cable: Service and Repair ANTENNA UPPER CABLE REMOVAL 1. Remove the audio unit. 2. Remove the right lower A-pillar trim. 3. Disconnect the antenna cable connector. 4. Lower the glove box door. 5. Remove the three pin-type retainers holding the lead-in cable. 6. Remove the antenna cable clip fastened to the center instrument panel support. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7008 7. Remove the cable through the glove box opening. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Application and ID Alarm Module: Application and ID For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic Module (GEM) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7016 Alarm System Transponder: Service and Repair PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (PATS) TRANSCEIVER REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Pull the tilt wheel lever down in open position, as necessary. 3. Remove the lower instrument panel steering column cover. 1 Remove the lower instrument panel steering column cover. 2 Remove the screws. 3 Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds. 4. Remove the transceiver assembly. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the screw. 3 Remove the transceiver assembly. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: No key replacement or re-initialization needs to occur with the removal or installation of a new PATS transceiver. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations View 151-15 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7020 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics TSB 06-15-8 08/07/06 KEYPAD DIAGNOSTICS - DEALER INSTALLED ACCESSORY FORD: 1998-2006 Taurus 1999-2003 Escort 1999-2006 Mustang 2000-2006 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006 Crown Victoria, Fusion 1998-2006 Expedition, Explorer, F-150, Ranger 1999 F-250 Light Duty 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2006 F-Super Duty 2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2006 Freestar LINCOLN: 1998-2006 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 1998-2006 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT MERCURY: 1998-2005 Sable 1999-2002 Cougar 2005-2006 Montego 2006 Grand Marquis, Milan 1998-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner ISSUE Some vehicles may experience a concern with the keyless entry keypad. In order to properly diagnose the concern with the keyless entry keypad, it is important to identify whether the keypad is a factory installed style (wired) or a Genuine Ford Accessory (GFA) radio frequency (RF) style keypad. ACTION Use the following Service Procedure to identify GFA RF keypads and provide diagnostic service tips. SERVICE PROCEDURE IDENTIFICATION: 1. Production installed keyless entry keypads are mounted flush with the surface of the vehicle and are wired directly to the module controlling the vehicle's keyless entry system. This style keypad can be diagnosed using the appropriate Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics > Page 7026 2. Dealer installed GFA RF keypads are adhesive backed and protrude approximately 1/2" (13 mm) from the surface of the vehicle and there are no specific diagnostics available in the WSM (Figure 1). NOTE THIS RF KEYPAD WAS ALSO US[D IN PRODUCTION ON 2004 F-SUPER DUTY VEHICLES BUILT PRIOR TO 12/3/2003. REFER TO WSM, SECTION 501-14 FOR RF KEYPAD DIAGNOSTICS FOR THESE VEHICLES. GENUINE FORD ACCESSORY KEYPAD DIAGNOSTIC TIPS 1. The keypad operates similarly to a remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter and is programmed using a similar procedure. Although the RF keypad is not specifically addressed in the WSM, the RKE transmitter programming portion of the WSM, Section 501-14 can be used as a guide NOTE THE 7-8 AND 9-0 BUTTONS ON THE KEYPAD MUST BE PRESSED SIMULTANEOUSLY DURING THE PROCEDURE IN ORDER FOR THE KEYPAD TO BE RECOGNIZED AS AN ADDITIONAL REMOTE TRANSMITTER. Since the GFA RF keypad is essentially another RKE transmitter, the transmitter diagnostic pinpoint tests in the vehicle's WSM can also be referenced even though the buttons serving the lock / unlock functions will differ 2. The GFA RF keypad is serviced as an assembly. The internal battery cannot be replaced separately. 3. If the master code or owner selectable code is lost or forgotten, the GFA RF keypad must be replaced. These codes are not stored in any vehicle module (with the exception of 2004 F-Super Duty vehicles produced prior to 12/3/2003). 4. The GFA RF keypad and all RKE transmitters (the number of transmitters allowable will vary by vehicle) must be reprogrammed together anytime the keypad is replaced, an RKE transmitter is replaced, or the module controlling the keyless entry system on the vehicle (GEM/SJB/VSM/DDM etc.) is replaced. NOTE THERE IS AN EXCEPTION TO TIP 4 FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH INTEGRATED KEYHEAD TRANSMITTERS (IKTs) (FUSION/MILAN/ZEPHYR). THE GFA RF KEYPADS FOR VEHICLES WITH IKTs MUST BE PROGRAMMED INDEPENDENTLY FROM THE IKTs. TURN THE IGNITION FROM "OFF" TO "RUN" 8 TIMES WITHIN 10 SECONDS, WITH THE 8TH TIME ENDING IN "RUN". THE DOOR LOCKS WILL CYCLE TO CONFIRM ENTERING PROGRAMMING MODE. PRESS THE 7-8 AND 9-0 BUTTON ON THE KEYPAD SIMULTANEOUSLY TO SEND A LOCK SIGNAL. TURN IGNITION TO OFF. THE LOCKS WILL CYCLE AGAIN TO INDICATE THE END OF THE PROGRAMMING MODE. 5. The keypad will normally illuminate for 5 seconds after one or more buttons are pressed, and the illumination will immediately turn off if the 7-8 and 9-0 buttons are pressed simultaneously (lock all doors). The keypad contains an optical sensor and will not illuminate under bright lighting conditions. The keypad may only illuminate briefly in colder temperatures in order to maximize the battery power available to transmit a lock/unlock signal. The temperature at which this occurs will vary depending upon the keypad battery age and condition. Both of these conditions are a normal function of the Power Save Mode and do not indicate a need to replace the keypad. 6. After entering the keypad code, the system may unlock the driver's door, lock it, then unlock it again, and the keypad will not even briefly illuminate. This is the Alert Mode and is an indication that battery power is very low and the keypad must be replaced. 7. The keypad also contains an Anti-scan feature. If the wrong code has been entered 7 times (35 consecutive button presses) the keypad is disabled for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash during this time. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics > Page 7027 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14A626 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Application and ID Keyless Entry Module: Application and ID For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic Module (GEM) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Service and Repair Keyless Entry Transmitter: Service and Repair REMOTE TRANSMITTER PROGRAMMING NOTE: All remote transmitters must be programmed at the same time. 1. The vehicle must be electronically unlocked before entering program mode (via remote transmitter, keyless entry keypad (if equipped) or door lock control switch while the driver door is open. 2. Turn the key from OFF to RUN 8 times within 10 seconds, with the eighth turn ending in RUN. If the module has successfully entered program mode, it will lock and then unlock all doors. 3. Within 20 seconds, press any button on a remote transmitter, and the doors will lock and then unlock to confirm that each remote transmitter has been programmed. Repeat this step for each remote transmitter. 4. If the door locks do not respond for any remote transmitter, wait several seconds and press the button again. If the door locks still fail to respond, refer to Inspection and Verification. Make sure that no more than the maximum number of remote transmitters are attempted to be programmed. 5. Exiting the programming mode is accomplished if one of the following occurs: - The key transitions to the OFF position. - 20 seconds have passed since entering programming mode or since the last remote transmitter was programmed. - The maximum number of remote transmitters have been programmed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Control Module: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 Parking Assist Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 TSB 06-20-5 10/16/06 PARKING AID SPEAKER INOPERATIVE - DTCS C1742 AND C1743 FORD: 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2004-2006 Escape, Expedition, Explorer, F-150 2004-2007 F-250, F-350 MERCURY: 2005-2007 Montego 2004-2006 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner ISSUE Some 2004-2007 vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may experience low or no audible sound due to speaker issues related to the RSS. The speaker is attached to the module which may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1742 (Rear Sounder Circuit Fault) and/or C1743 (Rear Sounder Short). ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify that DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present. Also, low audible or intermittent audible warning condition may exist as well. 2. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present, replace parking aid speaker on module with speaker in Speaker Kit. Follow instructions in Speaker Kit. 3. Clear DTCs and repeat check for DTCs C1742 and/or C1743. 4. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 go away and speaker sounds, the repair is complete. 5. If DTCs remain, follow normal diagnostics in the appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 413-13 Pinpoint Test F. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 062005A 2004-2006 Expedition: 1.2 Hrs. Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2004-2007 Super Duty 0.6 Hr. 250/350: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Control Module: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 > Page 7043 062005A 2004-2005 1.1 Hrs. Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2006 Explorer/Mountaineer: 1.3 Hrs. Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2004-2006 F-150: Replace 0.5 Hr. Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2004-2006 Escape, 0.8 Hr. 2005-2006 Mariner: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2005-2007 Five 1.3 Hrs. Hundred/Montego: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2005-2007 Freestyle: 0.7 Hr. Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR 31012AL, 31012AT) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15K864 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist Control Module: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 Parking Assist Control Module: Customer Interest Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 TSB 06-20-5 10/16/06 PARKING AID SPEAKER INOPERATIVE - DTCS C1742 AND C1743 FORD: 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2004-2006 Escape, Expedition, Explorer, F-150 2004-2007 F-250, F-350 MERCURY: 2005-2007 Montego 2004-2006 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner ISSUE Some 2004-2007 vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may experience low or no audible sound due to speaker issues related to the RSS. The speaker is attached to the module which may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1742 (Rear Sounder Circuit Fault) and/or C1743 (Rear Sounder Short). ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify that DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present. Also, low audible or intermittent audible warning condition may exist as well. 2. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present, replace parking aid speaker on module with speaker in Speaker Kit. Follow instructions in Speaker Kit. 3. Clear DTCs and repeat check for DTCs C1742 and/or C1743. 4. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 go away and speaker sounds, the repair is complete. 5. If DTCs remain, follow normal diagnostics in the appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 413-13 Pinpoint Test F. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 062005A 2004-2006 Expedition: 1.2 Hrs. Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2004-2007 Super Duty 0.6 Hr. 250/350: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist Control Module: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 > Page 7049 062005A 2004-2005 1.1 Hrs. Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2006 Explorer/Mountaineer: 1.3 Hrs. Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2004-2006 F-150: Replace 0.5 Hr. Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2004-2006 Escape, 0.8 Hr. 2005-2006 Mariner: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2005-2007 Five 1.3 Hrs. Hundred/Montego: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2005-2007 Freestyle: 0.7 Hr. Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR 31012AL, 31012AT) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15K864 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7050 View 151-28 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7051 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7052 Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair PARKING AID MODULE REMOVAL 1. Remove the right rear quarter trim panel. 2. Remove the parking aid module. 1 Remove the screws. 2 Disconnect the electrical connectors. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings Parking Assist Distance Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings TSB 05-6-4 04/04/05 FALSE PARKING AID WARNINGS FORD: 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2002-2003 Windstar 2002-2005 Excursion, Expedition, Explorer, F-Super Duty 2003-2005 Escape 2004-2005 F-150, Freestar LINCOLN: 2002 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 2005 Montego 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 05-4-19 to update the description for labor operation F. ISSUE Vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may sound a warning tone when the vehicle is in reverse, even though there are no objects behind the vehicle. This condition may also occur on vehicles equipped with the forward sensing system (FSS) when vehicle is in reverse or drive. ACTION The condition MAY NOT be due to proximity sensor(s) malfunction but may be a normal operation characteristic, or due to sensor contamination (sensor being covered with dirt). Refer to the following description of OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS, before replacing any sensor(s). SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE THE FOLLOWING DESCRIPTIONS ARE TRUE FOR BOTH THE RSS AND FSS. OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS The RSS is only operational when the vehicle is in reverse. For vehicles also equipped with the FSS the system is operational when the vehicle is in reverse or drive. The FSS and RSS give an audible warning to the driver when obstacles are within 6' (1.8 meters) from the vehicle, and when obstacles are within 18" (46 cm) on either side of the bumper. NOTE CERTAIN OBSTACLES MAY BE DIFFICULT FOR THE RSS/FSS TO DETECT DEPENDING ON GEOMETRIC SHAPE OR PROFILE OF THE OBJECT AND THE MATERIAL THE OBJECT IS COMPOSED OF. NOTE THE NEAREST OBSTACLE WILL ALWAYS BE THE OBSTACLE REPORTED, WITH THE EXCEPTION STATED IN THE NOTE ABOVE. NOTE THE VEHICLE OPERATOR MUST BE AWARE THAT THE WARNING TONES ARE AT A MODERATE VOLUME LEVEL AND THAT THE TONES MAY BE DIFFICULT TO HEAR WITH BACKGROUND NOISE (RADIO, BLOWERS, PASSENGER CONVERSATION, ETC). THE RSS/FSS SPEAKER VOLUME IS ALREADY AT MAXIMUM VOLUME AND IS NOT ADJUSTABLE. In cases where the RSS/FSS give warnings but nothing is within range of the vehicle sensors, or give warnings for 3 seconds then ceases, the occurrence may be due to any of the following reasons: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 7061 BLOCKED/CONTAMINATED PROXIMITY SENSOR SURFACE: Proximity sensor surfaces may be covered with snow, ice, dirt or mud. There is a gap between the sensor membrane and its plastic housing that must remain clear (Figure 1). If this space is contaminated with any foreign material the system may sound a continuous tone or intermittent tone. The sensor surface can be cleaned by a high pressure water spray. SIDE COVERAGE SENSOR: There is side/rear coverage that extends approximately 18" (46 cm) perpendicular from the side rear fascia. Side coverage is a desirable feature in a parking situation where the vehicle is involved in a very tight turn with little rearward movement, or where the vehicle is backing parallel to a large, extending obstacle such as a garage wall. If there is no encroachment between any of the outer sensors and an obstacle, then the warning will sound for 3 seconds and cease. If vehicle or the obstacle begin to move closer to each other, then the warning will begin again. Obstacles within 10" (25 cm) of the fascia will always be reported with a continuous tone. This is considered normal operation. ABNORMAL ROAD SURFACES: The RSS/FSS may give warnings due to certain road surfaces with surface projections such as rocks, broken pavement, unplowed snow covered roads. This is considered normal operation. OTHER POSSIBLE CAUSES: Very wet weather conditions, such as mist, frost or snow may provoke occasional warnings. The system may detect liftgate while open and certain trailer hitches and/or bicycle racks. External ultrasonic noise may be detected (high velocity air, machinery). This is considered normal operation. SENSOR DIAGNOSTICS 1. Ensure that nothing is in detectable sensor-range 6' (1.8 meters) behind vehicle for the RSS and within 6' (1.8 meters) of the front of the vehicle for the FSS. 2. Clean proximity sensors with a dry shop towel, and if required wash with water or a high pressure water to ensure that the membrane gap is free of any dirt or contamination. 3. Using the New Generation Star (NGS) tester (up to 2004 MY), NGS+ (2005 MY) or WDS observe the following four parking aid module parameter identification displays (PIDs) for distance information: ^ LR_CNTD (NGS)/LRI_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle) ^ RR_CNTD (NGS)/RRI_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle) ^ LR_CNRD (NGS)/LRO_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle) ^ RR_CNRD (NGS)/RRO_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle) NOTE PID IDENTIFIERS ALSO EXIST FOR FRONT SENSORS IF EQUIPPED. a. If the sensor is functioning properly, with no objects in range of the vehicle, each sensor PID as described above should display a full scale numerical reading of 255 cm (NGS) or 100 inches (NGS+ and WDS). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 7062 b. If a PID reading other than 255 or 100 displays, replace only the sensor that is out of specification. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 413-00 as needed for removal and installation procedures. ACCESSING PIDS WITH NGS, SELECT: ^ Vehicle Line ^ Diagnostic Data Link ^ PAM ^ PID/Data Monitor And Record ^ Select The Appropriate PIDS ^ Start ACCESSING PIDS WITH WDS, SELECT: ^ Tool box Icon ^ Datalogger, Then Tick (Check Mark) ^ Modules, Then Tick ^ PAM, Then Tick ^ Select The Appropriate PIDS, Then Tick NOTE FOR SOME VEHICLES, REPLACEMENT SENSORS WILL BE RECEIVED WITH A PRIMED-BLACK PAINTABLE SURFACE AND MUST BE PAINTED TO MATCH VEHICLE COLOR. REFER TO PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS BELOW. PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS ^ Use a Ford-Approved paint gun, apply base/clear coat to match vehicle ^ Surface can be cleaned with Isopropyl alcohol ^ Maximum paint curing temperature is 194~ F (90~ C) for 1 hour ^ Maximum coating thickness 125 micro meters (including the primer) ^ Paint or veil of paint must not get into connector ^ Immersion processes ARE NOT permitted ^ Paint must be applied evenly to the surface ^ Functional test must be done after painting ^ Use NGS tester to confirm settling time of the sensor is within the specified limits: 850 micro sec. to 1500 micro sec. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 050604A 2004-2005 F150, 0.7 Hr. 2002-2005 Excursion, 2002 Expedition/Navigator, 2002-2005 F Super Duty, 2002-2003 Blackwood, 2005 Freestyle: Replace Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 7063 One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604B 2003-2005 Aviator, 0.9 Hr. 2002-2005 Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604B 2004-2005 Monterey, 0.8 Hr. 2004-2005 Freestar, 2002-2003 Windstar: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604B 2003-2005 Expedition: 1.3 Hrs. Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604C 2004-2005 Monterey, 1.2 Hrs. 2004-2005 Freestar, 2005 Montego, 2005 Ford Five Hundred: Replace One Or More FRONT Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604D 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Replace One Or Both INNER Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604E 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Replace One Or Both OUTER Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604F Additional Time To Paint 1.0 Hr. Sensors To Match Bumper Cover On The Following Vehicles: Aviator, Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 7064 Monterey, Five Hundred, Freestyle, Montego DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15K859 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Customer Interest Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings TSB 05-6-4 04/04/05 FALSE PARKING AID WARNINGS FORD: 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2002-2003 Windstar 2002-2005 Excursion, Expedition, Explorer, F-Super Duty 2003-2005 Escape 2004-2005 F-150, Freestar LINCOLN: 2002 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 2005 Montego 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 05-4-19 to update the description for labor operation F. ISSUE Vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may sound a warning tone when the vehicle is in reverse, even though there are no objects behind the vehicle. This condition may also occur on vehicles equipped with the forward sensing system (FSS) when vehicle is in reverse or drive. ACTION The condition MAY NOT be due to proximity sensor(s) malfunction but may be a normal operation characteristic, or due to sensor contamination (sensor being covered with dirt). Refer to the following description of OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS, before replacing any sensor(s). SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE THE FOLLOWING DESCRIPTIONS ARE TRUE FOR BOTH THE RSS AND FSS. OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS The RSS is only operational when the vehicle is in reverse. For vehicles also equipped with the FSS the system is operational when the vehicle is in reverse or drive. The FSS and RSS give an audible warning to the driver when obstacles are within 6' (1.8 meters) from the vehicle, and when obstacles are within 18" (46 cm) on either side of the bumper. NOTE CERTAIN OBSTACLES MAY BE DIFFICULT FOR THE RSS/FSS TO DETECT DEPENDING ON GEOMETRIC SHAPE OR PROFILE OF THE OBJECT AND THE MATERIAL THE OBJECT IS COMPOSED OF. NOTE THE NEAREST OBSTACLE WILL ALWAYS BE THE OBSTACLE REPORTED, WITH THE EXCEPTION STATED IN THE NOTE ABOVE. NOTE THE VEHICLE OPERATOR MUST BE AWARE THAT THE WARNING TONES ARE AT A MODERATE VOLUME LEVEL AND THAT THE TONES MAY BE DIFFICULT TO HEAR WITH BACKGROUND NOISE (RADIO, BLOWERS, PASSENGER CONVERSATION, ETC). THE RSS/FSS SPEAKER VOLUME IS ALREADY AT MAXIMUM VOLUME AND IS NOT ADJUSTABLE. In cases where the RSS/FSS give warnings but nothing is within range of the vehicle sensors, or give warnings for 3 seconds then ceases, the occurrence may be due to any of the following reasons: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 7070 BLOCKED/CONTAMINATED PROXIMITY SENSOR SURFACE: Proximity sensor surfaces may be covered with snow, ice, dirt or mud. There is a gap between the sensor membrane and its plastic housing that must remain clear (Figure 1). If this space is contaminated with any foreign material the system may sound a continuous tone or intermittent tone. The sensor surface can be cleaned by a high pressure water spray. SIDE COVERAGE SENSOR: There is side/rear coverage that extends approximately 18" (46 cm) perpendicular from the side rear fascia. Side coverage is a desirable feature in a parking situation where the vehicle is involved in a very tight turn with little rearward movement, or where the vehicle is backing parallel to a large, extending obstacle such as a garage wall. If there is no encroachment between any of the outer sensors and an obstacle, then the warning will sound for 3 seconds and cease. If vehicle or the obstacle begin to move closer to each other, then the warning will begin again. Obstacles within 10" (25 cm) of the fascia will always be reported with a continuous tone. This is considered normal operation. ABNORMAL ROAD SURFACES: The RSS/FSS may give warnings due to certain road surfaces with surface projections such as rocks, broken pavement, unplowed snow covered roads. This is considered normal operation. OTHER POSSIBLE CAUSES: Very wet weather conditions, such as mist, frost or snow may provoke occasional warnings. The system may detect liftgate while open and certain trailer hitches and/or bicycle racks. External ultrasonic noise may be detected (high velocity air, machinery). This is considered normal operation. SENSOR DIAGNOSTICS 1. Ensure that nothing is in detectable sensor-range 6' (1.8 meters) behind vehicle for the RSS and within 6' (1.8 meters) of the front of the vehicle for the FSS. 2. Clean proximity sensors with a dry shop towel, and if required wash with water or a high pressure water to ensure that the membrane gap is free of any dirt or contamination. 3. Using the New Generation Star (NGS) tester (up to 2004 MY), NGS+ (2005 MY) or WDS observe the following four parking aid module parameter identification displays (PIDs) for distance information: ^ LR_CNTD (NGS)/LRI_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle) ^ RR_CNTD (NGS)/RRI_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle) ^ LR_CNRD (NGS)/LRO_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle) ^ RR_CNRD (NGS)/RRO_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle) NOTE PID IDENTIFIERS ALSO EXIST FOR FRONT SENSORS IF EQUIPPED. a. If the sensor is functioning properly, with no objects in range of the vehicle, each sensor PID as described above should display a full scale numerical reading of 255 cm (NGS) or 100 inches (NGS+ and WDS). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 7071 b. If a PID reading other than 255 or 100 displays, replace only the sensor that is out of specification. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 413-00 as needed for removal and installation procedures. ACCESSING PIDS WITH NGS, SELECT: ^ Vehicle Line ^ Diagnostic Data Link ^ PAM ^ PID/Data Monitor And Record ^ Select The Appropriate PIDS ^ Start ACCESSING PIDS WITH WDS, SELECT: ^ Tool box Icon ^ Datalogger, Then Tick (Check Mark) ^ Modules, Then Tick ^ PAM, Then Tick ^ Select The Appropriate PIDS, Then Tick NOTE FOR SOME VEHICLES, REPLACEMENT SENSORS WILL BE RECEIVED WITH A PRIMED-BLACK PAINTABLE SURFACE AND MUST BE PAINTED TO MATCH VEHICLE COLOR. REFER TO PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS BELOW. PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS ^ Use a Ford-Approved paint gun, apply base/clear coat to match vehicle ^ Surface can be cleaned with Isopropyl alcohol ^ Maximum paint curing temperature is 194~ F (90~ C) for 1 hour ^ Maximum coating thickness 125 micro meters (including the primer) ^ Paint or veil of paint must not get into connector ^ Immersion processes ARE NOT permitted ^ Paint must be applied evenly to the surface ^ Functional test must be done after painting ^ Use NGS tester to confirm settling time of the sensor is within the specified limits: 850 micro sec. to 1500 micro sec. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 050604A 2004-2005 F150, 0.7 Hr. 2002-2005 Excursion, 2002 Expedition/Navigator, 2002-2005 F Super Duty, 2002-2003 Blackwood, 2005 Freestyle: Replace Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 7072 One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604B 2003-2005 Aviator, 0.9 Hr. 2002-2005 Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604B 2004-2005 Monterey, 0.8 Hr. 2004-2005 Freestar, 2002-2003 Windstar: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604B 2003-2005 Expedition: 1.3 Hrs. Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604C 2004-2005 Monterey, 1.2 Hrs. 2004-2005 Freestar, 2005 Montego, 2005 Ford Five Hundred: Replace One Or More FRONT Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604D 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Replace One Or Both INNER Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604E 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Replace One Or Both OUTER Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604F Additional Time To Paint 1.0 Hr. Sensors To Match Bumper Cover On The Following Vehicles: Aviator, Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 7073 Monterey, Five Hundred, Freestyle, Montego DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15K859 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7074 View 151-38 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left > Page 7077 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left > Page 7078 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left > Page 7079 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7080 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair PARKING AID SENSOR REMOVAL 1. NOTE: The rear bumper removal is only necessary for access to the outer parking aid sensors. The inner parking aid sensors do not require rear bumper removal for access. Remove the rear bumper. 2. Remove the parking aid sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Release the tabs. 3 Remove the parking aid sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-19 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7084 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7085 Parking Assist Switch: Service and Repair PARKING AID SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Remove the parking aid switch. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Press the tabs. 3 Remove the parking aid switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist Warning Indicator: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Customer Interest Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 TSB 06-20-5 10/16/06 PARKING AID SPEAKER INOPERATIVE - DTCS C1742 AND C1743 FORD: 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2004-2006 Escape, Expedition, Explorer, F-150 2004-2007 F-250, F-350 MERCURY: 2005-2007 Montego 2004-2006 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner ISSUE Some 2004-2007 vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may experience low or no audible sound due to speaker issues related to the RSS. The speaker is attached to the module which may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1742 (Rear Sounder Circuit Fault) and/or C1743 (Rear Sounder Short). ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify that DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present. Also, low audible or intermittent audible warning condition may exist as well. 2. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present, replace parking aid speaker on module with speaker in Speaker Kit. Follow instructions in Speaker Kit. 3. Clear DTCs and repeat check for DTCs C1742 and/or C1743. 4. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 go away and speaker sounds, the repair is complete. 5. If DTCs remain, follow normal diagnostics in the appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 413-13 Pinpoint Test F. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 062005A 2004-2006 Expedition: 1.2 Hrs. Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2004-2007 Super Duty 0.6 Hr. 250/350: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist Warning Indicator: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 > Page 7094 062005A 2004-2005 1.1 Hrs. Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2006 Explorer/Mountaineer: 1.3 Hrs. Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2004-2006 F-150: Replace 0.5 Hr. Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2004-2006 Escape, 0.8 Hr. 2005-2006 Mariner: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2005-2007 Five 1.3 Hrs. Hundred/Montego: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2005-2007 Freestyle: 0.7 Hr. Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR 31012AL, 31012AT) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15K864 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Warning Indicator: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 Parking Assist Warning Indicator: All Technical Service Bulletins Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 TSB 06-20-5 10/16/06 PARKING AID SPEAKER INOPERATIVE - DTCS C1742 AND C1743 FORD: 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2004-2006 Escape, Expedition, Explorer, F-150 2004-2007 F-250, F-350 MERCURY: 2005-2007 Montego 2004-2006 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner ISSUE Some 2004-2007 vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may experience low or no audible sound due to speaker issues related to the RSS. The speaker is attached to the module which may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1742 (Rear Sounder Circuit Fault) and/or C1743 (Rear Sounder Short). ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify that DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present. Also, low audible or intermittent audible warning condition may exist as well. 2. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present, replace parking aid speaker on module with speaker in Speaker Kit. Follow instructions in Speaker Kit. 3. Clear DTCs and repeat check for DTCs C1742 and/or C1743. 4. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 go away and speaker sounds, the repair is complete. 5. If DTCs remain, follow normal diagnostics in the appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 413-13 Pinpoint Test F. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 062005A 2004-2006 Expedition: 1.2 Hrs. Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2004-2007 Super Duty 0.6 Hr. 250/350: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Warning Indicator: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 > Page 7100 062005A 2004-2005 1.1 Hrs. Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2006 Explorer/Mountaineer: 1.3 Hrs. Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2004-2006 F-150: Replace 0.5 Hr. Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2004-2006 Escape, 0.8 Hr. 2005-2006 Mariner: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2005-2007 Five 1.3 Hrs. Hundred/Montego: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2005-2007 Freestyle: 0.7 Hr. Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR 31012AL, 31012AT) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15K864 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7101 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Right Rear Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Right Rear > Page 7111 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Right Rear > Page 7112 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Right Rear > Page 7113 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Right Rear > Page 7114 Speaker: Diagrams Tweeter Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7115 Speaker: Description and Operation SPEAKERS All vehicles are equipped with four radio speakers mounted in the doors. The optional tweeters are mounted in the sail panels and the optional woofer is mounted in the right rear quarter panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Speaker Speaker: Service and Repair Door Speaker DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL 1. Remove the door trim panels. 2. Remove the speakers. 1 Remove the screws. 2 Disconnect the electrical connectors. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Speaker > Page 7118 Speaker: Service and Repair Speaker Enclosure - Subwoofer SPEAKER ENCLOSURE - SUBWOOFER REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear quarter trim panel. 2. Remove the subwoofer enclosure. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolts. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7124 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7125 Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7126 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Application and ID Alarm Module: Application and ID For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic Module (GEM) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Application and ID Keyless Entry Module: Application and ID For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic Module (GEM) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 Parking Assist Control Module: Customer Interest Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 TSB 06-20-5 10/16/06 PARKING AID SPEAKER INOPERATIVE - DTCS C1742 AND C1743 FORD: 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2004-2006 Escape, Expedition, Explorer, F-150 2004-2007 F-250, F-350 MERCURY: 2005-2007 Montego 2004-2006 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner ISSUE Some 2004-2007 vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may experience low or no audible sound due to speaker issues related to the RSS. The speaker is attached to the module which may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1742 (Rear Sounder Circuit Fault) and/or C1743 (Rear Sounder Short). ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify that DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present. Also, low audible or intermittent audible warning condition may exist as well. 2. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present, replace parking aid speaker on module with speaker in Speaker Kit. Follow instructions in Speaker Kit. 3. Clear DTCs and repeat check for DTCs C1742 and/or C1743. 4. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 go away and speaker sounds, the repair is complete. 5. If DTCs remain, follow normal diagnostics in the appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 413-13 Pinpoint Test F. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 062005A 2004-2006 Expedition: 1.2 Hrs. Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2004-2007 Super Duty 0.6 Hr. 250/350: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 > Page 7141 062005A 2004-2005 1.1 Hrs. Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2006 Explorer/Mountaineer: 1.3 Hrs. Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2004-2006 F-150: Replace 0.5 Hr. Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2004-2006 Escape, 0.8 Hr. 2005-2006 Mariner: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2005-2007 Five 1.3 Hrs. Hundred/Montego: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2005-2007 Freestyle: 0.7 Hr. Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR 31012AL, 31012AT) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15K864 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 Parking Assist Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 TSB 06-20-5 10/16/06 PARKING AID SPEAKER INOPERATIVE - DTCS C1742 AND C1743 FORD: 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2004-2006 Escape, Expedition, Explorer, F-150 2004-2007 F-250, F-350 MERCURY: 2005-2007 Montego 2004-2006 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner ISSUE Some 2004-2007 vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may experience low or no audible sound due to speaker issues related to the RSS. The speaker is attached to the module which may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1742 (Rear Sounder Circuit Fault) and/or C1743 (Rear Sounder Short). ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify that DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present. Also, low audible or intermittent audible warning condition may exist as well. 2. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present, replace parking aid speaker on module with speaker in Speaker Kit. Follow instructions in Speaker Kit. 3. Clear DTCs and repeat check for DTCs C1742 and/or C1743. 4. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 go away and speaker sounds, the repair is complete. 5. If DTCs remain, follow normal diagnostics in the appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 413-13 Pinpoint Test F. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 062005A 2004-2006 Expedition: 1.2 Hrs. Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2004-2007 Super Duty 0.6 Hr. 250/350: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 > Page 7147 062005A 2004-2005 1.1 Hrs. Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2006 Explorer/Mountaineer: 1.3 Hrs. Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2004-2006 F-150: Replace 0.5 Hr. Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2004-2006 Escape, 0.8 Hr. 2005-2006 Mariner: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2005-2007 Five 1.3 Hrs. Hundred/Montego: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2005-2007 Freestyle: 0.7 Hr. Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR 31012AL, 31012AT) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15K864 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Control Module: > 05-17-11 > Sep > 05 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set Seat Belt Buckle Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set TSB 05-17-11 09/05/05 RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881 FORD: 2001-2004 Escape This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure. ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully functional. ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt buckle pretensioner. One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for complete repair procedure. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs. A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With 14056D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7861202 OR 7861203 X2 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7158 View 151-28 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7159 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7160 Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair PARKING AID MODULE REMOVAL 1. Remove the right rear quarter trim panel. 2. Remove the parking aid module. 1 Remove the screws. 2 Disconnect the electrical connectors. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations View 151-15 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7165 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Customer Interest Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings TSB 05-6-4 04/04/05 FALSE PARKING AID WARNINGS FORD: 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2002-2003 Windstar 2002-2005 Excursion, Expedition, Explorer, F-Super Duty 2003-2005 Escape 2004-2005 F-150, Freestar LINCOLN: 2002 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 2005 Montego 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 05-4-19 to update the description for labor operation F. ISSUE Vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may sound a warning tone when the vehicle is in reverse, even though there are no objects behind the vehicle. This condition may also occur on vehicles equipped with the forward sensing system (FSS) when vehicle is in reverse or drive. ACTION The condition MAY NOT be due to proximity sensor(s) malfunction but may be a normal operation characteristic, or due to sensor contamination (sensor being covered with dirt). Refer to the following description of OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS, before replacing any sensor(s). SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE THE FOLLOWING DESCRIPTIONS ARE TRUE FOR BOTH THE RSS AND FSS. OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS The RSS is only operational when the vehicle is in reverse. For vehicles also equipped with the FSS the system is operational when the vehicle is in reverse or drive. The FSS and RSS give an audible warning to the driver when obstacles are within 6' (1.8 meters) from the vehicle, and when obstacles are within 18" (46 cm) on either side of the bumper. NOTE CERTAIN OBSTACLES MAY BE DIFFICULT FOR THE RSS/FSS TO DETECT DEPENDING ON GEOMETRIC SHAPE OR PROFILE OF THE OBJECT AND THE MATERIAL THE OBJECT IS COMPOSED OF. NOTE THE NEAREST OBSTACLE WILL ALWAYS BE THE OBSTACLE REPORTED, WITH THE EXCEPTION STATED IN THE NOTE ABOVE. NOTE THE VEHICLE OPERATOR MUST BE AWARE THAT THE WARNING TONES ARE AT A MODERATE VOLUME LEVEL AND THAT THE TONES MAY BE DIFFICULT TO HEAR WITH BACKGROUND NOISE (RADIO, BLOWERS, PASSENGER CONVERSATION, ETC). THE RSS/FSS SPEAKER VOLUME IS ALREADY AT MAXIMUM VOLUME AND IS NOT ADJUSTABLE. In cases where the RSS/FSS give warnings but nothing is within range of the vehicle sensors, or give warnings for 3 seconds then ceases, the occurrence may be due to any of the following reasons: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 7174 BLOCKED/CONTAMINATED PROXIMITY SENSOR SURFACE: Proximity sensor surfaces may be covered with snow, ice, dirt or mud. There is a gap between the sensor membrane and its plastic housing that must remain clear (Figure 1). If this space is contaminated with any foreign material the system may sound a continuous tone or intermittent tone. The sensor surface can be cleaned by a high pressure water spray. SIDE COVERAGE SENSOR: There is side/rear coverage that extends approximately 18" (46 cm) perpendicular from the side rear fascia. Side coverage is a desirable feature in a parking situation where the vehicle is involved in a very tight turn with little rearward movement, or where the vehicle is backing parallel to a large, extending obstacle such as a garage wall. If there is no encroachment between any of the outer sensors and an obstacle, then the warning will sound for 3 seconds and cease. If vehicle or the obstacle begin to move closer to each other, then the warning will begin again. Obstacles within 10" (25 cm) of the fascia will always be reported with a continuous tone. This is considered normal operation. ABNORMAL ROAD SURFACES: The RSS/FSS may give warnings due to certain road surfaces with surface projections such as rocks, broken pavement, unplowed snow covered roads. This is considered normal operation. OTHER POSSIBLE CAUSES: Very wet weather conditions, such as mist, frost or snow may provoke occasional warnings. The system may detect liftgate while open and certain trailer hitches and/or bicycle racks. External ultrasonic noise may be detected (high velocity air, machinery). This is considered normal operation. SENSOR DIAGNOSTICS 1. Ensure that nothing is in detectable sensor-range 6' (1.8 meters) behind vehicle for the RSS and within 6' (1.8 meters) of the front of the vehicle for the FSS. 2. Clean proximity sensors with a dry shop towel, and if required wash with water or a high pressure water to ensure that the membrane gap is free of any dirt or contamination. 3. Using the New Generation Star (NGS) tester (up to 2004 MY), NGS+ (2005 MY) or WDS observe the following four parking aid module parameter identification displays (PIDs) for distance information: ^ LR_CNTD (NGS)/LRI_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle) ^ RR_CNTD (NGS)/RRI_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle) ^ LR_CNRD (NGS)/LRO_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle) ^ RR_CNRD (NGS)/RRO_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle) NOTE PID IDENTIFIERS ALSO EXIST FOR FRONT SENSORS IF EQUIPPED. a. If the sensor is functioning properly, with no objects in range of the vehicle, each sensor PID as described above should display a full scale numerical reading of 255 cm (NGS) or 100 inches (NGS+ and WDS). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 7175 b. If a PID reading other than 255 or 100 displays, replace only the sensor that is out of specification. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 413-00 as needed for removal and installation procedures. ACCESSING PIDS WITH NGS, SELECT: ^ Vehicle Line ^ Diagnostic Data Link ^ PAM ^ PID/Data Monitor And Record ^ Select The Appropriate PIDS ^ Start ACCESSING PIDS WITH WDS, SELECT: ^ Tool box Icon ^ Datalogger, Then Tick (Check Mark) ^ Modules, Then Tick ^ PAM, Then Tick ^ Select The Appropriate PIDS, Then Tick NOTE FOR SOME VEHICLES, REPLACEMENT SENSORS WILL BE RECEIVED WITH A PRIMED-BLACK PAINTABLE SURFACE AND MUST BE PAINTED TO MATCH VEHICLE COLOR. REFER TO PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS BELOW. PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS ^ Use a Ford-Approved paint gun, apply base/clear coat to match vehicle ^ Surface can be cleaned with Isopropyl alcohol ^ Maximum paint curing temperature is 194~ F (90~ C) for 1 hour ^ Maximum coating thickness 125 micro meters (including the primer) ^ Paint or veil of paint must not get into connector ^ Immersion processes ARE NOT permitted ^ Paint must be applied evenly to the surface ^ Functional test must be done after painting ^ Use NGS tester to confirm settling time of the sensor is within the specified limits: 850 micro sec. to 1500 micro sec. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 050604A 2004-2005 F150, 0.7 Hr. 2002-2005 Excursion, 2002 Expedition/Navigator, 2002-2005 F Super Duty, 2002-2003 Blackwood, 2005 Freestyle: Replace Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 7176 One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604B 2003-2005 Aviator, 0.9 Hr. 2002-2005 Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604B 2004-2005 Monterey, 0.8 Hr. 2004-2005 Freestar, 2002-2003 Windstar: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604B 2003-2005 Expedition: 1.3 Hrs. Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604C 2004-2005 Monterey, 1.2 Hrs. 2004-2005 Freestar, 2005 Montego, 2005 Ford Five Hundred: Replace One Or More FRONT Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604D 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Replace One Or Both INNER Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604E 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Replace One Or Both OUTER Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604F Additional Time To Paint 1.0 Hr. Sensors To Match Bumper Cover On The Following Vehicles: Aviator, Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 7177 Monterey, Five Hundred, Freestyle, Montego DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15K859 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings Parking Assist Distance Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings TSB 05-6-4 04/04/05 FALSE PARKING AID WARNINGS FORD: 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2002-2003 Windstar 2002-2005 Excursion, Expedition, Explorer, F-Super Duty 2003-2005 Escape 2004-2005 F-150, Freestar LINCOLN: 2002 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 2005 Montego 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 05-4-19 to update the description for labor operation F. ISSUE Vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may sound a warning tone when the vehicle is in reverse, even though there are no objects behind the vehicle. This condition may also occur on vehicles equipped with the forward sensing system (FSS) when vehicle is in reverse or drive. ACTION The condition MAY NOT be due to proximity sensor(s) malfunction but may be a normal operation characteristic, or due to sensor contamination (sensor being covered with dirt). Refer to the following description of OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS, before replacing any sensor(s). SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE THE FOLLOWING DESCRIPTIONS ARE TRUE FOR BOTH THE RSS AND FSS. OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS The RSS is only operational when the vehicle is in reverse. For vehicles also equipped with the FSS the system is operational when the vehicle is in reverse or drive. The FSS and RSS give an audible warning to the driver when obstacles are within 6' (1.8 meters) from the vehicle, and when obstacles are within 18" (46 cm) on either side of the bumper. NOTE CERTAIN OBSTACLES MAY BE DIFFICULT FOR THE RSS/FSS TO DETECT DEPENDING ON GEOMETRIC SHAPE OR PROFILE OF THE OBJECT AND THE MATERIAL THE OBJECT IS COMPOSED OF. NOTE THE NEAREST OBSTACLE WILL ALWAYS BE THE OBSTACLE REPORTED, WITH THE EXCEPTION STATED IN THE NOTE ABOVE. NOTE THE VEHICLE OPERATOR MUST BE AWARE THAT THE WARNING TONES ARE AT A MODERATE VOLUME LEVEL AND THAT THE TONES MAY BE DIFFICULT TO HEAR WITH BACKGROUND NOISE (RADIO, BLOWERS, PASSENGER CONVERSATION, ETC). THE RSS/FSS SPEAKER VOLUME IS ALREADY AT MAXIMUM VOLUME AND IS NOT ADJUSTABLE. In cases where the RSS/FSS give warnings but nothing is within range of the vehicle sensors, or give warnings for 3 seconds then ceases, the occurrence may be due to any of the following reasons: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 7183 BLOCKED/CONTAMINATED PROXIMITY SENSOR SURFACE: Proximity sensor surfaces may be covered with snow, ice, dirt or mud. There is a gap between the sensor membrane and its plastic housing that must remain clear (Figure 1). If this space is contaminated with any foreign material the system may sound a continuous tone or intermittent tone. The sensor surface can be cleaned by a high pressure water spray. SIDE COVERAGE SENSOR: There is side/rear coverage that extends approximately 18" (46 cm) perpendicular from the side rear fascia. Side coverage is a desirable feature in a parking situation where the vehicle is involved in a very tight turn with little rearward movement, or where the vehicle is backing parallel to a large, extending obstacle such as a garage wall. If there is no encroachment between any of the outer sensors and an obstacle, then the warning will sound for 3 seconds and cease. If vehicle or the obstacle begin to move closer to each other, then the warning will begin again. Obstacles within 10" (25 cm) of the fascia will always be reported with a continuous tone. This is considered normal operation. ABNORMAL ROAD SURFACES: The RSS/FSS may give warnings due to certain road surfaces with surface projections such as rocks, broken pavement, unplowed snow covered roads. This is considered normal operation. OTHER POSSIBLE CAUSES: Very wet weather conditions, such as mist, frost or snow may provoke occasional warnings. The system may detect liftgate while open and certain trailer hitches and/or bicycle racks. External ultrasonic noise may be detected (high velocity air, machinery). This is considered normal operation. SENSOR DIAGNOSTICS 1. Ensure that nothing is in detectable sensor-range 6' (1.8 meters) behind vehicle for the RSS and within 6' (1.8 meters) of the front of the vehicle for the FSS. 2. Clean proximity sensors with a dry shop towel, and if required wash with water or a high pressure water to ensure that the membrane gap is free of any dirt or contamination. 3. Using the New Generation Star (NGS) tester (up to 2004 MY), NGS+ (2005 MY) or WDS observe the following four parking aid module parameter identification displays (PIDs) for distance information: ^ LR_CNTD (NGS)/LRI_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle) ^ RR_CNTD (NGS)/RRI_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle) ^ LR_CNRD (NGS)/LRO_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle) ^ RR_CNRD (NGS)/RRO_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle) NOTE PID IDENTIFIERS ALSO EXIST FOR FRONT SENSORS IF EQUIPPED. a. If the sensor is functioning properly, with no objects in range of the vehicle, each sensor PID as described above should display a full scale numerical reading of 255 cm (NGS) or 100 inches (NGS+ and WDS). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 7184 b. If a PID reading other than 255 or 100 displays, replace only the sensor that is out of specification. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 413-00 as needed for removal and installation procedures. ACCESSING PIDS WITH NGS, SELECT: ^ Vehicle Line ^ Diagnostic Data Link ^ PAM ^ PID/Data Monitor And Record ^ Select The Appropriate PIDS ^ Start ACCESSING PIDS WITH WDS, SELECT: ^ Tool box Icon ^ Datalogger, Then Tick (Check Mark) ^ Modules, Then Tick ^ PAM, Then Tick ^ Select The Appropriate PIDS, Then Tick NOTE FOR SOME VEHICLES, REPLACEMENT SENSORS WILL BE RECEIVED WITH A PRIMED-BLACK PAINTABLE SURFACE AND MUST BE PAINTED TO MATCH VEHICLE COLOR. REFER TO PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS BELOW. PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS ^ Use a Ford-Approved paint gun, apply base/clear coat to match vehicle ^ Surface can be cleaned with Isopropyl alcohol ^ Maximum paint curing temperature is 194~ F (90~ C) for 1 hour ^ Maximum coating thickness 125 micro meters (including the primer) ^ Paint or veil of paint must not get into connector ^ Immersion processes ARE NOT permitted ^ Paint must be applied evenly to the surface ^ Functional test must be done after painting ^ Use NGS tester to confirm settling time of the sensor is within the specified limits: 850 micro sec. to 1500 micro sec. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 050604A 2004-2005 F150, 0.7 Hr. 2002-2005 Excursion, 2002 Expedition/Navigator, 2002-2005 F Super Duty, 2002-2003 Blackwood, 2005 Freestyle: Replace Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 7185 One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604B 2003-2005 Aviator, 0.9 Hr. 2002-2005 Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604B 2004-2005 Monterey, 0.8 Hr. 2004-2005 Freestar, 2002-2003 Windstar: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604B 2003-2005 Expedition: 1.3 Hrs. Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604C 2004-2005 Monterey, 1.2 Hrs. 2004-2005 Freestar, 2005 Montego, 2005 Ford Five Hundred: Replace One Or More FRONT Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604D 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Replace One Or Both INNER Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604E 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Replace One Or Both OUTER Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101) 050604F Additional Time To Paint 1.0 Hr. Sensors To Match Bumper Cover On The Following Vehicles: Aviator, Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 7186 Monterey, Five Hundred, Freestyle, Montego DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15K859 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7187 View 151-38 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left > Page 7190 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left > Page 7191 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left > Page 7192 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7193 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair PARKING AID SENSOR REMOVAL 1. NOTE: The rear bumper removal is only necessary for access to the outer parking aid sensors. The inner parking aid sensors do not require rear bumper removal for access. Remove the rear bumper. 2. Remove the parking aid sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Release the tabs. 3 Remove the parking aid sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-19 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7197 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7198 Parking Assist Switch: Service and Repair PARKING AID SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Remove the parking aid switch. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Press the tabs. 3 Remove the parking aid switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Tow Capability/Service Kit Requirements Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Tow Capability/Service Kit Requirements TSB 06-7-1 04/17/06 NEUTRAL TOW CAPABILITY - SERVICE KIT REQUIREMENTS FORD: 2004-2006 Focus 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2006 Escape, Explorer, F-150-350 Series, Ranger 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2007 Explorer Sport Trac LINCOLN: 2006 Mark LT MERCURY: 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 06-4-5 to update the vehicle neutral tow application chart. ISSUE Various vehicles are neutral tow capable. Refer to the following chart to determine neutral tow capability for specific vehicle applications, and to determine if a Service Kit is required to make the vehicle neutral tow capable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Tow Capability/Service Kit Requirements > Page 7204 ACTION Review the neutral tow application chart (Figure 1) and order the kit, if applicable. Reprogramming of various modules may be required for some installations. Installation instructions are included with the kit. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Tow Capability/Service Kit Requirements > Page 7205 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Find Wiring Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams ^ System Diagrams Component Circuits that work together as a system ^ Grounds Diagrams Circuits grounding the system diagrams Power Distribution Diagrams The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any "dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any "blown" fuses. System Diagrams These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's indirect relationship with components in other systems. Grounds Diagrams The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different systems. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7210 Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#". These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc). All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions. Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of diagrams. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. Introduction To Ford Diagrams Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7211 System Overview Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information, connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent diagrams in the set. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7212 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram where the splice appears in full. Component Referencing (4) Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component (i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations. Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7213 Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7214 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. "Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle. NUMBER ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................... LOCATION 100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment, Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200 ................................................................................................................................................ Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300 .............................................................................................................................................. From instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ................................................................... ............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper; Truck bed 500 ...................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Driver door 600 .................................................. ...................................................................................................................................................... Passenger door, front 700 ................................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 ............................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ...... Passenger door, right rear Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7215 900 ....................................................................................................................................................... ........................ Above door trim panel and headliner Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification Symbols Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7216 Symbols Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7217 Symbols Part 3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7218 Symbols Part 4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7219 Symbols Part 5 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7220 Trailer Connector: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 Locked terminal 2 Male half 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7221 Defective insulation stripping 1 Proper crimp 2 Insulation not removed 3 Wire strands missing 4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 Seal 2 Displaced tab Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7222 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Male half 7 Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 Enlarged 2 Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7223 Electrical short inside the harness 1 Solder coated wire to ground 2 Harness protective tape 3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7224 Splice tape removed 1 Intermittent short Splice covered 1 Wire strand 2 Splice tape 3 Harness tape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7225 Broken wire strands in harness 1 Wiring harness tape 2 Wiring strand 3 Broken strands intermittent signal 4 Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7226 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7227 6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7228 8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7229 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7230 Trailer Connector: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 95-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Find Wiring Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams ^ System Diagrams Component Circuits that work together as a system ^ Grounds Diagrams Circuits grounding the system diagrams Power Distribution Diagrams The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any "dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any "blown" fuses. System Diagrams These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's indirect relationship with components in other systems. Grounds Diagrams The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different systems. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7235 Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#". These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc). All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions. Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of diagrams. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. Introduction To Ford Diagrams Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7236 System Overview Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information, connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent diagrams in the set. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7237 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram where the splice appears in full. Component Referencing (4) Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component (i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations. Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7238 Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7239 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. "Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle. NUMBER ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................... LOCATION 100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment, Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200 ................................................................................................................................................ Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300 .............................................................................................................................................. From instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ................................................................... ............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper; Truck bed 500 ...................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Driver door 600 .................................................. ...................................................................................................................................................... Passenger door, front 700 ................................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 ............................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ...... Passenger door, right rear Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7240 900 ....................................................................................................................................................... ........................ Above door trim panel and headliner Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification Symbols Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7241 Symbols Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7242 Symbols Part 3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7243 Symbols Part 4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7244 Symbols Part 5 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7245 Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 Locked terminal 2 Male half 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7246 Defective insulation stripping 1 Proper crimp 2 Insulation not removed 3 Wire strands missing 4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 Seal 2 Displaced tab Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7247 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Male half 7 Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 Enlarged 2 Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7248 Electrical short inside the harness 1 Solder coated wire to ground 2 Harness protective tape 3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7249 Splice tape removed 1 Intermittent short Splice covered 1 Wire strand 2 Splice tape 3 Harness tape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7250 Broken wire strands in harness 1 Wiring harness tape 2 Wiring strand 3 Broken strands intermittent signal 4 Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7251 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7252 6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7253 8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7254 Trailer Lamps: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 95-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Trailer Lamps: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION 1 Verify the customer concern by operating the trailer tow lights. 2. Verify the exterior lighting system of the vehicle is operating correctly. If not, refer to the appropriate pinpoint test. 3. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage. VISUAL INSPECTION CHART Electrical Central junction box (CJB) fuse: 21 (10A) - 16 (10A) - Connections - Circuity - Relays - Bulb(s) 4. If the fault is not visually evident, determine the symptom and proceed to the Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7257 Symptom Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7258 Trailer Lamps: Pinpoint Tests Tests AB PINPOINT TEST AB: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE Test AB1 Tests AC PINPOINT TEST AC: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - BOTH TRAILER TURN SIGNALS/STOPLAMPS/HAZARD LAMPS Test AC1-AC2 Tests AD PINPOINT TEST AD: THE INDIVIDUAL TRAILER LAMPS IS INOPERATIVE - RH TRAILER TURN SIGNALS/STOPLAMPS/HAZARD Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7259 LAMPS Test AD1 Tests AE PINPOINT TEST AE: THE INDIVIDUAL TRAILER LAMPS IS INOPERATIVE - LH TRAILER TURN SIGNALS/STOPLAMPS/HAZARD LAMPS Test AE1 Tests AF PINPOINT TEST AF: THE INDIVIDUAL TRAILER LAMPS IS INOPERATIVE - PARKING LAMPS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7260 Test AF1 Test AF1-AF2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7261 73III Automotive Meter Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Find Wiring Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams ^ System Diagrams Component Circuits that work together as a system ^ Grounds Diagrams Circuits grounding the system diagrams Power Distribution Diagrams The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any "dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any "blown" fuses. System Diagrams These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's indirect relationship with components in other systems. Grounds Diagrams The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different systems. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7266 Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#". These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc). All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions. Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of diagrams. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. Introduction To Ford Diagrams Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7267 System Overview Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information, connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent diagrams in the set. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7268 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram where the splice appears in full. Component Referencing (4) Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component (i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations. Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7269 Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7270 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. "Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle. NUMBER ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................... LOCATION 100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment, Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200 ................................................................................................................................................ Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300 .............................................................................................................................................. From instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ................................................................... ............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper; Truck bed 500 ...................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Driver door 600 .................................................. ...................................................................................................................................................... Passenger door, front 700 ................................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 ............................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ...... Passenger door, right rear Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7271 900 ....................................................................................................................................................... ........................ Above door trim panel and headliner Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification Symbols Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7272 Symbols Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7273 Symbols Part 3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7274 Symbols Part 4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7275 Symbols Part 5 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7276 Trailer Connector: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 Locked terminal 2 Male half 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7277 Defective insulation stripping 1 Proper crimp 2 Insulation not removed 3 Wire strands missing 4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 Seal 2 Displaced tab Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7278 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Male half 7 Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 Enlarged 2 Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7279 Electrical short inside the harness 1 Solder coated wire to ground 2 Harness protective tape 3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7280 Splice tape removed 1 Intermittent short Splice covered 1 Wire strand 2 Splice tape 3 Harness tape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7281 Broken wire strands in harness 1 Wiring harness tape 2 Wiring strand 3 Broken strands intermittent signal 4 Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7282 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7283 6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7284 8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7285 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7286 Trailer Connector: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 95-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-18 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Find Wiring Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams ^ System Diagrams Component Circuits that work together as a system ^ Grounds Diagrams Circuits grounding the system diagrams Power Distribution Diagrams The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any "dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any "blown" fuses. System Diagrams These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's indirect relationship with components in other systems. Grounds Diagrams The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different systems. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7294 Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#". These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc). All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions. Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of diagrams. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. Introduction To Ford Diagrams Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7295 System Overview Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information, connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent diagrams in the set. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7296 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram where the splice appears in full. Component Referencing (4) Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component (i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations. Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7297 Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7298 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. "Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle. NUMBER ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................... LOCATION 100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment, Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200 ................................................................................................................................................ Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300 .............................................................................................................................................. From instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ................................................................... ............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper; Truck bed 500 ...................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Driver door 600 .................................................. ...................................................................................................................................................... Passenger door, front 700 ................................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 ............................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ...... Passenger door, right rear Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7299 900 ....................................................................................................................................................... ........................ Above door trim panel and headliner Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification Symbols Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7300 Symbols Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7301 Symbols Part 3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7302 Symbols Part 4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7303 Symbols Part 5 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7304 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 Locked terminal 2 Male half 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7305 Defective insulation stripping 1 Proper crimp 2 Insulation not removed 3 Wire strands missing 4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 Seal 2 Displaced tab Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7306 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Male half 7 Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 Enlarged 2 Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7307 Electrical short inside the harness 1 Solder coated wire to ground 2 Harness protective tape 3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7308 Splice tape removed 1 Intermittent short Splice covered 1 Wire strand 2 Splice tape 3 Harness tape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7309 Broken wire strands in harness 1 Wiring harness tape 2 Wiring strand 3 Broken strands intermittent signal 4 Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7310 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7311 6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7312 8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7313 Body Control Module: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7314 Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 59-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7315 59-2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7316 59-3 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7317 Body Control Module: Service and Repair GENERIC ELECTRONIC MODULE (GEM) REMOVAL 1. NOTE: Prior to removal of the GEM, it is necessary to upload module configuration information to a diagnostic tool. This information needs to be downloaded into the new module once installed. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the pin-type retainer and the lower shield. 3. Position the RH and LH carpet aside from the center tunnel. 4. Disconnect the GEM electrical connectors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7318 5. Remove the GEM 1 Pull back the insulation and remove the nuts. 2 Remove the GEM. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Configure the GEM. Refer to Information Bus (Module Configuration). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair FRONT BUMPER COVER Removal and Installation 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the six pin-type retainers (three each side). 3. Remove the four front bumper cover bolts (two each side). 4. Remove and discard the two front bumper cover-to-front fender pin-type retainers (one each side). 5. If equipped, disconnect the fog lamp electrical connectors. 6. Remove the lower front bumper cover bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7324 7. Remove the pin-type retainers. 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Remove the two upper bolts (one each side) and the front bumper cover. 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - When installing, be sure to position the front bumper cover into the bumper slides. - Transfer components as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair Front Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair FRONT BUMPER Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front bumper cover. 2. Remove the front bumper. 1 Remove the four front bumper nuts (two each side). 2 Remove the front bumper. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair REAR BUMPER COVER Removal and Installation 1. If equipped, disconnect the parking aid system electrical connector. 2. Remove the six rear splash shield bolts (three each side). 3. Remove the two rear bumper cover to rear quarter panel screws (one each side). 4. Remove the four pin-type retainers. 5. Remove the rear bumper cover. 1 Remove the screws. 2 Remove the bolts and the liftgate alignment bumpers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7332 3 Remove the rear bumper cover. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - When installing, be sure to position the rear bumper cover into the bumper slides. - Transfer components as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair REAR BUMPER Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear bumper cover. 2. Remove the rear bumper. 1 Remove the four rear bumper nuts (two each side). 2 Remove the rear bumper. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair COWL PANEL GRILLE Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wiper pivot arms. 1 Remove the nuts. 2 Remove the wiper pivot arms. 2. Remove the driver side cowl grille. 1 Remove the pin-type retainers. 2 Remove the screw caps and screws. 3 Remove the cowl grille. 3. Remove the passenger side cowl grille. 1 Remove the pin-type retainers. 2 Remove the screw caps and screws. 3 Remove the cowl grille. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair EXTERIOR FRONT DOOR HANDLE REMOVAL 1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside. 3. Loosen the door latch remote control screw. 4. Remove the exterior door handle cover. 1 Pull the exterior door handle. 2 The front of the cover must be released prior to removing. 5. Remove the exterior door handle by sliding towards the rear of the vehicle. 6. Remove the exterior door handle seals. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7347 INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair INTERIOR DOOR HANDLE REMOVAL 1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside. 3. Remove the interior door handle. - Release the clip. 4. Remove the door latch cable. 1 Disconnect the cable conduit. 2 Remove the door latch cable. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Adjustments Front Door Hinge: Adjustments HINGE ADJUSTMENT - FRONT DOOR LH and RH sides NOTE: Make sure the rear door is within specification before making any adjustments to the front door. Refer to the specification chart. See: Specifications 1. Remove the fender. 2. Mark the positions of the front door hinges to use as reference points. 3. Loosen the two front door hinge-to-body bolts just enough to permit movement. 4. Remove the A-pillar lower trim panel. 1 Remove the pin-type retainer. 2 Remove the A-pillar lower trim panel. LH side Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Adjustments > Page 7354 5. Position the central junction box (CJB) aside. 1 Remove the nuts. 2 Position the CJB aside. RH side 6. Position the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch bracket aside. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Position the bracket aside. LH and RH sides 7. Loosen the lower door hinge bolt just enough to permit movement. 8. Adjust the front door to specification. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Adjustments > Page 7355 9. Tighten the three front door hinge to body bolts. LH side 10. Install the CJB. 1 Position the CJB. 2 Install the nuts. RH side 11. Install the IFS bracket. 1 Position the bracket. 2 Install the bolts. LH and RH sides Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Adjustments > Page 7356 12. Install the A-pillar lower trim panel. 1 Position the A-pillar lower trim panel. 2 Install the pin-type retainers. 13. Install the fender. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Latch: Service and Repair FRONT DOOR LATCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the exterior front door handle. 2. Loosen the screw until the door latch remote control is sliding free. 3. Position the interior door handle aside. - Pull to release the clip. 4. Remove and discard the door latch screws. 5. Disconnect the door latch electrical connector. 1 Release the clip. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7360 2 Disconnect the electrical connector. 6. Remove the door latch assembly. - Slide the door latch remote control towards the front of the vehicle. 7. Remove the three screws and position the anti-theft guard aside. 8. Open the clip and disconnect the exterior door handle actuating rod. 9. Disconnect the lock/unlock rod clip. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: Transfer components as necessary. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Panel: Service and Repair FRONT DOOR TRIM PANEL REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the front door latch release handle bezel. 1 Remove the screw. 2 Remove the front door latch release handle bezel. 3. Remove the door handle cup screw. 4. Remove the front door trim panel. 1 Remove the screws. 2 Remove the front door trim panel and disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments Front Door Striker: Adjustments STRIKER ADJUSTMENT NOTE: Before adjusting the door latch striker plate, verify that the door can be closed easily and fits tightly. 1. Loosen the door latch striker bolts. 2. Reposition the door latch striker plate from side to side or up and down as necessary. 3. Tighten the door latch striker plate bolts. 4. NOTE: The rear door is shown, the front door is similar. Check the adjustment. Repeat the procedure as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair FRONT DOOR WINDOW GLASS REMOVAL 1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Remove the screw and the door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside. 4. Remove the front door interior glass weatherstrip. 5. Connect the window control switch to the door harness. 6. Connect the battery. 7. Lower the front door window glass to gain access to the screws. 8. Remove the front door window glass screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7370 9. Remove the front door window glass. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Left Front View 151-34 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Left Front > Page 7375 View 151-33 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 7378 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair FRONT DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL All vehicles 1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Remove the screw and the front door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside. Vehicles with power windows 4. Connect the window control switch electrical connector. 5. Connect the battery. All vehicles 6. Lower the front door window glass to gain access to the screws. Vehicles with power windows 7. Disconnect the battery. 8. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector. 9. Remove the front door window glass screws. 10. Support the front door window glass in the full up position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7382 11. Disconnect the front door power window regulator motor electrical connector. 12. Remove the front door power window regulator assembly. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the nuts. Vehicles with manual windows 13. Remove the front door window regulator assembly. 1 Remove the bolts 2 Remove the nuts. INSTALLATION All vehicles 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Cycle the door window glass to make sure of correct door window glass engagement. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair EXTERIOR REAR DOOR HANDLE REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside. 3. Disconnect the door latch electrical connector. 1 Release the clip. 2 Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Position the rear door glass top run aside. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Position the rear door glass top run aside. 5. Disconnect the exterior door handle actuating rod. 1 Open the clip. 2 Disconnect the actuating rod. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7388 6. Remove the exterior door handle screws. 7. Remove the exterior door handle cover. 1 Pull the exterior door handle. 2 The front of the cover must be released prior to removing. 8. Remove the exterior door handle by sliding towards the rear of the vehicle. 9. Remove the exterior door handle seals. 10. Remove the door latch remote control from inside the door frame. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair INTERIOR DOOR HANDLE REMOVAL 1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside. 3. Remove the interior door handle. - Release the clip. 4. Remove the door latch cable. 1 Disconnect the cable conduit. 2 Remove the door latch cable. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Adjustments Rear Door Hinge: Adjustments HINGE ADJUSTMENT - REAR DOOR 1. Remove the front seat safety belt retractor. 2. Mark the positions of the rear door hinges to use as reference points. 3. Loosen the rear door hinge-to-body bolts just enough to permit movement. 4. Loosen the two rear door hinge-to-body bolts just enough to permit movement. 5. Adjust the rear door to specification. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Adjustments > Page 7395 6. Tighten the four rear door hinge-to-body bolts. 7. Check the front door adjustments. 8. Install the front seat safety belt retractor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Latch: Service and Repair REAR DOOR LATCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Position the water shield aside. 3. Disconnect the door latch electrical connector. 1 Release the clip. 2 Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Position the rear door glass top run aside. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Position the door glass top run aside. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7399 5. Disconnect the exterior door handle actuating rod. 1 Open the clip. 2 Disconnect the actuating rod. 6. Remove and discard the rear door latch screws. 7. Remove the rear door latch. 8. Disconnect the interior door handle cable. 1 Release the cable conduit. 2 Disconnect the cable. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair REAR DOOR TRIM PANEL REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door latch release handle bezel. 1 Remove the screw. 2 Remove the rear door latch release handle bezel. 2. Remove the door handle cup screw. 3. Remove the rear door sail panel. 4. Remove the rear door trim panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7403 - Disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments Rear Door Striker: Adjustments STRIKER ADJUSTMENT NOTE: Before adjusting the door latch striker plate, verify that the door can be closed easily and fits tightly. 1. Loosen the door latch striker bolts. 2. Reposition the door latch striker plate from side to side or up and down as necessary. 3. Tighten the door latch striker plate bolts. 4. NOTE: The rear door is shown, the front door is similar. Check the adjustment. Repeat the procedure as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair REAR DOOR WINDOW GLASS REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door glass top run. 2. Remove the rear door window glass. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair REAR DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL All vehicles 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Remove the screw and the rear door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside. Vehicles with power windows 4. Connect the window control switch electrical connector. All vehicles 5. Lower the rear door window glass to gain access to the screws. Vehicles with power windows 6. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector. All vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7413 7. Remove the rear door window glass screws. 8. Support the rear door window glass in the full up position. Vehicles with power windows 9. Disconnect the rear door power window regulator electrical connector. 10. Remove the rear door power window regulator assembly. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the nuts. Vehicles with manual windows 11. Remove the rear door window regulator assembly. 1 Remove the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7414 2 Remove the nuts. INSTALLATION All vehicles 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Cycle the door glass to make sure of correct window glass engagement. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Latch: Service and Repair HOOD LATCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the hood latch nut. 2. NOTE: Mark the hood latch position prior to removal of the bolts. Remove the hood latch bolts. 3. Remove the hood latch. 1 Release the cable conduit. 2 Disconnect the cable. 3 Remove the hood latch. INSTALLATION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7419 1. Connect the hood latch release cable and conduit. 1 Connect the cable. 2 Engage the cable conduit. 2. Position the hood latch with alignment marks and install the bolts. 3. Install the hood latch nut. 4. Verify the hood alignment. 5. Adjust the hood latch. 1 Loosen the bolts. 2 Loosen the nut. 3 Align the hood latch with the hood latch striker. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7420 6. Tighten the hood latch bolts and nut. 7. CAUTION: Make sure the hood latch is fully engaged. Verify the hood latch striker is fully engaging the hood latch. Repeat previous steps as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Latch Release: Service and Repair HOOD LATCH RELEASE HANDLE REMOVAL 1. Remove the hood latch release handle bolts. 2. Remove the hood latch. 3. Remove the two hood latch release handle cable locators. 4. NOTE: The hood latch release handle cable must be pulled through the dash panel into the passenger compartment. Remove the hood latch release handle. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations View 151-15 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7428 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair LIFTGATE WINDOW GLASS REMOVAL 1. Open the liftgate glass. 2. Remove the two liftgate nut access covers (on each side). 3. Disconnect the rear window glass electrical harness connector. 4. Disconnect the heated window grid wire electrical connector. 5. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step. Disconnect the two liftgate window glass cylinders. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7433 1 Slide the spring retainer to the end of the socket. 2 Disconnect the socket from the ball stud. 6. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step. Remove the two liftgate window glass hinge nuts. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Transfer components as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations View 151-32 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 7437 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Handle: Service and Repair LIFTGATE WINDOW GLASS RELEASE HANDLE REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear window wiper motor. 2. Remove the nuts, striker plate and the liftgate window glass release handle. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance Technical Service Bulletin # 04C09 Date: 050318 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes. OASIS was activated January 20, 2004. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED: Yes Available through the website by March 21, 2005. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 7449 Owner names and addresses will be available March 31, 2005. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affect units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action. RELATED DAMAGE Related damage claims are not approved for this program. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME This repair will require no additional labor time to complete. Claims submitted with "MT" labor will not be accepted for reimbursement. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC). The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option, directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251, Dearborn, MI 48121-6251. ^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund claims that included other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be accepted for reimbursement. ^ This compliance recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair. Claiming a refund will not close out the VIN for this recall. ^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.) - Program Code: 04C09 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 7450 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts will not be direct shipped for this recall. Order your parts requirements through normal order processing channels. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to DOES II. EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. CLAIM HANDLING PROCEDURE FOR RETURNING PRIOR LEVEL PARTS Immediate Purge Required: -4L8Z-7843150-DB LATCH ASY - TAILGATE (LIFTGATE) -3L8Z-7843400-FAA HANDLE Prepare and submit a PCS claim as described below: ^ REASON CODE: GB ^ SHIPPER NBR: 04C09 ^ LINE EXPLANATION: Purge Required When preparing your PCS claim, list the part number being returned on the claim, and indicate the quantity of that part number being returned. Your PCS claim must be submitted by March 31, 2005. Claims filed after this date will be denied. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW This program involves performing specific liftgate latch system repairs on two (2) specific vehicle populations. Each repair procedure identifies the affected vehicles requiring that particular repair. See the list below for specific repairs needed for each vehicle population. 2004 model year Escape vehicles and 2001-2003 Escape vehicles serviced with subject parts: ^ replace the liftgate latch release rod ^ replace release rod clip ^ replace handle assembly return spring and circlip 2005 model year Escape vehicles: ^ replace the liftgate latch release rod ^ replace release rod clip LIFTGATE HANDLE REMOVAL AND REPAIR AFFECTED VEHICLES: 2004 MODEL YEAR ESCAPE VEHICLES AND 2001-2003 MODEL YEAR ESCAPE VEHICLES SERVICED WITH SUBJECT PARTS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 7451 1. Open the liftgate. 2. If equipped, remove the rear wiper motor cover. 3. Remove the four (4) screws and remove the liftgate trim panel. 4. Disconnect the liftgate window latch, liftgate handle and liftgate latch release rods by opening the clips. See Figure 1. 5. Release the liftgate window latch ajar switch wiring harness locator and if equipped, disconnect the liftgate latch actuator electrical connector. See Figure 2. 6. Remove the liftgate latch remote control assembly retaining screw and all four (4) retaining nuts. See Figure 3. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 7452 7. Disconnect the liftgate handle-to-remote release rod from the remote control assembly, then remove the remote control. See Figure 4. 8. Remove the liftgate handle assembly and place it on a bench. See Figure 5. 9. Disassemble the handle as follows: a) Remove the circlip b) Pull the pivot rod out of the handle assembly. c) Note the position of the spring then remove the spring from the handle assembly. 10. NOTE: the new circlip is supplied in the bag with the new spring. Make sure to retain the new circlip for installation to the original pivot rod and handle. LIFTGATE LATCH REMOVAL AND RELEASE ROD REPLACEMENT AFFECTED VEHICLES: ALL VEHICLES COVERED BY 04C09 NOTE: For 2001-2004 model year vehicles, proceed to Step 4. Ford 2005 model year vehicles, begin the repair on step 1. 1. Open the liftgate. 2. If equipped, remove the rear wiper motor cover. 3. Remove the four (4) screws and remove the liftgate trim panel. 4. Disconnect the liftgate ajar switch electrical connector (located on the liftgate latch). 5. Remove the three (3) liftgate latch bolts and retain. 6. Remove the liftgate latch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 7453 7. Remove the liftgate latch release rod and install the new rod. See Figure 6. 8. Remove the original release rod clip and replace with the new clip. LIFTGATE LATCH INSTALLATION AFFECTED VEHICLES: ALL VEHICLES COVERED BY 04C09 1. Position the latch assembly in the vehicle. 2. Apply Motorcraft Medium-Strength Threadlocker TA-25 (blue) to the bolts and install the three (3) liftgate latch bolts. See Figure 7. 3. Tight the bolts to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 4. Connect the liftgate ajar switch electrical connector. NOTE: Fore 2001-2004 model year vehicles, proceed to Liftgate Handle Installation. For 2005 model year vehicles, continue with Step 5 of this procedure. 5. Install the liftgate trim panel and four (4) screws. 6. If equipped, install the rear wiper motor cover. 7. Close the liftgate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 7454 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 7455 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 7456 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 7457 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > NHTSA04V602000 > Dec > 04 > Recall 04V602000: Liftgate Latch Release Rod Replacement Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Recalls Recall 04V602000: Liftgate Latch Release Rod Replacement MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2005 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 04V602000 RECALL DATE: Dec 17, 2004 COMPONENT: Latches/Locks/Linkages: Doors: Latch POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 262113 SUMMARY: Certain 2004-2005 sport utility vehicles and certain 2001-2003 sport utiity vehicles having rear liftgate components serviced with 2004 equivalent components fail to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 206, "Door Locks and Door Retention Components." The rear liftgate latching system does not meet the inertia load requirement in one direction. CONSEQUENCE: If the liftgate is left unlocked, there is the potential that it may open during a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the rear liftgate latch release rod, the release rod attachment clip and the door handle return spring. The recall is expected to begin on January 24, 2005. Owners should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. NOTES: Ford recall No. 04C09. Customers can also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236. 888-327-4236. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance Technical Service Bulletin # 04C09 Date: 050318 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes. OASIS was activated January 20, 2004. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED: Yes Available through the website by March 21, 2005. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 7467 Owner names and addresses will be available March 31, 2005. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affect units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action. RELATED DAMAGE Related damage claims are not approved for this program. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME This repair will require no additional labor time to complete. Claims submitted with "MT" labor will not be accepted for reimbursement. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC). The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option, directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251, Dearborn, MI 48121-6251. ^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund claims that included other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be accepted for reimbursement. ^ This compliance recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair. Claiming a refund will not close out the VIN for this recall. ^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.) - Program Code: 04C09 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 7468 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts will not be direct shipped for this recall. Order your parts requirements through normal order processing channels. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to DOES II. EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. CLAIM HANDLING PROCEDURE FOR RETURNING PRIOR LEVEL PARTS Immediate Purge Required: -4L8Z-7843150-DB LATCH ASY - TAILGATE (LIFTGATE) -3L8Z-7843400-FAA HANDLE Prepare and submit a PCS claim as described below: ^ REASON CODE: GB ^ SHIPPER NBR: 04C09 ^ LINE EXPLANATION: Purge Required When preparing your PCS claim, list the part number being returned on the claim, and indicate the quantity of that part number being returned. Your PCS claim must be submitted by March 31, 2005. Claims filed after this date will be denied. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW This program involves performing specific liftgate latch system repairs on two (2) specific vehicle populations. Each repair procedure identifies the affected vehicles requiring that particular repair. See the list below for specific repairs needed for each vehicle population. 2004 model year Escape vehicles and 2001-2003 Escape vehicles serviced with subject parts: ^ replace the liftgate latch release rod ^ replace release rod clip ^ replace handle assembly return spring and circlip 2005 model year Escape vehicles: ^ replace the liftgate latch release rod ^ replace release rod clip LIFTGATE HANDLE REMOVAL AND REPAIR AFFECTED VEHICLES: 2004 MODEL YEAR ESCAPE VEHICLES AND 2001-2003 MODEL YEAR ESCAPE VEHICLES SERVICED WITH SUBJECT PARTS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 7469 1. Open the liftgate. 2. If equipped, remove the rear wiper motor cover. 3. Remove the four (4) screws and remove the liftgate trim panel. 4. Disconnect the liftgate window latch, liftgate handle and liftgate latch release rods by opening the clips. See Figure 1. 5. Release the liftgate window latch ajar switch wiring harness locator and if equipped, disconnect the liftgate latch actuator electrical connector. See Figure 2. 6. Remove the liftgate latch remote control assembly retaining screw and all four (4) retaining nuts. See Figure 3. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 7470 7. Disconnect the liftgate handle-to-remote release rod from the remote control assembly, then remove the remote control. See Figure 4. 8. Remove the liftgate handle assembly and place it on a bench. See Figure 5. 9. Disassemble the handle as follows: a) Remove the circlip b) Pull the pivot rod out of the handle assembly. c) Note the position of the spring then remove the spring from the handle assembly. 10. NOTE: the new circlip is supplied in the bag with the new spring. Make sure to retain the new circlip for installation to the original pivot rod and handle. LIFTGATE LATCH REMOVAL AND RELEASE ROD REPLACEMENT AFFECTED VEHICLES: ALL VEHICLES COVERED BY 04C09 NOTE: For 2001-2004 model year vehicles, proceed to Step 4. Ford 2005 model year vehicles, begin the repair on step 1. 1. Open the liftgate. 2. If equipped, remove the rear wiper motor cover. 3. Remove the four (4) screws and remove the liftgate trim panel. 4. Disconnect the liftgate ajar switch electrical connector (located on the liftgate latch). 5. Remove the three (3) liftgate latch bolts and retain. 6. Remove the liftgate latch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 7471 7. Remove the liftgate latch release rod and install the new rod. See Figure 6. 8. Remove the original release rod clip and replace with the new clip. LIFTGATE LATCH INSTALLATION AFFECTED VEHICLES: ALL VEHICLES COVERED BY 04C09 1. Position the latch assembly in the vehicle. 2. Apply Motorcraft Medium-Strength Threadlocker TA-25 (blue) to the bolts and install the three (3) liftgate latch bolts. See Figure 7. 3. Tight the bolts to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 4. Connect the liftgate ajar switch electrical connector. NOTE: Fore 2001-2004 model year vehicles, proceed to Liftgate Handle Installation. For 2005 model year vehicles, continue with Step 5 of this procedure. 5. Install the liftgate trim panel and four (4) screws. 6. If equipped, install the rear wiper motor cover. 7. Close the liftgate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 7472 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 7473 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 7474 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 7475 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > NHTSA04V602000 > Dec > 04 > Recall 04V602000: Liftgate Latch Release Rod Replacement Trunk / Liftgate Latch: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 04V602000: Liftgate Latch Release Rod Replacement MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2005 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 04V602000 RECALL DATE: Dec 17, 2004 COMPONENT: Latches/Locks/Linkages: Doors: Latch POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 262113 SUMMARY: Certain 2004-2005 sport utility vehicles and certain 2001-2003 sport utiity vehicles having rear liftgate components serviced with 2004 equivalent components fail to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 206, "Door Locks and Door Retention Components." The rear liftgate latching system does not meet the inertia load requirement in one direction. CONSEQUENCE: If the liftgate is left unlocked, there is the potential that it may open during a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the rear liftgate latch release rod, the release rod attachment clip and the door handle return spring. The recall is expected to begin on January 24, 2005. Owners should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. NOTES: Ford recall No. 04C09. Customers can also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236. 888-327-4236. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Latch Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate Latch LIFTGATE LATCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the liftgate ajar switch electrical connector. 3. Disconnect the liftgate latch actuating rod. 1 Open the clip. 2 Disconnect the actuating rod. 4. Remove and discard the liftgate latch bolts. 5. Remove the liftgate latch. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: - Make sure the liftgate latch release rod is not preloading the latch. It should be clipped in a relaxed state with no slack. - Position the liftgate latch release rod by pushing outboard to remove the slack. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Latch > Page 7482 Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate Latch Remote Control LIFTGATE LATCH REMOTE CONTROL REMOVAL 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the liftgate latch remote control actuating rods. 1 Open the clip and disconnect the liftgate window latch actuating rod. 2 Open the clip and disconnect the liftgate latch actuating rod. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 1 If equipped, disconnect the liftgate latch actuator electrical connector. 2 Release the liftgate window latch ajar switch wiring harness locator. 4. Remove the liftgate latch remote control assembly. - Remove the screw and nuts. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Transfer all necessary components. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Latch > Page 7483 Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate window Latch LIFTGATE WINDOW LATCH REMOVAL NOTE: Make sure the liftgate window glass is in the raised position. 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the liftgate window latch. 1 Disconnect the liftgate window latch ajar switch electrical connector. 2 Open the clip and disconnect the actuating rod. 3. NOTE: Mark the position of the liftgate window latch prior to removing the nuts. Remove the liftgate window latch. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the latch. INSTALLATION 1. Position the liftgate window latch and loosely install the bolts. 2. Adjust the liftgate window latch. - Set the liftgate window glass flushness to 1.5 mm (0.06 in) under flush. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Latch > Page 7484 3. Tighten the liftgate window latch bolts. 4. Connect the liftgate window latch. 1 Connect the liftgate window latch ajar switch electrical connector. 2 Connect the actuating rod and close the clip. 5. Install the liftgate trim panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Solenoid: Service and Repair LIFTGATE LATCH ACTUATOR REMOVAL 1. Remove the liftgate latch remote control. 2. Remove the screws and the liftgate latch actuator. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair COWL PANEL GRILLE Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wiper pivot arms. 1 Remove the nuts. 2 Remove the wiper pivot arms. 2. Remove the driver side cowl grille. 1 Remove the pin-type retainers. 2 Remove the screw caps and screws. 3 Remove the cowl grille. 3. Remove the passenger side cowl grille. 1 Remove the pin-type retainers. 2 Remove the screw caps and screws. 3 Remove the cowl grille. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair FENDER SPLASH SHIELD Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the fender splash shield pin-type retainers. 3. Remove the fender splash shield screws. 4. Remove the fender splash shield. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the fender splash shield. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7507 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7508 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7514 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7515 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 7516 Front Subframe: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 7517 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 7518 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 7519 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 7520 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 7521 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7522 Front Subframe: Service and Repair SUBFRAME - FRONT Special Tool(S) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Remove the rear transmission mount nuts and bolt. 3. Using the special tool, support the engine. 4. Remove the 2 front wheel and tire assemblies. 5. Remove the 2 engine air deflectors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7523 6. Remove the 2 lower control arm ball joint pinch bolts and nuts (1 on each side). 7. Disconnect the stabilizer bar link. 1 Remove the nuts. 2 Disconnect the link from the stabilizer bar. 8. Remove the lateral support crossmember. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the crossmember. 9. Remove the front transmission mount bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7524 10. Remove the engine support crossmember bolts. 11. Remove the nut and the engine support crossmember. 12. Remove the 2 steering gear bolts. 13. Position the steering gear out of the subframe mounts. 14. Remove the dual converter Y-pipe on the 3.0L (4V) engine or the muffler inlet pipe on the 2.0L (Zetec) engine. Vehicles with manual transmission Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7525 15. Remove the 2 bolts and disconnect the manual transmission shift linkage. Vehicles with 4WD 16. Remove the driveshaft. 17. NOTE: Lower the rear of the engine to allow the subframe to clear the companion flange on the transfer case. Lower the rear of the engine approximately 150 mm (6 in). All vehicles 18. CAUTION: Do not allow the rear subframe bolts to come out of the lower control arm bushing. Completely loosen the 2 front subframe bolts, but do not remove them. 19. NOTE: The lower control arm ball joints must be disconnected from the spindles at the same time the subframe is lowered. With an assistant, remove the 2 subframe nuts lower the subframe from the vehicle. 20. Transfer all necessary components. 21. CAUTION: When installing the subframe bolts, make sure that both of the subframe rear bolts are fully engaged in the cage nuts before tightening to specification. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7534 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7535 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7541 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7542 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 7543 Front Subframe Mount: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 7544 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 7545 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 7546 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 7547 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 7548 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7557 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7558 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7564 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7565 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 7566 Rear Subframe: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 7567 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 7568 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 7569 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 7570 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 7571 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7572 Rear Subframe: Service and Repair SUBFRAME - REAR Removal Vehicles with 4WD 1. Remove the rear axle assembly. All vehicles 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Remove the 4 bolts and position the rear control arm aside. 4. Disconnect the exhaust hanger from the subframe. 5. With an assistant, remove the 4 bolts and rear subframe. Installation All vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7573 1. With an assistant, position the rear subframe and loosely install the bolts. 2. With a 19 mm (0.76 in) rod, align the rear subframe with the alignment holes. 3. Tighten the rear subframe bolts. 4. Connect the exhaust hanger on the subframe. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7574 5. Position the four rear control arms in the subframe. - Loosely install the bolts. Vehicles with 4WD 6. Install the rear axle assembly. All vehicles 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. NOTE: The vehicles must be at ride height before tightening the bolts. Tighten the 4 control arms bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7583 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7584 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7590 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7591 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 7592 Rear Subframe Mount: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 7593 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 7594 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 7595 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 7596 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 7597 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair Grille: Service and Repair RADIATOR GRILLE REMOVAL 1. Remove the front bumper cover. 2. Remove the two nuts. 3. Release the nine clips and remove the radiator grille. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Description and Operation > Console - Floor Console: Description and Operation Console - Floor CONSOLE - FLOOR The high series floor console consists of the following components: - arm rest - floor console finish panel - rear cup holders - storage compartment The low series floor console consists of the following components: - floor console front finish panel - floor console rear finish panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Description and Operation > Console - Floor > Page 7606 Console: Description and Operation Console - Overhead CONSOLE - OVERHEAD The overhead console may consist of the following components: - garage door opener compartment - lamp switch - roof opening panel control switch (with roof opening panel) - sunglass compartment(s) - center dome lamp/map lamps Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Floor Console - High Series Console: Service and Repair Floor Console - High Series FLOOR CONSOLE - HIGH SERIES REMOVAL 1. Remove the floor console finish panel. 1 Apply the parking brake. 2 Remove the floor console finish panel. 2. Remove the floor console front bolts. 3. Remove the floor console. 1 Remove the two rear bolts. 2 Remove the floor console. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Floor Console - High Series > Page 7609 Console: Service and Repair Floor Console - Low Series FLOOR CONSOLE - LOW SERIES REMOVAL 1. Remove the floor console front finish panel. 1 Remove the manual transmission shifter knob by turning counterclockwise. 2 Remove the floor console front finish panel. 2. Remove the floor console rear finish panel. 1 Apply the parking brake. 2 Remove the floor console rear finish panel. 3. Remove the floor console front bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Floor Console - High Series > Page 7610 4. Remove the floor console. - Remove the rear two bolts and the floor console. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions WARNING: - If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed. The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming Depowering and Repowering Procedure Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered. NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected. 2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover. 4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front of any air bag module when the battery ground cable is connected. Connect the battery ground cable. 5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7617 Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Seats Removed DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION PROCEDURES There are two deactivation and reactivation procedures. - One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. - The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. Deactivation Procedure WARNING: If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed. The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. NOTE: - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. - After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the affected front seat. 9. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag floor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 11. Disconnect (if necessary) attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical connector. 12. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7618 Reactivation Procedure 1. WARNING: The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 4. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 5. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector. 6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 7. Install the affected front seat. 8. Connect the drive and passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connectors. 9. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver and passenger side air bag module electrical connectors. 10. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. Reconnect the electrical connector. 11. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 12. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 14. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure Seats Not Removed DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION PROCEDURES There are two deactivation and reactivation procedures. - One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. - The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. Deactivation Procedure WARNING: If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed. The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7619 non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. NOTE: - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. - After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position. 2. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the front seat. 10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable. Reactivation Procedure 1. WARNING: The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. Reconnect the electrical connector. 4. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7620 7. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 9. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7621 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist AIR BAG RECONNECT CHECKLIST The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system concern: 1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3. Restraints control module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors connected? 5. All sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected? Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7622 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure PROVE OUT PROCEDURE Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the restraints control module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 05-8-3 > May > 05 > Interior - Headliner Sagging Near Rear Hatch Headliner: Customer Interest Interior - Headliner Sagging Near Rear Hatch TSB 05-8-3 05/02/05 HEADLINER SAGGING NEAR REAR HATCH FORD: 2004-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005 Mariner ISSUE Some 2004-2005 vehicles may exhibit the headliner sagging around the rear hatch perimeter edge. ACTION Adhere the headliner to the underside of the roof panel. Refer to the following Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the perimeter seal near the sagging edge (Figure 1). 2. Without removing the headliner push pins, pull the headliner down far enough to scuff/sand the back side of the headliner and the underside of the roof panel. 3. Prepare the cartridge of Motorcraft Plastic Bonding Adhesive (TA-9), and apply the adhesive to the back side of the headliner (Figure 2). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 05-8-3 > May > 05 > Interior - Headliner Sagging Near Rear Hatch > Page 7631 4. Push the headliner back into its proper position. Clamp in place using a flat piece of metal or wood to keep the headliner flush against the underside of the roof panel (Figure 3). Allow the adhesive to cure for 45 minutes. 5. Remove clamps and reinstall the perimeter seal. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 050803A 2004-2005 Escape/Escape 0.3 Hr. Hybrid/Mariner Adhere The Headliner To The Underside Of The Roof Panel (Do Not Use With 51916A, 51916B, 51916BXH) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7851944 34 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass Headliner: Customer Interest Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass Article No. 03-25-3 12/22/03 BODY - HEADLINER - SAG/LOOSE AT REAR QUARTER GLASS FORD: 2001-2004 ESCAPE This article supersedes TSB 01-23-7 to update the vehicle model years. ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a headliner sag/loose condition at rear quarter glass area near C/D pillar. ACTION Verify condition. Inspect headliner for amount of sag and overall condition. Repair or replace headliner. Refer to the following Service Procedure for details. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE PRIOR TO REPAIRING THE HEADLINER, PLEASE READ THROUGH THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE IN ITS ENTIRETY. REMEMBER TO INSTALL THE PROTECTIVE TUBING SLEEVE ONTO THE DRILL BIT TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE ROOF. DO NOT DRILL THE HOLES UNTIL STEP 12. Prior to repair, inspect the vehicle for the following conditions to determine if the headliner should be replaced: 1. If the headliner sags in excess of 30 mm (1.180 inch) below quarter window black-out paint, the headliner must be replaced (refer to Workshop Manual Section 501). Do not attempt repair. 2. Inspect for delamination of headliner cloth to substrate. If cloth has come loose the headliner must be replaced (refer to Workshop Manual Section 501). Do not attempt repair. If headliner does not meet the above replacement criteria, the headliner can be repaired. Continue with procedure. To repair the headliner, use the Headliner Retainer Installation Kit. ^ For Parchment interior, use part number 2L8Z-78519D80-AAA ^ For Graphite interior, use part number 2L8Z-78519D80-AAB HEADLINER REPAIR PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass > Page 7636 1. Locate new push-pin holes (See Figure 1 for example locations). 2. Cut template along the curves printed on both sides of template. 3. Make two holes on template along the printed circles. 4. Align template with glass and C-pillar or D-pillar as noted on template. Make sure arrow points to front of the vehicle. Use template for locating proper push-pin spacing (Figure 2). 5. Fit the D-pillar side edge as noted on template and the D-pillar to locate the new push-pin positions between D-pillar and C-pillar (Figure 2). 6. Mark both left-hand side and right-hand side new pin position holes as noted on template. Make sure arrow points to front of the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass > Page 7637 NOTE DO NOT DRILL AT THIS POINT. ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR AND HARNESS NEED TO BE TEMPORARILY MOVED TO PREVENT DAMAGE. CONNECTOR MUST BE ROTATED 90 DEGREES ON LEFT HAND SIDE ONLY AS VIEWED FROM REAR OF VEHICLE (FIGURE 5). 7. Remove the push-pin and child seat tether cap on left hand side only. This allows headliner to flex and helps prevent crease damage (Figure 3). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass > Page 7638 8. Remove top portion of left hand D-pillar trim to allow headliner to flex down. Be careful not to bend or over flex headliner too much or creasing will occur (Figure 4). 9. Rotate electrical connector 90 degrees. Pull harness toward rear of vehicle to avoid drill damage (Figure 5). 10. Install protective tubing sleeve onto 7 mm (9/32 inch) drill bit with 7-10 mm of the drill bit exposed beyond the end of the tube (Figure 6). NOTE THIS SLEEVE MUST BE USED TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE ROOF. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass > Page 7639 11. Align drill perpendicular (90 degrees to surface of headliner) so that pin will be flush with headliner surface (Figure 7). NOTE USE SAFETY GLASSES OR GOGGLES TO PROTECT EYES FROM CHIPS WHEN DRILLING HOLES. 12. Drill holes using the 7 mm (9/32 inch) drill bit with protective sleeve. 13. Before inserting the push-pins, remove any debris/metal shavings that have accumulated on the headliner and/or rear cargo department as a result of drilling the holes. NOTE DO NOT INSERT PUSH-PINS YET. 14. Rotate electrical connector and harness to original position. 15. Insert new pins into holes until headliner is 2 mm (.080 inch) above glass blackout line. NOTE BE CAREFUL NOT TO PULL HEADLINER UP TOO FAR. THIS WILL CAUSE GAPPING AT C AND D PILLAR TRIM. PUSH-PINS CAN BE REMOVED AND RE-INSTALLED TO DESIRED LENGTH. 16. Verify electrical function of center dome lamp, rear dome lamp and rear wiper. 17. Install D-pillar trim and push-pins in original locations. Make sure clips and pins are properly positioned and seated. 18. Inspect headliner and trim positioning. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 01-23-7 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass > Page 7640 032503A Verify Concern And 2.3 Hrs. Replace Headliner (Includes Time For Overhead Console And Sun/Moon Roof) 032503B Verify Concern And 0.5 Hr. Perform Repair Procedure: DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7851944 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 05-8-3 > May > 05 > Interior - Headliner Sagging Near Rear Hatch Headliner: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Headliner Sagging Near Rear Hatch TSB 05-8-3 05/02/05 HEADLINER SAGGING NEAR REAR HATCH FORD: 2004-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005 Mariner ISSUE Some 2004-2005 vehicles may exhibit the headliner sagging around the rear hatch perimeter edge. ACTION Adhere the headliner to the underside of the roof panel. Refer to the following Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the perimeter seal near the sagging edge (Figure 1). 2. Without removing the headliner push pins, pull the headliner down far enough to scuff/sand the back side of the headliner and the underside of the roof panel. 3. Prepare the cartridge of Motorcraft Plastic Bonding Adhesive (TA-9), and apply the adhesive to the back side of the headliner (Figure 2). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 05-8-3 > May > 05 > Interior - Headliner Sagging Near Rear Hatch > Page 7646 4. Push the headliner back into its proper position. Clamp in place using a flat piece of metal or wood to keep the headliner flush against the underside of the roof panel (Figure 3). Allow the adhesive to cure for 45 minutes. 5. Remove clamps and reinstall the perimeter seal. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 050803A 2004-2005 Escape/Escape 0.3 Hr. Hybrid/Mariner Adhere The Headliner To The Underside Of The Roof Panel (Do Not Use With 51916A, 51916B, 51916BXH) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7851944 34 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass Headliner: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass Article No. 03-25-3 12/22/03 BODY - HEADLINER - SAG/LOOSE AT REAR QUARTER GLASS FORD: 2001-2004 ESCAPE This article supersedes TSB 01-23-7 to update the vehicle model years. ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a headliner sag/loose condition at rear quarter glass area near C/D pillar. ACTION Verify condition. Inspect headliner for amount of sag and overall condition. Repair or replace headliner. Refer to the following Service Procedure for details. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE PRIOR TO REPAIRING THE HEADLINER, PLEASE READ THROUGH THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE IN ITS ENTIRETY. REMEMBER TO INSTALL THE PROTECTIVE TUBING SLEEVE ONTO THE DRILL BIT TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE ROOF. DO NOT DRILL THE HOLES UNTIL STEP 12. Prior to repair, inspect the vehicle for the following conditions to determine if the headliner should be replaced: 1. If the headliner sags in excess of 30 mm (1.180 inch) below quarter window black-out paint, the headliner must be replaced (refer to Workshop Manual Section 501). Do not attempt repair. 2. Inspect for delamination of headliner cloth to substrate. If cloth has come loose the headliner must be replaced (refer to Workshop Manual Section 501). Do not attempt repair. If headliner does not meet the above replacement criteria, the headliner can be repaired. Continue with procedure. To repair the headliner, use the Headliner Retainer Installation Kit. ^ For Parchment interior, use part number 2L8Z-78519D80-AAA ^ For Graphite interior, use part number 2L8Z-78519D80-AAB HEADLINER REPAIR PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass > Page 7651 1. Locate new push-pin holes (See Figure 1 for example locations). 2. Cut template along the curves printed on both sides of template. 3. Make two holes on template along the printed circles. 4. Align template with glass and C-pillar or D-pillar as noted on template. Make sure arrow points to front of the vehicle. Use template for locating proper push-pin spacing (Figure 2). 5. Fit the D-pillar side edge as noted on template and the D-pillar to locate the new push-pin positions between D-pillar and C-pillar (Figure 2). 6. Mark both left-hand side and right-hand side new pin position holes as noted on template. Make sure arrow points to front of the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass > Page 7652 NOTE DO NOT DRILL AT THIS POINT. ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR AND HARNESS NEED TO BE TEMPORARILY MOVED TO PREVENT DAMAGE. CONNECTOR MUST BE ROTATED 90 DEGREES ON LEFT HAND SIDE ONLY AS VIEWED FROM REAR OF VEHICLE (FIGURE 5). 7. Remove the push-pin and child seat tether cap on left hand side only. This allows headliner to flex and helps prevent crease damage (Figure 3). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass > Page 7653 8. Remove top portion of left hand D-pillar trim to allow headliner to flex down. Be careful not to bend or over flex headliner too much or creasing will occur (Figure 4). 9. Rotate electrical connector 90 degrees. Pull harness toward rear of vehicle to avoid drill damage (Figure 5). 10. Install protective tubing sleeve onto 7 mm (9/32 inch) drill bit with 7-10 mm of the drill bit exposed beyond the end of the tube (Figure 6). NOTE THIS SLEEVE MUST BE USED TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE ROOF. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass > Page 7654 11. Align drill perpendicular (90 degrees to surface of headliner) so that pin will be flush with headliner surface (Figure 7). NOTE USE SAFETY GLASSES OR GOGGLES TO PROTECT EYES FROM CHIPS WHEN DRILLING HOLES. 12. Drill holes using the 7 mm (9/32 inch) drill bit with protective sleeve. 13. Before inserting the push-pins, remove any debris/metal shavings that have accumulated on the headliner and/or rear cargo department as a result of drilling the holes. NOTE DO NOT INSERT PUSH-PINS YET. 14. Rotate electrical connector and harness to original position. 15. Insert new pins into holes until headliner is 2 mm (.080 inch) above glass blackout line. NOTE BE CAREFUL NOT TO PULL HEADLINER UP TOO FAR. THIS WILL CAUSE GAPPING AT C AND D PILLAR TRIM. PUSH-PINS CAN BE REMOVED AND RE-INSTALLED TO DESIRED LENGTH. 16. Verify electrical function of center dome lamp, rear dome lamp and rear wiper. 17. Install D-pillar trim and push-pins in original locations. Make sure clips and pins are properly positioned and seated. 18. Inspect headliner and trim positioning. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 01-23-7 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass > Page 7655 032503A Verify Concern And 2.3 Hrs. Replace Headliner (Includes Time For Overhead Console And Sun/Moon Roof) 032503B Verify Concern And 0.5 Hr. Perform Repair Procedure: DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7851944 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7656 Headliner: Service and Repair HEADLINER REMOVAL Vehicles with overhead console 1. Remove the overhead console. 1 Open the front console door. 2 Remove the screws. 3 Remove the overhead console. If equipped, disconnect the electrical connector. All vehicles 2. Remove the two sun visors and two clips. 1 Remove the six screws. 2 Remove the two sun visors and two clips. If equipped, disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Remove the eight passenger assist handle covers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7657 4. Remove the four passenger assist handles. 1 Remove the eight bolts. 2 Remove the four passenger assist handles. 5. Open the four A-pillar passenger assist handle covers. 6. Remove the two A-pillar passenger assist handles. 1 Remove the four bolts. 2 Remove the two A-pillar passenger assist handles. 7. Remove the two windshield side garnish mouldings. 8. If equipped, remove the roof opening panel moulding. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7658 9. NOTE: Inspect the safety belt D-ring cover for damage. If the safety belt D-Ring cover does not remain in place, install a new cover. Remove the two safety belt D-ring covers. 10. Remove the two safety belt D-ring bolts. 11. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside. 12. Remove the upper B-pillar trim panels. 13. Remove the two C-pillar trim panels. 14. Remove the two D-pillar trim panels. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7659 15. Remove the front interior lamp lens. 16. Remove the front interior lamp. 1 Remove the screws. 2 Remove the front interior lamp. Disconnect the electrical connector. 17. Remove the rear interior lamp. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 18. Remove the five pin-type retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7660 19. If equipped, remove the three child seat tether anchor covers. 20. If equipped, remove the three bolts and the child seat tether anchors. 21. Remove the headliner. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > B-Pillar Trim Panel Trim Panel: Service and Repair B-Pillar Trim Panel B-PILLAR TRIM PANEL REMOVAL 1. NOTE: Inspect the safety belt D-ring cover for damage. If the safety belt D-ring cover does not remain in place, install a new cover. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover. 2. Remove the safety belt D-ring bolt. 3. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside. 4. Remove the upper B-pillar trim panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > B-Pillar Trim Panel > Page 7665 5. Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel. 1 Remove the pin-type retainers. 2 Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel. 6. Remove the rear door scuff plate trim panel. 1 Remove the pin-type retainers. 2 Remove the rear door scuff plate trim panel. 7. Remove the lower B-pillar trim panel. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > B-Pillar Trim Panel > Page 7666 Trim Panel: Service and Repair C-Pillar Trim Panel C-PILLAR TRIM PANEL REMOVAL 1. NOTE: Inspect the safety belt D-ring cover for damage. If the safety belt D-ring cover does not remain in place, install a new cover. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover. 2. Remove the safety belt D-ring bolt. 3. Remove the pin-type retainers and the liftgate scuff plate trim panel. 4. Position the liftgate weatherstrip aside. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > B-Pillar Trim Panel > Page 7667 5. If equipped, remove the cargo net hold-down. 6. Remove the rear quarter trim panel. 1 Insert a tape-wrapped screwdriver between the D-pillar trim panel and rear quarter trim panel. 2 Push the screwdriver in the direction of the arrow and remove the rear quarter trim panel. 7. Remove the C-pillar trim panel. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Door Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair DOOR LOCK CYLINDER REMOVAL NOTE: Individual lock cylinders are repaired by discarding the inoperative cylinder and building a new lock cylinder using the appropriate lock repair package. The lock repair package includes a detailed instruction sheet to build the new lock cylinder to the current key code of the vehicle. 1. NOTE: Make sure the window glass is in the raised position. Remove the exterior front door latch. 2. Remove the door lock cylinder. 1 Release the clips. 2 Remove the lock cylinder. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics TSB 06-15-8 08/07/06 KEYPAD DIAGNOSTICS - DEALER INSTALLED ACCESSORY FORD: 1998-2006 Taurus 1999-2003 Escort 1999-2006 Mustang 2000-2006 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006 Crown Victoria, Fusion 1998-2006 Expedition, Explorer, F-150, Ranger 1999 F-250 Light Duty 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2006 F-Super Duty 2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2006 Freestar LINCOLN: 1998-2006 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 1998-2006 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT MERCURY: 1998-2005 Sable 1999-2002 Cougar 2005-2006 Montego 2006 Grand Marquis, Milan 1998-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner ISSUE Some vehicles may experience a concern with the keyless entry keypad. In order to properly diagnose the concern with the keyless entry keypad, it is important to identify whether the keypad is a factory installed style (wired) or a Genuine Ford Accessory (GFA) radio frequency (RF) style keypad. ACTION Use the following Service Procedure to identify GFA RF keypads and provide diagnostic service tips. SERVICE PROCEDURE IDENTIFICATION: 1. Production installed keyless entry keypads are mounted flush with the surface of the vehicle and are wired directly to the module controlling the vehicle's keyless entry system. This style keypad can be diagnosed using the appropriate Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics > Page 7678 2. Dealer installed GFA RF keypads are adhesive backed and protrude approximately 1/2" (13 mm) from the surface of the vehicle and there are no specific diagnostics available in the WSM (Figure 1). NOTE THIS RF KEYPAD WAS ALSO US[D IN PRODUCTION ON 2004 F-SUPER DUTY VEHICLES BUILT PRIOR TO 12/3/2003. REFER TO WSM, SECTION 501-14 FOR RF KEYPAD DIAGNOSTICS FOR THESE VEHICLES. GENUINE FORD ACCESSORY KEYPAD DIAGNOSTIC TIPS 1. The keypad operates similarly to a remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter and is programmed using a similar procedure. Although the RF keypad is not specifically addressed in the WSM, the RKE transmitter programming portion of the WSM, Section 501-14 can be used as a guide NOTE THE 7-8 AND 9-0 BUTTONS ON THE KEYPAD MUST BE PRESSED SIMULTANEOUSLY DURING THE PROCEDURE IN ORDER FOR THE KEYPAD TO BE RECOGNIZED AS AN ADDITIONAL REMOTE TRANSMITTER. Since the GFA RF keypad is essentially another RKE transmitter, the transmitter diagnostic pinpoint tests in the vehicle's WSM can also be referenced even though the buttons serving the lock / unlock functions will differ 2. The GFA RF keypad is serviced as an assembly. The internal battery cannot be replaced separately. 3. If the master code or owner selectable code is lost or forgotten, the GFA RF keypad must be replaced. These codes are not stored in any vehicle module (with the exception of 2004 F-Super Duty vehicles produced prior to 12/3/2003). 4. The GFA RF keypad and all RKE transmitters (the number of transmitters allowable will vary by vehicle) must be reprogrammed together anytime the keypad is replaced, an RKE transmitter is replaced, or the module controlling the keyless entry system on the vehicle (GEM/SJB/VSM/DDM etc.) is replaced. NOTE THERE IS AN EXCEPTION TO TIP 4 FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH INTEGRATED KEYHEAD TRANSMITTERS (IKTs) (FUSION/MILAN/ZEPHYR). THE GFA RF KEYPADS FOR VEHICLES WITH IKTs MUST BE PROGRAMMED INDEPENDENTLY FROM THE IKTs. TURN THE IGNITION FROM "OFF" TO "RUN" 8 TIMES WITHIN 10 SECONDS, WITH THE 8TH TIME ENDING IN "RUN". THE DOOR LOCKS WILL CYCLE TO CONFIRM ENTERING PROGRAMMING MODE. PRESS THE 7-8 AND 9-0 BUTTON ON THE KEYPAD SIMULTANEOUSLY TO SEND A LOCK SIGNAL. TURN IGNITION TO OFF. THE LOCKS WILL CYCLE AGAIN TO INDICATE THE END OF THE PROGRAMMING MODE. 5. The keypad will normally illuminate for 5 seconds after one or more buttons are pressed, and the illumination will immediately turn off if the 7-8 and 9-0 buttons are pressed simultaneously (lock all doors). The keypad contains an optical sensor and will not illuminate under bright lighting conditions. The keypad may only illuminate briefly in colder temperatures in order to maximize the battery power available to transmit a lock/unlock signal. The temperature at which this occurs will vary depending upon the keypad battery age and condition. Both of these conditions are a normal function of the Power Save Mode and do not indicate a need to replace the keypad. 6. After entering the keypad code, the system may unlock the driver's door, lock it, then unlock it again, and the keypad will not even briefly illuminate. This is the Alert Mode and is an indication that battery power is very low and the keypad must be replaced. 7. The keypad also contains an Anti-scan feature. If the wrong code has been entered 7 times (35 consecutive button presses) the keypad is disabled for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash during this time. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics > Page 7679 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14A626 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Application and ID Keyless Entry Module: Application and ID For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic Module (GEM) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Service and Repair Keyless Entry Transmitter: Service and Repair REMOTE TRANSMITTER PROGRAMMING NOTE: All remote transmitters must be programmed at the same time. 1. The vehicle must be electronically unlocked before entering program mode (via remote transmitter, keyless entry keypad (if equipped) or door lock control switch while the driver door is open. 2. Turn the key from OFF to RUN 8 times within 10 seconds, with the eighth turn ending in RUN. If the module has successfully entered program mode, it will lock and then unlock all doors. 3. Within 20 seconds, press any button on a remote transmitter, and the doors will lock and then unlock to confirm that each remote transmitter has been programmed. Repeat this step for each remote transmitter. 4. If the door locks do not respond for any remote transmitter, wait several seconds and press the button again. If the door locks still fail to respond, refer to Inspection and Verification. Make sure that no more than the maximum number of remote transmitters are attempted to be programmed. 5. Exiting the programming mode is accomplished if one of the following occurs: - The key transitions to the OFF position. - 20 seconds have passed since entering programming mode or since the last remote transmitter was programmed. - The maximum number of remote transmitters have been programmed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations View 151-35 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Unit Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Door Lock Unit Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Unit > Page 7692 Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Door Lock Actuator Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component Information > Application and ID Power Door Lock Control Module: Application and ID For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic Module (GEM) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch View 151-34 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 7700 View 151-33 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 7703 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch > Page 7706 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch > Page 7707 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch > Page 7708 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch > Page 7709 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-17 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7714 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7715 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7716 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7717 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Paint - Repair Due To Iron Particles/Acid Rain Paint: Technical Service Bulletins Paint - Repair Due To Iron Particles/Acid Rain Article No. 04-9-6 BODY - PAINT - IRON PARTICLE REMOVAL - INDUSTRIAL FALLOUT - ACID RAIN NEUTRALIZATION FORD: 2004-2005 CROWN VICTORIA, ESCORT ZX2, FOCUS, MUSTANG, TAURUS, THUNDERBIRD 2005 FIVE HUNDRED, FORD GT 2005 FIVE HUNDRED, FORD GT 2004-2005 ECONOLINE, ESCAPE, EXCURSION, EXPEDITION,EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER, F SUPER DUTY, FREESTAR, RANGER, F SERIES, F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 2004-2005 LS, TOWN CAR, AVIATOR, NAVIGATOR MERCURY: 2004-2005 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE 2005 MONTEGO 2004-2005 MONTEREY, MOUNTAINEER 2005 MARINER This article supersedes TSB 99-12-10 to update the vehicle lines, model years and service procedure. ISSUE Ford Motor Company has released a private labeled material to be used for iron particle/acid rain service repairs. ACTION To remove these particles/contaminates, use ONLY the following Motorcraft products and procedure. No polishing, compounding, color sanding, or repainting should be done before this procedure is performed. This procedure uses products that are acidic, alkaline, and neutral and must be properly mixed and used in their specific order. Refer to the following Service Procedure for details. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE ANY CHANGES TO THIS PROCEDURE WILL CAUSE AN INCOMPLETE OR UNSATISFACTORY REPAIR. THE USE OF ANY OTHER PRODUCT OR PROCEDURE MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO ALUMINUM OR PAINTED SURFACES. NOTE THE PRODUCTS USED TO REMOVE SURFACE CONTAMINATION FROM PAINT ARE DESIGNED FOR VEHICLES, WHICH HAVE EXPERIENCED EXPOSURE FOR LESS THAN 120 DAYS. VEHICLES THAT EXCEED 120 DAYS OF EXPOSURE MAY REQUIRE THE PROCEDURE BE REPEATED TO RESOLVE THE CONCERN. ONCE THIS PROCEDURE IS COMPLETED, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO PERFORM POLISHING OR REFINISHING PROCEDURES AFTER VEHICLE INSPECTION. IDENTIFICATION Ferrous metal particles (hot iron dust) are generated by manufacturing facilities, rail shipments, etc. Moisture and heat combine with particles to create a chemical reaction. This reaction creates an acid, causing the iron to corrode and etch into the paint surface. Additionally, industrial fallout and acid rain generate corrosive compounds that fall on the vehicle's painted surfaces. When subjected to moisture and temperature, chemical compounds are created that etch the paint surface. To assist in identifying surface contamination, use a (Tandy-Radio Shack #63-851) 30x lighted magnifier. CONCERN DESCRIPTION Ferrous Metal - Light Colored Vehicles: Small orange stains the size of "mechanical pencil lead." The surface is rough to the touch. - Dark Colored Vehicles: Small white or silver appearing dots with a rainbow ring around the dot. The surface is rough to the touch. Industrial Fallout - Water spots containing ferrous metal are present and the surface is rough to the touch. Acid Rain/Etching Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Paint - Repair Due To Iron Particles/Acid Rain > Page 7723 - Surface will exhibit irregular discolored spotting. - Dark colored vehicles may exhibit cloudy or graying spots where the acid has begun to etch the paint. - Extreme cases of etching may be felt. DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURE Use Motorcraft Acid Neutralizer, Alkaline Neutralizer, and Detail Wash to decontaminate and neutralize the paint surface. Perform the procedure only on vehicle when the paint surface temperature is cool. Follow the step-by-step procedure listed below to perform this service operation. 1. Rinse off dust, dirt, and debris with cold water. Flush liberally. 2. Prepare Motorcraft Acid Neutralizer by mixing eight (8) parts of water to one (1) part Acid Neutralizer in a bucket. 3. Wear gloves and use a clean wash mitt to apply mixture of Motorcraft Acid Neutralizer to the entire vehicle starting at the top of the vehicle working toward the side. Work fast and keep the vehicle wet with solution, lightly agitating and moving quickly around the vehicle repeatedly for five to seven (5-7) minutes. For vehicles with severe conditions, work the product for up to eight (8) minutes. NOTE USE A SEPARATE MITT FOR EACH PRODUCT. DO NOT INTERMIX MITTS. 4. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with cold water to remove Motorcraft Acid Neutralizer. 5. Dry only the horizontal surfaces of the vehicle at this time. Do not dry glass. NOTE MOTORCRAFT ALKALINE NEUTRALIZER IS READY TO USE. DO NOT MIX WITH WATER. DO NOT SPRAY MOTORCRAFT ALKALINE NEUTRALIZER ON THE PAINTED SURFACE. 6. Pour the Alkaline Neutralizer into a dispenser (squirt bottle). Squirt the neutralizer directly onto a clean wash mitt. Apply the product to the vehicle, keeping the areas wet and lightly agitated for five to seven (5-7) minutes. For vehicles with severe conditions, work the product for up to eight (8) minutes. 7. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with cold water. 8. Prepare Motorcraft Detail Wash by mixing 29.5 mL (1 ounce) of Detail Wash to 3.7 L (1 gallon) of water. 9. Shampoo the vehicle with Motorcraft Detail Wash using a clean wash mitt. Rinse the vehicle with cold water and dry the vehicle completely. SURFACE CORRECTION FOLLOWING DECONTAMINATION/NEUTRALIZATION 1. Visually inspect paint surface for evidence of removal of ferrous metal particles and water spots. NOTE ACID RAIN DISCOLORING OR ETCHING WILL REQUIRE ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES DEPENDENT ON DEPTH OF DAMAGE; POLISHING, BUFFING, COLOR SANDING, OR IN EXTREME CASES, REFINISHING. 2. DO NOT intermix buffing products. Use only one manufacturer's products. 3. Always follow the manufacturer's product usage sequence. Use the appropriate recommended pad at recommended buffing speeds as specified by the product manufacturer. NOTE WHEN ATTEMPTING TO AFFECT A REPAIR BY BUFFING, POLISHING, OR COLOR SANDING, DO NOT REMOVE AN EXCESS OF 0.3 MIL OF PAINT FILM OR REFINISHING WILL BE REQUIRED. USE OF AN ELECTRONIC MIL GAUGE (ROTUNDA 164-R4025) IS HIGHLY RECOMMENDED TO INSURE CONTROL OF PAINT FILM REMOVAL. 4. Use a dual action sander with a Velcro backing plate and foam pad to fine polish and remove any swirls created by a rotary buffer or pad. 5. Use an alcohol and water mixture (1 to 1 ratio) to clean the buffed areas and to verify removal of scratches and swirls before application of the final polish. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Codes Paint: Application and ID Paint Codes The Vehicle Certification Label (VC) is located on the left-hand front door jamb. The first set of numbers/letters indicate the vehicle primary body color code. The second set of numbers/letters (if applicable), indicate a lower body, two-tone paint code. - BZ Chrome Yellow - C2 Gold Ash Metallic - CX Dark Shadow Gray (clearcoat) - DV Light Tundra - FX Merlot - G2 Redfire - L2 True Blue Pearl (clearcoat) - P5 Aspen Green Metallic Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Codes > Page 7726 - TL Satin Silver (clearcoat) - UA Ebony (clearcoat) - YZ Oxford White (clearcoat) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Codes > Page 7727 Paint: Application and ID Paint Code Sticker Location VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL REFERENCE The VC label is located on the left-hand front door or door jamb and is in a similar location on trucks. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Application and ID Keyless Entry Module: Application and ID For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic Module (GEM) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component Information > Application and ID Power Door Lock Control Module: Application and ID For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic Module (GEM) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Driver Side Front View 151-36 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Driver Side Front > Page 7739 View 151-37 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Passenger Side Front Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Passenger Side Front > Page 7742 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7743 Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair HEATED SEAT MODULE Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so may result in air bag deployment, which may result in personal injury. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. NOTE: - Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor connector. - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle. - Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side air bag to floor connector. - After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed before operating the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7744 - A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. - If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary. 1. Remove the front seat. 2. Remove the heated seat module. - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Using a small flat-blade screwdriver, release the locking tab and slide the module off the bracket. INSTALLATION WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which may result in personal injury. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. NOTE: - Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor connector. - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle. - Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side air bag to floor connector. - After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed before operating the vehicle. - A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7745 carry out the diagnostic procedure again. - If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary. 1. Install the heated seat module. - Slide the heated seat module down over the attachment bracket until the locking tab snaps into place. - Connect the electrical connector. 2. Install the front seat. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-21 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7749 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7750 Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Service and Repair ROOF OPENING PANEL MODULE REMOVAL 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Remove the roof opening panel module. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the screw. 3 Remove the roof opening panel module. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations View 151-21 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7756 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7757 Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair ROOF OPENING PANEL MOTOR REMOVAL 1. Close the roof opening panel. 2. Remove the headliner. 3. Remove the roof opening panel motor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connectors. 2 Remove the bolts. 3 Remove the roof opening panel motor. INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: The roof opening panel should be in the closed position. Connect the roof opening panel motor electrical connector. 2. Install the roof opening panel motor. 1 Position the roof opening panel motor. 2 Install the bolts. 3. Check for correct operation of the roof opening panel motor. 4. Install the headliner. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-21 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Roof Opening Panel Position Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Roof Opening Panel Position Switch > Page 7763 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: Service and Repair AIR DEFLECTOR REMOVAL 1. Open the roof opening panel. 2. Remove the roof opening panel frame. 3. CAUTION: Use care not to damage the air deflector retaining tabs when releasing the air deflector from the roof opening. Remove the air deflector. Release the air deflector retaining tab from the roof opening. - Lift up the air deflector and slide the air deflector to the rear to release the air deflector arms. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Service and Repair Front ROOF OPENING PANEL FRONT DRAIN HOSE REMOVAL Passenger side 1. Remove the instrument panel. All 2. Remove the headliner. 3. Disconnect the roof opening panel front drain hose at the front body pillar. 4. Remove the roof opening panel front drain hose. 1 Disconnect the roof opening panel front drain hose from the roof opening panel frame. 2 Remove the roof opening panel front drain hose. - Remove the tape securing the roof opening panel front drain hose. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7771 Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Service and Repair Rear ROOF OPENING PANEL REAR DRAIN HOSE REMOVAL 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Disconnect the roof opening panel rear drain hose. 3. Remove the roof opening panel rear drain hose. 1 Disconnect the roof opening panel rear drain hose from the roof opening panel frame. 2 Remove the roof opening panel rear drain hose. - Remove the tape securing the roof opening panel drain hose. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Frame: Service and Repair ROOF OPENING PANEL FRAME REMOVAL 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Disconnect the in-line electrical connector. 3. Disconnect the four roof opening panel drain hoses. 4. Release the wire harness locators. 5. Remove the roof opening panel frame. 1 Remove the eight roof opening panel frame bolts. 2 Remove the roof opening panel frame. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7775 INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-21 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7779 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7780 Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Service and Repair ROOF OPENING PANEL MODULE REMOVAL 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Remove the roof opening panel module. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the screw. 3 Remove the roof opening panel module. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Driver Seat Height Motor View 151-36 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Driver Seat Height Motor > Page 7786 View 151-36 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Seat Rear Height Motor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Seat Rear Height Motor > Page 7789 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Seat Rear Height Motor > Page 7790 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Seat Switch: Locations View 151-24 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7794 View 151-36 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7795 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7796 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7797 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7798 Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair SEAT CONTROL SWITCH REMOVAL WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which may result in personal injury. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. NOTE: - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle. - Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side air bag to floor connector. - A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. - If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the seat control switch knob. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7799 3. Remove the front seat cushion side shield. 1 Remove the seat backrest handle. 2 Remove the screw. 3 Remove the shield. - Disconnect the electrical connector(s). 4. Remove the seat control switch. 1 Remove the screws. 2 Remove the switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Seat Cushion: Service and Repair Front Seat Driver Seat FRONT SEAT CUSHION - DRIVER SEAT Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) DISASSEMBLY WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. NOTE: - Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor connector. - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the vehicle and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat > Page 7804 the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in the side air bag connector at the floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle. - Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side air bag to floor connector. - After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed before operating the vehicle. - A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. - If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary. - Manual seat shown, power seat similar. All vehicles 1. Position the front seats forward. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Vehicles with side air bag 3. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 4. Connect the special tool to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles 5. Disconnect the driver safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat > Page 7805 6. Connect the special tool to the driver safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the passenger safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 8. Connect the special tool to the passenger safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. Vehicles with side air bag 9. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat > Page 7806 10. Connect the special tool to the passenger side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles 11. Lower the glove compartment. - Press the locking tabs. 12. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. Connect the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 14. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat > Page 7807 15. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 16. Connect the special tool to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 17. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the air bag system. 19. Remove the seat track-to-floor nuts. 20. Position the driver seat rearward. 21. If equipped with power seats, disconnect the negative battery cable. 22. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. Remove the driver seat. 1 Remove the seat track-to-floor bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat > Page 7808 2 Remove the driver seat. - If equipped with power seats, disconnect the electrical connector. 23. Disconnect the seat cushion trim cover J-clips. 24. Remove the front seat cushion trim and pad from the front seat cushion frame. - If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the backrest heated grid and the seat cushion heated grid electrical connectors. 25. Separate the front seat cushion trim from the front seat cushion pad. ASSEMBLY WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat > Page 7809 NOTE: - Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor connector. - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle. - Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side air bag-to-floor connector. - After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed before operating the vehicle. - A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. - If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary. All vehicles 1. Install the front seat cushion trim to the front seat cushion pad. 2. Install the front seat cushion trim and pad to the front seat cushion frame. - If equipped with heated seats, connect the backrest heated grid and the seat cushion heated grid electrical connectors. 3. Connect the seat cushion trim cover J-clips. 4. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat > Page 7810 Install the driver seat. 1 Position the driver seat. 2 Install the seat track-to-floor bolts. - If equipped with power seats, connect the electrical connector. 5. If equipped with power seats, connect the battery ground cable. 6. Position the driver seat forward. 7. Install the seat track-to-floor nuts. 8. If equipped with power seats, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait one minute. Vehicles with side air bag 9. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Remove the special tool from the driver side air bag module body harness electrical connector. 10. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat > Page 7811 11. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Remove the special tool from the driver safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. 12. Connect the driver safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 13. Connect the battery ground cable. 14. With the remaining special tools still in place, prove out the air bag system. 15. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 16. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Remove the special tool from the passenger safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat > Page 7812 17. Connect the passenger safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Vehicles with side air bag 18. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Remove the special tool from the passenger side air bag module body harness electrical connector. 19. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles 20. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat > Page 7813 remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 21. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 22. Raise the glove compartment. - Press the locking tabs. 23. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 24. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat > Page 7814 25. Install the driver air bag connector access cover. 26. Connect the battery ground cable. 27. Prove out the air bag system. Passenger Seat FRONT SEAT CUSHION - PASSENGER SEAT Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) DISASSEMBLY WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which may result in personal injury. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat > Page 7815 - To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. NOTE: - If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system must be deactivated per the deactivation procedure contained in Air Bag Systems. - Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor connector. - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle. - Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side air bag to floor connector. - After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed before operating the vehicle. - A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. - If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary. All vehicles 1. Position the front seats forward. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Vehicles with side air bag 3. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 4. Connect the special tool to the passenger side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat > Page 7816 5. Disconnect the passenger safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 6. Connect the special tool to the passenger safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the driver safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 8. Connect the special tool to the driver safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. Vehicles with side air bag Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat > Page 7817 9. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 10. Connect the special tool to the driver side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles 11. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover. 12. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat > Page 7818 13. Connect the special tool to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 14. Lower the glove compartment. - Press the locking tabs. 15. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 16. Connect the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 17. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the air bag system. 19. Remove the seat track to floor nuts. 20. Position the passenger seat rearward. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat > Page 7819 21. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. Remove the passenger seat. 1 Remove the seat track to floor bolts. 2 Remove the passenger seat. - If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the electrical connector. 22. Disconnect the seat cushion trim cover J-clips. 23. Remove the front seat cushion trim and pad from the front seat cushion frame. - If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the backrest heated grid connector and the seat cushion heated grid electrical connector from the seat wiring harness. 24. Separate the front seat cushion trim from the front seat cushion pad. ASSEMBLY WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which may result in personal injury. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat > Page 7820 - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. NOTE: - If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system must be deactivated per the deactivation procedure contained in Air Bag Systems. - Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor connector. - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle. - Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side air bag to floor connector. - After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed before operating the vehicle. - A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. - If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary. All vehicles 1. Install the front seat cushion trim to the front seat cushion pad. 2. Install the front seat cushion trim and pad to the front seat cushion frame. - If equipped with heated seats, connect the backrest heated grid connector and the seat cushion heated grid electrical connector to the seat wiring harness. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat > Page 7821 3. Connect the seat cushion trim cover J-clips. 4. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. Install the passenger seat. 1 Position the passenger seat. 2 Install the seat track to floor bolts. - If equipped with heated seats, connect the electrical connector. 5. Position the passenger seat forward. 6. Install the seat track to floor nuts. 7. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Vehicles with side air bag Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat > Page 7822 8. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove may result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the special tool from the passenger side air bag module body harness electrical connector. 9. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles 10. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove may result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the special tool from the passenger safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. 11. Connect the passenger safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 12. Connect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat > Page 7823 13. With the remaining special tools still in place, prove out the air bag system. 14. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 15. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove may result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the special tool from the driver safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. 16. Connect the driver safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Vehicles with side air bag 17. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove may result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the special tool from the driver side air bag module body harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat > Page 7824 18. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles 19. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove may result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 20. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 21. Install the driver air bag connector access cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat > Page 7825 22. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove may result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 23. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 24. Raise the glove compartment. - Press the locking tabs. 25. Connect the battery ground cable. 26. Prove out the air bag system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat > Page 7826 Seat Cushion: Service and Repair Rear Seat REAR SEAT CUSHION DISASSEMBLY NOTE: 60% split bench seat shown, 40% and bench seat similar. 1. Lift up the rear seat cushion. 2. Remove the rear seat cushion. - Pull up on release lever and slide the seat out of the floor bracket. 3. Release the J-retainer. 4. Unzip the rear seat cushion trim. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat > Page 7827 5. Remove the rear seat cushion trim from the rear seat cushion pad. 6. Remove the rear seat cushion bracket. 1 Remove the two bolts. 2 Remove the rear seat cushion bracket. ASSEMBLY 1. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Seat Heater: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Find Wiring Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams ^ System Diagrams Component Circuits that work together as a system ^ Grounds Diagrams Circuits grounding the system diagrams Power Distribution Diagrams The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any "dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any "blown" fuses. System Diagrams These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's indirect relationship with components in other systems. Grounds Diagrams The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different systems. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7832 Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#". These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc). All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions. Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of diagrams. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. Introduction To Ford Diagrams Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7833 System Overview Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information, connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent diagrams in the set. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7834 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram where the splice appears in full. Component Referencing (4) Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component (i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations. Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7835 Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7836 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. "Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle. NUMBER ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................... LOCATION 100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment, Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200 ................................................................................................................................................ Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300 .............................................................................................................................................. From instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ................................................................... ............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper; Truck bed 500 ...................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Driver door 600 .................................................. ...................................................................................................................................................... Passenger door, front 700 ................................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 ............................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ...... Passenger door, right rear Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7837 900 ....................................................................................................................................................... ........................ Above door trim panel and headliner Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification Symbols Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7838 Symbols Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7839 Symbols Part 3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7840 Symbols Part 4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7841 Symbols Part 5 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7842 Seat Heater: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 Locked terminal 2 Male half 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7843 Defective insulation stripping 1 Proper crimp 2 Insulation not removed 3 Wire strands missing 4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 Seal 2 Displaced tab Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7844 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Male half 7 Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 Enlarged 2 Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7845 Electrical short inside the harness 1 Solder coated wire to ground 2 Harness protective tape 3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7846 Splice tape removed 1 Intermittent short Splice covered 1 Wire strand 2 Splice tape 3 Harness tape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7847 Broken wire strands in harness 1 Wiring harness tape 2 Wiring strand 3 Broken strands intermittent signal 4 Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7848 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7849 6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7850 8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7851 Seat Heater: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7852 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7853 Seat Heater: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 119-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7854 Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Driver Side Front View 151-36 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Driver Side Front > Page 7859 View 151-37 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Passenger Side Front Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Passenger Side Front > Page 7862 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7863 Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair HEATED SEAT MODULE Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so may result in air bag deployment, which may result in personal injury. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. NOTE: - Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor connector. - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle. - Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side air bag to floor connector. - After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed before operating the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7864 - A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. - If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary. 1. Remove the front seat. 2. Remove the heated seat module. - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Using a small flat-blade screwdriver, release the locking tab and slide the module off the bracket. INSTALLATION WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which may result in personal injury. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. NOTE: - Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor connector. - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle. - Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side air bag to floor connector. - After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed before operating the vehicle. - A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7865 carry out the diagnostic procedure again. - If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary. 1. Install the heated seat module. - Slide the heated seat module down over the attachment bracket until the locking tab snaps into place. - Connect the electrical connector. 2. Install the front seat. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Driver Side View 151-36 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Driver Side > Page 7870 View 151-37 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side > Page 7873 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7874 Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair HEATED SEAT SWITCH REMOVAL WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which may result in personal injury. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. NOTE: - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle. - Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side air bag to floor connector. - A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. - If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the seat control switch knob. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7875 3. Remove the front seat cushion side shield. 1 Remove the seat backrest handle. 2 Remove the screw. 3 Remove the shield. - Disconnect the electrical connectors. 4. Release the locking tab and remove the heated seat switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Latch: Service and Repair REAR SEAT BACKREST LATCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear seat backrest. 2. Remove the rear seat backrest side trim panel. 3. Remove the rear seat backrest latch. 1 Remove the bolt. 2 Remove the nut. 3 Remove the latch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat Seat Track: Service and Repair Driver Seat SEAT TRACK - DRIVER SEAT Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which may result in personal injury. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. NOTE: - Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor connector. - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle. - Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 7883 air bag to floor connector. - After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed before operating the vehicle. - A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. - If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary. - Manual seat track shown, power seat track similar. All vehicles 1. Position the front seats forward. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Vehicles with side air bag 3. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 4. Connect the special tool to the driver side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles 5. Disconnect the driver safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 7884 6. Connect the special tool to the driver safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the passenger safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 8. Connect the special tool to the passenger safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. Vehicles with side air bag 9. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 7885 10. Connect the special tool to the passenger side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles 11. Lower the glove compartment. - Press the locking tabs. 12. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. Connect the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 14. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 7886 15. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 16. Connect the special tool to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 17. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the air bag system. 19. Remove the seat track to floor nuts. 20. Position the driver seat rearward. 21. If equipped with power seats, disconnect the negative battery cable. 22. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. Remove the driver seat. 1 Remove the seat track to floor bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 7887 2 Remove the driver seat. - If equipped with power seats, disconnect the electrical connector. 23. If equipped, remove the seat height adjustment control. 24. Remove the outboard seat cushion side shield. 1 Remove the seat backrest handle. 2 Remove the screw. 3 Remove the shield. - If equipped with a power/heated seat, disconnect the electrical connector(s). 25. Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield. 26. Remove the front seat backrest bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 7888 27. NOTE: If equipped with a side air bag module, note the routing of the wiring harness for installation. Remove the front seat backrest. 1 Remove the pivot nut. 2 Remove the backrest. - If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the backrest heated grid electrical connector. 28. Disconnect the seat cushion trim cover J-clips. 29. Remove the front seat cushion trim and pad from the front seat cushion frame. - If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the seat cushion heated grid electrical connector from the seat wiring harness. 30. Remove the front seat cushion pan. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the front seat cushion pan. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 7889 31. If equipped with manual seats, remove the seat adjuster. - Unclip the seat adjuster pins. 32. NOTE: Note the routing of the wiring harness for installation. Remove the safety belt pretensioner from the seat track. 1 Remove the bolt. 2 Remove the safety belt pretensioner. INSTALLATION WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which may result in personal injury. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 7890 NOTE: - Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor connector. - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle. - Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side air bag to floor connector. - After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed before operating the vehicle. - A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. - If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary. All vehicles 1. Install the safety belt pretensioner. 1 Position the safety belt pretensioner. 2 Install the bolt. 2. If equipped with manual seats, install the seat adjuster. - Connect the seat adjuster pins. 3. Install the front seat cushion pan. 1 Position the front seat cushion pan. 2 Install the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 7891 4. Install the front seat cushion trim and pad to the front seat cushion frame. - If equipped with heated seats, connect the seat cushion heated grid electrical connector to the seat wiring harness. 5. Connect the seat cushion trim cover J-clips. 6. Install the front seat backrest. 1 Install the backrest. 2 Install the pivot nut. 7. Install the front seat backrest bolts. - If equipped with heated seats, connect the backrest heated grid electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 7892 8. Install the inboard seat cushion side shield. 9. Install the outboard seat cushion side shield. - If equipped with a power/heated seat, connect the electrical connector. 1 Install the shield. 2 Install the screw. 3 Install the seat backrest handle. 10. If equipped, install the seat height adjustment control. 11. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. Install the driver seat. 1 Position the driver seat. 2 Install the seat track to floor bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 7893 - If equipped with power seat, connect the electrical connector. 12. If equipped with power seats, connect the battery ground cable. 13. Position the driver seat forward. 14. Install the seat track to floor nuts. 15. If equipped with power seats, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait one minute. Vehicles with side air bag 16. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the special tool from the driver side air bag module body harness electrical connector. 17. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 7894 18. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the special tool from the driver side safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. 19. Connect the driver safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 20. Connect the battery ground cable. 21. With the remaining special tools still in place, prove out the air bag system. 22. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 23. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the special tool from the passenger safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 7895 24. Connect the passenger safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Vehicles with side air bag 25. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the special tool from the passenger side air bag module body harness electrical connector. 26. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles 27. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 7896 Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 28. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 29. Raise the glove compartment. - Press the locking tabs. 30. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 31. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 32. Install the driver air bag connector access cover. 33. Connect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 7897 34. Prove out the air bag system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 7898 Seat Track: Service and Repair Passenger Seat SEAT TRACK - PASSENGER SEAT Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which may result in personal injury. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. NOTE: - If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system must be deactivated per the deactivation procedure contained in Air Bag Systems. - Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor connector. - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 7899 - Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side air bag to floor connector. - After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed before operating the vehicle. - A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. - If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary. All vehicles 1. Position the front seats forward. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Vehicles with side air bag 3. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 4. Connect the special tool to the passenger side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles 5. Disconnect the passenger safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 7900 6. Connect the special tool to the passenger safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the driver safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 8. Connect the special tool to the driver safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. Vehicles with side air bag 9. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 7901 10. Connect the special tool to the driver side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles 11. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover. 12. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 13. Connect the special tool to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 14. Lower the glove compartment. - Press the locking tabs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 7902 15. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 16. Connect the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 17. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the air bag system. 19. Remove the seat track to floor nuts. 20. Position the passenger seat rearward. 21. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. Remove the passenger seat. 1 Remove the seat track to floor bolts. 2 Remove the passenger seat. - If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 7903 22. Remove the outboard seat cushion side shield. 1 Remove the seat backrest handle. 2 Remove the screw. 3 Remove the shield. - If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the electrical connector. 23. Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield. 24. Remove the front seat backrest bolts. 25. NOTE: If equipped with a side air bag module, note the routing of the wiring harness for installation. Remove the front seat backrest. 1 Remove the pivot nut. 2 Remove the backrest. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 7904 - If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the backrest heated grid electrical connector. 26. If equipped, remove the under seat storage bin. 27. Disconnect the seat cushion trim cover J-clips. 28. Remove the front seat cushion trim and pad from the front seat cushion frame. - If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the seat cushion heated grid electrical connector. 29. Remove the front seat cushion pan. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the front seat cushion pan. 30. Remove the seat adjuster. - Unclip the seat adjuster pins. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 7905 31. NOTE: Note the routing of the wiring harness for installation. Remove the safety belt pretensioner. 1 Remove the bolt. 2 Remove the safety belt pretensioner. INSTALLATION WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which may result in personal injury. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. NOTE: - If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system must be deactivated per the deactivation procedure contained in Air Bag Systems. - Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor connector. - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle. - Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side air bag to floor connector. - After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed before operating the vehicle. - A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. - If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary. All vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 7906 1. Install the safety belt pretensioner. 1 Install the safety belt pretensioner. 2 Install the bolt. 2. Install the seat adjuster. - Connect the seat adjuster pins. 3. Install the front seat cushion pan. 1 Position the front seat cushion pan. 2 Install the bolts. 4. Install the front seat cushion and pad to the front seat cushion frame. - If equipped with heated seats, connect the seat cushion heated grid electrical connector. 5. Connect the seat cushion trim cover J-clips. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 7907 6. If equipped, install the under seat storage bin. 7. Install the front seat backrest. 1 Install the backrest. 2 Install the pivot nut. 8. Install the front seat backrest bolts. - If equipped with heated seats, connect the backrest heated grid electrical connectors. 9. Install the inboard seat cushion side shield. 10. Install the outboard seat cushion side shield. - If equipped with heated seats, connect the electrical connector. 1 Install the shield. 2 Install the screw. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 7908 3 Install the seat backrest handle. 11. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. Install the passenger seat. 1 Position the passenger seat. 2 Install the seat track to floor bolts. - If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat connector. 12. Position the passenger seat forward. 13. Install the seat track to floor nuts. Vehicles with side air bag 14. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the special tool from the passenger side air bag module body harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 7909 15. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles 16. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the special tool from the passenger safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. 17. Connect the passenger safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 18. Connect the battery ground cable. 19. With the remaining special tools still in place, prove out the air bag system. 20. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 21. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 7910 remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the special tool from the driver safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. 22. Connect the driver safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Vehicles with side air bag 23. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the special tool from the driver side air bag module body harness electrical connector. 24. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 7911 25. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 26. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 27. Install the driver air bag connector access cover. 28. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 7912 29. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 30. Raise the glove compartment. - Press the locking tabs. 31. Connect the battery ground cable. 32. Prove out the air bag system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations View 151-15 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7918 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch View 151-34 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 7923 View 151-33 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 7926 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch > Page 7929 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch > Page 7930 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch > Page 7931 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch > Page 7932 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-17 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7936 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7937 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7938 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7939 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Seat Switch: Locations View 151-24 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7943 View 151-36 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7944 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7945 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7946 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7947 Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair SEAT CONTROL SWITCH REMOVAL WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which may result in personal injury. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. NOTE: - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle. - Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side air bag to floor connector. - A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. - If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the seat control switch knob. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7948 3. Remove the front seat cushion side shield. 1 Remove the seat backrest handle. 2 Remove the screw. 3 Remove the shield. - Disconnect the electrical connector(s). 4. Remove the seat control switch. 1 Remove the screws. 2 Remove the switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Driver Side View 151-36 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Driver Side > Page 7953 View 151-37 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side > Page 7956 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7957 Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair HEATED SEAT SWITCH REMOVAL WARNING: - Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which may result in personal injury. - Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. NOTE: - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle. - Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side air bag to floor connector. - A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. - If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the seat control switch knob. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7958 3. Remove the front seat cushion side shield. 1 Remove the seat backrest handle. 2 Remove the screw. 3 Remove the shield. - Disconnect the electrical connectors. 4. Release the locking tab and remove the heated seat switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-21 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Roof Opening Panel Position Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Roof Opening Panel Position Switch > Page 7964 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Description and Operation Sound Proofing / Insulation: Description and Operation INSULATION Insulation is made of urethane, PVC, and recycled felt. Insulation is installed: - under the roof panel. - above and below the instrument panel. - on the cowl sides. - over the front and rear floor areas. - in the A, B, and D-pillar sections. - behind the rear quarter trim panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair COWL PANEL GRILLE Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wiper pivot arms. 1 Remove the nuts. 2 Remove the wiper pivot arms. 2. Remove the driver side cowl grille. 1 Remove the pin-type retainers. 2 Remove the screw caps and screws. 3 Remove the cowl grille. 3. Remove the passenger side cowl grille. 1 Remove the pin-type retainers. 2 Remove the screw caps and screws. 3 Remove the cowl grille. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Weatherstrip: > 05-22-11 > Nov > 05 > Body - Door Seal Squeaking Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Door Seal Squeaking TSB 05-22-11 11/14/05 DOOR SEAL SQUEAKS FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005 Mariner ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Escape, 2005 Escape Hybrid and Mariners may exhibit squeaks from the shedlip seal for the doors. This seal runs along the top edge of the doors, above the top section of the individual door inner seals. This is most likely to be noticed at slow speeds and when the body is put into a twist. ACTION Replace the seals. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 052211A 2001-2005 Escape, 2005 0.2 Hr. Escape Hybrid, 2005 Mariner: Replace The Shedlip Seal For Both Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7851222 41 OASIS CODES: 110000, 702000 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Weatherstrip: > 05-22-11 > Nov > 05 > Body - Door Seal Squeaking Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Door Seal Squeaking TSB 05-22-11 11/14/05 DOOR SEAL SQUEAKS FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005 Mariner ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Escape, 2005 Escape Hybrid and Mariners may exhibit squeaks from the shedlip seal for the doors. This seal runs along the top edge of the doors, above the top section of the individual door inner seals. This is most likely to be noticed at slow speeds and when the body is put into a twist. ACTION Replace the seals. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 052211A 2001-2005 Escape, 2005 0.2 Hr. Escape Hybrid, 2005 Mariner: Replace The Shedlip Seal For Both Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7851222 41 OASIS CODES: 110000, 702000 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Deactivator Switch View 151-23 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Deactivator Switch > Page 7991 View 151-23 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch > Page 7994 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position Switch Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position Switch BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH Typical Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position (BPP) switch (Figure 27) is used by the PCM to disengage the transmission torque converter clutch and on some applications as an input to the idle speed control for idle quality and for vehicle speed control deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in the following manner: - BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake is applied. - BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM or HEM), BPP signal is than broadcasted over the data link to be received by the PCM. - BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake (ABS)- traction control / stability assist module. The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generate an output called the Driver Brake Application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Note on applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stoplamp circuit, if all stoplamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stoplamp bulbs has failed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position Switch > Page 7997 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pressure Applied/Brake Deactivator Switch BRAKE PRESSURE APPLIED/BRAKE DEACTIVATOR SWITCH The brake pressure applied (BPA) switch also sometimes called the brake deactivator switch for vehicle speed control deactivation. Is a normally closed switch, which supplies battery positive voltage (B+) to the PCM when the brake pedal is NOT applied. When the brake pedal is depressed, the normally closed switch will open and power is removed from the PCM. On some applications the normally closed BPA switch along with the normally open brake pedal position (BPP) switch are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function can be disable if a brake switch failure occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM did not change states when they were expected to a diagnostic trouble code P1572 can be set by the PCM strategy. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7998 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service and Repair SPEED CONTROL DEACTIVATOR SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the deactivator switch. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Rotate counterclockwise 45 degrees and remove the deactivator switch. INSTALLATION CAUTION: Initial installation of a deactivator switch allows for one adjustment. If additional adjustments are required, install a new switch. 1. Release the plunger lock. - Turn the lock knob counterclockwise until the first click is felt. 2. Depress the brake pedal. 3. Install the deactivator switch. 1 Position the deactivator switch in the bracket and rotate clockwise 45 degrees. 2 Connect the electrical connector. 4. NOTE: There should be an extra click heard when tugging on the brake pedal. Slowly release the brake pedal and tug moderately once the pedal reaches the rest position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations View 151-23 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 8002 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 8003 Clutch Switch: Description and Operation CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The clutch pedal position (CPP) switch (Figure 30) is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a 5-volt reference (VREF) signal to the CPP switch. If the CPP switch is closed, indicating the clutch pedal is engaged, the output voltage (5 volts) from the PCM is grounded through the signal return line to the PCM, and there is 1 volt or less. One volt or less indicates there is a reduced load on the engine. If the CPP switch is open, meaning the clutch pedal is disengaged, the input on the CPP signal to the PCM will be approximately 5 volts. Then, the 5-volt signal input at the PCM will indicate a load on the engine. The PCM uses the load information in mass air flow and fuel calculations. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Locations View 151-15 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Locations > Page 8007 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Locations > Page 8008 Cruise Control Servo: Service and Repair SPEED CONTROL ACTUATOR REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Release the speed control cable cap. 1 Squeeze the speed control cable cap retaining tab. 2 Rotate the speed control cable cap. 3. Remove the speed control cable. 1 Depress the spring retainer. 2 Slide the core wire end out of the speed control servo pulley and remove the speed control cable. 4. Remove the speed control actuator assembly. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Separate the wire harness from the bracket. 3 Remove the nuts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Locations > Page 8009 5. Remove the bolts and separate the speed control actuator from the bracket. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair Cruise Control Servo Cable: Service and Repair SPEED CONTROL CABLE REMOVAL Vehicles equipped with 2.0L Zetec engine 1. Disconnect the speed control cable from the throttle control linkage and bracket. Vehicles equipped with 3.0L (4V) engine 2. Disconnect the speed Control cable from the throttle control linkage and bracket. 1 Disconnect the cable from the throttle control linkage. 2 Squeeze the tabs and disconnect the speed control cable from the bracket All vehicles 3. Release the speed control cable cap. 1 Depress the speed control cable cap retaining tab. 2 Rotate the speed control cable cap. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8013 4. Remove the speed control cable. 1 Depress the spring retainer. 2 Slide the core wire end out of the speed control servo pulley and remove the speed control cable. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-20 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8017 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair SPEED CONTROL SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the steering wheel. 2. WARNING: When carrying a live air bag, make sure the bag and trim cover are pointed away from your body. In the unlikely event of an accidental deployment, the bag will then deploy with minimal chance of injury. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Remove the steering wheel cover. 3. Remove the steering wheel frame. 1 Remove the nuts. 2 Disconnect the ground wire. 3 Remove the steering wheel frame. 4. Disconnect the speed control switches electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8018 5. Remove the speed control switches. 1 Remove the screws. 2 Remove the speed control switches. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Deactivator Switch View 151-23 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Deactivator Switch > Page 8024 View 151-23 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch > Page 8027 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position Switch Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position Switch BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH Typical Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position (BPP) switch (Figure 27) is used by the PCM to disengage the transmission torque converter clutch and on some applications as an input to the idle speed control for idle quality and for vehicle speed control deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in the following manner: - BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake is applied. - BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM or HEM), BPP signal is than broadcasted over the data link to be received by the PCM. - BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake (ABS)- traction control / stability assist module. The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generate an output called the Driver Brake Application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Note on applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stoplamp circuit, if all stoplamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stoplamp bulbs has failed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position Switch > Page 8030 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pressure Applied/Brake Deactivator Switch BRAKE PRESSURE APPLIED/BRAKE DEACTIVATOR SWITCH The brake pressure applied (BPA) switch also sometimes called the brake deactivator switch for vehicle speed control deactivation. Is a normally closed switch, which supplies battery positive voltage (B+) to the PCM when the brake pedal is NOT applied. When the brake pedal is depressed, the normally closed switch will open and power is removed from the PCM. On some applications the normally closed BPA switch along with the normally open brake pedal position (BPP) switch are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function can be disable if a brake switch failure occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM did not change states when they were expected to a diagnostic trouble code P1572 can be set by the PCM strategy. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8031 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service and Repair SPEED CONTROL DEACTIVATOR SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the deactivator switch. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Rotate counterclockwise 45 degrees and remove the deactivator switch. INSTALLATION CAUTION: Initial installation of a deactivator switch allows for one adjustment. If additional adjustments are required, install a new switch. 1. Release the plunger lock. - Turn the lock knob counterclockwise until the first click is felt. 2. Depress the brake pedal. 3. Install the deactivator switch. 1 Position the deactivator switch in the bracket and rotate clockwise 45 degrees. 2 Connect the electrical connector. 4. NOTE: There should be an extra click heard when tugging on the brake pedal. Slowly release the brake pedal and tug moderately once the pedal reaches the rest position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations View 151-23 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 8035 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 8036 Clutch Switch: Description and Operation CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The clutch pedal position (CPP) switch (Figure 30) is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a 5-volt reference (VREF) signal to the CPP switch. If the CPP switch is closed, indicating the clutch pedal is engaged, the output voltage (5 volts) from the PCM is grounded through the signal return line to the PCM, and there is 1 volt or less. One volt or less indicates there is a reduced load on the engine. If the CPP switch is open, meaning the clutch pedal is disengaged, the input on the CPP signal to the PCM will be approximately 5 volts. Then, the 5-volt signal input at the PCM will indicate a load on the engine. The PCM uses the load information in mass air flow and fuel calculations. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-20 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8040 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair SPEED CONTROL SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the steering wheel. 2. WARNING: When carrying a live air bag, make sure the bag and trim cover are pointed away from your body. In the unlikely event of an accidental deployment, the bag will then deploy with minimal chance of injury. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Remove the steering wheel cover. 3. Remove the steering wheel frame. 1 Remove the nuts. 2 Disconnect the ground wire. 3 Remove the steering wheel frame. 4. Disconnect the speed control switches electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8041 5. Remove the speed control switches. 1 Remove the screws. 2 Remove the speed control switches. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Audible Warning Device: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Find Wiring Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams ^ System Diagrams Component Circuits that work together as a system ^ Grounds Diagrams Circuits grounding the system diagrams Power Distribution Diagrams The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any "dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any "blown" fuses. System Diagrams These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's indirect relationship with components in other systems. Grounds Diagrams The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different systems. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8047 Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#". These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc). All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions. Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of diagrams. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. Introduction To Ford Diagrams Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8048 System Overview Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information, connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent diagrams in the set. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8049 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram where the splice appears in full. Component Referencing (4) Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component (i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations. Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8050 Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8051 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. "Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle. NUMBER ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................... LOCATION 100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment, Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200 ................................................................................................................................................ Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300 .............................................................................................................................................. From instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ................................................................... ............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper; Truck bed 500 ...................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Driver door 600 .................................................. ...................................................................................................................................................... Passenger door, front 700 ................................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 ............................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ...... Passenger door, right rear Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8052 900 ....................................................................................................................................................... ........................ Above door trim panel and headliner Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification Symbols Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8053 Symbols Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8054 Symbols Part 3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8055 Symbols Part 4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8056 Symbols Part 5 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8057 Audible Warning Device: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 Locked terminal 2 Male half 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8058 Defective insulation stripping 1 Proper crimp 2 Insulation not removed 3 Wire strands missing 4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 Seal 2 Displaced tab Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8059 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Male half 7 Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 Enlarged 2 Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8060 Electrical short inside the harness 1 Solder coated wire to ground 2 Harness protective tape 3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8061 Splice tape removed 1 Intermittent short Splice covered 1 Wire strand 2 Splice tape 3 Harness tape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8062 Broken wire strands in harness 1 Wiring harness tape 2 Wiring strand 3 Broken strands intermittent signal 4 Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8063 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8064 6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8065 8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8066 Audible Warning Device: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 66-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8067 66-2 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8068 Audible Warning Device: Description and Operation Safety Belt Warning Chime The safety belt warning chime alerts that the safety belt is not fastened. The safety belt chime will sound for six seconds when the driver safety belt is not fastened and the ignition switch is turned from the OFF to the RUN or START position. The safety belt warning chime will stop when the safety belt is fastened, when the ignition is switched to the OFF position or if the six second timer expires. The safety belt warning chime inputs are: ignition switch position - driver safety belt switch Belt Minder The belt minder feature is configurable. To configure without using a diagnostic tool, refer to Belt Minder Deactivating/Activating. The belt minder feature supplements the current safety belt warning function. The belt minder feature is enabled after the current safety belt warning is complete. The belt minder reminds the driver that their safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster once the vehicle speed has exceeded three mph. While activated, the belt minder alternates the chime and indicator from ON for 6 seconds to OFF for 30 seconds. The belt minder feature stops when: the driver safety belt is buckled. - the ignition is turned to OFF or ACC. - five minutes have elapsed since belt minder has started. Headlamp On Warning Chime The headlamp on warning chime sounds if the parking lamps or the headlamps are left on after the key has been removed from the ignition switch lock cylinder and any door is opened. The warning chime will stop when any of the above conditions are removed. The headlamp on warning chime inputs are: ignition switch - parking lamp relay Key In Ignition Warning The warning sounds if the key is left in the ignition switch lock cylinder when any door is opened and the ignition switch is in the OFF or ACC position. The warning chime will stop when any of the above conditions are removed. The key in ignition warning chime inputs are: key-in-ignition warning switch - door ajar switch(es) Air Bag Warning Chime The air bag warning chime is activated when the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and an active fault is detected by the restraint control module (RCM). The RCM sends a chime request to the instrument cluster when the ignition switch is in the RUN or START position. Trip/Odometer Reset Tone A single tone sounds when the trip/odometer reset button is pressed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Specifications > Front Antilock Brake Sensor Brake Warning Indicator: Specifications Front Antilock Brake Sensor Front anti-lock brake sensor bolt (4x2) ......................................................................................................................................... 8-10 Nm (71-89 inch lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Specifications > Front Antilock Brake Sensor > Page 8073 Brake Warning Indicator: Specifications Rear Antilock Brake Sensor Rear anti-lock brake sensor bolt .............................................................................................................................................................. 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Cigarette Lighter: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Find Wiring Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams ^ System Diagrams Component Circuits that work together as a system ^ Grounds Diagrams Circuits grounding the system diagrams Power Distribution Diagrams The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any "dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any "blown" fuses. System Diagrams These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's indirect relationship with components in other systems. Grounds Diagrams The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different systems. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8078 Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#". These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc). All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions. Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of diagrams. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. Introduction To Ford Diagrams Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8079 System Overview Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information, connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent diagrams in the set. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8080 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram where the splice appears in full. Component Referencing (4) Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component (i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations. Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8081 Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8082 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. "Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle. NUMBER ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................... LOCATION 100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment, Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200 ................................................................................................................................................ Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300 .............................................................................................................................................. From instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ................................................................... ............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper; Truck bed 500 ...................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Driver door 600 .................................................. ...................................................................................................................................................... Passenger door, front 700 ................................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 ............................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ...... Passenger door, right rear Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8083 900 ....................................................................................................................................................... ........................ Above door trim panel and headliner Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification Symbols Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8084 Symbols Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8085 Symbols Part 3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8086 Symbols Part 4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8087 Symbols Part 5 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8088 Cigarette Lighter: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 Locked terminal 2 Male half 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8089 Defective insulation stripping 1 Proper crimp 2 Insulation not removed 3 Wire strands missing 4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 Seal 2 Displaced tab Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8090 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Male half 7 Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 Enlarged 2 Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8091 Electrical short inside the harness 1 Solder coated wire to ground 2 Harness protective tape 3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8092 Splice tape removed 1 Intermittent short Splice covered 1 Wire strand 2 Splice tape 3 Harness tape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8093 Broken wire strands in harness 1 Wiring harness tape 2 Wiring strand 3 Broken strands intermittent signal 4 Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8094 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8095 6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8096 8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8097 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8098 Cigarette Lighter: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 44-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8099 44-2 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions WARNING: - If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed. The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming Depowering and Repowering Procedure Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered. NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected. 2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover. 4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front of any air bag module when the battery ground cable is connected. Connect the battery ground cable. 5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8106 Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Seats Removed DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION PROCEDURES There are two deactivation and reactivation procedures. - One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. - The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. Deactivation Procedure WARNING: If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed. The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. NOTE: - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. - After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the affected front seat. 9. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag floor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 11. Disconnect (if necessary) attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical connector. 12. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8107 Reactivation Procedure 1. WARNING: The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 4. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 5. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector. 6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 7. Install the affected front seat. 8. Connect the drive and passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connectors. 9. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver and passenger side air bag module electrical connectors. 10. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. Reconnect the electrical connector. 11. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 12. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 14. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure Seats Not Removed DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION PROCEDURES There are two deactivation and reactivation procedures. - One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. - The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. Deactivation Procedure WARNING: If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed. The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8108 non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. NOTE: - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. - After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position. 2. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the front seat. 10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable. Reactivation Procedure 1. WARNING: The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. Reconnect the electrical connector. 4. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8109 7. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 9. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8110 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist AIR BAG RECONNECT CHECKLIST The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system concern: 1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3. Restraints control module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors connected? 5. All sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected? Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8111 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure PROVE OUT PROCEDURE Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the restraints control module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8115 Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8116 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8117 Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair INSTRUMENT PANEL DIMMER SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel dimmer switch. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-32 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 8123 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator: Description and Operation FUEL CAP OFF INDICATOR LAMP The Fuel Cap Off Indicator Lamp (FCIL) is an output signal that is controlled by the PCM and will illuminate when the strategy determines that there is a failure in the vapor management system due to the fuel filler cap not being sealed properly. This would be detected by the inability to pull vacuum in the fuel tank, after a fueling event. NOTE: The Escape, Freestar/Monterey, Mustang, Thunderbird, Town Car, Lincoln LS6/LS8, Expedition and Navigator do not have a dedicated (separate) output wire from the PCM to the instrument cluster. The PCM commands the FCIL on and off through the BUS +/- circuits (SCP). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation FUEL PUMP MODULE Fuel Pump Module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8130 Fuel Pump Module (For Returnable Fuel Systems) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8131 Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8132 Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM) The fuel pump (FP) module (Figure 71),(Figure 72) and(Figure 73) is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions WARNING: - If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed. The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. - To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). - The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming Depowering and Repowering Procedure Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered. NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected. 2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover. 4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front of any air bag module when the battery ground cable is connected. Connect the battery ground cable. 5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8139 Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Seats Removed DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION PROCEDURES There are two deactivation and reactivation procedures. - One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. - The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. Deactivation Procedure WARNING: If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed. The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. NOTE: - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. - After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the affected front seat. 9. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag floor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 11. Disconnect (if necessary) attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical connector. 12. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8140 Reactivation Procedure 1. WARNING: The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 4. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 5. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector. 6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 7. Install the affected front seat. 8. Connect the drive and passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connectors. 9. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver and passenger side air bag module electrical connectors. 10. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. Reconnect the electrical connector. 11. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 12. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 14. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure Seats Not Removed DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION PROCEDURES There are two deactivation and reactivation procedures. - One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. - The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. Deactivation Procedure WARNING: If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed. The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8141 non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. NOTE: - Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. - After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position. 2. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the front seat. 10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable. Reactivation Procedure 1. WARNING: The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. Reconnect the electrical connector. 4. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8142 7. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 9. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8143 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist AIR BAG RECONNECT CHECKLIST The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system concern: 1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3. Restraints control module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors connected? 5. All sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected? Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8144 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure PROVE OUT PROCEDURE Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the restraints control module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Cluster Bulb Instrument Panel Bulb: Service and Repair Instrument Cluster Bulb INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BULB REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument cluster. 2. Remove the instrument cluster bulbs. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Cluster Bulb > Page 8149 Instrument Panel Bulb: Service and Repair Warning Indicator Bulb WARNING INDICATOR BULB REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument cluster. 2. Remove the desired miniature bulb by turning it a quarter turn counterclockwise and lifting straight up. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair Ford provides no information related to a Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator for this vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Check Engine, Service Engine Soon Or ISO Standard Engine Symbol The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) (Figure 17) alerts the driver that the powertrain control module (PCM) has detected an OBD II emission-related component or system fault. When this occurs, an OBD II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be set. - The MIL is located on the instrument cluster and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE SOON or ISO standard engine symbol (Figure 18). - Power is supplied to the MIL whenever the ignition switch is in the RUN or START position. - The MIL will remain on in the RUN/START mode as a bulb check during the instrument cluster proveout for approximately 4 seconds. - If the MIL remains on after the bulb check: The PCM illuminates the MIL for an emission related concern and a DTC will be present. - The instrument cluster will illuminate the MIL if the PCM does not send a control message to the instrument cluster. - The PCM is operating in the Hardware Limited Operation Strategy (HLOS). - The MIL circuit is shorted to ground. - If the MIL remains off (during the bulb check): Bulb is damaged. - MIL circuit is open. - To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the Scan Tool must be sent, or three consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a fault. - For any MIL concern, go to Symptom Charts. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptom Charts - If the MIL blinks at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition could possibly exist. - If the MIL blinks erratically, an intermittent open B+ to the bulb or an intermittent short to ground in the MIL circuit exist. Also, the PCM can reset while cranking if battery voltage is low. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair Ford provides no information related to a Oil Change Reminder Lamp for this vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations View 151-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 8162 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 8163 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Oil Pressure Sender Removal and Installation 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the right side splash shield. 3. NOTE: The A/C compressor has been removed for clarity. Remove the oil pressure sender. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the sender. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist Warning Indicator: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Customer Interest Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 TSB 06-20-5 10/16/06 PARKING AID SPEAKER INOPERATIVE - DTCS C1742 AND C1743 FORD: 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2004-2006 Escape, Expedition, Explorer, F-150 2004-2007 F-250, F-350 MERCURY: 2005-2007 Montego 2004-2006 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner ISSUE Some 2004-2007 vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may experience low or no audible sound due to speaker issues related to the RSS. The speaker is attached to the module which may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1742 (Rear Sounder Circuit Fault) and/or C1743 (Rear Sounder Short). ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify that DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present. Also, low audible or intermittent audible warning condition may exist as well. 2. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present, replace parking aid speaker on module with speaker in Speaker Kit. Follow instructions in Speaker Kit. 3. Clear DTCs and repeat check for DTCs C1742 and/or C1743. 4. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 go away and speaker sounds, the repair is complete. 5. If DTCs remain, follow normal diagnostics in the appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 413-13 Pinpoint Test F. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 062005A 2004-2006 Expedition: 1.2 Hrs. Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2004-2007 Super Duty 0.6 Hr. 250/350: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist Warning Indicator: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 > Page 8172 062005A 2004-2005 1.1 Hrs. Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2006 Explorer/Mountaineer: 1.3 Hrs. Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2004-2006 F-150: Replace 0.5 Hr. Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2004-2006 Escape, 0.8 Hr. 2005-2006 Mariner: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2005-2007 Five 1.3 Hrs. Hundred/Montego: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2005-2007 Freestyle: 0.7 Hr. Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR 31012AL, 31012AT) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15K864 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Warning Indicator: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 Parking Assist Warning Indicator: All Technical Service Bulletins Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 TSB 06-20-5 10/16/06 PARKING AID SPEAKER INOPERATIVE - DTCS C1742 AND C1743 FORD: 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2004-2006 Escape, Expedition, Explorer, F-150 2004-2007 F-250, F-350 MERCURY: 2005-2007 Montego 2004-2006 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner ISSUE Some 2004-2007 vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may experience low or no audible sound due to speaker issues related to the RSS. The speaker is attached to the module which may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1742 (Rear Sounder Circuit Fault) and/or C1743 (Rear Sounder Short). ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify that DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present. Also, low audible or intermittent audible warning condition may exist as well. 2. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present, replace parking aid speaker on module with speaker in Speaker Kit. Follow instructions in Speaker Kit. 3. Clear DTCs and repeat check for DTCs C1742 and/or C1743. 4. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 go away and speaker sounds, the repair is complete. 5. If DTCs remain, follow normal diagnostics in the appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 413-13 Pinpoint Test F. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 062005A 2004-2006 Expedition: 1.2 Hrs. Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2004-2007 Super Duty 0.6 Hr. 250/350: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Warning Indicator: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 > Page 8178 062005A 2004-2005 1.1 Hrs. Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2006 Explorer/Mountaineer: 1.3 Hrs. Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2004-2006 F-150: Replace 0.5 Hr. Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2004-2006 Escape, 0.8 Hr. 2005-2006 Mariner: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2005-2007 Five 1.3 Hrs. Hundred/Montego: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT) 062005A 2005-2007 Freestyle: 0.7 Hr. Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR 31012AL, 31012AT) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 15K864 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8179 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-26 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8183 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8184 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the parking brake control. 2. Remove the parking brake warning indicator switch. ^ Remove the screws. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer: Description and Operation SAFETY BELT WARNING SYSTEM The safety belt warning indicator illuminates and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts. The conditions of operation for the safety belt warning indicator and chime are as follows: If the driver's safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned to RUN, the safety belt warning indicator illuminates for 1-2 minutes and the warning chime sounds for 4-8 seconds. - If the driver's safety belt is buckled while the warning indicator is illuminated and the reminder chime is sounding, the safety belt warning indicator and reminder chime turn off. - If the driver's safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to RUN, the safety belt warning indicator and reminder chime remain off. BELT MINDER The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function. This feature provides additional reminders to the driver that the driver's safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster. To activate or deactivate the Belt Minder feature, refer to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation SAFETY BELT WARNING SYSTEM The safety belt warning indicator illuminates and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts. The conditions of operation for the safety belt warning indicator and chime are as follows: If the driver's safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned to RUN, the safety belt warning indicator illuminates for 1-2 minutes and the warning chime sounds for 4-8 seconds. - If the driver's safety belt is buckled while the warning indicator is illuminated and the reminder chime is sounding, the safety belt warning indicator and reminder chime turn off. - If the driver's safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to RUN, the safety belt warning indicator and reminder chime remain off. BELT MINDER The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function. This feature provides additional reminders to the driver that the driver's safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster. To activate or deactivate the Belt Minder feature, refer to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8195 Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8196 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8197 Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair INSTRUMENT PANEL DIMMER SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel dimmer switch. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-32 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 8203 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation FUEL PUMP MODULE Fuel Pump Module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8207 Fuel Pump Module (For Returnable Fuel Systems) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8208 Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8209 Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM) The fuel pump (FP) module (Figure 71),(Figure 72) and(Figure 73) is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-26 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8213 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8214 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the parking brake control. 2. Remove the parking brake warning indicator switch. ^ Remove the screws. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair Shift Indicator: Service and Repair SELECTOR LEVER INDICATOR BULB REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument cluster. 2. Remove the selector lever indicator bulb. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > System Information > Description and Operation Tire Monitoring System: Description and Operation Ford provides no information regarding a Tire Pressure Monitoring System for this vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL INDICATOR LAMP The transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Refer to Transmission Control Switch in Hardware PCM Inputs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor > Page 8231 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Find Wiring Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams ^ System Diagrams Component Circuits that work together as a system ^ Grounds Diagrams Circuits grounding the system diagrams Power Distribution Diagrams The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any "dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any "blown" fuses. System Diagrams These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's indirect relationship with components in other systems. Grounds Diagrams The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different systems. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8236 Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#". These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc). All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions. Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of diagrams. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. Introduction To Ford Diagrams Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8237 System Overview Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information, connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent diagrams in the set. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8238 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram where the splice appears in full. Component Referencing (4) Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component (i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations. Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8239 Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8240 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. "Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle. NUMBER ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................... LOCATION 100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment, Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200 ................................................................................................................................................ Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300 .............................................................................................................................................. From instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ................................................................... ............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper; Truck bed 500 ...................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Driver door 600 .................................................. ...................................................................................................................................................... Passenger door, front 700 ................................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 ............................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ...... Passenger door, right rear Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8241 900 ....................................................................................................................................................... ........................ Above door trim panel and headliner Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification Symbols Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8242 Symbols Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8243 Symbols Part 3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8244 Symbols Part 4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8245 Symbols Part 5 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8246 Brake Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 Locked terminal 2 Male half 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8247 Defective insulation stripping 1 Proper crimp 2 Insulation not removed 3 Wire strands missing 4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 Seal 2 Displaced tab Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8248 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Male half 7 Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 Enlarged 2 Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8249 Electrical short inside the harness 1 Solder coated wire to ground 2 Harness protective tape 3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8250 Splice tape removed 1 Intermittent short Splice covered 1 Wire strand 2 Splice tape 3 Harness tape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8251 Broken wire strands in harness 1 Wiring harness tape 2 Wiring strand 3 Broken strands intermittent signal 4 Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8252 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8253 6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8254 8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8255 Brake Lamp: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8256 Brake Lamp: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 90-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8257 90-2 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Brake Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION 1. Verify the customer concern by operating the stoplamps. Visual Inspection Chart 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical and electrical damage. 3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. 4. If the fault is not visually evident, verify the symptom and proceed to the Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8260 Symptom Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8261 Brake Lamp: Pinpoint Tests Test J PINPOINT TEST J: THE STOPLAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE Test J1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8262 Test J1-J3 Test K PINPOINT TEST K: ONE OR MORE STOPLAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8263 Test K1-K2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8264 Test K2 Continued Test L PINPOINT TEST L: THE STOPLAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY Test L1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8265 73III Automotive Meter Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-23 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8269 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8270 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH Typical Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position (BPP) switch (Figure 27) is used by the PCM to disengage the transmission torque converter clutch and on some applications as an input to the idle speed control for idle quality and for vehicle speed control deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in the following manner: - BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake is applied. - BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM or HEM), BPP signal is than broadcasted over the data link to be received by the PCM. - BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake (ABS)- traction control / stability assist module. The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generate an output called the Driver Brake Application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Note on applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stoplamp circuit, if all stoplamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stoplamp bulbs has failed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8271 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the brake pedal position (BPP) switch. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Rotate clockwise and remove the BPP switch. INSTALLATION NOTE: Initial installation of brake pedal position (BPP) switch allows for one adjustment. If additional adjustments are necessary, install a new switch. 1. To unlock, rotate the lock knob counterclockwise to the stop. 2. With the engine running, fully depress and hold the brake pedal. 3. Install the brake pedal position (BPP) switch. 1 Position the BPP switch in the bracket and rotate counterclockwise. 2 Connect the electrical connector. 4. Slowly release the brake pedal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams Cargo Lamp: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8275 Cargo Lamp: Service and Repair CARGO LAMP REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the cargo lamp assembly from the headliner. 3. Remove the cargo lamp assembly. 1 Disconnect the electrical connectors. 2 Remove the cargo lamp assembly. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Center Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Center Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair HIGH MOUNTED STOPLAMP BULB REMOVAL 1. Remove the high-mounted stoplamp assembly. - Remove and discard the screws and washers. 2. Remove the high-mounted stoplamp bulb holder from the lamp assembly by disengaging the snaps. 3. Remove the bulb(s). INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Courtesy Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Find Wiring Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams ^ System Diagrams Component Circuits that work together as a system ^ Grounds Diagrams Circuits grounding the system diagrams Power Distribution Diagrams The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any "dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any "blown" fuses. System Diagrams These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's indirect relationship with components in other systems. Grounds Diagrams The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different systems. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8284 Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#". These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc). All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions. Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of diagrams. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. Introduction To Ford Diagrams Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8285 System Overview Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information, connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent diagrams in the set. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8286 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram where the splice appears in full. Component Referencing (4) Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component (i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations. Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8287 Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8288 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. "Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle. NUMBER ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................... LOCATION 100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment, Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200 ................................................................................................................................................ Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300 .............................................................................................................................................. From instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ................................................................... ............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper; Truck bed 500 ...................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Driver door 600 .................................................. ...................................................................................................................................................... Passenger door, front 700 ................................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 ............................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ...... Passenger door, right rear Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8289 900 ....................................................................................................................................................... ........................ Above door trim panel and headliner Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification Symbols Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8290 Symbols Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8291 Symbols Part 3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8292 Symbols Part 4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8293 Symbols Part 5 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8294 Courtesy Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 Locked terminal 2 Male half 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8295 Defective insulation stripping 1 Proper crimp 2 Insulation not removed 3 Wire strands missing 4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 Seal 2 Displaced tab Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8296 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Male half 7 Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 Enlarged 2 Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8297 Electrical short inside the harness 1 Solder coated wire to ground 2 Harness protective tape 3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8298 Splice tape removed 1 Intermittent short Splice covered 1 Wire strand 2 Splice tape 3 Harness tape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8299 Broken wire strands in harness 1 Wiring harness tape 2 Wiring strand 3 Broken strands intermittent signal 4 Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8300 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8301 6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8302 8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8303 Courtesy Lamp: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8304 Courtesy Lamp: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 89-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8305 89-2 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8306 Courtesy Lamp: Description and Operation PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION Interior Lighting The generic electronic module (GEM) supplies voltage and ground to the interior courtesy lamps when any of the following inputs are received: any door becomes ajar - liftgate or liftgate glass becomes ajar - remote keyless entry unlock signal is received - a key cylinder switch is turned to UNLOCK All interior courtesy lamps are turned off when any of the following occurs: all the doors, liftgate and liftgate glass are closed - the ignition switch is turned to RUN - a key cylinder switch is turned to LOCK - remote keyless entry lock signal is received The illuminated entry feature is another feature which activates the interior lamps. This feature operates as follows: The GEM illuminates the interior lamps at 80 percent brightness when an unlock signal is received from a remote keyless entry transmitter, key cylinder switch, or door handle lifted when locked. If no door ajar signal is received the GEM will time out and turn the interior lights off. The illuminated entry feature will be canceled when any of the following conditions are met: the remote transmitter lock button is pressed and the courtesy lamp control is not activated. - the ignition is in the RUN or START position and the interior lamp control is not activated. Battery Saver The GEM is equipped with a battery saver which will turn the lights off after 45 minutes of inactivity. This feature is an internal function of the GEM software. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Courtesy Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION 1. Verify the customer concern by operating the system. Visual Inspection Chart 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical and electrical damage. 3. If an obvious cause for an observed of reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. 4. If the diagnostic tool does not power up, refer to the diagnostic tool manual. 5. Carry out the DATA LINK DIAGNOSTICS test. If the diagnostic tool responds with: - CKT914, CKT915 or CKT70 = ALL ECUS NO RESP/NOT EQUIP, refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network). - NO RESP/NOT EQUIP for GEM, Refer to Body Control Systems (Multifunction Electronic Control Module). - SYSTEM PASSED, retrieve and record the continuous diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs), erase the continuous DTCs, and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the GEM. 6. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to the GEM Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index to continue diagnostics. See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions 7. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, proceed to the Symptom Chart to continue diagnostics. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures 8. If the DTCs are retrieved that are not found in the GEM Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index, refer to the master GEM Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index in Body Control Systems (Multifunction Electronic Control Module). See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8309 DTC Index B1317 - B1571 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8310 Courtesy Lamp: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Symptom Chart, Part 1 Symptom Chart, Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8311 Courtesy Lamp: Pinpoint Tests Test A PINPOINT TEST A: THE INTERIOR LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE Test A1-A3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8312 Test A3-A5 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8313 Test A5-A6 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8314 Test A7-A8 Test B PINPOINT TEST B: THE INTERIOR LAMPS STAY ON CONTINUOUSLY - DO NOT FADE OUT Test B1-B2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8315 Test B2-B4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8316 Test B5-B7 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8317 Test B8-B11 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8318 Test B11-B13 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8319 Test B14-B16 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8320 Test B17-B19 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8321 Test B20-B22 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8322 Test B23-B26 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8323 Test B26-B28 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8324 Test B29-B31 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8325 Test B32-B34 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8326 Test B35-B36 Test C PINPOINT TEST C: THE INTERIOR LAMPS DO NOT TURN ON WITH ONE DOOR OPEN Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8327 Test C1-C3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8328 Test C3-C4 Test D PINPOINT TEST D: THE ILLUMINATED ENTRY IS INOPERATIVE WHEN USING THE REMOTE TRANSMITTER Test D1-D2 Test E Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8329 PINPOINT TEST E: THE DEMAND LIGHTING IS INOPERATIVE Test E1-E4 Test F PINPOINT TEST F: BATTERY VOLTAGE OUT OF RANGE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8330 Test F1-F3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8331 Courtesy Lamp: Service and Repair INTERIOR/MAP READING LAMP REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the interior/map reading lamp lens. 3. Remove the interior/map reading lamp assembly. 1 Remove the screws. 2 Remove the interior/map reading lamp. Disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8332 Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations View 151-23 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 8337 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 8338 Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Service and Repair DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (DRL) MODULE REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the nut and the DRL module. - Disconnect the electrical connectors. - Transfer parts as necessary. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations View 151-23 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8342 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8343 Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8344 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8348 Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8349 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8350 Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair INSTRUMENT PANEL DIMMER SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel dimmer switch. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-32 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 8356 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Exterior Lighting Module > Component Information > Application and ID Exterior Lighting Module: Application and ID For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic Module (GEM) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair FOG LAMP BULB REMOVAL WARNING: The halogen fog lamp bulb contains gas under pressure. The bulb may shatter if the glass envelope is scratched or if the bulb is dropped. Handle the bulb carefully. Grasp the bulb only by its base. Avoid touching the glass envelope. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: The fog lamp bulb should not be removed from the fog lamp until just before new bulb is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect fog lamp bulb performance. Contaminants may enter the fog lamp where they can settle on the lens and reflector. Never turn on the fog lamps with the bulb removed. 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Position the inner fender well aside. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the pin-type retainers. 3 Remove the screw. 4 Position the inner fender well aside. 3. Remove the lamp socket from the lamp assembly. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector. INSTALLATION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8364 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8368 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8369 Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8370 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-17 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8374 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8375 Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service and Repair FOG LAMP SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to remove fog lamp switch or damage to the finish panel may occur. Adding tape to the end of a thin tool will reduce marring to the finish panel. 2. Use a thin tool to remove the fog lamp switch. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component Information > Locations View 151-17 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component Information > Locations > Page 8380 Hazard Warning Flasher: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-18 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8384 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8385 Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair Hazard Flasher Switch Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Position the instrument panel center finish panel rearward from the instrument panel. 3. Remove the hazard flasher switch. 1. Disconnect electrical connector. 2. Remove the hazard flasher switch. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair HEADLAMP BULB REMOVAL WARNING: The halogen headlamp bulb contains gas under pressure. The bulb may shatter if the glass envelope is scratched or if the bulb is dropped. Handle the bulb carefully. Grasp the bulb only by its base. Avoid touching the glass envelope. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: The headlamp bulb should not be removed from the headlamp until just before a new bulb is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect headlamp bulb performance. Contaminants may enter the headlamp where they can settle on the lens and reflector. Never turn on the headlamps with the bulb removed. 1. NOTE: Make sure that the headlamp switch and the ignition switch are in the OFF position. Disconnect the headlamp electrical connector. 2. Remove the rubber boot. 3. Depress the retainer clip and position aside. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8390 4. Remove the bulb. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Control Module > Component Information > Application and ID Headlamp Control Module: Application and ID For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic Module (GEM) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8397 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8398 Headlamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8399 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-20 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8403 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8404 Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8405 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8410 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8411 Horn Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8412 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-20 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Application and ID Interior Lighting Module: Application and ID For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic Module (GEM) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions License Plate Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Find Wiring Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams ^ System Diagrams Component Circuits that work together as a system ^ Grounds Diagrams Circuits grounding the system diagrams Power Distribution Diagrams The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any "dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any "blown" fuses. System Diagrams These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's indirect relationship with components in other systems. Grounds Diagrams The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different systems. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8423 Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#". These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc). All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions. Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of diagrams. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. Introduction To Ford Diagrams Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8424 System Overview Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information, connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent diagrams in the set. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8425 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram where the splice appears in full. Component Referencing (4) Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component (i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations. Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8426 Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8427 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. "Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle. NUMBER ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................... LOCATION 100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment, Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200 ................................................................................................................................................ Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300 .............................................................................................................................................. From instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ................................................................... ............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper; Truck bed 500 ...................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Driver door 600 .................................................. ...................................................................................................................................................... Passenger door, front 700 ................................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 ............................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ...... Passenger door, right rear Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8428 900 ....................................................................................................................................................... ........................ Above door trim panel and headliner Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification Symbols Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8429 Symbols Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8430 Symbols Part 3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8431 Symbols Part 4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8432 Symbols Part 5 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8433 License Plate Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 Locked terminal 2 Male half 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8434 Defective insulation stripping 1 Proper crimp 2 Insulation not removed 3 Wire strands missing 4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 Seal 2 Displaced tab Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8435 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Male half 7 Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 Enlarged 2 Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8436 Electrical short inside the harness 1 Solder coated wire to ground 2 Harness protective tape 3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8437 Splice tape removed 1 Intermittent short Splice covered 1 Wire strand 2 Splice tape 3 Harness tape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8438 Broken wire strands in harness 1 Wiring harness tape 2 Wiring strand 3 Broken strands intermittent signal 4 Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8439 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8440 6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8441 8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8442 License Plate Lamp: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8443 License Plate Lamp: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 92-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8444 Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8445 License Plate Lamp: Service and Repair LICENSE PLATE LAMP REMOVAL 1. Remove the license plate lamp assembly. - Push the license lamp to the right and pull out. 2. Disconnect the socket from the lens. - Remove the bulb. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Service and Repair Map Light: Service and Repair INTERIOR/MAP READING LAMP REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the interior/map reading lamp lens. 3. Remove the interior/map reading lamp assembly. 1 Remove the screws. 2 Remove the interior/map reading lamp. Disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Marker Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair SIDE LAMP/FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP BULB REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Position the inner fender well aside. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the pin-type retainers. 3 Remove the screw. 4 Position the inner fender well aside. 3. Remove the lamp socket from the lamp assembly. 4. Remove the bulb. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8457 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8458 Parking Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8459 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations View 151-23 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 8464 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 8465 Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Service and Repair DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (DRL) MODULE REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the nut and the DRL module. - Disconnect the electrical connectors. - Transfer parts as necessary. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations View 151-23 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8469 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8470 Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8471 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Exterior Lighting Module > Component Information > Application and ID Exterior Lighting Module: Application and ID For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic Module (GEM) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8478 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8479 Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8480 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Control Module > Component Information > Application and ID Headlamp Control Module: Application and ID For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic Module (GEM) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8487 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8488 Headlamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8489 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8493 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8494 Horn Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8495 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Application and ID Interior Lighting Module: Application and ID For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic Module (GEM) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8502 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8503 Parking Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8504 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor > Page 8511 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-23 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8515 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8516 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH Typical Brake Pedal Position Switch The brake pedal position (BPP) switch (Figure 27) is used by the PCM to disengage the transmission torque converter clutch and on some applications as an input to the idle speed control for idle quality and for vehicle speed control deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in the following manner: - BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake is applied. - BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM or HEM), BPP signal is than broadcasted over the data link to be received by the PCM. - BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake (ABS)- traction control / stability assist module. The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generate an output called the Driver Brake Application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Note on applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stoplamp circuit, if all stoplamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stoplamp bulbs has failed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8517 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the brake pedal position (BPP) switch. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Rotate clockwise and remove the BPP switch. INSTALLATION NOTE: Initial installation of brake pedal position (BPP) switch allows for one adjustment. If additional adjustments are necessary, install a new switch. 1. To unlock, rotate the lock knob counterclockwise to the stop. 2. With the engine running, fully depress and hold the brake pedal. 3. Install the brake pedal position (BPP) switch. 1 Position the BPP switch in the bracket and rotate counterclockwise. 2 Connect the electrical connector. 4. Slowly release the brake pedal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-32 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 8523 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-17 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8527 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8528 Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service and Repair FOG LAMP SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to remove fog lamp switch or damage to the finish panel may occur. Adding tape to the end of a thin tool will reduce marring to the finish panel. 2. Use a thin tool to remove the fog lamp switch. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-18 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8532 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8533 Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair Hazard Flasher Switch Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Position the instrument panel center finish panel rearward from the instrument panel. 3. Remove the hazard flasher switch. 1. Disconnect electrical connector. 2. Remove the hazard flasher switch. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-20 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8537 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8538 Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8539 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-20 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the upper steering column shroud. 3. Remove the lower steering column shroud. 1. Remove the screws. 2. Remove the lower steering column shroud. 4. Remove the multifunction switch. 1. Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Remove the screws. 3. Remove the multifunction switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Tail Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Find Wiring Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams ^ System Diagrams Component Circuits that work together as a system ^ Grounds Diagrams Circuits grounding the system diagrams Power Distribution Diagrams The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any "dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any "blown" fuses. System Diagrams These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's indirect relationship with components in other systems. Grounds Diagrams The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different systems. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8550 Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#". These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc). All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions. Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of diagrams. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. Introduction To Ford Diagrams Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8551 System Overview Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information, connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent diagrams in the set. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8552 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram where the splice appears in full. Component Referencing (4) Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component (i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations. Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8553 Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8554 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. "Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle. NUMBER ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................... LOCATION 100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment, Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200 ................................................................................................................................................ Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300 .............................................................................................................................................. From instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ................................................................... ............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper; Truck bed 500 ...................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Driver door 600 .................................................. ...................................................................................................................................................... Passenger door, front 700 ................................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 ............................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ...... Passenger door, right rear Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8555 900 ....................................................................................................................................................... ........................ Above door trim panel and headliner Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification Symbols Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8556 Symbols Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8557 Symbols Part 3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8558 Symbols Part 4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8559 Symbols Part 5 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8560 Tail Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 Locked terminal 2 Male half 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8561 Defective insulation stripping 1 Proper crimp 2 Insulation not removed 3 Wire strands missing 4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 Seal 2 Displaced tab Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8562 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Male half 7 Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 Enlarged 2 Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8563 Electrical short inside the harness 1 Solder coated wire to ground 2 Harness protective tape 3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8564 Splice tape removed 1 Intermittent short Splice covered 1 Wire strand 2 Splice tape 3 Harness tape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8565 Broken wire strands in harness 1 Wiring harness tape 2 Wiring strand 3 Broken strands intermittent signal 4 Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8566 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8567 6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8568 8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8569 Tail Lamp: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 92-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8570 Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8571 Tail Lamp: Service and Repair REAR LAMP ASSEMBLY REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear lamp assembly. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Pull straight back to remove the rear lamp assembly. - Disconnect the electrical connectors. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Find Wiring Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams ^ System Diagrams Component Circuits that work together as a system ^ Grounds Diagrams Circuits grounding the system diagrams Power Distribution Diagrams The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any "dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any "blown" fuses. System Diagrams These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's indirect relationship with components in other systems. Grounds Diagrams The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution. These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different systems. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8576 Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#". These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc). All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions. Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of diagrams. PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. Introduction To Ford Diagrams Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8577 System Overview Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information, connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent diagrams in the set. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8578 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram where the splice appears in full. Component Referencing (4) Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component (i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations. Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8579 Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8580 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. "Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery cell. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle. NUMBER ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................................... LOCATION 100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment, Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200 ................................................................................................................................................ Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300 .............................................................................................................................................. From instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ................................................................... ............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper; Truck bed 500 ...................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. Driver door 600 .................................................. ...................................................................................................................................................... Passenger door, front 700 ................................................................................................................... ................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 ............................. .............................................................................................................................................................. ...... Passenger door, right rear Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8581 900 ....................................................................................................................................................... ........................ Above door trim panel and headliner Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification Symbols Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8582 Symbols Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8583 Symbols Part 3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8584 Symbols Part 4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8585 Symbols Part 5 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8586 Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 Locked terminal 2 Male half 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 Seal Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8587 Defective insulation stripping 1 Proper crimp 2 Insulation not removed 3 Wire strands missing 4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 Seal 2 Displaced tab Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8588 3 Female half 4 Seal 5 Intermittent contact 6 Male half 7 Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 Enlarged 2 Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8589 Electrical short inside the harness 1 Solder coated wire to ground 2 Harness protective tape 3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8590 Splice tape removed 1 Intermittent short Splice covered 1 Wire strand 2 Splice tape 3 Harness tape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8591 Broken wire strands in harness 1 Wiring harness tape 2 Wiring strand 3 Broken strands intermittent signal 4 Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8592 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8593 6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8594 8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8595 Trailer Lamps: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 95-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Trailer Lamps: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION 1 Verify the customer concern by operating the trailer tow lights. 2. Verify the exterior lighting system of the vehicle is operating correctly. If not, refer to the appropriate pinpoint test. 3. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage. VISUAL INSPECTION CHART Electrical Central junction box (CJB) fuse: 21 (10A) - 16 (10A) - Connections - Circuity - Relays - Bulb(s) 4. If the fault is not visually evident, determine the symptom and proceed to the Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8598 Symptom Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8599 Trailer Lamps: Pinpoint Tests Tests AB PINPOINT TEST AB: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE Test AB1 Tests AC PINPOINT TEST AC: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - BOTH TRAILER TURN SIGNALS/STOPLAMPS/HAZARD LAMPS Test AC1-AC2 Tests AD PINPOINT TEST AD: THE INDIVIDUAL TRAILER LAMPS IS INOPERATIVE - RH TRAILER TURN SIGNALS/STOPLAMPS/HAZARD Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8600 LAMPS Test AD1 Tests AE PINPOINT TEST AE: THE INDIVIDUAL TRAILER LAMPS IS INOPERATIVE - LH TRAILER TURN SIGNALS/STOPLAMPS/HAZARD LAMPS Test AE1 Tests AF PINPOINT TEST AF: THE INDIVIDUAL TRAILER LAMPS IS INOPERATIVE - PARKING LAMPS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8601 Test AF1 Test AF1-AF2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8602 73III Automotive Meter Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Locations View 151-17 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Locations > Page 8607 Turn Signal Flasher: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair SIDE LAMP/FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP BULB REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Position the inner fender well aside. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the pin-type retainers. 3 Remove the screw. 4 Position the inner fender well aside. 3. Remove the lamp socket from the lamp assembly. 4. Remove the bulb. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Steering Column Multifunction Switch Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the upper steering column shroud. 3. Remove the lower steering column shroud. 1. Remove the screws. 2. Remove the lower steering column shroud. 4. Remove the multifunction switch. 1. Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Remove the screws. 3. Remove the multifunction switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Left > Page 8619 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8625 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8626 Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8627 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-19 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8631 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8632 Heated Glass Element Switch: Service and Repair REAR WINDOW DEFROST SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the audio unit. 2. Push outward on the rear window defrost switch to remove it from the instrument panel center finish panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair Rear Defogger: Technical Service Bulletins A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair TSB 04-24-5 12/13/04 REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER GRID/INTEGRAL ANTENNA DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR TERMINAL TAB REPAIR FORD: 1999-2000 Contour 1999-2002 Escort 1999-2003 Escort ZX2 1999-2005 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2005 Focus 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2005 Expedition, Explorer 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Escape 2004-2005 F-150, Freestar 2005 Escape Hybrid LINCOLN: 1999-2002 Continental 1999-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS 1999-2005 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 1999 Tracer 1999-2000 Mystique 1999-2005 and Marquis, Sable 2005 Montego 1999-2002 Villager 1999-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 04-18-9 to update vehicle applications and service procedure. ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit inoperative electric rear window defroster (heated back lite) grid lines, integral antenna concerns causing radio reception issues or terminal tabs pulled from the rear window glass. ACTION Follow the diagnostic and repair procedures included in this article to inspect and service rear defroster grid lines, integral antenna concerns or broken terminal tabs. SERVICE PROCEDURE Warrantable/Non Warrantable repairs Warrantable grid line repairs typically can be identified by one inoperative grid line with a small discoloration at the area of concern, approximately the size of a pinhead. Grid line(s) that are scratched or have the silver material removed are not warrantable and should be addressed with the customer. Replacement of backglass for grid line or bus bar tarnishing is not a warrantable repair. Tarnishing of the silver lines or bus bars is a normal condition. Please refer to the Heated Back Lite Damageability Job Aid for additional information and examples of defects and damage. NOTE THE GRID LINE MATERIAL IS NOT EMBEDDED INTO THE GLASS BUT IS BAKED TO THE GLASS SURFACE AND CONSEQUENTLY CAN BE SCRAPED OFF. INOPERATIVE LINES MAY APPEAR TO THE EYE TO BE UNDAMAGED DUE TO RESIDUE REMAINING ON Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair > Page 8637 THE GLASS AND WILL REQUIRE DIAGNOSIS WITH A VOLTMETER OR 12V TEST LAMP AS EXPLAINED IN THIS ARTICLE. Examples Of Non-Warrantable Grid Line Damage ^ Ice scraper damage to grid lines ^ Animal scratches on grid lines ^ Window tint film/removal of the film which damages grid lines ^ Stickers placed over grids which upon removal, removes the grid line material ^ License plate (steel type placed against the inside of back glass) which rubs on the grid line causing damage ^ Temporary license plate (paper stuck on to the inside of the back glass) which upon removal removes grid line material ^ Cargo or lumber rubbing against the glass which removes grid line material ^ Cellular phone antenna installation/removal which damages grid line material NOTE AN UNDAMAGED GRIDLINE WILL HAVE SMALL RIDGES THAT PROJECT ABOVE THE SURFACE OF THE GLASS AND CAN EASILY BE FELT WHEN RUNNING A FINGERNAIL ACROSS THEM. GRIDLINES THAT HAVE BEEN "RAZOR BLADED" WILL FEEL SMOOTH WHEN A FINGERNAIL IS DRAGGED ACROSS THE AFFECTED AREA. THERE MAY BE SOME RESIDUE LEFT ON THE GLASS THAT APPEARS TO BE GRID MATERIAL BUT A CHECK WITH A VOLTMETER OR 12V TEST LAMP, AS EXPLAINED IN THIS ARTICLE, WILL CONFIRM AN OPEN CIRCUIT. GRID LINE INOPERATIVE - DIAGNOSTICS 1. Reference Workshop Manual Section 501-11 and the Wiring Diagram Section 56 to verify power and ground to the back-glass. 2. Connect a test lamp or DVOM to a good body ground. 3. Turn the ignition key to the run position and depress and release the rear defroster button to turn the system on. THE GRID IS ENERGIZED FOR APPROXIMATELY 10 MINUTES EACH TIME THE DEFROSTER BUTTON IS PRESSED. 4. Starting from the top grid line at the center of the back-glass, touch the test lamp or DVOM + lead to each grid line. (Use caution not to damage grid lines). The DVOM should read approximately 1/2 of the battery voltage on each line at the center of the back-glass. If using a test light, the bulb should be approximately the same brightness on each line from top to bottom. If the DVOM or light indicates a high voltage or no voltage on any grid line, move along the concern grid line with the + test lead or test lamp until the voltage changes suddenly. This is the area of concern, use chalk to mark the area of concern and mark the outside of the glass at that same area. 5. Repair per the Grid Line Repair Procedure. GRID LINE REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE LONG GAPS ARE ALMOST ALWAYS DUE TO DAMAGE AND ARE NOT WARRANTABLE, HOWEVER THEY CAN BE REPAIRED. THE LONGER THE GAP THE MORE IMPORTANT IT IS TO APPLY A MINIMUM SIX (6) COATS OF CONDUCTIVE REPAIR MATERIAL WITH THE FIVE (5) MINUTE DRY TIME BETWEEN EACH COAT. APPLYING LESS COATS OR NOT ALLOWING DRY TIME BETWEEN COATS WILL PRODUCE REPAIRED RESISTANCE THAT IS GREATER THAN OEM RESISTANCE, RESULTING IN POOR DEFROST PERFORMANCE AND EXCESSIVE LOCALIZED HEATING. REPAIRED LONG GAPS ARE GENERALLY NOT VISUALLY PLEASING UNLESS EXTREME CARE IS TAKEN WHEN TAPING AFFECTED GRID LINE AREAS. NOTE IF THE BROWN COLOR UNDER THE GRID LINE IS DAMAGED OR MISSING (THIS IS VERY RARE), IT WILL BE NECESSARY TO APPLY BROWN ACRYLIC LACQUER TOUCH-UP PAINT FOR COLOR MATCH. THIS PAINT MUST MEET SPECIFICATION ESR-M2P100-C AND SHOULD BE APPLIED TO THE GLASS PRIOR TO APPLYING THE REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER REPAIR COMPOUND. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair > Page 8638 Service inoperative grid lines on rear window glass using Motorcraft Defroster Repair PM-11 or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESB-M4J58-A as follows: Surface Preparation 1. Bring vehicle inside and warm it to 60° F (16° C) or above. 2. Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the rear window glass as this may cause damage to the grid lines. Clean the entire grid line service area with Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC-23 or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESR-M14P5-A to remove all dirt, wax, grease, oil or other foreign matter. It is important that the repair area be clean and dry. NOTE THE REPAIR AREA HOWEVER SHOULD BE CLEANED WITH STEEL WOOL OR AN ABRASIVE PAD SUCH AS SCOTCHBRITE TO REMOVE GRIME. Mixing The bottle of Rear Window Defroster Repair compound and touch-up paint (if needed) must be at room temperature. Shake the bottle for at least one (1) minute for thorough mixing. Shake frequently during use. Application 1. Mark location of open grid on the outside of the back window glass (performed in diagnostics). Place protective covering over the package tray as necessary. 2. Using "fine line tape", mask off the area directly above and below open grid line (Figure 1). It is best to extend the tape 26 mm (1") beyond the concern area in both directions. The open should be at the center of the mask and tape gap must be no wider than the existing grid line. Other types of tape may be used but end results of the repair may not appear as visually acceptable due to ease of application and tape edge finish. 3. If the brown layer of the grid is not broken or missing, apply only the silver grid repair compound to the open grid line. Apply the correct coating in several smooth continuous strokes (allowing five (5) minutes drying time between coats) across the open grid line area using the brush applicator in the cap. Extend the service coating at least 6 mm (.25") on both sides of the open grid line area. Apply a minimum of six (6) coats of the grid repair compound. 4. If both brown and silver layers of the grid are broken or missing, apply a coating of brown lacquer touch-up paint across the open line area first. Take care to paint only the area missing the color. Two (2) coats may be necessary to obtain the proper color. Allow the touch-up paint to dry at least five (5) minutes between coats. Apply six (6) coats of grid repair compound. NOTE THE INTERIOR SIDE OF THE GRID LINES ARE NOT PAINTED, BUT DUE TO THE SILVER TARNISHING WILL TEND TO CHANGE THE GRID TO A GOLD OR BROWN COLOR. THE REPAIRED AREA WILL BE BRIGHT SILVER AND WILL ALSO TARNISH OVER Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair > Page 8639 TIME TO MATCH THE REST OF THE GRID. 5. After five (5) minutes of dry time of the final coat of grid repair compound, remove the tape, step outside and inspect the repaired area. If the repair compound is visible above or below the grid, the excess can be removed. This may be done by placing a single-edge razor blade on the back window glass parallel to grid and scrape gently toward grid. A wider/thicker line will perform better but may not be cosmetically appealing. CAUTION BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE GRID LINE WITH RAZOR BLADE. VERIFY ALL OF THE GRID LINES FUNCTION PROPERLY WHEN FINISHED. Curing The service coating will air-dry in approximately one (1) minute and the system can be energized after five minutes. Maximum hardness and adhesion occur after approximately 24 hours. SOLDER METHOD OF LEAD TERMINAL NOTE THE REAR WINDOW MUST BE AT A MINIMUM OF 60° F (16° C) BEFORE A REPAIR IS MADE. PLACE PROTECTIVE COVERING OVER THE PACKAGE TRAY AS NECESSARY. The new terminal will cover the original terminal location, but must be placed so that the new terminal conductive areas will be placed on a good conductive base. This area should be cleaned with steel wool or an abrasive pad to remove grime from the buss-bar. The area should then be cleaned with Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23, or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESR-M14P5-A to remove all dirt, wax, grease, oil or other foreign matter. It is important that the repair area be clean and dry and appear metallic. Depending on the buss-bar condition, rigorous polishing with steel wool may be required. Please note that the entire buss-bar may be cleaned to improve appearance. CAUTION DO NOT USE ANY TYPE OF FLAME TORCH OR FLAME HEATED SOLDERING GUN FOR THIS PROCEDURE. TESTING INDICATED INADEQUATE HEAT GENERATION AT THE TIP AND THE EXHAUST HEAT CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO PLASTIC TRIM PARTS IN THE AREA. USE ONLY AN ELECTRIC SOLDERING GUN WITH 100 WATTS OR MORE OF POWER. BEFORE USING THE SOLDERING GUN, BE SURE TO MELT A SMALL AMOUNT OF ROSIN CORE SOLDER TO THE TIP. THE SOLDER WILL ASSIST IN ACHIEVING BETTER HEAT TRANSFER FROM THE SOLDERING GUN TIP TO THE NEW TERMINAL. The new terminal has pre-applied solder, flux and temperature sensitive paint. The paint provides a visual indication when the terminal has reached the proper temperature to melt the solder on the terminal. When the proper temperature is achieved the temperature paint will liquefy and change color. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair > Page 8640 Use terminal type A (Figure 2) for all tab locations except on the Focus vehicle line. For the Focus, use type B (Figure 3). NOTE DEPENDING ON THE ORIGINAL TERMINAL LOCATION, AND WHETHER THE TERMINAL IS COVERED BY PILLAR TRIM, WILL DETERMINE WHERE TO LOCATE THE NEW TERMINAL. SOME GRID LINE BUSS-BARS MAY ONLY ALLOW THE PLACEMENT OF THE TERMINAL ABOVE OR BELOW THE ORIGINAL TAB LOCATION DUE TO SPACE LIMITATIONS, BUT FOR MOST VEHICLE APPLICATIONS THE REPLACEMENT TAB LOCATION WILL COVER THE ORIGINAL TAB LOCATION BUT STILL ALLOW THE REPLACEMENT TAB TO ATTACH TO THE BUSS-BAR ON GOOD CONDUCTIVE MATERIAL. 1. Place the replacement terminal over the original tab location making sure the conductive areas of the terminal will be on a good conductive area. Do not place the terminal tab foot on the original location which does not have conductive material (figure 4). 2. Hold the terminal in place with an item such as regular lead pencil at a 90 degree angle from the terminal. (Terminal type B can be held in place with tape.) (Holding at other than a 90 degree angle may allow the terminal to slip when the solder liquefies). 3. Place the soldering gun tip on the top of the terminal but not on the painted areas of the tab. Energize the soldering gun and watch for the painted area of the terminal to liquefy and change color. The paint should liquefy in approximately 25-45 seconds after heating. As soon as the paint color completely changes on either side of the terminal, de-energize the soldering gun and continue to hold the terminal in place with the soldering gun and pencil for an additional thirty (30) seconds. 4. Remove the soldering gun and pencil from the terminal. The terminal should be allowed to cool for another two (2) minutes before the wiring lead is attached to the terminal. 5. Attach the electrical lead connection to this terminal, turn on the rear defroster, and verify operation. Parts Block Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair > Page 8641 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 042405A Repair Grid Lines (Includes 0.7 Hr. Time To Diagnose And Recheck) 042405B Replace Terminal (Includes 0.4 Hr. Time To Diagnose And Recheck) 042405C Repair Grid Lines And 0.8 Hr. Replace Terminal (Includes Time To Diagnose And Recheck) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7042006 28 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8646 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8647 Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8648 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-19 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8653 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8654 Heated Glass Element Switch: Service and Repair REAR WINDOW DEFROST SWITCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the audio unit. 2. Push outward on the rear window defrost switch to remove it from the instrument panel center finish panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch, Passenger Side View 151-33 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch, Passenger Side > Page 8659 View 151-34 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch, Passenger Side > Page 8660 View 151-35 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8663 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Adjust Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8664 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8667 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8668 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8669 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Adjust Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8670 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8671 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Adjust Switch, Passenger Side Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8672 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8673 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH REMOVAL NOTE: The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar. 1. Remove the front door trim panel or the rear door trim panel. 2. Release the locking clips and remove the window control switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Left Front View 151-34 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Left Front > Page 8680 View 151-33 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 8683 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch, Passenger Side View 151-33 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch, Passenger Side > Page 8688 View 151-34 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch, Passenger Side > Page 8689 View 151-35 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8692 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Adjust Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8693 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8696 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8697 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8698 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Adjust Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8699 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8700 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Adjust Switch, Passenger Side Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8701 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8702 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH REMOVAL NOTE: The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar. 1. Remove the front door trim panel or the rear door trim panel. 2. Release the locking clips and remove the window control switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Glass Top Run Window Frame: Service and Repair Front Door Glass Top Run FRONT DOOR GLASS TOP RUN REMOVAL 1. Remove the front door window glass. 2. Remove the front door interior sail panel. - If equipped, disconnect the speaker electrical connector. 3. Remove the door glass top run bolts. 4. Remove the door glass top run. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Glass Top Run > Page 8707 Window Frame: Service and Repair Rear Door Glass Top Run REAR DOOR GLASS TOP RUN REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door window regulator. 2. Position the rear door window glass to the down position. 3. Remove the screws and the rear door exterior sail panel. 4. Remove the rear door interior glass weatherstrip. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Glass Top Run > Page 8708 5. Remove the rear door exterior belt line moulding. 6. Remove the rear door glass top run bolts. 7. Position the rear door window glass down and forward. 8. Remove the rear door glass top run. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair FRONT DOOR WINDOW GLASS REMOVAL 1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Remove the screw and the door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside. 4. Remove the front door interior glass weatherstrip. 5. Connect the window control switch to the door harness. 6. Connect the battery. 7. Lower the front door window glass to gain access to the screws. 8. Remove the front door window glass screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8713 9. Remove the front door window glass. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair LIFTGATE WINDOW GLASS REMOVAL 1. Open the liftgate glass. 2. Remove the two liftgate nut access covers (on each side). 3. Disconnect the rear window glass electrical harness connector. 4. Disconnect the heated window grid wire electrical connector. 5. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step. Disconnect the two liftgate window glass cylinders. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8717 1 Slide the spring retainer to the end of the socket. 2 Disconnect the socket from the ball stud. 6. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step. Remove the two liftgate window glass hinge nuts. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Transfer components as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair REAR QUARTER WINDOW GLASS Interior Auto Glass Cut-Out Knife Kit SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: To prevent glass splinters from entering the eyes or cutting hands, wear safety glasses and heavy gloves when cutting the glass from the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. Remove the headliner. 2. NOTE: - Lubricate the urethane adhesive with water to aid the special tool when cutting. - Locating tabs need to be cut through in order to remove the rear quarter window glass. The new quarter window glass will be equipped with new locating tabs. Using the special tool, cut the urethane adhesive from the quarter window glass starting at the top center and working toward the bottom corners and remove the rear quarter window glass. 3. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any foreign material or dirt from the pinch weld. INSTALLATION CAUTION: After installing the urethane installed glass, the vehicle should not be driven until the urethane adhesive has cured. The curing time at temperatures above 13°C (55°F) and relative humidity above 50% is 12-24 hours. (Refer to the Essex drive away chart for the cure times as temperatures and humidity vary.) Inadequate curing of the urethane adhesive will adversely affect the strength of the urethane bond. 1. Dry fit the quarter window glass, making alignment marks with tape or non-staining grease pencil. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8721 2. CAUTION: Do not scratch the pinch weld area. Trim the remaining urethane adhesive on the pinch weld to within the specification. The existing urethane adhesive surface should be smooth and free of cuts and contamination. 3. CAUTION: Use caution when applying Urethane Metal Primer Essex U-413. Apply a light amount of primer. Too much primer will run and damage the painted surface. Use a wool applicator to apply Urethane Medal Primer Essex U-413 meeting Ford specification WSB-M2G234-C to any exposed metal on the pinch weld. Allow 6 to 10 minutes to dry. 4. Clean the inside of the quarter glass surface with alcohol-free cleaner, making sure the ceramic coated area is clean. 5. NOTE: Wipe off the glass prep immediately after each application because it flash dries. Apply Urethane Glass Prep Essex U-401 meeting Ford specification WSB-M5B280-C twice around the glass surface to urethaned. 6. Apply Glass Primer Essex U-402 meeting Ford specification WSB-M2G314-B to the same area that was prepped in the previous step. Allow five minutes to dry. 7. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification. 8. NOTE: Use caution when applying urethane adhesive. Apply to the outside edges of locating tabs on the glass surface. Apply a bead of Urethane Adhesive Essex 400-HV meeting Ford specification WSB-M2G316-B. Start at the bottom and work around to the sides of the quarter window glass. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8722 9. Install the quarter window glass, aligning it to the marks previously made. 10. After the quarter window glass is set, check for water leaks and add urethane adhesive where needed. 11. If necessary, remove excess urethane adhesive from the outside surface of the quarter window glass. 12. Install the headliner. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair REAR DOOR WINDOW GLASS REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door glass top run. 2. Remove the rear door window glass. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair FRONT DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL All vehicles 1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Remove the screw and the front door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside. Vehicles with power windows 4. Connect the window control switch electrical connector. 5. Connect the battery. All vehicles 6. Lower the front door window glass to gain access to the screws. Vehicles with power windows 7. Disconnect the battery. 8. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector. 9. Remove the front door window glass screws. 10. Support the front door window glass in the full up position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8730 11. Disconnect the front door power window regulator motor electrical connector. 12. Remove the front door power window regulator assembly. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the nuts. Vehicles with manual windows 13. Remove the front door window regulator assembly. 1 Remove the bolts 2 Remove the nuts. INSTALLATION All vehicles 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Cycle the door window glass to make sure of correct door window glass engagement. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair REAR DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL All vehicles 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Remove the screw and the rear door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside. Vehicles with power windows 4. Connect the window control switch electrical connector. All vehicles 5. Lower the rear door window glass to gain access to the screws. Vehicles with power windows 6. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector. All vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8734 7. Remove the rear door window glass screws. 8. Support the rear door window glass in the full up position. Vehicles with power windows 9. Disconnect the rear door power window regulator electrical connector. 10. Remove the rear door power window regulator assembly. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the nuts. Vehicles with manual windows 11. Remove the rear door window regulator assembly. 1 Remove the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8735 2 Remove the nuts. INSTALLATION All vehicles 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Cycle the door glass to make sure of correct window glass engagement. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair Windshield: Service and Repair WINDSHIELD GLASS Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: To prevent glass splinters from entering the eyes or cutting hands, wear safety glasses and heavy gloves when cutting the glass from the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. Open the four A-pillar passenger assist handle covers. 2. Remove the two A-pillar passenger assist handles. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8739 1 Remove the four bolts. 2 Remove the two A-pillar passenger assist handles. 3. Remove the two windshield side garnish mouldings. 4. Remove the overhead console. 1 Open the front console door. 2 Remove the screws. 3 Remove the overhead console. If equipped, disconnect electrical connector. 5. Remove the two sun visors and two clips. 1 Remove the six screws. 2 Remove the sun visors and clips. 6. Remove the driver and passenger assist handles. 7. Remove the interior rear view mirror. 8. Lower the front portion of the headliner. 9. Remove the cowl grille. 10. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any dirt or foreign material from the pinch weld. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8740 11. NOTE: Lubricate the urethane adhesive with water to aid the special tool when cutting. Using the special tool, cut the urethane adhesive from the windshield glass starting at the top center and work toward the bottom corners. 12. Using the special tool, distance the windshield glass from the body. 13. Using the special tool, cut the remaining urethane adhesive and remove the windshield glass. 14. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any foreign material or dirt from the pinch weld. INSTALLATION CAUTION: After installing the urethane installed glass, the vehicle should not be driven until the urethane adhesive has cured. The curing times at temperatures above 13°C (55°F) and relative humidity above 50% is 12-24 hours (Refer to the Essex drive away chart for the cure times as temperatures and humidity vary). Inadequate curing of the urethane adhesive may adversely affect the strength of the urethane bond. 1. Dry fit the windshield glass, making alignment marks with tape or non-staining grease pencil. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8741 2. CAUTION: Do not scratch the pinch weld area. Trim the remaining urethane adhesive on the pinch weld to within the specification. The existing urethane adhesive surface should be smooth and free of cuts and contamination. 3. Use a wool applicator to apply Urethane Metal Primer Essex U-413 meeting Ford specification WSB-M2G234-C to any exposed metal on the pinch weld. Allow 6 to 10 minutes to dry. 4. If reinstalling the original windshield glass, remove the excess urethane adhesive and the windshield moulding. 5. Clean the inside of the windshield glass surface with an alcohol-free cleaner making sure the ceramic coated area is clean. 6. NOTE: Wipe off the glass prep immediately after each application because it flash dries. If installing a new windshield glass, apply Urethane Glass Prep Essex U-401 meeting Ford specification WSB-M5B280-C twice around the glass surface to be urethaned. 7. If installing a new windshield, apply Glass Primer Essex U-402 meeting Ford specification WSB-M2G314-B to the same area that was prepped in the pervious step. Allow five minutes to dry. 8. Apply foam dam meeting Ford specification EBS-M3G137-A to the bottom of the windshield glass. 9. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8742 10. Apply a bead of Urethane Adhesive Essex 400-HV meeting Ford specification WSB-M2G316-B to the sides and top of the windshield glass. 11. Apply a bead of Urethane Adhesive Essex 400-HV meeting Ford specification WSB-M2G316-B to the bottom of the windshield glass outside the foam dam. 12. Install the windshield glass aligning it to the marks previously made. 13. After the windshield glass is set, check for water leaks and add urethane adhesive where needed. 14. If necessary, remove excess urethane adhesive from the outside surface of the windshield glass. 15. Install the cowl grille. 16. Reposition the front portion of the headliner. 17. Install the overhead console. 1 Position the overhead console. If equipped, connect the electrical connector. 2 Install the screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8743 18. Install the two sun visors and two clips. 1 Position the sun visors and clips. 2 Install the six screws. 19. Install the interior rear view mirror. 20. Install the two windshield side garnish mouldings. 21. Install the two A-pillar passenger assist handles. 1 Position the two assist handles. 2 Install the four bolts. 3 Close the four assist handle covers. 22. Install the driver and passenger assist handles. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Application and ID Wiper Control Module: Application and ID For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic Module (GEM) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER SWITCH REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: The windshield wiper/washer switch is part of the multifunction switch assembly. Remove the steering column shroud. 2. Remove the screws. 3. Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-20 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8756 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8757 Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8758 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8759 Wiper Switch: Service and Repair WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER SWITCH REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: The windshield wiper/washer switch is part of the multifunction switch assembly. Remove the steering column shroud. 2. Remove the screws. 3. Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Windshield Washer Hose: Service and Repair WASHER HOSE REPAIR 1. Locate and verify the leaking washer hose. 2. Cut the hose cleanly and remove the damaged portion of the washer hose. 3. Install a windshield washer hose adapter between the cut ends of the hose. 4. NOTE: In difficult cases, clamping may be required. Install a segment of 6.4 mm (0.25 in) i.d. black rubber hose over the ends of the washer hose, and clamp both ends of the rubber hose using spring clamps. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations > Rear Window Washer Pump Motor View 151-16 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations > Rear Window Washer Pump Motor > Page 8767 View 151-16 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8768 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Washer Pump Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Windshield Washer Pump WINDSHIELD WASHER PUMP REMOVAL 1. Remove the RH front wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the RH front splash shield. 3. WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all cautions and warnings indicated on the label of the washer solution container. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before washer pump removal. Remove the windshield washer pump. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Disconnect the hose. 3 Remove the windshield washer pump. INSTALLATION 1. CAUTION: Do not operate the windshield washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer reservoir to prevent component damage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all cautions and warnings indicated on the label of the washer solution container. Fill the windshield washer reservoir with Ultra-Clear Windshield Washer Concentrate C9AZ-19550-AC or BC or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESR-M17P5-A. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Washer Pump > Page 8774 Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Rear Window Washer Pump REAR WINDOW WASHER PUMP REMOVAL 1. Remove the RH front wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the RH front splash shield. 3. WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all cautions and warnings indicated on the label of the washer solution container. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before washer pump removal. Remove the windshield washer pump. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Disconnect the hose. 3 Remove the windshield washer pump. INSTALLATION 1. CAUTION: Do not operate the windshield washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer reservoir. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all cautions and warnings indicated on the label of the washer solution container. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Fill the windshield washer reservoir with Ultra-Clear Windshield Washer Concentrate C9AZ-19550-AC or BC or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESR-M17P5-A. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Washer Pump > Page 8775 Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Washer Pump and Reservoir WASHER PUMP AND RESERVOIR REMOVAL 1. Remove the right front wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the right front splash shield. 3. WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all cautions and warnings indicated on the label of the washer solution container. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before removal. Position the windshield washer reservoir aside. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Position the windshield washer reservoir aside. 4. Remove the windshield washer reservoir. 1 Disconnect the electrical connectors. 2 Disconnect the hoses. 3 Remove the windshield washer reservoir. INSTALLATION 1. CAUTION: Do not operate the windshield washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer reservoir. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all cautions and warnings indicated on the label of the washer solution container. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Fill the windshield washer reservoir with Ultra-Clear Windshield Washer Concentrate C9AZ-19550-AC or BC or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESR-M17P5-A. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair WASHER PUMP AND RESERVOIR REMOVAL 1. Remove the right front wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the right front splash shield. 3. WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all cautions and warnings indicated on the label of the washer solution container. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before removal. Position the windshield washer reservoir aside. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Position the windshield washer reservoir aside. 4. Remove the windshield washer reservoir. 1 Disconnect the electrical connectors. 2 Disconnect the hoses. 3 Remove the windshield washer reservoir. INSTALLATION 1. CAUTION: Do not operate the windshield washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer reservoir. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all cautions and warnings indicated on the label of the washer solution container. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Fill the windshield washer reservoir with Ultra-Clear Windshield Washer Concentrate C9AZ-19550-AC or BC or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESR-M17P5-A. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER SWITCH REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 1. NOTE: The windshield wiper/washer switch is part of the multifunction switch assembly. Remove the steering column shroud. 2. Remove the screws. 3. Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Arm: > 03-20-1 > Oct > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor Wiper Arm: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor Article No. 03-20-1 10/13/03 ELECTRICAL - REAR WIPER ARM REMOVAL - SERVICE TIP FORD: 2001-2004 ESCAPE ISSUE Some Escape vehicles may exhibit the rear wiper arm being seized to the motor and difficult to remove. This may be caused by an insufficient amount of anti-seize compound on the arm/motor shaft splines. ACTION For vehicle service requiring the removal of the rear wiper arm, the following Service Procedure will help to free the wiper arm from the motor shaft. NOTE DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE THE WIPER ARM BY CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT WITH A HACKSAW OR GRIND TOOL. CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT WILL MAKE THE MOTOR UNUSABLE REQUIRING REPLACEMENT. IN ADDITION, DAMAGE TO THE LIFTGATE GLASS MAY OCCUR. HOWEVER IF THE REASON FOR SERVICE IS DUE TO AN INOPERABLE REAR WIPER MOTOR AND THE WIPER ARM IS SEIZED, THEN CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT IS AN ACCEPTABLE MEANS OF REMOVAL. USE CAUTION AS TO NOT DAMAGE THE VEHICLE'S PAINT, GLASS, BODY PANELS, ETC. INSTALL PROTECTIVE TAPE AND/OR AN PROTECTIVE COVERING AROUND THE LIFTGATE AREA AND BELOW REAR WIPER MOTOR. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Confirm that wiper arm is seized on motor and that the wiper arm retainer latch is in the "release" position. 2. Mark and LIGHTLY center punch the exact center of arm mount "circle" (area over motor shaft). 3. Carefully drill through wiper arm using 1/8" drill bit. Do not drill into the motor shaft. NOTE PREVENT METAL SHAVINGS FROM FALLING ONTO THE BODY OR PAINT AS DAMAGE MAY OCCUR. 4. Enlarge the drilled hole using 3/8" drill bit. 5. Apply a small amount of penetrating oil at contact area of splines for wiper arm and motor. 6. Tap on joint area lightly to create vibration and facilitate penetrating oil working into splines of arm and motor. 7. Allow the oil to sit and penetrate for several minutes. NOTE BE SURE THE WIPER ARM RETAINER CLIP IS IN THE "RELEASE" POSITION BEFORE CONTINUING WITH STEP 8. 8. Install a puller with a 5/16" or smaller center screw (e.g. Battery Clamp Puller) to the wiper arm so that jaws of puller are pulling against the arm, and center post of puller is pressing against center of wiper motor shaft. NOTE ENSURE THAT JAWS OF PULLER ARE PULLING AGAINST WIPER ARM AND NOT MOTOR SHAFT BUSHING. 9. Tighten puller in very small increments while tapping lightly on the wiper arm and center shaft of puller. With pressure applied to the wiper arm and shaft a light shock should pop arm off of motor shaft. NOTE BE CAREFUL THAT ARM & PULLER DO NOT FALL AND DAMAGE THE LIFTGATE AND/OR BUMPER. 10. When installing the new wiper arm, remove all corrosion/rust from motor splines and apply anti-seize compound to splines of arm and motor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Arm: > 03-20-1 > Oct > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor > Page 8790 NOTE IF AFTER PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE THE WIPER ARM STILL CANNOT BE REMOVED, THEN CAREFULLY CUT MOTOR SHAFT AND REPLACE MOTOR AND WIPER ARM. USE CAUTION AS TO NOT DAMAGE THE VEHICLE'S PAINT, GLASS, BODY PANELS, ETC. INSTALL PROTECTIVE TAPE AND/OR AN PROTECTIVE COVERING AROUND THE LIFTGATE AREA AND BELOW REAR WIPER MOTOR. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Arm: > 03-20-1 > Oct > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor Wiper Arm: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor Article No. 03-20-1 10/13/03 ELECTRICAL - REAR WIPER ARM REMOVAL - SERVICE TIP FORD: 2001-2004 ESCAPE ISSUE Some Escape vehicles may exhibit the rear wiper arm being seized to the motor and difficult to remove. This may be caused by an insufficient amount of anti-seize compound on the arm/motor shaft splines. ACTION For vehicle service requiring the removal of the rear wiper arm, the following Service Procedure will help to free the wiper arm from the motor shaft. NOTE DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE THE WIPER ARM BY CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT WITH A HACKSAW OR GRIND TOOL. CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT WILL MAKE THE MOTOR UNUSABLE REQUIRING REPLACEMENT. IN ADDITION, DAMAGE TO THE LIFTGATE GLASS MAY OCCUR. HOWEVER IF THE REASON FOR SERVICE IS DUE TO AN INOPERABLE REAR WIPER MOTOR AND THE WIPER ARM IS SEIZED, THEN CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT IS AN ACCEPTABLE MEANS OF REMOVAL. USE CAUTION AS TO NOT DAMAGE THE VEHICLE'S PAINT, GLASS, BODY PANELS, ETC. INSTALL PROTECTIVE TAPE AND/OR AN PROTECTIVE COVERING AROUND THE LIFTGATE AREA AND BELOW REAR WIPER MOTOR. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Confirm that wiper arm is seized on motor and that the wiper arm retainer latch is in the "release" position. 2. Mark and LIGHTLY center punch the exact center of arm mount "circle" (area over motor shaft). 3. Carefully drill through wiper arm using 1/8" drill bit. Do not drill into the motor shaft. NOTE PREVENT METAL SHAVINGS FROM FALLING ONTO THE BODY OR PAINT AS DAMAGE MAY OCCUR. 4. Enlarge the drilled hole using 3/8" drill bit. 5. Apply a small amount of penetrating oil at contact area of splines for wiper arm and motor. 6. Tap on joint area lightly to create vibration and facilitate penetrating oil working into splines of arm and motor. 7. Allow the oil to sit and penetrate for several minutes. NOTE BE SURE THE WIPER ARM RETAINER CLIP IS IN THE "RELEASE" POSITION BEFORE CONTINUING WITH STEP 8. 8. Install a puller with a 5/16" or smaller center screw (e.g. Battery Clamp Puller) to the wiper arm so that jaws of puller are pulling against the arm, and center post of puller is pressing against center of wiper motor shaft. NOTE ENSURE THAT JAWS OF PULLER ARE PULLING AGAINST WIPER ARM AND NOT MOTOR SHAFT BUSHING. 9. Tighten puller in very small increments while tapping lightly on the wiper arm and center shaft of puller. With pressure applied to the wiper arm and shaft a light shock should pop arm off of motor shaft. NOTE BE CAREFUL THAT ARM & PULLER DO NOT FALL AND DAMAGE THE LIFTGATE AND/OR BUMPER. 10. When installing the new wiper arm, remove all corrosion/rust from motor splines and apply anti-seize compound to splines of arm and motor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Arm: > 03-20-1 > Oct > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor > Page 8796 NOTE IF AFTER PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE THE WIPER ARM STILL CANNOT BE REMOVED, THEN CAREFULLY CUT MOTOR SHAFT AND REPLACE MOTOR AND WIPER ARM. USE CAUTION AS TO NOT DAMAGE THE VEHICLE'S PAINT, GLASS, BODY PANELS, ETC. INSTALL PROTECTIVE TAPE AND/OR AN PROTECTIVE COVERING AROUND THE LIFTGATE AREA AND BELOW REAR WIPER MOTOR. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Adjustments > Windshield Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment Wiper Arm: Adjustments Windshield Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADE AND PIVOT ARM ADJUSTMENT 1. Cycle and park the windshield wipers. 2. Verify that the RH and LH wiper blades are located at the specified position. 3. If not within specification, remove the windshield wiper pivot arms and reposition to the correct locations. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Adjustments > Windshield Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment > Page 8799 Wiper Arm: Adjustments Rear Window Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE AND PIVOT ARM ADJUSTMENT 1. Cycle and park the rear window wiper. 2. Verify that the rear window wiper blade is located at the specified position. 3. If not within specification, remove the rear window wiper pivot arm and reposition to the correct location. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Front WIPER PIVOT ARM - FRONT REMOVAL 1. Remove the pivot arm nut. 2. Remove the windshield wiper pivot arm. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Adjust the windshield wiper pivot arms. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 8802 Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Rear WIPER PIVOT ARM - REAR REMOVAL 1. Remove the pivot arm. 1 Lift pivot arm to the upright position. 2 Slide the locking tab out. 3 Pull up and remove the pivot arm. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Adjust the windshield wiper pivot arm. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Adjustments > Windshield Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment Wiper Blade: Adjustments Windshield Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADE AND PIVOT ARM ADJUSTMENT 1. Cycle and park the windshield wipers. 2. Verify that the RH and LH wiper blades are located at the specified position. 3. If not within specification, remove the windshield wiper pivot arms and reposition to the correct locations. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Adjustments > Windshield Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment > Page 8807 Wiper Blade: Adjustments Rear Window Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE AND PIVOT ARM ADJUSTMENT 1. Cycle and park the rear window wiper. 2. Verify that the rear window wiper blade is located at the specified position. 3. If not within specification, remove the rear window wiper pivot arm and reposition to the correct location. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Application and ID Wiper Control Module: Application and ID For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic Module (GEM) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Motor: > 03-20-1 > Oct > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor Wiper Motor: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor Article No. 03-20-1 10/13/03 ELECTRICAL - REAR WIPER ARM REMOVAL - SERVICE TIP FORD: 2001-2004 ESCAPE ISSUE Some Escape vehicles may exhibit the rear wiper arm being seized to the motor and difficult to remove. This may be caused by an insufficient amount of anti-seize compound on the arm/motor shaft splines. ACTION For vehicle service requiring the removal of the rear wiper arm, the following Service Procedure will help to free the wiper arm from the motor shaft. NOTE DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE THE WIPER ARM BY CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT WITH A HACKSAW OR GRIND TOOL. CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT WILL MAKE THE MOTOR UNUSABLE REQUIRING REPLACEMENT. IN ADDITION, DAMAGE TO THE LIFTGATE GLASS MAY OCCUR. HOWEVER IF THE REASON FOR SERVICE IS DUE TO AN INOPERABLE REAR WIPER MOTOR AND THE WIPER ARM IS SEIZED, THEN CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT IS AN ACCEPTABLE MEANS OF REMOVAL. USE CAUTION AS TO NOT DAMAGE THE VEHICLE'S PAINT, GLASS, BODY PANELS, ETC. INSTALL PROTECTIVE TAPE AND/OR AN PROTECTIVE COVERING AROUND THE LIFTGATE AREA AND BELOW REAR WIPER MOTOR. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Confirm that wiper arm is seized on motor and that the wiper arm retainer latch is in the "release" position. 2. Mark and LIGHTLY center punch the exact center of arm mount "circle" (area over motor shaft). 3. Carefully drill through wiper arm using 1/8" drill bit. Do not drill into the motor shaft. NOTE PREVENT METAL SHAVINGS FROM FALLING ONTO THE BODY OR PAINT AS DAMAGE MAY OCCUR. 4. Enlarge the drilled hole using 3/8" drill bit. 5. Apply a small amount of penetrating oil at contact area of splines for wiper arm and motor. 6. Tap on joint area lightly to create vibration and facilitate penetrating oil working into splines of arm and motor. 7. Allow the oil to sit and penetrate for several minutes. NOTE BE SURE THE WIPER ARM RETAINER CLIP IS IN THE "RELEASE" POSITION BEFORE CONTINUING WITH STEP 8. 8. Install a puller with a 5/16" or smaller center screw (e.g. Battery Clamp Puller) to the wiper arm so that jaws of puller are pulling against the arm, and center post of puller is pressing against center of wiper motor shaft. NOTE ENSURE THAT JAWS OF PULLER ARE PULLING AGAINST WIPER ARM AND NOT MOTOR SHAFT BUSHING. 9. Tighten puller in very small increments while tapping lightly on the wiper arm and center shaft of puller. With pressure applied to the wiper arm and shaft a light shock should pop arm off of motor shaft. NOTE BE CAREFUL THAT ARM & PULLER DO NOT FALL AND DAMAGE THE LIFTGATE AND/OR BUMPER. 10. When installing the new wiper arm, remove all corrosion/rust from motor splines and apply anti-seize compound to splines of arm and motor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Motor: > 03-20-1 > Oct > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor > Page 8819 NOTE IF AFTER PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE THE WIPER ARM STILL CANNOT BE REMOVED, THEN CAREFULLY CUT MOTOR SHAFT AND REPLACE MOTOR AND WIPER ARM. USE CAUTION AS TO NOT DAMAGE THE VEHICLE'S PAINT, GLASS, BODY PANELS, ETC. INSTALL PROTECTIVE TAPE AND/OR AN PROTECTIVE COVERING AROUND THE LIFTGATE AREA AND BELOW REAR WIPER MOTOR. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > 03-20-1 > Oct > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor Wiper Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor Article No. 03-20-1 10/13/03 ELECTRICAL - REAR WIPER ARM REMOVAL - SERVICE TIP FORD: 2001-2004 ESCAPE ISSUE Some Escape vehicles may exhibit the rear wiper arm being seized to the motor and difficult to remove. This may be caused by an insufficient amount of anti-seize compound on the arm/motor shaft splines. ACTION For vehicle service requiring the removal of the rear wiper arm, the following Service Procedure will help to free the wiper arm from the motor shaft. NOTE DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE THE WIPER ARM BY CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT WITH A HACKSAW OR GRIND TOOL. CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT WILL MAKE THE MOTOR UNUSABLE REQUIRING REPLACEMENT. IN ADDITION, DAMAGE TO THE LIFTGATE GLASS MAY OCCUR. HOWEVER IF THE REASON FOR SERVICE IS DUE TO AN INOPERABLE REAR WIPER MOTOR AND THE WIPER ARM IS SEIZED, THEN CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT IS AN ACCEPTABLE MEANS OF REMOVAL. USE CAUTION AS TO NOT DAMAGE THE VEHICLE'S PAINT, GLASS, BODY PANELS, ETC. INSTALL PROTECTIVE TAPE AND/OR AN PROTECTIVE COVERING AROUND THE LIFTGATE AREA AND BELOW REAR WIPER MOTOR. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Confirm that wiper arm is seized on motor and that the wiper arm retainer latch is in the "release" position. 2. Mark and LIGHTLY center punch the exact center of arm mount "circle" (area over motor shaft). 3. Carefully drill through wiper arm using 1/8" drill bit. Do not drill into the motor shaft. NOTE PREVENT METAL SHAVINGS FROM FALLING ONTO THE BODY OR PAINT AS DAMAGE MAY OCCUR. 4. Enlarge the drilled hole using 3/8" drill bit. 5. Apply a small amount of penetrating oil at contact area of splines for wiper arm and motor. 6. Tap on joint area lightly to create vibration and facilitate penetrating oil working into splines of arm and motor. 7. Allow the oil to sit and penetrate for several minutes. NOTE BE SURE THE WIPER ARM RETAINER CLIP IS IN THE "RELEASE" POSITION BEFORE CONTINUING WITH STEP 8. 8. Install a puller with a 5/16" or smaller center screw (e.g. Battery Clamp Puller) to the wiper arm so that jaws of puller are pulling against the arm, and center post of puller is pressing against center of wiper motor shaft. NOTE ENSURE THAT JAWS OF PULLER ARE PULLING AGAINST WIPER ARM AND NOT MOTOR SHAFT BUSHING. 9. Tighten puller in very small increments while tapping lightly on the wiper arm and center shaft of puller. With pressure applied to the wiper arm and shaft a light shock should pop arm off of motor shaft. NOTE BE CAREFUL THAT ARM & PULLER DO NOT FALL AND DAMAGE THE LIFTGATE AND/OR BUMPER. 10. When installing the new wiper arm, remove all corrosion/rust from motor splines and apply anti-seize compound to splines of arm and motor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > 03-20-1 > Oct > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor > Page 8825 NOTE IF AFTER PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE THE WIPER ARM STILL CANNOT BE REMOVED, THEN CAREFULLY CUT MOTOR SHAFT AND REPLACE MOTOR AND WIPER ARM. USE CAUTION AS TO NOT DAMAGE THE VEHICLE'S PAINT, GLASS, BODY PANELS, ETC. INSTALL PROTECTIVE TAPE AND/OR AN PROTECTIVE COVERING AROUND THE LIFTGATE AREA AND BELOW REAR WIPER MOTOR. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8826 View 151-14 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views Wiper Motor: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8829 Wiper Motor: Testing and Inspection WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR Use an Alternator, Regulator, Battery and Starter Tester (ARBST) to test the wiper motor on the vehicle. To test the wiper motor, disconnect the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft from the windshield wiper motor; refer to Wiper Pivot Arm-Front or Wiper Pivot Arm-Rear. Disconnect the wiper motor. Connect the (1) green lead from (2) Alternator, Regulator, Battery and Starter Tester (ARBST) to the battery negative (-) post. Connect the (3) red lead from ARBST to the wiper motor (4) common brush terminal (terminal 3). Test the low-speed mode by connecting a (5) cable from the battery positive (+) post to the (6) low-speed brush terminal (terminal 4) and measure the current draw. If the current draw is greater than 3.5 amperes, install a new windshield wiper motor. Test the high-speed mode by connecting a cable from the battery positive (+) post to the (7) high-speed brush terminal (terminal 5) and measure the current draw. If the current draw is greater than 5.5 amperes, install a new wiper motor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Wiper Motor Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Windshield Wiper Motor WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR REMOVAL 1. Remove the cowl top vent panels. 2. Remove the wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolts. 3 Remove the wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft. 3. Remove the windshield wiper motor. 1 Remove the bolt and windshield wiper motor linkage. 2 Remove the windshield wiper motor mounting bolts. 3 Remove the windshield wiper motor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Wiper Motor > Page 8832 Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Rear Window Wiper Motor REAR WINDOW WIPER MOTOR REMOVAL 1. Remove the pivot arm. 1 Lift pivot arm to the upright position. 2 Slide the locking tab out. 3 Pull up and remove the pivot arm. 2. Remove the rear wiper motor shaft nut cover. 3. Remove the rear wiper motor shaft nut. 4. Open the liftgate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Wiper Motor > Page 8833 5. Remove the rear wiper motor plastic cover. 6. Remove rear wiper motor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the nut. 3 Remove the bolt. 4 Remove the rear wiper motor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Service and Repair Wiper Motor Linkage: Service and Repair WIPER MOUNTING ARM AND PIVOT SHAFT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 1. Refer to Windshield Wiper Motor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-20 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8840 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8841 Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8842